JP7493287B1 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine capable of improving performance. [Solution] The gaming machine includes a first operation unit connected to a first board via a first harness and having a first operation part and a second operation part, and when the first harness is in a connected state while the first operation part is being operated, a first process may be executed, when the first harness is in a connected state while the second operation part is being operated, a second process may be executed, when the first harness is in a connected state while both the first operation part and the second operation part are being operated, only the first process out of the first process and the second process may be executed, when the first operation part is operated, the volume may change in a first direction, and when the second operation part is operated, the volume may change in a second direction. [Selected Figure] Fig. 194

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines (pachinko machines), reel gaming machines (slot machines), enclosed gaming machines, or medal-less slot machines.

Conventionally, a slot machine is known as one type of gaming machine (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-296354 A

There is a demand for improved performance in this type of gaming machine.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve performance.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine including a first board and a first operation unit connected to the first board via a first harness, the first operation unit having at least a first operation section , a second operation section and a third operation section , a first process may be executed by operation of the first operation section, a second process may be executed by operation of the second operation section, a third process may be executed by operation of the third operation section, the first process may be executed when the first harness changes from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operation section is being operated, the second process may be executed when the first harness changes from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation section is being operated, and the third process may be executed when the first harness changes from a non-connected state to a connected state while the third operation section is being operated, This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the first harness changes from a non-connected state to a connected state while at least one operation unit and the second operation unit are operated, only the first process of the first process and the second process may be executed; when the first operation unit is operated, the volume may change in a first direction; when the second operation unit is operated, the volume may change in a second direction ; when the first harness changes from a non-connected state to a connected state while at least one operation unit and the third operation unit are operated, only the first process of the first process and the third process may be executed; and after a certain display indicating a minimum volume or a maximum volume is displayed, if the first harness changes from a non-connected state to a connected state while at least the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated, the certain display may be displayed .

The gaming machine of the present invention can improve performance.

1 is a perspective view of the appearance of a slot machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a winning line. FIG. 4 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. 1 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel laid out in a plane. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the types of winning roles (including activated roles), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning role, and the payouts for each winning role. 1 is a transition diagram of the gaming state (RT) of the slot machine 100. FIG. A diagram showing the transition of the game state regarding advantageous and non-advantageous zones of the slot machine 100. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing of a main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by CPU 404 of first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of first sub-control unit 400. (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing examples of notifications in chronological order when a first operation instruction notification is made in a certain game. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing examples of notifications in a time series when a second operation instruction notification is made in a certain game. 1A is a front view of the slot machine 100 in a state where a setting key is turned from OFF to ON while the power is OFF, FIG. 1B is a front view showing an example where a first notification is executed in a first state, and FIG. 1C is a front view showing an example where a second notification is executed in a second state. 1A is a diagram showing a first example of a setting change operation in time series, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a second example of a setting change operation in time series. 13A is a diagram showing a time series of a setting change operation example 3. FIG.13B is a diagram showing a time series of a setting change operation example 4. 1 is a perspective view of the appearance of a slot machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a line. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of a slot machine 100. 7 is a perspective view showing a configuration of a reel unit 700. FIG. 7A is a perspective view showing the structure of a backlight module 740 , and FIG. 7B is a front view of the backlight module 740 . FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of selection of a setting value using a first selection switch 190 and a second selection switch 194. FIG. 2 shows a circuit block diagram of a control unit. 3A and 3B are diagrams illustrating examples of connections between each board and each unit. This is a diagram showing the state in which the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in a power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is being manually spun. 19. FIG. 20A is a perspective view of the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 19 viewed obliquely from above, and FIG. 20B is a view showing a state in which a hopper disk 182 is being manually rotated. 26 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 25 and the hopper unit 180 and the reel unit 700 also shown in FIG. 25. (a) is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine of the second embodiment, (b) is a side view showing typically the field of view of a person H1 in a standing position, and (c) is a side view showing typically the field of view of a person H2 in a sitting position. FIG. 11 is a plan view showing the inside of a slot machine according to a second embodiment. 26 is a diagram showing a modified example of the connection example between each board and each unit shown in FIG. 25. 13 is a diagram showing a specific example of a protection circuit provided between a reel motor driving IC 322i and a 24V power supply line. 1 is a perspective view of the appearance of a slot machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a line. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of a slot machine 100. A diagram for explaining the medal selector 170. (a) is a table showing the display order of the setting values displayed on the setting value display 293, (b) is a table summarizing the differences in performance for each setting value, and (c) to (f) are figures showing examples of setting-related notifications (setting suggestion notifications, setting confirmation notifications). FIG. 4 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing of a main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. 40 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit initial setting processing (step S101) in FIG. 39. 42 is a flowchart showing the process flow of setting change processing (step S1013) in FIG. 41. (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by CPU 404 of first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of first sub-control unit 400. (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. 13 is a table summarizing the procedure for setting to setting b by changing the setting and the states of related components. 46 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the state of components at each stage from (a) to (f) in FIG. 45. (a) is a table summarizing the state of the related components when the front door 102 is repeatedly opened and closed with the setting value set to setting b, and (b) is a table summarizing the state of the related components when the settlement operation is performed immediately after the third stop with the setting value set to setting b. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the components in each stage of FIG. 47 . (a) is a table summarizing the state of the relevant components when a setting check is performed when the device is set to the default setting value, Setting 1, and (b) is a table summarizing the state of the relevant components when a setting check is performed in power saving mode when the device is set to Setting 1. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the components in each stage of FIG. 49 . (a) is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when a setting check is performed when the device is set to setting b, and (b) is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when a setting check is performed in power saving mode when the device is set to setting b. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the state of the components at each stage of FIG. 51 . (a) is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state in the slot machine in this modified example, (b) is a diagram for explaining some of the roles that are the subject of role drawing in RT1 and the high and low probability of winning, and (c) is a diagram for explaining some of the roles that are the subject of role drawing in RT2 and the high and low probability of winning. A diagram showing an example of payout rates for RT1 and RT2. 13 is a table summarizing the states of related components when a first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed after the settings have been changed. This is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the reels are spun before closing the front door 102 after changing the settings, and the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed while the reels are spinning. This table summarizes the states of the relevant components when the reels are spun before closing the front door 102 after a setting change, a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, and the front door 102 is closed while the reels are spinning after power is restored. This is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the front door 102 is closed while the inserted medals are being settled and paid out before the front door 102 is closed after the settings are changed. This table summarizes the status of the relevant components when a power outage occurs and is restored while inserted medals are being settled and paid out before the front door 102 is closed after a setting change, and the front door 102 is closed during the payout after power is restored. 11 is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the front door 102 is closed during setting confirmation after a setting change. This is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the front door 102 is closed after the setting is changed and the game is transitioned to the second game state. This table summarizes the states of the relevant components when a single setting confirmation is performed, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, and the inserted medals are settled. This table summarizes the states of the relevant components when a single setting check is performed, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, and one game is played. 13 is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the setting value display 293 displays a setting value even when the setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state. This table summarizes the states of the relevant components when a setting confirmation is performed once, a medal is inserted while the front door 102 is in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the inserted medal is settled. This is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when a setting check is performed once, a medal is inserted while the front door 102 is in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and play is performed. 1 is a rear view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied; 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 4 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. 3A and 3B are diagrams illustrating examples of connections between each board and each unit. This figure shows an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in Figure 70 and the reel unit 109 also shown in Figure 70. FIG. 69 is a configuration diagram of a gaming system including the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 68. This is a table summarizing gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information. A diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control status command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350. A diagram showing details of the communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700. 13A is a diagram showing details of hole control and fraud monitoring information, and FIG. 13B is a list of error codes. 13 is a table showing game control state commands. 13 is a table showing medal count control state commands. A diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350. 13A is a diagram showing details of the game control priority command, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing details of the response command returned from the medal count control unit 350 to the game control unit 302. FIG. A diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command 2 is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of a game control unit. 83 is a flowchart of the medal insertion/start lever acceptance process (step S102) in FIG. 82. This is a flowchart of the processing during medal insertion (step S1011) in Figure 83. 85 is a flowchart of the settlement button processing (step S1102) in FIG. 84. This is a flowchart of the process of sending variable information to the medal count control unit (steps S1111, S1205, and S1605) in Figures 84, 85, and 89. 87 is a flowchart of triple command transmission processing (step S1307) in FIG. 86. A flowchart of the process of sending a priority command to the medal count control unit (steps S1014, S1403, S1406, and S1409) in Figures 83 and 87. 83 is a flowchart of the medal awarding process (step S109) in FIG. 82. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a game control unit timer interrupt process. 91 is a flowchart of a disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in FIG. 90. 91 is a flowchart of the medal count control command receiving process (step S206) in FIG. 90. 91 is a flowchart of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in FIG. 90. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a medal count control unit main process. 95 is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in FIG. 94. 11 is a table showing a target range of a RAM clear process. 96 is a flowchart of the error request setting process (step S3022) in FIG. 95 etc. 95 is a flowchart of the preparation process (step S303) in FIG. 94. A flowchart of the gaming machine information notification sending process (step S304) in Figure 94. A flowchart of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in Figure 99. 95 is a flowchart of the counting notification sending process (step S305) in FIG. 94. 95 is a flowchart of the lending notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in FIG. 94. 95 is a flowchart of the loan acceptance result response sending process (step S308) in FIG. 94. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of medal count control unit timer interrupt processing. 105 is a flowchart of the lending notification receiving process (step S404) in FIG. 104. 106 is a flowchart of the lending number determination process (step S4004) in FIG. 105. 105 is a flowchart of the process of updating the number of sheets to be counted (step S405) in FIG. 104. 105 is a flowchart of the game control unit command receiving process (step S406) in FIG. 104. This is a flowchart of the game control state command receiving processing (step S4304) in Figure 108. This is a flowchart (first half) of the game control priority command receiving processing (step S4305) in Figure 108. This is the flowchart (second half) of the game control priority command receiving processing (step S4305) in Figure 108. 112 is a flowchart of the input command receiving process (step S4517) in FIG. 111. 112 is a flowchart of the settlement command receiving process (step S4519) in FIG. 111. 112 is a flowchart of the start lever acceptance command receiving process (step S4521) in FIG. 111. This is a flowchart of the game information setting process (steps S4806, S4A19) in Figures 114 and 116. This is a flowchart of the payout command receiving process (step S4523) in Figure 111. This is a flowchart of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in Figure 116. 112 is a flowchart of the error occurrence command receiving process (step S4524) in FIG. 111. 105 is a flowchart of the error monitoring process (step S407) in FIG. 104. This is a flowchart of the process of sending a medal count control command to the game control unit (step S408) in Figure 104. 105 is a flowchart of the display device display process (step S409) in FIG. 104. A flowchart showing a modified example of the processing during medal insertion in Figure 84. 88 is a flowchart showing a variation of the triple command transmission process of FIG. 87. 113 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the input command receiving process of FIG. 112. 108 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the planned count number update process of FIG. 107. 108 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the planned count number update process of FIG. 107. (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by CPU 404 of first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of first sub-control unit 400, (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of first sub-control unit 400, and (d) is a flowchart of command processing (step S307) in (a). (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a first example in which the count button 171 is operated. 13 is a timing chart showing a first example of a presentation when counting is being performed. 13 is a timing chart showing an example in which a bet operation has been performed before the operation of the count button 171 and the bet amount is not 0. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a counting end presentation. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the settlement button 134 is operated. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example in which the number of counted sheets increases as the operation time of the count button 171 becomes longer. 134(c) , and FIG. 134(b) is a timing chart showing an example of a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 134(c) in which a power outage occurs when the planned number of sheets to be counted is set to 30 sheets, and then power is restored. 127 is a timing chart showing an example in which the expected count number update process of FIG. 126 is adopted. (a) is a timing chart showing an example in which automatic counting ends when the value of the “number of game medals” stored in RAM 358 reaches a certain value, and (b) is a timing chart showing an example in which power is interrupted during automatic counting and then restored. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display indicating that automatic counting is in progress. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a sound output indicating that automatic counting is in progress. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power interruption occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time for a long press operation, has elapsed after the operation of the counting button 171 is started. 141 is a timing chart showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 140. 141 is a timing chart showing another modified example of the example shown in FIG. 140. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a change display (subtraction) on the game medal count display device 170, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a change display (addition) on the game medal count display device 170. FIG. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing other examples of change display in the game medal count display device 170. This figure shows an example in which the "game medal count" stored in RAM 358 is displayed not only on the game medal count display device 170 but also on the performance image display device 157. FIG. 146 shows a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 145. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing another example that is completely different from the example shown in FIG. 145. 13A is a timing chart showing a case where a payout is attempted that exceeds the payout threshold, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing another example of an upper limit exceeding error notification. 13A is a timing chart showing a case where a payout is about to be made when the second payout threshold value is exceeded, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing another example of a notification that the upper limit is approaching. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example in which a notification urging a count overlaps with a highly urgent error notification. 13A shows an example in which the notification prompting counting continues even after switching to a demonstration display, and FIG. 13B shows an example of the notification after the count button 171 is operated during the demonstration. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a notification when the "number of game medals" exceeds a certain specified number, such as a payout threshold or a second payout threshold, and then falls below that specified number, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a notification that prompts counting when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold over multiple games. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a notification encouraging counting each time the "number of game medals" increases by a specified number, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a case where the counting button 171 is operated in a state advantageous to the player, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a case where the counting button 171 is operated in a state disadvantageous to the player. FIG. 153(a) shows a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 153(b), FIG. 153(b) shows an example in which counting that was forcibly terminated is restarted, and FIG. 153(c) shows an example of the modified example described using (a) and (b) when the player is in a disadvantageous state (e.g., a normal state). This is a timing chart showing an example of when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a second modified example in which the operation differs depending on whether the “number of game medals” is less than a certain threshold value. A timing chart showing another example of when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off. A diagram showing the change in the number of game medals when the count button 171 is pressed and held. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed according to the number of game medals. A figure showing an example of a presentation executed depending on the number of medals acquired in the AT state. A figure showing an example of the operation when an overflow of the number of game medals occurs. A diagram showing an example of operation when a medal count control wire break error (error code E0) occurs. This figure shows an example of the operation that occurs when an error in which the number of game medals exceeds the upper limit and an error in which the number of medals control is broken (error code E0) occur simultaneously. A diagram showing an example of operation when a medal count control unit disconnection error occurs. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation in which, when a counting sound is output in response to a counting process, an output permission period for the sound is provided. A diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 during the operation of Figure 165 (a). A diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 during the operation of Figure 165 (b). (a) is a diagram showing an example of an update condition of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means). (b) is a diagram showing an example of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means), and various processes that refer to these counting means. 13 is a time-series diagram showing an example of counting by a difference number counter (first counting means) and a virtual difference number counter (second counting means). FIG. 13 is a graph showing an example of the change in the difference in number of coins during a certain gaming period. A figure showing an example of various presentations during a certain gaming period shown in Figure 171. A figure showing an example of various presentations during a certain gaming period shown in Figure 171. 13 is a graph showing an example of the change in the difference in number of coins during a certain gaming period. A figure showing an example of various presentations during a certain gaming period shown in Figure 173. A figure showing an example of various presentations during a certain gaming period shown in Figure 173. (a) A diagram showing an example of a complete function advance notification. (b) A diagram showing an example of a complete upper limit reaching notification. (c) A diagram showing an example of a game value display upper limit reaching advance notification. (d) A diagram showing an example of a game value display upper limit reaching notification. 13 is a graph showing an example of the change in the difference in number of coins during a certain gaming period. This figure shows an example of various presentations and notifications during a certain game period shown in Figure 177. This figure shows an example of various presentations and notifications during a certain game period shown in Figure 177. This figure shows an example of various presentations and notifications during a certain game period shown in Figure 177. This figure shows modified examples of various presentations and notifications during a certain game period shown in Figure 177. This figure shows modified examples of various presentations and notifications during a certain game period shown in Figure 177. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation by the shutter 163. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of position correction by the shutter 163 during execution of a complete function advance notification. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of position correction by the shutter 163 during execution of a complete upper limit reaching notification. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing of a main control unit. 187 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in FIG. 186. 187 is a flowchart showing the process of completing the function (step S119) in FIG. 186. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a connection of circuit boards inside a gaming machine. 13A is a diagram showing the flow of operations when the harness is normally connected, and FIGS. 13B and 13C are diagrams showing an example of operations when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected. FIG. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1, the stop button unit harness HA2, and the bet button unit harness HA3 are each unplugged. FIG. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation when the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected and reconnected. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating an example of wiring of the menu button unit. A diagram showing an example of the operation when a harness connecting a main control board and a sub-control board is disconnected and reconnected. 1 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. FIG. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the side. 1 is an enlarged schematic cross-sectional view of a sub-substrate case 500a and a main substrate case 300a. 1 is a diagram showing an example of air flow inside the slot machine 100. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an example of air flow inside the slot machine 100. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the flow of air from a cooling fan 950 when the front door 102 is open. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a diagram showing the relationship between the display area of the symbol display window and the winning line of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel of the slot machine of this embodiment, with a surface expansion, and a diagram showing the relationship between the symbol number counter and the symbol interval counter; and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the types of winning roles (including activated roles), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning role, and the activation or payout of each winning role. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of a reel rotation device of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a reel drive unit that constitutes a reel rotation device of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 1A and 1B are a schematic side view and a schematic front view showing an assembled state of a reel drive unit of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a stepping motor used in a reel of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. A diagram showing the magnetic pole arrangement of the stator of the stepping motor shown in Figure 209. 4 is a table showing the contents of an excitation table for exciting the stepping motor according to the present embodiment. 4 is a table showing the contents of a rotation control table according to the present embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of a main control unit of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. 214 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the internal lottery process for the winning symbol in step S103 shown in FIG. 213. 214 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the reel spin start processing of step S105 shown in FIG. 213. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. 217 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the stop button display control processing of step S207 shown in FIG. 216. 217 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the reel rotation control processing of step S208 shown in FIG. 216. 219 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the reel control determination process of step S208g shown in FIG. 218. 220 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the acceleration control processing in step S306 shown in FIG. 219. 220 is a flowchart showing in detail the first constant speed control process of step S308 shown in FIG. 219. 220 is a flowchart showing in detail the second constant speed control process of step S310 shown in FIG. 219. 219 is a flowchart showing in detail the stop button acceptance process of step S208d shown in FIG. 218. 224 is a flowchart showing in detail the pull-in counter setting process of step S208d5 shown in FIG. 223. 220 is a flowchart showing in detail the pull-in control process of step S313 shown in FIG. 219. 220 is a flowchart showing in detail the brake control processing of step S312 shown in FIG. 219. (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit main processing of the slot machine of this embodiment, (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit command input processing, (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and (d) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. This is a timing chart showing the changes in the states of three reels, the changes in the detection state of the light-shielding pieces provided on each reel by the index sensor, the changes in the operation-accepting state of the stop buttons corresponding to each reel, and the changes in the light emission mode of the light-emitting elements built into each stop button in a conventional manner. This is a timing chart showing the changes in the state of each reel 110 to 112, the changes in the detection state of each light-shielding piece, the changes in the operation-accepting state of each stop button 137 to 139, and the changes in the light emission mode of each stop button LED 137a to 139a in this embodiment. 13 is a timing chart showing a case where a step-out occurs on the spinning right reel in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. 13 is a timing chart showing a case where a step-out occurs in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment and the stop button is operated before re-acceleration. 13 is a timing chart showing a case where a power interruption and restoration occurs during execution of the second constant speed control in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. 13 is a timing chart in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment when the operation of the stop button is accepted before the stop button LED changes to the second light emission mode. 13 is a timing chart showing a case where the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment stops the reels in the shortest number of frames after detecting a light-blocking piece. A diagram showing the state of the left reel at each timing. 13 is a timing chart when an effect related to the reels is performed by the effect device in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. A figure showing an example of a first performance in the performance device. This is a timing chart for a case where slide push operations are performed on the three stop buttons 137 to 139 in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, but only some of the operations are accepted. This is a timing chart in the case where all slide push operations performed on the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are accepted in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. 13 is a timing chart showing a case where a pseudo game is played and then a main game is played in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. 13 is a timing chart showing a case where a reel action is performed and then a main game is played in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. This is a diagram showing the relative positional relationship of the symbols that make up a specific symbol combination, with the symbol display window 113 as a reference. This is a timing chart for the case where three stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed simultaneously in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, but only some of the operations are accepted. This is a timing chart in the case where the simultaneous pressing of the three stop buttons 137 to 139 is all accepted in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. 13 is a timing chart showing a case where simultaneous presses are performed during a simulated game in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment. This is a timing chart in which notification timing by the notification means and the like are added to the timing chart shown in FIG. 239. Like the timing chart shown in FIG. 246, this is a timing chart showing an example of a case where retraction control is performed as a result of performing a slide push operation on the three stop buttons 137 to 139 in order. This is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a reverse slide push operation is performed before the light-blocking piece of the left reel 110 is detected. 13 is a timing chart showing an example in which only the right reel 112 of the three reels 110 to 112 automatically stops. This is a timing chart showing an example of a case where detection of the light-blocking piece on the right reel 112 is delayed and a sequential slide push operation is performed before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light-emitting state, resulting in retraction control being performed. This is a timing chart showing an example of a case where detection of the light-blocking piece of the middle reel 111 is delayed and a sequential slide push operation is performed before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light-emitting state, resulting in retraction control being performed. This is a timing chart showing an example of a case where detection of the light-blocking piece on the left reel 110 is delayed and a sequential slide push operation is performed before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light-emitting state, resulting in retraction control being performed. This is a timing chart when sequential slide push operations are performed in a pseudo game and a main game that is started following the pseudo game. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where retraction control is performed as a result of performing a forward slide push operation in a pseudo game. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a reverse slide push operation is performed before the light-shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected in a pseudo game. 13 is a timing chart showing an example in which only the right reel 112 of the three reels 110 to 112 automatically comes to a pseudo stop. This is a timing chart showing an example of a case in which detection of the light-shielding piece on the right reel 112 in a simulated game is delayed, and a sequential slide push operation is performed before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light-emitting state, resulting in retraction control being performed. This is a timing chart showing an example of a case in which detection of the light-shielding piece of the middle reel 111 in a simulated game is delayed, and a sequential slide push operation is performed before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light-emitting state, resulting in retraction control being performed. This is a timing chart showing an example of a case in which detection of the light-shielding piece on the left reel 110 in a simulated game is delayed, and a sequential slide push operation is performed before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light-emitting state, resulting in retraction control being performed. 13 is a timing chart showing an example in which the left stop button 137 and the center stop button 138 are pressed simultaneously immediately before a predetermined third period elapses in a pseudo game. 1 is a side view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 in a closed state. 1A is a diagram showing the lock body 1401A from the side of the slot machine 100 when the lock mechanism 1401 is in an unlocked state, FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the lock body 1401A in FIG. 1A from the rear side of the slot machine 100, and FIG. 1C is a diagram showing the lock body 1401A from the side of the slot machine 100 when the lock mechanism 1401 is in a locked state. 14(a) to 14(d) are diagrams showing the operation of the lock main body 1401A and the locked shaft 1401B. 1A is a side view showing the setting key SK inserted into the lock body 1401A, FIG. 1B is a side view showing the setting key SK in FIG. 1A in solid lines, FIG. 1C is a rear view of the lock body 1401A in FIG. 1A, FIG. 1D is a diagram showing a state in which the engaged shaft 1401B cannot enter along the entry path 1404ER, and FIG. 1E is a diagram showing a state in which the engaged shaft 1401B cannot enter along the entry path 1404ER. 1A to 1D are diagrams showing an example of the positional relationship between a wiring pattern on a substrate and a sticker attached to the substrate. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing an example of the positional relationship between a wiring pattern on a substrate and a sticker attached to the substrate. 265(a) is a diagram showing an example in which silk-screen printing SP indicating the attachment positions of the four corners of a sticker is applied to the configuration of FIG. 265(c), and FIG. 265(b) is a diagram showing an example in which silk-screen printing SP indicating the attachment positions of the two corners, the upper right and lower left, of a sticker is applied to the configuration of FIG. 265(c). 1A is a diagram showing an example in which a sticker ST1 (facing upward) affixed to a substrate A and a sticker ST2 (facing right) affixed to a substrate B are different in relation to the reference direction, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example in which a sticker ST1 (facing upward) affixed to a substrate A and a sticker ST3 (facing downward) affixed to the case of the substrate A are different in relation to the reference direction. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a power supply module PM. 1A is a view of the bottom surface BT from below, FIG. 1B is a view showing a cross section along line A-A in FIG. 1A, and FIG. 1C is a view showing a cross section along line B-B in FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the configuration of a board and a board case, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a configuration in which a crimp CL is provided in an unmounted land area NA. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the flow of operations in a normal game. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation according to a time lapse from a lever operation. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of an operation when an abnormality occurs in the reel after a lever operation. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of an operation when an abnormality occurs in the reel after a lever operation 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit after a lever operation. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit after a lever operation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when a reel effect is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a simulated game is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a simulated game is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a power outage occurs and is restored during play. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an operational flow when an abnormality occurs while a game is not being played. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an operational flow when an abnormality occurs while a game is not being played. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control board 500B corresponding to the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100. A diagram showing a first substrate CB1.

Below, we will explain a slot machine according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention. Note that the configurations of the various embodiments in this specification can be freely combined as long as they are not inconsistent.

The slot machine of this embodiment, which will be described below, is a gaming machine in which a predetermined amount of gaming value (medals, electronic medals, etc.) is inserted, and multiple reels, each decorated with multiple types of symbols, begin to spin when a predetermined operation to start spin is received, and whether or not multiple types of internal winning combinations have been won is determined by lottery based on the reception of the operation to start spin, and each of the multiple reels stops spinning individually when a predetermined operation to stop spin is received, and if the conditions determined by the combination of symbols when the multiple reels stop based on the results of the lottery match the predetermined payout conditions, the gaming value is paid out and the game ends, but if they do not match, the game ends without paying out the gaming value.

<Basic configuration>
First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figures 1 and 2. Figure 1 is a perspective view of the appearance of the slot machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side). Figure 2 is a diagram showing an example of a winning line.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door (door) 102 that is attached to the front side of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed relative to the main body 101.

In this example, the front door 102, which is locked in a closed state, can be opened by inserting a key held by the manager of the gaming facility into the door key hole 140. Therefore, the manager can unlock the front door 102 (change it from a closed state to an open state), but anyone other than the manager (e.g., a player) cannot unlock the front door 102.

On the right side of the main body 101, an optical sensor (detection means, hereinafter also referred to as the "open/close sensor"; not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the front door 102 is configured to pass between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this open/close sensor. The main control unit 300 monitors the state of various sensors 318 including this open/close sensor in the main control timer interrupt process described below. When the front door 102 is closed and the light-shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it blocks the light from the light-emitting section of the open/close sensor of the main body 101, the open/close sensor outputs a signal (e.g. a low-level signal) indicating that it is in a closed detection state to the main control unit 300.

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is opened and the light-shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it does not block the light from the light-emitting part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101, the opening/closing sensor outputs a signal (e.g., a high-level signal) indicating that it is in the open detection state to the main control unit 300.

In other words, the open/close sensor is a detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the front door (door) 102, and when the front door 102 is in a closed state, the detection state becomes a closed detection state, and when the front door 102 is in an open state, the detection state becomes an open detection state.

The "detection means" according to the present invention is not limited to optical sensors, but may be, for example, magnetic sensors, proximity switches, micro switches, Hall elements, etc. Also, it is not limited to sensors that always switch between an open detection state and a closed detection state when the door is opened or closed, but may be capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state even when the door is open, or conversely, may be capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state even when the door is closed.

The opening/closing sensor according to this example is configured so that, when a predetermined operation is performed, the detection state becomes a closed detection state even when the front door 102 is in an open state. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in an open state, a light-shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like to block the light from the light-emitting section of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101, so that even when the front door 102 is in an open state, the detection state of the opening/closing sensor can be forcibly changed to a closed detection state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as a "pseudo-closed door").

The "predetermined operation" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a DIP switch may be provided to set the open/close sensor to a closed detection state, and the predetermined operation may be to operate this DIP switch. Also, if the detection means is a magnetic sensor, the detection state of the open/close sensor may be set to a closed detection state by bringing a magnet close to it.

Three reels (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of symbols arranged on their outer periphery are housed inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are rotated by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member at equal intervals in appropriate numbers, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110-112. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 110-112 are displayed vertically in roughly three rows from the display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. To explain this in detail using FIG. 2, the symbol displayed on the top row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) is the left reel top row symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure) is the left reel middle row symbol, the symbol displayed on the bottom row of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure) is the left reel bottom row symbol, the symbol displayed on the top row of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the figure) is the middle reel top row symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle row of the left reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle reel middle row symbol, and the symbol displayed on the bottom row of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure) is the middle reel middle row symbol. The symbol displayed in the lower row (position 6 in the figure) is called the middle reel lower row symbol, the symbol displayed in the upper row of the right reel 112 (position 7 in the figure) is called the right reel upper row symbol, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 8 in the figure) is called the right reel middle row symbol, and the symbol displayed in the lower row of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure) is called the right reel lower row symbol, and each symbol of the reels 110 to 112 is displayed three vertically on each of the reels 110 to 112 through the display window 113, for a total of nine symbols. Then, by rotating each of the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of multiple types of symbols. In addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices can also be used as such display devices. In addition, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight is provided on the back of each of the reels 110-112 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the display window 113. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be illuminated evenly. Inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each of the reels 110-112, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. Based on the detection result of this optical sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined, and the reels 110-112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the winning line that is active. The winning line is a line that is used to determine whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role, which will be described later in FIG. 5, is displayed. In this embodiment, only one line, the middle winning line L1, is provided, which is composed of the middle symbols of the left reel, the middle symbols of the middle reel, and the middle symbols of the right reel. This winning line L1 is shown in FIG. 2. The winning lines that are active (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "active lines") are determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 requires three medals, and when the number of medals inserted is less than three, none of the winning lines are active. When three medals are bet, the winning line L1 is active. When the winning line is active, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game. The number of winning lines is not limited to one. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, a downward-sloping winning line consisting of the upper symbols on the left reel, the middle symbols on the middle reel, and the lower symbols on the right reel, and an upward-sloping winning line consisting of the lower symbols on the left reel, the middle symbols on the middle reel, and the upper symbols on the right reel, totaling three lines, may be set as valid winning lines, and a number of winning lines according to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines. The area on the winning line L1 (the area consisting of numbers 2, 5, and 8 in FIG. 2) may be referred to as the active line area S1. The area of the symbol display window 113 other than the active line area S1 (the area consisting of numbers 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, and 9 in FIG. 2) may be referred to as the inactive line area S2.

The notification lamp 123 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning role (specifically, special role 1 or special role 2) has been internally won in an internal lottery described below, or that the player is in a special role internally won state or a special game state described below. The medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp that notifies the player that a game medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if the player won a replay role (details of which will be described later), which is one of the winning roles, in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

The bet buttons 130 and 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) that are electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one medal is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, and three medals are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed (up to a maximum of three medals). Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamps 129 light up a number of lamps according to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 121 lights up to indicate that the game can be started.

The chance button 190 is a button for effects, and is also called the effect button 190. The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot through which the player inserts medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 and 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) through the medal insertion slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during a special game state) as numerical values. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning some kind of winning combination. In the following, the expression "granted to the player" may be used in the same sense as "paid out to the player." In this embodiment, the stored number display 125, game information display 126, and payout number display 127 are configured as seven-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. In other words, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130, 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation of the start lever 135 is called the operation to start the game.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons (stop operation means) 137-139 consisting of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137-139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110-112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each of the reels 110-112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right reel 112 can be stopped by operating the right stop button 139. Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137-139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. The reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as the first stop reel, the second stop reel, and the third stop reel, respectively. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137-139 are operated to stop all of the reels 110-112 that are spinning is called the operation sequence or push sequence. Furthermore, the operation sequence in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called the "forward push operation sequence" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called the "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". Note that light-emitting elements may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137-139, and when the stop buttons 137-139 can be operated, the light-emitting elements can be lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that can be pressed to remove medals that have been inserted and become stuck. The settlement button 134 is a button that can be used to settle medals that have been electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals that have been bet, and to dispense them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key can be inserted to unlock the front door 102 of the slot machine 100.

Below the stop button unit 136 is a title panel 162 that displays the model name and allows various certificate stamps to be affixed. Below the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 (see FIG. 3) located at the bottom inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 located on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for livening up the game. The performance device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided at the top of the performance device 160 for outputting the sound of the speaker 272 (see FIG. 3) located at the top inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. This performance device 160 is equipped with a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two shutters, a right shutter 163a and a left shutter 163b, which can be opened and closed horizontally, and a performance image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device) disposed on the rear side of this shutter 163; when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the performance image display device 157, the display screen of the performance image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (the player's side, the front side).

Note that the display device does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be any display device capable of displaying various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. The display screen is rectangular and configured so that the player can view the entire screen. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may also be square. Also, decorations (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decorations, making the display screen appear irregular. In this embodiment, the display screen is flat, but it may also be curved.

Inside the main body 101, there is also provided a setting key (first operating means) that can be switched on and off by rotating it. This setting key is an operating means for starting to change or check the setting values (in this example, settings 1 to 6) described below. Inside the main body 101, there is also provided a reset switch (hereinafter also referred to as a "reset SW") that can be pressed to change the settings (setting value change operation). This reset SW is an operating means that also functions as an error release switch that can be used to resolve various errors (error resolution operation) described below.

These setting keys and reset switches are operating means that are located in a position that allows them to be operated only when the front door 102 (door) is open, and are difficult or impossible to operate when the front door 102 (door) is closed. In other words, they are operating means that can only be operated by the manager of the gaming establishment (e.g., store clerk) and cannot be operated by players.

Inside the main body 101, there is also provided a setting value display device 101a (see FIG. 14) capable of displaying the setting value. In this example, the setting value display device 101a is configured as a seven-segment display. Details will be described later, but when a setting change operation is performed, the setting value display device 101a displays the setting value (one of settings 1 to 6), and when the setting value is confirmed by operating the start lever 135, the setting value becomes hidden. On the other hand, when a setting confirmation operation is performed, a number indicating the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 101a.

An external centralized terminal board (not shown) is attached to the inner wall of the main body 101. The external centralized terminal board is connected to the main control board constituting the main control unit 300 and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device. This external centralized terminal board is provided with an external cable connection section for connecting an external cable (not shown) extending from an information input circuit 652 (see FIG. 3) provided in a hall computer (not shown) or the like, and an external centralized terminal board LED (not shown). The external cable is inserted into the inside of the main body 101 through a cable hole opened on the back of the main body 101 and is connected to the external cable connection section of the external centralized terminal board.

In addition, a medal payout device (not shown; a device that pays out medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the inner wall of the main body 101, and an auxiliary medal storage unit (not shown) is disposed to the right of the medal payout device, with an overflow terminal disposed behind this (not shown).

A power supply box (not shown) with a power supply board is provided to the left of the medal payout device, and a power switch (not shown) is provided on the front of the power supply box. The power supply box converts AC power supplied from outside to the slot machine 100 into DC, converts it to a specified voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub control units 400, 500, etc., which will be described later. It also has a storage circuit (e.g. a capacitor) to supply power to specified components (e.g. the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a specified period (e.g. 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to Figure 3. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The slot machine 100's control units are broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the main presentation in response to command signals (hereafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400. With regard to the main control unit 300, a large data capacity makes it difficult to verify the program and can also become a breeding ground for illegal tampering, which can lead to security issues, so there is a limit to the data capacity of the ROM 306 and RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 for controlling the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control program data, lottery data used during internal lottery of winning combinations, reel pattern arrangement and stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, etc., and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Note that, for the RAM 308, the description RAM (random access memory) is used as an example indicating that it is a storage medium that can be read and written, but the description RWM (read write memory) or the description "ram" may also be used. In addition, the name of the process related to the RAM may also be the name using the description RWM (read write memory) or the description "ram". In this specification, the description RAM is mainly used. It should be noted that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time for interruption is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a random number generating circuit 316, which is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the value within the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start-up signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When a start-up signal is input from this start-up signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing described below).

The main control unit 300 also includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 monitors the status of various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal acceptance sensor for medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 141, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, optical sensors (index sensor 80) for the reels 110 to 112, etc.) at each interrupt time.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 receives this signal, latches the value at that timing, and stores it in a register that stores random numbers to be used in the lottery.

Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion port 141, and detect whether a medal has passed through. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, and right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor and the bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130, 132, respectively, and detect the insertion operation when medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals electronically stored are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact sensor or a contact sensor.

The optical sensors (index sensors 80) of the reels 110-112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110-112, and go low every time a light-shielding piece (detection piece 50) on the reel frame passes by. Rotational position information, which indicates how far the reel has rotated from the reference position from the time it goes low until it goes low again, is calculated based on the counted value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. When the CPU 304 detects the low-level signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided on the reels 110-112, a drive circuit 324 that drives a solenoid provided on the medal selector 170 that selects inserted medals, a drive circuit 326 that drives a motor provided on the medal payout device 180, and a drive circuit 328 that drives various lamps 336 (winning line indicator lamp 120, notification lamp 123, medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, number of stored medals indicator 125, game information indicator 126, payout number indicator 127).

In addition, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., information indicating the game status) of the slot machine 100 to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334, and lights up the external centralized terminal board LED when the game information is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power supply management unit (not shown), and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply is below a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400, enabling communication with the first sub-control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured such that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control section>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, and data for controlling the backlight lighting pattern and various displays.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sound source IC 418, which is provided with speakers 272, 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272, 277 in response to commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by the amplifier and output from the speakers 272, 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, to which various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, chance button lamp, reel backlight 94, etc.) are connected via an input/output interface.

The first sub-controller 400 also includes a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is connected to the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sensor circuit 426, to which a shutter sensor 428 is connected via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at each interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the performance device 160, including display control of the performance image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 may be configured with multiple control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the performance image display device 157 and a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163).

The second sub-control unit 500 has a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is also provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), which is connected to a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the performance image display device 157.

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, the arrangement of symbols on each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to Figure 4. This figure shows the arrangement of symbols on each of the reels (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) in a two-dimensional layout.

Each of the reels 110-112 has a predetermined number of frames (20 frames numbered 0-19) of symbols of multiple types (10 types in this embodiment) as shown on the right side of the figure. The numbers 0-19 shown on the left side of the figure are numbers that indicate the arrangement position of the symbols on each of the reels 110-112. For example, in this embodiment, the "bell symbol" is arranged in the number 1 frame of the left reel 110, the "Seven 1 symbol" is arranged in the number 2 frame of the middle reel 111, and the "Seven 1B symbol" is arranged in the number 2 frame of the right reel 112.

In this embodiment, the slot machine 100 is configured to stop the corresponding reel 110-112 within the maximum retraction range (in this embodiment, less than 5 frames) from the position where the reel is stopped in order to increase the excitement of the game.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 5. This figure shows the types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the payouts (amounts awarded) of each winning combination.

The winning roles of the slot machine 100 include special role 1, replay role, and small roles 1 to 8. The types of winning roles are not limited to these roles, and can be adopted arbitrarily. Among the winning roles in this embodiment, special role 1 is a role (operation role) that transitions to a special game state in which a player is given a predetermined benefit by winning. Furthermore, the replay role is a role that allows replay without inserting new medals. These special role 1 and replay role may be called "operation roles". Furthermore, "winning" in this embodiment also includes a case in which a pattern combination of an operation role that does not involve a medal payout (does not involve the payment of medals) is displayed on an active line, and includes, for example, winning of special role 1 and replay role. Furthermore, special role 1 is a special role that is carried over to the next game if it is not determined to be a winning role, and other roles are general roles that are not carried over to the next game if it is not determined to be a winning role.

Special role 1 is a role (operating role) that transitions to a special game state (RT2) when won. However, no medals are paid out for winning these roles themselves. The corresponding symbol combination for special role 1 is "Seven 3-Seven 1-Replay." In the following explanation, special role 1 may be referred to as "RB1" or "RB."

When special role 1 is internally won, the internal win flag corresponding to this internally won special role is set to ON (stored in a specified area of RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag corresponding to special role 1 is set to ON, the main control unit 300 transitions the game state to a special role internal win state (RT1). This flag remains ON until the corresponding actuating role is won, making it easier to win these actuating roles in subsequent games. Specifically, even if the role is not won in a game in which special role 1 is internally won, the next and subsequent games will be in the same state as when special role 1 was internally won, making it easier to win when the corresponding symbol combination is lined up.

The special role internal winning state will be described in detail later, but in the special role internal winning state, if a role other than the special role is internally won, the reel stopping control is executed so that the symbols that make up this other role are preferentially aligned.

The replay role is a winning role (operating role) that allows you to play the next time without inserting medals (gaming media), and no medals are paid out. In other words, you can play again with the same number of bets as the number of medals inserted last time. The corresponding symbol combination is "Replay - Replay - Replay".

The replay role may be any role that allows the player to play the next game without inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, when a replay is won, medals may be automatically inserted in the next game (the number of medals inserted may be reset in the medal insertion number storage area prepared in RAM 308), or the medals inserted in the game in which a replay was won may be carried over and used in the next game.

Minor prizes 1 to 8 are winning prizes that pay out a specified number of medals. The corresponding symbol combinations are: minor prize 1 is "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon", minor prize 2 is "replay-cherry-replay", minor prize 3 is "cherry-cherry-cherry", minor prize 4 is "bell B-bell-bell", minor prize 5 is "bell B-bell (or bell B)-bell", minor prize 6 is "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1", minor prize 7 is "seven 2-seven 2-seven 2", and minor prize 8 is "seven 3-seven 3-seven 3". The corresponding payout numbers are as shown in Figure 5.

Of the above minor prizes, minor prize 1 may be called "watermelon", minor prize 2 may be called "weak cherry", minor prize 3 may be called "strong cherry", minor prize 4 may be called "common bell", minor prize 5 may be called "push order bell", and minor prizes 6 to 8 may be called "1-coin prizes".

<Types of game states (RT)>
Next, a description will be given of the types of game states and their transitions in the slot machine 100. FIG.

The slot machine 100 is configured to be able to switch between three different states with different degrees of advantage: a low replay probability state, a special role internal winning state, and a special game state. The degree of advantage is changed by transitioning between these states, increasing the interest of the game. In the following explanation, this game state may be referred to as RT, and the low replay probability state, special role internal winning state, and special game state may be referred to as RT0, RT1, and RT2, respectively. When switching between these RTs, the corresponding lottery table is changed (described later). The RT is controlled by the main control unit 300.

Figure 6 shows each of the RTs described above, with the transition conditions listed on the arrows. When the transition condition corresponding to each arrow is met, the RT transitions in the direction of the arrow. These transition conditions include, for example, winning a specific combination, an internal win for a specific combination, a specific number of plays being played, and a specific number of coins being paid out.

Below, we will explain each RT, referring to the drawings as appropriate.

<Low probability of replay (RT0)>
RT0 has a lower internal probability of winning the replay role than RT1, and is the most disadvantageous RT for the player.

The roles that can be internally won in RT0 include Special Role 1, Replay Role, and Minor Roles 1 to 8. If the role is not won, it is a miss, and the symbol combination corresponding to the role will not be displayed. When the symbol combination related to a winning combination does not stop on the winning line, it is sometimes referred to as a "miss." When the role is not won, it is sometimes referred to as a "miss."

Figure 6 shows that if special role 1 is internally won while RT0 is set, the state will transition to the special role internal win state described below.

<Special role internal winning state (RT1)>
RT1 is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 is set to ON. In addition, the probability of winning the replay role is higher than in RT0, making it a more advantageous RT than RT0.

The internal winning roles in RT1 include the replay role and minor roles 1 to 8.

Figure 6 shows that if special role 1 is won in RT1 (if the corresponding symbol combination is displayed), the game will transition to RT2.

<Special game state (RT2)>
RT2 is an advantageous RT in which the internal probability of winning the common bell (minor prize 4) is higher than in other RTs, making it easier to win medals.

The only role that can be internally won in RT2 is the common bell (minor role 4). Figure 5 shows that in RT2, the game transitions to RT0 when a predetermined number of plays (six in this example) have been played or when a predetermined number of wins have been made (five in this example).

The conditions for ending RT2 are not particularly limited, and may end when a specified number of coins or more are paid out, or when a specified combination is won, for example.

<Non-advantageous and advantageous sections>
In the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, the game state is managed by dividing it into a non-advantageous zone and an advantageous zone, apart from the RT described above. In the advantageous zone, notification of the stop operation sequence for the internally winning role (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "operation navigation" or "operation instruction notification") is permitted, and in the non-advantageous zone, this operation navigation is not displayed. Note that in the advantageous zone, operation navigation is displayed according to conditions, but even if the push order bell is an internal win, there are cases where operation navigation is not displayed. These states will be described below with reference to FIG. 7. This figure shows the transition of the game state regarding the advantageous zone and the non-advantageous zone of the slot machine 100.

In this embodiment, the initial state (e.g., the state at the time of shipment from the factory) is set to a non-advantageous zone. When the RAM is cleared (settings are changed), this non-advantageous zone is set. The state of the non-advantageous zone is called normal state A. In this embodiment, three types of advantageous zone states are provided: normal state B, chance state, and AT state (including super AT state). FIG. 7 shows that there are four transition states: normal state A, normal state B, chance state, and AT state. In this embodiment, the advantageous zone flag is set to off if it is a non-advantageous zone, and the advantageous zone flag is set to on if it is an advantageous zone, and the non-advantageous zone and the advantageous zone are distinguished using this advantageous zone flag. In addition, in order to prevent encouraging gambling, it is configured to become a non-advantageous zone when the advantageous zone continues for a predetermined number of games (e.g., 1500 games) or exceeds a predetermined net increase in number of coins (e.g., 2400 coins).

The state of the advantageous zone may be only the AT state, or, for example, a precursor state before transitioning to the AT state may also be provided, and is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment. Similarly, there may be multiple types of states for the non-advantageous zone.

Note that since the non-advantageous zone and the advantageous zone are set separately from the RT, for example, there may be a transition to RT2 during an advantageous zone. However, since RT2 is configured so that there is no internal win on the push order bell and the operation navigation is not displayed, a non-advantageous zone may be set for RT2, and a return to the advantageous zone may occur after RT2 ends. In addition to the above configuration, RT2 may also be configured so that there is an internal win on the push order bell and the operation navigation is displayed.

The following explains each state of the non-favorable zone and favorable zone.

<Normal state A>
In the non-advantageous zone (normal state A), a lottery for moving to the advantageous zone is executed based on the internally won role. If the lottery is won, the player moves to normal state B of the advantageous zone.

<Normal state B>
In the normal state B, the game transitions to the chance state when a transition condition to the chance state is met. When the transition condition is met, the number of games in the chance state is set. Any condition can be adopted for this transition condition, such as a condition that is met by playing a predetermined number of games in the normal state B, a condition that is met when a lottery for transitioning to the chance state is played every time in the normal state B and the lottery is won, or a condition that is met when points (any of 1 to 3) added according to the result of one game in the normal state B are accumulated to a specified number (100 points).

<Chance state>
In the chance state, when a specific role (in this example, a 1-coin role (minor role 6 to 8)) is internally won, an AT lottery may be held. If the AT lottery is not won (the number of AT sets is 0) before the set number of games has elapsed, the game transitions to normal state B, and if the number of AT sets is not 0, the game transitions to the AT state. When transitioning to the AT state, the number of AT sets is decremented by 1, and a predetermined number of plays (for example, 50) is set as the number of remaining AT games.

In the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, the AT lottery is executed in the chance state, but for example, the AT lottery (addition of the number of AT sets) may be executed when moving from a non-advantageous zone to an advantageous zone, and the timing of the AT lottery and the execution conditions may be adopted arbitrarily.

In addition, when the AT lottery is won, a notification (operation instruction notification) may be executed that includes a suggestion of the symbol to be stopped (details will be described later). Note that the operation instruction notification is not limited to a notification that includes a suggestion of the symbol to be stopped, and may be, for example, a notification that includes the pressing order (for example, "middle → right → left", "press middle", etc.).

<AT state>
Next, the AT state will be described. Hereinafter, the AT state may be simply referred to as AT.

In the AT state, when the push order bell (minor prize 5) is internally won, an operation navigation is displayed showing the corresponding correct push order. Note that this operation navigation is not limited to showing the push order, but may show the timing of the stop operation, such as a display such as "Aim for...!", or may show both the push order and the timing. Also, on the payout number display 127, the 7-segment display lights up in a manner corresponding to the correct push order (hereinafter, this may be referred to as navigation lighting). The display on this payout number display 127 may also light up in a manner corresponding to the timing of the stop operation, or may light up in a manner corresponding to both the push order and the timing.

In this embodiment, the number of remaining AT games is subtracted as play in the AT state progresses. Then, when the number of remaining AT games reaches 0, if the number of AT sets is greater than 0, a predetermined value (e.g., 50) is set again to the number of remaining AT games, and if the number of AT sets is 0, a lottery is executed to enter the chance state. If the lottery is won, the game moves to the chance state, and if not, the game moves from the advantageous zone to the non-advantageous zone (parameters related to the advantageous zone are initialized). If the game enters a special game state (RT2) during the AT state, the subtraction of the number of remaining AT games stops, and the subtraction resumes when RT0 is reached. The number of remaining AT games may be added by winning an additional lottery (executed during an internal lottery in this embodiment).

In addition, the AT state may be started or ended according to a predetermined condition (for example, when a specific game state is reached), rather than being limited to a configuration using the number of AT sets or the number of remaining AT games.

<Processing Overview>
Below, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using the drawings.

<Main processing of main control unit>
First, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 8. The figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit main process. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that receives this start signal is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main process shown in Fig. 8 according to a control program previously stored in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, the main control unit initial setting process is performed. In this main control unit initial setting process, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt prohibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and operation permission and initial values are set for the WDT 314.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, the system checks whether medals have been inserted (by hand or by operating the bet buttons 130, 132), and turns on the winning line indicator lamp 120 in response to the insertion of medals. If medals have been inserted, the system prepares to send an insertion command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that medals have been inserted. If a replay has been won in the previous game, the system performs a process to insert the same number of medals as the number inserted in the previous game, eliminating the need for the player to insert medals. The system also checks whether the start lever 135 has been operated after the specified number of medals (3 medals) have been used, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the number of medals inserted and the valid winning lines are confirmed, and the game begins.

In step S105, various lottery processes including internal winning role lottery processes are executed. In this process, the lottery table of the internal winning role stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current RT, and an internal lottery (lottery for a role) is performed using this and the random number value obtained from the random number generating circuit 316 to determine the internal winning role. If any role (including an operating role) is internally won as a result of the internal lottery, the flag for that role is turned on. In addition, in this step S105, preparations are made to send an internal lottery command including internal winning information indicating the result of the winning role internal lottery to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, if a replay role (replay) is internally won, preparations are made to send an internal lottery command indicating that the replay role (replay) has been internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and if the result of the winning role internal lottery is a loss (non-winning role), preparations are made to send an internal lottery command indicating a loss to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition to information about the internal winning role, the internal winning command includes information about the current advantageous zone (including information about the number of remaining games, such as the number of remaining AT games, if the period is finite), and information that can identify the results of the AT lottery and the AT addition lottery. Of the above information, information about the number of remaining AT games may not be included in the internal winning command in non-AT states, but may be included in the internal winning command only in AT states. Furthermore, in the AT state, the internal winning command, including the internal winning of the push order bell (minor role 5), also includes operation instruction information that indicates the correct operation order (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

In step S111, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning role lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In step S113, on the condition that the game interval timer (which is subtracted in the timer update process described below) is 0, a reel rotation start process is executed, causing the reels 110 to 112 to start rotating. In addition, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to send a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotation speed and the optical sensors provided on each reel detect and grasp the pattern positions of each reel, the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. Note that the game interval counter guarantees the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment), reducing the risk of gambling.

In step S115, a reel stop control process is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137-139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reel 110-112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137-139 is stopped. Specifically, each time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referenced, and the reel 110-112 corresponding to the stop operation is stopped according to the number of reel-in frames set in the stop table. In addition, for the first stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. In addition, for each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110-112 stop, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all the reels 110-112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S117.

In step S117, a winning determination process is performed. Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role is displayed on an activated winning line, it is determined that the winning role has been won. For example, if "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is lined up on an activated winning line, it is determined that minor role 1 has been won. After determining the winning role, preparations are made to send a winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S119, if a winning combination that entails a payout has been achieved, the number of medals corresponding to that winning combination is awarded (paid out), and the number of medals awarded is displayed using the payout number display 127.

In step S121, an RT update process is performed. In this process, the RT transitions based on the conditions shown in the state transition diagram in FIG. 6.

In step S123, a game status update process is performed. Here, the status regarding the non-advantageous zone and advantageous zone described in FIG. 7 is updated based on the result of the game. For example, when there is a transition from normal state A to normal state B, the advantageous zone flag is set to ON, and when there is a transition from the AT state to normal state A, the advantageous zone flag is set to OFF. In addition, preparations are made to send a game status update command. This command includes information regarding RT, and information regarding the non-advantageous zone and advantageous zone (for example, the advantageous zone flag, the number of AT sets, and the number of games remaining in the AT).

This completes one game. After this, the game will proceed by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-mentioned process.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 9. Note that Fig. 9 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to start main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle.

In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. This timer interrupt start process includes processes such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to a stack area.

In step S203, WDT314 is periodically restarted (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) so that the count value of WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that a processing abnormality is not detected).

In step S205, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input ports of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the presence or absence of the detection signals is stored in signal status storage areas partitioned for each of the various sensors 318 in the RAM 308. The status of the optical sensors is confirmed in this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes are executed according to the interrupt status (various interrupt statuses are acquired based on signals from various sensors 318). For example, if the interrupt status is during medal insertion processing, medal insertion acceptance processing is executed, and if the interrupt status is during payout processing, medal payout processing is executed.

In step S209, a timer update process is performed. For example, a process is executed to update various timers according to their respective time units, such as subtracting from the game interval timer.

In step S211, a command setting and sending process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for sending by the main processing of the main control unit 300, timer interrupt processing, etc., are sent to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command, input command, start lever acceptance command, internal winning command, performance command associated with performance lottery processing, reel rotation start command associated with the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands associated with acceptance of operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, first to third stop commands associated with stopping the reels 110 to 112, winning command, payout number command and payout end command associated with medal payout processing, status update command), and command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

The first sub-control unit 400 is able to determine the presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 300 based on the command type contained in the received output schedule information, and is also able to determine the content of the presentation control based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S213, an external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to an information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring processing, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are first read out to monitor for errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc., and if an error is detected (not shown), error processing is executed. Furthermore, depending on the current game state, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various seven-segment (SEG) displays are set.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and if a low voltage signal is not received (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219.

In step S219, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set back to the original registers, and other processing is performed. After that, the processing returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 8.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for restoring the state at the time of power outage when power is restored, is saved in a specified area of RAM 308, a checksum value for the specified area that includes at least the used area of RAM 308 is derived and stored in RAM 308, and a power flag indicating that power outage processing has been performed is set to ON.

<Processing of first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 10. FIG. 10(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 10(b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 10(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initial setting is executed when the power is turned on. In this processing, the initial settings of the input/output ports and the initialization processing of the memory area in the RAM 408 are performed. In this processing, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of the internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the game state, are each provided in the RAM 408.

In step S303, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, performance control processing is performed. Here, the performance data is expanded, and device data is set in a performance execution area provided in RAM 408, performance data is set in a performance reservation area provided in RAM 408, and further, performance data is set and control processing is executed based on a received command and the information contained in that command. Note that the performance data set in the performance reservation area and the device data set in the performance execution area may be updated (overwritten) with different data. In this case, the performance content is changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, control data is obtained from the device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277, and the obtained control data is output to the sound source IC 418 to execute a sound performance.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, control data is obtained from the device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to each of the lamps 420, and the obtained control data is output to the drive circuit 422 to cause the lamps to perform a performance.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, control data is obtained from the device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the obtained control data is output to the drive circuit 424, thereby causing the shutter 163 to perform a performance.

In step S317, an information output process is performed to set up the transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the performance image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-control unit 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 10(b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S321 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, using FIG. 10(c), the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period in response to this timer interrupt.

In step S331, the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 10(a) is incremented by 1 and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S333, the device data set in step S315 is sent to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random number values for performance are updated.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using Figure 11. Figure 11 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 11 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 11 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 11 (d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S401 in FIG. 11(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the input/output port initial settings and the memory area in the RAM 508 are initialized, etc.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S407, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409, performance control processing is performed. Specifically, if a new command is received in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, processing is executed to read performance data for image control related to the background image from ROM 506. In addition, processing is executed to read other performance data from ROM 506, and if the performance data needs to be updated, processing to update the performance data is executed.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if the performance data read out in step S409 contains an image control command, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control related to the display image (notification image, background image) is executed. This image control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 11(d). When this image control processing is completed, the process returns to step S403.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 11(b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S415 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 508.

Next, using FIG. 11(c), we will explain the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period in response to this timer interrupt.

In step S417, the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 11(a) is incremented by 1 and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S419, the random number values for the effects are updated.

Next, the image control processing of step S411 in the main processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 11(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

In step S421, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of display area A and display area B of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of image stored in a display area not designated as a drawing area is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the destination address of the VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 516 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S423, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from VDP516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S425; if not, the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S425, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table and attribute data, etc. Here, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 on information about the image data that constitutes the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, VRAM coordinates (layout coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) in order to form a display image in display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the command stored in the attribute register.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S429, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP516 based on the end of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S431; if not, the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S431, the scene display counter, which is set in a specified area of RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1) and the process ends.

<<Embodiment C>>
Next, a gaming machine (slot machine) according to embodiment C will be described with reference to Figures 12 and 13. Note that for terms that overlap with other embodiments, the terms of this embodiment take precedence, and for descriptions that overlap with drawings other than Figures 12 and 13, the descriptions in Figures 12 and 13 take precedence.

<Notification Means>
Next, prior to the description of various notifications, a notification means provided in the slot machine 100 will be described.

<Notification Means (Display Means)>
The slot machine 100 is provided with a display means capable of displaying information as one of the notification means. Examples of the display means provided in the slot machine 100 include the liquid crystal display device (performance image display device) 157 described with reference to FIG. 1, the payout number display device 127, the reserved number display device 125, and the game information display device 126, and in this example, these display means are configured with a liquid crystal display device, an LED, a segment display device, and the like.

<Notification Means (Sound Output Means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of the notification means. Examples of the sound output means included in the slot machine 100 include the speakers 272 and 277 described with reference to FIG.

<Notification Means (Light Emitting Means)>
The slot machine 100 is provided with a light-emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of the notification means. Examples of the light-emitting means provided in the slot machine 100 include the side lamp 144, the title panel (lamp) 162, the performance button 190, the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the start lever 135 described with reference to FIG. 1, as well as the upper lamp 142 (see FIG. 14) and the reel backlights (not shown) of the reels 110 to 112. In this example, all of these light-emitting means are formed of LEDs.

The effect button 190, stop buttons (stop operation means) 137 to 139, and start lever 135 also function as operation means that can be operated by the player. The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines, and examples of light-emitting means that pachinko machines are equipped with include frame lamps, effect buttons, and gadgets.

<Stop instruction notification>
Next, the stop instruction notification will be described. Here, the stop instruction notification is a notification (for example, operation navigation) including a suggestion of a symbol to be stopped, and the notification means of the gaming machine according to this embodiment may execute a first operation instruction notification including a suggestion of a first symbol to be stopped, and a second operation instruction notification including a suggestion of a second symbol to be stopped.

<First stop instruction notification>
FIG. 12 is a chronological diagram showing an example of a notification when a first operation instruction notification is made in a certain game, and the state shown in FIG. 12(a) is the state when the first operation instruction notification is executed in a certain game.

In this example, pressing the start lever 135 triggers the reels 110 to 112 to start spinning, and a first operation instruction notification ID1 is executed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 in response to a winning AT lottery in the chance state.

The first operation instruction notification is a notification that includes a suggestion of the first symbol that is the target to be stopped, and in this example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 includes a target symbol notification ID1a (in this example, a display including an image of the Seven 1 symbol and the text string "Aim!") that prompts the user to perform a stopping operation on the stop buttons 137-139 so that the Seven 1 symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and a push order notification ID1b that suggests the order in which to press the stop buttons 137-139 (in this example, a display suggesting that the stopping operation should be performed in the order of middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137).

The first operation instruction notification is not limited to this example, and may be any notification that includes a notification that includes a suggestion of the first symbol that is the target to be stopped. For example, it may be a notification that does not include the push order notification ID 1b that suggests the order in which to press the stop buttons 137 to 139, or a notification that consists only of a character string such as "Aim for the blue 7". In addition to (or instead of) a notification by a display means, a notification by a sound output means such as speakers 272, 277 (for example, audio output of "Aim for the blue 7") may be applied.

Furthermore, the conditions for executing the first operation instruction notification are not limited to this example, and may be, for example, when a specific internal winning combination is won (or a prize is awarded), when a specific game state is reached, when a set number of points are accumulated (for example, 100 points), etc.

<First stop instruction notification -> First stop mode -> Execution of first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 12(b-1) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the first stopping pattern in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the gaming machine in this embodiment is configured to execute the first notification at least in a game when the reels stop in a first stopping pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") in a game in which a first operation instruction notification (in this example, first operation instruction notification ID 1) is executed.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-1), in a game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed, the player follows the first operation instruction notification ID1 and performs the stopping operation in the order of the center stop button 138, right stop button 139, and left stop button 137, aiming for the Seven 1 symbol, and the reels 110 to 112 stop with the symbol combination (first stopping mode) of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" (the symbol combination (first stopping mode) of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" is aligned on the winning line L1), so the first notification RD1 (first notification. In this example, a display including an image of the Seven 1 symbol, the character string "GET!", and an effect image) is executed.

In addition, in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed as a result of winning the AT lottery, the next game after the reels 110 to 112 stop in the first stopping pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") will transition to the AT state and start the AT game, as shown in FIG. 12(d).

In this example, the first stop pattern is a pattern in which the first symbol (in this example, the seven-one symbol) is stopped on all reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be another symbol combination that includes the first symbol that is the target to be stopped.

The first notification is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a notification consisting of only a character string such as "Congratulations on the blue 7." In addition to (or instead of) a notification by a display means, a notification by a sound output means such as speakers 272, 277 (for example, outputting a voice saying "Congratulations on the blue 7") or a notification by a light emitting means such as upper lamp 142 or side lamp 144 (for example, flashing red) may be applied.

The timing of the first notification may be when the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed and only in a game in which the reels stop in the first stopping pattern, or in addition to that game, it may be executed in any game after that game.

<First stop instruction notification→Second stop mode→No execution of first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 12(b-4) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the second stopping pattern in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the gaming machine in this embodiment is configured so that when the reels stop in a second stopping pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") in a game in which a first operation instruction notification (in this example, first operation instruction notification ID 1) is executed, the first notification is not executed at least in that game.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-4), in a game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed, the player does not follow the first operation instruction notification ID1, but instead performs the stopping operation in the order of the center stop button 138, right stop button 139, and left stop button 137, aiming for the Seven 3 symbol, and the reels 110 to 112 stop with the symbol combination of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" (second stopping mode) (the symbol combination of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" (second stopping mode) is aligned on the winning line L1), so the first notification RD1 (first notification; in this example, a display including an image of the Seven 1 symbol, the character string "GET!", and an effect image) shown in FIG. 12(b-1) is not executed.

According to this example, when the reels stop in a first stop pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") in a game in which the first operation instruction notification (in this example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 12(a)) is executed, the first notification (in this example, the first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 12(b-1)) is executed at least in that game, whereas when the reels stop in a second stop pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed, the first notification is not executed at least in that game. Therefore, the notification can be executed in a way that does not mislead the player, the player will not misunderstand, and a decline in the player's motivation to play can be prevented in advance.

In addition, the first stop mode is a mode in which the first symbol (in this example, the seven-one symbol) is stopped on all reels, and the second stop mode is a mode in which the second symbol (in this example, the seven-three symbol) is stopped on all reels, so the symbol suggested by the first operation instruction notification can be displayed as stopped, and the player will not be confused.

In this example, the second stop pattern is a pattern in which the second symbol (in this example, the seven-three symbol) stops on all reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be another symbol combination that does not include the first symbol that is the target to stop.

The timing for not executing the first notification may be only for the game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels stop in the second stop pattern, or may be non-execution in any game after that game in addition to that game.

<First stop instruction notification→fourth stop mode→non-execution of first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 12(b-2) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the fourth stopping pattern in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the gaming machine in this embodiment is configured so that when the reels stop in a fourth stop pattern (in this example, a stop pattern other than the first stop pattern, the second stop pattern, and the third stop pattern (so-called scattered patterns)) in a game in which a first operation instruction notification (in this example, first operation instruction notification ID1) is executed, the first notification is not executed at least in that game.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-2), in a game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed, the player performs the stop operation in the order of the center stop button 138, right stop button 139, and left stop button 137 in accordance with the first operation instruction notification ID1, aiming for the Seven 1 symbol (or the player performs the stop operation of the stop buttons 137-139 without following the first operation instruction notification ID1), but the reels 110-112 stop with the symbol combination of "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (fourth stop mode) (the symbol combination of "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (fourth stop mode) is aligned on the winning line L1), so the first notification RD1 (first notification. In this example, a display including an image of the Seven 1 symbol, the character string "GET!", and an effect image) shown in FIG. 12(b-1) is not executed.

According to this example, when the reels stop in a fourth stop mode (in this example, a stop mode other than the first, second, and third stop modes (so-called scattered patterns)) in which all reels stop without a specific pattern being lined up in a game in which the first operation instruction notification (in this example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 12(a)) is executed, at least in that game, the first notification (in this example, the first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 12(b-1)) is not executed, so that the notification can be given in a way that does not mislead the player, the player will not misunderstand, and a decline in the player's motivation to play can be prevented in advance.

In this example, the fourth stop mode is a mode in which all reels stop without a specific pattern (in this example, any one of the seven-one, seven-two, and seven-three patterns) being lined up, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be a mode in which other specific patterns are not lined up. Also, the timing of non-execution of the first notification may be only for a game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels stop in the fourth stop mode, or may be non-execution in addition to that game, as well as in any game following that game.

<First stop instruction notification → Third stop mode → Execution of third notification>
The state shown in FIG. 12(b-3) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the third stopping pattern in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the gaming machine in this embodiment is configured to execute the third notification at least in a game when the reels stop in a third stopping pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2") in a game in which a first operation instruction notification (in this example, first operation instruction notification ID 1) is executed.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-3), in a game in which the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed, the player does not follow the first operation instruction notification ID1, but instead performs the stopping operation in the order of the center stop button 138, right stop button 139, and left stop button 137, aiming for the Seven 2 symbol, and the reels 110 to 112 stop with the symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" (third stopping mode) (the symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" (third stopping mode) is aligned on the winning line L1), so a third notification RD3 (third notification. In this example, a display including an image of the Seven 2 symbol, the character string "GET!", and an effect image) is executed.

In addition, in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed as a result of winning the AT lottery, the next game after the reels 110 to 112 stop in the third stopping pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2") will transition to the AT state and start the AT game, as shown in FIG. 12(d).

According to this example, when the reels stop in a third stop pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2") in which the third symbol (in this example, the Seven 2 symbol) is stopped on all reels in a game in which a first operation instruction notification (in this example, the first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 12(a)) is executed, at least in that game, a third notification (in this example, the third notification RD3 shown in FIG. 12(b-3)) is executed, so that the player can believe that the reels have stopped in the first stop pattern in which the first notification is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In this example, the third stop pattern is a pattern in which the third symbol (in this example, the seven 2 symbols) stops on all reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be another symbol combination that does not include the first symbol that is the target to stop.

The third notification is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a notification consisting of only a character string such as "Congratulations on the red 7." In addition to (or instead of) a notification by a display means, a notification by a sound output means such as speakers 272, 277 (for example, outputting a voice saying "Congratulations on the red 7") or a notification by a light emitting means such as upper lamp 142 or side lamp 144 (for example, flashing yellow light) may be applied.

The timing of the execution of the third notification may be only when the first operation instruction notification ID1 (first operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels stop in the third stopping pattern, or it may be executed in addition to the game in question, or in any game following the game in question.

<Temporary suspension of the first suspension mode>
The state shown in Figure 12 (c-2) is the state in which reel presentation is being executed in the next game after the reels 110 to 112 have stopped in the second stopping pattern in a game in which the first operation instruction notification has been executed, and Figure 12 (c-1) is the state in which reel presentation is being executed in the next game after the reels 110 to 112 have stopped in the fourth stopping pattern in a game in which the first operation instruction notification has been executed.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is configured so that after the reels have stopped in the second stopping mode (or after the reels have stopped in the fourth stopping mode), they stop in the first stopping mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") as a reel effect.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(c-2), as shown in FIG. 12(a), after the first operation instruction notification ID1 is executed in a certain game, as shown in FIG. 12(b-4), the reels 110-112 stop in the "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" symbol combination (second stop mode) instead of the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"), as shown in FIG. 12(b-4), so the first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 12(b-1) is not executed. However, in the next game of the certain game, the reel presentation is started by pressing the start lever 135, and the reel presentation stops (temporarily stops) in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"), and the first notification RD1 is executed, and then the AT game starts.

According to this example, the reels can be stopped in the second stopping mode and then in the first stopping mode, which can increase the player's interest. Also, even if the reels stop in the second stopping mode in a certain game, the first notification can be executed in the next or subsequent games of the certain game, which can surprise the player.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(c-1), as shown in FIG. 12(a), after the first operation instruction notification ID1 is executed in a certain game, as shown in FIG. 12(b-2), the reels 110 to 112 stop in the "bell-seven 1-replay" pattern combination (fourth stop mode) instead of the first stop mode (in this example, the "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" pattern combination), so the first notification RD1 shown in FIG. 12(b-1) is not executed. However, in the next game of the certain game, the reel presentation is started by pressing the start lever 135, and the reel presentation stops (temporarily stops) in the first stop mode (in this example, the "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" pattern combination), and the first notification RD1 is executed, and then the AT game starts.

According to this example, the reels can be stopped in the first stopping mode after they have stopped in the fourth stopping mode, which can heighten the player's interest. Also, even if the reels stop in the fourth stopping mode in a certain game, the first notification can be executed in the next or subsequent games of the certain game, which can surprise the player.

<Second stop instruction notification>
FIG. 13 is a time-series diagram showing an example of a notification when a second operation instruction is issued in a certain game, and the state shown in FIG. 13(a) is the state when the second operation instruction is executed in a certain game.

In this example, pressing the start lever 135 triggers the reels 110 to 112 to start spinning, and when the Super AT lottery is won during the chance state, the second operation instruction notification ID2 is executed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

The second operation instruction notification is a notification including a suggestion of the second symbol to be stopped, and in this example, as the second operation instruction notification ID2, a target symbol notification ID2a (in this example, a display including an image of the Seven 3 symbol and the text "Aim!") that urges the player to perform the stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 so that the Seven 3 symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and a push order notification ID2b that suggests the order in which to press the stop buttons 137 to 139 (in this example, a display suggesting that the stopping operation should be performed in the order of middle stop button 138 → right stop button 139 → left stop button 137) are executed.

The second operation instruction notification is not limited to this example, and may be any notification that includes a notification that includes a suggestion of the second symbol that is the target to be stopped. For example, it may be a notification that does not include the push order notification ID 2b that suggests the order in which to press the stop buttons 137 to 139, or a notification that consists only of a character string such as "Aim for the gold 7". In addition to (or instead of) a notification by a display means, a notification by a sound output means such as speakers 272, 277 (for example, outputting a sound such as "Aim for the gold 7") may be applied.

Furthermore, the conditions for executing the second operation instruction notification are not limited to this example, and may be, for example, when a specific internal winning combination is won (or a prize is awarded), when a specific game state is reached, when a set number of points are accumulated (for example, 100 points), etc.

<Second stop instruction notification -> Second stop mode -> Execution of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 13(b-4) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the second stopping pattern in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the gaming machine in this embodiment is configured to execute the second notification at least in a game when the reels stop in a second stopping pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") in a game in which a second operation instruction notification (in this example, second operation instruction notification ID2) is executed.

In the state shown in FIG. 13(b-4), in a game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed, the player performs the stopping operation in the order of the center stop button 138, right stop button 139, and left stop button 137 in accordance with the second operation instruction notification ID2, aiming for the Seven 3 symbol, and the reels 110 to 112 stop with the symbol combination (second stopping mode) of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" (the symbol combination (second stopping mode) of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" is aligned on the winning line L1), so the second notification RD2 (second notification. In this example, a display including an image of the Seven 3 symbol, the character string "GET!", and an effect image) is executed.

In addition, in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed as a result of winning the super AT lottery, the next game after the reels 110 to 112 stop in the second stopping pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") will transition to the super AT state, which is more advantageous to the player than the AT state, as shown in FIG. 13(d), and the super AT game will begin.

As mentioned above, the next game after the first stopping mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") transitions to the AT state, whereas the next game after the second stopping mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") transitions to the super AT state, which is more advantageous to the player than the AT state. Therefore, the second stopping mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") has a higher value as a symbol combination than the first stopping mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1").

In addition, the next time the reel is played after stopping in the third stopping mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2"), it will transition to the AT state, so the value of the symbol combination is the same for the first stopping mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") and the third stopping mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2") as a symbol combination.

In this example, the second stop pattern is a pattern in which the second symbol (in this example, the seven-three symbol) is stopped on all reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be another symbol combination that includes the second symbol that is the target to be stopped.

The second notification is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a notification consisting of only a character string such as "Congratulations on Friday 7", or in addition to (or instead of) a notification by a display means, a notification by a sound output means such as speakers 272, 277 (for example, outputting a voice saying "Congratulations on Friday 7") or a notification by a light emitting means such as upper lamp 142 or side lamp 144 (for example, flashing red light) may be applied.

The second notification may be executed only when the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels stop in the second stopping pattern, or may be executed in addition to the game in question and in any game thereafter.

<Second stop instruction notification→first stop mode→non-execution of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 13(b-1) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the first stopping pattern in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the gaming machine in this embodiment is configured so that when the reels stop in a first stopping pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") in a game in which a second operation instruction notification (in this example, second operation instruction notification ID2) is executed, the second notification is not executed at least in that game.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(b-1), in a game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed, the player does not follow the second operation instruction notification ID2, but instead performs the stopping operation in the order of the center stop button 138, right stop button 139, and left stop button 137, aiming for the Seven 1 symbol, and the reels 110 to 112 stop with the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" (first stopping mode) (the symbol combination (first stopping mode) of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" is aligned on the winning line L1), so the second notification RD2 (second notification; in this example, a display including an image of a Seven 3 symbol, the character string "GET!", and an effect image) shown in FIG. 13(b-4) is not executed.

According to this example, when the reels stop in the second stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") in a game in which the second operation instruction notification (in this example, the second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. 13(a)) is executed, the second notification (in this example, the second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 12(b-4)) is executed at least in that game, whereas when the reels stop in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed, the second notification is not executed at least in that game. Therefore, the notification can be executed in a way that does not mislead the player, the player will not misunderstand, and a decline in the player's motivation to play can be prevented in advance.

In addition, the first stop mode is a mode in which the first symbol (in this example, the seven-one symbol) has stopped on all reels, and the second stop mode is a mode in which the second symbol (in this example, the seven-three symbol) has stopped on all reels, so the symbol suggested by the second operation instruction notification can be displayed as stopped, and the player will not be confused.

In this example, the first stop pattern is a pattern in which the first symbol (in this example, the seven-one symbol) stops on all reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be another symbol combination that does not include the first symbol that is the target to stop.

The timing for not executing the second notification may be only for the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels stop in the first stop pattern, or may be non-executed in any game after that game in addition to that game.

<Second stop instruction notification -> Fourth stop mode -> Non-execution of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 13(b-2) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the fourth stopping pattern in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the gaming machine according to this embodiment is configured so that when the reels stop in a fourth stop pattern (in this example, a stop pattern other than the first stop pattern, the second stop pattern, and the third stop pattern (so-called scattered patterns)) in a game in which a second operation instruction notification (in this example, second operation instruction notification ID2) is executed, the second notification is not executed at least in that game.

In the state shown in FIG. 13(b-2), in a game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed, the player performs the stop operation in the order of the center stop button 138, right stop button 139, and left stop button 137 in accordance with the second operation instruction notification ID2, aiming for the Seven 3 symbol (or the player performs the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 without following the second operation instruction notification ID2), but the reels 110 to 112 stop with the symbol combination of "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (fourth stop mode) (the symbol combination of "Bell-Seven 1-Replay" (fourth stop mode) is aligned on the winning line L1), so the second notification RD2 (second notification. In this example, a display including an image of the Seven 3 symbol, the character string "GET!", and an effect image) shown in FIG. 13(b-4) is not executed.

According to this example, when the reels stop in a fourth stop pattern (in this example, a stop pattern other than the first, second, and third stop patterns (so-called scattered patterns)) in which all reels stop without a specific pattern being lined up in a game in which the second operation instruction notification (in this example, the second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. 13(a)) is executed, at least in that game, the second notification (in this example, the second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 13(b-4)) is not executed, so that the notification can be given in a way that does not mislead the player, the player will not misunderstand, and a decline in the player's motivation to play can be prevented in advance.

In this example, the fourth stopping mode is a mode in which the reels stop without a specific pattern (in this example, any one of the seven-one, seven-two, and seven-three symbols) lining up on all the reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reels may stop without a specific pattern lining up.

The timing for not executing the second notification may be only for the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels stop in the fourth stopping pattern, or may be non-execution in any game after that game in addition to that game.

<Second stop instruction notification -> third stop mode -> non-execution of second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 13(b-3) is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the third stopping pattern in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed.

The notification means of the gaming machine in this embodiment is configured so that when the reels stop in a third stopping pattern (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2") in a game in which a second operation instruction notification (in this example, second operation instruction notification ID2) is executed, the second notification is not executed at least in that game.

In the state shown in FIG. 13(b-3), in a game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed, the player does not follow the second operation instruction notification ID2, but instead performs the stopping operation in the order of the center stop button 138, right stop button 139, and left stop button 137, aiming for the Seven 2 symbol, and the reels 110 to 112 stop with the symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" (third stopping mode) (the symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" (third stopping mode) is aligned on the winning line L1), so the second notification RD2 (second notification; in this example, a display including an image of the Seven 3 symbol, the character string "GET!", and an effect image) shown in FIG. 13(b-4) is not executed.

According to this example, when the reels stop in a third stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2") in which all reels do not display a specific symbol in a game in which the second operation instruction notification (in this example, the second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. 13(a)) is executed, the second notification (in this example, the second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 13(b-4)) is not executed at least in that game, so that the notification can be given in a way that does not mislead the player, the player will not misunderstand, and a decline in the player's motivation to play can be prevented in advance.

In this example, the third stop pattern is a pattern in which the third symbol (in this example, the seven 2 symbols) stops on all reels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be another symbol combination that does not include the first symbol that is the target to stop.

The timing for not executing the second notification may be only for the game in which the second operation instruction notification ID2 (second operation instruction notification) is executed and the reels stop in the third stopping pattern, or may be non-executed in any game after that game in addition to that game.

<Temporary suspension of the second suspension mode>
The state shown in Figure 13 (c) is a state in which reel presentation is being executed in the next game after reels 110 to 112 stop in a stopping pattern other than the second stopping pattern (in this example, any of the first, third, or fourth stopping patterns) in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is configured so that after the reels stop in a stopping mode other than the second stopping mode, they stop in the second stopping mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") as a reel effect.

For example, as shown in FIG. 13(a), after executing the second operation instruction notification ID2 in a certain game, if the reels 110-112 stop in the "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" symbol combination (first stop mode) instead of the second stop mode (in this example, the "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" symbol combination) as shown in FIG. 13(b-1), the second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 13(b-4) is not executed, but as shown in FIG. 13(c), in the next game of the certain game, the reel presentation is started by pressing the start lever 135, and the reel presentation stops (temporarily stops) in the second stop mode (in this example, the "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3" symbol combination), and the second notification RD2 is executed, and then the super AT game starts.

According to this example, the reels can be stopped in a stop pattern other than the second stop pattern and then stopped in the second stop pattern, which can increase the player's interest. Also, even if the reels stop in a stop pattern other than the second stop pattern in a certain game, the second notification can be executed in the next or subsequent games of the certain game, which can surprise the player.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with reels (e.g., reels 110-112 shown in FIG. 1), stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137-139 shown in FIG. 1), and notification means (e.g., the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. 3, and various lamps), and the notification means is a means that may execute a first operation instruction notification (e.g., first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 12(a)), and the first operation instruction notification suggests a first pattern (e.g., the seven-one pattern) to be stopped. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with an alarm including a first alarm (e.g., a first alarm RD1 shown in FIG. 12(b-1)) that is executed at least in a game when the reels stop in a first stopping pattern (e.g., a symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") in a game in which the first operation instruction alarm is executed, and the alarm means is a means that is executed at least in a game when the reels stop in a second stopping pattern (e.g., a symbol combination of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") in a game in which the first operation instruction alarm is executed, and does not execute the first alarm at least in the game.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the reels stop in a first stop mode in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed, the first notification is executed at least in that game, whereas when the reels stop in a second stop mode in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed, the first notification is not executed at least in that game. This makes it possible to issue notifications that do not mislead the player, prevents the player from misunderstanding, and prevents the player from losing motivation to play.

The first stop mode may be a mode in which the first symbol (e.g., the Seven 1 symbol) stops on all reels, and the second stop mode may be a mode in which the second symbol (e.g., the Seven 3 symbol) stops on all reels.

With this configuration, the symbol suggested by the first operation instruction notification can be displayed statically, preventing the player from being confused.

The notification means is a means for executing a third notification (e.g., a third notification RD3 shown in FIG. 12(b-3)) at least in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed, when the reels stop in a third stopping pattern (e.g., a symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2"), and the third stopping pattern may be a pattern in which a third symbol (e.g., a Seven 2 symbol) stops on all reels.

This configuration makes the player believe that the reels have stopped in the first stopping mode when the first notification is executed, enhancing the player's interest.

The notification means is a means for not executing the first notification at least in a game in which the first operation instruction notification is executed when the reels stop in a fourth stop pattern (e.g., a stop pattern other than the first stop pattern, the second stop pattern, and the third stop pattern (so-called a scattered pattern)), and the fourth stop pattern may be a pattern in which all reels stop without a specific pattern (e.g., any one of the seven-one pattern, seven-two pattern, and seven-three pattern) being lined up.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player in a way that does not mislead the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding and losing motivation to play.

In addition, after the reels stop in the second stopping pattern, they may stop in the first stopping pattern as a reel effect.

With this configuration, the reels can be stopped in the second stopping mode and then in the first stopping mode, which can increase the player's interest.

The notification means may be a means for executing a second operation instruction notification (e.g., second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. 13(a)), the second operation instruction notification being a notification including a suggestion of the second symbol to be stopped, the notification means may be a means for executing a second notification (e.g., second notification RD2 shown in FIG. 13(b-4)) at least in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed when the reel stops in the second stopping pattern (e.g., the symbol combination "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3"), and the notification means may be a means for not executing the second notification at least in a game in which the second operation instruction notification is executed when the reel stops in the first stopping pattern (e.g., the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1"),

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player in a way that does not mislead the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding and losing motivation to play.

The first operation instruction notification and the second operation instruction notification are not limited to notifications including a suggestion of the pattern to be stopped, and may be notifications including, for example, the order in which the stop operation means is pressed (for example, "middle → right → left", "middle!!", "press middle", etc.).

The third or fourth stop mode may be a mode in which the first symbol (e.g., the Seven 1 symbol) and the second symbol (e.g., the Seven 3 symbol) do not stop on all of the reels.

In addition, all, a plurality, or one of the first stop mode, the second stop mode, the third stop mode, and the fourth stop mode may be configured to include a specific letter, number, or figure (e.g., the number 7).

With this configuration, the stopping patterns are similar, which may increase the player's sense of anticipation.

The reel may also be configured to be capable of stopping in the first stopping pattern (e.g., a symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") when (or only when) the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed in accordance with the first operation instruction notification (e.g., first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 12(a)) and a first winning combination (e.g., a 1-coin winning combination (minor winning combination 6)) is won, and the reels are capable of stopping in the first stopping pattern (e.g., a symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1") when (or only when) the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed in accordance with the first operation instruction notification (e.g., first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 12(a)).

In addition, in a game in which a second winning combination (e.g., a 1-coin winning combination (minor winning combination 8)) is won, the reels may be configured to be able to stop in the second stopping pattern (e.g., a symbol combination of "Seven 3-Seven 3-Seven 3") when (or only when) the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed in accordance with the second operation instruction notification (e.g., second operation instruction notification ID2 shown in FIG. 13(a)).

In addition, in a game in which a third combination (e.g., a 1-coin combination (minor combination 7)) is won, the reels may be configured to be able to stop in the third stopping pattern (e.g., a symbol combination of "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2") if (or only if) the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed without following the first operation instruction notification (e.g., first operation instruction notification ID1 shown in FIG. 12(a)).

<<Embodiment D>>
Next, a gaming machine (slot machine) according to embodiment D will be described with reference to Figures 14 to 16. Note that, for terms that overlap with other embodiments, the terms of this embodiment take precedence, and for descriptions that overlap with drawings other than Figures 14 to 16, the descriptions of Figures 14 to 16 take precedence.

<Notification Means>
Prior to describing various notifications, a description will now be given of notification means provided in the slot machine 100. Fig. 14(a) is a front view of the slot machine 100 in a state in which the setting key is turned from OFF to ON while the power is OFF.

<Notification Means (Display Means)>
The slot machine 100 is provided with a display means capable of displaying information as one of the notification means. Examples of the display means provided in the slot machine 100 include a liquid crystal display (performance image display device) 157 shown in Fig. 14(a) and a setting value display device 101a, as well as the payout number display device 127, the reserved number display device 125, and the game information display device 126 described with reference to Fig. 1, and these display means are composed of a liquid crystal display device, an LED, a segment display device, and the like in this example.

<Notification Means (Sound Output Means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of the notification means. Examples of the sound output means included in the slot machine 100 include speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG.

<Notification Means (Light Emitting Means)>
The slot machine 100 is provided with a light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of the notification means. Examples of the light emitting means provided in the slot machine 100 include the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, and title panel (lamp) 162 shown in Fig. 14(a), as well as the performance button 190, stop buttons 137 to 139, start lever 135, and reel backlights (not shown) of the reels 110 to 112 described with reference to Fig. 1, and in this example, all of these light emitting means are formed of LEDs.

The effect button 190, stop buttons (stop operation means) 137 to 139, and start lever 135 also function as operation means that can be operated by the player. The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines, and examples of light-emitting means that pachinko machines are equipped with include frame lamps, effect buttons, and gadgets.

<Settings change/settings confirmation mode>
Next, prior to describing various notifications, the setting change/setting confirmation mode will be described.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment can transition to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed (setting change) when the front door 102 (door body) is opened and a certain operation (turning from off to on) is performed using a setting key provided inside the main body 101 and the power is turned on (or when the setting key is turned from off to on before a predetermined time has elapsed after the power is turned on (before the control unit checks the on/off state of the setting key)).

Here, changing the setting means changing the setting value of the gaming machine. In this example, the setting value (one of settings 1 to 6) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a, and each time a press operation of the operating means (setting switch) is detected, the currently set setting value 1 to 6 is incremented by 1, and when the setting value exceeds 6, it returns to 1. This process is repeated, making it possible to change the setting value.

In addition, in the setting change mode, when a pressing operation is received using the operating means (in this example, the start lever 135), the setting value is confirmed, and when a certain operation using the setting key is released (in this example, when the setting key is removed after an operation to change it from on to off is performed), the state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode) ends, and the game transitions to a normal game state in which normal play is possible. Note that "release of a certain operation" is not limited to "an operation to change the setting key from on to off and then removing the setting key", and may also be "an operation to change the setting key from on to off".

Note that if the operation means (start lever 135) is operated without pressing the operation means (setting switch), or if the operation means (start lever 135) is operated after the setting value has gone through one cycle (for example, setting 5 → setting 6 → setting 1 → ... → setting 5) by repeatedly pressing the operation means (setting switch), the setting will be the same as the previous setting.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment can transition to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation) when a certain operation (turning from off to on) is performed using a setting key provided inside the main body 101 after the front door 102 (door body) is opened and the power is turned on.

Here, checking the settings refers to checking the setting values of the gaming machine. In this example, by pressing the operating means (setting switch), the initially set value (for example, setting 1) or the setting value set by changing the setting (any of settings 1 to 6) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a, making it possible to check the setting value.

In addition, in the setting confirmation mode, when a certain operation using the setting key is released (in this example, the setting key is removed after the operation to change it from on to off) and the front door 102 is closed, the state in which the setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode) ends and the game transitions to a normal game state in which normal play is possible. Note that "release of a certain operation" is not limited to "the operation of removing the setting key after performing the operation to change the setting key from on to off" and may also be "the operation of changing the setting key from on to off".

In this specification, the setting change mode in which settings can be changed and the setting confirmation mode in which settings can be confirmed are sometimes collectively referred to as the setting change/setting confirmation mode, and the setting change/setting confirmation mode includes a setting change mode in which only settings can be changed, a setting confirmation mode in which only settings can be confirmed, and a mode in which both settings can be changed and confirmed.

<Various Notifications>
Next, various notifications that can be performed by the gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 14 to FIG.

<Various notifications/First state, first notification>
The notification means of the gaming machine in this embodiment is configured to execute a first notification in a first state in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch and operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted.

The first state is a state in which the detection means (in this example, an open/close sensor) detects that the door (in this example, the front door 102) is open.

Figure 14(b) is a front view showing an example of the first notification being executed in the first state. In this example, the power is turned from off to on while a certain operation (turning from off to on) is performed with the setting key, and the state transitions to a state in which the settings can be changed (setting change mode), resulting in a first state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects that the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to the setting change (in this example, operation of the setting switch or operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted, and the first notification is executed in this first state.

The notification mode of the first notification is not particularly limited, but in the first notification IF1 of this example, the first display notification IF1a is executed by displaying a message including the character string "Settings are being changed" in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the first audio notification IF1b is executed by outputting the audio message "Settings are being changed" from the speakers 272, 277, and the first light emission notification IF1c is executed by turning on all the upper lamps 142 and side lamps 144 to emit white light and turning on the title panel (lamp) 162 in white.

Also, since the state has shifted to one in which the setting can be changed, the setting value display device 101a displays a number (in this example, 1) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 1).

The notification mode of the first notification is not limited to this example, and may be one, more, or all of the following: notification by a display means (liquid crystal display device), notification by a sound output means (speaker), and notification by a light emitting means (lamp). Notification may also be made by a movable body in addition to (or instead of) these.

The first notification is not limited to a notification that indicates that a setting change is being made, but may be, for example, a display that indicates that operations related to the setting change are possible (for example, a display including a character string such as "Setting change operations are possible" or a display including a character string such as "Setting switch operations are valid").

<Various notifications/second state, second notification>
The notification means of the gaming machine in this embodiment is configured to execute a second notification in a second state in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch or operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted.

The second state is a state in which the detection means (in this example, an open/close sensor) detects that the door (in this example, the front door 102) is closed.

Figure 14 (c) is a front view showing an example of executing the second notification in the second state.

In this example, after a certain operation (turning from off to on) is performed using the setting key, the power is turned from off to on, transitioning to a state in which settings can be changed (setting change mode), and then the front door 102 is closed, resulting in a second state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is closed and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch or operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted, and a second notification is issued in this second state.

The notification mode of the second notification is not particularly limited, but in this example, the second notification IF2 executes the second display notification IF2a by displaying a message including the character string "Please make settings changes with the door open using the door key" in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, executes the second audio notification IF2b by outputting a voice message "Please make settings changes with the door open using the door key" from the speakers 272, 277, and executes the second light emission notification IF2c by turning on all the upper lamps 142 and side lamps 144 to emit white light and turning on the title panel (lamp) 162 in white.

In addition, after the state shifted to one in which the setting could be changed, the setting value was changed from setting 1 to setting 2, and so the setting value display device 101a displays a number (in this example, 2) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 2).

According to this example, the notification means executes a first notification in a first state in which an operation related to a setting change can be accepted (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is open), and executes a second notification different from the first notification in a second state in which an operation related to a setting change can be accepted (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is closed and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed). Therefore, based on the notification mode by the notification means, a staff member at the gaming establishment can understand the state of the gaming machine at the time of the setting change and can appropriately execute the setting change.

The first state is a state in which the detection means (in this example, an open/close sensor) detects that the door (in this example, the front door 102) is open, and the second state is a state in which the detection means detects that the door is closed. Since the notification differs depending on whether the door is open or closed, amusement store staff can appropriately change the settings. Also, since the notification differs depending on whether the door is open or closed while the amusement store is open, amusement store staff may be able to notice the fraudulent behavior of a fraudster.

The second state is not limited to a state in which the front door 102 is closed and the opening/closing sensor detects the front door 102 being closed, but may also be a state in which the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects the front door 102 being closed.

According to this example, in the second state (in this example, a state in which the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed), the door (in this example, the front door 102) may be closed or open, and even if the door is artificially closed by a fraudster while the amusement establishment is open, the second notification is issued, so that a staff member at the amusement establishment may be able to notice the fraudulent behavior of the fraudster.

The notification mode of the second notification is not limited to this example, and may be one, more than one, or all of the following: notification by a display means (liquid crystal display device), notification by a sound output means (speaker), and notification by a light emitting means (lamp). Notification may also be made by a movable body in addition to (or instead of) these.

The second notification is not limited to a notification that warns about the setting change, but may be, for example, a display that suggests that operations related to the setting change are impossible (for example, a display including the string "Setting change operations are not possible" or "Operation of the setting switch is invalid"), or a notification that encourages an operation that allows the setting change (for example, a display including the string "Please close the door").

<Settings change operation>
Next, a specific example of the setting change operation will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

To explain the terms used in the figure, "power switch" is the "power switch" described with reference to FIG. 2, "door state" indicates the state (closed or open) of the door (front door 102), and "door sensor" is the "open/close sensor (detection means)" described with reference to FIG. 1.

The "setting key" is the "setting key" described using FIG. 1, the "setting value display means" is the "setting value display device 101a" described using FIG. 1 and FIG. 14, and the external centralized terminal board LED is the "external centralized terminal board LED" described using FIG. 1.

The "liquid crystal display device" is the "liquid crystal display device 157 (display means)" described with reference to FIG. 1, the title panel lamp is the title panel lamp 162 (light-emitting means) described with reference to FIG. 14, the upper and side lamps are the upper lamp 142 (light-emitting means) and the side lamp 144 (light-emitting means) described with reference to FIG. 14, and the speaker is the speakers 272 and 277 (sound output means) described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 14.

<Example 1 of setting change operation>
FIG. 15A is a diagram showing a first example of a setting change operation in time series.

<Example of setting change operation 1/Power OFF, Door Closed>
The state shown in FIG. 15( a ) ( 1 ) is one in which the power switch is OFF (power OFF), the front door 102 is closed, and the setting key is OFF.

In this state, since no power is being supplied to the slot machine 100, the setting value display means is not displayed, the external central terminal board LED, the liquid crystal display device, the title panel lamp, and the upper and side lamps are all turned off, and the speaker has stopped emitting sound.

<Example of setting change operation 1/Power OFF, door closed → door open, setting key ON>
The state shown in Figure 15 (a) (2) is the state in which, in the state shown in the same figure (a) (1) where the power is OFF, the doors are closed, and the setting key is OFF, the front door 102 is opened, and the setting key inside the main body 101 is turned from OFF to ON.

In this state, the front door 102 changes from a closed state to an open state, and the setting key changes from OFF to ON, so the power switch is OFF (power OFF), the front door 102 is open, and the setting key changes to the ON state, but since no power is being supplied to the slot machine 100, the setting value display means is not displayed, the external central terminal board LED, the liquid crystal display device, the title panel lamp, and the upper and side lamps are all turned off, and the speaker has stopped outputting sound.

<Example 1 of setting change operation/Power OFF→Power ON, first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(3) is the state in which the power switch is turned from OFF to ON in the state shown in FIG. 15(a)(2) with the power OFF, the door open, and the setting key ON.

In this state, the power switch changes from ON to OFF, and the power goes from OFF to ON, so the door sensor detects the door being opened and changes to ON, the setting value display means displays a number indicating the current setting value (in this example, 1 indicating setting 1), and the external centralized terminal board LED lights up to indicate that a control signal (in this example, information indicating that the setting is being changed) is being output from the external centralized terminal board.

In addition, since the device is now in a first state (in this example, the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects that the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted, a first notification is issued in this first state.

Specifically, similar to the first notification IF1 described using FIG. 14(b), the first display notification IF1a is executed by displaying a message including the character string "Settings are being changed" in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the first audio notification IF1b is executed by outputting the audio message "Settings are being changed" from the speakers 272, 277, and the first light emission notification IF1c is executed by turning on all the upper lamps 142 and side lamps 144 to emit white light and turning on the title panel (lamp) 162 in white.

<Example 1 of setting change operation/Door open, first alarm → Door close, second alarm>
The state shown in FIG. 15( a ) ( 4 ) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed in the state shown in FIG. 15( a ) ( 3 ) in which the door is open, the setting key is ON, and the first alarm is being executed.

In this state, the front door 102 changes from an open state to a closed state, so the door sensor detects the door closure and changes from ON to OFF, but the setting value display means continues to display and the external central terminal board LED continues to light up.

In addition, since the state has changed from a first state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted to a second state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is closed and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed), a second notification is executed in the second state.

Specifically, in this example, similar to the second notification IF2 described using FIG. 14(c), the second display notification IF2a is executed by displaying a message including the character string "Please make settings changes with the door open using the door key" in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the second audio notification IF2b is executed by outputting a voice message "Please make settings changes with the door open using the door key" from the speakers 272, 277, and the second light emission notification IF2c is executed by turning on all the upper lamps 142 and side lamps 144 to emit white light and turning on the title panel (lamp) 162 in white.

<Example 1 of setting change operation/Door closed, second alarm → Door open, first alarm>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(5) is a state in which the front door 102 is open in the state shown in FIG. 15(a)(4) where the door is closed, the setting key is ON, and the second notification is being executed.

In this state, the front door 102 changes from a closed state to an open state, and the state changes from a second state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is closed and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted to a first state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is open), and therefore a first notification is executed in the first state.

Specifically, similar to the first notification IF1 described using FIG. 14(b), the first display notification IF1a is executed by displaying a message including the character string "Settings are being changed" in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the first audio notification IF1b is executed by outputting the audio message "Settings are being changed" from the speakers 272, 277, and the first light emission notification IF1c is executed by turning on all the upper lamps 142 and side lamps 144 to emit white light and turning on the title panel (lamp) 162 in white.

<Example 1 of setting change operation/setting change operation during door opening and first alarm execution>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(6) is a state in which a setting change operation is performed in the state shown in FIG. 15(a)(5) where the door is open, the setting key is ON, and the first alarm is being executed.

In this state, since an operation (setting change operation) of the first operating means (in this example, the setting switch) is performed in a first state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects that the front door 102 is open) in which an operation related to a setting change (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted, the setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 2 while continuing the first notification, and the setting value display means displays a number indicating the changed setting value (in this example, 2 indicating setting 2).

<Example 1 of setting change operation/Door open, setting key ON, lever operation during first alarm>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(7) is the state in which the start lever 135 is pressed after the setting change operation shown in FIG. 15(a)(6).

In this state, since an operation of the first operating means (in this example, an operation to confirm the setting value using the start lever 135) has been performed in a first state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects that the front door 102 is open) in which an operation related to a setting change (in this example, an operation of the setting switch or an operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted, the setting value is confirmed to Setting 2 while continuing the first notification, and the setting value display means displays a numerical value (in this example, 0) indicating that the setting value has been confirmed.

<Example 1 of setting change operation/Door open, setting key ON, setting key OFF during first alarm>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(8) is the state in which the setting key is turned from ON to OFF after the lever operation shown in FIG. 15(a)(7).

In this state, the setting key has changed from ON to OFF (a certain operation using the setting key has been released), so the first state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects that the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to the setting change can be accepted (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) ends, and the game transitions to a normal game state in which normal play is possible, the first notification ends, and a notification of the completion of the setting change and a demo performance begin.

Specifically, the speaker 272, 277 outputs a voice message saying "Settings have been changed" to notify the user that the setting change mode has ended, a demo animation is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are lit in a demo pattern corresponding to the demo performance, and the title panel (lamp) 162 is lit in white.

<Example 1 of setting change operation/Door open, setting key OFF → setting key ON>
The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(9) is a state in which the setting key is turned ON, in the OFF state shown in FIG. 15(a)(8).

In this state, since the setting key has changed from OFF to ON while the power is ON (a certain operation has been performed using the setting key), the device enters a third state (in this example, the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor has detected that the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to setting confirmation (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted, and a setting confirmation notification is issued in the first state.

Specifically, a setting confirmation notification display is executed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 by displaying the character string "Checking settings" to indicate that the settings can be checked, a setting confirmation audio notification is executed by outputting a sound "Checking settings" from the speakers 272, 277 to indicate that the settings can be checked, and a setting confirmation light notification is executed by lighting up all the upper lamps 142 and side lamps 144 to emit blue light and lighting up the title panel (lamp) 162 in blue to indicate that the settings can be checked.

<Example 2 of setting change operation>
Fig. 15(b) is a time-series diagram showing Example 2 of the setting change operation. Note that Fig. 15(b)(1) to Fig. 15(b)(3), Fig. 15(b)(8), and Fig. 15(b)(9) are in the same state as Fig. 15(a)(1) to Fig. 15(a)(3), Fig. 15(a)(8), and Fig. 15(a)(9), so their explanation will be omitted.

<Example 2 of setting change operation/Door open, setting key ON, setting change operation during first alarm>
The state shown in FIG. 15(b)(4) is a state in which a setting change operation is performed in the state shown in FIG. 15(b)(3) where the door is open, the setting key is ON, and the first alarm is being issued.

In this state, since an operation (setting change operation) of the first operating means (in this example, the setting switch) is performed in a first state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects that the front door 102 is open) in which an operation related to a setting change (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted, the setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 2 while continuing the first notification, and the setting value display means displays a number indicating the changed setting value (in this example, 2 indicating setting 2).

<Example 2 of setting change operation/Door open, first alarm → Door close, second alarm>
The state shown in FIG. 15(b)(5) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed in the state shown in FIG. 15(b)(4) where the door is open and the setting key is ON.

In this state, the front door 102 changes from an open state to a closed state, so the door sensor detects the door closure and changes from ON to OFF, but the setting value display means continues to display and the external central terminal board LED continues to light up.

In addition, since the state has changed from a first state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted to a second state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is closed and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed), a second notification is executed in the second state.

Specifically, in this example, similar to the second notification IF2 described using FIG. 14(c), the second display notification IF2a is executed by displaying a message including the character string "Please make settings changes with the door open using the door key" in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the second audio notification IF2b is executed by outputting a voice message "Please make settings changes with the door open using the door key" from the speakers 272, 277, and the second light emission notification IF2c is executed by turning on all the upper lamps 142 and side lamps 144 to emit white light and turning on the title panel (lamp) 162 in white.

<Example 2 of setting change operation/Door closed, setting key ON, lever operation during second alarm>
The state shown in FIG. 15(b) (6) is the state in which the start lever 135 is pressed while the door is closed, the setting key is ON, and the second notification is being given as shown in FIG. 15(b) (5).

In this state, since the first operating means is operated (in this example, the start lever 135 is used to confirm the setting value) in a second state (in this example, the front door 102 is closed and the open/close sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed) in which an operation related to a setting change (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted, the second notification is continued, the setting value is confirmed to Setting 2, and the setting value display means displays a number (in this example, 0) indicating that the setting value has been confirmed.

In this example, when an operation of the first operating means (in this example, a setting value confirmation operation using the start lever 135) is performed in a first state (in this example, a state in which the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is open), the operation is accepted, and when an operation of the first operating means (in this example, a setting value confirmation operation using the start lever 135) is performed in a second state (in this example, a state in which the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed), the operation is accepted.

According to this example, operation using the first operating means is accepted in both the first and second states, thereby improving convenience for game center staff.

In addition, in this example, a first notification (in this example, first notification IF1 shown in FIG. 14(b)) is executed before and after the operation of the first operating means is executed in the first state (in this example, the state in which the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is open), and a second notification (in this example, second notification IF2 shown in FIG. 14(c)) is executed before and after the operation of the first operating means is executed in the first state.

In this example, the same notification is issued before and after the operation of the first operating means is performed, allowing game store staff to understand the state of the gaming machine and make appropriate setting changes.

<Example 2 of setting change operation/Door closed, second alarm → Door open, first alarm>
The state shown in FIG. 15(b)(7) is the state in which the front door 102 is opened after the lever operation shown in FIG. 15(b)(6).

In this state, the front door 102 changes from a closed state to an open state, and the state changes from a second state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is closed and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted to a first state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is open), and therefore a first notification is executed in the first state.

Specifically, similar to the first notification IF1 described using FIG. 14(b), the first display notification IF1a is executed by displaying a message including the character string "Settings are being changed" in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the first audio notification IF1b is executed by outputting the audio message "Settings are being changed" from the speakers 272, 277, and the first light emission notification IF1c is executed by turning on all the upper lamps 142 and side lamps 144 to emit white light and turning on the title panel (lamp) 162 in white.

<Example 3 of setting change operation>
Fig. 16(a) is a time-series diagram showing Example 3 of the setting change operation. Note that Fig. 16(a)(3), Fig. 16(a)(10) to Fig. 16(a)(11) are in the same state as Fig. 15(b)(3), Fig. 15(b)(8) to Fig. 15(b)(9), and so their explanation will be omitted.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/Door open, door sensor ON→door sensor OFF, second notification>
The state shown in FIG. 16(a)(4) is a state in which, in the state shown in FIG. 16(a)(3) where the door is open and the setting key is ON, the door sensor is forcibly turned OFF with the front door 102 left open.

In this state, when the front door 102 is open, a light-shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light-emitting and light-receiving parts of the door sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like to block the light from the light-emitting part of the door sensor of the main body 101. This forces the detection state of the door sensor to a closed detection state (pseudo-closed door) even when the front door 102 is open. As a result, the door sensor detects the door being closed and changes from ON to OFF, but the setting value display means continues to display and the external central terminal board LED continues to light up.

In addition, since the state has changed from a first state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted to a second state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed), a second notification is executed in the second state.

Specifically, in this example, similar to the second notification IF2 described using FIG. 14(c), the second display notification IF2a is executed by displaying a message including the character string "Please make settings changes with the door open using the door key" in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the second audio notification IF2b is executed by outputting a voice message "Please make settings changes with the door open using the door key" from the speakers 272, 277, and the second light emission notification IF2c is executed by turning on all the upper lamps 142 and side lamps 144 to emit white light and turning on the title panel (lamp) 162 in white.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/Setting change operation during door pseudo-closure and second alarm>
The state shown in FIG. 16(a)(5) is a state in which a setting change operation is performed during the pseudo door closure and second notification shown in FIG. 16(a)(4).

In this state, since an operation (setting change operation) of the first operating means (in this example, the setting switch) is performed in a second state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed) in which an operation related to a setting change (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted, the second notification is continued while the setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 2, and the setting value display means displays a number indicating the changed setting value (in this example, 2 indicating setting 2).

<Example 3 of setting change operation/Door pseudo-close, lever operation during second alarm>
The state shown in FIG. 16(a)(6) is a state in which the start lever 135 is pressed after the setting change operation shown in FIG. 16(a)(5).

In this state, since an operation (operation to confirm the setting change) of the first operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) is performed in a second state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed) in which an operation related to a setting change (in this example, operation of the setting switch or operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted, the second notification is continued, the setting value is confirmed to Setting 2, and the setting value display means displays a numerical value (in this example, 0) indicating that the setting value has been confirmed.

<Example 3 of setting change operation/Setting key OFF during door pseudo-close and second alarm>
The state shown in FIG. 16(a)(7) is the state in which the setting key is turned from ON to OFF after the lever operation shown in FIG. 16(a)(6).

In this state, in the second state (in this example, the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed), an operation of the first operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) (an operation to confirm the setting change) is performed, and then an operation of the second operating means (in this example, an operation to turn the setting key from ON to OFF) is performed. Therefore, the operation of the second operating means is not accepted, and the setting change mode is maintained while the second notification continues (the setting change mode cannot be ended).

In this example, when the first operating means (in this example, a setting value confirmation operation using the start lever 135) is performed in the first state (in this example, a state in which the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is open) and then the second operating means (in this example, an operation to turn the setting key from ON to OFF) is performed, the operation of the second operating means is accepted, whereas when the first operating means (in this example, a setting value confirmation operation using the start lever 135) is performed in the second state (in this example, a state in which the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed) and then the second operating means (in this example, an operation to turn the setting key from ON to OFF) is performed, the operation of the second operating means is not accepted.

In this example, since the operation of the second operating means is not accepted in the second state, the arcade staff can understand that the operation of the second operating means is not accepted in the second state, and can understand the current state based on whether the operation of the second operating means is accepted.

The notification means may continue to execute the second notification even if the second operating means is operated (the setting key is turned from ON to OFF) during execution of the second notification. According to this example, the second notification is executed even if a fraudster operates the setting key while the gaming establishment is open, so that a staff member of the gaming establishment may be able to notice the fraudster's fraudulent behavior.

The notification means may continue to execute the second notification even if the second operating means is operated (the setting key is removed) during execution of the second notification. According to this example, the second notification is executed even if the setting key is removed by a fraudster while the gaming establishment is open, so that a staff member of the gaming establishment may be able to notice the fraudulent act of the fraudster.

<Example 3 of setting change operation / Setting key OFF → Setting key ON during door pseudo-close and second alarm>
The state shown in FIG. 16(a)(8) is a state in which the setting key is turned ON, in the OFF state shown in FIG. 16(a)(7).

In this state, in the second state (in this example, the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed), an operation of the first operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) (an operation to confirm the setting change) is performed, and then an operation of the second operating means (in this example, an operation to turn the setting key from OFF to ON) is performed. Therefore, the operation of the second operating means is not accepted, and the setting change mode is maintained while the second notification continues.

<Example 3 of setting change operation / Door pseudo-close, second alarm → Door open, first alarm>
The state shown in FIG. 16( a ) ( 9 ) is a state in which the front door 102 is open during the door pseudo-close and second alarm shown in FIG. 16( a ) ( 8 ).

In this state, the front door 102 changes from a closed state to an open state, and the state changes from a second state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted to a first state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is open), and therefore a first notification is executed in the first state.

Specifically, similar to the first notification IF1 described using FIG. 14(b), the first display notification IF1a is executed by displaying a message including the character string "Settings are being changed" in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the first audio notification IF1b is executed by outputting the audio message "Settings are being changed" from the speakers 272, 277, and the first light emission notification IF1c is executed by turning on all the upper lamps 142 and side lamps 144 to emit white light and turning on the title panel (lamp) 162 in white.

<Example 4 of setting change operation>
Fig. 16(b) is a time-series diagram showing Example 4 of the setting change operation. Note that Fig. 16(b)(1) to Fig. 16(b)(7) are in the same state as Fig. 15(a)(1) to Fig. 15(a)(7), so their explanation will be omitted.

<Example 4 of setting change operation/Error occurs>
The state shown in FIG. 16(b)(0) is a state in which an error (first error) has occurred.

In this state, an error occurs when the power is ON, the door is open, and the setting key is OFF, so an error notification is issued to indicate that an error has occurred.

Specifically, an error display (in this example, a display including the string "First error has occurred") is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, an error sound (in this example, a sound saying "First error has occurred") is output from the speakers 272, 277 indicating that a first error has occurred, the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 are lit in an error notification mode (in this example, they flash red) indicating that a first error has occurred, and an error code is displayed on the dispensed coin count display 127, thereby executing the error notification.

The errors (first errors) that may occur in the slot machine 100 include medal insertion anomalies 1 to 4, medal payout anomalies 1 to 3, overflow anomalies, RAM failures, winning anomalies, etc.

Medal insertion error 1 occurs when an inserted medal becomes stuck, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E1. Medal insertion error 1 is resolved when the cause of the error is removed and the error release switch (setting switch in this example) is operated. Medal insertion error 2 occurs when the number of medals inserted is equal to or exceeds a specified number, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E2. Medal insertion error 2 is resolved by changing the setting value or clearing the RAM (or clearing the RAM, clearing the RWM, initializing the RWM).

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 turns on except when the medal insertion process is in progress, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E3. Medal insertion error 4 occurs when the inserted medal does not pass through insertion sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2 normally, and the corresponding error code is, for example, EA. Medal insertion error 3 and medal insertion error 4 are resolved when the cause of the error is removed and the error release switch (setting switch in this example) is operated.

Medal payout error 1 occurs when no medals are paid out for a certain period of time while the medal payout device is operating, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E4. Medal payout error 2 occurs when medals are stuck when the medal payout device is operating, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E5. Medal payout error 3 occurs when either payout sensor 1 or payout sensor 2 turns on except when a medal payout process is in progress, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E5. Medal payout errors 1 to 3 are all resolved when the cause of the error is removed and the error release switch (in this example, the setting switch) is operated.

An overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the auxiliary medal storage is turned on, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E7. The overflow abnormality is resolved when the cause of the error is removed and the operation of the error reset switch (the setting switch in this example) is accepted. A RAM failure occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM 308, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E8. The RAM failure is resolved when the operation of the error reset switch (the setting key in this example) is accepted. A winning abnormality occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning symbol determined by internal lottery is won after the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E9. The winning abnormality is resolved when the operation of the error reset switch (the setting switch in this example) is accepted.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the slot machine 100, but can also be applied to pachinko machines. Examples of errors (first errors) that can occur in pachinko machines include a lower tray full error, a payout device error, an overpayout error, an illegal payout error, a main control unit communication error, a magnetic anomaly error, a magnetic field anomaly error, a frame open error, a RAM clear error, and an impact sensor error. These errors are also cleared when the error cause is removed and the error release switch is operated.

<Example 4 of setting change operation/Error occurs, setting key ON, setting key OFF during first notification>
The state shown in FIG. 16(b)(8) is the state in which the setting key is turned from ON to OFF after the lever operation shown in FIG. 16(b)(7).

In this state, since the setting key has changed from ON to OFF (a certain operation using the setting key has been released), the first state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor has detected that the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to setting changes (in this example, operation of the setting switch or operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted is ended, and the game transitions to a normal game state in which normal play is possible, the first notification is ended, and the error notification that was suspended in the setting change mode is resumed.

Specifically, an error display (in this example, a display including the character string "First error has occurred") is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, an error sound (in this example, a sound "First error has occurred") is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and an error sound is generated from the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 143.
The error notification is performed by lighting up indicator 44 in an error notification mode (in this example, flashing red) to indicate that a first error has occurred, and displaying an error code on the number of coins dispensed display 127.

<Example 4 of setting change operation/Error occurs, setting key OFF → Error resolved>
The state shown in FIG. 16(b)(9) is the state shown in FIG. 16(b)(8) when an error occurs and the setting key OF
In state F, the error is eliminated and the reset switch is turned ON.

In this state, the error is resolved and the reset SW has changed from OFF to ON, so the first state (in this example, a state in which the front door 102 is open and the open/close sensor detects that the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to the setting change can be accepted (in this example, the operation of the setting switch or the operation of the start lever 135) is terminated, and the game transitions to a normal game state in which normal gameplay is possible, the error notification is terminated, and a notification of the completion of the setting change and a demo performance are started.

Specifically, the speaker 272, 277 outputs a voice message saying "Settings have been changed" to notify the user that the setting change mode has ended, a demo animation is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the upper lamp 142 and side lamp 144 are lit in a demo pattern, and the title panel (lamp) 162 is lit in white.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with an alarm means (e.g., the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. 3, and various lamps), and the alarm means issues a first alarm (e.g., a warning light as shown in FIG. 14(b)) in a first state (e.g., a state in which the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is open) in which an operation related to a setting change (e.g., an operation of the setting switch or an operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted. The gaming machine may be characterized in that the notification means is a means for executing a second notification (e.g., a second notification IF2 shown in FIG. 14(c)) in a second state in which an operation related to a setting change can be accepted (e.g., a state in which the front door 102 is closed and the opening/closing sensor detects the front door 102 being closed, or a state in which the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects the front door 102 being closed), and the second notification is different from the first notification.

With the gaming machine according to this embodiment, the staff at the gaming establishment can understand the state of the gaming machine when the settings are changed based on the notification mode of the notification means, and can appropriately carry out the setting change.

The device may also be provided with a first operating means (e.g., a start lever 135), and when an operation of the first operating means (e.g., an operation to confirm a set value using the start lever 135) is performed in the first state, the operation is accepted, and when an operation of the first operating means is performed in the second state, the operation is accepted.

With this configuration, operation using the first operating means is accepted in both the first and second states, improving convenience for game center staff.

The device may also be provided with a second operating means (e.g., a setting key), and when the first operating means (e.g., an operation to confirm a setting value using the start lever 135) is operated in the first state and then the second operating means (e.g., an operation to turn the setting key from ON to OFF) is performed, the operation of the second operating means is accepted, and when the second operating means is operated in the second state and then the operation of the first operating means is performed, the operation of the second operating means is not accepted.

With this configuration, since operation of the second operating means is not accepted in the second state, the arcade staff can understand that operation of the second operating means is not accepted in the second state, and can also understand the current state based on whether or not operation of the second operating means is accepted.

The notification means may be a means for executing the first notification before and after the operation of the first operating means (e.g., the operation of confirming a set value using the start lever 135) is performed in the first state, and the notification means may be a means for executing the second notification before and after the operation of the first operating means is performed in the first state.

With this configuration, the same notification is issued before and after the first operating means is operated, allowing game store staff to understand the state of the gaming machine and make appropriate setting changes.

The device may also include a detection means (e.g., an open/close sensor) that detects the open/closed state of a door (e.g., the front door 102), and the first state may be a state in which the detection means detects that the door is open, and the second state may be a state in which the detection means detects that the door is closed.

With this configuration, the notification differs depending on whether the door is open or closed, allowing arcade staff to change the settings appropriately. Also, because the notification differs depending on whether the door is open or closed while the arcade is open, arcade staff may be able to notice the fraudulent behavior of a fraudster.

In addition, in the second state, the door may be closed, and in the second state, the door may be open.

With this configuration, even if the door is artificially closed by a fraudster while the gaming establishment is open, the second notification will be sent, so that the gaming establishment staff may be able to notice the fraudster's fraudulent actions.

The first notification is not limited to a notification that indicates that a setting change is being made, but may be, for example, a display that indicates that operations related to the setting change are possible (for example, a display including a character string such as "Setting change operations are possible" or a display including a character string such as "Setting switch operations are valid").

The first notification may be, in addition to (or instead of) a notification indicating that the settings are being changed, a notification indicating that the opening/closing sensor is detecting that the door is open (for example, a display including a string such as "Door is open", a voice output such as "Door is open", flashing of various lamps, etc.).

The second notification is not limited to a notification that warns about the setting change, but may be, for example, a display that suggests that operations related to the setting change are impossible (for example, a display including the string "Setting change operations are not possible" or "Operation of the setting switch is invalid"), or a notification that encourages an operation that allows the setting change (for example, a display including the string "Please close the door").

In addition to (or instead of) a warning about the setting change, the second notification may be a notification indicating that the opening/closing sensor is detecting the door being closed (for example, a display including the text "Door is closed" or "Door is pseudo-closed", a sound such as "Door is closed" or "Door is pseudo-closed", flashing of various lamps, etc.).

The first operating means is not limited to the start lever 135 or the setting switch, but may be other operating means such as a performance button, and the second operating means is not limited to the setting key, but may be other operating means such as a reset switch.

In addition, even if an error (e.g., medal insertion abnormality 1-4, medal payout abnormality 1-3, overflow abnormality, RAM failure, winning abnormality, etc.) occurs in the gaming machine, the notification means may execute the first notification (e.g., first notification IF1 shown in FIG. 14(b)) without executing an error notification in a first state (e.g., a state in which the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is open) in which operations related to setting changes (e.g., operation of a setting switch or operation of the start lever 135) can be accepted.

With this configuration, the first notification can be given priority over the error notification, which increases convenience for game center staff.

In addition, even if an error (e.g., medal insertion abnormality 1-4, medal payout abnormality 1-3, overflow abnormality, RAM failure, winning abnormality, etc.) occurs in the gaming machine, the notification means may execute the second notification (e.g., second notification IF2 shown in FIG. 14(c)) in a second state in which an operation related to a setting change can be accepted (e.g., a state in which the front door 102 is closed and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed, or a state in which the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed).

With this configuration, the first notification can be given priority over the error notification, which increases convenience for game center staff.

In addition, in a state where the certain error occurs, the first state (e.g., a state where the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects the open state of the front door 102) or the second state (e.g., a state where the front door 102 is closed and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102, or a state where the front door 102 is open and the opening/closing sensor detects the closed state of the front door 102) is entered, and then, in a state where the first state or the second state ends and the certain error continues, the notification means may execute an error notification indicating that the certain error has occurred (e.g., an error display indicating that a certain error has occurred, output of an error sound indicating that a certain error has occurred, or lighting of a lamp in an error notification mode indicating that a certain error has occurred) instead of the first notification or the second notification.

This configuration ensures that errors can be dealt with reliably after a setting change operation is performed.

<<Other embodiments>>
Hereinafter, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as a slot machine 100 or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to Figures 17 to 32. Note that the reference numerals shown in Figures 17 to 32 are used in principle only in the description using Figures 17 to 32, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in Figures 17 to 32 take precedence in the description using Figures 17 to 32.

Figure 17 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 is a gaming machine in which a predetermined number of gaming media are inserted, and multiple reels with multiple types of symbols each start spinning when a predetermined spin start command is received, and a lottery is held to determine whether multiple types of internal winning combinations have been won based on the reception of the spin start command, and each of the multiple reels stops spinning individually when a predetermined spin stop command is received. If the conditions determined by the combination of symbols when the multiple reels stop based on the lottery results match the predetermined payout conditions, gaming media is paid out and the game ends, but if they do not match, the game ends without paying out any gaming media. The payout of the gaming media is sometimes called a profit. Also, something that makes it easier to obtain this profit is sometimes called a privilege.

This slot machine 100 comprises a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed relative to the main body 101. The front door 102 is a door member that is rotatably attached to the main body 101. The front door 102 is provided with a locking function so that the front door 102 cannot be opened by anyone other than a member of staff at the gaming establishment.

Three reels (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of patterns arranged on the outer periphery are housed inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are rotated by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

Each symbol is printed at equal intervals on a strip-shaped member in appropriate numbers, and this strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110-112. When viewed by the player, the symbols on the reels 110-112 are displayed vertically in roughly threes through the symbol display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible.

Figure 18 shows an example of a line.

To explain this in more detail using FIG. 18, the symbol displayed on the top of the left reel 110 (position 1 in the figure) is the left reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle of the left reel 110 (position 4 in the figure) is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the bottom of the left reel 110 (position 7 in the figure) is the left reel bottom symbol, the symbol displayed on the top of the middle reel 111 (position 2 in the figure) is the middle reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle of the left reel 111 (position 5 in the figure) is the middle reel middle symbol, The symbol displayed in the lower row (position 8 in the figure) is called the middle reel lower row symbol, the symbol displayed in the upper row of the right reel 112 (position 3 in the figure) is called the right reel upper row symbol, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 6 in the figure) is called the right reel middle row symbol, and the symbol displayed in the lower row of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure) is called the right reel lower row symbol, and each symbol of the reels 110 to 112 is displayed three vertically on each of the reels 110 to 112 through the symbol display window 113, for a total of nine symbols. Then, by rotating each of the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of multiple types of symbols. In addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices can also be used as such display devices. Additionally, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 has three reels located inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the location where the reels are installed are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is provided on the back of each of the reels 110 to 112 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113. The backlight is configured so that each symbol is shielded so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112, and a light-shielding piece (not shown) of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor (index sensor 730 shown in FIG. 20). The position of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection results of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the pay line.

The active line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the active line 114. An active line is a line (a line where a winning judgment is made) that judges whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role, which will be described later in FIG. 17, is displayed, and a winning role is judged when a symbol corresponding to an internal winning role stops on this active line. Here, a line is an area within the display window 113 that is defined as an area for one symbol on each of the reels 110 to 112. Note that lines other than the active lines, where a winning judgment is not made, are called inactive lines.

18 shows five lines: a middle line L1 consisting of the middle symbol on the left reel, the middle symbol on the middle reel, and the middle symbol on the right reel; a right-downward line L2 consisting of the upper symbol on the left reel, the middle symbol on the middle reel, and the lower symbol on the right reel; a right-upward line L3 consisting of the lower symbol on the left reel, the middle symbol on the middle reel, and the upper symbol on the right reel; an upper line L4 consisting of the upper symbol on the left reel, the upper symbol on the middle reel, and the upper symbol on the right reel; and a lower line L5 consisting of the lower symbol on the left reel, the lower symbol on the middle reel, and the lower symbol on the right reel. These lines are merely examples, and any line that defines an area for one symbol on each of the reels 110 to 112 may be used, such as a line consisting of the upper symbol on the left reel, the lower symbol on the middle reel, and the upper symbol on the right reel. Of the lines shown in FIG. 18, the upper line L4 is used as the active line in this embodiment. The active lines are determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a three-coin bet-only machine, and when the number of medals inserted is less than three, no line is active. When three medals are bet, line L4 is active (used as an active line). When the lines are active, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game. The number of active lines is not limited to one. For example, three lines, the middle line L1, the downward-right line L2, and the upward-right line L3, may be used as active lines, or the number of active lines may correspond to the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery described below, or that a special game state described below is in progress. The medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp that notifies the player that a game medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay combination (details of which will be described later) was won in the previous game, which is one of the winning combinations. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) that are electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one medal is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two medals are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three medals are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 121 lights up to indicate that the game can be started.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot through which the player inserts medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) through the medal insertion slot 141; the term "insertion" includes both.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical form. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning some kind of winning combination. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are seven-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation of the start lever 135 is called the operation to start the game.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 consisting of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each of the reels 110 to 112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right reel 112 can be stopped by operating the right stop button 139. Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. The reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as the first stop reel, the second stop reel, and the third stop reel, respectively. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the reels 110 to 112 that are spinning is called the operation order or push order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called the "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called the "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push". Note that light-emitting elements may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light-emitting elements can be lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that can be pressed to remove medals that have been inserted and become stuck. The settlement button 134 is a button that can be used to settle medals that have been electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals that have been bet, and to dispense them from the medal payout outlet 155.

The front door 102 is also provided with a key hole 140, into which a key is inserted and turned to the right to unlock, and turned to the left to lock. The slot machine 100 is provided with an opening sensor 294 (see FIG. 19(a)) that detects when the front door 102 is open. This opening sensor 294 detects when the front door 102 is open by detecting an opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is open.

In addition, a first chance button 165 and a second chance button 166 are provided between the bet button 132 and the medal insertion slot 141. A first effect lamp is built into the first chance button 165, and a second effect lamp is built into the second chance button 166. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation means operated by the player during the effect. In addition, a left button 167 is provided to the left of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided to the right. By operating the left button 167 and right button 168, it is sometimes possible to move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157, and in such cases, the second chance button 166 may function as a confirmation button.

A title panel 162 is provided below the stop button unit 136, on which the model name is displayed and various certificate stamps are attached. This title panel 162 is illuminated from behind by a title panel lamp 164. A medal payout opening 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162.

The sound hole 145 at the bottom is a hole for outputting sound from the woofer 277 (see FIG. 19) to the outside. The left side lamp 144L on the left side of the front door 102 and the right side lamp 144R on the right side are decorative lamps for livening up the game. A performance device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided at the top of the performance device 160. This sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting sound from the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 19) to the outside. The performance device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and left shutters 163b that can be opened and closed horizontally, and a performance image display device 157 disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the performance image display device 157, the display screen of the performance image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the player's side). The performance image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, but it may be any display device that can display various performance images and various game information, and may be, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. The display screen is rectangular and configured so that the player can view the entire screen. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen, so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear irregular. Furthermore, the display screen is a flat surface, but may also be curved.

Note that what has been referred to as a lamp up until now is an example of a light-emitting means, and in this specification, lamps also refer to devices that use LEDs as light sources, and other devices that emit light, such as fluorescent lamps and cold cathode fluorescent tubes, may also be referred to as lamps, and devices that emit light are examples of light-emitting means.

Figure 19 shows the internal configuration of the slot machine 100, where (a) is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open, and (b) is an enlarged view of the door relay board 290 disposed on the front door 102.

The main body 101 is a box body surrounded by an upper panel 261, a left side panel 260, a right side panel 260, a lower panel 264, and a rear panel 242, and is open to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 is arranged in a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the rear panel 242, and a reel unit 700 equipped with three reels 110 to 112 is arranged below the main control board storage case 210. To the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reel unit 700, i.e., on the left side panel 260, a sub-control board storage case 220 is arranged in which a sub-control board 400B (see FIG. 25) is stored. A first selection switch 190 is provided in the sub-control board storage case 220. Since the first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (e.g., a store clerk) can operate it by opening the front door 102, but a person who cannot unlock the front door 102 (e.g., a player) cannot operate it. In other words, the first selection switch 190 is provided in a position where it cannot be operated by a player. Details of the first selection switch 190 will be described later. In addition, an external centralized terminal board 248 that is connected to the main control board 300B (see FIG. 25) and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side panel 260 on the right side.

Also, to the right of the reel unit 700, there is provided a setting key switch 281 for changing the game mode (also called the setting value) of the slot machine 100 and for confirming the changed setting value. Here, the setting value is a value for adjusting the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets on the gaming machine when playing for a specified period of time, and is known as the "payout rate." Multiple setting values, for example, from setting "1" to setting "6," can be set.

The setting key switch 281 is a key switch that is electrically turned ON/OFF by inserting and rotating a specific setting key (not shown). Specifically, when a specific setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and rotated clockwise, a setting key switch sensor provided in the setting key switch 281 detects the ON state, and when rotated counterclockwise, the setting key switch sensor detects the OFF state.

Then, the hopper unit 180 (a device that dispenses medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the lower panel 264, and above this hopper unit 180, i.e., below the reel unit 700, a power supply device 252 having a power supply control board 252B (see FIG. 25) is disposed, and a power switch 244 is disposed on the front side of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 is a toggle switch electrically connected to the power supply device 252. This power switch 244 can be used to turn the slot machine 100 on (power ON) or off (power OFF). The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and each device, such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400. Furthermore, it is provided with a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off.

To the right of the hopper unit 180, there is disposed an auxiliary medal storage 240 for storing medals that overflow from the hopper unit 180, and behind this is disposed an overflow terminal (not shown). The power supply unit 252 is provided with a power cord connector for connecting a power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to this extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back panel 242 of the main body 101.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side panel 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the pattern display window 113, there are provided the performance device 160, a performance control board (not shown) that controls the performance device 160, and an upper speaker 272. Below the pattern display window 113, there are provided the medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, and a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals, etc. into the medal receiving tray 161. Furthermore, a low-frequency speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145. An open sensor 294 is provided on the back of the front door 102. The open sensor 294 is configured to be L (OFF) when the front door 102 is closed and H (ON) when the front door 102 is open.

A door relay board 290 is disposed on the back of the front door 102 below the pattern display window 113. As shown in FIG. 19(b), this door relay board 290 is provided with a reset switch 291, a setting change button 292, and a setting value display 293.

The reset switch 291 is a push button switch, and an error in the slot machine 100 can be cleared by pressing (shortly pressing) this reset switch 291.

The setting change button 292 is a push button switch similar to the reset switch 291. The operating procedure for changing the setting value using this setting change button 292 will be described later.

The setting value display 293 is a display such as a 7-segment LED. This setting value display 293 can display the game mode (setting value) 1 to 6 set by the setting change button 292 in numbers.

When the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 in the power-on state (power ON) and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), the setting value display 293 displays the currently set game mode (setting value) in numbers, so it can be used to check the currently set game mode. In other words, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 in the power-on state (power ON) and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), a setting value confirmation process that allows the setting value to be confirmed is started, and when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned counterclockwise (setting key ON → OFF), the setting value confirmation process ends.

The procedure for changing the setting value will now be described. The setting key (not shown) is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), and the power switch 244 is switched from a power-off state (power OFF) to a power-on state (power ON), which enables the setting value change (starts the setting value change process). Each time the setting change button 292 is pressed, the game mode (setting value) changes in sequence from 1 to 6, allowing the desired game mode to be selected. The game mode (setting value) selected at that time is confirmed by operating the start lever 135. Finally, the setting key is turned counterclockwise (setting key ON → OFF) to end the setting value change process.

In the following, the period of the setting value change operation, that is, the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key in the setting value change operation to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting key, is also referred to as the setting value change mode, and the period of the setting value confirmation operation, that is, the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key in the setting value confirmation operation to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting key, is also referred to as the setting value confirmation mode. Here, the start conditions and end conditions of the setting value change mode and the setting value confirmation mode are explained in detail. In this embodiment, the start condition of the setting value change mode is (1) the power-on state with the setting key switch 281 in the ON state, and other conditions such as (2) the front door 102 being in the open state are not included. Also, the end condition of the setting value change mode is (1) the setting key switch 281 being changed from the ON state to the OFF state, and (2) the front door 102 being in the open state. Similarly, in this embodiment, the start condition of the setting value confirmation mode is that the setting key switch 281 is turned ON when the power is turned on, and other conditions such as (2) the front door 102 being open are not included. Also, the end condition of the setting value confirmation mode is that (1) the setting key switch 281 is changed from ON to OFF, and (2) the front door 102 is open. That is, in this embodiment, the start condition of the setting value change mode (setting value confirmation mode) does not require the front door 102 to be open, while the end condition of the setting value change mode (setting value confirmation mode) requires the front door 102 to be open. If an attempt is made to start the setting value change process (setting value confirmation process) when the front door 102 is closed, the start condition is cleared, so it is possible to start the setting value change process (setting value confirmation process) based on an illegal act. However, since the end condition cannot be cleared, a person committing fraud cannot end the setting value change process (setting value confirmation process). This makes it easier to catch fraudsters in the act.

In the setting value change mode, a notification indicating that the setting value is being changed (hereinafter also referred to as a "setting value being changed" notification) is made using the effect image display device 157, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the title panel lamp 164, and the speakers 272 and 277, and in the setting value confirmation mode, a notification indicating that the setting value is being confirmed (hereinafter also referred to as a "setting value being confirmed" notification) is made using the above effect devices.

Next, the structure of the reel unit 700 will be described using Figure 20. Figure 20 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the reel unit 700.

As shown in FIG. 20, the reel unit 700 includes a left reel unit 700L, a center reel unit 700C, and a right reel unit 700R in a box-shaped reel case 702 made of a metal plate. The upper part of the reel case 702 is provided with connectors 7030, 7031, and 7032 for connecting to the main control board 300B (see FIG. 25) via harnesses MR1 to MR3 (see FIG. 25). The left reel unit 700L has a left reel 110, the center reel unit 700C has a center reel 111, and the right reel unit 700R has a right reel 112. These reels 110 to 112 are rotated by motors 110m, 111m, and 112m (see FIG. 25) provided for each reel. Each of the motors 110m to 112m is a stepping motor. The following explanation will be given using the left reel unit 700L as an example, but the same applies to the center reel unit 700C and the right reel unit 700R. In the left reel unit 700L, a motor 110m, an index sensor 730 for detecting the rotational position of the reel 110, and a backlight module 740 for irradiating light from the back surface to the front surface of the strip member 710 of the reel 110 are attached to the mounting base 732.

The replacement work can be performed on each of the reel units 700L, 700C, and 700R. For example, if the left reel unit 700L breaks down, only the left reel unit 700L can be replaced with a new reel unit.

Figure 21 (a) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and (b) is a front view of the backlight module 740.

The backlight module 740 is composed of a reflector 742 and an illumination board 744 that is removably attached to the back of the reflector 742. The reflector 742 has three openings BK1 to BK3 that are aligned vertically and connect from the front side to the back side. The illumination board 744 also has two LEDs 745 arranged at positions corresponding to the openings BK1 to BK3.

The openings BK1 to BK3 and LEDs 745 are provided at positions corresponding to the symbol positions (positions No. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 18) that are displayed in a stopped state in the display window 113 when the openings BK1 to BK3 are installed. As described above, by providing LEDs 745 at each of the openings BK1 to BK3, the light is configured not to interfere with the light that is irradiated at other positions. This allows light to be irradiated at each of positions No. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 18. For example, by turning on all the LEDs 745, all the symbols visible to the player can be illuminated from behind. Also, by turning on some of them, some of the symbols visible to the player can be illuminated from behind. The number and positions of the openings and LEDs are not limited to this configuration.

Next, the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 19 will be described in detail. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 3.

Figure 22(a) is an enlarged view of the first selection switch 190. The first selection switch 190 shown in Figure 22(a) has a circular rotating part 190a that has 16 contacts and is configured to be rotatable, and an indicator part 190b that is formed to protrude outward from the rotating part 190a as a base end. In addition, 16 numbers (0 to F in hexadecimal) are written around the periphery of the first selection switch 190, each corresponding to one of the 16 contacts of the rotating part 190a. The first selection switch 190 is an operating means for selecting one number from the 16 numbers.

These 16 numbers are treated as values (setting values) that represent the setting. That is, the first selection switch 190 is configured to be able to output the numerical value information indicated by the indicator 190b as a detection signal to the outside. For example, as shown in FIG. 2A, when the indicator 190b indicates "B", the hexadecimal value "B" is selected, and the numerical value information can be output as a 4-bit binary detection signal (0b1011). Therefore, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is configured to be able to detect the numerical value selected by the first selection switch 190 (any of the hexadecimal values 0 to F), by inputting this detection signal, and the first sub-controller 400 treats the numerical value indicated by the indicator 190b as the selected setting value.

Instead of the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 22(a), for example, a rotary switch 191 as shown in FIG. 22(b) may be used, or a slide switch 192 as shown in FIG. 22(c) may be used.

The rotary switch 191 shown in FIG. 22(b) has 16 contacts, a ring-shaped rotating part 191a that is rotatable, and a notched window 191b formed in the rotating part 191a. In addition, 16 numbers (0 to F in hexadecimal) are engraved on the bottom of the rotating part 191a of the rotary switch 191, each corresponding to one of the 16 contacts of the rotating part 191a.

In this rotary switch 191, a numerical value visible through the notched window 191b is selected, and the information on that numerical value can be output to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 22(b), when the numerical value visible through the notched portion 191b is "F", the hexadecimal numerical value F is selected, and the information on that numerical value can be output as a 4-bit binary detection signal (0b1111). Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is configured to be able to detect the selected numerical value (in this example, any of the numerical values 0 to F in hexadecimal) visible through the notched portion 191b of the rotary switch 191 by inputting this detection signal.

The slide switch 192 shown in FIG. 22(c) has a rectangular guide groove 192a and a slide section 192b that has 16 contacts and can slide along the guide groove 192a. In addition, 16 numbers (in this example, 0 to F in hexadecimal) are printed on the top of the slide switch 192, one for each of the 16 contacts of the slide section 192b.

In this slide switch 192, the numerical value at which the slide portion 192b is positioned is selected, and the slide switch 192 is configured to be able to output the numerical value information to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 22(c), when the slide portion 192b is positioned at the numerical value "0", the numerical value 0 in hexadecimal is selected, and the numerical value information can be output as a 4-bit binary detection signal (0b0000). Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is configured to be able to detect the selected numerical value (any of the numerical values 0 to F in hexadecimal) at which the slide portion 192b of the slide switch 192 is positioned by inputting this detection signal.

The first selection switch 190 described above using Figures 22(a) to 22(c) is a mechanical switch, so it can operate even when not energized, and can retain the selected numerical value (set value) even if the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Therefore, once a selection is made, the selected numerical value can be retained even if the power is turned off, making it easy to set, for example, to the set value intended by the arcade. In addition, since it is equipped with numbers (display means) that allow the selected numerical value to be confirmed, it is easy to check the set value, making it highly convenient.

Figure 22 (d) is an enlarged view of the second selection switch 194. The second selection switch 194 shown in Figure 22 (d) is composed of the left button 167, the right button 168, and the second chance button 166 that functions as a confirmation button, as shown in Figure 17. While the first selection switch 190 shown in Figure 22 (a) is an operation means provided in a position where the player cannot operate it, this second selection switch 194 is an operation means provided in a position where the player can operate it. In other words, the second selection switch 194 is a switch that can be operated by the player, and for example, a numerical value (setting value) representing a setting can be selected by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, and the selected setting value is confirmed by pressing the second chance button 166. Alternatively, a setting value can be selected by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, and the selected setting value may be confirmed after a predetermined time has passed without pressing the second chance button 166.

This second selection switch 194 can output a detection signal corresponding to each button when any of the second chance button 166, the left button 167, or the right button 168 is operated. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is configured to be able to detect whether the second chance button 166, the left button 167, or the right button 168 has been operated by inputting this detection signal.

Instead of the second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 22(d), for example, as shown in FIG. 22(e), a cross key 195 having up, down, left, right and a confirmation button may be provided in addition to the second chance button 166, and this cross key 195 may be used as the second selection switch 194. Also, two types of operation means may be provided, one of which may double as the chance button, or only one of the operation means may be the second selection switch 194.

The second selection switch 194 is not a mechanical switch, and therefore cannot operate without electricity, and cannot retain the selected numerical value (set value) by itself. For this reason, it is necessary to provide a separate storage means for storing the set value. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 is configured not to back up the numerical value selected by the second selection switch 194, but it may be configured to back it up.

Figure 22(f) is a diagram comparing the size of the second chance button 166 with the first chance button 165 shown in Figure 17. Figure 22(f) also shows a left button 167 and a right button 168. The first chance button 165 is about three times the size of the second chance button 166.

In addition, a cut-in display may be performed on the condition that the second chance button 166 or the first chance button 165 is operated, or one of the chance buttons may be used for a rapid-fire effect, etc., while the other chance button may be used as a hidden button. Here, a hidden button refers to a button that does not suggest or encourage the operation of the operating means (for example, at least one or both of the following: no operation suggestion display or operation encouragement display is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and/or the built-in effect lamp is not lit), but which nevertheless produces some effect when the operating means is operated. Figure 23 is a diagram showing an example of setting value selection using the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the setting value that can be selected by the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 is the volume value of the sound (e.g., BGM, sound effects, error sounds, etc.) output from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272. As described above, the first selection switch 190 is an operating means provided in a position where the player cannot operate it, and is a switch used by a store clerk when selecting a setting value. In addition, only the first selection switch 190 out of the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 can select whether to set the slot machine 100 to a power saving mode or a non-power saving mode (normal mode). In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the power saving mode is set only when a demonstration effect is being executed. Hereinafter, the demonstration is abbreviated to demonstration. The demonstration effect is an effect that starts when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since one game ended without the game being resumed. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, if the power saving mode is selected and a demo performance is started, the power saving mode is set.

When the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode, the animation (demo animation) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is played in a dark state, thereby reducing the power consumption of the effect image display device 157 and saving power. In addition, the first effect lamp built into the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 shown in Fig. 22 are turned off, thereby reducing the power consumption of these light emitting means and saving power.
When these light-emitting means are turned off, the power consumption becomes zero, and the power saving effect of these light-emitting means is greater than the power saving effect of the performance image display device 157.

When the first selection switch 190 is operated, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the performance image display device 157. When selecting the volume using the first selection switch 190, one volume level is selected from seven volume levels. In addition, in non-power saving mode, mute can also be selected.

Figure 23 (A) shows the display screen of the performance image display device 157 when the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "0" as shown in Figure 22 (a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 is displayed on the performance image display device 157. This first volume selection icon SI1 displays the selected value of the seven volume levels and a seven-level horizontal level display (indicator display). The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 23(A) displays that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 0 (0/7) and the word "Mute". Furthermore, none of the seven-level horizontal level display is lit. When mute is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sound from the woofer 277 and upper speaker 272 cannot be heard at all.

Figure 23 (B) is a diagram showing the display screen of the performance image display device 157 when the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "1" as shown in Figure 22 (a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 23(B) displays the characters "Volume 1/7," indicating that the selected volume level of the seven levels is 1. In addition, in the seven-level horizontal level display, only the first level on the far left is lit in a first color (e.g., yellow).

Figure 23 (C) is a diagram showing the display screen of the performance image display device 157 when the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "7" as shown in Figure 22 (a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 23(C) displays the characters "Volume 7/7," indicating that the selected volume level out of the seven levels is seven. In addition, in the seven-level horizontal level display, all levels from the first level to the seventh level are lit in a first color (e.g., yellow). When the seventh volume level is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sound from the woofer 277 and the upper speaker 272 becomes maximum volume.

Figure 23 (D) is a diagram showing the display screen of the performance image display device 157 when the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "8" as shown in Figure 22 (a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 23(D) displays text indicating that the selected volume is the exhibition volume. This exhibition volume is a volume suitable for a presentation of the slot machine 100 at an exhibition or the like, and is, for example, a volume between the fourth volume level and the fifth volume level. In addition, in the seven-level horizontal level display, all levels from the first to the seventh level are lit in a second color (for example, red). Note that instead of the exhibition volume, it may be possible to select a special volume that cannot be selected with the second selection switch 194 and can only be selected with the first selection switch 190. For example, it may be possible to select a step tone in which the volume increases by one level every time a predetermined time has elapsed.

The first volume selection icon SI1 displayed on the performance image display device 157 disappears if the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined period of time.

Figure 23 (a) shows the display screen of the performance image display device 157 when the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "9" as shown in Figure 22 (a).

The second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the performance image display device 157 shown in FIG. 23(a). The background color of this second volume selection icon SI2 is different from the background color of the first volume selection icon SI1. The second volume selection icon SI2 also displays the characters "power saving mode", a selected value of the seven volume levels, and a seven-level horizontal level display (indicator display). The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 23(a) displays the characters "power saving mode" and "volume 7/7", indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 7. In addition, in the seven-level horizontal level display, all levels from the first level to the seventh level are lit in a third color (e.g., blue).

Figure 23 (b) shows the display screen of the performance image display device 157 when the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "F" as shown in Figure 22 (a).

The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 23(b) displays the words "power saving mode" and "volume 1/7," which indicates that the selected volume level of the seven levels is 1. In addition, in the seven-level horizontal level display, only the first level on the left side is lit in a third color (e.g., blue).

The second volume selection icon SI2 displayed on the performance image display device 157 also disappears if the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined period of time.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, when the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "9" or any of "A" to "F" shown in FIG. 22(a), the slot machine 100 is selected to be set in the power saving mode. Note that even if the power saving mode is selected, the slot machine 100 is not set to the power saving mode, and as described above, the power saving mode can be set only if the slot machine is in the demo state. On the other hand, when the indicator 190b is set to any of "0" to "8" shown in FIG. 22(a), the slot machine 100 is selected to be set in the non-power saving mode. If the non-power saving mode is selected, the slot machine will not be set to the power saving mode even if the slot machine is in the demo state. Also, when a game is being played, the slot machine 100 is set to the non-power saving mode (normal mode).

The volume output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 is the same whether the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode. Therefore, the volume output for the selection value selected in FIG. 23(B) is the same as the volume output for the selection value selected in FIG. 23(b), and the volume output for the selection value selected in FIG. 23(C) is also the same as the volume output for the selection value selected in FIG. 23(a).

Figure 23 (A) shows the display screen of the performance image display device 157 when the second selection switch 194 is operated.

When the second selection switch 194, which can be operated by the player, is operated while the first guide display icon GI1 described later is displayed on the effect image display device 157, the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. The third volume selection icon SI3 displays the selected value of the five volume levels and the five vertical level display (indicator display). The third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 23(A) displays the characters "Volume 1/5", indicating that the selected value of the five volume levels is 1. In addition, in the five-level level display, only the lowest level, the first level, is lit in the fourth color (e.g., green). Pressing the right button 168 of the second selection switch 194 once increases the level by one level, and pressing the left button 167 once decreases the level by one level. However, even if the left button 167 is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 23(A), the level does not decrease any further. In other words, mute cannot be selected by operating the second selection switch 194. It is also possible to select mute by operating the second selection switch 194.

Figure 23 (b) shows the display screen of the performance image display device 157 when the right button 168 is pressed four times from the state shown in Figure 23 (a).

The third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 23(a) displays the characters "Volume 5/5," indicating that the selected volume level of the five levels is 5. In addition, in the five-level vertical level display, all levels 1 to 5 are lit in the fourth color (e.g., green).

The third volume selection icon SI3 displayed on the performance image display device 157 disappears if the left button 167 and the right button 168 are not operated for a predetermined period of time.

The volume can be selected by operating the first selection switch 190 in seven steps, whereas the volume can be selected by operating the second selection switch 194 in five steps. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the volume can be set in the range of 0 to 127, and the set values in the seven steps are 18 for the first step, 36 for the second step, 54 for the third step, 73 for the fourth step, 91 for the fifth step, 109 for the sixth step, and 127 for the seventh step. On the other hand, in the five steps, the second step to the sixth step are the remaining steps, excluding the first and seventh steps of the seven steps. That is, the second step (36) of the seven steps is the first step of the five steps, and the sixth step (109) of the seven steps is the fifth step of the five steps. Therefore, only the staff of the game store can select the set value (18) of the first step of the seven steps and the set value (127) of the seventh step. The first step (18) of the seven steps may be the first step of the five steps, and the fifth step (91) of the seven steps may be the fifth step of the five steps, or the third step (54) of the seven steps may be the first step of the five steps, and the seventh step (127) of the seven steps may be the fifth step of the five steps. Alternatively, the set values of the five steps may be 26 for the first step, 51 for the second step, 76 for the third step, 102 for the fourth step, and 127 for the fifth step.

When the left button 167 of the second selection switch 194 is pressed once while the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 and the first guidance display icon GI1 described later are displayed on the performance image display device 157, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that was displayed until then is replaced by the third volume selection icon SI3, and a display is displayed indicating that the selected value of the volume level is the second stage. On the other hand, when the right button 167 is pressed once instead of the left button 167 in the same state, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that was displayed until then is replaced by the third volume selection icon SI3, and a display is displayed indicating that the selected value of the volume is the fourth stage. These displays are displayed regardless of what selected value the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 is displaying. In other words, even if the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, pressing the left button 167 once will display the selected value of 2/5. Moreover, even if the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, pressing the right button 168 once will display the selected value of 4/5. This is because when the third volume selection icon SI3 is selected, the previous selected value is discarded, and the volume level value of 3/5, which is the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3, is selected again, and the initial value (3/5) is changed by operating the left button 167 or the right button 168. That is, when the operation of the second selection switch 194 is accepted, the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3 is set, and the value changed by operating the second selection switch 194 to the initial value is displayed by the third volume selection icon SI3. The first selection switch 190 is designed to be operated by a store clerk, and the second selection switch 194 is designed to be operated by a player, so that the player's intention can be prioritized. Conversely, when the first selection switch 190 is operated while the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed, the selected value displayed in the third volume selection icon SI3 is inherited, and the value to which the previous selected value has been changed by operating the first selection switch 190 is displayed in the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. However, even in this case, the selected value may not be inherited, and the initial value (e.g., 4/7) of the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 may be set. Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 24. Note that the same figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is broadly composed of a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the main presentation in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 for controlling the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control program data, lottery data used during internal lottery of winning combinations, and a reel pattern arrangement, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Note that, for the RAM 308, the description RAM (random access memory) is used as an example indicating that it is a storage medium that can be read and written, but the description RWM (read write memory) or the description "ram" may also be used. In addition, the name of the process related to the RAM may also be the name using the description RWM (read write memory) or the description "ram". In this specification, the description RAM is mainly used. It should be noted that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described below. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a random number generating circuit 316, which is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the value within the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start-up signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When a start-up signal is input from this start-up signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing described below).

The main control unit 300 also includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 monitors the status of various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal acceptance sensor for medals inserted through medal insertion slot 141, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from hopper unit 180, left reel 110 index sensor, middle reel 111 index sensor, right reel 112 index sensor, etc.) at each interrupt time.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 receives this signal, latches the value at that timing, and stores it in a register that stores random numbers to be used in the lottery.

Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion port 141, and detect whether a medal has passed through. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, and right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, and bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, respectively, and detect the insertion operation when medals stored electronically in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals stored electronically are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the hopper unit 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact sensor or a contact sensor.

The index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, and the index sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of each reel 110 to 112, and become L level every time a light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes by.
Rotational position information, which indicates how far the reel has rotated from the reference position from the time when it becomes L level until it becomes L level again, is calculated based on the count value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the motors 110m-112m (see FIG. 25) provided for each reel 110-112 of the reel unit 700, a drive circuit 324 that drives a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 that selects inserted medals, a drive circuit 326 that drives the motor 180m (see FIG. 25) provided in the hopper unit 180, and a drive circuit 328 that drives various lamps 339 (valid line indicator lamp 120, notification lamp 123, medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, number of stored coins indicator 125, game information indicator 126, payout number indicator 127).

In addition, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., information indicating the game status) of the slot machine 100 to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply device 252 (see FIG. 3). The voltage monitoring circuit 330 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply is below a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400, enabling communication with the first sub-control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

The components of the main control unit 300 described above are mounted on the main control unit board 300B (see Figure 25).

<Sub-control section>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, the lighting pattern of the backlight module 740, and data for controlling various displays.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sound source IC 418, which is provided with an upper speaker 272 and a bass speaker 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the amplifier and the sound output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 in response to commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by the amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, to which various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, title panel lamp 164, bet button lamp 200, backlight module 740, first performance lamp built into first chance button 165, second performance lamp built into second chance button 166, etc.) are connected via an input/output interface. The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor 163m of the shutter 163 (see FIG. 25). The motor 163m of the shutter 163 is a stepping motor, and this drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to the motor 160m in response to a command from the CPU 404.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sensor circuit 426, to which a shutter sensor 428 is connected via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at each interrupt time. The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a switch sensor 427, which detects the pressing of the first chance button 165. The switch sensor 427 also detects the pressing of each button of the second selection switch 194, which is made up of the second chance button 166, the left button 167, and the right button 168. Detection signals from the shutter sensor 428 and the switch sensor 427 are output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426.

The first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402, but this first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 427 and the sensor circuit 426.

The CPU 404 also sends and receives signals to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface.

The components of the first sub-control unit 400 described above are mounted on the first sub-control unit board 400B (see Figure 25).

The second sub-controller 500 performs various controls of the performance device 160, including display control of the performance image display device 157. The second sub-controller 500 may be configured with multiple control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the performance image display device 157 and a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). The second sub-controller 500 receives the control command sent by the first sub-controller 400 via the input interface and has a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control command. This basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is also provided with a VDP 534 (video display processor), which is connected to a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the performance image display device 157.

With the circuit configuration described above, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a control signal instructing the setting of the power saving mode to the drive circuit 422 or to the second sub-control unit 500. As a result, the performance image display device 157 receives the control signal via the second sub-control unit 500, and the first performance lamp, side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and backlight module 740 built into the first chance button 165 receive the control signal without going through the second sub-control unit 500.

Next, we will explain examples of connections between each board, such as the power supply control board, main control board, and first sub-control board, and each unit, such as the reel unit, hopper unit, and performance movable body unit.

Figure 25 shows an example of connections between each board and each unit.

This Figure 25 shows the power supply control board 252B, the main control board 300B, the first sub-control board 400B, the reel unit 700, the hopper unit 180, and the performance movable body unit 160U. The performance movable body unit 160U is a unit that moves the shutter 163, which is incorporated into the performance device 160 shown in Figure 17. The shutter 163 is an example of a movable body.

The power supply control board 252B, the main control board 300B and the first sub-control board 400B each have multiple connectors PC1-PC4, MC1-MC6 and SC1-SC4. The reel unit 700, the hopper unit 180 and the performance movable body unit 160U each also have one or more connectors HC1, RC1-RC3 and DC1.

The island equipment installed in the gaming machine store steps down the 100V AC power supply to a voltage of 24V, and the 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100 through the power cord 265 connected to the connector PC1. The 24V AC current is converted to a 24V DC voltage, a 12V DC voltage, and a 5V DC voltage in the power supply control board 252B. Note that it may be converted to other DC voltages, but the explanation here will be about a 24V DC voltage and a 5V DC voltage.

The power supply control board 252B shown in FIG. 25 shows a 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line, as well as a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and a power supply control 24V capacitor 24PC connected to the 24V power supply line, and a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and a power supply control 5V capacitor 5PC connected to the 5V power supply line. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. Also shown is the power switch 244 shown in FIG. 3.

A 24V power line and a 5V power line are connected to connector PC2 of the power supply control board 252B. This connector PC2 and connector MC5 of the main control board 300B are connected by a harness PM, and 24V DC current and 5V DC current are supplied to the main control board 300B through this harness PM.

A 24V power line is connected to connector PC3 of the power supply control board 252B. This connector PC3 and connector SC1 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS1, and 24V DC is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS1. A 5V power line is connected to connector PC4 of the power supply control board 252B. This connector PC4 and connector SC2 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS2, and 5V DC is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS2.

The main control board 300B may be supplied with 24V and 5V through separate harnesses, just like the first sub-control board 400B. The first sub-control board 400B may be supplied with 24V and 5V through a common harness, just like the main control board 300B.

The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 25 also shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 24V power line of the main control board 300B, and a 5V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 5V power line of the main control board 300B. The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 25 also shows a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and a main control 24V capacitor 24MC connected to the 24V power line, and a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML connected to the 5V power line. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. Note that no capacitor is provided on the 5V power line.

The main control board 300B also has a hopper motor driving IC 326i and a reel motor driving IC 322i mounted thereon. The hopper motor driving IC 326i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the driving circuit 326 shown in FIG. 24. The reel motor driving IC 322i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the driving circuit 322 shown in FIG. 24. Both the hopper motor driving IC 326i and the reel motor driving IC 322i are supplied with 24V DC and 5V DC, respectively. Although not shown, the main control board 300B also has the basic circuit 302 shown in FIG. 24 mounted thereon, and also has integrated circuits that constitute the other driving circuits 324, 328, etc. mounted thereon.

The connector MC1 of the main control board 300B, to which the hopper motor driving IC 326i is connected, and the connector HC1 of the hopper unit 180 are connected by a harness MH. The 24V DC current and 5V DC current supplied to the hopper motor driving IC 326i are respectively supplied to the hopper unit 180 through this harness MH, enabling the motor 180m provided in the hopper unit 180 to be driven. In addition, a control signal (command) that controls the motor 180m is sent from the main control board 300B through this harness MH.

In addition, the connector MC2 to which the reel motor driving IC 322i of the main control board 300B is connected and the connector RC1 of the reel unit 700 are connected by a harness MR1, the connector MC3 to which the reel motor driving IC 322i is connected and the connector RC2 of the reel unit 700 are connected by a harness MR2, and the connector MC4 to which the reel motor driving IC 322i is connected and the connector RC3 of the reel unit 700 are connected by a harness MR3. The 24V DC current and the 5V DC current supplied to the reel motor driving IC 322i are supplied to the reel unit 700 through each of these harnesses MR1 to 3, respectively, and each of the motors 110m to 112m provided for each reel can be driven. In addition, the control signals (commands) that control each of the motors 110m to 112m are sent from the main control board 300B through each of these harnesses MR1 to 3. Although a harness is connected to each motor, the connectors RC1 to RC3 on the reel unit 700 side can be combined into one connector, and the connectors MC2 to MC4 on the main control board 300B side can also be combined into one connector, and connected with one common harness. However, even though it is called one common harness, it is actually a collection of three harnesses MR1 to MR3.

Furthermore, the connector MC6 of the main control board 300B and the connector SC4 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness MS. This harness MS is a harness for control signals (for sending commands) and is not used for supplying current.

The first sub-controller board 400B shown in FIG. 25 also shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PS1 flows through the 24V power line of the first sub-controller board 400B, and a 5V DC current supplied through the harness PS2 flows through the 5V power line of the first sub-controller board 400B. The first sub-controller board 400B shown in FIG. 25 also shows a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC connected to the 24V power line, and a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL connected to the 5V power line. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. Furthermore, the first sub-control board 400B also does not have a capacitor on the 5V power line.

The first sub-control board 400B also has a movable body motor driving IC 424i mounted thereon. This movable body motor driving IC 424i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the driving circuit 424 shown in FIG. 24. A direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V are both supplied to the movable body motor driving IC 424i. Although not shown here, the first sub-control board 400B also has the basic circuit 402 shown in FIG. 24 mounted thereon, and also has integrated circuits that constitute the other driving circuits 424, 426, etc. mounted thereon.

The connector SC3 of the first sub-control board 400B, to which the movable body motor drive IC 424i is connected, and the connector DC1 of the performance movable body unit 160U are connected by a harness SD. The 24V DC current and 5V DC current supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i are supplied to the performance movable body unit 160U through this harness SD, enabling the motor 163m provided in the performance movable body unit 160U to be driven. In addition, a control signal (command) that controls the motor 163m is sent from the first sub-control board 400B through this harness SD.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 also includes a second sub-control unit 500 as shown in FIG. 24, and although not shown in FIG. 25, the second sub-control board is also supplied with 24V DC and 5V DC from the power supply control board 252B through a harness not shown. The second sub-control board is also connected to the first sub-control board 400B by a harness for control signals (for sending commands). Furthermore, the second sub-control board is also connected to the performance device (performance image display device 157) in the same manner as the first sub-control board 400B.

As explained above, the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 are electrically connected by a harness MH, and the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700 are also electrically connected by harnesses MR1-MR3. In addition, the first sub-control board 400B and the performance movable body unit 160U are also electrically connected by a harness SD.

Figure 26 shows the state in which the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in the power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is being manually spun. The power-off state may be a state in which the power switch 244 is off, a state in which the power switch 244 is on but the power cord 265 is not connected to the outlet, or a state in which no power is being supplied from the island equipment (the same applies below). If no power is being supplied from the island equipment, the power is off even if the power cord 265 is connected to the outlet and the power switch 244 is on. Even in such a power-off state, each of the reels 110 to 112 can be manually spun in either the forward or reverse direction.

All of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 (power supply control 24V monitor LED24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL, main control 24V monitor LED24ML, main control 5V monitor LED5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED24SL, and sub control 5V monitor LED5SL) that are lit when power is applied are turned off when power is cut off.

However, as shown in FIG. 26, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, a current (induced current) due to the back electromotive force is generated in the motor 110m (see FIG. 25) that rotates the left reel 110. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 25, the induced current generated in the motor 110m flows through the harness MR1 into the main control board 300B, and is supplied from the reel driving IC 322i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. A main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR is provided between the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and ground, and a main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR is provided between the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML and ground. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. Even if manual rotation is stopped, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML continues to light for a while because the 24V power line is provided with the main control 24V capacitor 24MC. On the other hand, the 5V power line is not provided with a capacitor, so the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML goes out immediately when manual rotation is stopped. In other words, when manual rotation is stopped, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML goes out before the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML. Note that a capacitor with a lower capacity than the main control 24V capacitor 24MC may also be provided on the 5V power line.

The induced current that flowed into the main control board 300B then flows through the harness PM into the power supply control board 252B, and is supplied to the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the connector PC2. A power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR is provided between the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and ground, and a power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR is provided between the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and ground. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards, such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, are emitting light. Even if you stop rotating the motor manually, the 24V power supply line has a power supply control 24V capacitor 24PC, so the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL will continue to light for a while. Also, the 5V power supply line has a power supply control 5V capacitor 5PC, so the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL will also continue to light for a while.

The induced current that flows into the power supply control board 252B further flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS1 and is supplied to the 24V power line from the connector SC1. A sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR is provided between the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and ground. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and ground. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR. The induced current that flows into the power supply control board 252B also flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS2 and is supplied to the 5V power line from the connector SC2. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and ground. The sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards, such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B, the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, and the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, are lit. Even if manual rotation is stopped, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL will continue to light for a while because the sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC is provided on the 24V power line. On the other hand, since there is no capacitor on the 5V power line, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will immediately go out when manual rotation is stopped.

The above explanation explains the phenomenon that occurs when each harness MR1, PM, PS1, PS2 is properly connected to the connector and not broken. On the other hand, if the harness MR1 is broken or not properly connected to the connector RC1 and/or connector MC2 (disconnected or not fully inserted), none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 will light up no matter how much you manually spin the left reel 110, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will remain off. As a result, if none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 or the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up even when you manually spin the left reel 110, you can suspect an abnormality in the harness MR1 or a poor connection with the connectors RC1 and MC2.

In addition, if the harness PM is broken or not properly connected to the connector MC5 and/or the connector PC2, when the left reel 110 is manually spun, the main control 24V monitor LED24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML will light up, but the sub control 24V monitor LED24SL, the sub control 5V monitor LED5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED24PL and the power control 5V monitor LED5PL will not light up. As a result, if the main control 24V monitor LED24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML are lit up when the left reel 110 is manually spun, but the sub control 24V monitor LED24SL, the sub control 5V monitor LED5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED24PL and the power control 5V monitor LED5PL are not lit up, an abnormality in the harness PM or a poor connection with the connectors MC5 and PC2 can be suspected.

In addition, even if the main control board 300B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) on the main control board 300B can be lit by manually spinning the left reel 110.

In addition, if the harness PS1 is broken or not properly connected to the connector PC3 and/or the connector SC1, when the left reel 110 is manually spun, only the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 will not light up. As a result, if the left reel 110 is manually spun and only the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 does not light up, an abnormality in the harness PS1 or a poor connection with the connectors PC3 and SC1 can be suspected. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is broken or not properly connected to the connector PC4 and/or the connector SC2, when the left reel 110 is manually spun, only the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 will not light up. As a result, if the left reel 110 is manually spun and only the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 does not light up, an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors PC4 and SC2 can be suspected.

Here, we have explained the case where the left reel 110 is manually spun in a power outage state, but the same applies when the middle reel 111 is manually spun in a power outage state, and when the right reel 112 is manually spun in a power outage state. Also, as the number of reels spun manually increases, the monitor LED will light up brighter. For example, when the left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112 are spun manually at the same time, the monitor LED will light up brighter than when only the left reel 110 is spun manually.

In addition, even if the LEDs used for purposes other than the monitor LEDs, such as the main control 24V monitor LED24ML, main control 5V monitor LED5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED24PL, and power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL (for example, error monitoring LEDs that light up when an error occurs, or signal monitoring LEDs) are installed with an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line or 5V power line, they will light up if there is no electrical connection problem when the left reel 110 is manually spun in a power-off state. Therefore, even if the LEDs are used for purposes other than the monitor LEDs, it is possible to check for electrical connection problems.

Figure 27 (a) is an oblique view of the hopper unit 180 shown in Figure 3, viewed obliquely from above.

The hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 27(a) also shows the connector HC1 shown in FIG. 25. This hopper unit 180 has a storage tank 181 for storing medals, and a circular hopper disk 182 provided on the bottom surface of the storage tank 181. Part of this hopper disk 182 is visible in FIG. 27(a). The hopper disk 182 has six medal passing holes 1821 spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The medal passing holes 1821 are holes large enough for medals, which are game media, to pass through. The hopper disk 182 is rotated by a motor 180m (see FIG. 25), and medals stored in the storage tank 181 are paid out through the medal passing holes 1821.

Figure 27(b) shows the hopper disk 182 being rotated manually.

Figure 27(b) shows the hopper disk 182 as seen from directly above, with six medal passing holes 1821 clearly visible. Even in a power-off state, the hopper disk 182 can be rotated manually in either the forward or reverse direction by inserting a finger into the medal passing holes 1821.

When the hopper disk 182 is rotated manually, a current (induced current) due to the back electromotive force is generated in the motor 180m (see FIG. 25) that rotates the hopper disk 182. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 25, the induced current generated in the motor 180m flows through the harness MH into the main control board 300B and is supplied to the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the hopper motor drive IC 326i. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. On the other hand, if the harness MH is broken or not properly connected to the connector HC1 and/or connector MC1, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 will light up no matter how much the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will remain off. As a result, if none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 or the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up even when the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, an abnormality in the harness MH or a poor connection with the connectors HC1 and MC1 can be suspected.

The induced current generated by the motor 180m of the hopper disk 182 then flows through the power supply control board 252B to the first sub-control board 400B, just like the induced current generated by the motor 110m of the left reel 110 described above, and if normal, the monitor LEDs (24PL, 5PL, 24SL, 5SL) provided on each board 252B, 400B will light up. Therefore, just like when the left reel 110 is manually spun, when the hopper disk 182 is manually spun, it is also possible to check for poor electrical connections downstream of the main control board 300B.

When the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated and the left reel 111 is also manually rotated in a power-off state, the monitor LED will light up brightly as the number of movable bodies being manually rotated increases.

Even if the power is cut off, the shutter 163 shown in FIG. 17 can be opened and closed manually.

When the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, a current (induced current) due to back electromotive force is generated in the motor 163m (see FIG. 25) that opens and closes the shutter 163. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 25, the induced current generated in the motor 163m flows through the harness SD into the first sub-control board 400B and is supplied to the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the movable body motor driving IC 424i. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is also lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR.

The induced current that flowed into the first sub-control board 400B then flows through the harness PS1 into the power supply control board 252B and is supplied to the 24V power line from the connector PC3. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by the induced current because its resistance is adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR. The induced current that flowed into the first sub-control board 400B also flows through the harness PS2 into the power supply control board 252B and is supplied to the 5V power line from the connector PC4. The power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is also lit by the induced current because its resistance is adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards, such as the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, are emitting light.

The induced current that flows into the power supply control board 252B further flows through the harness PM into the main control board 300B and is supplied from the connector MC5 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by the induced current because its resistance is adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is lit by the induced current because its resistance is adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards, such as the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, and the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B, are emitting light.

The above explanation is of the phenomenon that occurs when each harness SD, PS1, PS2, PM is connected to the connector normally and is not broken. On the other hand, if the harness SD is broken or not connected normally to the connector DC1 and/or connector SC3, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 will light up, and the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will remain off, no matter how much the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed. As a result, if none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 or the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL do not light up even when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, an abnormality in the harness SD or a poor connection with the connectors DC1 and SC3 can be suspected.

Also, if the harness PS1 is broken or not properly connected to the connector SC1 and/or connector PC3, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL light up, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML do not light up. As a result, if the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL light up when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML do not light up, an abnormality in the harness PS1 or a poor connection with the connectors SC1 and PC3 can be suspected. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is broken or not properly connected to the connector SC2 and/or the connector PC4, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL will light up, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML will not light up. As a result, if the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL are lit up when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML are not lit up, an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors SC2 and PC4 can be suspected.

In addition, even when the first sub-control board 400B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B can be turned on by manually opening and closing the shutter 163.

In addition, if the harness PM is broken or not properly connected to the connector PC2 and/or connector MC5, only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will not light up among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed. As a result, if only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will not light up among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 25 even when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, an abnormality in the harness PM or a poor connection with the connectors PC2 and MC5 can be suspected.

Figure 28 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in Figure 25 and the hopper unit 180 and reel unit 700 also shown in Figure 25. The following explanation will focus on the differences from the connection example explained using Figure 25, and duplicate explanations may be omitted.

In this Figure 28, the connectors MC5 and MC6 provided on the main control board 300B are omitted. A hopper relay board 901B is shown between the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 shown in Figure 28, and a reel relay board 902B is shown between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700.

The hopper relay board 901B is provided with a connector HRM to which the harness MH1 connected to the connector MC1 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector HRH to which the harness MH2 connected to the connector HC1 of the hopper unit 180 is connected.

The reel relay board 902B is provided with a connector RRM1 to which the harness MR11 connected to the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B connects, and a connector RRR1 to which the harness MR12 connected to the connector RC1 of the reel unit 700 connects. Also provided are a connector RRM2 to which the harness MR21 connected to the connector MC3 of the main control board 300B connects, and a connector RRR2 to which the harness MR22 connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 700 connects. Furthermore, also provided are a connector RRM3 to which the harness MR31 connected to the connector MC4 of the main control board 300B connects, and a connector RRR3 to which the harness MR32 connected to the connector RC3 of the reel unit 700 connects. Even in the connection example in Figure 28, if reels 110-112 are manually spun in a power outage state, monitor LEDs such as main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will light up if everything is normal. However, if the multiple harnesses MR11, MR12, MR21, MR22, MR21, and MR32 between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700 are broken or not connected properly, monitor LEDs such as main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will not light up.

Even if the hopper disk 182 is rotated manually in a power outage state, if it is normal, the monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will light up. However, if the multiple harnesses MH1, MH2 between the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 are disconnected or not connected properly, the monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will not light up.

In the connection example in FIG. 28, the provision of a hopper relay board 901B and a reel relay board 902B increases the number of harnesses and connectors compared to the connection example shown in FIG. 25, increasing the possibility of electrical connection failures. However, an induced current can be generated by manual operation in a power-off state, and electrical connection failures can be easily confirmed from the lit state of the monitor LED.

The hopper relay board 901B and the reel relay board 902B may also be provided with a 24V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line, and a 5V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 5V power line. By manually operating the board in a power outage state to generate an induced current, and turning on these monitor LEDs if normal, it is possible to check for poor electrical connections.

In the explanation here, the movable bodies are described as the left reel 110, the center reel 111, the right reel 112, the hopper disk 182, and the shutter 163, but they are not limited to these and can be any movable body that is driven by a motor.

Figure 29 (a) is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine of the second embodiment. Below, the differences from the internal configuration described using Figure 3 will be mainly described, and duplicated explanations may be omitted. In addition, components with the same names as components described so far may use the same symbols as those used so far.

Figure 29 (a) shows the state in which the front door 102 is opened 180 degrees relative to the main body 101. As a result, both the inside of the main body 101 and the inside of the front door 102 face forward (toward the front of the paper in Figure 29).

The reel unit 700 is attached to the vertical center of the main body 101 shown in FIG. 29(a). The main control board storage case 210 is disposed above the reel unit 700. The main control board storage case 210 is a transparent or semi-transparent resin case, and has translucency. The main control board 300B is stored in the main control board storage case 210. The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(a) has the same configuration as the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 25, and FIG. 29(a) shows the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML. In addition, the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(a) also has an error monitoring LED 3ML and operation means, that is, a setting key switch 281 and a setting change button 292. That is, the LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) which are light emitting means and the setting key switch 281 and the setting change button 292 which are operation means are provided on a common board (main control board 300B). In addition, the light from these LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) passes through the transparent or semi-transparent main control board storage case 210, and the light emitted by the LEDs can be confirmed through the main control board storage case 210. In addition, the main control board storage case 210 is provided with openings and cutouts so that these operation means (281, 292) can be operated. In addition, the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(a) has identification marks for each circuit component (board component) such as a connector, resistor, capacitor, LED, IC, LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, and switch. Here, they are displayed by silk printing, and as shown in FIG. 29(a), "LED1" is displayed under the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, "LED2" is displayed under the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, "LED3" is displayed under the error monitoring LED 3ML, "setting key SW" is displayed under the setting key switch 281, and "setting change button" is displayed under the setting change button 292. These displays are visible through the transparent or semi-transparent main control board storage case 210. Note that "24V monitor LED" may be displayed instead of "LED1", and "SW1" may be displayed instead of "setting key SW". That is, the names or abbreviations of each component may be displayed, or identification numbers or identification symbols may be displayed. Also, a sticker 210S on which the management number of the stored board is printed is attached to the lower left corner of the main control board storage case 210. This sticker 210S is non-translucent, but may be transparent or semi-translucent. Also, it may be a sticker with a stamped or handwritten marking. Alternatively, the indication may be printed directly on the main control board storage case 210 instead of on a sticker.

The power supply unit 252 and the hopper unit 180 are arranged below the reel unit 700. The power supply unit 252 is provided with a power supply control board 252B having the same configuration as the power supply control board 252B shown in FIG. 25. The power supply control board 252B shown in FIG. 29(a) is housed in a transparent or semi-transparent resin case. In FIG. 29(a), the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, and the power switch 244 are shown. That is, these LEDs (24PL, 5PL) which are light-emitting means and the power switch 244 which is an operating means are provided on a common board (power supply control board 252B). In addition, the light from the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) mounted on the power supply control board 252B also passes through the transparent or semi-transparent case, and the light emission of the LEDs can be confirmed through the case. In addition, the case of the power supply unit 252 is also provided with an opening or cutout so that the power switch 244 can be touched. Furthermore, in the power supply control board 252B shown in FIG. 29(a), like the main control board 300B, identification marks are displayed for each circuit component (board component). Here, they are displayed by silk screen printing, and as shown in FIG. 29(a), "LED7" is displayed under the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, "LED8" is displayed under the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, and "power SW" is displayed under the power switch 244. These marks are visible through a transparent or semi-transparent case. The case of the power supply device 252 may be an opaque metal case. In this case, the LEDs, which are the light-emitting means, and the switches, which are the operating means, are provided on the surface of the metal case, and if they are light-emitting means, they are visible, and if they are operating means, they are operable. The identification marks are also displayed on the surface of the metal case.

The positions of the main control board 300B, the sub-control board 400B', and the power supply 252 may be above or below the movable body units such as the reel unit 700 and the hopper unit 180, or some or all of them may be at the same height.

3, the first sub-control board storage case 220 was arranged on the left side panel 260 of the main body 101, but in the slot machine 100 of the second embodiment, the sub-control board storage case 220' is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102. That is, it is arranged on the back side of the performance device 160. The sub-control board storage case 220' is also a transparent or semi-transparent resin case and has translucency. The sub-control board 400B' is stored in this sub-control board storage case 220'. The sub-control board 400B' is a performance control board that combines the first sub-control board 400B shown in FIG. 25 and the control board of the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. 24, but it may be configured only with the first sub-control board 400B or only with the control board of the second sub-control unit 500. In FIG. 29(a), the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL are shown. Furthermore, the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG. 29(a) is also equipped with a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL for monitoring the voltage of the control board of the second sub-control unit 500 and a first selection switch 190 as an operation means. That is, these LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) as light emitting means and the first selection switch 190 as an operation means are provided on a common board (sub-control board 400B'). Furthermore, the light from these LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) passes through the transparent or semi-transparent sub-control board storage case 220', and the light emission of the LEDs can be confirmed through the sub-control board storage case 220'. In addition, the sub-control board storage case 220' is also provided with an opening or a cutout so that the first selection switch 190 can be operated. Furthermore, the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG. 29(a) also has an identification mark for each circuit component (board component) as in the main control board 300B. Here, they are displayed by silk screen printing, and as shown in FIG. 29(a), "LED4" is displayed under the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, "LED5" is displayed under the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, "LED6" is displayed under the second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, and "selection SW" is displayed under the first selection switch 190. In addition, in the lower right corner of the sub-control board 400B', a display 4001 of "board management number 0002" is displayed, printed in two lines on the resist layer of the board. The identification display for each circuit component and the display 4001 of "board management number 0002" can be seen through the transparent or semi-transparent sub-control board storage case 220'.

Figure 29(b) is a side view that shows a schematic view of the field of view of a person H1 in a standing position, and figure (c) is a side view that shows a schematic view of the field of view of a person H2 in a sitting position.

The slot machine 100 of the second embodiment shown in these side views has the front door 102 open 90 degrees relative to the main body 101, with the main body 100 shown from the side and the front of the 90-degree open front door 102 shown. The people H1 and H2 shown in these side views are factory inspectors or arcade clerks who need to manually operate the hopper disk 182 of the hopper unit 180 and the reels 110-112 of the reel unit 700, and are positioned directly in front of the main body 101.

As shown in Figure 29 (b), the visual field V1 of a person H1 standing directly in front of the main body 101 with the front door 102 open 90 degrees extends from the reel unit 700 to the main control board storage case 210 located above it, and the reels 110-112 operated by hand and the resulting light-emitting LEDs, such as the error monitoring LED 3ML mounted on the main control board 300B, are visible at the same time, or can be seen by simply moving the line of sight slightly upwards.

As shown in FIG. 29(c), the visual field V2 of a person H2 sitting directly in front of the main body 101 with the front door 102 open 90 degrees extends from the reel unit 700 to the power supply unit 252 located below it, and the reels 110-112 operated by hand and the resulting light-emitting LEDs such as the power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL provided on the power supply unit 252 are visible at the same time, or can be seen by moving the line of sight slightly up or down. The power supply unit 252 and the hopper unit 180 (see FIG. 29(a)) located next to it are also within the visual field V2, and the hopper disk 182 (see FIG. 27) operated by hand and the resulting light-emitting LEDs such as the power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL provided on the power supply unit 252 are visible at the same time, or can be seen by moving the line of sight slightly left or right.

In addition, in Fig. 29(b) and Fig. 29(c), the main control board 300B is shown in an easy-to-understand schematic manner, so that the front surface 300f (the surface facing people H1 and H2) of the main control board 300B coincides with the front surface 700f of the reel unit 700. However, in reality, as shown in Fig. 14(a) described below, the front surface 300f of the main control board 300B is located behind (at the back) the front surface 700f of the reel unit 700. In other words, the movable body unit protrudes further toward the person who operates the movable body with his or her hand than the light-emitting means. For this reason, the reel unit 700 gets in the way from below the main control board 300B, making it difficult to get the main control board 300B in view.

FIG. 30 is a plan view showing the inside of the slot machine according to the second embodiment.
That is, FIG. 30 is a diagram of the slot machine of the second embodiment as seen from above, with the bottom of the diagram being the front side and the top being the rear side.

Figure 30(a) shows the front door 102 in a completely closed state, and Figure 30(b) shows the front door 102 in a 90 degree open state relative to the main body 101, as in Figures 29(b) and 29(c).

In FIG. 30(a), the main body 101 shows the main control board storage case 210 in which the main control board 300B is stored, and the reel unit 700. The main control board 300B shows three LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) and a setting key switch 281. Also shown is the sticker 210S affixed to the front of the main control board storage case 210.

The front door 102 in FIG. 30(a) shows the sub-control board storage case 220' in which the sub-control board 400B' is stored. The sub-control board 400B' has three LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) and a first selection switch 190.

When the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is completely closed, none of the light emitting means (main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, etc.) that emit light by manually operating movable bodies such as the reels 110-112 and hopper disk 182 are visible from the outside of the slot machine 100.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 30(b) with the front door 102 open by 90 degrees, the range where the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML by the back electromotive force reaches is shown in gray. Note that the way in which the range where the light reaches is shown here is a way of showing with emphasis on the directivity of the LED, and in reality, the surroundings of this range will be illuminated the closer to the LED. The light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML by the back electromotive force reaches a part of the front door 102 in the 90-degree open state. That is, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML reaches the first selection switch 190 mounted on the sub-control board 400B', making it possible to operate the first selection switch 190 even in a dark place. In addition, the light also reaches other circuit components mounted on the sub-control board 400B' (the second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL in FIG. 30(b)), making it possible to see the circuit components even in a dark place. Furthermore, the identification markings displayed for each circuit component can be visually confirmed. The light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML also reaches the display 4001 of "board management number 0002" printed on the sub-control board 400B', making it possible to confirm the board management number even in a dark place. The seal 210S described using FIG. 292(a) is non-translucent, but in a dark place, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML illuminates the periphery of the seal 210S, making it possible to confirm the contents displayed on the seal 210S. If the seal 210S is translucent, it is easier to confirm. The light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML also reaches a part of the sub-control board storage case 220', and if a seal is attached to that part, the contents displayed on the seal can also be confirmed.

Note that in Figure 30(b), only the range reached by light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML due to back electromotive force is shown diagrammatically, but light due to back electromotive force also reaches from other LEDs, making most of the sub-control board storage case 220' and most of the sub-control board 400B' visible even in dark places.

As explained above, when the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees, the light generated by the back electromotive force from the LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) mounted on the main control board 300B reaches the sub-control board 400B', which is a board different from the board on which those LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) are mounted, and the sub-control board storage case 220' that houses the sub-control board 400B'. The opening angle of the front door 102 is not limited to 90 degrees, but may be 80 degrees or 100 degrees. However, the closer it is to 180 degrees, the more difficult it is for the light to reach. Conversely, the light generated by the back electromotive force from the LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) mounted on the sub-control board 400B' reaches the main control board storage case 210 and the main control board 300B.

In addition, light generated by back electromotive force from the LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) mounted on the sub-control board 400B' reaches most of the sub-control board storage case 220' and most of the sub-control board 400B', making them visible even in dark places. Furthermore, light generated by back electromotive force from the LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) mounted on the main control board 300B reaches most of the main control board storage case 210 and most of the main control board 300B, making them visible even in dark places.

Figure 31 is a diagram showing a modified example of the connection example between each board and each unit shown in Figure 25. The following explanation will focus on the differences from the connection example shown in Figure 25, and duplicate explanations may be omitted. In addition, components with the same names as components explained so far will use the same reference numerals as used so far.

In this modified example of the connection shown in Figure 31, a protection circuit is provided to protect the circuit components from surge currents flowing in the reverse direction. The main control board 300B is provided with protection circuits PT1 and PT2 to protect the reel motor driving IC 322i as an example of a protection circuit to protect various ICs. Protection circuit PT1 is placed between the reel motor driving IC 322i and the 24V power line, and protection circuit PT2 is placed between the reel motor driving IC 322i and the 5V power line. In addition, the main control 24V capacitor 24MC shown in Figure 25 is changed to a larger capacity one to form protection circuit PT3.

The first sub-control board 400B is also provided with protection circuits PT4 and PT5 that protect the movable body motor driving IC 424i as an example of a protection circuit that protects various ICs. The protection circuit PT4 is arranged between the movable body motor driving IC 424i and the 24V power line, and the protection circuit PT5 is arranged between the movable body motor driving IC 424i and the 5V power line. In addition, the sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC shown in Figure 25 has been changed to a larger capacity one to form the protection circuit PT6.

In the power supply control board 252B, a protection circuit PT7 is arranged between the connector PC2 and the 24V power line, and a protection circuit PT8 is arranged between the connector PC2 and the 5V power line. In addition, the power supply control 24V capacitor 24PC shown in FIG. 25 is changed to a large capacity one to form a protection circuit PT9, and the power supply control 5V capacitor 5PC is also changed to a large capacity one to form a protection circuit PT10. The protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10, which have large capacity capacitors, can absorb the charge of surge power and prevent circuit destruction due to surge current. These protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 also absorb the charge of the back electromotive force, and no current due to the back electromotive force flows. As a result, even if the hopper disk 182 or reels 110 to 112 are operated by hand, none of the LEDs will emit light if these protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 are functioning. On the other hand, if any of these protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 are damaged, the damaged protection circuit will not be able to absorb the charge of the back electromotive force, and a current will flow due to the back electromotive force, causing the LED to emit light. Therefore, by manually operating the disc 182 or reels 110-112 and checking which LED emits light, it may be possible to identify which protection circuit PT3, PT6, PT9, or PT10 is suspected to be damaged.

Figure 32 shows a specific example of a protection circuit provided between the reel motor driving IC 322i and the 24V power line.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 32(a), the protection circuit PT11 is a diode connected in series between the reel motor driving IC 322i and the 24V power line. Also, the protection circuit PT12 shown in FIG. 32(a) is a diode connected in series between the reel motor driving IC 322i and the 5V power line.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 32(b), the protection circuit PT21 has a diode connected in parallel with another element (a resistor in this figure, but it may be a coil, etc.) between the reel motor driving IC 322i and the 24V power line. The protection circuit PT22 shown in FIG. 32(b) has a diode connected in parallel with another element (a resistor in this figure, but it may be a coil, etc.) between the reel motor driving IC 322i and the 5V power line.

By using a diode in the protection circuit, the rectification action of the diode can be used to prevent surge currents that would otherwise flow in the reverse direction.

Current caused by the back electromotive force generated by manually operating a movable body such as reel 110 is also prevented from flowing by the rectifying action of the diodes used in protection circuits PT11, PT12, PT21, and PT22, and the main control 24V monitor LED24ML and main control 5V monitor LED5ML do not emit light. On the other hand, if the diodes of the protection circuits PT11, PT12, PT21, and PT22 are damaged or disconnected, the circuit will be insulated so that no current flows in either direction and no current due to back electromotive force flows, and so even if a movable body such as reel 110 is operated by hand, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will not light up. However, if the diodes of the protection circuits PT21 and PT22 are damaged, the circuit will be insulated, but current will flow to other elements connected in parallel, and so current due to back electromotive force will also flow, and so the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML may light up when a movable body such as reel 110 is operated by hand. Therefore, unless it is used in conjunction with a protection circuit PT3 with a large-capacity capacitor (the main control board 300B shown in Figures 32(a) and 32(b) uses the same main control 24V capacitor 24MC as the main control 24V capacitor 24MC shown in Figure 25), if the main control 24V monitor LED24ML or main control 5V monitor LED5ML lights up when a movable body such as the reel 110 is operated by hand, it is suspected that the diodes of the protection circuits PT11, PT12, PT21, and PT22 are damaged or disconnected, or that an unauthorized person has installed an unauthorized circuit that bypasses the diodes of the protection circuits PT11 and PT12.

The above explanation is also applicable to the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22, and the movable body is the sprocket rotated by the payout motor in the payout device 152P shown in FIG. 22. The payout motor rotates and stops under the control of the payout control board 170P (see FIG. 22), and when the sprocket is rotated manually in a power-off state, an induced current is generated in the payout motor. The LEDs provided on the payout control board 170P and the LEDs provided on the main control board 156P (see FIG. 22) connected to the payout control board 170P by a harness are made to light up by this induced current if they are normal. Also, as in the above explanation, the induced current that flows into the main control board 156P flows through the power supply control board 182P (see FIG. 22) to the first sub-control board 160P (see FIG. 22), and if normal, the LEDs provided on each board 182P, 160P are made to light up. Furthermore, the movable body may be a performance movable body (e.g., a crane) driven by a motor whose rotation is controlled by the main control unit, or a performance movable body in which two movable parts are driven by two motors whose rotation is controlled by the first sub-control unit, etc.

Furthermore, instead of an LED lamp that is lit by an induced current in a power outage state, a light-emitting means such as a seven-segment (SEG) display may be used. For example, it may be a seven-segment display that displays setting values (e.g., setting 1 to setting 6) that indicate different degrees of advantage to the player. The light-emitting means must be visible.

In the above explanation, adjustable resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR) were used to light up the monitor LED with induced current in the power-off state, but any means capable of adjusting impedance will do, and is not limited to adjustable resistors. However, since problems can occur if a large amount of induced current flows even in the power-on state, it is necessary to adjust the impedance not only to facilitate the flow of induced current in the power-off state, but also to consider the state when electricity is flowing. That is, the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML, second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED 6SL] provided on the boards [for example, main control board 300B, first sub-control board 400B, sub-control board 400B', power supply control board 252B] A movable body unit having a motor [e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] and a movable body unit that can be operated by driving the motor [e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.] [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P etc.] and a removable harness [e.g., harness MH, harness MR1-MR3, harness SD] that relays the board and the movable body unit, the motor and the light emitting means are electrically connected via the harness, the board has an impedance adjustment means [e.g., adjustment resistor (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR)] between the light emitting means and ground, the impedance adjustment means adjusts the impedance so that the light emitting means emits light by induced current generated by back electromotive force when the movable body is manually operated to drive the motor in a power-off state, and adjusts the impedance to regulate the flow of induced current in a power-on state, the light emitting means may emit light when a current [e.g., induced current] flows in due to the back electromotive force generated by the motor when the movable body is manually operated to drive the motor in a power-off state.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power interruption state to drive the motor, and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven.
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He explained:

With this gaming machine, the movable body can be manually operated to check whether the harness is connected properly, and since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move), the light emitting means is easily visible.

Also,
"A certain substrate [e.g., a hopper relay substrate 901B] is provided,
The harness is a motor side harness [for example, harness MH2 or harness MR1
2, MR22, MR32] and a light emitting means side harness [for example, harness MH1 or harness MR11, MR21, MR31],
The certain board includes the motor [for example, motor 180m or motor 110m, 11
1m, 112m] via the motor side harness,
The certain board is electrically connected to the light emitting means (e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML) via the light emitting means side harness.
It is characterized by the following.
He also explained:

As the number of the certain boards increases, the number of harnesses also increases, increasing the possibility of poor electrical connections. However, since poor electrical connections can be easily checked by manual operation in a power-off state, the increased possibility does not pose a problem.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
A game machine comprising: the movable body unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means (for example, connected via a harness);
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

In other words, the light emitting means may emit light even when the power is cut off.

After attaching the movable body unit that was removed from the gaming machine for cleaning or maintenance, it is possible to check whether the movable body unit and the light-emitting means are electrically connected properly, even if the gaming machine is in a power-off state, by checking whether the light-emitting means emits light or not. In addition, by manually operating the movable body to cause the light-emitting means to emit light, the gaming machine can be visually checked even without a light-projecting means. In addition, when the movable body unit is attached to the gaming machine in the factory, it is possible to check whether the movable body unit and the light-emitting means are electrically connected properly, even if the gaming machine is in a power-off state. As explained above, this has the exceptional effect of making it easier to check whether the movable body unit is electrically connected properly.

The power cut state may be a state in which the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, a state in which the power switch is turned on but the power cord is not connected to the outlet, or a state in which no power is being supplied from the island equipment.

The movable body unit may be a spinning display unit (e.g., reel unit 700), a prize medium payout unit (e.g., hopper unit 180), or a performance operation unit (e.g., performance movable body unit 160U) (the same applies below).

Also,
"The light emitting means is provided on a board [e.g., the main control board 300B, 156P, the first sub-control board 400B, 160P, the power supply control board 252B, 182P, the relay board (901B, 902B), the dispensing control board 170P, etc.],
A game machine characterized by including a detachable harness that relays the board and the movable body unit [for example, various harnesses shown in FIG. 25 and various harnesses shown in FIG. 27].

With this gaming machine, after installing the movable unit that was removed from the gaming machine for cleaning or maintenance, it is possible to check whether the harness is connected properly or not even if the gaming machine is in a powered down state.

The board may be a board having a main control unit [e.g., main control board 300B, 156P], a board having a sub-control unit [e.g., first sub-control board 400B, 160P or second sub-control board 164P], a board having a payout control unit [e.g., payout control board 170P], a board having a power supply control unit [e.g., power supply control board 252B, 182P], or a relay board [e.g., hopper relay board 901B, reel relay board 902B].

The substrate and the movable unit may also be connected by multiple harnesses [for example, multiple harnesses MR1 to MR3 in parallel, and multiple harnesses MR11 and MR12 in series].

Also,
"The light emitting means is capable of emitting light when energized [for example, emitting light continuously or periodically, or emitting light when a certain condition is satisfied].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the light emitting means can be used for different purposes when it is in a powered state and when it is in a powered-off state. That is, when it is in a powered state, it can be used for its intended purpose (e.g., current monitoring, voltage monitoring, error monitoring, signal monitoring), and when it is in a powered-off state, it can be used to check the electrical connection.

Also,
"The light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in a powered state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.]," was also explained.

With this gaming machine, when powered, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the movable body.

Also,
"The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., an induced current] generated by a back electromotive force generated by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, simply by allowing the current to flow through the light-emitting means, it becomes easier to check whether the movable unit is electrically connected properly.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor, and a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows in (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), and may continue to emit light even when the drive of the motor stops in the first case [e.g., the light emitting means may continue to emit light due to the electric charges stored in capacitors 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC], and the light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven.
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He explained:

With this gaming machine, it is possible to manually operate the movable body to check whether the harness is connected properly, and furthermore, since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move), the light emitting means is easy to see. In addition, the light emitting means may continue to emit light even after the current caused by the back electromotive force no longer flows in, so even if you are distracted by the manual operation of the movable body and do not have time to check the light emitted by the light emitting means during the operation, you can check the light emitted by the light emitting means after the operation.

Also,
"A certain substrate [e.g., a hopper relay substrate 901B] is provided,
The harness includes a motor side harness (e.g., harness MH2 or harness MR12, MR22, MR32) and a light emitting means side harness (e.g., harness MH1 or harness MR11, MR21, MR31),
the certain board is electrically connected to the motor (e.g., motor 180m or motors 110m, 111m, 112m) via the motor-side harness,
The certain board is electrically connected to the light emitting means (e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML) via the light emitting means side harness.
It is characterized by the following.
He also explained:

The increase in the number of certain boards increases the number of harnesses, which increases the possibility of electrical connection failures. However, this is not a problem because electrical connection failures can be easily checked by manual operation in a power-off state.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
A gaming machine equipped with
the movable unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means (e.g., connected via a harness);
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), and may continue to emit light even when the motor stops being driven in the first case (for example, the light may continue to emit light due to electric charge stored in a capacitor).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

In addition to the special effects described above, this gaming machine allows the light emitted by the light emitting means to be confirmed even if the movable body is not manually operated, making it easier to confirm the light emitted by the light emitting means.

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a capacitor capable of storing electric charge generated by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state [e.g., a main control 24V capacitor 24MC, a power supply control 24V capacitor 24PC, a power supply control 5V capacitor 5PC, and a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC]."
He also explained:

The light emitted by the light emitting means can be easily confirmed by using a common electronic component called a capacitor.

Also,
"The light emitting means is provided on a board [e.g., the main control board 300B, 156P, the first sub-control board 400B, 160P, the power supply control board 252B, 182P, the relay board (901B, 902B), the dispensing control board 170P, etc.],
A game machine characterized by being equipped with a detachable harness that connects the board and the movable body unit [for example, various harnesses shown in FIG. 25 and various harnesses shown in FIG. 27].
He also explained:

Also,
"The light emitting means is capable of emitting light when energized [for example, emitting light continuously or periodically, or emitting light when a certain condition is satisfied].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in a powered state [e.g., a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., an induced current] generated by a back electromotive force generated by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A gaming machine including a movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m),
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor (e.g., motor 110m) is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness (e.g., harness MR1);
the third motor (e.g., motor 112m) is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness (e.g., harness MR3);
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor,
The light emitting means may also emit light when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor.
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He explained:

With this gaming machine, by manually operating the first movable body, it is possible to check whether the first harness is connected properly, and by manually operating the third movable body, it is possible to check whether the third harness is connected properly, making it possible to check the connections of the two types of harnesses separately. Furthermore, since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move), the light emitting means is easily visible.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A gaming machine including a movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m),
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor (e.g., motor 110m) is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., one common harness formed by gathering three harnesses MR1 to MR3);
the third motor (e.g., motor 112m) is electrically connected to the light emitting means via the harness;
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor,
The light emitting means may also emit light when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor.
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, whether the harness is connected properly can be confirmed by manually operating either the first movable body or the third movable body. Also, the connection of a common type of harness can be confirmed by operating either the first movable body or the third movable body, whichever is easier to manually operate. Furthermore, since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move), the light emitting means is easily visible.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m);
A gaming machine equipped with
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
The movable unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means (for example, via harnesses MR1 to MR3),
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor,
The light emitting means may also emit light when the third movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the third motor.
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

After attaching the movable body unit that was removed from the gaming machine for cleaning or maintenance, it is possible to check whether each movable body and the light-emitting means are electrically connected properly, even if the gaming machine is in a power-off state, by checking whether the common light-emitting means emits light. In addition, by manually operating each movable body to cause the light-emitting means to emit light, the gaming machine can be visually checked even without a light-projecting means. In addition, when the movable body unit is attached to the gaming machine at the factory, it is possible to check whether each movable body and the light-emitting means are electrically connected properly, even if the gaming machine is in a power-off state. As explained above, this has the exceptional effect of making it easier to check whether the movable body unit is electrically connected properly.

The movable body unit may also have a fourth movable body [e.g., middle reel 111] that can be operated by driving a fourth motor [e.g., motor 111m].

Also,
"The light emitting means is provided on a board [for example, the main control board 300B, 156P, the first sub-control board 400B, 160P, the power supply control board 252B, 182P, the relay board (901B, 902B), the dispensing control board 170P, etc.],
A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a detachable harness that relays the board and the first motor [for example, harness MR1, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness MR11 and harness MR12, harnesses MR11 to MR31 and harness MR12 to MR32].
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, after attaching the movable unit that was removed from the gaming machine for cleaning or maintenance, it is possible to check whether the first harness is connected properly, whether the second harness is also connected properly, and whether the first harness or the second harness is also disconnected, even if the gaming machine is in a power outage state.

In addition, the configuration may include a removable first harness that relays the board and the first motor [e.g., harness MR1, harness MR11, and harness MR12], and a removable third harness that relays the board and the third motor [e.g., harness MR3, harness MR31, and harness MR32].

Also,
"The light emitting means is capable of emitting light when energized [for example, emitting light continuously or periodically, or emitting light when a certain condition is satisfied].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the first movable body is stopped in a powered state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.],
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the third movable body is stopped in an energized state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, when powered, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the first movable body or the operation of the third movable body.

Also,
"In a power-off state, the first movable body is manually operated to drive the first motor, and the light-emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., an induced current] generated by a back electromotive force,
The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [for example, an induced current] generated by a back electromotive force generated by manually operating the third movable body to drive the third motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A first movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m);
A second movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180) having a second movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182) operable by driving a second motor (e.g., motor 180m);
A gaming machine equipped with
the first motor (e.g., motor 110m) is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness (e.g., harness MR1);
the second motor (e.g., motor 180m) is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a second harness (e.g., harness MH);
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor,
The light emitting means may also emit light when the second movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the second motor, and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the second motor.
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the second motor is driven;
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He explained:

With this gaming machine, by manually operating the movable body of the first movable body unit (the first movable body), it is possible to check whether the first harness is connected properly, and by operating the movable body of the second movable body unit (the second movable body), it is possible to check whether the second harness is connected properly. By operating the movable bodies of the two types of movable body units, it is possible to check the connections of the two types of harnesses separately. Furthermore, since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move), the light emitting means is easily visible.

Also,
"A certain substrate [e.g., a hopper relay substrate 901B] is provided,
The first harness includes a first motor side harness (e.g., harness MR12) and a first light emitting means side harness (e.g., harness MR11),
the certain board is electrically connected to the first motor (e.g., motor 110m) via the first motor side harness (e.g., harness MR12);
the certain board is electrically connected to the light emitting means (e.g., main control 24V monitor LED24ML, main control 5V monitor LED5ML) via the first light emitting means side harness (e.g., harness MR11);
The second harness includes a second motor side harness (e.g., harness MH2) and a second light emitting means side harness (e.g., harness MH1),
The certain board is electrically connected to the second motor [e.g., motor 180m] via the second motor side harness [e.g., harness MH2], and the certain board is electrically connected to the light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via the second light emitting means side harness [e.g., harness MH1].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

As the number of the certain boards increases, the number of harnesses also increases, increasing the possibility of poor electrical connections. However, since poor electrical connections can be easily checked by manual operation in a power-off state, the increased possibility does not pose a problem.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A first movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m);
A second movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180) having a second movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182) operable by driving a second motor (e.g., motor 180m);
A gaming machine equipped with
The first movable unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means (for example, via harnesses MR1 to MR3),
The second movable unit is also electrically connected to the light emitting means (for example, via a harness MH),
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body in a power-off state to drive the first motor,
The light emitting means may also emit light when the second movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the second motor.
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to this gaming machine, after attaching each movable body unit that was removed from the gaming machine for cleaning or maintenance, it is possible to check whether each movable body unit and the light-emitting means are electrically connected properly, even if the gaming machine is in a power-off state, by checking whether the common light-emitting means emits light. In addition, by manually operating each movable body to cause the light-emitting means to emit light, the gaming machine can be visually checked even without a light-projecting means. In addition, when each movable body unit is attached to the gaming machine at the factory, it is possible to check whether each movable body unit and the light-emitting means are electrically connected properly, even if the gaming machine is in a power-off state. As described above, this has the exceptional effect of making it easier to check whether multiple movable body units are electrically connected properly.

Also,
"The light emitting means is provided on a board [for example, the main control board 300B, 156P, the first sub-control board 400B, 160P, the power supply control board 252B, 182P, the relay board (901B, 902B), the dispensing control board 170P, etc.],
a detachable first harness (e.g., harness MR1) that connects the board and the first motor;
a detachable second harness [e.g., harness MH] that connects the board and the second motor;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with the following.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, after installing each movable unit that was removed from the gaming machine for cleaning or maintenance, it is possible to check whether the first harness is connected properly, whether the second harness is also connected properly, and whether the first harness or the second harness is not disconnected, even if the gaming machine is in a power outage state.

Also,
"The light emitting means is capable of emitting light when energized [for example, emitting light continuously or periodically, or emitting light when a certain condition is satisfied].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the first movable body is stopped in a powered state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.],
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the second movable body is stopped in an energized state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, when powered, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the first movable body or the second movable body.

Also,
"In a power-off state, the first movable body is manually operated to drive the first motor, and the light-emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., an induced current] generated by a back electromotive force,
The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [for example, an induced current] generated by a back electromotive force generated by manually operating the second movable body to drive the second motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, simply by allowing the current to flow through the light emitting means, it becomes easier to check whether the first movable unit is electrically connected properly and whether the second movable unit is electrically connected properly.

According to the above description,
"A first light-emitting means (e.g., a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, a sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED for error monitoring, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a setting value indicator, etc.)"
a second light-emitting means (e.g., a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, a sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED for error monitoring, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment display, a setting value display, etc., which is a light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means);
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the first light-emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
the motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
The first light-emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor and a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows in, and the second light-emitting means may also emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor and a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows in,
the first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven.
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He explained:

With this gaming machine, by manually operating the common movable body, it is possible to check whether the common harness is connected properly using either the first or second light-emitting means, and even if one of the first and second light-emitting means is damaged or malfunctioning, it is possible to check using the other light-emitting means. Furthermore, since both the first and second light-emitting means are provided on the stationary side (the side that does not move), these light-emitting means are easily visible.

Also,
"A certain substrate [e.g., a hopper relay substrate 901B] is provided,
The harness includes a motor side harness (e.g., harness MH2 or harness MR12, MR22, MR32) and a light emitting means side harness (e.g., harness MH1 or harness MR11, MR21, MR31),
the certain board is electrically connected to the motor (e.g., motor 180m or motors 110m, 111m, 112m) via the motor-side harness (e.g., harness MH2 or harnesses MR12, MR22, MR32),
The certain board is electrically connected to the first light-emitting means (e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML) via the light-emitting means side harness (e.g., harness MH1 or harnesses MR11, MR21, MR31),
The certain board is electrically connected to the second light-emitting means (e.g., main control 5V monitor LED 5ML) via the light-emitting means side harness (e.g., harness MH1 or harnesses MR11, MR21, MR31).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The increase in the number of certain boards increases the number of harnesses, which increases the possibility of electrical connection failures. However, this is not a problem because electrical connection failures can be easily checked by manual operation in a power-off state.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A first light-emitting means (e.g., a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, a sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED for error monitoring, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a setting value indicator, etc.)"
a second light-emitting means (e.g., a light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means among a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, a sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED for error monitoring, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment display, a setting value display, etc.);
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
A gaming machine equipped with
the movable unit is electrically connected to the first light-emitting means (e.g., connected via a harness);
the movable unit is electrically connected to the second light-emitting means (e.g., connected via a harness);
The first light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state,
The second light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

In other words, the first light-emitting means may emit light even when the power is cut off, and the second light-emitting means may also emit light even when the power is cut off.

After attaching the movable body unit that was removed from the gaming machine for cleaning or maintenance, it is possible to check whether the movable body unit and the multiple light-emitting means are electrically connected properly, even if the gaming machine is in a power-off state, by checking whether the multiple light-emitting means emit light. Furthermore, by manually operating the movable body to cause the multiple light-emitting means to emit light, it becomes easier to visually check the gaming machine even without a light-projecting means. Furthermore, when the movable body unit is attached to the gaming machine in the factory, it is possible to check whether the movable body unit and the multiple light-emitting means are electrically connected properly, even if the gaming machine is in a power-off state. As explained above, this has the exceptional effect of making it easier to check whether the movable body unit is electrically connected properly.

The first light-emitting means may be connected to a power supply line of a first voltage [e.g., 24 V], and the second light-emitting means may be connected to a power supply line of a second voltage [e.g., 5 V]. The first light-emitting means may be provided on a first board [e.g., main control board 300B], and the second light-emitting means may be provided on a second board [e.g., power supply control board 252B]. Alternatively, the first light-emitting means may be an LED lamp, and the second light-emitting means may be a seven-segment display.

Also,
"The first light emitting means is provided on a board (e.g., the main control board 300B, 156P, the first sub-control board 400B, 160P, the power supply control board 252B, 182P),
The second light emitting means is also provided on the substrate,
A game machine characterized by being equipped with a detachable harness that relays the board and the movable unit [for example, a harness that supplies both 24V and 5V power].
He also explained:

In other words, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are provided on a common substrate.

With this gaming machine, when the multiple light-emitting means are illuminated, it becomes easier to visually check the area around the board without the need for a light-projecting means.

Also,
"The first light emitting means [e.g., the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is provided on a first board [e.g., the main control board 300B],
The second light emitting means [e.g., power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL] is provided on a second board [e.g., power supply control board 252B],
the second substrate is a substrate different from the first substrate,
A detachable harness (e.g., harnesses MH, MR1 to MR3) that relays the first board and the movable body unit;
A detachable harness (e.g., harness PM) that connects the first board and the second board;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with the following.
He also explained:

This gaming machine makes it easy to check whether the movable unit and the first board, and the first board and the second board, are electrically connected properly.

Also,
"The first light-emitting means is capable of emitting light when energized [for example, emitting light continuously or periodically, or emitting light when a certain condition is satisfied],
The second light-emitting means is also capable of emitting light when energized (for example, emitting light continuously, periodically, or when a certain condition is satisfied).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to this gaming machine, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be used for different purposes when the power is on and when the power is off. That is, when the power is on, they can be used for their intended purpose (e.g., current monitoring, voltage monitoring, error monitoring, signal monitoring), and when the power is off, they can be used to check the electrical connection.

Also,
"The first light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in a powered state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.],
The second light emitting means is also capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in a powered state (e.g., a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, when powered, both the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the movable body.

Also,
"The first light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., an induced current] generated by a back electromotive force when the movable body is manually operated to drive the motor in a power-off state,
The second light-emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., an induced current] generated by a back electromotive force when the movable body is manually operated to drive the motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this gaming machine, it becomes easy to check whether the movable body unit is electrically connected normally by simply causing the current to flow through each of the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means.

Also,
"A first light emitting means (e.g., a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML) provided on a first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
A second light emitting means (e.g., power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL) provided on a second board (e.g., power supply control board 252B);
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.) and a movable body that can be operated by driving the motor (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.),
A gaming machine equipped with
a detachable first harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3) that relays the movable unit and the first board;
a detachable second harness [e.g., harness PM] that relays the first board and the second board;
Equipped with
the motor and the first light emitting means are electrically connected via the one harness,
the motor and the second light emitting means are electrically connected via the first harness, the first board, and the second harness;
The first light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor,
The second light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"A first light emitting means (e.g., a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML) provided on a first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700) having a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m),
A gaming machine equipped with
A relay board [for example, a hopper relay board 901B],
a detachable first harness (e.g., harness MH2, harness MR12, MR22, MR33) that connects the movable unit (e.g., hopper unit 180) and the relay board;
a detachable second harness (e.g., harness MH1, harness MR11, MR21, MR31) that relays the relay board and the first board;
Equipped with
the motor and the light emitting means are electrically connected via the first harness, the relay board and the second harness,
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state.
"The gaming machine is characterized by the above."

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
a movable body unit having a movable body (e.g., a hopper disk 182, a left reel 110, a center reel 111, a right reel 112, a shutter 163, a sprocket, a crane, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, a motor 163m, a payout motor, etc.);
A door body (e.g., the front door 102) and
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
When the door is closed, the light emitting means is not visible (for example, FIG. 30(a)).
When the door is open, the light emitting means and the movable body are visible (for example, FIG. 30(b) and FIG. 30(c)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
Operation means (e.g., a setting key switch 281, a setting change button 292, a reset switch 291, a first selection switch 190, a power switch 244, etc.)
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means and the operating means are provided on a common board (for example, the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29, the sub-control board 400B shown in FIG. 29, the power supply control board 252B of the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 29).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

The operating means may be provided at a position where the light from the light-emitting means reaches. In other words, the operating means may be illuminated by the light from the light-emitting means, or may be provided within the illumination range of the light-emitting means. The operating means may be operable by relying on the light from the light-emitting means, or may be visible even in a dark place because the light-emitting means emits light.

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means is not visible from the outside of the gaming machine (for example, FIG. 30(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, fraudsters cannot see the light-emitting means, so they can use the light-emitting means to confirm that power is not being supplied normally from the power source, preventing attempts to attach fraudulent devices to the gaming machine.

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided above the movable body unit [for example, LEDs 24ML, 5ML, and 3ML provided on the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(b)], and the gaming machine is characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22].
He also explained:

The movable body unit may be a reel unit. The movable body unit may also protrude further toward the person who operates the movable body with his or her hand than the light emitting means.

The light emitting means may be provided in a position that is visible to a person operating the movable body by hand while standing.

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided below the movable body unit (e.g., the reel unit 700) (e.g., the LEDs 24PL and 5PL provided in the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 29(c)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

The movable body unit may be a reel unit. The light emitting means may be provided at a position visible to a person operating the movable body by hand in a seated position.

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
A main control board (e.g., main control board 300B) that controls the progress of the game;
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means are provided on the main control board [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, and an error monitoring LED 3ML]. A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] is characterized in that the light emitting means are provided on the main control board [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, and an error monitoring LED 3ML].
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
A main control board (e.g., main control board 300B) that controls the progress of the game;
A sub-control board that controls the presentation of the game (for example, a first sub-control board 400B, a sub-control board 400B', a second sub-control board, a presentation control board),
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided on the sub-control board [for example, sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL'],
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

The sub-control board may perform control based on commands sent from the main control board (same below).

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
a power supply unit (e.g., power supply unit 252);
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided in the power supply device [e.g., power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL],
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

The power supply device may supply power from outside the gaming machine (commercial power source), or may convert the current supplied from outside the gaming machine (commercial power source) into a predetermined voltage (same below).

The power outage state may be a state in which the gaming machine is unable to receive power from outside (commercial power source) (same below).

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML, second sub control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.], a movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.] having a movable body [e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.] that can be operated by driving a motor [e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.],
A certain printed indication (for example, the indication 4001 of "board number 0002" printed on the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG. 29, and the sticker 210S with "board number 0001" printed thereon and attached to the main control board storage case 210)
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The certain printed display is provided at a position where light from the light emitting means reaches it [for example, in addition to light from the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL' and the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL', when the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees from the main body 101 as shown in FIG. 30(b), light from the main control 24V monitor LED24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML also reaches it], in a gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22].
He also explained:

The position where the light from the light-emitting means reaches may be, in other words, a position that is illuminated by the light from the light-emitting means, a position within the illumination range of the light-emitting means, or a position that becomes visible even in a dark place due to the light emitted by the light-emitting means (the same applies below).

The certain printed marking may be, for example, a marking relating to any of the board components such as connectors, resistors, capacitors, LEDs, ICs, LSIs, CPUs, ROMs, RAMs, switches, etc. (for example, a marking by silk screen printing), or a marking relating to the board's control number (for example, a marking printed on the resist layer of the board) (same below).

In addition, instead of a printed marking, a marking (for example, a marking by stamp or a marking by handwriting) may be used.

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
Certain circuit components (e.g., various connectors MR1, etc., various resistors 24MR, etc., capacitors 24MC, etc., LEDs 5ML, etc., various ICs 322i, etc., various switches 281, etc., LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, etc.)
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The certain circuit component is provided at a position where light from the light emitting means (e.g., the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML) reaches (e.g., the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 30(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

The certain circuit component may be, for example, a connector, a resistor, a capacitor, an LED, an IC, an LSI, a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a switch, etc. (same below).

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
A certain board case (e.g., the main control board case 210, the sub-control board case 220, 220′, the case of the power supply device 252),
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The board case [for example, the sub-control board storage case 220'] is located in a position where light from the light emitting means [for example, light from LEDs provided on the board stored in the board itself, as well as light from LEDs 24ML provided on the main control board 300B stored in the main control board storage case 210, which is at a 90-degree positional relationship when the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees to the main body 101 as shown in FIG. 30(b)] can reach the game machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22].
He also explained:

The aforementioned certain board case may have management information such as the board's management number displayed on it. For example, the management information may be printed on it, or a sticker with the management information written on it or a stamped mark may be affixed (for example, sticker 210S showing "Board number 0001" affixed to main control board storage case 210 shown in FIG. 29) (same below).

The certain board case may be the main control board storage case 210, the sub-control board storage case 220, the first sub-board case 162P, the second sub-board case 165P, the delivery board case 172P, the launch board case 176P, or the power supply board case 184P (same below).

The certain board case may be a light-transmitting case (e.g., a transparent resin case) or a non-light-transmitting case (e.g., a metal case (power supply case) (same below)).

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
a power supply unit (e.g., power supply unit 252);
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is supplied with power from the power supply device without passing through the harness [e.g., harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3] [e.g., supplied through harness PM],
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

That is, the present invention may be configured to include a power supply device [e.g., power supply device 252] that converts a current supplied from the outside [e.g., commercial power] into a predetermined voltage, and the current converted into the predetermined voltage by the power supply device is supplied to the light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] without passing through the harness [e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3]. According to this configuration, when the power is cut off, the motor can be manually driven to check whether the harness is connected or not depending on whether the light-emitting means emits light, and when the power is on, whether the power is being normally supplied from the power supply can be checked separately from whether the harness is connected or not depending on whether the light-emitting means emits light.
In addition, the movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700] may be removable from the gaming machine with the connector of the harness [e.g., harness MH, harness MR1 to MR3] unplugged. Since the movable body unit is configured to be removed with the harness connector unplugged when inspecting or cleaning, poor connection or forgetting to connect the harness is likely to occur, but by manually operating the movable body, it is easy to check whether poor connection or forgetting to connect the harness has occurred.

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
a power supply unit (e.g., power supply unit 252);
A gaming machine equipped with
The motors [e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m] are electrically connected to the light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via a first harness [e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3],
the light emitting means (e.g., a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML) is electrically connected to the power supply device via a second harness (e.g., a harness PM);
The light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] may emit light even if there is a poor connection in the second harness [e.g., harness PM], when the movable body [e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112] is manually operated to drive the motor, and a current [e.g., induced current] flows in due to the back electromotive force generated by the motor,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven.
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harness PS1, PS2, harness SD),
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The gaming machine is a slot machine (e.g., a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 ),
The movable unit is a reel unit [e.g., reel unit 700].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

In other words, the movable body is a reel.

According to the previous description,
"A first light emitting means (for example, an LED (main control 24V monitor LED 24ML) provided on a certain board)"
a second light-emitting means (for example, a different LED (main control 5V monitor LED 5ML) provided on a certain board or an LED (sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL) provided on a board different from the certain board);
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the first light-emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3);
the motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
The first light-emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor, and a current (e.g., an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows in (hereinafter referred to as the "first case");
The second light-emitting means may also emit light when the movable body is manually operated in the power-off state to drive the motor, and a current (e.g., an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows in (hereinafter referred to as the "second case").
the first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven,
In the first and second cases, even if the driving of the motor is stopped, at least one of the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means may continue to emit light (for example, the light may continue to be emitted by the electric charge stored in the capacitors 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

The harness may be, for example, harness MR1. In this case, motor 110m is electrically connected to main control 24V monitor LED 24ML or main control 5V monitor LED 5ML via harness MR1. Also, motor 110m is electrically connected to sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL or sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL at least via harness MR1. That is, motor 110m is electrically connected to sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL via harness MR1, harness PM, and harness PS1, and motor 110m is electrically connected to sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL via harness MR1, harness PM, and harness PS2. Therefore, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided on the same board or on different boards.

According to the previous description,
"A first light emitting means (e.g., a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, an LED 3ML for error monitoring)"
A second light-emitting means (e.g., the secondary control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL and 24SL', the secondary control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL and 5SL', the second secondary control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, and a signal monitoring LED)
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
A gaming machine equipped with
the motor is electrically connected to the first light-emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3);
the motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
The first light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor, and a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor,
The second light emitting means may also emit light when the movable body is manually operated in the power-off state to drive the motor, and a current caused by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows in the second light emitting means,
the first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven,
The first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are provided on different boards (for example, different boards such as a main control board 300B, a first sub-control board 400B, and a sub-control board 400B').
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"A first light emitting means (e.g., a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL)"
A second light emitting means (e.g., a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL),
a power supply unit (e.g., power supply unit 252);
A movable body unit (e.g., hopper unit 180, reel unit 700, performance movable body unit 160U, payout device 152P, etc.) having a movable body (e.g., hopper disk 182, left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crown, etc.) that can be operated by driving a motor (e.g., motors 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.),
The motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a harness (e.g., harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3),
the motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
The first light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the motor, and a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor,
The second light emitting means may also emit light when the movable body is manually operated in the power-off state to drive the motor, and a current caused by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows in the second light emitting means,
the first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven,
The first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are supplied with different voltages from the power supply device (for example, 24 V and 5 V).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"A first light emitting means (for example, an LED (main control 24V monitor LED 24ML) provided on a certain board)"
a second light-emitting means (for example, a different LED (main control 5V monitor LED 5ML) provided on a certain board or an LED (sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL) provided on a board different from the certain board);
A gaming machine including a movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m),
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the first motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness,
the third motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
the third motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the third harness,
The first light-emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor (hereinafter referred to as the "first case");
The second light emitting means may also emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the first motor, and a current (e.g., an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows in (hereinafter referred to as the "second case");
The first light-emitting means may emit light when the third movable body is operated by hand in the power-off state to drive the third motor and a current [e.g., induced current] due to the back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in (hereinafter referred to as the "third case"), and the second light-emitting means may emit light when the third movable body is operated by hand in the power-off state to drive the third motor and a current [e.g., induced current] due to the back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth case");
the first light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
the second light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
In the first and second cases, even if the driving of the first motor is stopped, at least one of the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means may continue to emit light (for example, the light may continue to be emitted by the electric charge stored in the capacitors 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC),
In the third and fourth cases, even if the driving of the third motor is stopped, at least one of the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means may continue to emit light (for example, the light may continue to be emitted by the electric charge stored in the capacitors 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

The first harness may be, for example, a harness MR1, and the first motor may be, for example, a motor 110m. In this case, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML or the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML via the harness MR1. The motor 110m is also electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL or the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL at least via the harness MR1. That is, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL via the harness MR1, the harness PM, and the harness PS1, and the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL via the harness MR1, the harness PM, and the harness PS2. Therefore, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means may be provided on the same board or on different boards.

The third harness may be, for example, harness MR3, and the third motor may be, for example, motor 112m. In this case, motor 112m is electrically connected to main control 24V monitor LED 24ML or main control 5V monitor LED 5ML via harness MR3. Also, motor 112m is electrically connected to sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL or sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL at least via harness MR3. That is, motor 112m is electrically connected to sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL via harness MR3, harness PM, and harness PS1, and motor 112m is electrically connected to sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL via harness MR3, harness PM, and harness PS2. Therefore, here too, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided on the same board or on different boards.

According to the previous description,
"A first light emitting means (e.g., a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, an LED 3ML for error monitoring)"
A gaming machine including a second light-emitting means (e.g., secondary control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', secondary control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', a second secondary control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, a signal monitoring LED), and a movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m),
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the first motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness,
the third motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
the third motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the third harness,
The first light-emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor,
The second light emitting means may also emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the first motor, and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor,
The first light emitting means may emit light when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor,
The second light emitting means may also emit light when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor, and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor,
the first light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
the second light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
The first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are provided on different boards (for example, different boards such as a main control board 300B, a first sub-control board 400B, and a sub-control board 400B').
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"A first light emitting means (e.g., a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL)"
A second light emitting means (e.g., a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL),
a power supply unit (e.g., power supply unit 252);
A gaming machine including a movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m),
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the first motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness,
the third motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
the third motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the third harness,
The first light-emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor,
The second light emitting means may also emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the first motor, and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor,
The first light emitting means may emit light when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor,
The second light emitting means may also emit light when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor and a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor,
the first light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
the second light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
The first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are supplied with different voltages from the power supply device (for example, 24 V and 5 V),
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m);
A gaming machine equipped with
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor,
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor,
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
When the door is closed, the light emitting means is not visible (for example, FIG. 30(a)).
When the door is open, the light emitting means, the first movable body, and the third movable body are visible (for example, FIG. 30(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m), and operation means (e.g., a setting key switch 281, a setting change button 292, a reset switch 291, a first selection switch 190, a power switch 244, etc.),
A gaming machine equipped with
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor,
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor,
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
The light emitting means and the operating means are provided on a common board (for example, the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29, the sub-control board 400B shown in FIG. 29, the power supply control board 252B of the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 29).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

The operating means may be provided at a position where the light from the light-emitting means reaches. In other words, the operating means may be illuminated by the light from the light-emitting means, or may be provided within the illumination range of the light-emitting means. The operating means may be operable by relying on the light from the light-emitting means, or may be visible even in a dark place because the light-emitting means emits light.

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A gaming machine including a movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m),
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor,
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor,
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
The light emitting means is not visible from the outside of the gaming machine (for example, FIG. 30(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, fraudsters cannot see the light-emitting means, so they can use the light-emitting means to confirm that power is not being supplied normally from the power source, preventing attempts to attach fraudulent devices to the gaming machine.

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A gaming machine including a movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m),
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor,
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor,
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
The light emitting means is provided above the movable body unit [for example, LEDs 24ML, 5ML, and 3ML provided on the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 29(b)], and the gaming machine is characterized by this [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22].
He also explained:

The movable body unit may be a reel unit. The movable body unit may also protrude further toward the person who operates the movable body with his or her hand than the light emitting means.

The light emitting means may be provided in a position that is visible to a person operating the movable body by hand while standing.

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A gaming machine including a movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m),
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor,
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor,
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
The light emitting means is provided below the movable body unit (e.g., the reel unit 700) (e.g., the LEDs 24PL and 5PL provided in the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 29(c)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

The movable unit may be a reel unit.

The light emitting means may be provided at a position that is visible to a person who operates the movable body with his/her hand in a sitting position.
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., motor 110m), a main control board (e.g., main control board 300B) that controls the progress of the game,
A gaming machine equipped with
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor and a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor,
the light emitting means may emit light when a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor,
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
The light emitting means are provided on the main control board [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, and an error monitoring LED 3ML]. A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22] is characterized in that the light emitting means are provided on the main control board [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, and an error monitoring LED 3ML].
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., motor 110m), a main control board (e.g., main control board 300B) that controls the progress of the game,
A sub-control board that controls the presentation of the game (for example, a first sub-control board 400B, a sub-control board 400B', a second sub-control board, a presentation control board),
A gaming machine equipped with
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor and a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor,
the light emitting means may emit light when a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor,
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
The light emitting means is provided on the sub-control board [for example, sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL'],
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m);
a power supply unit (e.g., power supply unit 252);
A gaming machine equipped with
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor and a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor,
the light emitting means may emit light when a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor,
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
The light emitting means is provided in the power supply device [e.g., power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL],
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., motor 110m), a certain printed display (e.g., display 4001 of "board number 0002" printed on sub-control board 400B' shown in Figure 29, a sticker 210S with "board number 0001" printed thereon and affixed to main control board storage case 210),
A gaming machine equipped with
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor and a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor,
the light emitting means may emit light when a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor,
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
The certain printed indication is provided at a position where light from the light emitting means reaches it (for example, in addition to light from the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL' and the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL', when the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees relative to the main body 101 as shown in FIG. 30, light from the main control 24V monitor LED24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML also reaches it (FIG. 30(b))).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

In addition, instead of a printed marking, a marking (for example, a marking by stamp or a marking by handwriting) may be used.

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., motor 110m), and certain circuit components (e.g., various connectors MR1, etc., various resistors 24MR, etc., capacitors 24MC, etc., LEDs 5ML, etc., various ICs 322i, etc., various switches 281, etc., LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, etc.),
A gaming machine equipped with
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor and a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor,
the light emitting means may emit light when a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor,
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
The certain circuit component is provided at a position where light from the light emitting means (e.g., the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML) reaches (e.g., the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 30(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., motor 110m), a certain board case (e.g., main control board case 210, sub-control board case 220, 220′, case of power supply unit 252),
A gaming machine equipped with
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor and a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor,
the light emitting means may emit light when a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor,
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
The certain board case is provided at a position where light from the light emitting means (for example, light from an LED provided on a board contained in the certain board case, and light from an LED 24ML provided on a main control board 300B contained in a main control board storage case 210 that is in a 90-degree positional relationship when the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees to the main body 101 as shown in FIG. 30(b)) can reach the certain board case.
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m); a power supply unit (e.g., a power supply unit 252);
A gaming machine equipped with
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor,
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor,
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
The light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is supplied with power from the power supply device without passing through the first harness [e.g., harness MR1] [e.g., via harness PM],
The light-emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is supplied with power from the power supply device without passing through the third harness [e.g., harness MR3] [e.g., supplied with power via harness PM],
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m); a power supply unit (e.g., a power supply unit 252);
A gaming machine equipped with
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
The light emitting means is electrically connected to the power supply device via a second harness [e.g., harness PM], and the light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] may emit light even if a poor connection occurs in the second harness [e.g., harness PM], when the first movable body is manually operated to drive the first motor and a current [e.g., induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows in,
the light emitting means may emit light when the third movable body is manually operated to drive the third motor even if a connection failure occurs in the second harness (e.g., harness PM), and a current (e.g., induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor,
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 22)
He also explained:

According to the previous description,
"Light emitting means [for example, a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, an LED 3ML for error monitoring, a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, an LED for signal monitoring, a 7-segment indicator, a set value indicator 293, etc.],
A gaming machine including a movable body unit (e.g., a reel unit 700) having a first movable body (e.g., a left reel 110) that can be operated by driving a first motor (e.g., a motor 110m),
The movable body unit has a third movable body (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be operated by driving a third motor (e.g., the motor 112m),
the first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [e.g., harness MR1];
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [e.g., harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor,
The light emitting means may emit light when a current (e.g., an induced current) flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor when the third movable body is manually operated in the power interrupted state to drive the third motor,
the light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move even when the third motor is driven;
The gaming machine is a slot machine (e.g., a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 17 ),
The movable unit is a reel unit (e.g., reel unit 700).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

For example, the first movable body may be a first reel and the third movable body may be a third reel.

Below, using Figures 33 to 67, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as a slot machine 100, or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in Figures 33 to 67 will, in principle, be used only in the explanation using Figures 33 to 67, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in Figures 33 to 67 will take precedence in the explanation using Figures 33 to 67.

Figure 33 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33 is a gaming machine in which a predetermined number of gaming media are inserted, and multiple reels with multiple types of symbols each start spinning when a predetermined spin start command is received, and a lottery is held to determine whether multiple types of internal winning combinations have been won based on the reception of the spin start command, and each of the multiple reels stops spinning individually when a predetermined spin stop command is received. If the conditions determined by the combination of symbols when the multiple reels stop based on the lottery results match the predetermined payout conditions, gaming media is paid out and the game ends, but if they do not match, the game ends without paying out any gaming media. The payout of the gaming media is sometimes called a profit. Also, something that makes it easier to obtain this profit is sometimes called a privilege.

This slot machine 100 comprises a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed relative to the main body 101. The front door 102 is a door member that is rotatably attached to the main body 101. The front door 102 is provided with a locking function so that the front door 102 cannot be opened by anyone other than a member of staff at the gaming establishment.

Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of patterns arranged on the outer periphery are housed inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are rotated by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

Each symbol is printed at equal intervals on a strip-shaped member in appropriate numbers, and this strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110-112. When viewed by the player, the symbols on the reels 110-112 are displayed vertically in roughly threes through the symbol display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible.

Figure 34 shows an example of a line.

To explain this in more detail using Figure 34, the symbol displayed on the top of the left reel 110 (position 1 in the figure) is the left reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle of the left reel 110 (position 4 in the figure) is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the bottom of the left reel 110 (position 7 in the figure) is the left reel bottom symbol, the symbol displayed on the top of the middle reel 111 (position 2 in the figure) is the middle reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle of the left reel 111 (position 5 in the figure) is the middle reel middle symbol, The symbol displayed in the lower row (position 8 in the figure) is called the middle reel lower row symbol, the symbol displayed in the upper row of the right reel 112 (position 3 in the figure) is called the right reel upper row symbol, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 6 in the figure) is called the right reel middle row symbol, and the symbol displayed in the lower row of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure) is called the right reel lower row symbol, and each symbol of the reels 110 to 112 is displayed three vertically on each of the reels 110 to 112 through the symbol display window 113, for a total of nine symbols. Then, by rotating each of the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of multiple types of symbols. In addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices can also be used as such display devices. Additionally, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33 has three reels located inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the location where the reels are installed are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is provided on the back of each of the reels 110 to 112 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113. The backlight is configured so that each symbol is shielded so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112, and a light-shielding piece (not shown) of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor (index sensor 730 shown in FIG. 4). The position of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection results of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the pay line.

The active line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the active line 114. An active line is a line (a line where a winning judgment is made) on which it is judged whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed, and a winning is judged when a symbol corresponding to an internal winning combination stops on this active line. Here, a line is an area within the display window 113 that is defined as an area for one symbol on each of the reels 110 to 112. Note that lines other than the active lines on which a winning judgment is not made are called inactive lines.

In FIG. 34, five lines are shown: a middle line L1 consisting of the middle symbol on the left reel, the middle symbol on the middle reel, and the middle symbol on the right reel; a downward-sloping line L2 consisting of the upper symbol on the left reel, the middle symbol on the middle reel, and the lower symbol on the right reel; a right-sloping line L3 consisting of the lower symbol on the left reel, the middle symbol on the middle reel, and the upper symbol on the right reel; an upper line L4 consisting of the upper symbol on the left reel, the upper symbol on the middle reel, and the upper symbol on the right reel; and a lower line L5 consisting of the lower symbol on the left reel, the lower symbol on the middle reel, and the lower symbol on the right reel. These lines are merely examples, and any line that defines an area for one symbol on each of the reels 110 to 112 may be used, such as a line consisting of the upper symbol on the left reel, the lower symbol on the middle reel, and the upper symbol on the right reel.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include special combination 1 (BB1), special combination 2 (BB2), replay combinations 1-3, and minor combinations 1-7 (e.g., watermelon, weak cherry, etc.). Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be any combination.

The notification lamp 123 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning role (specifically, a special role) has been internally won in an internal lottery, or that a special game state, which will be described later, is in progress. The medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp that notifies the player that a game medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay role (details of which will be described later), which is one of the winning roles, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) that are electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one medal is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two medals are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three medals are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 121 lights up to indicate that the game can be started.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot through which the player inserts medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) through the medal insertion slot 141; the term "insertion" includes both.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a gaming machine that is premised on playing with three bets. However, it can also be played with two bets. For this reason, it is designed so that playing with three bets in a two-bet bonus internal win state is more advantageous for the player than playing with two bets in a three-bet bonus internal win state, and the two-bet bonus internal win state is treated as the normal play state, so that players are encouraged to play with three bets whenever possible.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical form. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning some kind of winning combination. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are seven-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation of the start lever 135 is called the operation to start the game.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 consisting of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each of the reels 110 to 112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right reel 112 can be stopped by operating the right stop button 139. Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. The reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as the first stop reel, the second stop reel, and the third stop reel, respectively. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the reels 110 to 112 that are spinning is called the operation order or push order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called the "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called the "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push". Note that light-emitting elements may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light-emitting elements can be lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that can be pressed to remove medals that have been inserted and become stuck. The settlement button 134 is a button that can be used to settle medals that have been electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals that have been bet, and to dispense them from the medal payout outlet 155.

The front door 102 is also provided with a key hole 140, into which a key is inserted and turned to the right to unlock, and turned to the left to lock. The slot machine 100 is provided with an opening sensor 294 (see FIG. 35(a)) that detects when the front door 102 is open. This opening sensor 294 detects when the front door 102 is open by detecting an opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is open.

In addition, a first chance button 165 and a second chance button 166 are provided between the bet button 132 and the medal insertion slot 141. A first effect lamp is built into the first chance button 165, and a second effect lamp is built into the second chance button 166. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation means operated by the player during the effect. In addition, a left button 167 is provided to the left of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided to the right. By operating the left button 167 and right button 168, it is sometimes possible to move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157, and in such cases, the second chance button 166 may function as a confirmation button.

A title panel 162 is provided below the stop button unit 136, on which the model name is displayed and various certificate stamps are attached. This title panel 162 is illuminated from behind by a title panel lamp 164. A medal payout opening 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162.

The sound hole 145 at the bottom is a hole for outputting sound from the woofer 277 (see FIG. 35) to the outside. The top lamp 144T at the top of the front door 102, the left side lamp 144L at the left side of the front door 102, and the right side lamp 144R at the right side are decorative lamps for livening up the game. A performance device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided at the top of the performance device 160. This sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting sound from the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 35) to the outside. The performance device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed horizontally, and a performance image display device 157 disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right and left shutters 163a and 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the performance image display device 157, the display screen of the performance image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the player's side). The performance image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, but it may be any display device that can display various performance images and various game information, and may be, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. The display screen is rectangular and configured so that the player can view the entire screen. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen, so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear irregular. Furthermore, the display screen is a flat surface, but may also be curved.

Note that what has been referred to as a lamp up until now is an example of a light-emitting means, and in this specification, lamps also refer to devices that use LEDs as light sources, and other devices that emit light, such as fluorescent lamps and cold cathode fluorescent tubes, may also be referred to as lamps, and devices that emit light are examples of light-emitting means.

Figure 35 shows the internal configuration of the slot machine 100, where (a) is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open, and (b) is an enlarged view of the door relay board 290 disposed on the front door 102.

The main body 101 is a box body surrounded by a top panel 261, a left side panel 260, a right side panel 260, a bottom panel 264, and a back panel 242, and is open to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back panel 242, and a reel unit 700 equipped with three reels 110 to 112 is arranged below the main control board storage case 210. To the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reel unit 700, i.e., on the left side panel 260 as viewed from the side, a sub-control board storage case 220 that stores a sub-control board is arranged. A first selection switch 190 is provided in the sub-control board storage case 220. Since the first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (e.g., a store clerk) can operate it by opening the front door 102, but a person who cannot unlock the front door 102 (e.g., a player) cannot operate it. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided in a position where the player cannot operate it. By operating the first selection switch 190, the volume value of the sound (e.g., BGM, sound effects, error sounds, etc.) output from the woofer 277 and the upper speaker 272 can be changed, or a power saving mode can be set. In addition, an external centralized terminal board 248 that is connected to the main control board and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side panel 260 on the right side. The external centralized terminal board 248 is provided with an information output circuit 334 shown in FIG. 38.

In addition, a setting key switch 281 is provided on the right side of the reel unit 700 to change the game mode (also called the setting value) of the slot machine 100 and to confirm the changed setting value. Here, the setting value is a value related to the degree of advantage of the player, and will be described in detail later, but for example, includes a value ("payout rate") for adjusting the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets on the gaming machine when playing for a specified period of time. This setting value can be set in multiple stages, for example, six stages.

The setting key switch 281 is a key switch that is electrically turned on/off by inserting and rotating a specific setting key (not shown). Specifically, when a specific setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and rotated clockwise, a setting key switch sensor provided in the setting key switch 281 detects the ON state, and when rotated counterclockwise, the setting key switch sensor detects the OFF state.

The setting key switch 281, like the first selection switch 190 described above, is provided inside the main body 101, so it can only be operated by someone who can unlock the front door 102.

The main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248 are each provided with a monitor LED that lights up when the setting key switch 281 is turned on. When the setting key switch 281 is turned on, a setting key switch on signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 248 to an external device (e.g., a hall computer) indicating that the setting key switch 281 has been turned on.

The setting key switch 281 may be mounted on the main control board 300B.

The lower panel 264 is provided with a hopper unit 180 (a device that dispenses medals accumulated in a bucket 181), and above the hopper unit 180, i.e., below the reel unit 700, a power supply device 252 having a power supply control board is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided on the front side of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 is a toggle switch electrically connected to the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be used to turn the slot machine 100 on (power ON) or off (power OFF). The power switch 244 may be mounted on the power supply control board. The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from outside the slot machine 100 into DC, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and each device, such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400. Furthermore, it is equipped with a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) to supply power to certain components (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a certain period of time (e.g., 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off.

To the right of the hopper unit 180, there is disposed an auxiliary medal storage 240 for storing medals that overflow from the hopper unit 180, and behind this is disposed an overflow terminal (not shown). The power supply unit 252 is provided with a power cord connector for connecting a power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to this extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back panel 242 of the main body 101.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side panel 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the pattern display window 113, there are provided the performance device 160, a performance control board (not shown) that controls the performance device 160, and an upper speaker 272. Below the pattern display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a return passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals and the like into the medal receiving tray 161, and the like. The medal selector 170 will be described in more detail later. A low-frequency speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145. An open sensor 294 is provided on the back of the front door 102. The open sensor 294 is configured to be L (OFF) when the front door 102 is closed and H (ON) when the front door 102 is open.

A door relay board 290 is provided on the back of the front door 102 below the pattern display window 113. As shown in FIG. 35(b), this door relay board 290 is provided with a reset switch 291, a setting change button 292, and a setting value display 293. Like the setting key switch 281, etc., the reset switch 291 and setting change button 292 can only be operated by someone who can unlock the front door 102.

The reset switch 291 is a push button switch, and by pressing (short press) this reset switch 291, an error in the slot machine 100 can be cleared. In addition, by pressing and holding (long press) the reset switch 291, the RAM of the main control unit can be cleared (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization).

The setting change button 292 is a push button switch similar to the reset switch 291. The operating procedure for changing the setting value using this setting change button 292 will be described later.

The setting value display 293 is a display such as a 7-segment LED. This setting value display 293 can display a display showing the game mode (setting value) set by the setting change button 292.

The reset switch 291 and the setting change button 292 were provided on the door relay board 290, but they may be provided on the main control board 300B. The setting value display 293 may also be provided on the main control board 300B.

Figure 36 is a diagram explaining the medal selector 170.

Figure 36 shows a schematic diagram of the slot machine 100 shown in Figure 33. Also, in Figure 36, the medal selector 170 provided on the back side of the front door 102 and the hopper unit 180 provided inside the main body 101 shown in Figure 35 are shown by dotted lines. The medal selector 170 has a medal blocker 172 provided in the medal passage 171. The medal blocker 172 distributes medals inserted from the medal insertion port 141 and passing through the medal passage 171 to either the storage passage 173 or the return passage 266. The medal blocker 172 shown in Figure 36 is in a state of protruding into the medal passage 171, and the medals passing through the medal passage 171 are guided (guided) by the medal blocker 172 in a protruding state to pass through the return passage 266 and are discharged from the medal payout outlet 155. On the other hand, when the medal blocker 172 is retracted from within the medal passage 171, medals passing through the medal passage 171 pass through the storage passage 173 and are stored in the bucket 181. The protrusion of the medal blocker 172 into the medal passage 171 and the retraction of the medal blocker 172 from the medal passage 171 are performed by a blocker solenoid (not shown). That is, when an actuation signal (control signal) is output to the blocker solenoid, the medal blocker 172 operates (displaces) to guide the inserted medal to the storage passage 173. On the other hand, when an actuation signal is not output to the blocker solenoid, the medal blocker 172 operates to guide the inserted medal to the discharge passage 19b.

Figure 37 (a) is a table showing the display order of the setting values displayed on the setting value display 293.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33, six types of setting values are prepared: setting 1, setting 2, settings 4 to 6, and setting b. Setting 1 is the default setting value that is initially displayed on the setting value display 293. That is, immediately after being shipped from the factory, after the RAM including the memory area that stores the setting values (RAM of the main control unit) is cleared (or RAM cleared, RWM cleared, RWM initialized), or when the backup power source that continues to store the memory area that stores the setting values is lost, setting 1 is displayed on the setting value display 293 as the default setting value, and setting 1 is set as the setting value.

The degree of advantage for the player in gaining profits is higher for setting 2 than for setting 1, higher for setting 4 than for setting 2, higher for setting 5 than for setting 4, and higher for setting 6 than for setting 5. In other words, setting 6 is the most advantageous setting in terms of the player gaining profits.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 33, setting b is provided instead of setting 3. Setting b is less advantageous than setting 1 in terms of the player's gaining profits. In other words, setting b is the least advantageous setting in terms of the player's gaining profits. Setting b is displayed on the 7-segment LED with a difference of only one segment from setting 6, and is displayed next to the most advantageous setting 6. In other words, it is displayed last among the six types of setting values. If a cheater performs a cheating operation thinking that the setting displayed last is the most advantageous setting, and as a result setting b is displayed on the setting value display 293, the cheater may mistake it for setting 6 and change the setting to setting b. In this case, a disadvantage can be caused to the cheater.

When changing the settings, the display on the setting value display 293 is updated as follows: 1 → 2 → 4 → 5 → 6 → b → 1 → 2... by operating the setting change button 292. Note that the display order other than "Setting 1" displayed first may be any order, and for example, the display on the setting value display 293 may be updated as follows: 1 → 2 → b → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2....

Figure 37(b) is a table summarizing the performance differences for each setting value.

Performance A is the payout rate (sometimes called the ball output rate), performance B is the probability of hitting the special role (BB) for the first time, performance C is the probability of hitting the AT (assist time) for the first time, performance D is the probability of the AT continuing, performance E is the expected number of coins won in the AT, performance F is the probability of hitting a small role A (for example, watermelon), performance G is the frequency and probability of a notification suggesting a setting value (setting suggestion notification), and performance H is the frequency and probability of a setting suggestion notification as a confirmed notification. Performances A to F correspond to performances that indicate the degree of advantage in terms of the player's profit acquisition, and as mentioned above, the relationship is setting b < setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6.

In the setting suggestion notification of performance G, a notification suggesting the currently set setting value is made using the performance image display device 157, the title panel lamp 164, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the bass speaker 277, the upper speaker 272, etc. The setting suggestion notification here includes a notification in which a lamp is simply turned off or a warning sound is output, as well as a setting suggestion effect such as a setting suggestion animation being displayed on the performance image display device 157. In addition, even when a setting value is suggested, it also includes a case where a false setting value is suggested (setting related effect, setting related notification). Furthermore, even when a setting value is suggested, it also includes a case where a notification is made that a certain setting value is 100% true (setting confirmation notification). When setting b is set, the title panel lamp 164 is always turned off at the start of a demonstration animation (demo animation) on the performance image display device 157, and when a setting value other than setting b is set, the title panel lamp 164 continues to be lit at the start of the demo animation. The demo animation starts when a predetermined time has elapsed since the game ended (after the third stop was performed) without inserting a medal (betting operation). In addition, when power is restored (power is turned on) without betting operation being performed at the time of power outage, the demo animation starts, but when a setting change is started, the demo animation starts after the setting change is completed. In addition, when the chance zone ends, the battle performance ends, the BB ends, and the AT ends, when the setting b is set, the setting suggestion notification is performed 100%. On the other hand, when a setting value other than the setting b is set, the setting suggestion notification is performed with a predetermined probability of less than 100%. In addition, when the setting b is set, the setting b confirmation notification may be performed once per predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games). In addition, when the setting b is set, the setting suggestion notification such as "It may be the setting b" may not be performed, and only the setting b confirmation notification may be performed. Furthermore, when the setting b is set, the notification mode may include content suggesting that it is disadvantageous to the player (for example, text display or voice output such as "The tough battle will continue"). The probability of execution (frequency of occurrence) of the setting suggestion notification (performance G) described above is higher when setting b is set than when any other setting value (settings 1, 2, 4-6) is set, and is roughly the same for all setting values other than setting b.

Regarding performance H, when setting b is set, only a notification suggesting only setting b (setting b confirmed notification not suggesting settings 1, 2, 4 to 6) may be made as a setting suggestion notification, and when a setting value other than setting b is set, a notification suggesting a setting value other than the set may also be made as a setting suggestion notification. For example, when setting 5 is set, an odd confirmed notification notifying that an odd setting value is set, and when setting 2 is set, an even confirmed notification notifying that an even setting value is set may be made. In addition, when setting 6 is set, a high setting confirmed notification or a setting 4 or higher confirmed notification notifying that a setting value of 4 or higher is set, a setting 2 or higher confirmed notification notifying that a setting value of 2 or higher is set, and a setting 5 or higher confirmed notification notifying that a setting value of 5 or higher is set may also be made. In addition, when setting 6 is set, a performance that notifies only setting 6 (setting 6 confirmed notification) may be made with a lower probability than the execution probability of setting b confirmed notification. The execution probability (occurrence frequency) of the setting confirmation notification (performance H) described above is highest when setting b is set (e.g., 100% or nearly 100%), followed by when setting 6 is set (e.g., 50%), and when the remaining settings (settings 1, 2, 4, 5) are set, the execution probability is approximately the same (e.g., 30%), but lower than when setting 6 is set.

Figures 37(c) to 37(f) are diagrams showing examples of setting-related notifications (setting suggestion notifications, setting confirmation notifications) using the effect image display device 157, which may be made when the chance zone ends, the battle effect ends, the BB ends, the AT ends, etc. The setting-related notifications here are a type of notification effect.

Figure 37(c) is a diagram showing an example of an even number setting suggestion notification. In the performance image display device 157 shown in Figure 37(c), the words "Maybe even number setting" are displayed to the right of the panda character PND. This "Maybe even number setting" suggests that the setting value is likely to be 2, 4, or 6 (even number setting). Note that this even number setting suggestion notification may be made only when the setting value is an even number setting, or may be made when the setting value is a setting other than an even number setting (odd number setting). In this case, the setting value may be more easily notified when it is an even number setting than when it is an odd number setting.

Figure 37(d) is a diagram showing an example of a setting 5 or higher indication. In the effect image display device 157 shown in Figure 37(d), the text "I want to eat 5 or more sugar canes" is displayed to the right of the panda character PND. This text display "I want to eat 5 or more sugar canes" suggests that the setting value is likely to be 5 or 6. Note that this setting 5 or higher indication may be made only when the setting value is 5 or 6, or may also be made when the setting value is 4 or lower. In this case, the setting value may be made more likely to be indicated when it is 5 or 6 than when it is 4 or lower. Note that when the setting value is 4 or lower, setting b may or may not be included.

37(e) is a diagram showing an example of a notification that the setting is 2 or higher. In the performance image display device 157 shown in FIG. 37(e), the characters "Oh, it's time for a business review" are displayed to the right of the panda character PND. The characters "Oh, it's time for a business review" themselves correspond to a notification that suggests the setting is 2 or higher. After that, the grandmother character BBA appears in the lower left part of the display screen, and the business review is carried out. The grandmother character BBA displays the characters "Does it have to be 1? Is 2 or higher not good enough?" as a line for the business review. This notification by the lines denies that the setting is 1, and confirms that the setting is 2 or higher. The notification that the setting is 2 or higher may be made only when the setting is 2 or higher, or may be made even when the setting is 1. Alternatively, when the setting is 1, the grandmother character BBA may not appear.

37(f) is a diagram showing an example of a notification that the setting is b. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 37(f), first, the words "Oh, it's a message from God" are displayed to the right of the panda character PND. The words "Oh, it's a message from God" themselves correspond to a notification that suggests the setting is b. After that, the god character KGG appears in the lower left part of the display screen and issues a message. The god character KGG displays the words "The tough battle will continue" as a message. This message is a notification that confirms that the setting is b. The notification that the setting is b is issued only when the setting is b, and is not issued when the setting is any other setting value. However, when the setting is any other setting value than the setting b, the words "Oh, it's a message from God" may be displayed together with the panda character PND, and the god character KGG may not appear.

The above has been explained as including a setting suggestion notification with a setting suggestion effect, and a setting confirmation notification with a setting confirmation effect, but a setting suggestion notification may be interpreted as a setting suggestion effect, and a setting confirmation notification may be interpreted as a setting confirmation effect.

When the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 in the power-on state (power ON) and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), the setting value display 293 displays the currently set game mode (setting value) in numbers, so it can be used to check the currently set game mode. In other words, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 in the power-on state (power ON) and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), a setting confirmation process that allows the setting value to be confirmed is started by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned counterclockwise (setting key ON → OFF), the setting confirmation process ends.

Here, the operating procedure for changing the setting value will be explained. The setting key (not shown) is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), and the power switch 244 is switched from a power-off state (power OFF) to a power-on state (power ON), thereby enabling the setting value change (starting the setting value change process). Each time the setting change button 292 is pressed, the game mode (setting value) changes in the following order: 1 → 2 → 4 → 5 → 6 → b → 1 → 2 → ..., allowing the desired game mode to be selected. The game mode (setting value) selected at that time is confirmed by operating the start lever 135. Finally, the setting key is turned counterclockwise (setting key ON → OFF) to end the setting value change process.

The period during which the setting value is changed, i.e., the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key in the setting value change operation to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting key, is also called the setting value change mode, and the period during which the setting value is checked, i.e., the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key in the setting value check operation to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting key, is also called the setting value check mode. The start and end of the setting value change and setting value check will be described in detail later, but the start and end conditions of the setting value change mode and setting value check mode described in detail using FIG. 3 may also be applied.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 38. Note that FIG. 38 shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control section of the slot machine 100 is broadly composed of a main control section 300 that controls the progress of the game, a first sub-control section 400 that controls the main presentation in response to command signals (hereafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control section 300, and a second sub-control section 500 that controls various devices based on the commands sent by the first sub-control section 400. The main control section 300 controls the progress of the game, and the sub-control section consisting of the first sub-control section 400 and the second sub-control section 500 controls the presentation of the game.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 for controlling the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control program data, lottery data used in the internal lottery of winning combinations, and a reel pattern arrangement, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Note that, for the RAM 308, the description RAM (random access memory) is used as an example indicating that it is a storage medium that can be read and written, but the description RWM (read write memory) or the description "ram" may also be used. In addition, the name of the process related to the RAM may also be the name using the description RWM (read write memory) or the description "ram". In this specification, the description RAM is mainly used. It should be noted that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described below. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a random number generating circuit 316, which is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the value within the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start-up signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When a start-up signal is input from this start-up signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing described below).

The main control unit 300 also includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 monitors the status of various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal acceptance sensor for medals inserted through medal insertion slot 141, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from hopper unit 180, left reel 110 index sensor, middle reel 111 index sensor, right reel 112 index sensor, etc.) at each interrupt time.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 receives this signal, latches the value at that timing, and stores it in a register that stores random numbers to be used in the lottery.

Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion port 141, and detect whether a medal has passed through. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, and right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, and bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, respectively, and detect the insertion operation when medals stored electronically in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals stored electronically are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the hopper unit 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact sensor or a contact sensor.

The index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, and the index sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of each reel 110 to 112, and become L level every time a light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes by.
Rotational position information, which indicates how far the reel has rotated from the reference position from the time when it becomes L level until it becomes L level again, is calculated based on the count value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the motors provided for each reel 110-112 of the reel unit 700, a drive circuit 324 that drives a blocker solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 that selects inserted medals, a drive circuit 326 that drives the motor provided in the hopper unit 180, and a drive circuit 328 that drives various lamps 339 (valid line indicator lamp 120, notification lamp 123, medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, number of stored medals indicator 125, game information indicator 126, payout number indicator 127).

In addition, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., information indicating the game status) of the slot machine 100 to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply device 252 (see FIG. 35). The voltage monitoring circuit 330 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply is below a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400, enabling communication with the first sub-control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control section>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, the lighting pattern of the backlight module 740, and data for controlling various displays.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sound source IC 418. The upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 are connected to this sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the amplifier and the sound output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 in response to commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by the amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, to which various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, title panel lamp 164, bet button lamp 200, backlight module 740, first performance lamp built into the first chance button 165, second performance lamp built into the second chance button 166, etc.) are connected via an input/output interface.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163. The motor 163m of the shutter 163 is a stepping motor, and this drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to the motor 160m in response to a command from the CPU 404.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sensor circuit 426, to which a shutter sensor 428 is connected via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at each interrupt time. The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a switch sensor 427, which detects the pressing of the first chance button 165. The switch sensor 427 also detects the pressing of each button of the second selection switch 194, which is made up of the second chance button 166, the left button 167, and the right button 168. Detection signals from the shutter sensor 428 and the switch sensor 427 are output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426.

The first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402, but this first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 427 and the sensor circuit 426.

In addition, the CPU 404 sends and receives signals to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface.

The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the performance device 160, including display control of the performance image display device 157. Note that the second sub-control unit 500 may be configured with multiple control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the performance image display device 157 and a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163).

The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, and an I/O 510 for controlling the input and output of various devices.
and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 also includes a VDP 534 (video display processor).
The VDP 534 is connected to a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using a work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the performance image display device 157.

<Processing Overview>
Below, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using the drawings.

<Main processing of main control unit>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 39. Note that Fig. 39 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit main processing.

As described above, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 receives a start signal (reset signal).
The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, to which the start signal is input, is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, a main control unit initial setting process is performed. In this main control unit initial setting process, a stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt prohibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and operation permission and initial values are set in the WDT 314. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, the presence or absence of medal insertion (hand insertion or operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132) is checked, and if medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insertion command indicating this. If a replay was won in the previous game, a process is performed to insert the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game, so that the player does not need to insert medals. In addition, a check is made as to whether the start lever 135 has been operated when a specified number of medals (2 or 3 medals) have been used, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the number of medals inserted and the valid winning line are confirmed, and the game is started.

In step S105, various lottery processes are executed, including the internal winning lottery process.

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In step S109, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate on the condition that the game interval timer (which is subtracted in the timer update process described later) is 0, and an initial value is set to the game interval timer. In addition, when the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate, preparations are made to send a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. Then, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate.
When the reels reach a predetermined rotation speed, the optical sensors on each reel detect the positions of the symbols on the reels, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 are activated to stop the reels. The game interval counter is used to count the minimum time required for one game (4.
1s) and reduces the risk of speculation.

In step S111, a reel stop control process is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137 to 139 are stopped. Specifically, each time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referenced, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. In addition, for the first stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. In addition, for each stop operation, preparation is made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, preparation is made to send the corresponding command (first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. All the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.
When 12 stops, the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S113, a winning determination process is performed. Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed on an activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to send a winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, if any winning combination with a payout has been achieved, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is awarded (paid out), and the number of medals awarded is displayed using the payout number display 127.

In step S117, a state update process for updating various states in the slot machine 100 is executed.

After that, the process returns to step S103 and the above-mentioned processing is repeated to progress the game.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 40. Note that Fig. 40 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to start main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined period.

In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed.
It performs processes such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the PU 304 in a stack area.

In step S203, the count value of the WDT 314 is set to the initial setting value (32 in this embodiment).
To prevent a WDT interrupt from occurring for more than 1.8 ms (to prevent detection of processing abnormalities),
The WDT 314 is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt).

In step S205, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, detection signals from the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of detection signals is monitored, and the results are stored in signal status storage areas partitioned and provided for each of the various sensors 318 in the RAM 308. The status of the optical sensors is confirmed in this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S209, a timer update process is performed. For example, the game interval timer is decremented.
In this manner, the various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S211, a command setting and sending process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for sending by the main processing of the main control unit 300, timer interrupt processing, etc. are sent to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is strobe information (when on,
data is being set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command,
Insert command, start lever acceptance command, internal winning command, performance command associated with performance lottery processing, reel rotation start command associated with the start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands associated with acceptance of operation of stop buttons 137 to 139, reel
It is composed of the first to third stop commands associated with stops 10 to 112, winning commands, payout number commands and payout end commands associated with the medal payout process, status update commands, item addition commands, acquired point commands, setting change commands, and power restoration commands), and command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information allows the determination of the presentation control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and the content of the presentation control can be determined based on the command data information included in the output schedule information. In step S213, an external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring processing, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are first read out to monitor for errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc., and if an error is detected (not shown), error processing is executed. Furthermore, the medal blocker 171, various lamps 339, and various seven-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current game state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is ON or not, and if the low voltage signal is received (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and if the low voltage signal is not received (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219.

In step S219, a timer interruption end process is performed. In this timer interruption end process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set back to the original registers, and the process then returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for restoring the state at the time of power interruption when power is restored, is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308.
8, and stores the checksum value for the predetermined area including at least the used area of the RAM 308.
and sets a power flag to ON, indicating that power has been cut off.

Next, referring to FIG. 41, the main control unit initial setting process (
The details of step S101 will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1001, startup initialization is performed. In this initialization, a stack initial value is set (provisional setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304.
The CPU 303 performs processes such as setting an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I/O 310, and initial setting of various variables to be stored in the RAM 308.

In step S1003, it is determined whether the low voltage signal is ON, i.e., whether the voltage monitoring circuit 3
30, the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment).
), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating a drop in voltage is being output. If the low voltage signal is on (if the CPU 304 detects a power cut), step S1003 is executed repeatedly, and if the low voltage signal is off (if the CPU 304 does not detect a power cut), the process proceeds to step S1005. Note that even if the supply voltage has not yet reached the above-mentioned predetermined value (9 V) immediately after the power is turned on, step S1003 is executed repeatedly until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 281 shown in Fig. 35 is on. If the setting key switch 281 is on (a state in which the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch and turned 90 degrees to the right), the process proceeds to step S1013, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the reset switch 291 shown in Fig. 35 is on. If this switch is on, the process proceeds to step S1009, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1009, the RAM 308 is initialized, and the main control unit initial setting process is terminated. In this initialization, for example, the set values are initialized.

In step S1011, a RAM data write-back process is executed. In this process, it is first determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the data stored in the RAM 308. The data to be determined here is data that has been saved to the RAM 308 when the power to the slot machine 100 is turned off or due to a momentary interruption (a voltage drop below the operating voltage) (see step S221 in FIG. 40). In other words, in this step S1011, it is determined whether or not the data has been reliably saved to the RAM 308. Specifically, it is determined whether the power flag is normal (on),
It is then determined whether the calculation result using the checksum is normal, and if both determinations are normal, it is determined that there is no abnormality in the restored data in RAM 308.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the recovery data in the RAM 308, a process is executed to restore the state of the register to the state immediately before the power cut process was executed. In this RAM data write back process, for example, the data stored in the RAM 308 is written back to the register of the CPU 304, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of the power cut is read, and the stack pointer is reset (main setting). Also, the values of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of the power cut are read, and each register is reset, and then interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, the CPU 304 executes the control program based on the stack pointer and registers after the resetting, and as a result, the slot machine 100 is restored to the state it was in when the power was cut. In other words, processing is resumed from the command following the command executed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process immediately before the power cut. Furthermore, at this point, the R of the main control unit 300 is reset.
A power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the AM 308. This power recovery command is a command that indicates that the state at the time of power failure has been restored. This power recovery command includes information such as the RT, game state, and presentation state at the time of power failure, and is transmitted by the main control unit timer interrupt process (step S211 in FIG. 40).

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the recovery data of the RAM 308, preparations are made to clear all storage areas of the RAM 308 except for the used stack area, and then the system transitions to an infinite loop state (RAM error processing). From this state, it is necessary to turn the power back on with the RAM clear switch or setting key switch turned on. That is,
This embodiment is configured so that if an error occurs in the RAM 308, the progress of the game is stopped.

In step S1005, if the setting key switch 281 is on, the process proceeds to step S
In step 1013, a setting change process is executed in accordance with the state of the setting key switch 281, and the main control unit initial setting process is terminated. The setting change process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

Next, the setting change process (step S1013) in the main control unit initial setting process of Fig. 41 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 42. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the setting change process (step S1013) in Fig. 41.

First, in step S1101, the data in the RAM 308 is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S1103. Note that the data cleared here includes the setting values.

In step S1103, preparations are made to send a setting change command indicating that the setting change has started to the first sub-control unit 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 40), and the process proceeds to step S1105. As a result, the performance image display device 157 displays a display indicating that the setting change is in progress.

In step S1105, the interrupt status is set to "setting change in progress", and in step S110
Go to 7.

In step S1107, the provisional setting value is set as the display setting value.
The provisional set value is displayed on the set value display 293. After that, the process proceeds to step S1109.

In step S1109, it is determined whether or not operation of the setting change button 292 has been accepted. If this condition is met, the process proceeds to step S1111, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1113.

In step S1111, the provisional setting value is updated.
Each time button 92 is pressed, the provisional setting value is incremented by one according to the display order described with reference to FIG.
When the setting switch is operated while the provisional setting value is b, the provisional setting value is set to 1. After that, the process proceeds to step S1113.

In step S1113, it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated. If this condition is met, the process proceeds to step S1115. If not, the process proceeds to step S1116.
Go to 07.

In step S1115, a process is executed to confirm the provisional setting value as the setting value, and the process proceeds to step S1117. That is, the setting value is confirmed by operating the start lever 135. When the setting value is confirmed, the setting value display 293 displays a display indicating that the setting value has been confirmed (here, the number 0). Note that when the setting value is confirmed, the setting value display 293 may continue to display the confirmed setting value, may switch to a blinking display, or may become invisible.

In step S1117, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 281 is OFF (the setting key switch 281 is turned 90 degrees to the left and the setting key is removed). If this condition is met, the process proceeds to step S1119, and if not, step S1117 is repeatedly executed.

In step S1119, preparations are made to send a setting change command indicating that the setting change has been completed to the first sub-control unit 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 40). As a result, the display indicating that the setting change is in progress is terminated on the performance image display device 157. Also, in this process, the interrupt status is returned to the status before the change in step S1105. After this process, the setting change process is terminated.

42, the open/closed state of the front door 102 is irrelevant, but the end condition may be that the setting key switch 281 is turned off and the front door 102 is closed. Also, the setting value is confirmed by operating the start lever 135, but the setting value may also be confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 281.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG.
Figure 43 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure 43 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure 43 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initial setting is executed when the power is turned on. In this process, the input/output ports are initialized, and various variables stored in the RAM 408 are initialized. In this process, an area for storing internal win information, which is information that indicates the result of an internal win, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information that indicates the game status, are provided in the RAM 408. The presentation state of the first sub-control unit 400 is set to the initial state. Also, if a backup is being performed when the power is cut off,
The backed up information is returned in step S301.

In step S303, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, step S305
Then proceed to processing.

In step S305, the timer variable is assigned the value 0.

In step S307, command processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300 is executed.

In step S309, a performance control process is carried out. Here, performance data is expanded and stored in RAM.
The RAM 408 performs processes such as setting device data in a performance execution area provided in RAM 408, setting performance data in a performance reservation area provided in RAM 408, and setting performance data and executing control processes based on received commands and information contained in those commands. Note that there are cases where the performance data set in the performance reservation area or the device data set in the performance execution area is updated (overwritten) with different data. In such cases, the performance content is changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, control data is obtained from the device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277, and the obtained control data is output to the sound source IC 418 to execute a performance using sound.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, control data is obtained from device data set in the performance execution areas corresponding to the various lamps 420, and the obtained control data is output to the drive circuit 422 to perform a performance using the lamps.

In step S315, a shutter control process is performed based on the process result of step S309. For example, control data is obtained from the device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the obtained control data is output to the drive circuit 424, thereby causing the shutter 163 to perform a performance.

In step S317, an information output process is performed to set the second sub-control unit 500 to transmit a control command based on the processing result of step S309. For example, the performance image display device 15
If there is device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to 7, preparations are made to send this device data to the second sub-control unit 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using Figure 43 (b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that the first sub-control unit 400 executes when it detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S321 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the RAM 40 as an unprocessed command.
The command is stored in the command storage area provided at

Next, using Figure 43 (c), we will explain the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt is used as a trigger to execute the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period.

In step S331, the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in Figure 43 (a) is incremented by 1 and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S333, the device data set in step S315 is sent to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random number values for performance are updated.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG.
Figure 44(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 44(b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 44(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 44(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S401 in Fig. 44A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the input/output ports are initialized, and various variables stored in the RAM 508 are initialized.
If a backup was being performed at the time of the power outage, the backed up information is returned in this step S301.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, step S405
Then proceed to processing.

In step S405, the timer variable is assigned the value 0.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409, a performance control process is performed. Specifically, if a new command is received in step S407, a process corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process is executed to read performance data for performing image control related to the background image from ROM 506. In addition, a process is executed to read other performance data from ROM 506, and if the performance data needs to be updated, a process is executed to update the performance data.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409.
For example, if the performance data read out in step S409 contains an image control command, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control relating to the display image (alert image, background image) is executed. This image control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 44(d). When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S403. Next, with reference to FIG. 44(b), the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the second sub-control unit 500 when it detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process,
The command output by the sub-control unit 400 is stored in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, using Figure 44 (c), we will explain the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt is used as a trigger to execute the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period.

In step S417, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in Figure 44 (a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S419, the random number values for the effects are updated.

Next, referring to FIG. 44(d), step S4 in the main processing of the second sub-control unit 500
The image control process in accordance with the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

In step S421, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area between display area A and display area B of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of image stored in a display area not designated as a drawing area is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 writes ROM coordinates (the transfer source address in the ROM 506) and
After setting the VRAM coordinates (the destination address of the VRAM 518) and the like, the VDP 516 sets a command to start transferring image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518.
Image data is read from the ROM 506 to the VR based on the command set in the attribute register.
The VDP 516 then transfers the data to the AM 518. The VDP 516 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S423, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S425; if not, the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S425, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table and attribute data.
In order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the AM 518, information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, VRAM coordinates (layout coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) is transferred to the VRAM 518.
The VDP 516 instructs the VDP 516 to set parameters according to the attributes based on the command stored in the attribute register.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504
The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal based on the end of image drawing has been input from the VDP 516. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, step S43
If not, the process proceeds to step 1, and waits for a generation completion interrupt signal to be input.

In step S431, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, a description will be given of a setting change in the slot machine 100 shown in Fig. 33. The setting change process is started by inserting a setting key into the setting key switch 281 shown in Fig. 35 and rotating it to the right to turn it on, and then turning on the power switch 244.

Fig. 45 is a table summarizing the procedure for changing the setting to setting b and the states of related components. In Fig. 45, each step is numbered from (a) to (c), and
Time passes in alphabetical order. Also, Figure 46 is a diagram showing the state of the components at each stage from (A) to (S) in Figure 45.

In FIG. 45, the components are shown as power switch 244, front door 102, open sensor 294, setting key switch 281, setting value display 293, performance image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R (top side lamps), upper speaker 272 and bass speaker 277 (speakers). In FIG. 46, the setting value display 293, performance image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R, and speakers (272, 277) are each shown in schematic form.

In FIG. 45(A), the power switch 244 is off and the front door 102 is closed. The open sensor 294 is not functioning. No setting key is inserted in the setting key switch 281, so it remains off. The seven segments of the setting value display 293 remain off and the setting value is not displayed. The various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) are also off, and nothing is being output from the speakers (272, 277). In FIG. 46(A) and (B), the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) are shown unlit and in solid white (the same applies below).

In Fig. 45(A), the front door 102 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned right, turning the setting key switch 281 on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is on before the power is turned on. Note that, since the power is not turned on before the front door 102 is opened, no detection signal is output from the opening sensor 294.

In Fig. 45(c), the setting key switch 281 is in the ON state, and the power switch 244 is turned ON (power-on). As a result, the open sensor 294 starts to output an open detection signal, and all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up.
In FIG. 6(c), the title panel lamp 164 is shown lit in white by hatching from left to right (the same applies below). As described above, the setting change process in the main control unit 300 is started by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 281 and turning it to the right to turn it on, and then turning on the power switch 244. When the setting change process is started, RAM is cleared (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) (step S1101 shown in FIG. 42), and "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as the default setting value. When the setting change process is started, a setting change display is displayed on the performance image display device 157 to notify that the setting is being changed, and a sound ("setting is being changed") to notify that the setting is being changed is also output from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 45(d), the setting change button 292 is pressed once, and the setting value display 293 displays "2" as the provisional setting value.

In FIG. 45(e), the setting change button 292 is pressed twice, and the setting value display 293 displays "4" as the provisional setting value.

In FIG. 45(f), the setting change button 292 is pressed once, and the setting value display 293 displays "5" as the provisional setting value.

In FIG. 45(g), the setting change button 292 is pressed once more, and the setting value display 293 displays setting 6 as a provisional setting value. In FIG. 45(h), the setting change button 292 is pressed once more.
The button is pressed once, and the provisional setting value "b" is displayed on the setting value display 293.
When comparing the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 1 with the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 1 (K), the only difference is whether the A segment is lit or off, and an unauthorized person attempting to fraudulently change the setting value may mistake the "b" display for the "6" display.

In Fig. 45(i), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is confirmed (step S1115 shown in Fig. 42), and the number 0, which indicates that the set value is confirmed, is displayed on the set value display 293. Here, the setting is confirmed to be setting b. When the start lever 135 is operated, the set value display 293 may become invisible as described above. Alternatively, the set value may not be confirmed by operating the start lever 135, but the setting key switch 281 may be turned off to confirm the set value.

In Figure 45 (J), the setting key inserted in the setting key switch 281 is turned to the left to turn it off. As a result, the setting change process ends (step S1119 shown in Figure 42), and the seven segments of the setting value display 293 go out and are no longer displayed. In addition, the performance image display device 157 starts displaying a demo animation. If the power is turned on with the setting key switch 281 in the off state, the demo animation starts to be displayed immediately after the power is turned on, but since the power is turned on with the setting key switch 281 in the on state, it starts to be displayed after the setting change process ends. In this case, the demo animation starts to be displayed from the beginning. Alternatively,
The demo animation was being played immediately after the power was turned on, but was not visible because the display of the setting change was overlapping it. It may be possible for the demo animation to become visible from the scene where the display of the setting change disappeared. Also, the voice from the speakers (272, 277) is switched to a voice saying "Door is open" to warn that the front door 102 is open. Furthermore, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 14
The top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R are lit in a demonstration lighting pattern (demo pattern).
The state in which the right side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R are lit in a demo pattern is shown by grid-like hatching (the same applies below). Meanwhile, only the title panel lamp 164 is turned off. That is, the title panel lamp 164 is lit while the setting is being changed, but is turned off when the setting change is completed, and remains turned off until a medal is inserted (until a bet number of 1 or more is set). The turning off of the title panel lamp 164 corresponds to a notification regarding the setting value, and more specifically, a notification that the setting value has been set to a certain setting value (the setting value most unfavorable to the player). Also, since the title panel lamp 164 remains lit under normal circumstances,
The turning off of title panel lamp 164 can also be taken as a notification of an abnormality (notification of an abnormal setting value).

In FIG. 45 (K), the front door 102 is closed, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to a closed detection signal of L level).
72, 277) outputs a voice saying "The door is closed." On the performance image display device 157, the demo animation continues to be displayed, and the title panel lamp 164 also continues to be turned off.

In FIG. 45 (c), a medal is inserted. That is, the medal is inserted or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated. As a result, the following message is output from the speakers (272, 277):
A coin insertion sound is output, and the effect image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to displaying the background of the normal effect (normal background display).
Among the lamps 144T, 144L, and 144R, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start to light up in a lighting pattern for normal performance (normal pattern).
are shown by cross-hatching as being lit in a normal pattern (the same applies below). Meanwhile, the title panel lamp 164, which had been off, also starts to light up. The title panel lamp 164 may start to light up when the front door 102 is closed, or may continue to be off when a coin is inserted and start to light up when a game starts (operation of the start lever 135), or may start to light up at the third stop of the first game, or may start to light up when the payout of the first game is completed.

Fig. 47(a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is repeatedly opened and closed with the setting value set to setting b. In Fig. 47(a), each stage is assigned a code from (Ta) to (Nu), and time passes in alphabetical order.
FIG. 48 shows a schematic diagram of the state of the components at each stage from (ta) to (nu) in FIG. 47(a).

FIG. 47(a) also shows the same items as FIG. 45 as items of components, and FIG. 48(a)
In the same manner as in FIG. 46, each component is shown diagrammatically.

47(Ta) may be a continuation from FIG. 45(Si), and the game has already started with the setting set to b. That is, the game has started while ignoring the notification by the title panel lamp 164 being turned off. In FIG. 47(Ta), the third stop is performed, and the reel stop sound is output from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 47 (H), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has passed since the third stop without inserting a coin. Then, the effect image display device 157 switches from the normal background display to the demo animation display. Also, various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R)
Among these, a top lamp 144T, a left side lamp 144L, and a right side lamp 144R
switches from normal pattern lighting to demo pattern lighting. Here, if setting b remains set, when the display of a demo animation starts on the performance image display device 157, the title panel lamp 164 goes out and the setting-related notification returns. Note that, not limited to the display of a demo animation on the performance image display device 157, when a demo performance starts in general or when the demo state is entered, the title panel lamp 164 may be turned off and the setting-related notification may be started.

In FIG. 47 (T), the front door 102 is opened, and the open sensor 294 outputs a detection signal (a high-level signal).
4R) start lighting the door open pattern. That is, the title panel lamp 164, which was turned off, also ends the setting-related notification and starts lighting the door open pattern. In FIG. 48 (Tsu), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are shown by hatching downward to the right (the same applies below). Note that these lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) may be lit in the same pattern as the normal pattern shown by cross-hatching in FIG. 46 (Shi). Since the front door 102 is opened, there is a possibility that the setting will be changed, so the setting-related notification by the title panel lamp 164 ends. The speaker (272, 277) starts to output a sound saying "The door is open". Note that the display of the demo animation continues on the performance image display device 157, but the text display "Door is open" may be displayed together with the demo animation.

In FIG. 47(T), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has passed since the front door 102 was opened without any change in settings. To change settings, the power switch 244 must be turned off and the setting key switch 281 must be turned on.
If the power switch 244 is not turned off before the lapse of 10 seconds (30 seconds in this example), the title panel lamp 164 goes out again and a setting-related notification starts. This setting-related notification prompts the user to change the settings. Among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R switch from door open pattern lighting to demo pattern lighting to match the display of the demo animation on the performance image display device 157. In other words, the warning notification for a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) due to the door open pattern lighting ends, and the demo pattern lighting returns.

In Fig. 47 (g), the front door 102 is closed. The open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to a L level closed detection signal). The speakers (272, 277) output a voice message saying "The door is closed." The performance image display device 157 continues to display the demo animation, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also continue to light up in the demo pattern. The title panel lamp 164 also continues to be turned off, and setting-related notifications continue to be issued.

In FIG. 47(n), the front door 102 is opened again, and each component is in the same position as in the previous FIG.
The result will be the same as

In FIG. 47(b), the front door 102 is opened one second after the front door 102 is opened in FIG.
02 is closed again. The open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal). The speakers (272, 277) immediately switch from a voice saying "The door is open" to a voice saying "The door is closed." On the other hand, even if the front door 102 is closed, all of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) continue to light up in the door open pattern for the above-mentioned predetermined time after the front door 102 is opened. As a result, the front door 102 is closed.
The setting-related notification by turning off the title panel lamp 164 is not started until the above-mentioned predetermined time has elapsed after the release of the button 2. Note that the demo animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157.

In FIG. 47(n), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has passed since the front door 102 in FIG. 47(n) was opened. As a result, the predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has passed since the front door 102 was opened without any setting changes being made, so the title panel lamp 164 goes out and a setting-related notification is started. In addition, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R switch from door open pattern illumination to demo pattern illumination to coincide with the display of the demo animation on the performance image display device 157.
The turning off of the title panel lamp 164 in FIG. 47(n) can be seen as the start of a setting-related notification by turning off the title panel lamp 164 because the front door 102 was closed with the setting set to setting b and no medals were inserted until the above-mentioned predetermined time had elapsed. If a medal had been inserted before the above-mentioned predetermined time had elapsed, the title panel lamp 164 would have turned off.
No setting-related notification will be initiated by turning off 64.

In the example shown in FIG. 47(a) described above, when the demo animation starts with the setting value set to setting b, the title panel lamp 164 goes out (FIG. 47(c)). However, the title panel lamp 164 may go out under other conditions. For example, the title panel lamp may also be turned off when a non-recommended game state (so-called penalty bonus) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal game state is entered (for example, after the player releases the third stop button without following a specific push order navigation). In the non-recommended game state, no lottery including the AT lottery is performed, and the number of medals of the player is maintained or slightly decreased, but since the non-recommended game state continues until the payout of a predetermined number of medals is completed, it takes a considerable amount of time to return to a state in which medals can be increased. When the non-recommended game state is entered, a suggestion display suggesting that the game state is non-recommended may be displayed on the performance image display device 157, and this suggestion display may be continuously displayed during the non-recommended game state (from winning the penalty bonus to the end of the penalty bonus). In addition, in the non-recommended game state, the demo animation may not be displayed, and the title panel lamp 164 may remain off during both game and non-game play. The non-recommended game state may be entered regardless of the setting value (even if it is other than setting b), or the non-recommended game state may be entered only when the setting value is set to setting b.

FIG. 47(b) is a table summarizing the state of the related components when the settlement operation is performed immediately after the third stop with the setting value set to setting b. In FIG. 47(b), the operation starts from the same state (ta) as (ta) shown in FIG. 47(a), and the settlement button 134 is operated at the timing (ne) one second after (ta). In other words, the settlement operation is performed before the predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed without inserting a coin after the third stop. When the settlement operation is performed, the display of the demo animation begins on the performance image display device 157. In addition, all of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) begin to light up in the settlement pattern. Furthermore, the sound of game media being dispensed is output from the speakers (272, 277). In addition, in FIG. 207(
FIG. 48(c) shows the configuration of the components in FIG. 47(c).
In the example shown in FIG. 1, a top lamp 144T, a left side lamp 144L and a right side lamp 144
The state in which R is lit in the settlement pattern is represented by hatching with horizontal lines (the same applies below). Note that these lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) may be lit in the same pattern as the normal pattern represented by cross hatching in FIG. 46 (S).

In FIG. 47(No), the payout of the gaming media is completed.
The state of the components in the is shown in schematic form. Even after the payout is completed, the demo animation continues to be displayed on the performance image display device 157, and the title panel lamp 164 is turned off. On the other hand, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are turned off.
The settlement pattern lighting is switched to the demo pattern lighting so as to coincide with the display of the demo animation on the performance image display device 157. Note that the output from the speakers (272, 277) is stopped.

To summarize the above-described conditions for turning off the title panel lamp 164, when the setting key switch 281 is turned off in a state in which setting b is set (FIG. 45(K)), setting b
Examples of such cases include when a demo animation is started with setting a (FIG. 47 (h) (note that FIG. 45 (ko) has the same effect), and when a payout in response to a settlement operation is completed with setting b set (FIG. 47 (f)).

Fig. 49(a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when checking the settings with the default setting value of Setting 1. In Fig. 49(a), each stage is assigned a code from (ha) to (he), and time passes in alphabetical order.
The upper part of Fig. 50 shows the state of the components at each stage from (c) to (f) in Fig. 49(a) in a schematic manner. (c) in Fig. 49(a) is the same as (te) shown in Fig. 47(a) in that 30 seconds have passed since the front door 102 was opened, and differs from (te) in that the title panel lamp 164 does not go out and continues to light in white because the setting value is not set to setting b. Note that the title panel lamp 164 does not light in a demo pattern, but may do so, in which case the white light becomes the demo pattern light. In Fig. 50(c), the state in which the title panel lamp 164 is lighted in white is shown by hatching slanting downward to the left.

In FIG. 49(a), (H) indicates that the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, turning the setting key switch 281 on. That is, when the power is on, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and setting value confirmation begins. The setting value display 293 displays the current setting value, "1." Also, the performance image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display to notify that the setting is being confirmed, and the speaker (272,
The title panel lamp 164 continues to light in white, and the top lamp 1
The left side lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R also change from the demo pattern lighting to white lighting. The setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 50(H) displays the current setting value of "1". Also, the title panel lamp 164 shown in FIG. 50(H)
, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R are all lit in white.

(F) in Fig. 49(a) is the same as (K) in Fig. 47(a) in that the setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state, and differs from (K) in that the setting confirmation ends, not the setting change, and that the title panel lamp 164 does not go out but continues to light in white because the setting value is not set to setting b. In Fig. 50(F), the setting value display 293 is not displayed. Also, of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), only the title panel lamp 164 continues to light in white, while the remaining lamps (144T,
44L, 144R) have been switched to a demo pattern lighting represented by grid-like hatching.

(F) in Figure 49(a) is the same state as (Sa) shown in Figure 47(a) in which the front door 102 is closed, and the difference from (Sa) is that the title panel lamp 164 continues to be lit in white.

FIG. 49B is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when checking the settings in power saving mode with the setting set to Setting 1. In FIG. 49B,
The numbers are from ka to ke, and the time progresses in alphabetical order.
The lower row of FIG. 0 is a diagram showing the state of the components at each stage from (ka) to (ke) in FIG. 49(b).

(K) in FIG. 49(b) is the same as (K) in FIG. 49(a), and is the state 30 seconds have passed since the front door 102 was opened. The differences from (K) are as follows. First, as explained with reference to FIG. 17(h), the display of the demo animation in the performance image display device 157 is displayed darker (dimmed) than in the non-power saving mode. Also, the title panel lamp 164 is still lit in white, but its brightness is lower (dimmed). Meanwhile, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are turned off due to the power saving mode setting. FIG. 50(K) shows the display screen of the performance image display device 157 becoming dark, and the title panel lamp 164 also becoming dark. Also shown is the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R being turned off.

At (k) in FIG. 49(b), like (hi) in FIG. 49(a), the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is on, and confirmation of the setting value is started.
Even if the power saving mode is set, the lights will not be dimmed or turned off during the setting confirmation, and will be the same as when the power saving mode is not set. The appearance of each component shown in Figure 50 (k) is the same as the appearance of each component shown in the figure (h) directly above it.

In (k) in Fig. 49(b), the setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state, as in (f) in Fig. 49(a), and the setting confirmation is complete. By completing the setting confirmation, each component has returned to a state according to the power saving mode. That is, as shown in Fig. 50(k), the display screen of the performance image display device 157 that has started displaying the demo animation goes dark, and the title panel lamp 164 also goes dark. Also, the top lamp 144
T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R are turned off.

In FIG. 49(b), (K) is the same as (F) shown in FIG. 49(a), in which the front door 102 is closed.
4L, 144R) have not been dimmed or turned off since the previous state when the setting key switch 281 was turned off (K).

Fig. 51(a) is a table summarizing the states of the related components when checking the settings in the setting b state.
Time passes in this order.

(T) in Fig. 51(a) is the same as (T) shown in Fig. 47(a), 30 seconds have passed since the front door 102 was opened, and it is exactly the same state as (T). That is, the setting value display 293 is not displayed, and a demo animation is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Also, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off, and the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are lit in a demo pattern.

In (b) of FIG. 51(a), the setting key switch 28 is pressed while the power is on.
1 is turned on, and the setting value check is started. The only difference between (H) in FIG. 49(a) and (V) is the setting value displayed on the setting value display 293. That is, in (V) in FIG. 51(a), the setting value display 293 displays the current setting value "b". The setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 52(V) displays the current setting value "b". As in FIG. 50(H), the performance image display device 157 also displays a setting check display in FIG. 52(V), and the speaker (272, 277) also outputs a sound such as "setting check in progress". In addition, the title panel lamp 164 is lit in white, and the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are also lit in white.

In FIG. 51(a), (K) is the same as (K) shown in FIG. 45, and is a setting key switch 281.
is turned off, which is exactly the same as the state of (J). That is, since setting b is set, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off and a setting-related notification is executed.

51(a) is the same as the (x) shown in FIG 45, in that the front door 102 is closed, and is in exactly the same state as (x). That is, the title panel lamp 164 remains off, and the setting-related notification continues to be executed.

FIG. 51B is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when checking the settings in power saving mode with setting b set. In FIG. 51B,
The numbers are from ga to ge, and the time progresses in alphabetical order.
The lower part of FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the state of the components at each stage from (ga) to (ge) in FIG. 51(b).

(ga) in FIG. 51(b) is the same as (te) in FIG. 51(a), and is the state 30 seconds have passed since the front door 102 was opened. The differences from (te) are as follows. First, the demo animation display on the performance image display device 157 is displayed darker (dimmed) than in the non-power saving mode. In addition, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are turned off due to the power saving mode setting. FIG. 52(ga) shows the display screen of the performance image display device 157 being dark. In addition, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off, and a setting-related notification is being executed. In addition, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are also turned off.

In (g) in FIG. 51(b), like (b) in FIG. 51(a), the power is turned on and the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and confirmation of the setting value is started.
This is exactly the same as in (b). That is, even if the power saving mode is set, the light will not be dimmed or turned off during the setting confirmation, and it will be the same as when the power saving mode is not set.
The display contents of the set value display 293 are different from those in (ki) in FIG.
As shown in (g) of the setting value display 293, "b" is displayed.

In (ku) in FIG. 51(b), the setting key switch 281 is in an OFF state, as in (ko) in FIG. 51(a), and the setting confirmation is completed. By completing the setting confirmation, each component returns to a state according to the power saving mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 52(ku), the display screen of the performance image display device 157 where the display of the demo animation has started is dark, and the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are turned off. Note that the state of the title panel lamp 164 is different from that in FIG. 49(b) (ku). That is, since the setting is set to setting b, as shown in FIG. 52(ku), the title panel lamp 164 is turned off, and a setting-related notification is executed.

The (G) in FIG. 51(b) is the same as the (S) in FIG. 51(a), in which the front door 102 is closed.
4L, 144R) has not been dimmed or turned off since the previous state in which the setting key switch 281 was turned off (h).

Next, we will explain a modified example of the slot machine 100 shown in Figure 33.

<Regarding the magnitude of payout rates>
First, examples of winning probability and state transition of winning combination groups are shown, and a slot machine capable of converging the payout rate to a suitable range by devising a magnitude relationship between a total payout rate that takes into account all combinations including replays, which are replay combinations, and an actual payout rate that takes into account combinations other than replays is described. Specifically, in the slot machine of this modification, the payout rate can be converged to a suitable range by providing a first condition (RT2 described later) in which the actual payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, and a second condition (RT1 described later) that is the exact opposite of the first condition and in which the total payout rate is higher than the actual payout rate, as conditions that can be controlled according to the progress of the game. Note that the slot machine of this modification also has the technical matters described with reference to FIG. 33 to FIG. 52. Here, the payout rate is defined as the total number of medals paid out when the symbols corresponding to the minor combinations are stopped,
The payout rate is calculated by dividing the total number of medals bet by the total number of medals bet set as the number of bets. The total payout rate taking into account all roles refers to a payout rate (first payout rate) calculated on the assumption that, for example, when a replay win occurs in a game with three bets, three medals are paid out due to the replay win, and three medals are bet in the next game. In contrast, the effective payout rate taking into account roles other than replay refers to a payout rate (second payout rate) calculated on the assumption that, for example, when a replay win occurs in a game with three bets, zero medals are paid out due to the replay win, and zero medals are bet in the next game.

53(a) is a diagram for explaining the transition of game states in the slot machine in this modified example. In the slot machine in this modified example, there are RT0, which is a base game state (for example, a state in which most of the game is consumed, or a state to which a state is transitioned due to a setting change), RT1, which is transitioned to by winning a predetermined transition role A in RT0, and RT2, which is transitioned to by winning a predetermined transition role B in RT0.
The game state transitions between multiple types of states, including RT0 and RT2.
In either case, one game can be started by setting three coins as the number of bets. After transitioning to RT1 or RT2, the game is transitioned to RT0 again by playing 100 times, which is set as the specified number of games. In RT0 in the slot machine of this modification, in addition to transition roles A and B, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a bonus role, a replay role, a small role, etc. will be won, and the payout rate is set to be less than 1. In addition, in the slot machine of this modification, when a bonus role is won in any of RT0 to RT2, the slot machine transitions to a bonus state in which the payout rate is 1 or more, but for convenience of explanation, this is omitted from FIG. 53(a). In addition, the slot machine of this modification may transition the game state between states including RT1 and RT2 without providing RT0.

FIG. 53(b) is a diagram for explaining some of the roles that are the subject of the role lottery in RT1 and the high and low winning probabilities. In RT1, the bonus role, replay a, and replay b
The following are stipulated as the targets of the role lottery: replay roles including the above, 3-coin roles with a payout of 3 coins, and minor roles including push order roles that can pay out 15 coins. The 3-coin roles always win in a winning game regardless of the push order or operation timing (operation mode). On the other hand, the push order roles win and pay out 15 coins when operated in a specified push order (corresponding to the advantageous operation mode described above), but do not win when operated in a different push order (they may win other roles (e.g., 1-coin roles)).

The probability of winning the bonus role is set to 1/250 when the set value is "b", "1", or "2", and is set to 1/200 when the set value is "4" to "6".
The winning probability of the replay b is set to a low probability regardless of the set value (for example,
On the other hand, the probability of winning the push order role among the minor roles is set to be high (for example, 60/200) regardless of the setting value. Even if the push order role is won in RT1, the navigation performance that allows the advantageous operation mode to be specified will not be executed (i.e., it will not be controlled by the AT). For this reason, even if the push order role is won, for example, there is a 1/6 probability of winning and a 5/6 probability of not winning.

On the other hand, the winning probability of the replay a among the replay roles and the winning probability of the 3-piece role among the small roles are set to a uniform total winning probability (for example, 50/200, etc.),
The ratio of the winning probability of the replay a and the three-coin role is set to be different for each setting value. Specifically, when the setting values are "b" and "6", the replay a has a low probability (for example, 1
When the set values are "1" and "5", the probability of Replay A and the three-coin role are both set to be medium (e.g., 25/200). When the set values are "2" and "4", the probability of Replay A is set to be high (e.g., 35/200), while the probability of the three-coin role is set to be low (e.g., 15/200).

FIG. 53(c) is a diagram for explaining some of the roles that are the object of the role lottery in RT2 and the high and low winning probability. In RT2, like RT1, bonus roles, replay roles including replay a and replay b, 3-coin roles with 3 payouts, and minor roles including push order roles that can pay out 15 coins are set to be the objects of the role lottery. The winning probability of replay b in RT2 is set to be higher (for example, 45/200) than in RT1, but the winning probability of other roles is set to be the same as in RT1. In addition, when the push order role is won in RT2, unlike RT1, a navigation performance that can specify an advantageous operation mode is executed. Therefore, when the push order role is won in RT2, the push order role will be won and 15 medals will be paid out unless the operation mode is incorrect. In addition, the roles that are the object of the role lottery in RT2 are the same as those in RT1,
The above definition is not limited to the above definition, but may be different.

Also, in RT1 and RT2, the combined winning probability of Replay A and 3-coin roles (which is also the combined winning probability since a win is guaranteed) is uniform regardless of the setting value. However, when comparing the total payout rate with the actual payout rate, it differs for each setting value. For example, when the setting values are "b" and "6," the winning probability of Replay A is low, so the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate is relatively small, whereas when the setting value is "1," the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate is relatively small.
and "5," the difference becomes relatively large, and the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate becomes the largest when the setting values are "2" and "4." In addition, the setting values 1 to 3 and setting values 4 to 6, which affect the probability of winning a bonus role, are all set to include a setting value that makes the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate relatively small, a setting value that makes the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate relatively large, and a setting value that makes the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate the largest.

An example of such payout rates for RT1 and RT2 will be described with reference to FIG.
The number of medals used for betting is set to 3. In FIG. 54,
This example illustrates a case where the bonus role is not won in RT1. When either the set value "b" or "6" is set during RT1, the probability of winning a replay is 10/100 (=
(15+5)/200), it is expected that an average of 10 wins will occur during 100 games (G). For this reason, in FIG. 54(a), during RT1, when either the setting value "b" or "6" is set, the replay count is 1.
The figures show examples of "total IN number", "actual IN number", "total OUT number", and "actual OUT number" in the case of winning 0 times, and show the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers. Note that "total IN number" and "actual IN number" are both the number of medals used to set the bet number, but the difference is that "total IN number" is the number including the bet number automatically set after winning a replay, while "actual IN number" is the number excluding the bet number automatically set after winning a replay (the number of medals after winning a replay is set to "0"). Also, "total OUT number" and "actual OUT number" are both the number of medals paid out with winning a small role, but the difference is that "total OUT number" is the number of medals paid out when a replay is won, assuming that 3 medals are paid out when a replay is won, while "actual IN number" is the number of medals paid out when a replay is won.

As shown in FIG. 54(a), if 10 replays are won in RT1 spanning 100 games (G), the "total number of IN coins" will be "300" (=100 games (G) x 3 coins).
The "actual number of IN coins" is "270" (=300 coins - 10 times x 3 coins). Also, the "total number of OUT coins" is "150", and the "actual number of OUT coins" in this case is "120" (
= 150 - 10 times x 3 coins). Therefore, the actual payout rate is 0.444 (≒ 120 ÷ 2
70), whereas the total payout rate is 0.500 (= 150 ÷ 300).

Next, FIG. 54(b) will be described. During RT1, when either the set value "2" or "4" is set, the probability of winning a replay is 20/100 (=(35+5)
/200), so you can expect to win 20 times on average in 100 games (G). For this reason, FIG. 54(b) shows an example of the "total IN number", "actual IN number", "total OUT number", and "actual OUT number" in the case where 20 replays win in 100 games (G) during RT1 when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set, and shows the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers.
As shown in FIG. 5, if 20 replays are won in RT1 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN coins" is "300" (=100 games (G) x 3 coins), and the "effective number of IN coins" is "240" (=300 coins - 20 times x 3 coins).
As shown in FIG. 3(b), the combined probability of Replay A and 3 coins is uniform.
In this case, the "actual number of OUT cards" is "90" (=
Therefore, the actual payout rate is 0.375 (= 90 ÷ 240)
), whereas the total payout rate is 0.500 (=150÷300).

As described above, during RT1, the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate varies depending on the set value, but as shown in FIG. 54(e), it can be said that the total payout rate is higher than the actual payout rate regardless of the set value (whatever the set value). Note that the 100 games (G) during RT1 when either the set value "1" or "5" is set is not shown. However, the "total number of IN coins" and "total number of OUT coins" are the same as those in FIG. 54(a) and the like, since the number of games played and the combined probability of Replay A and 3 coin roles are uniform. In addition, the number of replay wins, the "actual number of IN coins" and the "actual number of OUT coins" can be probabilistically between the values shown in FIG. 54(a) and FIG. 54(b). For this reason, the 100 games (G) during RT1 when either the set value "1" or "5" is set is not shown.
During the 00 game (G) period, the total payout rate is higher than the effective payout rate.
During RT1, the total payout rate is higher than the actual payout rate regardless of the set value, but both the total payout rate and the actual payout rate are less than 1, creating an unfavorable state for the player.

On the other hand, during RT2, although the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate varies depending on the set value, the actual payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the set value (whatever the set value). This will be explained below.

During RT2, when either the setting value "b" or "6" is set, the probability of winning a replay is 30/100 (= (15 + 45) / 200), so it is expected that an average of 30 wins will occur during 100 games (G). In FIG. 54 (c), during RT2, when either the setting value "b" or "6" is set, the probability of winning a replay is 30/100 (= (15 + 45) / 200), so an average of 30 wins will occur during 100 games (G).
If 30 replays are won during the period, the total number of INs, actual number of INs, and total OUs will be calculated.
As shown in FIG. 54(c), an example of the "number of T coins" and "actual number of OUT coins" is shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these coins are shown.
In the case where 30 replays are won, the "total number of IN coins" will be "300" (= 100 games (G) x 3 coins), and the "actual number of IN coins" will be "210" (= 300 coins - 30 times x 3 coins). Also, the "total number of OUT coins" will be "600" as a result of the navigation effect, and the "actual number of OUT coins" in this case will be "510" (= 600 - 30 times x 3 coins). Therefore, the actual payout rate will be 2.429 (≒ 510 ÷ 210), while the total payout rate will be
The result is 2.000 (= 600 ÷ 300).

Next, FIG. 54(d) will be described. During RT2, when either the set value "2" or "4" is set, the probability of winning a replay is 40/100 (= (35 + 45
)/200), so it is expected that an average of 40 replay wins will occur during 100 games (G). In FIG. 54(d), the "
54(d), an example of "total IN number", "actual IN number", "total OUT number", and "actual OUT number" is shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown.
The number of N coins is 300 (= 100 games (G) x 3 coins), and the actual number of IN coins is 1
80" (=300 sheets - 40 times x 3 sheets). The "total number of OUT sheets" is
As shown in FIG. 54(c), the combined probability of Replay A and the 3-coin combination is uniform, so the result is "600" as in FIG. 54(c). In this case, the "effective number of OUT coins" is "480" (=600).
Therefore, the effective payout rate is 2.667 (≒480÷180), while the total payout rate is 2.000 (=600÷300).

As described above, during RT2, the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate varies depending on the set value as described above, but as shown in FIG. 54(e), it can be said that the actual payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the set value (whatever the set value).
The 100 games (G) during T2 when either the set value "1" or "5" is set are not shown. However, the "total number of IN coins" and "total number of OUT coins" are the same as those shown in FIG. 54(c) and the like, because the number of games played and the combined probability of the replay a and the 3-coin role are uniform. In addition, the number of replay wins and the "actual number of IN coins" and "actual number of OUT coins" can be probabilistically between the values shown in FIG. 54(c) and FIG. 54(d). For this reason, the actual payout rate is higher than the total payout rate during 100 games (G) during RT2 when either the set value "1" or "5" is set. In addition, during RT2, the actual payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the set value, but both the total payout rate and the actual payout rate are 1 or more, so that a state advantageous to the player can be achieved.

As described above, in the slot machine of this modified example, the controllable situation is focused on the relationship between the total payout rate taking into account all roles including replays, and the actual payout rate taking into account roles other than replays, and by providing a situation in which the total payout rate is higher than the actual payout rate and a situation in which the actual payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, as shown in Figures 53(a) and 54(e), it is possible to converge the payout rate to an appropriate range compared to, for example, a gaming machine in which only one of the situations in which the payout rate is higher can occur.

The trigger for the transition from RT0 to RT1 is not limited to the winning of a predetermined role such as transition role A, but may also be established by a specific losing symbol combination being stopped, a predetermined number of plays being played, winning a predetermined lottery, etc. The trigger for the transition from RT0 to RT2 is not limited to the winning of a predetermined role such as transition role B, but may also be established by a specific losing symbol combination being stopped, a predetermined number of plays being played, winning a predetermined lottery, etc. The trigger for the transition from RT1 to RT0 is not limited to the winning of a predetermined role such as transition role B, but may also be established by a specific losing symbol combination being stopped, a predetermined number of plays being played, winning a predetermined lottery, etc.
The transition from T2 to RT0 is not limited to being achieved by playing a predetermined number of times, but may also be achieved by winning a predetermined role, a specific losing symbol combination stopping, winning a predetermined lottery, etc.

In addition, the transition role A may be a role that is won simultaneously with other roles a, b, etc. in the role lottery, and the operation mode (e.g., the push order) for winning the transition role A may be determined to be different depending on the type of other roles that the transition role A is simultaneously won with. In addition, the transition role B may be a role that is won simultaneously with other roles a, b, etc. in the role lottery, and the operation mode (e.g., the push order) for winning the transition role B may be determined to be different depending on the type of other roles that the transition role B is simultaneously won with. In addition, the transition role A, the transition role B, and the other roles a, b, etc. are won simultaneously in the role lottery, and the operation mode for winning the transition role A may be determined to be different depending on the type of other roles that the transition role B is simultaneously won with.
The operation modes for winning the transition role A and the transition role B may be set to be different. In this case, when the transition role A or the transition role B is won in RT0, a push order guessing game is generated, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game in RT0.

For example, the transition role A is the RT1 transition replay, and other normal replays A and B are the normal replays B.
The operation mode (e.g., the push order) for winning the RT1 transition replay may be set to be different depending on the type of other normal replay that is simultaneously won in the role drawing and the RT1 transition replay. Specifically, the winning status in RT0 is as follows:
There are provided winning situations a where the RT1 transition replay wins at the same time as the normal replay a, and winning situations b where the RT1 transition replay wins at the same time as the normal replay b. In the winning situation a, the reel control is performed by stopping the left reel first to make the RT1 transition replay win, while the reel control is performed by stopping the reel other than the left reel first to make the normal replay a win, whereas in the winning situation b, the reel control is performed by stopping the reel other than the left reel first to make the RT1 transition replay win, while the reel control is performed by stopping the reel other than the left reel first to make the normal replay b win.
Alternatively, reel control may be performed to bring about a winning combination.

In addition, the transition role B may be an RT2 transition replay that is simultaneously won in the role drawing with other normal replays a and b, and the operation mode (e.g., the push order) for winning the RT2 transition replay may be set to be different depending on the type of other normal replays that are simultaneously won with the RT2 transition replay.
There are provided winning situations c in which the T2 transition replay wins simultaneously with the normal replay a, and winning situation d in which the RT2 transition replay wins simultaneously with the normal replay b. In winning situation c, reel control is performed by stopping on the left first to make the RT2 transition replay win, while reel control is performed by stopping on any other reel than the left first to make the normal replay a win, whereas in winning situation d, reel control is performed by stopping on any other reel than the left first to make the RT2 transition replay win, while reel control is performed by stopping on the left first to make the normal replay b win.

In this case, in RT0, by notifying the player that the game is a button press sequence guessing game when any of the winning situations a to d occurs (for example, when the winning situation is a or b, a message such as "In trouble! Avoid the button press sequence!" is displayed, and when the winning situation is c or d, a message such as "Chance! Get the answer right on your own!" is displayed), it is possible to provide the player with the fun of thinking about which button press sequence to use to perform the stopping operation, thereby increasing the interest of the game in RT0.

Also, Figure 53(a) illustrates an example of the game state transition between RT0 and RT2, but this is not limited to this, as long as there are situations in which the total payout rate taking into account all roles including replays and the actual payout rate taking into account roles other than replays, and situations in which the total payout rate is higher than the actual payout rate and situations in which the actual payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, as shown in Figure 54(e), can occur.

Also, in Fig. 53(b) and Fig. 53(c), it was explained that when comparing the total payout rate and the actual payout rate, the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate differs for each setting value, and that the setting values "b", "1", "2" and setting values "4" to "6" that affect the probability of winning a bonus role all include setting values where the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate is relatively small, setting values where the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate is relatively large, and setting values where the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate is maximum. However, as shown in Fig. 54(e), there are some cases where the role is drawn with a winning probability that can cause a situation where the total payout rate is higher than the actual payout rate and a situation where the actual payout rate is higher than the total payout rate (for example, the winning probability of a replay is 0% or 10%).
0%, etc.), it is not limited to the game state transitions shown in Figure 53(a) or the roles and winning probabilities that are subject to the role lottery shown in Figures 53(b) and 53(c), etc.

The features of the slot machine according to the modified example described above can be summarized as follows:
"A gaming machine that can variably display multiple types of symbols by setting a predetermined number of gaming values as the number of bets for one game, and can award gaming values according to the symbols when the variable display stops.
A role selection means for selecting a role that selects which of a plurality of roles including a grant role that accompanies the grant of the game value and a replay role that allows the player to start a next game without using new game value has been won;
A stop control means for performing stop control to stop the symbols according to the result of the role lottery;
A set value setting means is provided for setting one of a plurality of set values having different advantageous degrees to a player,
a payout rate obtained by dividing the total number of awards, which is the total number of game values awarded when a symbol corresponding to the awarding role is stopped, by the total number of bets, which is the total number of game values set as the number of bets; a first payout rate in which, when a symbol corresponding to the replay role is stopped in a game played with a predetermined number set as the number of bets, the predetermined number of game values is awarded as a result of the game, and the game value set as the number of bets in the next game is counted as the predetermined number; and a second payout rate in which, when a symbol corresponding to the replay role is stopped in a game played with a predetermined number set as the number of bets, the game value awarded in the game is counted as 0, and the game value set as the number of bets in the next game is counted as 0, the relationship between the first payout rate and the second payout rate includes a first situation in which the second payout rate is higher than the first payout rate, and a second situation in which the first payout rate is higher than the second payout rate;
In a notification state in which an advantageous operation mode corresponding to a winning role determined by the role lottery is notified, the second payout rate is higher than the first payout rate regardless of any of the set values among the multiple types of set values, and in a non-notification state in which an advantageous operation mode corresponding to a winning role determined by the role lottery is not notified, the first payout rate is higher than the second payout rate regardless of any of the set values among the multiple types of set values.
The gaming machine is characterized in that it has at least a first setting value with the most advantageous degree and a second setting value with the least advantageous degree as the multiple types of setting values, and the probability of the first situation occurring is higher when the first setting value is set than when the second setting value is set, and the probability of the second situation occurring is higher when the second setting value is set than when the first setting value is set.
become.

According to the description from FIG. 33 onwards,
"A setting change means for changing a previously set value to a new setting value selected from a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage to the player [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] [for example, the CP of the main control unit 300 for executing the setting change process shown in FIG.
U304] and
A notification means (e.g., a title panel lamp 164, a performance image display device 157, etc.) capable of executing a setting-related notification regarding the setting value (e.g., a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b, and the notification effects shown in Figures 37(c) to 37(f));
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means is capable of executing the setting-related notification (for example, a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b) during a first period (for example, a period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of a medal),
The first period is a period during which a certain operation (for example, an operation of turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed.
is executed,
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

According to this gaming machine, after performing the certain operation, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. This information can be obtained by both game store staff and customers. For game store staff, it is confirmation of setting changes before opening, and for customers, it is important information that can lead to their own profits (the same applies below).

The notification means may continue to execute the setting-related notification during the first period (the same applies below).

The first period may be the period from when the operation to end the setting change is executed to when one or more bet numbers are set (until when a medal is inserted) (the same applies below).

The setting-related notification may be a notification that ends when one or more bets are set (hereinafter the same). The setting-related notification may also be a notification that suggests that a predetermined setting value has been set (selected) as the setting value (hereinafter the same). The predetermined setting value may be a setting value that has the lowest degree of advantage for the player among the multiple types of setting values (hereinafter the same). In this case, a staff member at the gaming establishment will notice the low degree of advantage before opening the establishment through the setting-related notification and can change the setting value to one with a higher degree of advantage, and a customer will be able to avoid a gaming machine for which the setting-related notification is being issued.

The setting-related notification can be interpreted as a setting-related performance, and the notification means can be interpreted as a performance means (the same applies below).

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"Multiple types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player [for example, setting 1, 2, 4-6, b]
A setting change means for changing the setting value set up until now to a new setting value selected from the setting change means [for example, C of the main control unit 300 which executes the setting change process shown in FIG.
PU304],
A notification means (e.g., a title panel lamp 164, a performance image display device 157, etc.) capable of executing a setting-related notification regarding the setting value (e.g., a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b, and the notification effects shown in Figures 37(c) to 37(f));
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means is capable of executing the setting-related notification (for example, a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b) during a first period (for example, a period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of a medal),
the notification means is capable of executing, as the setting-related notification, a notification regarding a certain setting value (e.g., setting b) among the plurality of types of setting values;
The first period is a period during which a certain operation (for example, an operation of turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed.
is executed,
The notification means notifies the user of a setting value different from the certain setting value [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6].
] is set, the setting-related notification is not executed.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to this gaming machine, after the certain operation is performed, information regarding the setting value may be obtained through the setting-related notification. Also, the setting-related notification makes it easier to identify that the certain setting value has been set.

The notification means may not execute the setting-related notification when a setting value different from the certain setting value [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6] is set during the first period.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"Multiple types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player [for example, setting 1, 2, 4-6, b]
A setting change means for changing the setting value set up until now to a new setting value selected from the setting change means [for example, C of the main control unit 300 which executes the setting change process shown in FIG.
PU304],
A notification means (e.g., a title panel lamp 164, a performance image display device 157, etc.) capable of executing a setting-related notification regarding the setting value (e.g., a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b, and the notification effects shown in Figures 37(c) to 37(f));
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means is capable of executing the setting-related notification (for example, a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b) during a first period (for example, a period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of a medal),
the notification means is capable of executing, as the setting-related notification, a notification regarding a certain setting value (e.g., setting b) among the plurality of types of setting values;
The first period is a period during which a certain operation (for example, an operation of turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed.
is executed,
The notification means notifies the user of a setting value different from the certain setting value [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6].
The frequency of the setting-related notification is higher when the certain setting value is set than when the certain setting value is set [for example, performance G or performance H shown in FIG. 37(b)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to this gaming machine, after the certain operation is performed, information regarding the setting value may be obtained through the setting-related notification. Also, the setting-related notification makes it easier to identify that the certain setting value has been set.

The setting-related notification may be a notification that is not executed when a setting value different from the certain setting value is set, and is executed only when the certain setting value is set, but may also be executed when a setting value different from the certain setting value is set, including a false notification. However, the execution frequency is as described above.

The notification means may be configured to perform the setting-related notification more frequently when a certain setting value is set in the first period than when a setting value different from the certain setting value is set, or may perform the setting-related notification more frequently during a period different from the first period (for example, a period after a game is started (when a chance zone ends, when a battle performance ends, when a BB ends, when an AT
Even when a certain setting value is set (such as at the time of termination), the setting-related notification may be executed more frequently when the certain setting value is set than when a setting value different from the certain setting value is set.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"Multiple types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player [for example, setting 1, 2, 4-6, b]
A setting change means for changing the setting value set up until now to a new setting value selected from the setting change means [for example, C of the main control unit 300 which executes the setting change process shown in FIG.
PU304],
A notification means (e.g., a title panel lamp 164, a performance image display device 157, etc.) capable of executing a setting-related notification regarding the setting value (e.g., a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b, and the notification effects shown in Figures 37(c) to 37(f));
a set value display means (e.g., a set value display 293) capable of displaying the plurality of set values one by one in a predetermined display order (e.g., the display order shown in FIG. 37(a));
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means is capable of executing the setting-related notification (for example, a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b) during a first period (for example, a period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of a medal),
The first period is a period during which a certain operation (for example, an operation of turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed.
is executed,
the setting value display means is capable of displaying a first setting value which is one setting value among the plurality of types of setting values,
the setting value display means is capable of displaying a second setting value which is one setting value among the plurality of types of setting values,
The second setting value is a setting value that is less advantageous to the player than the first setting value [e.g., setting 1] [e.g., setting b],
The predetermined display order is an order in which the first setting value [e.g., setting 1] is displayed and then the second setting value [e.g., setting b] is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to this gaming machine, after the certain operation is performed, information about the setting value may be obtained by the setting-related notification. Also, since a second setting value that is less advantageous to the player is prepared after the first setting value, a fraudster who fraudulently changes the setting value may unknowingly change the first setting value to the second setting value, causing the player to play at a disadvantage.

The second setting value may be the certain setting value, and the notification means may be capable of executing a notification regarding a certain setting value among the multiple types of setting values as the setting-related notification (the same applies below).

The set value display means may display the currently set set value (hereinafter the same).

The device may be equipped with a setting value display means for displaying a currently set setting value, and a setting value change operation means for operating when changing the setting value, wherein the setting value change operation means changes the multiple types of setting values in a predetermined order, and the second setting value may be a setting value that is changed after being changed to the first setting value.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"Multiple types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player [for example, setting 1, 2, 4-6, b]
A setting change means for changing the setting value set up until now to a new setting value selected from the setting change means [for example, C of the main control unit 300 which executes the setting change process shown in FIG.
PU304],
A notification means (e.g., a title panel lamp 164, a performance image display device 157, etc.) capable of executing a setting-related notification regarding the setting value (e.g., a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b, and the notification effects shown in Figures 37(c) to 37(f));
A setting value display means (e.g., a setting value display 293) capable of displaying the setting value;
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means is capable of executing the setting-related notification (for example, a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b) during a first period (for example, a period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of a medal),
The first period is a period during which a certain operation (for example, an operation of turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed.
is executed,
the setting value display means is capable of displaying a first setting value which is one setting value among the plurality of types of setting values,
the setting value display means is capable of displaying a second setting value which is one setting value among the plurality of types of setting values,
The second setting value is a setting value [e.g., setting b] that is less advantageous to the player than the first setting value [e.g., setting 1],
The set value display means is a RAM including a default set value to be displayed initially (for example, a set value to be displayed initially immediately after shipment from the factory, a storage area (RAM of the main control unit) for storing set values).
The first set value [the set value that is displayed first after clearing or the set value that is displayed first when a backup power source that continues to store the set value in the storage area is lost]
For example, a means for displaying [Setting 1],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to this gaming machine, after performing the certain operation, the player may be able to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. Also, even if the gaming store staff forgets to change the setting and the default setting is used, the player can easily play the game.

The default setting value that is displayed first is the setting value that is displayed first when the gaming machine is initialized. In other words, when the gaming machine is initialized, the first setting value is set.

The device may be equipped with a setting value display means for displaying a currently set setting value, and a setting value change operation means for being operated when changing the setting value, wherein the setting value change operation means changes the multiple types of setting values in a predetermined order, and the first setting value may be the setting value located at the beginning of the predetermined order.

Also,
"The first period is the period from when the power is turned on to the gaming machine [for example, from FIG. 45 (U)]
This is a period during which a game has never been started (for example, a game has not been started by operating the start lever 135).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to this gaming machine, the setting-related notification is executed during a period in which no game has been started, so that the player will not suffer any disadvantage.

The phrase "a game has never been started" may mean that the start lever has never been operated when the bet number was set to 1 or more.

Also,
"The certain operation is an operation related to the setting change [for example, an operation to end the setting change].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

According to this gaming machine, when an operation related to changing the setting is performed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification.

The certain operation may be an operation to end the setting change (same below).

Also,
The certain operation is the determination of the set value (for example, step S1115 in FIG. 42).
],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:
According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification after the setting value has been determined.

More specifically, the certain operation may be an operation to end the setting change process (an operation to turn off the setting change key) after the setting value has been confirmed in the setting change process (after the start lever has been turned on) (the same applies below).

Also,
"Equipped with an operating means [e.g., a setting key switch 281] that can be switched between an on state and an off state by operation,
The certain operation is an operation of switching the operating means from an ON state to an OFF state (e.g., FIG. 45 (J)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:
According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification after the operating means is switched to the off state.

The certain operation may be an operation of switching an operating means (e.g., a setting change key) that is switched to an ON state when starting the setting change to an OFF state, and the ON state may be a start state, and the OFF state may be an end state (the same applies below).
The operation means may be a means for switching between starting and ending the setting change when operated (the same applies below).

Also,
"A setting value display means [e.g., a setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value is provided,
The setting value display means does not display the setting value when the notification means executes the setting-related notification during the first period (for example, the setting value display 2 shown in FIG. 46 (K)).
93],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:
According to this gaming machine, the notification means executes the setting-related notification to obtain information regarding the setting value, so that the setting value display means does not perform duplicate displays, thereby reducing the control burden.

Also,
"Equipped with a door body [e.g., a front door 102],
The notification means may execute the setting-related notification in the first period with the door body open (for example, FIG. 45 (c)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:
With this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification even when the door is open.

The operating means may be operable when the door body is in an open state (the same applies below).

Furthermore, the set value display means (for example, a dedicated seven-segment display) may be one that cannot be seen when the door is closed (the same applies below). In other words, it may be a display means that is normally invisible to players (the same applies below).

In addition, the notification means may be a means for executing a door open notification when the door body is opened, and may be a means for starting the setting-related notification when the door open notification is completed (the same applies below).

Also,
"Equipped with a door body [e.g., a front door 102],
The notification means may execute the setting-related notification in the first period with the door body closed (for example, FIG. 45 (k)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:
With this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification even when the door is closed.

In addition, the notification means may be configured to continue the door open notification until a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the notification even if the door body is closed while the door open notification is being executed, and to start the setting-related notification when the door open notification ends (the same applies below).

The notification means may execute the setting-related notification during the first period even when the door body is open, and may execute the setting-related notification during the first period even when the door body is closed (the same applies below).

The setting-related notification may be a notification that continues regardless of whether the door is open or closed, and that ends when one or more bet numbers are set (the same applies below).

Also,
"The notification means executes the setting-related notification only when a certain setting value [e.g., setting b] is set as the setting value.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:
According to this gaming machine, by executing the setting-related notification, it is possible to notify that the certain setting value is set as the setting value.

The certain set value may be the set value that has the lowest degree of advantage for the player among the multiple set values (hereinafter the same). In this case, a staff member of the gaming establishment will notice the low degree of advantage before opening the establishment through the setting-related notification and can change the setting value to a higher degree of advantage, and a customer can avoid the gaming machine for which the setting-related notification is being issued.

Further explanation. As described above, the slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a gaming machine that is premised on playing with three coins bet. However, it is also possible to play with two coins bet. For this reason, it is designed so that playing with three coins in a two-coin bet bonus internal win state is more advantageous for the player than playing with two coins in a three-coin bet bonus internal win state, and the two-coin bet bonus internal win state is treated as a normal play state, so that players can play with three coins bet as much as possible.

In this way, the normal game state of the slot machine 100 of this embodiment is the two-coin bet bonus internal winning state, but if a player plays with two bets, wins the two-coin bet bonus, and finishes the two-coin bet bonus game, the game state becomes the two-coin bet bonus non-internal winning state. Alternatively, the two-coin bet bonus non-internal winning state also occurs when the reset switch 291 is pressed. In addition, when the setting change process is started, the RAM clear process (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) (step S1101 shown in FIG. 42) is performed, and the initialization is automatically performed, resulting in the two-coin bet bonus non-internal winning state.

In addition, when the setting change process is started, the initialization is not performed automatically, but it may be possible to select whether or not to initialize. For example, it may be possible to initialize the setting values and the game state by using the setting change procedure. More specifically,
As in the case of changing the setting, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the power off. Next, when turning on the power switch 244, if the power switch 244 is turned on while pressing the setting change button 292, the setting value becomes setting 1 and the game state becomes 2.
The state may be set to a state where the coin betting bonus is not internally won. Also, the state may be set to a non-advantageous zone. Also, the initialization process (step S1009 shown in FIG. 42) is executed when the reset switch 291 is pressed, but the initialization process may also be executed when the power is turned on while the setting change button 292 is pressed.

In the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, during the two-coin bet bonus game, the effect image display device 157 displays a display (for example, a flower figure) indicating that the two-coin bet bonus game is being played. Also, the remaining number of payout coins, which is the condition for ending the bonus, is displayed (for example, "remaining coins during play"). Note that only one of the displays may be displayed.

In addition, in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, a setting that is not normally set, such as setting b, which is extremely disadvantageous to the player, is prepared from the viewpoint of measures against fraudsters, and the state in which setting b is set can be avoided by performing a setting change process. However, even if the setting change process is performed to prevent the player from being extremely disadvantaged, if the two-coin bet bonus is not in an internally winning state, the player will still be at a disadvantage. Therefore, a notification is made to suggest that the two-coin bet bonus is not in an internally winning state.

In the following description, the first gaming state refers to a non-internal winning state of the 2-coin bet bonus, and the second gaming state refers to a 2-coin bet bonus internal winning state. The first gaming state can be a non-advantageous zone state, a non-internal winning state not limited to 2-coin bets, the above-mentioned non-recommended gaming state (penalty bonus state), a state in which no items or points have been acquired, or a state set to setting b, and the second gaming state can be a state that is more advantageous than those, such as an advantageous zone state, a bonus internal winning state, a normal gaming state, a state in which items or points have been acquired, or a state set to any of settings 1, 2, 4 to 6.

The first voice is an attention-calling notification of "Please check." The first display is a text display of "Please check," which is also an attention-calling notification.

On the other hand, the second voice is a voice notification of "Completed." The second display is a notification by displaying the text "Completed."

Furthermore, when a game is started in a state where the two-coin bet bonus is not internally won, the effect image display device 1
On the display 57, a display indicating that the game is attempting to transition to a 2-coin bet bonus internal winning state, a display indicating that the game is in a 2-coin bet bonus non-internal winning state, or a display encouraging the gamer to transition to a 2-coin bet bonus internal winning state is displayed. Hereinafter, these notifications by displays are collectively referred to as the "fourth notification." As the fourth notification, for example, "Returning Game" is displayed, and the number of games played in the 2-coin bet bonus non-internal winning state is displayed.
A player who knows about this fourth notification will know that this slot machine 100 is a disadvantageous slot machine and can avoid it. The fourth notification may be a display that is displayed only when a game is being played with two coins bet, or a display that is displayed regardless of the number of bets.

Fig. 55 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed after the setting has been changed. In Fig. 55, each stage is assigned a number from (1) to (11), and time passes in ascending order of the numbers.

FIG. 55 shows, as items of components, a power switch 244, a front door 102, an opening sensor 294, a setting key switch 281, a setting value display 293, monitor LEDs provided on the main control board and the external central terminal board 248, a performance image display device 157, a title panel lamp 164, a top lamp 144T, a left side lamp 144L, and a right side lamp 144R.
The items shown are the top and side lamps 44R, the upper speaker 272, and the bass speaker 277 (speakers). Also, at the bottom, an item for game status is provided.

In FIG. 55(1), the power switch 244 is in the OFF state, and the front door 102 is closed. The open sensor 294 is not functioning. No setting key is inserted in the setting key switch 281, and the setting key switch 281 remains in the OFF state. The seven segments of the setting value display 293 remain unlit, and the setting value is not displayed. The various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144
The LEDs (272, 277) and the monitor LEDs (271, 272) are turned off, and no output is coming from the speakers (272, 277).

In Fig. 55 (2), the front door 102 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned right, turning the setting key switch 281 on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on before the power is turned on. Note that, since the power is not turned on before the front door 102 is opened, no detection signal is output from the opening sensor 294.

In FIG. 55 (3), the setting key switch 281 is on and the power switch 244 is turned on (power-on). As a result, the setting change process in the main control unit 300 is started. The setting value display 293 displays "1" as the default setting value. If the user is allowed to select whether to initialize as described above, the setting value stored in the power-off process of step S221 at the time of power-off is displayed if the user does not initialize. The performance image display device 157 displays a setting change display notifying the user that the setting is being changed, and the speaker (272, 277) also outputs a voice ("setting change in progress") notifying the user that the setting is being changed. In addition, since the power has been turned on, the open sensor 294 starts to output an open detection signal, and all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up. Furthermore, since the setting key switch 281 is turned on, the monitor LED also starts to light up. When the setting key switch 281 is turned on, a setting key switch on signal is output from the external central terminal board 248 to the external device. The game state is the first game state (two-coin bet bonus not internally won state) due to RAM clear (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization, step S1101 shown in FIG. 42). However, if it is possible to select whether or not to initialize, the game state at the time of power cut stored in the power cut processing of step S221 will be restored unless initialization is performed. For this reason, the game state may also be the second game state (two-coin bet bonus internally won state).

Once the setting change has started, the setting value is updated every time the setting change button 292 is pressed.

In FIG. 55(4), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is confirmed (step S1115 shown in FIG. 42), and the number 0, which indicates that the set value is confirmed, is displayed on the set value display 293. Even though the set value is confirmed, the setting key switch 281 remains in the on state, so the monitor L
The ED continues to light up. Although a voice message such as "The setting is being changed" is output from the speakers (272, 277), a voice message such as "The setting has been changed" may be output instead.

In FIG. 55 (5), the setting key inserted in the setting key switch 281 is turned to the OFF state by rotating it to the left. As a result, the setting change process ends (step S1119 shown in FIG. 42), and the seven segments of the setting value display 293 go out and are hidden. The monitor LED also goes out. The sound from the speakers (272, 277) switches to a sound saying "Door is open", which warns that the front door 102 is open. The switched sound output of "Door is open" here corresponds to an example of a third notification. Note that instead of "Door is open", the sound output may be "Setting change completed" or "Setting change is finished". Furthermore, the performance image display device 157 starts displaying a demo animation, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 1
The left side lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R start lighting up the demo pattern. The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white because the setting was a setting other than setting b. When the setting change process is completed, if the game state is the first game state, a first notification command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400.
The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 execute notification control (performance control) based on this first notification command. As a result, the performance image display device 157 displays a first display with text such as "Please check" as a warning notification.

In FIG. 55 (6), the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the opening sensor 294 (switched to L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 55 (6) corresponds to an example of a certain operation. When the detection signal from the opening sensor 294 switches to the L level closed detection signal, the main control unit 300 transmits a door close command to the first sub-control unit 400. When the door close command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, the speaker (272, 277) outputs a first sound such as "Please check" as a warning notification based on the fact that the first notification command has been received first. In addition, the performance image display device 157 continues to display the demo animation, and the first display also continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 55(7), the front door 102 is opened and various lamps (164, 144T, 144L
, 144R) all start lighting up the door open pattern. In addition, the demo animation continues to be displayed on the performance image display device 157, and the first display such as "Please check" continues to be displayed because the game state remains the first game state.
The voice from the front door 102 (77) returns to the warning voice of "The door is open". That is, the output of the first voice is started when the front door 102 is closed and ended when the front door 102 is opened. In many cases, the staff of the game establishment already realizes that the game is still in the first game state due to the output of the first voice and the first display at the timing of FIG. 55 (6), and therefore the output of the first voice is ended to avoid redundant notification. It may be configured to end when the front door 102 is opened two or more times. However, since it may be necessary to open the front door 102 during a game to resolve a hopper error or ball jam, if the number of times is more than two, it may be considered noisy by surrounding players.

In FIG. 55 (8), the front door 102 is closed again while the game state is the first game state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to a closed detection signal of L level). The speaker (272, 277) outputs a voice saying "The door is closed", and no repeated attention notification is executed. However, the performance image display device 157 continues to display the first display such as "Please check" together with the display of the demo animation. Among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start to light up in the demo pattern again, and the title panel lamp 164 starts to light up in white again.

In FIG. 55 (9), medals are inserted by servicing the medals or by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132. Here, two medals are inserted for a bet. Since a customer would normally bet three medals, a two-coin bet is often performed by an arcade staff member. It is also often a preparatory operation before the store opens. The speaker (272, 277) outputs the sound of medal insertion, and the effect image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to displaying the background of a normal effect (normal background display). However, the first display, which is a warning notification that the game is in the first gaming state, continues to be displayed. Also, the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L)
Of the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R start to light up in the lighting pattern for normal performance (normal pattern).

In FIG. 55 (10), the start lever 135 is operated in a state where two coins have been bet, and a game is started. That is, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. In the performance image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed on the normal background display. Here, when a game is started, this first display may be switched to the fourth notification such as "Returning, 1 game" as described above. Alternatively, from the stage of FIG. 55 (7), a fourth notification such as "Returning, 0 games" may be displayed instead of or together with the first display, and when a game is started, "Returning, 1 game" may be displayed.

When the start lever 135 is operated in a two-coin bet state and an internal win is won on the two-coin bet bonus, a notification is given to indicate that an internal win has occurred. For example, an exclamation mark is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Furthermore, a navigation effect is also performed to prevent the player from winning the two-coin bet bonus. In this navigation effect, a warning sound is output from the speakers (272, 277), and information on the reel stopping positions that can avoid winning the bonus is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

In FIG. 55 (11), the third stop operation is performed. Here, the first operation of the start lever 135 results in a two-coin bet bonus internal win state, and the game state changes to the second game state due to the stop operation that avoids the bonus win. The effect image display device 157 displays a second display in text form such as "Completed" on the normal background display as the game state has shifted to the second game state. Also, the second sound of "Completed" is output from the speakers (272, 277).

Fig. 56 is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the reels are rotated before closing the front door 102 after changing the settings, and the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed while the reels are rotating. In Fig. 56, the respective stages are represented by (1) to (5), (21) to (23), and (40).
) and (11), and time progresses in the order of the notations.

In Figure 56, the same items as in Figure 55 are shown as component items, and a game status item is provided at the bottom (the same as in Figures 61 to 61).

Figures 56(1) to (5) are the same as Figures 55(1) to (5), so Figures 55(1) to (5)
) and detailed description will be omitted here, but the setting change process starts and ends.

In FIG. 56 (21), after the setting change process is completed, the front door 102 is left open and medals are inserted by removing the medals or operating the bet buttons 130 to 132. In this case, two medals are inserted. Since a player would normally bet three medals, two
Betting coins is often an operation performed by a staff member of the gaming establishment. It is also often a preparation operation before the establishment opens. The speaker (272, 277) outputs the sound of inserting a coin, and the effect image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to displaying the background of the normal effect (normal background display), while the first display, which is a warning notification that the first gaming state is being entered, continues to be displayed. In addition, all of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up in the door-opening pattern.

In FIG. 56 (22), the start lever 135 is operated in a state where two coins are bet, and the game is started. That is, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. In the performance image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed on the normal background display. Here, when the game is started, this first display may be switched to the fourth notification such as "Returning 1 game" as described above. Alternatively, from the stage of FIG. 56 (21), instead of or together with the first display, the fourth notification such as "Returning 0 games" may be displayed, and when the game is started, "Returning 1 game" may be displayed. Note that, since the front door 102 remains in the open state, all of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) continue to light up in the door open pattern.

In FIG. 56 (23), while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the opening sensor 294 (switched to a L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation. When the detection signal from the opening sensor 294 switches to a L level closed detection signal, a first sound such as "Please check" is output from the speakers (272, 277) as a warning notice. In the example in FIG. 56, the first sound is output while the reels are rotating. The store clerk performing maintenance to check whether the reels 110 to 112 are rotating can be warned by sound that the game state is the first game state. Among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start to light up in a normal pattern, and the title panel lamp 164 starts to light up in white. In addition, in the performance image display device 157, the normal background display continues, and the first display also continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 56(11), the third stop operation is performed.
The same as 1), the two-coin bet bonus internal winning state is acquired, and the gaming state becomes the second gaming state. In the effect image display device 157, a second display of text such as "Completed" is displayed on the normal background display as the gaming state has shifted to the second gaming state. Also, a second sound of "Completed" is output from the speakers (272, 277).

FIG. 57 is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the reels are rotated before the front door 102 is closed after a setting change, a power outage occurs while the reels are rotating, and the front door 102 is closed while the reels are rotating after the power is restored. In FIG. 57, each stage is divided into (1) to (5), (2) and (3).
The numbers (1), (22), and (25) to (27) are attached, and the time progresses in the order of the numbers.

Figures 57(1) to (5) are the same as Figures 55(1) to (5), so Figures 55(1) to (5)
) and detailed description will be omitted here, but the setting change process starts and ends.

Figures 57 (21) and (22) are the same as Figures 55 (21) and (22), so the explanation of Figures 55 (21) and (22) will be reused and will not be repeated here, but the game begins with two coins bet.

In FIG. 57 (25), a game is being played with two coins bet (reels 110 to 11
57(1) occurs. However, the power interruption process in step S221 shown in FIG. 40 causes necessary information to be saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

In the next figure, Figure 57 (26), the power is restored and the reels 110 to 111 are still in the two-coin bet state, just as they were just before the power failure.
The display returns to state 2. In other words, if there was a reel that had already stopped spinning just before the power was cut off, that reel will remain stopped, and any reels that were spinning just before the power was cut off will start spinning again. The performance image display device 157 will return to a state where the first display is displayed on the normal background display. In addition, all of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) will return to the door open pattern lighting. In addition, the game state will return to the first game state.

In FIG. 57 (27), the front door 102 is closed while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the opening sensor 294 (switched to L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in FIG. 57, a power outage occurs during the rotation of the reels before the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed. If a power outage occurs before the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed, the first voice such as "Please check" is not output from the speaker (272, 277). This is to allow the store staff to concentrate on the task of checking the reel rotation after the power is restored. In addition, since the first display is continuously displayed on the performance image display device 157, the store staff may notice that the first game state is in progress due to this first display.

FIG. 58 is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the front door 102 is closed after the settings are changed and the inserted medals are settled and paid out.
In FIG. 8, the stages are numbered (1) to (5), (21), (31), and (32), and time progresses in the order of the numbers.

Figures 58(1) to (5) are the same as Figures 55(1) to (5), so Figures 55(1) to (5)
) and detailed description will be omitted here, but the setting change process starts and ends.

Figure 58 (21) is the same as Figure 55 (21), so the explanation of Figure 55 (21) will be reused and a detailed explanation will be omitted here, but a medal is inserted.

In FIG. 58 (31), when the settlement button 134 is pressed with two medals bet, the hopper unit 180 starts to pay out the two medals bet and the credit medals.
In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed on the normal background display even after the payout has started. On the other hand, all of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) are
The settlement pattern starts to light up. Also, a "payout sound" is output from the speakers (272, 277).

In the next FIG. 58 (32), the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state.
The open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to a closed detection signal of L level). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation.
In the example of FIG. 58, the front door 102 is closed during the payout process. Even during the payout process, if the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state, a first sound such as "Please confirm" is output from the speaker (272, 277) instead of the payout sound. In the performance image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed on the normal background display. The first sound may be output together with the payout sound.

FIG. 59 is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when a power outage occurs during the settlement and payout of inserted medals before the front door 102 is closed after a setting change, and the front door 102 is closed during the payout after the power is restored. In FIG. 59, each stage is divided into (1) to (5), (21), (31), and (41).
), (35) to (37), and time progresses in the order of the notations.

Figures 59(1) to (5) are the same as Figures 55(1) to (5), so Figures 55(1) to (5)
) and detailed description will be omitted here, but the setting change process starts and ends.

Figure 59 (21) is the same as Figure 55 (21), so the explanation for Figure 55 (21) will be reused and a detailed explanation will be omitted here, but a medal is inserted.

Figure 59 (31) is the same as Figure 58 (31), so the explanation of Figure 58 (31) will be reused and a detailed explanation will be omitted here. When the settlement button 134 is pressed with two coins bet, the payout begins.

In Fig. 59 (35), the power is interrupted during dispensing, resulting in the same state as Fig. 59 (1). However, the power is interrupted in the power interruption process of step S221 shown in Fig. 40, and the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is reset.
The necessary information is saved in a predetermined area.

In the next Fig. 59 (36), power is restored and the payout of the remaining medals that have not been paid out is started. The performance image display device 157 returns to the state where the first display is displayed on the normal background display. In addition, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) return to the settlement pattern lighting, and the output of the payout sound from the speakers (272, 277) is resumed. In addition, the game state returns to the first game state.

In Fig. 59 (37), the front door 102 is closed during payout while the gaming state remains in the first gaming state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to an L level close detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in Fig. 59, a power interruption and restoration occurs during payout before the front door 102 is closed. If a power interruption and restoration occurs before the front door 102 is closed,
The first sound such as "Please check" is not output from the speakers (272, 277), and the payout sound continues to be output. The first sound is not output in order to allow the store staff to concentrate on the task of checking the payout after the power is restored. Since the first display is continuously displayed on the performance image display device 157, the store staff may notice that the game is in the first gaming state due to this first display. It is not necessary to output some or all of the payout sound during the period of payout of the remaining medals after the power is restored.

Fig. 60 is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the front door 102 is closed during confirmation of settings after a setting change. In Fig. 60, each stage is labeled (1) to (5), (41), and (42), and time progresses in the order of the numbers.

Figures 60(1) to 60(5) are the same as Figures 55(1) to 55(5), so
) and detailed description will be omitted here, but the setting change process starts and ends.

In Fig. 60 (41), the setting key switch 281 that was turned off in Fig. 60 (5) is returned to the on state. The state shown in Fig. 60 (41) is a state in which the front door 102 is open and the power is on. In this state, turning the setting key switch 281 from the off state to the on state starts the setting confirmation process, and the current setting value "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293.
Also, the monitor LEDs provided on the main control board and the external central terminal board 248 start to light up. The performance image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display to inform the user that the setting is being confirmed, and the first display is also continuously displayed. Also, the speaker (272,
The title panel lamp 164 continues to light in white, and the top lamp 1
The left side lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R also switch from the demo pattern lighting to white lighting.

In FIG. 60 (42), the front door 102 is closed while in the first game state during setting confirmation, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to a L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 60 (42) also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in FIG. 60, the front door 102 is closed while the performance image display device 157 is displaying the setting confirmation display. In this case, the speaker (272,
277), a first sound such as "Please check" is output instead of a sound such as "The setting is being checked." Note that in the performance image display device 157, the setting checking display continues, and the first display also continues to be displayed. In the explanation in FIG. 60, the text display such as "Please check," which is the attention alert, is referred to as the first display, but if the setting checking display is referred to as the first display and the first sound is referred to as the first alert, the example in FIG. 60 is an example in which the first alert (first sound) is executed while the first display (setting checking display) is being displayed.

FIG. 61 is a table summarizing the states of the related components when the front door 102 is closed after the setting is changed and the game is transitioned to the second game state. In FIG. 61, each stage is divided into (1) to (5).
), (21), (22), (45) and (46) are attached, and time progresses in the order of the notations.

Figures 61(1) to 61(5) are the same as Figures 55(1) to 55(5), so
) and detailed description will be omitted here, but the setting change process starts and ends.

Figures 61 (21) and (22) are the same as Figures 55 (21) and (22), so the explanation of Figures 55 (21) and (22) will be reused and will not be repeated here, but the game begins with two coins bet.

In FIG. 61 (45), the front door 102 is left open until the third stop operation, the internal winning state of the two-coin bet bonus is acquired, and the game state becomes the second game state. In the performance image display device 157, a second display of text such as "Completed" is displayed on the normal background display, because the game state has shifted to the second game state. Also, the speaker (272,
277) also outputs a second voice saying "Completed."

In FIG. 61 (46), the front door 102 is closed, and the open sensor 294 outputs a detection signal (H
The 4 level signal is no longer output (switched to an L level closure detection signal).
The operation of closing the front door 102 in 6) corresponds to an example of a certain operation, but corresponds to a certain operation in the second game state. As described above, when the detection signal from the open sensor 294 switches to an L-level close detection signal, a door close command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the door close command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400, the first voice such as "Please check" is output from the speakers (272, 277) as a warning notification based on the fact that the first notification command has been received first, but
There is no problem if the output is made, and there is an advantage in that the control process is not complicated.
At step 1 (45), the second display is displayed and the second sound is output, and further, the above-mentioned "fourth notification" is not made in the game that is started thereafter, so the store clerk does not have to worry about whether or not the game state has shifted to the second game state.

In the examples of FIGS. 55 to 61 described above, after the setting change process is performed,
This was an example in which the front door 102 was closed as a certain operation. As described above, when the setting change process is started, the RAM clear process (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization, step S1101 shown in FIG. 42) is performed and the game state becomes the first game state. Therefore, when the setting change process is performed regardless of whether the setting value is actually changed or not, the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed. This first sound is output even if the game state has transitioned to the second game state as shown in the last example of FIG. 61. That is, the first sound is output regardless of whether the game state is the first game state or not as long as the setting change process is performed. On the other hand, when the front door 102 is closed without the setting change process being performed, the first sound is not output, but the first sound may be output when the front door 102 is closed after the reset switch 291 is pressed and held. Alternatively, the first sound may be output when the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first, regardless of whether the setting is changed or not.

Fig. 62 is a table showing the states of the related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in the pseudo-closed state after one setting check, and the inserted medals are settled. In Fig. 62, each stage is given a number from (50) to (59), and time passes in ascending order of numbers.

FIG. 62 shows, as items of components, a power switch 244, a front door 102, an opening sensor 294, a setting key switch 281, a setting value display 293, monitor LEDs provided on the main control board and the external central terminal board 248, a performance image display device 157, a title panel lamp 164, a top lamp 144T, a left side lamp 144L, and a right side lamp 144R.
The items 44R (top and side lamps), upper speaker 272 and bass speaker 277 (speaker) are shown, and at the bottom there is an item for the medal blocker 172 shown in Fig. 36. The game state is always the second game state (the same up to Fig. 66).

In FIG. 62 (50), the power switch 244 is on and the front door 102 is closed. The open sensor 294 outputs a low-level closed detection signal. The setting key switch 281 is off and the setting value display 293 is not displayed. The monitor LEDs provided on the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248 are turned off. The performance image display device 157 displays a demo animation, and the top lamp 144T and the left side lamp 14
A demo pattern is lit in the 4L and right side lamps 144R, and the title panel lamp 164 is lit in white. No output is coming from the speakers (272, 277). The medal blocker 172 is retracted from the medal passage 171, and medals passing through the medal passage 171 are stored in the bucket 181. Hereinafter, the state in which the medal blocker 172 is retracted from the medal passage 171, or the act of retracting, will be referred to as "not operating."

In FIG. 62 (51), the front door 102 is opened, and the open sensor 294 outputs an open detection signal (H
A signal of a level 100 is output. All of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up in the door open pattern, and the speakers (272, 277) output a warning voice saying "The door is open." Note that the performance image display device 157 continues to display the demo animation, and the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In Fig. 62 (52), the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned right, turning on the setting key switch 281. That is, with the front door 102 open and the power on, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the setting confirmation process is started.
The setting value display 293 displays the current setting value "1", and the monitor LED starts to light up. The performance image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display notifying that the setting is being confirmed. Also, the speaker (272, 277) will output a sound ("Setting confirmation in progress") notifying that the setting is being confirmed. Title panel lamp 164
switches to a white light, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch to a white light. Furthermore, when the setting confirmation process is started, the medal blocker 172 protrudes into the medal passage 171, and medals passing through the medal passage 171 are discharged from the medal payout outlet 155. Hereinafter, the state in which the medal blocker 172 protrudes into the medal passage 171, or the protrusion thereof, will be referred to as "operated." While the setting confirmation process is being performed, it is not possible to remove medals from the medal insertion port 141.
In other words, it is not possible to insert three medals, four or more medals, or even one or two medals. Furthermore, operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132 is not accepted, or even if accepted, the operation is invalid. Furthermore, operation of the start lever 135 and settlement operation are not accepted, or even if accepted, the operation is invalid.

In FIG. 62 (53), the setting key switch 281 is returned to the OFF state, and the setting confirmation process is completed. The setting value display 293 is turned off, and the monitor LED is also turned off.
The voice from the display device 157 changes to "The door is open." The demo animation starts to be displayed on the display device 157, and the various lamps (164, 144T, 14
Among the lamps 144T, 144L, 144R, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start to light up in a demo pattern. The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white. The medal blocker 172 becomes inactive.

In Fig. 62 (54), when the front door 102 is opened, the protruding opening/closing tab is pushed down by hand, so that the opening sensor 294 cannot detect the opening/closing tab, thereby pseudo-closing the front door 102. As a result, the front door 102 is open, but the opening sensor 294 outputs an L-level close detection signal. The speakers (272, 277) no longer output a voice message such as "The door is open."

In Fig. 62 (55), the setting key switch 281 is turned on again. However, the turning on of the setting key switch 281 here is performed while a close detection signal is being output from the open sensor 294. In the explanations up to now in Fig. 62 (51) and elsewhere, the setting confirmation process was described as being started when the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the front door 102 is open and the power is on, but strictly speaking, it is started when the setting key switch 281 is turned on while an open detection signal is being output from the open sensor 294. For this reason,
In this FIG. 62 (55), since the open detection signal is not output, the setting confirmation process is not started, the setting value display 293 remains invisible, the performance image display device 157 continues to display the demo animation, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). Also, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive. However, the setting key switch 2
As a result of 81 being turned on, the monitor LED starts to light up.

In FIG. 62 (56), medals are inserted by inserting medals or operating the bet buttons 130 to 132. Since the setting confirmation process is not in progress, medals can be inserted.
A medal insertion sound is output from the speakers (272, 277). In this way, even if the setting key switch 281 is in the ON state, it may be possible to insert a medal. Also, even if the setting key switch 281 is in the ON state, it may be possible to perform a bet operation, a start operation, and a settlement operation. The performance image display device 157 switches from displaying a demo animation to displaying a normal background. Also, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start to light up in the normal pattern.

In FIG. 62 (57), the hand that was pushing down the opening/closing tab is released, the opening/closing tab protrudes, and the opening sensor 294 detects the opening/closing tab and outputs an open detection signal.
All of the doors (144, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting up with the door open pattern, and the speakers (2
72, 277) outputs a warning voice saying "The door is open."
In the state of 1 (57), the setting key switch 281 is already in the ON state.
In the state of 57), a bet number of 1 or more is set.
1 is already in the ON state, and when a bet number of 1 or more is set, the open sensor 294
Even if an open detection signal is output from the display device 1, the setting confirmation process is not started.
In 57, the normal background display continues, and the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 62 (58), the settlement button 134 is pressed and dispensing is started. All of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting up in the settlement pattern.
A "payout sound" is output from the speakers (272, 277). Also, the medal blocker 172 is activated during payout.

In FIG. 62 (59), the payout is completed. In this state of FIG. 62 (59), the setting key switch 281 is already in the ON state, and the payout is completed (the bet amount is not set).
This indicates a state in which an open detection signal is being output from the open sensor 294. When this state is reached, processing for confirming the settings is started, and the current setting value, "1", is displayed on the setting value display 293. A setting confirmation display is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Also,
272, 277) will also output a voice message such as “Checking settings.”
The title panel lamp 164 switches to white lighting, and the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R also switch to white lighting. Also, the medal blocker 172 remains activated.

In the example of FIG. 62 described above, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on (FIG. 62 (55)), the setting confirmation process is not started (the effect image display device 157 does not display the setting confirmation display), and when a bet number of 1 or more is set, the settlement operation is performed (FIG. 62 (58)), and the payout process is completed, the setting confirmation process is started (the effect image display device 157
(59) in the example shown in FIG.

Fig. 63 is a table summarizing the states of the related components when a setting check is performed once, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in the pseudo-closed state, and one game is played. In Fig. 63, the stages are labeled (50) to (57), (61), and (62), and time passes in the order of the numbers.

In FIG. 63, the same items as those in FIG. 64 are shown as component items (the same applies up to FIG. 66).

Figure 63 (50) to (57) are the same as Figure 62 (50) to (57), so
We will reuse the explanations from (0) to (57) and omit detailed explanation here, but after the setting is confirmed, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, a medal is inserted, and then an open detection signal is output.

In FIG. 63 (61), the start lever 135 is operated to start the game. That is, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate.
The right side lamp 144R and the right side lamp 144L start to light up in the normal pattern. The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white. The medal blocker 172 is activated.

In Fig. 63 (62), up to the third stop operation is performed. In the state of Fig. 63 (62), the setting key switch 281 is already in the on state, the game is over (the bet amount has not been set), and an open detection signal is being output from the open sensor 294. When this state is reached, the setting confirmation process is started, and the current setting value "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293. A setting confirmation display is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Also,
The speaker (272, 277) will also output a voice message saying "Checking settings." The title panel lamp 164 will turn white, and the top lamp 144 will turn red.
The left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R also switch to white lighting. Also, the medal blocker 172 remains activated.

The example in Figure 63 described above corresponds to an example in which, even when the setting key switch 281 is turned on (Figure (55)), the setting confirmation process is not started (the setting confirmation display is not displayed on the performance image display device 157), game play is started (Figure (61)), and when the game ends, the setting confirmation process is started (the setting confirmation display is displayed on the performance image display device 157) (Figure (62)).

In addition, the examples in FIG. 62 and FIG. 63 are summarized as follows:
When 1 is already on and an open detection signal is being output from the open sensor 294, if the number of bets has not been set, the setting confirmation process is started and a setting confirmation display is displayed on the performance image display device 157.

FIG. 64 is a table summarizing the states of the related components when the setting value is displayed on the setting value display 293 even when the setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state.
The numbers (1) to (3) and (71) to (78) are attached, and the time progresses in the order of the numbers.

Figures 64(1) to (3) are the same as Figures 55(1) to (3), so Figures 55(1) to (3)
) and a detailed explanation will be omitted here, but the setting change process has begun.

In Fig. 64 (71), the power switch 244 is turned off during the setting change process. The state of each component becomes the same as the state in Fig. 64 (1). When the power switch 244 is turned off, the power cut process in step S221 shown in Fig. 40 saves necessary information in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

In FIG. 64 (72), the power switch 244 is turned off and the setting key switch 281 is also turned off, and in the next FIG. 64 (73), the power switch 244 is turned on.
When 44 is turned on, the main control unit initial setting process shown in Fig. 41 is started, and first, the startup initial setting (step S1001) is performed to return the setting to the state immediately before the power was cut off. In other words, even if the setting key switch 281 has been returned to the off state, it is stored that the setting key switch 281 was on immediately before the power was cut off, and the setting value display 293 displays "1", which is the setting value immediately before the power was cut off. Also, the information backed up at the time of the power cut is returned to the sub-control unit side (400, 500), the performance image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display, and the speaker (2
A voice message such as "Checking settings" is output from the buttons (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) and the medal blocker 172 is not in operation.

In addition, in a gaming machine that does not store a backup in the event of a power outage, when the main control unit 300's startup initial setting (step S1001) determines that the state immediately before the power outage was that the setting was being changed, the main control unit 300 sends a setting change command to the first sub-control unit 400, and the sub-control unit (400, 500) displays a setting confirmation display and outputs a voice such as "Setting is being confirmed" based on this setting change command.

As shown in the main control unit main processing of FIG. 39, the main control unit initial setting processing (setting change processing (step S1013)) of FIG. 41 is executed only when the power is turned on. In this example, since the setting key switch 281 was returned to the OFF state before the power was turned on, step S1005
The result of the determination is No, and the setting change process (step S1013) cannot be executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 64 (74), the power switch 244 is turned off once, and then the setting key switch 281 is turned on (FIG. 64 (75)), and the power switch 244 is turned on again (FIG. 64 (76)). By doing so, the setting change process (step S1
64 (76), the setting value display 293 displays the setting value "1", and the monitor LED starts to light up. Also, the performance image display device 157 displays a setting change indication, and the speaker (272, 277) announces "Setting change in progress."
In addition, various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R
) all start to light up. Also, the medal blocker 172 is inactive.

In FIG. 64 (77), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is confirmed (step S1115 shown in FIG. 42), and the number 0, which indicates that the set value is confirmed, is displayed on the set value display 293. Even though the set value is confirmed, the setting key switch 281 remains on, so the monitor LED continues to light up. Note that the speakers (272, 277) output a voice message such as "Settings are being changed," but it would also be acceptable to output a voice message such as "Settings have been changed." Note that the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 64 (78), the setting key switch 281 is turned off. As a result, the setting change process is terminated (step S1119 shown in FIG. 42), and the setting value display 293 is hidden. The monitor LED is also turned off. The sound from the speakers (272, 277) is switched to a sound "The door is open" that warns that the front door 102 is open. Note that instead of "The door is open", a sound output may be "The setting change is completed" or "The setting change is finished". Furthermore, the performance image display device 157 starts displaying a demo animation, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start to light up in a demo pattern. The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white because the setting value was a setting value other than setting b. Note that the medal blocker 172 remains inoperative.

FIG. 65 is a table showing the states of the related components when the setting confirmation is performed once, the front door 102 is in the pseudo-closed state, a medal is inserted, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the inserted medal is settled. In FIG. 65, (50)
The numbers (54), (81), (82), (57) to (59) are given, and time progresses in the order of the numbers.

Figure 65 (50) to (54) are the same as Figure 62 (50) to (54), so
Although detailed description will be omitted here by utilizing the explanation from (0) to (54), after the setting check is performed once, the front door 102 is pseudo-closed.

In FIG. 65 (81), while the front door 102 is in the pseudo-closed state, medals are inserted by servicing the medals or by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132. Since the setting confirmation process is not in progress, medals can be inserted, and the medal insertion sound is output from the speakers (272, 277). The performance image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to displaying the normal background. Also, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144
R starts to light up in the normal pattern, and the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

After the medal is inserted, in FIG. 65 (82), the setting key switch 281 is turned on again. However, the turning on of the setting key switch 281 here is performed in response to the opening sensor 294.
When the switch is turned on while a closure detection signal is being output from the switch 272, the setting confirmation process is not started, the setting value display 293 remains hidden, the performance image display device 157 continues to display the normal background, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277).
The medal blocker 172 remains inactive. However, since the setting key switch 281 has been turned on, the monitor LED has started to light up.

Figure 65 (57) to (59) are the same as Figure 62 (57) to (59), so
Using the explanations from (7) to (59), and not going into detail here, the pseudo-closing of the front door 102 ends, and an open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294. Then, the settlement operation is performed, the dispensing is completed, and the setting confirmation process is started.

In the example of FIG. 65 described above, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on (FIG. 65 (82)), if a bet number of 1 or more is set, the setting confirmation process is not started (the effect image display device 157 does not display a setting confirmation display), but when a settlement operation is performed with a bet number of 1 or more set (FIG. 65 (58)), the setting confirmation process is started when the payout process is completed (the effect image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display) (FIG. 65 (59)).
)) corresponds to the example.

FIG. 66 is a table showing the states of the related components when a setting check is performed once, a coin is inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and a game is played. In FIG. 66, each stage is indicated by (50) to (54), (8
The numbers (1), (82), (57), (61), and (62) are assigned, and time progresses in the order of the numbers.

Figure 66 (50) to (54) are the same as Figure 62 (50) to (54), so
Although detailed description will be omitted here by utilizing the explanation from (0) to (54), after the setting check is performed once, the front door 102 is pseudo-closed.

Since Fig. 66 (81) and Fig. 66 (82) are the same as Fig. 65 (81) and Fig. 65 (82), the explanation of Fig. 65 (81) and Fig. 65 (82) will be used and detailed explanation will be omitted here. However, after a medal is inserted, the setting key switch 281 is turned on.
With the above bet numbers set, the setting key switch 281 is turned on.

FIG. 66 (57) is the same as FIG. 62 (57), so the explanation of FIG. 62 (57) will be used and detailed explanation will be omitted here, but an open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294.

Figures 66 (61) and (62) are the same as Figures 63 (61) and (62), so the explanations of Figures 63 (61) and (62) will be reused and detailed explanations will be omitted here, but when the start lever 135 is operated to start the game, and the third stop operation is performed and the game ends, the setting confirmation process is started.

The example in FIG. 66 described above corresponds to an example in which, when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with a bet number of 1 or more set, the game can be continued with the set bet number. In other words, it corresponds to an example in which the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, and the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is also accepted. Setting the bet number takes priority,
Play continues with that bet amount, and after the game ends, processing in response to turning on the setting key switch 281 (processing for confirming the setting) is started.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 66, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on (FIG. 66 (82)), if the bet number is set to 1 or more, the setting confirmation process is not started (
The setting confirmation display device 157 does not display a setting confirmation display), and play begins with the set bet amount (FIG. 61). When the third stop operation is performed, the setting confirmation process begins and the setting confirmation display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display (FIG. 62). This corresponds to the example in which the setting confirmation display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display (FIG. 62).

65 and 66, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on when one or more bets are set, the setting confirmation process is not started and the setting confirmation display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157, and when a state different from a state when one or more bets are set (a state when one or more bets are not set, more specifically, a state when the payout process is completed or the game is finished) is reached, the setting confirmation process is started and the setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Also, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on when one or more bets are set, the setting value is not displayed on the setting value display device 293, and when a state different from a state when one or more bets are set (a state when one or more bets are not set, more specifically, a state when the payout process is completed or the game is finished) is reached, the setting value display device 293 displays the setting value.

Moreover, whether the timing in Figure 65 (57) or the timing in Figure 66 (57) is the timing after the setting key switch 281 is turned on when a bet of 1 or more is set (Figures 65 (82), 66 (82)). In Figures 65 (57) and 66 (57), an operation is performed that causes the opening sensor 294 to detect that the front door 102 is open, such as releasing the hand that has been pressing down the opening/closing piece, while a bet of 1 or more is set, but the setting confirmation process is not started and the performance image display device 157 does not display a setting confirmation display.

The matters described above using Figures 45 to 66 can also be applied to a pachinko machine 100P shown in Figure 67. Figure 67 is a rear view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

At the upper back of the pachinko machine 100P shown in Figure 67, there is provided a ball tank 150P having an opening opening upward for temporarily storing game balls, and a tank rail 154P located below this ball tank 150P for guiding balls that fall through a communicating hole formed in the bottom of the ball tank 150P to a payout device 152P located on the right side of the back.

The dispensing device 152P is made of a cylindrical member, and is equipped with a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) inside. The dispensing device 152P is detachable, and when attached to a predetermined position, it is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154P.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a discharge motor, and is connected to the tank rail 154.
The game balls that have passed through the payout device 152P and flowed down into the payout device 152P are temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle, so that the temporarily retained game balls are discharged to the payout device 152P.
The dispenser 152P is configured to deliver the coins one by one downward.
It is a type of ball feeding device that applies driving force to a game ball to transport it.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of a game ball sent out by the sprocket, and outputs either a high or low signal when a game ball passes, and outputs either a high or low signal when a game ball does not pass to a payout control unit (not shown). The game ball that passes this payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail and reach an upper tray arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P, and the pachinko machine 100P uses this configuration to give (pay out) an amount of game value (game balls) according to the given condition to the player based on the given condition being met.

On the left side of the figure of the payout device 152P, there is a main board case 158P that houses a main board 156P constituting a main control unit that performs control processing for the overall game, a first sub-board case 162P that houses a first sub-board 160P constituting a first sub-control unit that performs control processing related to the presentation based on processing information generated by the main control unit, and a second sub-board case 166P that houses a second sub-board 164P constituting a second sub-control unit that performs control processing related to the presentation based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit.
a payout control unit which performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and which houses a payout board 170P having an error reset switch 168P which resets errors when operated by a gaming store clerk; a launch board case 176P which houses a launch board 174P which constitutes a launch control unit which performs control processing related to the launch of game balls; a power switch 178P which constitutes a power supply control unit which supplies power to various electric gaming machines, and which turns the power on and off when operated by a gaming store clerk; and a RAM clear signal which is operated when the power is turned on to send a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300.
The card unit is also provided with a power supply board case 184P that houses a power supply board 182P equipped with a RAM clear (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) switch 180P that outputs to the power supply board 182P, and a CR interface unit 186P that transmits and receives signals between the dispensing control unit and the card unit.

In this embodiment, a setting change key 192P, a setting change button 194P, and a role ratio/setting display 196P are provided on the main board 156P.
In the case of the 1990P, the main body 104 is opened, the setting change key 192P is turned on, and then the power switch 178P is turned on, which starts the setting change process, which allows the setting to be changed from among a number of settings with different odds of winning. In the setting change process, the current setting is displayed on the bonus ratio/setting display 196P, and the store clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194P while checking this.
By opening the power switch 178P, turning on the power switch 178P, and then turning on the setting change key 192P, the setting confirmation process is started and the current setting value is displayed on the role ratio/setting display 196P. Note that the setting change process may be started when the setting change key 192P is operated on the condition that the RAM clear (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) switch 180P is pressed when the power is turned on, or the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192P is operated when the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 180P is not pressed when the power is turned on.

In the pachinko machine 100P shown in Fig. 67, settings 1, 2, 4-6, and b are prepared, which are the same as the settings of the slot machine 100 shown in Fig. 33, and are displayed on the bonus ratio/setting display 196P in the same display order as that explained using Fig. 37(a). Also, setting b is the most disadvantageous setting value to the player, and the larger the number, the more advantageous the setting value is to the player.

The role ratio/setting display 196P is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156P and disposed inside the main board case 158P, and is attached in a manner that is visible to the store clerk. The role ratio/setting display 196P may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that it is visible to the player.

In the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 67, the power switch 178P corresponds to the power switch 244, the main body that can be opened and closed relative to the outer frame corresponds to the front door 102, a main body opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body corresponds to the opening sensor 294, and the setting change key 192 corresponds to the setting change key 294.
P corresponds to the setting key switch 281, and the role ratio setting display 196P corresponds to the setting value display 2
93. Also, the main board 156P of the pachinko machine 100P shown in Fig. 67 and the external central terminal board (not shown) are provided with a monitor LED that lights up when the setting change key 192P is turned on. Also, a liquid crystal display device and a speaker used for various effects are provided, and the liquid crystal display device corresponds to the effect image display device 157, and the speaker corresponds to the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277. Furthermore, a lamp for the game board is provided on the game board, and a lamp for the game table frame is provided on the game table frame, and these lamps correspond to various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R).

According to the above description,
"A game state control means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control means 300) capable of executing control to transition to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state (e.g., a state in which a two-coin bet bonus is not internally won or a state in which setting b is set) and a second game state (e.g., a state in which a two-coin bet bonus is internally won or a state in which setting 1 is set);
A notification means (e.g., a speaker (272, 277) or a title panel lamp 164) capable of executing a first notification (e.g., a first voice saying "Please check" or turning off the title panel lamp 164)
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means may execute the first notification when a certain operation (for example, an operation of closing the front door 102 or an operation of turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed in the first game state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to a player than the second gaming state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the gaming machine is the first gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, making him/her aware of this.

The first gaming state may be a non-internal winning state in which a bonus is not won by betting a first number of coins, and the second gaming state may be an internal winning state in which a bonus is won by betting the first number of coins (the same applies below). Alternatively, the first gaming state may be an internal winning state in which a bonus is won by betting a first number of coins, and the second gaming state may be an internal winning state in which a bonus is won by betting a second number of coins that is greater than the first number (the same applies below).

The second gaming state is a normal gaming state or an initial setting gaming state, and the first gaming state is a state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state (for example, a penalty bonus state,
The first gaming state may be, for example, a non-advantageous zone state, a state in which a bonus has not been won, a state in which points or items have not been acquired, etc. (the same applies below).

The device is provided with a door body, and the certain operation may be an operation that can be performed when the door body is in an open state, or may be an operation to close the door body (the same applies below).

The first notification may be a notification that suggests that the player is in the first gaming state or a notification that makes the player aware that the player is in the first gaming state [for example, a notification such as "You are in the first gaming state"], or it may be a warning notification that does not specify a target for warning [for example, a notification such as "Please check"] (the same applies below).

In addition, the notification means may include a first notification means [e.g., a speaker (272, 277)], a second notification means [e.g., a title panel lamp 164], and a third notification means [e.g., a performance image display device 157] (the same applies below).

In addition, the gaming state when setting b is set may be the first gaming state, in which case RT may be set to the gaming mode, and the gaming mode may change during the gaming state (the same applies below).

Furthermore, instead of the game state control means, a mode may be provided with "a game control means for controlling a game based on the setting of a first set value and a game based on the setting of a second set value", and a game executed based on the setting of the first set value (
The first game state may be a game that is more disadvantageous to the player than a game (second game) that is executed based on the setting of the second set value (the same applies below). Also, the first game state may be read as a state in which the first set value is set, and the second game state may be read as a state in which the second set value is set (the same applies below).

Also, instead of the game state control means, there may be an aspect equipped with "a game control means for controlling a game in an internal winning state in which a certain combination is internally won as a result of a lottery in which a predetermined number of coins is bet and a game in a non-internal winning state which is not the internal winning state," and the non-internal winning state may be a state that is more disadvantageous to a player than the internal winning state (the same applies below). Also, the first game state can be read as the non-internal winning state, and the second game state can be read as the internal winning state (the same applies below).

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A game state control means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control means 300) capable of executing control to transition to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus non-internal winning state) and a second game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus internal winning state)
and,
A notification means (e.g., a speaker (272, 277)) capable of executing a first notification (e.g., a first voice such as "Please check");
A reel [e.g., reels 110-112],
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means may execute the first notification when a certain operation (e.g., an operation of closing the front door 102) is performed in the first gaming state,
the first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to a player than the second gaming state;
The notification means may execute the first notification during rotation of the reel (for example, FIG. 56 (23)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the gaming machine is the first gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. Also, the attention of the gaming parlor staff can be alerted even while the staff is performing maintenance work to check whether the reels are spinning.

The reel is capable of starting to spin before the certain operation is performed,
The notification means may be means for executing the first notification when the certain operation is performed while the reel is spinning.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A game state control means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control means 300) capable of executing control to transition to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus non-internal winning state) and a second game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus internal winning state)
and,
A notification means (e.g., a speaker (272, 277)) capable of executing a first notification (e.g., a first voice such as "Please check");
A reel [e.g., reels 110-112],
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means may execute the first notification when a certain operation (e.g., an operation of closing the front door 102) is performed in the first gaming state,
the first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to a player than the second gaming state;
The reel is capable of starting to spin before the certain operation is performed.
For example, Fig. 56 (22), Fig. 57 (22)],
The notification means may execute the first notification when the certain operation is performed while the reel is rotating (for example, FIG. 56 (23)).
The notification means is a means for not executing the first notification when a power interruption occurs during rotation of the reel and before the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 57 (25) to (26)], even if the certain operation is performed during the remaining rotation of the reel [for example, FIG. 57 (27)].
) ],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the gaming machine is the first gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. Also, the attention of the gaming parlor staff can be alerted even while the staff is performing maintenance work to check whether the reels are spinning. On the other hand, after the power outage and restoration, the first notification can be omitted and the staff can concentrate on the confirmation work after the power restoration.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A game state control means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control means 300) capable of executing control to transition to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus non-internal winning state) and a second game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus internal winning state)
and,
A notification means (e.g., a speaker (272, 277)) capable of executing a first notification (e.g., a first voice such as "Please check");
A dispensing means (e.g., a hopper unit 180);
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means may execute the first notification when a certain operation (e.g., an operation of closing the front door 102) is performed in the first gaming state,
the first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to a player than the second gaming state;
The notification means may execute the first notification during the payout process in the payout means [for example, FIG. 58 (32)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the gaming machine is the first gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. Also, the attention of the gaming facility staff can be alerted even while the staff is performing maintenance to check whether the payout process is being performed normally.

The payout means may be a means capable of starting the payout process before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means may be a means that may execute the first notification when the certain operation is performed during the payout process in the payout means.

The payout process may be a process that is started by a settlement operation after inserting a medal,
It may be a process that is performed based on the result of a reel stopping operation following a start operation after inserting a medal.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A game state control means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control means 300) capable of executing control to transition to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus non-internal winning state) and a second game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus internal winning state)
and,
A notification means (e.g., a speaker (272, 277)) capable of executing a first notification (e.g., a first voice such as "Please check");
A dispensing means (e.g., a hopper unit 180);
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means may execute the first notification when a certain operation (e.g., an operation of closing the front door 102) is performed in the first gaming state,
the first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to a player than the second gaming state;
The payout means is a means capable of starting a payout process before the certain operation is performed (for example, FIG. 58 (31) or FIG. 59 (31)),
The notification means may execute the first notification during the payout process (for example, FIG. 58 (32)).
The notification means is a means for not executing the first notification when a power outage occurs during the payout process before the certain operation is performed [e.g., FIG. 59 (35) to (36)], even if the certain operation is performed during the remaining period of the payout process [e.g., FIG. 59 (37)].
) ],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
It is also possible to alert the person who performed the certain operation that the state of the gaming machine is the first gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, and to make the person aware of this. Also, it is possible to alert the store staff while the store staff is performing maintenance work to check whether the payout process is normal. On the other hand, after the power outage and restoration, the first notification is not executed, and the staff can concentrate on the confirmation work after the power restoration.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A game state control means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control means 300) capable of executing control to transition to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus non-internal winning state) and a second game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus internal winning state)
and,
A notification means (e.g., a speaker (272, 277)) capable of executing a first notification (e.g., a first voice such as "Please check");
A display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157),
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means may execute the first notification when a certain operation (e.g., an operation of closing the front door 102) is performed in the first gaming state,
the first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to a player than the second gaming state;
The notification means may execute the first notification while the display means is displaying a first display (e.g., a text display of "Please check").
］,
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the gaming machine is the first gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. Also, the attention of the gaming facility staff can be alerted even while the staff is performing maintenance work to check whether the display of the display means is normal.

The display means may be means capable of starting to display the first display before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means may be means that may execute the first notification when the certain operation is performed while the first display is being displayed.

Also,
"The gaming state control means is a means for executing control to transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state when a certain condition (for example, a condition in which a bonus role is won after a predetermined number of coins is bet and the bonus role is not won) is satisfied.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The first notification serves as a warning to perform the initial settings.

Also,
"The certain condition is a condition including the execution of one or more games.
For example, one or more plays must be performed to win a bonus role.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

A staff member of the gaming establishment executes the game before the establishment opens, allowing the player to play from the second gaming state.

The certain condition is that one or more games are executed with a predetermined number of coins bet,
It is a condition including winning a certain role. In other words, the certain condition may be a condition that may be established by playing a game with a predetermined number of coins bet and winning a certain role, or more specifically, a condition that may be established by playing a game with a predetermined number of coins bet and winning a certain role but not winning the certain role. The same applies hereinafter.

Also,
"The notification means is a means for not executing the first notification when the certain operation is performed a predetermined number of times [e.g., the second time] [e.g., FIG. 55 (8)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

In many cases, when the certain operation is performed after the predetermined number of times (for example, the second time), the store clerk has already noticed it, and redundant notification can be avoided.

Also,
"The notification means is a means for executing a second notification [e.g., a second voice saying "Completed"] when the game state is changed from the first game state to the second game state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The second notification enables the player to confirm that the unfavorable gaming state has been resolved.

The second notification may be a notification suggesting that the game has been switched to the second game state or a notification suggesting that the game is in the second game state [for example, a notification such as "You are in the second game state"], or a notification of a warning that does not specify a target to be warned [for example, a notification such as "Completed",
It is also acceptable to send a notification such as, "The service has been restored" (the same applies below).

Also,
"Multiple types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player [for example, setting 1, 2, 4-6, b]
A setting change means for changing the setting value set up until now to a new setting value selected from the setting change means [for example, C of the main control unit 300 which executes the setting change process shown in FIG.
PU 304],
The certain operation is an operation that may be performed after the setting change process (for example, a process including the operation of the power switch 244 or the setting key switch 281, which cannot be operated unless the front door 102 is opened) is completed,
The notification means may execute the first notification when the certain operation is performed in the first gaming state after the setting change process is started (for example, FIG. 55 (6)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Even though the setting change process has commenced and adjustment of the player's degree of advantage has begun, the player remains at a disadvantage in the first gaming state, so the notification means executes the first notification, making the person making the setting change aware that the player is in the first gaming state.

The setting change process may be a process that cannot be started unless the door is in an open state (the same applies below).

Also,
The notification means is a means capable of executing a third notification during the period from when the setting change process is started [e.g., FIG. 55 (3)] until the certain operation is performed [e.g., FIG.
5)],
The third notification is a notification that is executed when the setting change process is completed [e.g.,
The door is open" or "The settings have been changed" are the voice notifications.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The notification means may be means for executing the first notification when the certain operation is performed after executing the second notification (the same applies below).

The third notification may be a notification that the setting change processing has been completed or a notification suggesting that the setting change processing has been completed (for example, a notification such as "The setting change has been completed"), or it may be a notification about the status of the gaming machine (for example, a notification such as "The door is open") (the same applies below).

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"Multiple types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player [for example, setting 1, 2, 4-6, b]
A setting confirmation means for performing a setting confirmation process to confirm one of the set values set from the
CPU 304 of main control unit 300];
An operating means (e.g., a setting key switch 281) that is operated when the setting is confirmed;
A gaming machine equipped with
the operation means is a means which may be operated in a first state,
The first state is a state in which one or more bets have been set (for example, the state of FIG. 66 (81) in which medals have been inserted by retrieving medals or operating the bet buttons 130 to 132),
When the operation means is operated in the first state [for example, FIG. 66 (82)]
], the game can be continued with the bet amount set in the first state [for example, the bet amount set in FIG. 66 (81)] [for example, FIG. 66 (61) to FIG. 66 (62)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Since the game is not interrupted by the operation of the operating means, a person who has operated the operating means fraudulently can be made to let his/her guard down, and the fraudster may be exposed.

It may be possible for the game to be continued when the operating means is operated in the first state, and after the game ends, the next game will not be started unless the setting confirmation process is completed.

If the operation means is operated when no coins have been inserted, the subsequent betting operation may not be accepted. In other words, if the operation means is operated and the setting confirmation process is performed when no betting operation has been performed, it may be possible that a game cannot be started.

The case where the operation means is operated means the case where the setting confirmation process is not executed. The setting change means is provided for changing the setting value that has been set so far to a new setting value selected from a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage to the player, and the operation means may be a means that is operated when the setting is changed (the same applies below).
.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"Multiple types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player [for example, setting 1, 2, 4-6, b]
A setting confirmation means for performing a setting confirmation process to confirm one of the set values set from the
CPU 304 of main control unit 300];
An operating means (e.g., a setting key switch 281) that is operated when the setting is confirmed;
A display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157),
A gaming machine equipped with
the operation means is a means which may be operated in a first state,
The first state is a state in which one or more bets have been set (for example, the state of FIG. 66 (81) in which medals have been inserted by retrieving medals or operating the bet buttons 130 to 132),
When the operation means is operated in the first state [for example, FIG. 66 (82)]
], the game can be continued with the bet amount set in the first state [for example, the bet amount set in FIG. 66 (81)] [for example, FIG. 66 (61) to FIG. 66 (62)],
The display means may display a first display (e.g., a display of "setting confirmation in progress" [e.g., FIG. 66 (52)]) when the operation means is operated.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Since the operation of the operating means does not interrupt the game, it is possible to lull a person who has operated the operating means illegally into a false start, and it may be possible to expose the person. In other words, after the operation of the operating means, a staff member of the game establishment can check the first display by the display means, and the first display may enable the staff member to discover the fraudulent act and expose the person.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process may be started when the operation means (e.g., the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is on. The setting confirmation refers to confirmation of the currently set setting value, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting value, and the display means displays the first display (e.g., a setting confirmation display).

A door body (e.g., a front door 102) and a sensor (e.g.,
and an open sensor 294, and the display means may be a means for displaying the first display when the operating means is operated while the sensor detects that the door body is open [e.g., FIG. 62 (52)], or a means for not displaying the first display when the operating means is operated while the sensor is not detecting the door body [e.g., FIG. 62 (55)].

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"Multiple types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player [for example, setting 1, 2, 4-6, b]
A setting confirmation means for performing a setting confirmation process to confirm one of the set values set from the
CPU 304 of main control unit 300];
An operation means (e.g., a setting key switch 281) that is operated when the setting is confirmed, and a display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157),
A gaming machine equipped with
the operation means is a means which may be operated in a first state,
The first state is a state in which one or more bets have been set (for example, the state of FIG. 66 (81) in which medals have been inserted by retrieving medals or operating the bet buttons 130 to 132),
When the operation means is operated in the first state [for example, FIG. 66 (82)]
], the game can be continued with the bet amount set in the first state [for example, the bet amount set in FIG. 66 (81)] [for example, FIG. 66 (61) to FIG. 66 (62)],
The display means may display a first display (e.g., a display of "setting confirmation in progress" [e.g., FIG. 66 (52)] when the operation means is operated,
The display means does not display the first display even when the operation means is operated.
For example, FIG. 65 (82)], and a settlement operation is performed in the first state [for example, FIG. 65 (58)].
) ] When the payout process is completed, the first display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 65 (59)
］,
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Since the operation of the operating means does not interrupt the game, it is possible to lull a cheater who has operated the operating means fraudulently into a false start, which may enable the cheater to be exposed. In other words, after the operation of the operating means, a staff member at the gaming establishment can check the first display by the display means, and may be able to discover the fraudulent act by the first display, enabling the cheater to be exposed. There are also cases where the first display is not displayed even when the operating means is operated, and even in this case, the first display is displayed when the player leaves the table after completing the settlement process,
It may be possible to discover fraudulent activity and expose the perpetrator.

The display means is a means for displaying a first display [e.g., a display indicating that settings are being confirmed] when the operation means is operated in a state where the sensor detects that the door is open [e.g., the front door 102] and a sensor for detecting that the door is open [e.g., an open sensor 294], and for not displaying the first display [e.g., a display indicating that settings are being confirmed] when the operation means is operated in a state where the sensor is not detecting that the door is open [e.g., the ...
(55)] means.

Also,
"A medal insertion slot [e.g., medal insertion slot 141],
The first passage and
a second passageway (e.g., reservoir passageway 173);
A medal blocker (e.g., medal blocker 172) that distributes medals inserted from the medal insertion port to either the first passage or the second passage;
Equipped with
The first passage is a medal return passage [e.g., return passage 266],
The medal blocker may distribute medals inserted from the medal insertion port to the first passage when the operating means is operated.
52)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

After the operation of the operating means, the store staff can check the state of the medals passing through. In addition, since the game cannot be started after the operation of the operating means, the store staff can calmly change the setting without starting the game by mistake. The medal return passage is a passage that leads to the medal discharge port [for example, the medal payout port 155].

The second passage is a medal storage passage (e.g., storage passage 173), and medals that pass through the medal storage passage are stored in a bucket (storage tank) (e.g., bucket 181).

Also,
"Equipped with a door body [e.g., a front door 102],
The operating means is a means that can be operated when the door body is in an open state (for example, the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG. 35(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The player may be prohibited from operating the operating means.

Also,
"The operating means is a means that may be operated even in the second state [for example, the pseudo-closed state of the front door 102 shown in FIG. 62 (54) (a state in which the opening and closing piece is pushed down by hand to open the front door 102)],
The medal blocker distributes medals inserted from the medal insertion port to the second passage when the operating means is operated in the second state [for example, FIG. 62 (55)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Maintenance of the gaming machine in the second state is not impeded.

The door may be provided with a sensor [e.g., an open sensor 294] that detects that the door is open, and the operating means is a means that becomes operable when the door is opened, and the second state may be a state in which the sensor is not detecting.

In addition, the medal blocker may be configured to distribute medals inserted through the medal insertion port to the second passage when the operating means is operated in the first state [for example, Figure 62 (55)].

Also,
"A setting value display means [e.g., a setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value is provided,
The set value display means may not display the set value even if the operation means is operated (for example, FIG. 62 (55)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Maintenance of the gaming machine in the second state is not impeded.

The set value display means may be means for not displaying the set value in the second state even if the operating means is operated.

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a light-emitting means [for example, a monitor LED provided on the main control board and the external central terminal board 248] that can emit light when the operating means is operated."
He also explained:

The light emitting means emits light to confirm that the operation of the operating means is normal. In particular, when the setting value display means does not display the setting value even when the operating means is operated, it is useful for the light emitting means to emit light.

Also,
"When the operation means is operated, a signal is sent to the outside [e.g., a hall computer].
For example, a transmission means capable of transmitting a setting key switch-on signal] [for example, an external central terminal board 2
48].
He also explained:

It is possible to externally confirm that the operation of the operating means is being performed normally. In particular, in a case where the setting value display means does not display the setting value even when the operating means is operated, it is useful to be able to confirm this from outside.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A gaming machine equipped with a display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157) capable of displaying a first display (e.g., a "setting confirmation display"),
The display means is a first state [for example, medal care or bet button 130 to 13
65 (81) or 66 (81) in which a medal is inserted, such as the operation of operation 2, is performed. In this state, when a first operation is performed (for example, an operation to turn on the setting key switch 281) (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the first display is not displayed (for example, FIG. 65 (82) or FIG. 66 (82)),
When a state different from the first state occurs after the first case (for example, the payout is completed by the settlement operation or the game ends with the bet amount set in the first state), the first display is displayed by the display means (for example, FIG. 65 (59) or FIG. 66 (62)).
,
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

During maintenance work by a staff member of the game arcade, the first operation prevents the first display from being displayed, so that the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. When maintenance is to be performed to check whether the first display is displayed on the display means, the state can be changed to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be carried out in stages.

The first operation is an operation of an operating means operated when the setting is confirmed. The first state is a state in which one or more bets are set, and a state different from the first state is a state in which a game with the set bets in the first state has ended, or a state in which a settlement operation has been performed in the first state and a payout process has been completed.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process may be started when the operation means (e.g., the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is on. The setting confirmation refers to confirmation of the currently set setting value, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting value, and the display means displays the first display (e.g., a setting confirmation display).

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A gaming machine equipped with a display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157) capable of displaying a first display (e.g., a "setting confirmation display"),
The display means is a first state [for example, medal care or bet button 130 to 13
65 (82) when a first operation [for example, an operation to turn on the setting key switch 281] is performed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") in the state of FIG. 66 (81) in which a medal is inserted, such as the operation of FIG. 65 (82)
Or Fig. 66 (82)],
When a state different from the first state occurs after the first case (for example, the payout is completed by the settlement operation or the game ends with the bet amount set in the first state), the first display is displayed by the display means (for example, FIG. 65 (59) or FIG. 66 (62)).
The display means is a means for not displaying the first display even when a second operation [for example, an operation for causing the opening sensor 294 to detect the opening/closing piece] is performed while the first state is in the first case after the first case [for example, FIG. 65 (57) or FIG. 66 (57)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

During maintenance work by a staff member of the gaming establishment, the first operation prevents the first display from being displayed, so that the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. Also, if a second operation is performed thereafter while the first state is still in effect, the first display is not displayed, so that the maintenance work can be continued with priority. When it is desired to perform maintenance to check whether the first display is displayed on the display means, the state can be changed to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be carried out in stages.

The first operation is an operation of an operating means operated when the setting is confirmed. The first state is a state in which one or more bets are set, and a state different from the first state is a state in which a game with the set bets in the first state has ended, or a state in which a settlement operation has been performed in the first state and a payout process has been completed.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process may be started when the operation means (e.g., the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is on. The setting confirmation refers to confirmation of the currently set setting value, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting value, and the display means displays the first display (e.g., a setting confirmation display).

A door body (e.g., a front door 102) and a sensor (e.g.,
and an opening sensor 294, and the second operation may be an operation for causing the sensor to detect that the door body is open.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157) capable of displaying a first display (e.g., a "setting confirmation display");
A setting value display means (e.g., a setting value display 293) capable of displaying a setting value;
The display means is a means for not displaying the first display when a first operation (e.g., an operation for turning on the setting key switch 281) is performed in a first state (e.g., the state of FIG. 66 (81) in which a medal is inserted such as by taking care of a medal or by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132) (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") [e.g., FIG. 65 (82) or FIG. 66 (82)],
When a state different from the first state (for example, the payout is completed by the settlement operation or the game of the bet amount set in the first state is ended) occurs after the first case (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the first display is displayed by the display means (for example, the state shown in FIG. 65 (
59) or Fig. 66 (62)],
The setting value display means is a means capable of displaying the setting value in the second case.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

During maintenance work by a staff member of the gaming establishment, the first operation prevents the first display from being displayed, so that the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. Also, if a second operation is performed thereafter while the first state is still in effect, the first display is not displayed, so that the maintenance work can be continued with priority. When it is desired to perform maintenance to check whether the first display is displayed on the display means, the state can be changed to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be carried out in stages.

The set value may be selected from a plurality of set values each having a different degree of advantage to the player.

The first operation is an operation of an operating means operated when the setting is confirmed. The first state is a state in which one or more bets are set, and a state different from the first state is a state in which a game with the set bets in the first state has ended, or a state in which a settlement operation has been performed in the first state and a payout process has been completed.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process may be started when the operation means (e.g., the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is on. The setting confirmation refers to confirmation of the currently set setting value, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting value, and the display means displays the first display (e.g., a setting confirmation display).

In addition,
"The display means is a means for not displaying the setting value in the first case.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Since the set value is not displayed, the maintenance work that was being carried out before the first operation was performed can be continued with even higher priority.

Also,
"Equipped with a door body [e.g., a front door 102],
The first operation is an operation that can be performed when the door body is in an open state [e.g., FIG. 65 (52), FIG. 65 (82), FIG. 66 (52), FIG. 66 (82)].
The gaming machine characterized by the above is also explained.

The player may be prohibited from operating the operating means.

Also,
"The first state is a state in which one or more bets are set.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The first state can be easily set during maintenance work by game store staff.

Also,
"A setting value display means (e.g., a setting value display 293) capable of displaying a setting value is provided,
The setting value display means is a means for not displaying the setting value even when the first operation is performed (for example, FIG. 62 (55)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

During maintenance work by a gaming facility staff member, the first operation prevents the setting value from being displayed, so that the maintenance work that was being carried out before the first operation was performed can be continued with priority.

The set value is a value related to the degree of advantage given to the player, and for example, depending on the set value, the probability of winning a special role or a jackpot, the payout rate of gaming media, or the probability of winning various lotteries may differ (the same applies below).

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a light-emitting means [for example, a monitor LED provided on the main control board and the external central terminal board 248] that can emit light when the first operation is performed."
He also explained:

The light emitting means emits light to confirm that the first operation is being performed normally. In particular, when the display means does not display the first display in the first case, it is useful for the light emitting means to emit light.

Also,
"When the first operation is performed, a transmitting means [e.g., an external central terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [e.g., a setting key switch on signal] to an external device [e.g., a hall computer]
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a
He also explained:

It is possible to externally confirm that the first operation is being performed normally. In particular, when the display means does not display the first display in the first case, it is useful to be able to confirm this from outside.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"An operating means (e.g., a setting key switch 281) that can be switched between an on state and an off state by operation;
A game machine equipped with a setting value display means (e.g., a setting value display 293) capable of displaying a setting value,
The set value display means is a means for displaying a set value when an ON operation is performed [for example, FIG. 65 (52) or FIG. 66 (52)],
The on operation refers to an operation of switching the operating means from the off state to the on state,
The set value display means is a means that may not display the set value even when the ON operation is performed [for example, FIG. 65 (82) or FIG. 66 (82)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

That is, the set value display means is a means which, when turned on, may or may not display the set value.

Even if an unauthorized person performs the on operation during business hours, the unauthorized person cannot check the setting value.

The device may comprise a door body and a sensor which detects when the door body is open, and the setting value display means is a means which displays the setting value when the on operation is performed while the sensor detects that the door body is open, and is a means which does not display the setting value when the operating means is operated while the sensor is not detecting.

Also,
"Equipped with a door body [e.g., a front door 102],
The on operation is an operation that can be performed when the door body is in an open state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The player may be prohibited from operating the operating means.

Also,
"The set value display means is a means for displaying the set value when the operation means is in the off state [e.g., FIG. 64 (73)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The set value can be checked even when the operating means is in the off state, which may improve the workability of maintenance work by staff at the gaming facility.

When the operation means is turned off in the ON state and then the operation means is switched to the OFF state and then power is restored, the display means displays the set value even when the operation means is in the OFF state.

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a light-emitting means that can emit light when the on operation is performed [for example, a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external central terminal board 248]."
He also explained:

The light emitting means can emit light to confirm that the ON operation has been performed normally. In particular, when the display means does not display the setting value even when the ON operation has been performed, it is useful for the light emitting means to emit light.

Also,
"A transmitting means [e.g., an external central terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [e.g., a setting key switch on signal] to an external device [e.g., a hall computer] when the on operation is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with the following.
He also explained:

It is possible to externally confirm that the ON operation has been performed normally. In particular, in a case where the display means does not display the setting value even when the ON operation has been performed, it is useful to be able to confirm this from outside.

The actions and effects described in the above-described embodiments are merely a list of the most preferable actions and effects, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described here. Furthermore, even if the constituent elements are included only in the descriptions of the above-described embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc., the constituent elements may be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. In other words, as long as there is no factor preventing the application, even if the constituent elements included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. are applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc., it will still be a unified technical idea.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as a slot machine 100, or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to Figures 68 to 167. Note that the reference numerals shown in Figures 68 to 167 will be used in principle only in the description using Figures 68 to 167, and even if the same reference numerals are shown in other drawings, they will be used in the same manner as in Figures 68 to 167.
In the explanation using FIG. 167, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 68 to 167 take precedence.

In the slot machine described below, information equivalent to the number of real medals (virtual medal number)
This is a so-called medal-less configuration, but in the following explanation, this information is referred to as "
The term "number of medals" will be used.

The slot machine of this embodiment is a gaming machine in which a predetermined number of gaming medals are inserted, and multiple reels, each decorated with multiple types of patterns, begin to spin when a predetermined start rotation command is received, and a lottery is held to determine whether or not multiple types of roles have been internally won based on the reception of the start rotation command, and each of the multiple reels stops spinning individually when a predetermined stop rotation command is received.If the conditions determined by the role based on the result of the lottery and the combination of patterns when the multiple reels stop meet predetermined payout conditions, a process to pay out the number of gaming medals is executed and the game ends, but if they do not meet the conditions, the process to pay out the number of gaming medals is not executed and the game ends.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 and the basic configuration of the lending machine 700 will be described with reference to Figure 68. Figure 68 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68 corresponds to an example of the gaming machine of the present invention.
The slot machine 100 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front side of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed relative to the main body 101. Three reels (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of patterns arranged on the outer periphery are stored inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are configured to be rotatable inside the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are rotated by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member at equal intervals in appropriate numbers, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each of the reels 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically in roughly three rows through the display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. The symbol displayed on the top row of the left reel 110 is the left reel top row symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle row of the left reel 110 is the left reel middle row symbol, the symbol displayed on the bottom row of the left reel 110 is the left reel bottom row symbol, the symbol displayed on the top row of the center reel 111 is the middle reel top row symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle row of the left reel 111 is the middle reel middle row symbol, the symbol displayed on the bottom row of the center reel 111 is the middle reel bottom row symbol, and the symbol displayed on the right reel 112 is the right reel top row symbol.
The symbols displayed on the top of the right reel 112 are called the right reel top symbol, the symbols displayed on the middle of the right reel 112 are called the right reel middle symbol, and the symbols displayed on the bottom of the right reel 112 are called the right reel bottom symbol. The symbols on each of the reels 110 to 112 are displayed through a display window 113.
Each reel 110 to 112 has three vertically arranged reels, for a total of nine.
By spinning the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that the player can see changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of multiple types of symbols. Note that, in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices can also be used as such a display device.
In the example embodiment, three reels are provided inside and at the center of the slot machine 100, however, the number of reels and the location of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is disposed on the back of each of the reels 110 to 112 to illuminate each symbol displayed in the display window 113. It is preferable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of the optical sensor. Based on the detection result of the optical sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the winning line that is active. A winning line is a line that is used to determine whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role is displayed. The winning lines that are active are determined in advance by the number of medals bet as gaming media. There are five winning lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is active, when two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are active, for a total of three lines, and when three medals are bet,
The five lines, including the right-downward winning line and the right-upward winning line, are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the five lines, including the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right-downward winning line, and the right-upward winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, the valid winning lines may be called valid lines.

The notification lamp 123 is a lamp that notifies the player that a specific winning combination (for example, a bonus combination or a special combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery described later, or that the internally won state is being carried over.
A lamp 4 informs a player that a game medal can be inserted. A replay lamp 122 informs a player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay role, which is one of the winning roles, was won in the previous game. A reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

The bet button 130 or 132 is a button for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one medal is inserted. When pressed once, one medal is inserted, when pressed once again, one additional medal (total of two medals) is inserted, and when pressed once again, one additional medal (total of three medals) is inserted. When the bet button 132 is pressed, three medals are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 130 may be referred to as the one-coin bet button, and the bet button 132 may be referred to as the MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up lamps in accordance with the number of medals inserted, and when a specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 121 lights up to indicate that a game start operation is possible.

The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical form. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning some kind of winning combination. In the following, the expression "granted to the player" may be used in the same sense as "paid out to the player." The game information display 126 and the payout number display 127 are composed of seven-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, the start lever 135 is operated by operating the bet button 130 or 132.
When the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation of the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 includes a left stop button 137 and a center stop button 13
8 and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each of the reels 110 to 112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the center reel 111 can be stopped by operating the center stop button 138, and the right reel 112 can be stopped by operating the right stop button 139. Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as the first stop reel, the second stop reel, and the third stop reel, respectively. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the reels 110 to 112 that are rotating is referred to as an operation order or a push order. Furthermore, an operation sequence in which the first stop operation is an operation to stop the left reel 110, the second stop operation is an operation to stop the center reel 111, and the third stop operation is an operation to stop the right reel 112 is called a "forward push operation sequence" or simply "forward push", and a stop operation in which the first stop operation is an operation to stop the right reel 112, the second stop operation is an operation to stop the center reel 111, and the third stop operation is an operation to stop the left reel 110 is called a "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". Note that light-emitting bodies may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 may be used in combination with the stop buttons 137 to 139.
When operation of the number 9 is possible, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The instruction monitor 125 is a display for displaying information regarding the operation sequence (pressing order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139. This instruction monitor 125 is also a 7-segment (SEG)
For example, a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138,
When instructing to operate the right stop button 139 in that order, the instruction monitor 125 displays
When the user wishes to operate the left stop button 137, the right stop button 139, and the center stop button 138 in that order, the number "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor 125, and when the user wishes to operate the left stop button 137, the right stop button 139, and the center stop button 138 in that order, the number "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor 125.

The settlement button 134 is a button for returning inserted gaming medals (bet number) to the medal number control unit 350. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100.

The game medal number display device 170 is a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display device, as shown in FIG.
This is a device that displays the number of game medals recorded in the medal count control unit 350 shown in FIG.

The count button 171 is an operating means for transmitting information on the number of game medals recorded in the medal count control unit 350 shown in Figure 69 to the lending machine 700.

Below the stop button unit 136, there is provided a title panel 162 on which the model name is displayed and on which various certificate stamps are attached.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker 277 (see FIG. 69) provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for livening up the game. A performance device 160 is provided on the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 for outputting the sound of a speaker 272 (see FIG. 69) to the outside is provided on the top of the performance device 160. This performance device 160 is a shutter (
A shutter 163 is provided behind the stage image display device 157 (
The slot machine 100 is equipped with a liquid crystal display (LCD), and when the right shutter 163a and left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (the player side, the front side). Note that the display device does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, and any display device capable of displaying various effect images and various game information may be used, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. The display screen is rectangular,
The entire screen is configured so that it can be viewed by the player. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may also be square. Also, decorations (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen, so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decorations, causing the display screen to appear irregularly shaped. In this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but it may also be curved. The performance image display device 157 corresponds to an example of a performance means.

68, the lending machine 700 may be called a card unit, and corresponds to an example of the gaming media management device of the present invention. The lending machine 700 is installed in a one-to-one relationship with the slot machine 100.

The lending machine 700 accepts cards. There are two types of cards. One is a visitor card (also called a general card) that is a storage medium for gaming and has a prepaid function, and is issued to general players who are not registered as members. The other is a
The membership card is a storage medium for gaming that is issued to a member player who has registered with the gaming arcade. An IC card is used as the card.

The card stores a value, which includes the "number of medals held" and a "money balance" which is the balance of prepaid money.

The lending machine 700 that has received the card has a function of converting the "number of possessed medals" stored in the card into the "number of game medals (number of credits)". The "number of game medals (number of credits)" is data that can be used to set the bet amount and can be converted into the "number of possessed medals". The "number of game medals" can be obtained by debiting the "money balance" or the "number of possessed medals" of the card. The "number of game medals" also includes the number of medals acquired by winning. This "number of game medals" is managed by the medal count control unit 350 shown in FIG. 69, and is the number of electronic medals electromagnetically stored (amount of electronic game value). The "number of game medals" is subtracted by inserting medals using the bet buttons 130, 132.

The "number of medals held" is a value obtained by converting the "number of game medals (number of credits)" into a numerical value.
This "number of medals possessed" is stored in a manner that allows identification by the player's card. In other words, by operating the counting button 171, the "number of game medals" is converted into the "number of medals possessed" and can be stored on the card. The "number of medals possessed" may be managed by a management device for managing the number of medals possessed that is installed in the gaming facility.

The front side of the lending machine 700 is provided with a bill insertion slot 701 at the top for inserting bills, and a card insertion slot 702 at the bottom for inserting cards. A member card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 is received by a card reader/writer, and information stored on the card is read. The authenticity and type of bill inserted into the bill insertion slot 701 are identified, and the face value of the bill is stored as the "money balance" on the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702.

An information display 703 is provided below the bill insertion slot 701.
Reference numeral 03 denotes a display for providing operation guidance for the lending machine 700 and the status of the slot machine 100 by means of characters and images. The surface may be configured as a touch panel, and various operations may be input by touching various displayed display items with a finger.

Below the information display 703, a money balance display 705 and a medal count balance display 706 are arranged in two rows, one above the other. The money balance display 705 displays the "money balance" stored in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 as an amount. On the other hand, the medal count balance display 706 displays the "number of medals held" stored in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 as an amount.
is displayed as the number of medals.

A lending button 707 and a card return button 708 are provided in the vertical center of the lending machine 700. The lending button 707 is an operating means for withdrawing the "money balance" stored in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 to obtain the "number of game medals." Specifically, if there is a "money balance" in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702, an LED lamp built into the lending button 707 lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible.
In this state, by operating the loan button 707, the "number of game medals" is increased according to the amount of money withdrawn. For example, a "number of game medals" equivalent to 1000 yen is added as a predetermined amount. Also, if the "money balance" of the card is less than a predetermined amount (for example, less than 1000 yen), only the "number of game medals" converted from the current balance at a predetermined rate is added. Even if the "money balance" of the card is less than a predetermined amount, the "number of possessed medals" stored in the card may be replenished to add a predetermined amount of "number of game medals". The card return button 708 is an operating means operated when the player ends the game, and is used to store the "number of possessed medals" determined at the end of the game in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 and to eject the card. The "number of possessed medals" determined at the end of the game is the "number of possessed medals" determined at the end of the game by refilling the "number of possessed medals" stored in the card insertion slot 702.
The number of medals is calculated by subtracting the number of medals converted to the "game medal number" from the "number of possessed medals" stored on the card inserted in the slot machine 100, and then adding the number of game medals counted by the counting operation. The above-described data of "money balance", "number of possessed medals", and "number of game medals" are converted in the following order: "money balance" and "number of possessed medals" → "number of game medals" → "number of possessed medals". In this way, the "number of possessed medals" specified by the card is converted into the "game medal number", and in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, the "
Since the bet amount can be set using the "Number of medals played", you can borrow actual medals and
A game can be provided with a new slot machine (managed game machine) that does not use real medals, without confusing players who are accustomed to conventional slot machines in which real medals are inserted to secure credits and the bet amount is set using the credits.

Incidentally, although this specification does not mention the "number of saved medals," this "number of saved medals" is not stored on a card, but is the number of medals that are deposited in the arcade. In the arcade, the number of medals that a player has won in games may be managed as "points" on the day by the hall management terminal 800 shown in FIG. 72 or another management computer, and managed as the "number of saved medals" from the day after the medals were won. When both the "number of saved medals" and the "number of medals in possession" are stored, priority is given to deducting from the "number of medals in possession." Also,
Both the "number of medals held" and the "number of medals saved" are stored in the upper server (the intermediate management terminal 8 shown in FIG. 72).
10 or the management server 820) in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, the "number of medals held" is stored directly in the visitor card, but the "number of medals held" may be stored in the upper server in association with the card number. When storing in the upper server in association with the card number, data that can specify the time when the data was stored in the upper server may be written in the card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. In addition, the "money balance" is written directly in the card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. The timing for storing the "number of medals held" in the card (member card, visitor card) or the upper server is, for example, the timing when the counting button 171 is operated and the counting process is performed. However, instead of this, the data may be stored collectively when the card is returned. Furthermore, when a player finishes playing and returns the card from the lending machine 700, the "number of medals possessed" stored in the lending machine 700 is temporarily stored as saved medals in the hall management terminal 800, and when the player inserts the card again into the same or a different lending machine 700 on the same day that the player receives the card back, only the "number of medals possessed" for that day that was temporarily stored as saved medals is stored again in the lending machine 700, and the "number of playing medals" is added within the range of the "number of medals possessed" so that the player can play.

The rental machine 700 may also be provided with an IR photosensitive unit that receives infrared signals from a remote control carried by an attendant at the amusement facility, converts them into electronic signals, and outputs them.

Furthermore, in the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 68, the lending of the “number of game medals” is performed by pressing the lending button 707
In the past, this was possible by operating the "money balance" stored in the card to withdraw the "number of medals held" recorded in the card, but it may also be possible to convert this to the "number of medals played". Specifically, a medal button is provided in the lending machine 700, and if the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 has a "number of medals held", an LED lamp built into the medal button lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. By operating the medal button in this state, if the number of medals held is a predetermined number (e.g., 50 medals) or more, a predetermined number (e.g., 50 medals) of medals is added to the "number of medals played". In addition, the number of medals held that the player has acquired in a game as described above is stored in the card as "points held" during the day, or is managed by the hall management terminal 800 shown in FIG. 72 or other management computer, and a replay button is provided in the lending machine 700. If there are "points held", an LED lamp built into the replay button lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. In this state, by operating the replay button, a predetermined number (for example, 50) of "game medals" may be added.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to Figure 69. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game.
The main control unit 300 is made up of a first sub-control unit 400 which controls the main performance in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 which controls various devices based on the commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400. With regard to the main control unit 300, as the data capacity becomes large it becomes difficult to verify the program and it can also become a breeding ground for illegal modifications, which can lead to problems of reduced security, so there are limits on the data capacity of the ROM 306 and RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

Main Control Unit
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 has a game control unit 302 that controls the progress of the game and a medal number control unit 350 that controls the number of game medals owned by the player. The game control unit 302 corresponds to an example of a game control means, and the medal number control unit 350 corresponds to an example of a game value number control means. The game control unit 302 is equipped with a CPU 304, a ROM 306 that stores control program data, lottery data used at the time of internal lottery of winning roles, and reel pattern arrangement and stop positions, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, and a WDT (watchdog timer) not shown. Note that the description of RAM 308 (including RAM 358 described later) is used as an example indicating that it is a readable and writable storage medium, but the description of RWM (read-write memory) or the description of "RAM" may also be used. In addition, the name of the process related to the RAM may be written as RWM (read-write memory) or may be written as "RAM". In this specification, the description "RAM" is mainly used. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this also applies to the medal count control unit 350, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator (not shown) as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the division data in the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time for an interrupt is 256×47÷8 MHz=1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 calculates a value ranging from 0 to 65 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator (not shown).
The game control unit 302 is equipped with a random number generating circuit (not shown) which is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value within a range of 535, and a start-up signal output circuit (not shown) which outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on.When a start-up signal is input from this start-up signal output circuit, the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 starts game control (starts the main processing of the main control unit described below).

In addition, the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 operates each of the bet buttons 13 at each interrupt time.
0, 132, start lever 135, each stop button 137 to 139, settlement button 13
The state of the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the left stop button 137, the middle stop button 138, or the right stop button 139 is monitored. For example, when it is detected that the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned on, a process is executed to electronically insert medals stored electronically in the medal count control unit 350 as medals to be inserted into the game. When it is detected that the start lever 135 is turned on, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number generation circuit. The random number generation circuit that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores random numbers to be used in the lottery. When it is detected that the left stop button 137, the middle stop button 138, or the right stop button 139 is turned on, if the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to each stop button are in a stoppable state, the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 is executed. When it is detected that the settlement button 134 is turned on, a process is executed to return the game medals that have been electronically inserted to the medal count control unit 350.

In addition, the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 detects various sensors 318 (
The status of the optical sensors of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, the right reel 112, etc. is also monitored.
The optical sensor of the right reel 112 and the optical sensor of the left reel 110 to 112
The signal is set at a predetermined position on the mounting base of the reel 315b, and goes low every time a light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes by. Rotational position information, which indicates how far the reel has rotated from the reference position from when it first goes low until it goes low again, is calculated based on the counted value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. When the CPU 304 detects the low-level signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 controls the motors 110m to 112m (see FIG. 7) provided on the reels 110 to 112.
0), a drive circuit 324 that drives display devices such as the indication monitor 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127, and various lamps 336 (
It is equipped with a drive circuit 326 which drives the winning line indicator lamp 120, the notification lamp 123, the medal insertion possible lamp 124, the replay lamp 122, the medal insertion lamp 129, and the game start lamp 121.

Furthermore, the slot machine 100 has setting values that give different degrees of advantage to the player. Setting 1 to setting 6 are available as setting values. The higher the setting value, the higher the advantage to the player tends to be. Specifically, an internal probability of winning is determined for each setting value. The game control unit 302 has a setting change button 175 that is operated to change the setting value.
is connected.

In addition, an information output circuit 328 is connected to the game control unit 302.
Through this information output circuit 328, the external hall computer 600 (see FIG. 72)
The information input circuit 650 of the slot machine 100 outputs game information (for example, information indicating the game status) of the slot machine 100.

In addition, the main control unit 300 is equipped with a voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power management unit (not shown), and this voltage monitoring circuit outputs a low voltage signal indicating a drop in voltage to each of the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350 when the voltage value of the power supply is below a predetermined value (e.g., 9V).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400, enabling communication with the first sub-control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300
The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the sub-control unit 400.
It is configured such that signals such as commands cannot be sent to the main control unit 300 from 00 onwards.

The medal count control unit 350, like the game control unit 302, is equipped with a CPU 354, a ROM 356, a RAM 358, an I/O 360 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 362 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 304 and the CPU 354 are provided on the same board and are connected via a buffer IC. This allows the CPU 304 to use the ROM 306 and the RAM 308 without using the ROM 356 and the RAM 358, and allows the CPU 354 to use the ROM 356 and the RAM 358 without using the ROM 306 and the RAM 308. In addition, a WDT (watchdog timer) not shown in the figure is also installed. The CPU 354 of the medal count control unit 350 also operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator not shown as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 354 transmits frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 356 to the counter timer 362, and the counter timer 362 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 354 for each interrupt time. The CPU 354 operates in response to this interrupt request. This medal count control unit 350 executes interrupt processing (medal count control unit timer interrupt processing described below) every 0.745 ms. Also, communication with the lending machine 700 is repeated at 300 ms intervals.

The CPU 354 of the medal count control unit 350 also includes a start-up signal output circuit (not shown) that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on.
When a start signal is input from this start signal output circuit, U354 also starts medal count control (starts the medal count control unit main processing described later).

The basic circuit of the medal count control unit 350 is connected to a game medal count display device 170 consisting of a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display, a count button 171, and a game medal count clear switch 172.

The medal count control unit 350 is also connected to the basic circuit of the medal count control unit 350 via a medal count control unit connecting terminal board 790. The medal count control unit 350 communicates with the medal count control unit 700 in both directions.

The medal count control unit 350 transmits various commands to the game control unit 302. The game control unit 302 also transmits various commands to the medal count control unit 350. In other words, communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the game control unit 302 is also two-way communication.

The medal count control unit 350 also stores the "game medal count" in a predetermined area of the RAM 358. Specifically, the "game medal count" is stored in a credit counter. The medal count control unit 350 updates the "game medal count" stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 358 by addition or subtraction. Examples of addition include processing based on a payout command sent from the game control unit 302, processing based on a settlement command sent from the game control unit 302, and processing based on a lending notification sent from the lending machine 700. On the other hand, examples of subtraction processing include counting processing based on the operation of the count button 171, and processing based on an input command sent from the game control unit 302.

The medal count clear switch 172 shown in FIG. 69 is provided in a position where it cannot be operated by the player (for example, in a position where it cannot be operated without opening the front door 102), and is an operating means for clearing the "medal count" stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 358. For example, if a player is absent with "2" remaining in the medal count, it becomes difficult to determine whether the player who left "2" intends to continue playing or not, and another player cannot start playing. However, if the medal count can be cleared by the store clerk's operation, another player can be welcomed sooner. Note that the medal count does not necessarily have to be cleared when the medal count clear switch 172 is operated. For example, it may be cleared when the medal count is two or less, and counted in the same way as when the count button 171 is operated when the medal count is three or more. If the counting button 171 malfunctions and cannot recognize that it has been operated, there is a risk that the "number of game medals" cannot be converted to the "number of medals held," which could cause a disadvantage to the player. However, if counting can be done by the operation of the store clerk, this will not cause a disadvantage to the player. Furthermore, there is no need to provide a new counting button for the store clerk, so there is no increase in costs. It is possible to separate clearing and counting by the operation method of the game medal number clear switch 172, rather than determining the number of game medals and separating them into clearing and counting. For example, clearing is performed when the game medal number clear switch 172 is pressed briefly, and counting is performed when the game medal number clear switch 172 is pressed for a long time. Either clearing or counting can be easily selected regardless of the number of game medals. Also, clearing is performed when only the game medal number clear switch 172 is operated, and counting is performed when the game medal number clear switch 172 and another button are operated simultaneously. There is a low possibility of operating incorrectly, and either clearing or counting can be easily selected.

《Sub-control section》
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described.
00 receives control commands sent by the main control unit 300 (game control unit 302) via an input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 402 is a CPU
The basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404 for temporarily storing data, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, the lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various displays, etc.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with speakers 272, 277 via an output interface.
The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifiers and speakers 272 and 277 in response to commands from the CPU 404.
The audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272, 277. These speakers 272, 277 correspond to an example of a performance means.

The first sub-controller 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamps, lower lamps, side lamps 14) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface.
4, title panel lamps, bet button lamps, reel backlights, etc.) are connected. The various lamps 420 correspond to an example of the performance means.

The first sub-controller 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is connected to the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sensor circuit 426, to which a shutter sensor 428 is connected via an input interface.
The state of the shutter sensor 428 is monitored at each interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 controls the performance device 1 including the display control of the performance image display device 157.
The second sub-control unit 500 controls, for example, the performance image display device 157.
It may be configured with multiple control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the image, and a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163).

The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, and an I/O 510 for controlling the input and output of various devices.
and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 also includes a VDP 516 (video display processor).
A ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using a work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the performance image display device 157.

Next, examples of connections between each board, such as the power supply control board, the main control unit board, and the first sub-control unit board, and each unit, such as the reel unit and the performance movable body unit, will be described.

Figure 70 shows an example of connections between each board and each unit.

This Figure 70 shows a power supply control board 252B, a main control unit board 300B, a first sub-control unit board 400B, a reel unit 109, and a performance movable body unit 160U.
The performance movable body unit 160U is a unit that is incorporated into the performance device 160 shown in Fig. 68 and moves the shutter 163. The shutter 163 corresponds to an example of a movable body.

The power supply control board 252B, the main control board 300B, and the first sub-control board 400B each have a plurality of connectors PC1 to PC4, MC2 to MC6, and SC1 to SC4. The reel unit 109 and the performance movable body unit 160U each have one or a plurality of connectors RC1 to RC3, and DC1.

In the island equipment installed in the gaming machine installation store, the 100V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and the 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100 through the power cord 265 connected to the connector PC1. The 24V AC current is converted to 24V AC by the power supply control board 252B.
The input voltage is converted to a DC voltage of 24 V, a DC voltage of 12 V, and a DC voltage of 5 V. Note that the input voltage may be converted to other DC voltages, but in this description, a DC voltage of 24 V and a DC voltage of 5 V will be described.

The power supply control board 252B shown in FIG. 70 has a 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the power supply control 24V capacitor 24PC are connected to the 24V power supply line, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 24PL and the power supply control 24V capacitor 24PC are connected to the 5V power supply line.
Also shown is a 5V power supply control capacitor 5PC and a 5V power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, which is a power supply monitor LED that lights or flashes while 24V DC current is flowing.
The power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply, which lights up or blinks while a direct current of 5 V is flowing. Also shown is a power switch 244.

A 24V power line and a 5V power line are connected to the connector PC2 of the power supply control board 252B. This connector PC2 and the connector MC5 of the main control board 300B are connected by a harness PM, and a 24V DC current and a 5V DC current are supplied to the main control board 300B through this harness PM.

A 24V power line is connected to connector PC3 of the power supply control board 252B. This connector PC3 and connector SC1 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS1, and a 24V DC current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS1. A 5V power line is connected to connector PC4 of the power supply control board 252B. This connector PC4 and connector SC2 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS2, and a 5V DC current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS2.

In addition, the main control board 300B is also provided with 24V and 5V power supplies, just like the first sub-control board 400B.
The first sub-control board 400B may also be supplied with the main control board 3
As with 00B, 24V and 5V may be supplied through a common harness.

The main control circuit board 300B shown in FIG. 70 also has a 24V power line and a 5V power line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 24V power line of the main control circuit board 300B, and a 5V DC current supplied through the harness PM also flows through the 5V power line of the main control circuit board 300B.
00B also has a main control 24V monitor LED24ML and a main control 24V capacitor 24MC connected to the 24V power line, and a main control 5V monitor LE connected to the 5V power line.
The main control 24V monitor LED24ML is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the main control 5V monitor LED24ML is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing.
D5ML is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights up or blinks while a direct current of 5 V is flowing. Note that no capacitor is provided on the 5 V power supply line.

Further, a reel motor driving IC 322i is mounted on the main control board 300B. The reel motor driving IC 322i is an integrated circuit constituting the driving circuit 322 shown in Fig. 69. A direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V are also supplied to the reel motor driving IC 322i. Although not shown, the main control board 300B is also configured with the game control unit 302 and medal count control unit 350 shown in Fig. 69, and also has integrated circuits mounted thereon that constitute the other driving circuits 324, 326, etc.

In addition, the connector MC2 to which the reel motor driving IC 322i of the main control board 300B is connected and the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR1. Similarly, the connector MC3 to which the reel motor driving IC 322i is connected and the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR1.
The connector RC2 of the reel motor driver IC3 is connected to the harness MR2.
The connector MC4 to which the reel motor driver IC 322i is connected and the connector RC3 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR3.
The 24V DC current and 5V DC current supplied to the harness MR
1 to 3, and the motors 110m to 112m provided for each reel are fed.
The main control board 300B also sends control signals (commands) for controlling the motors 110m to 112m through the harnesses MR1 to MR3. Although a harness is connected to each motor, the connectors RC1 to RC3 on the reel unit 109 side are combined into one connector, and the connectors MC2 to MC4 on the main control board 300B side are combined into one connector.
However, the single common harness is actually a collection of three harnesses MR1 to MR3.

Furthermore, the connector MC6 of the main control board 300B and the connector S of the first sub-control board 400B
C4 is connected by a harness MS. This harness MS is a harness for control signals (for sending commands) and is not used for supplying current.

The first sub-controller board 400B shown in Fig. 70 also has a 24V power line and a 5V power line. A 24V DC current supplied through a harness PS1 flows through the 24V power line of the first sub-controller board 400B, and a 5V DC current supplied through a harness PS2 flows through the 5V power line of the first sub-controller board 400B.
The sub-controller board 400B also has a sub-control 24V monitor LED connected to the 24V power line.
Also shown are a secondary control 24V capacitor 24SC and a secondary control 5V monitor LED 5SL connected to the 5V power line.
The sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights up or flashes while a direct current of 5 V is flowing. The first sub-control board 400B also has no capacitor on the 5V power supply line.

In addition, the first sub-control board 400B is equipped with a movable body motor driving IC 424i. This movable body motor driving IC 424i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the driving circuit 424 shown in FIG. 69. A direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V are supplied to the movable body motor driving IC 424i. Although not shown here, the first sub-control board 400B also includes:
The basic circuit 402 shown in FIG. 69 is configured, and integrated circuits constituting other driving circuits 424, 426, etc. are also mounted.

The connector S to which the movable body motor driving IC 424i of the first sub-control board 400B is connected
C3 and connector DC1 of performance movable body unit 160U are connected by harness SD.
The performance movable body unit 160U includes the 24
A direct current of 1.5 V and a direct current of 5 V are supplied through this harness SD, and the motor 163 m provided in the performance movable body unit 160 U can be driven. In addition, a control signal (command) for controlling the motor 163 m is sent from the first sub-control board 400B through this harness SD.

In addition, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 68 has a second sub-control unit 500 as shown in FIG.
70, the second sub-control board is also supplied with 24V DC and 5V DC from the power supply control board 252B through a harness (not shown). The second sub-control board is also connected to the first sub-control board 400B by a harness for control signals (for sending commands). The second sub-control board is also connected to the performance device (performance image display device 157) in the same manner as the first sub-control board 400B.

As described above, the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 are connected to the harnesses MR1 to
3. The first sub-control board 400B and the performance movable body unit 16
0U is electrically connected by a harness SD.

Based on the above configuration, the operation when the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in the power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually spun will be described below. The power-off state may be a state in which the power switch 244 is off, a state in which the power switch 244 is on but the power cord 265 is not connected to the outlet, or a state in which no power is being supplied from the island equipment (the same applies below).
). If no power is being supplied from the island equipment, the power is cut off even if the power cord 265 is plugged into the outlet and the power switch 244 is on. Even in this power cut state, each of the reels 110 to 112 can be manually rotated in either the forward or reverse direction.

Any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 70 (power supply control 24V monitor LED
D24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL, main control 24V monitor LED24ML, main control 5V monitor LED5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED24SL, sub control 5V monitor L
ED5SL) also turns off when the power is cut off.

However, when the left reel 110 is manually spun, a current (induced current) due to a back electromotive force is generated in the motor 110m (see FIG. 70) that rotates the left reel 110. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 70, the induced current generated in the motor 110m flows through the harness MR1 into the main control board 300B, and is connected to the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the reel drive IC 322i.
A main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR is provided between the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and ground, and a main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR is provided between the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML and ground.
The main control 5V monitor LED 5ML is turned on by the induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR.
The MR adjusts the resistance value, so that the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML lights up due to induced current. Even if manual rotation is stopped, the 24V power line is provided with a main control 24V capacitor 24MC, so the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML continues to light for a while. On the other hand, the 5V power line is not provided with a capacitor, so the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML goes out immediately when manual rotation is stopped. In other words, when manual rotation is stopped, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML goes out before the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML. A capacitor with a lower capacity than the main control 24V capacitor 24MC may also be provided on the 5V power line.

The induced current that has flowed into the main control board 300B then flows through the harness PM into the power supply control board 252B, and is supplied from the connector PC2 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line.
A V adjustment resistor 24PR is provided, and a power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR is provided between the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the ground.
L is lit by an induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is lit by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5P
The resistance value is adjusted by R, so that the light is lit by induced current.
The LEDs (24ML, 5ML) on the main control board 300B and the LEDs (2
The LEDs on multiple boards (LED 4PL, 5PL) will be lit. Even if you stop the manual rotation, the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL will continue to light up for a while because the power supply control 24V capacitor 24PC is provided on the 24V power supply line. Also, the power supply control 5V capacitor 5PC is provided on the 5V power supply line, so the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL will also continue to light up for a while.

The induced current that flows into the power supply control board 252B passes through the harness PS1 and reaches the first
The current flows into the sub-control board 400B and is supplied to the 24V power line from the connector SC1. A sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR is provided between the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the ground. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5
The secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL is connected to the secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 2SR.
The resistance is adjusted by 4SR, so the light is lit by induced current.
The induced current that flows into the power supply control board 252B flows through the harness PS2 into the first sub-control board 400B and is supplied to the 5V power line from the connector SC2. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and ground. The sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is lit by the induced current because its resistance is adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Here, the LED (24) on the main control board 300B
The LEDs of multiple boards, such as the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, are lit up. Note that even if the manual rotation is stopped, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL will continue to be lit for a while because the sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC is provided in the 24V power line.
On the other hand, since no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line, the secondary control 5V monitor LED 5SL goes out immediately when manual rotation is stopped.

The above explanation is about the phenomenon that occurs when each harness MR1, PM, PS1, PS2 is properly connected to the connector and there is no disconnection. On the other hand, when the harness MR1 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector RC1 and/or the connector MC2 (
If the reel is not inserted properly, no matter how much the left reel 110 is manually spun, the reel will not spin properly.
None of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 70 are lit, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually spun, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG.
If the 4ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up, an abnormality in the harness MR1 or a poor connection with the connectors RC1 and MC2 can be suspected.

In addition, the harness PM is broken, or the connector MC5 and/or the connector PC
If the main control 24 is not properly connected to the left reel 110, the left reel 110 may not spin when rotated manually.
The V monitor LED24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML are lit, but the sub-control 24V
Monitor LED24SL, Sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, Power supply control 24V monitor LED2
4PL and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL do not light up. As a result, the left reel 110
When you manually rotate the LED, the main control 24V monitor LED24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED5
Although ML is lit, the secondary control 24V monitor LED24SL and secondary control 5V monitor LED
If the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL are not lit, an abnormality in the harness PM or a poor connection with the connectors MC5 and PC2 can be suspected.

In addition, during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the main control board 300B may be damaged by the power supply control board 25.
Even when not connected to 2B, the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) on the main control board 300B can be lit up by manually spinning the left reel 110.

In addition, the harness PS1 is broken, or the connector PC3 and/or the connector S
If the left reel 110 is not properly connected to the secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL, among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 70, only the secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL will not light up when the left reel 110 is manually spun.
If only the monitor LED 24SL does not light up, there may be an abnormality in the harness PS1 or the connector PC3.
, SC1. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC4 and/or the connector SC2, when the left reel 110 is manually spun, the sub-control 5V monitor LEDs shown in FIG.
Only the ED5SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually spun,
If only the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 1 does not light up, an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors PC4 and SC2 can be suspected.

Here, the case where the left reel 110 is manually spun in a power-off state has been described, but the same applies to the case where the center reel 111 is manually spun in a power-off state, and the case where the right reel 112 is manually spun in a power-off state. In addition, when the number of reels to be manually spun increases, the monitor LE
For example, the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112 will be illuminated.
When the left reel 110 and the right reel 12 are manually spun at the same time, the monitor LED emits light more brightly than when only the left reel 110 is manually spun.

In addition, the main control 24V monitor LED24ML, the main control 5V monitor LED5ML, the sub-control 2
4V monitor LED24SL, secondary control 5V monitor LED5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LE
Even if the LEDs used for purposes other than the monitor LEDs, such as the D24PL and the power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL (for example, an error monitoring LED that lights up when an error occurs, or a signal monitoring LED, etc.), are installed with an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line or 5V power line, they will light up if there is no electrical connection problem when the left reel 110 is manually spun in a power cut state. Therefore, even if the LEDs are used for purposes other than the monitor LEDs, it is possible to check for electrical connection problems.

Even in a power-off state, the shutter 163 shown in FIG. 68 can be manually opened and closed.

When the shutter 163 is manually opened or closed, the motor 163m (
A current (induced current) is generated by the back electromotive force in the motor 163m (see FIG. 70). Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 70, the induced current generated in the motor 163m flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD and is supplied to the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the movable body motor driving IC 424i. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is also lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR.

The induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B then flows through the harness PS1 into the power supply control board 252B and is supplied to the 24V power line from the connector PC3. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by the induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR.
The induced current that flows into B also passes through the harness PS2 and flows into the power supply control board 252B,
The 5V power supply is supplied from the connector PC4 to the 5V power line. The power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL is also
The resistance value is adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR, so that the LEDs are lit by induced current. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards, such as the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, are emitting light.

The induced current that has flowed into the power supply control board 252B further flows through the harness PM into the main control board 300B, and is supplied to the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the connector MC5.
The resistance value is adjusted by the PR, so the light is lit by the induced current, and the power supply control 5
The V monitor LED 5PL is lit by an induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR.
This means that the LEDs of multiple boards, such as the LEDs (4PL, 5PL) of the first sub-control board 400B (24SL, 5SL), and the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B, are emitting light.

The above explanation is for the phenomenon that occurs when each harness SD, PS1, PS2, PM is connected to the connector normally and is not broken. On the other hand, if the harness SD is broken or not connected normally to the connector DC1 and/or connector SC3, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 70 will light up, and the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will remain off, no matter how much the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed. As a result, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 70 or the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will light up, no matter how much the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed.
If the SL does not light up, an abnormality in the harness SD or a poor connection with the connectors DC1 and SC3 can be suspected.

In addition, the harness PS1 is broken, or the connector SC1 and/or the connector P
If the camera is not connected to the sub-controller C3, the shutter 163 may not operate properly when the sub-controller C2 is manually opened or closed.
Although the 4V monitor LED24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL are lit, the power supply control
The 4V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML do not light up. As a result, if the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are on but the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML are not on when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, an abnormality in the harness PS1 or a poor connection with the connectors SC1 and PC3 can be suspected.
However, if the connector SC2 and/or the connector PC4 is not properly connected, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24S will not turn on when the shutter 163 is manually opened or closed.
L and the sub control 5V monitor LED5SL are lit, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML are not lit. As a result, if the sub control 24V monitor LED24SL and the sub control 5V monitor LED5SL are lit but the power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML are not lit when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors SC2 and PC4 can be suspected.

In addition, even when the first sub-control board 400B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B can be turned on by manually opening and closing the shutter 163.

In addition, the harness PM is broken, or the connector PC2 and/or the connector MC
5, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5M among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG.
As a result, if only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML among the monitor LEDs shown in Fig. 70 do not light up even when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, an abnormality in the harness PM or a poor connection with the connectors PC2, MC5 can be suspected.

FIG. 71 shows the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 70 and the reel unit 1 shown in FIG.
70. The following description will focus on the points that are different from the connection example described with reference to FIG.

In this Figure 71, the connector MC5 and the connector MC6 provided on the main control unit board 300B are omitted.
9, a reel relay board 902B is shown.

The reel relay board 902B is provided with a connector RRM1 to which the harness MR11 connected to the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR1 to which the harness MR12 connected to the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 is connected. Also, a connector RRM2 to which the harness MR21 connected to the connector MC3 of the main control board 300B is connected
A connector RRR2 is provided to which a harness MR22 connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 109 is connected. Further, a connector RRM3 is provided to which a harness MR31 connected to the connector MC4 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR4 is provided to which a harness MR22 connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 109 is connected.
There is also provided a connector RRR3 to which a harness MR32 connected to C3 is connected.

In the connection example of FIG. 71, when the reels 110 to 112 are manually rotated in a power outage state, if the reels are normal, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED
However, the monitor LEDs MR11, MR12, MR21, MR22, MR31, MR32, MR41, MR42, MR51, MR61, MR71, MR81, MR91, MR10, MR112, MR113, MR121, MR122, MR103, MR104, MR105, MR106, MR107, MR108, MR109, MR109, MR109, MR109, MR109, MR109, MR109, MR109, MR109, MR20, MR21, MR22, MR20 ...
21. If MR32 is disconnected or not connected properly, the main control 24V monitor LE
Monitor LEDs such as D24ML and main control 5V monitor LED5ML do not light up.

In the connection example in Fig. 71, the provision of the reel relay board 902B increases the number of harnesses and connectors compared to the connection example shown in Fig. 70, increasing the possibility of electrical connection failure. However, an induced current can be generated by manual operation in a power-off state, and electrical connection failure can be easily confirmed from the lighting state of the monitor LED.

In addition, the reel relay board 902B may also be provided with a 24V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line, and a 5V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 5V power line. By manually operating the reel relay board 902B in a power-off state to generate an induced current, and turning on these monitor LEDs if the conditions are normal, it is possible to check for poor electrical connection.

In the description herein, the left reel 110, the center reel 111, the right reel 112, and the shutter 163 are given as examples of movable bodies, but the movable bodies are not limited to these and may be any movable body that is driven by a motor.

Furthermore, instead of an LED lamp that is lit by an induced current in a power failure state, a light-emitting means such as a seven-segment (SEG) display may be used. For example, a seven-segment display that displays setting values (e.g., setting 1 to setting 6) that indicate different degrees of advantage to the player may be used. The requirement for the light-emitting means is that it must be visible. Note that these light-emitting means do not move even when the motor is driven. This is because the light-emitting means is not provided on a movable body that is driven and moved by the motor, but on a fixed substrate.

In the above explanation, in order to make the monitor LED emit light by induced current in the power interruption state,
Adjustable resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR) were used, but any means capable of adjusting impedance will do, and is not limited to adjustable resistors. However, since a large amount of induced current flows even in a powered state, it is necessary to adjust the impedance while considering the current flow, rather than just adjusting the impedance to make it easier for induced current to flow in a power cut state.

The above-described configuration is as follows:
A light emitting means;
A game machine including a movable body unit having a movable body that can be operated by driving a motor,
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness,
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power interruption state to drive the motor and a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor,
This is an example of a gaming machine characterized in that the light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven.

FIG. 72 is a configuration diagram of a gaming system including the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 shown in FIG.

As shown in Fig. 72, the gaming system S has the slot machine 100 shown in Fig. 68, the lending machine 700, the hall computer 600, the hall management terminal 800, the intermediate management terminal 810, and the management server 820 also shown in Fig. 68. The lending machine 700, the hall computer 600, and the hall management terminal 800 are collectively called an external processing device. One of the features of this external processing device is that it is equipped with a memory means.

The hall management terminal 800 is a computer separate from the hall computer 600.
A hall management terminal 800 is installed in each of the game halls (hall) H1, H2, ... and is connected to a lending machine 700. The lending machine 700 is connected to the slot machine 100, and therefore the hall management terminal 800 is connected to the slot machine 100 via the lending machine 700.
Information on the number of medals exchanged between the dispenser 700 and the slot machine 100 (counting information and dispense information) and information on the operating status of the slot machine 100 are input to the hall management terminal 800. The hall management terminal 800 records and manages this input information.

The management server 820 is provided for the overall management of the gaming system 1, and stores and manages information relating to the slot machines 100 and the rental machines 700, such as information identifying the slot machines 100 and information identifying the rental machines 700 (gaming machine installation information). The management server 820 is also connected to hall management terminals 800 of many stores via the intermediate management terminals 810, and manages information obtained by communicating with the hall management terminals 800, such as information regarding the number of medals and information regarding the operating status of the slot machines 100.

<Communication sequence and communication content>
Commands are sent and received between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350 .
The game control unit 302 transmits a game control unit command (
The medal count control unit 35 transmits a game control status command and a game control priority command.
The medal count control unit 350 transmits medal count control commands (medal count control status command, response command) to the game control unit 302 every 5.96 ms. Note that the game control unit 302 transmits the game control priority command in priority to the game control status command. Also, the medal count control unit 350
A response command corresponding to the game control priority command is transmitted in priority to the medal count control status command.

Communication between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350,
In the communication between the rental machine 700, gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information are sent and received.

FIG. 73 is a table summarizing gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information.

The gaming machine status information shown in FIG. 73(a) can be roughly divided into advantageous status information, setting status information,
The front door status information includes three types of status information, such as front door status information. The advantageous status information is made up of information indicating whether a bonus equivalent to RB is in operation (RB information), information indicating whether a bonus equivalent to BB is in operation (BB information), and information indicating whether a bonus equivalent to AT (assist time) is in operation (AT information). The setting status information is made up of information indicating whether a setting change is being made by operating the setting button 175 shown in FIG. 69 (setting change in progress information), and information indicating whether a setting confirmation is being made (setting confirmation in progress information). The front door status information is made up of information indicating whether a setting change is being made by operating the setting button 175 shown in FIG. 69 (setting change in progress information), and information indicating whether a setting confirmation is being made. The front door status information is made up of information indicating whether a setting change is being made by operating the front door 10 (setting change in progress information).
The AT state is information indicating whether the reel 2 is in an open state (door open information). The AT state is a game state in which auxiliary functions are activated to allow the player to obtain advantageous results, such as notification of the stop operation sequence of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and notification of the target symbols to be stopped.

The gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. 73(b) includes total number of inserted coins information, total number of paid coins information, MY counter value information, total number of paid coins of the role, total number of consecutive paid coins information, number of games information, and role ratio monitor information. The total number of inserted coins information is information that indicates the number of inserted coins accumulated since the power was turned on. Note that the number of medals for replay is not included. The total number of paid coins information is information that indicates the number of paid coins accumulated since the power was turned on. Note that the number of medals for replay is not included. The MY counter value information is information that indicates the maximum value of the MY counter calculated after the power was turned on. The slot machine 100 has a state in which a notification of the stop operation sequence for the role that has been internally won is executed, and the MY counter is a counter that counts the net increase in the number of medals since the transition to this state. The total number of paid coins of the role is information that indicates the number of medals paid out by the operation of the role accumulated since the power was turned on. The continuous feature total payout number information is information that indicates the number of medals paid out by the operation of the RB accumulated since the power was turned on. The number of games played information is information that indicates the number of games played accumulated since the power was turned on. The feature ratio monitor information is information that indicates various ratios (feature ratio, continuous feature ratio, advantageous zone ratio, feature ratio with instructions, feature etc. state ratio) for evaluating the degree of gambling nature of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine installation information shown in Fig. 73(c) includes two pieces of information: gaming control unit information and medal count control unit information. The gaming control unit information is made up of the ID number information of the IC chip of the gaming control unit 302, the manufacturer code of the IC chip, and the product code of the IC chip. The medal count control unit information is made up of the ID number information of the IC chip of the medal count control unit 350, the manufacturer code of the IC chip, and the product code of the IC chip.

Figure 74 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control state command is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350.

In FIG. 74, from the left, there are a first sub-control unit 400, a game control unit 302, and a medal count control unit 350.
, and a loaner machine 700 are shown.

First, before explaining the game control state command, the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 7
The medal count control unit 350 is connected to the lending machine 700, and communication between the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is performed between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700. The communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700 is performed every 300 ms.
It is carried out periodically.

74, a gaming machine information notification and a counting notification are transmitted from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. In addition, a lending notification is transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350, and upon receiving this lending notification, the medal count control unit 350 returns a lending reception result response notification to the lending machine 700.

Figure 75 is a diagram showing details of the communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700.

FIG. 75(a) is a diagram showing the data structure of a message exchanged in communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700. This message is composed of five types of sections: message length, command, serial number, data section, and checker. The message length stores the length of the entire message. The command stores a command code for identifying the type of gaming machine information notification, counting notification, lending notification, and lending reception result response notification. The serial number stores the serial number for gaming machine information notifications, the counting serial number for counting notifications, and the lending serial number for lending notifications and lending reception result response notifications. The range of various serial numbers is 0 to 255, and the serial number becomes 0 when the power is turned on, and when it reaches 255 it returns to 1 and then repeats from 1 to 255. The data section stores,
Various data is stored, and the checksum is calculated by adding up the data from the message length to the data section, and the lowest byte of the total is stored.

Fig. 75(b) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data section of the gaming machine information notification. The data section of the gaming machine information notification stores a code representing the type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko type gaming machine, a reel type gaming machine, or an arrange ball gaming machine. In the case of this embodiment, a code representing a reel type gaming machine is stored. The gaming machine information type includes hall control and fraud monitoring information in addition to the gaming machine performance information and gaming machine installation information described with reference to Fig. 73. The gaming machine information type stores a code for identifying which of these three types of information the information is.

Figure 76 (a) shows details of hole control and fraud monitoring information.

The game medal number information is information that indicates the current game medal number stored in the RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350.

The medal number information is information on the change in the number of medals inserted after the previous gaming machine information notification (-3 to 3 medals) depending on the number of medals inserted and the number of medals returned when the settlement button 134 (see FIG. 68) is operated.
This information is based on the information on the number of medals inserted and the number of medals settled, which are included in the game control priority commands (insertion command, settlement command) sent from the game control unit 302 to 50.

The medal payout number information indicates the number of medals paid out. This medal payout number information is based on the medal payout number information included in the game control priority command (payout command) transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350.

The advantageous state information is the advantageous state information shown in Fig. 73(a) and explained with reference to Fig. 73. In addition, information showing the state of the gaming machine may be included.

Gaming machine error status information is information represented by an error code.

Fig. 76(b) is a list of error codes. The various errors shown in Fig. 76(b) are also handled by the medal count control status command, various processing commands sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400, and game control priority commands (error occurrence commands), which will be described later.

Below, only errors that require special explanation will be explained. The medal count control disconnection is an error that occurs when the game control unit 302 detects a disconnection in the medal count control unit 350.
Conversely, this is an error when the medal count control unit 350 detects a break in the game control unit 302. The game sequence abnormality is an error in which the game progress order in the game control unit 302 is abnormal. The game control command serial number abnormality is an error in which the serial number of the command from the game control unit 302 is a value other than the previous value plus 1. The payout number abnormality is an error in which the payout number included in the game control status command is a payout number outside the range of 0 to 15. That is, in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, the maximum number of payouts at one time is 15. The settlement number mismatch is an error in which the settlement number included in the game control priority command (settlement command) is a settlement number equal to or greater than the number of inserted medals. The chip ID number mismatch is an error in which the IC chip number information in the game control unit information shown in FIG. 73(c) is different from the previous information. The medal count control RAM error is
This error indicates a defect in the RAM 358 of the medal count control unit 350. The lending machine communication abnormality is an error in which a lending notification is not received even though the VL signal from the lending machine 700 is in the ON state, as will be described in detail later. When any of the various errors shown in Fig. 76(b) occur, the seven segments of the indication monitor 125 shown in Fig. 68 are all lit, and an error notification sound is output from the speaker 272. Also, an error code for display is displayed on the performance image display device 157.

The gaming machine fraud information includes the setting status information and front door information shown in Figure 73 (a) explained using Figure 73, as well as information when fraud is detected, information indicating that the number of gaming medals has been cleared, and a security signal indicating that fraud is being detected.

The game information number information is information on the current bet number and the payout number. These two pieces of information are distinguished by type information. When the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted and a start lever acceptance command (game control state command) is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350, the current bet number becomes the value of the current bet number included in the start lever acceptance command. Also, when a payout command (game control state command) is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350, the payout number becomes the value of the payout number included in the payout command.

Returning to the explanation using FIG. 75(b), the medal count control unit 350 sends 300 medals to the lending machine 700.
The gaming machine information notification transmitted at ms intervals contains gaming machine information of the code specified by the gaming machine information type. That is, when the gaming machine information type has a value of 0, the gaming machine performance information is stored.
When the value of the gaming machine information type is 1, the gaming machine installation information is stored, and when the value of the gaming machine information type is 2, the hall control and fraud monitoring information is stored. The gaming machine performance information, the gaming machine installation information, and the hall control and fraud monitoring information have different notification intervals, and the gaming machine performance information is notified once in the longest first time (e.g., 180 seconds), the gaming machine installation information is notified once in the second time (e.g., 60 seconds), and the hall control and fraud monitoring information is notified every shortest third time (e.g., 300 ms of the notification cycle). When the notification timings of these three pieces of information overlap, the notification of the gaming machine installation information is given the highest priority, followed by the notification of the gaming machine performance information. The lowest priority is the hall control and fraud monitoring information, which is notified the most frequently.

Fig. 75(c) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data portion of the count notification transmitted from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 at 300 ms intervals. As shown in Fig. 74, the count notification is sent within a range of 90 ms to 100 ms from the start of the gaming machine information notification. This is managed by a count notification interval timer that is set to 90 ms in step S3303 shown in Fig. 99, which will be described later in detail. Also, as will be described later in detail, the count button 171 shown in Fig. 68
When the count button 171 is pressed briefly once, the counted number increases by one medal, and when the count button 171 is pressed briefly multiple times until a cycle of 300 ms arrives, the number of medals equal to the number of short presses becomes the counted number.
On the other hand, when the count button 171 is pressed for 500 ms or more and a 300 ms period arrives, the count number becomes 50. That is, the count number can be set in units of one piece, or 50 pieces can be set at once. However, if the count number exceeds the value of the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358, this value of the number of game medals is set as the count number. The count medal number information is information representing the count number determined by the operation of the count button 171 until the 300 ms period arrives. The counted cumulative medal number is information representing the number of count medals accumulated since the power was turned on. FIG. 75(d) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data portion of the lending notification transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 at 300 ms periods.
As shown in FIG. 74, the lending machine 700 notifies the medal count control unit 350 of the lending notification within 170 ms from the start of reception of the count notification.
In step S3502 shown in FIG. 68, the lending notification interval timer is set to 170 ms, and the lending notification is monitored to see if it has been sent within 170 ms.
When the loan button 707 is operated, the "money balance" of the card is increased to a predetermined amount (for example, 100
If the remaining balance is equal to or greater than the specified amount (0 yen), then the number of medals loaned out will be the number of medals equivalent to the specified amount (for example, 50 medals). On the other hand, if the "money balance" of the card is less than the specified amount, then the number of medals loaned out will be the number of medals converted from the current balance at a specified rate. The loaned medal number information thus becomes information that indicates the number of medals loaned out in response to the operation of the loan button 707. The specified amount and the number of medals equivalent to the specified amount can be set in advance in the loaner machine 700.

FIG. 75E is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data section of the lending receipt result response sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. As will be described later, the medal count control unit 350
Then, whether the number of lent medals notified by the lending notice is 50 or less or whether the number of lent medals is 50 or less is determined by the RAM 358.
Whether the number of game medals stored in is less than a lending threshold value (for example, 15,000 medals) or
It is determined whether the counting process has been performed, and the receipt result of the number of loaned medals is determined to be either normal or abnormal. In the loan receipt result response, this receipt result is transmitted to the loaning machine 700.

Next, the game control state command that the game control unit 302 shown in FIG. 74 transmits to the medal count control unit 350 every 2.98 ms will be described.

Figure 77 is a table showing game control state commands.

The game control status command is a 16-bit command, with the most significant bit of the upper byte being used as a strobe signal, the remaining upper 7 bits representing the command type, and the lower byte representing the content. Note that Figure 77 also shows the command offset used when transmitting.

The game control unit 302 transmits a command representing advantageous state information (RB information, BB information, AT information), and after 2.98 ms has elapsed, transmits setting state information (setting change in progress information, setting confirmation in progress information).
After 2.98 ms has elapsed, a command representing front door status information (door open information) is transmitted. This completes the transmission of the gaming machine status information.

Then, after 2.98 ms, information expressing the total number of inserted coins in 3 bytes (total number of inserted coins information) is sent in three byte increments at 2.98 ms intervals. That is, the first byte is sent with a command type of 13H in the upper byte, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte is sent with a command type of 14H in the upper byte, and after 2.98 ms, the third byte is sent with a command type of 15H in the upper byte.

Next, after 2.98 ms, information (total payout information) showing the total payout number in 3 bytes is sent in 3 parts, 1 byte each, at 2.98 ms intervals. That is, the first byte is sent with a command type of 16H in the upper byte, the second byte is sent with a command type of 17H in the upper byte after 2.98 ms, and the third byte is sent with a command type of 18H in the upper byte after 2.98 ms.

Next, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, information expressing the MY counter value in 3 bytes (MY counter value information) is transmitted in three parts, each part being 1 byte, at intervals of 2.98 ms.
The first byte is sent with a command type of 19H in the upper byte, and after 2.98 ms has elapsed,
The second byte is sent with a command type of 1AH in the upper byte, and after 2.98 ms has elapsed,
The third byte is transmitted with a command type of 1BH in the upper byte.

Furthermore, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, the information expressing the total number of payouts of the reels in 3 bytes (information on the total number of payouts of the reels) is transmitted in 3 parts, 1 byte at a time, at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte is transmitted with a command type of 1CH with the upper byte being 1CH, and the second byte is transmitted with the upper byte being 1CH.
After .98 ms has elapsed, the second byte is sent with the command type 1DH in the upper byte, and
After .98 ms has elapsed, the third byte is sent with a command type of 1EH in the upper byte.

Then, after 2.98 ms, the information (information on the total number of consecutive payouts) that represents the total number of consecutive payouts in 3 bytes is sent in 3 parts, one byte at a time, at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte is sent with a command type of 1FH in the upper byte, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte is sent with a command type of 20H in the upper byte, and after 2.98 ms, the third byte is sent with a command type of 21H in the upper byte.

Next, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, information expressing the number of games played in 2 bytes (game count information)
is transmitted twice, one byte at a time, at an interval of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte is transmitted with a command type whose upper byte is 22H, and after 2.98 ms has elapsed, the second byte is transmitted with a command type whose upper byte is 23H.

Next, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, the role ratio monitor information is 2.98 m over 5 commands.
That is, the upper byte transmits information representing the ratio of the reels with a command type of 24H, the upper byte transmits information representing the ratio of the consecutive reels with a command type of 25H, the upper byte transmits information representing the ratio of the advantageous zone with a command type of 26H, and the upper byte transmits information representing the ratio of the advantageous zone with a command type of 27H.
The information representing the ratio of the specified role is transmitted with a command type of H, and the information representing the ratio of the role, etc. is transmitted with a command type of 28H in the upper byte. This completes the transmission of the gaming machine performance information.

Furthermore, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, the game control unit information is updated to 2.98
In other words, information expressing the IC chip ID number of the gaming control unit 302 in 4 bytes is transmitted in 1 byte increments four times at 2.98 ms intervals. Next, information expressing the IC chip manufacturer code of the gaming control unit 302 in 3 bytes is transmitted in 1 byte increments three times at 2.98 ms intervals. Next, information expressing the IC chip product code of the gaming control unit 302 in 8 bytes is transmitted in 1 byte increments eight times at 2.98 ms intervals. This completes the transmission of the gaming machine installation information.

Finally, the checksum value is transmitted. When the transmission of the checksum value is completed, the transmission of advantageous state information is resumed, and thereafter, the game control state command shown in FIG. 77 is transmitted one by one in sequence at intervals of 2.98 ms. If there is a game control priority command, the transmission of the game control state command is suspended until this command is transmitted.

Next, the medal count control state command that the medal count control unit 350 shown in FIG. 74 transmits to the game control unit 302 every 5.96 ms will be described.

Figure 78 is a table showing medal count control status commands.

The medal count control status command is also a 16-bit command, with the most significant bit of the upper byte being used as a strobe signal, the remaining upper 7 bits representing the command type, and the lower byte representing the content. Note that FIG. 78 also shows the command offset used during transmission. The medal count control unit 350 transmits VL signal information indicating whether the VL signal from the lending machine 700 is in the ON state. This VL signal information corresponds to basic information, and may include other information.

Next, after 5.96 ms has elapsed, the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is
The information expressed by two bytes is divided into upper and lower bytes, each of which is transmitted at intervals of 5.96 ms. In other words, the upper byte transmits the lower byte with a command type of 02H, and
After 96 ms has elapsed, the most significant byte of a command type with the most significant byte being 03H is sent.

Then, after 5.96 ms has elapsed, information indicating the number of counted sheets (counted sheet information) is transmitted.
After 96 ms has elapsed, information indicating the number of sheets lent (lend number information) is transmitted.

Finally, the error code described with reference to Fig. 76(b) is transmitted. When the transmission of the error code is completed, the transmission of the VL signal information is resumed, and thereafter, the medal count control status command shown in Fig. 78 is repeatedly transmitted in sequence every 5.96 ms. Note that, if there is a response command to the game control priority command, the transmission of the medal count control status command is suspended until this command is transmitted.

Next, we will explain the security commands transmitted from the game control unit 302 shown in Figure 74 to the first sub-control unit 400 at 100 ms intervals.

The security command includes VL signal information indicating whether the VL signal is on or not, door open information indicating whether the front door 102 is open or not, and "
The information includes information indicating the "number of game medals", information indicating the counted number, information indicating the number of loaned medals, etc. The information indicating the "number of game medals", information indicating the counted number, and information indicating the number of loaned medals are information transmitted from the medal count control unit 350 by the medal count control state command.

Various processing commands are also sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400. Examples of the various processing commands include a normal return command when power is restored, a setting change start command related to a setting value change, a setting change end command including the changed setting value, an error occurrence command and an error release command, a bet command including the number of coins inserted, a settlement button command indicating that the settlement button has been pressed, a performance information command including performance information, a start lever acceptance command indicating that the operation of the start button 135 has been accepted, first to third press commands accompanying the acceptance of the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, a game information command including game information, and a payout start command indicating the start of payout. In addition to the errors represented by the error codes described with reference to FIG. 76(b), errors in the error occurrence command and error release command include an error indicating that the number of game medals displayed is approaching the upper limit,
These include door open errors where the front door 102 is opened, and rental machine abnormality errors where the VL signal is turned off.

Figure 79 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350.

The game control priority command is a command that is sent with priority over the game control status command. If the medal control unit 350 requests retransmission after the game control priority command is sent, the game control unit 302 again sends the game control priority command to the medal control unit 350. Figure 80 (a) is a diagram showing the details of the game control priority command.

When the game control priority command is sent to the medal count control unit 350,
There are two types of game control priority commands: one in which a response command is returned from the game machine 100, and one in which the response command is not returned and the transmission of the medal count control status command continues. The former game control priority command is called game control priority command 1, and the latter game control priority command is called game control priority command 2.
79 shows a communication sequence when a game control priority command 1 is transmitted.

The game control priority command 1 includes a payout command, an input command, and a settlement command. The payout command has a command type with the upper byte 04H and the payout number (0 to 15
The command sends the number of pieces (100 pieces), then sends a command sequence number with a command type of 05H in the upper byte, and finally sends a checksum with a command type of 06H in the upper byte. In other words, when sending a dispensing command, three commands are sent in succession.

The input command transmits the number of inputs (0 to 3) with a command type of 07H in the upper byte, then transmits a command sequence number with a command type of 08H in the upper byte, and finally transmits a checksum with a command type of 09H in the upper byte. In other words, even when transmitting an input command, three commands are transmitted in succession.

The settlement command transmits the settlement number (0 to 3) with a command type whose upper byte is 0AH, then transmits a command sequence number with a command type whose upper byte is 0BH, and finally transmits a checksum with a command type whose upper byte is 0CH. In other words, when transmitting a settlement command, three commands are transmitted in succession.

When the medal count control unit 350 shown in FIG. 79 receives game control priority command 1, it transmits a response command.

Figure 80 (b) is a diagram showing details of the response command returned from the medal count control unit 350 to the game control unit 302.

The response command may be sent in response to a withdrawal command (withdrawal response), in response to an input command (input response), or in response to a settlement command (
There are settlement responses. The response command has a value of 00H in the upper byte, which is the command type value. The payout response is a response command that includes one of the following: normal, abnormal, or a request to re-attempt the payout command. Note that normal here corresponds to the completion of payout, and abnormal corresponds to the number of game medals exceeding the payout threshold value (for example, 16,383 medals) due to payout.

The input response is a response command that includes one of the following: normal, abnormal, or a request to retry the input command. Note that normal here corresponds to input completion, and abnormal here corresponds to input failure or invalid input.

The settlement response is a response command that includes one of the following: normal, abnormal, or a request to re-request the settlement command. Note that normal here corresponds to the completion of settlement, and abnormal here corresponds to the number of game medals exceeding the settlement threshold (for example, 16,383 medals) due to settlement. Note that the settlement threshold is a threshold with the same value as the payout threshold described above.

Figure 81 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command 2 is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), the game control priority command 2 includes an error occurrence command and a R
The command includes an AM clear command and a start lever operation command. The error occurrence command is a command type with the upper byte set to 01H, and is a command that indicates the occurrence of various errors shown in Fig. 76(b).

The RAM clear command is a command type whose upper byte is 02H, and is a command that includes whether the RAM 308 is normal as determined by the game control unit 302, or whether the RAM 308 is defective as determined by the game control unit 302.

The start lever acceptance command is a command type with the upper byte being 03H. When the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, the bet amount is confirmed, and the confirmed bet amount (current bet amount: 1 to
3) is a command that includes information representing the

"Pattern Arrangement"
A predetermined number of different symbols are arranged on each of the reels 110 to 112. In order to enhance the entertainment value of the game, the slot machine 100 in this embodiment is configured to stop the corresponding reel 110 to 112 within the maximum reel-in range from the position where the reel is stopped.

Types of winning roles
The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a special combination, a replay combination, and a small combination. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and any combination may be adopted.

Types of internal winning roles
In a game, an internal winning combination is determined by a lottery at the start of the game, and in that game, it is possible to win a combination corresponding to this internal winning combination. Note that, depending on the combination, the result of the internal winning combination may be carried over to the next game.

Types of game states
The slot machine 100 is provided with various states with different degrees of advantage, and the degree of advantage is changed by transitioning between these states, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<<Processing Overview>>
The following describes, with reference to the drawings, the processing of the game control unit 302, medal count control unit 350, first sub-control unit 400, and second sub-control unit 500. Note that this embodiment employs a so-called medal-less configuration in which actual medals are not used, but information equivalent to the number of real medals (virtual medal count), and in the following description, this information will be referred to as "medal count."

<<Game control unit main processing>>
First, the game control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 will be described with reference to Fig. 82. Note that Fig. 82 is a flow chart showing the flow of the game control unit main processing.

As described above, the game control unit 302 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 that receives this start signal is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the game control unit main process shown in FIG. 82 in accordance with the control program previously stored in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In these initial settings, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt prohibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables (including the MY counter described later) stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and operation permission and initial values are set to the WDT 314.
When the settings are changed, the contents of the RAM 308 are initialized. Also, when it is determined in the recovery process that there is an abnormality in the backup data of the RAM 308, the contents of the RAM 308 are initialized. When this initialization is performed, a RAM clear command including information on whether the initialization has been completed normally is sent to the medal count control unit 350.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start lever acceptance process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S103, valid winning lines are determined.

In step S104, a winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current game state, and an internal winning combination is determined by performing an internal lottery (lottery for combinations) using the winning combination table and the random number obtained from the random number generating circuit 316. If any winning combination (including an operating combination) is internally won as a result of the internal lottery, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, reel stop data corresponding to the stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the game control unit 302.

In step S106, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate on the condition that the game interval timer (which is subtracted in the timer update process described later) is 0, and an initial value is set to the game interval timer. In addition, when the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate, preparations are made to send a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. Then, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate.
When the reels reach a predetermined rotation speed, the optical sensors on each reel detect the positions of the symbols on the reels, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 are activated to stop the reels. The game interval counter is used to count the minimum time required for one game (4.
1s) and reduces the risk of speculation.

In step S107, a reel stop control process is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137 to 139 are stopped. Specifically, each time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referenced, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. In addition, for the first stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. In addition, for each stop operation, preparation is made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, preparation is made to send the corresponding command (first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. All the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.
When 12 stops, the process proceeds to step S108.

In step S108, a winning determination process is performed. Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed on an activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to send a winning command to the first sub-control unit 400. In step S109, a medal awarding process is performed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89.

In step S110, a game state control process is performed, in which the status relating to the game state is updated based on the result of the game.

After that, the process returns to step S102 and the above-mentioned processing is repeated to progress the game.

Next, the medal insertion/start lever acceptance process (step S102) in the game control unit main process of Fig. 82 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 83. This figure is a flow chart of the medal insertion/start lever acceptance process (step S102) in Fig. 82.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S1003, and if there is any error status, the process proceeds to step S1002.

In step S1002, an error notification process corresponding to the error status is executed.
Proceed to step S1001 again.

In step S1003, one interrupt time waiting process is executed, and step S100
Go to 4.

In step S1004, interrupt processing is prohibited and the process proceeds to step S1005.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not a setting key operation has been accepted. If a setting key operation has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1006, and if a setting key operation has not been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1006, a process for confirming whether or not a setting key operation has been accepted is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1001 again.

In step S1007, it is determined whether the VL signal is ON. This VL signal is a signal that is always ON and transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350. The game control unit 302 grasps the state of the VL signal based on the information transmitted from the medal count control unit 350. If this VL signal is ON, the process proceeds to step S1008, and the V
If the L signal is in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step S1001 again.

In step S1008, it is determined whether or not operation of the start lever 135 has been accepted. If operation of the start lever 135 has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1009, and if operation of the start lever 135 has not been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1009, it is determined whether the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set on when a replay role is won and a replay is awarded. If the replay flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1010, and if the replay flag is on, the medal insertion/start lever acceptance process is terminated.

In step S1010, the current bet amount (current bet amount) is compared with the amount required to start a game (startable amount). If the current bet amount is smaller than the startable amount, step S1
If the current number of bets is equal to or greater than the number that can be started, the process proceeds to step S1012.

In step S1011, a medal insertion process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1001 again. Details of the medal insertion process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1012, 03H is set in the upper byte of the transmission content (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1013. The value set here is used to indicate that the command being transmitted is a start lever acceptance command.

In step S1013, the current bet number is set in the lower byte of the transmission content (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1014.

In step S1014, a process of sending a priority command to the medal count control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1015, a start lever acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and this medal insertion/start lever acceptance process is terminated.

Next, details of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in the medal insertion/start lever reception process in Fig. 83 will be described with reference to Fig. 84. This figure is a flow chart of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in Fig. 83.

First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement button 134 has been accepted. If the operation of the settlement button 134 has been accepted, step S110
If operation of the settlement button 134 has not been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1103.

In step S1102, the settlement button process is executed, and the medal insertion process is terminated. The details of the settlement button process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1103, it is determined whether or not operation of any of the bet buttons 130, 132 has been accepted. If operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1104, and if operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 has not been accepted, the medal insertion process ends.

In step S1104, it is determined whether the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to on when a replay role is won and a replay is awarded. If the replay flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1105, and if the replay flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1105, the requested number is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S1106.
This requested number is a value used to set the number of medals exchanged with the medal count control unit 350 .

In step S1106, the current bet number is compared with the maximum bet number (3 in this embodiment). If the current bet number is not the same as the maximum bet number, the process proceeds to step S1107, and if the current bet number is equal to the maximum bet number, the process proceeds to step S1110.
In step S1107, the value obtained by subtracting the current bet amount from the maximum bet amount is set as the requested amount, and the process proceeds to step S1108.

In step S1108, the bet buttons 130 and 132 that have been determined to have been operated are
If the bet button 130 or 132 that has been determined to have been operated is the one-coin bet button 130, the process advances to step S1109.
otherwise, proceed to step S1110.

In step S1109, the requested number is set to 1, and the process proceeds to step S1110.

In the above steps S1105 to S1109, if the current bet is the maximum bet, the requested number will be 0. Also, if the MAX BET button 132 is operated when the current bet is less than the maximum bet, and the maximum bet is 3 and the current bet is 0, the requested number will be 3, if the current bet is 1, the requested number will be 2, and if the current bet is 2, the requested number will be 1. Also, if the 1 BET button 130 is operated when the current bet is less than the maximum bet, the requested number will be 1.
It becomes.

In step S1110, 07H is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) to be sent to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1111. The value set here is used to indicate that the command being sent is an input command.

In step S1111, a process of transmitting change information to the medal count control unit is executed, and step S
Proceed to step 1112. Details of the process of transmitting fluctuation information to the medal count control unit will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1112, a response to the command sent in step S1111 is awaited, and it is determined whether the response is "normal." If the response is "normal," the process proceeds to step S1113, and if the response is not "normal," the process proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1113, the requested number of coins is added to the current bet number, and the process proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1114, a bet button acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit, and this medal insertion processing is terminated.

Next, the details of the settlement button process (step S1102) in the medal insertion process in Fig. 84 will be described with reference to Fig. 85. This figure is a flowchart of the settlement button process (step S1102) in Fig. 84.

First, in step S1201, which is executed first, a settlement button acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit, and then the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to on when a replay role is won and a replay is awarded. If the replay flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1203, and if the replay flag is on, the settlement button process is terminated.

In step S1203, the required number of coins and the current bet number are set, and the process proceeds to step S1204.

In step S1204, 0AH is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) to be sent to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1205. The value set here is used to indicate that the command being sent is a settlement command.

In step S1205, a process of transmitting change information to the medal count control unit is executed.
The process proceeds to step 1206. Details of the process of transmitting fluctuation information to the medal count control unit will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1206, it is determined whether the response to the command sent in step S1205 is "normal". If the response is "normal", the process proceeds to step S1207.
If the response result is not "normal", the settlement button process ends.

In step S1207, the current bet amount is set to 0, and the settlement button process ends.

Next, with reference to Fig. 86, details of the medal count control unit variable information transmission process (step S1111) in the medal insertion process in Fig. 84, the medal count control unit variable information transmission process (step S1205) in the adjustment button process in Fig. 85, and the medal count control unit variable information transmission process (step S1605) in the medal awarding process in Fig. 89 will be described.
4. Processing for transmitting variable information to the medal count control unit in FIG. 85 and FIG. 89 (step S1111,
13 is a flowchart of steps S1205 and S1605.

First, in step S1301 which is executed for the first time, the remaining number of transmissions is set to an initial value (4 in this embodiment), and the process proceeds to step S1302.

In step S1302, information indicating that the response result is "abnormal" is set, and the process proceeds to step S1303. This response result is overwritten by the response result from the medal count control unit 350, but if it is not overwritten (there is no response), it indicates "abnormal".

In step S1303, it is determined whether or not there is any error status. If there is any error status, the medal count control unit variable information transmission process is terminated, and if there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, the response waiting timer is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 100 ms in this embodiment), and the process proceeds to step S1305.

In step S1305, the remaining number of transmissions is decremented by one, and the process proceeds to step S1306.

In step S1306, if the value of the remaining number of transmissions is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1307.
If the value of the remaining number of transmissions is 0, the process of transmitting variable information to the medal count control unit is terminated.

In step S1307, a triple command transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1308. Details of this triple command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1308, if the value of the response wait timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1309, and if the value of the response wait timer is 0, the process proceeds again to step S1303.

In step S1309, if a response has been received from the medal count control unit 350, the process proceeds to step S1310; if not, the process proceeds to step S1308 again.

In step S1310, if the response received from the medal count control unit 350 is a "request again," the process proceeds to step S1303 again. If the response received is anything other than the above, the process proceeds to step S1311.
Proceed to.

In step S1311, the reception result of the response from the medal count control unit 350 is stored as the response result, and the process proceeds to step S1312.

In step S1312, the command serial number is incremented by one, and the process of transmitting variable information to the medal count control unit is terminated.

Next, the details of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in the medal count control unit variable information transmission process in Fig. 86 will be described with reference to Fig. 87. This figure is a flowchart of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in Fig. 86. Here, the triple command refers to a command consisting of a group of three commands transmitted in succession, and in this embodiment, the input command, settlement command, and payout command shown in Fig. 80(a) are each a triple command.

First, in step S1401 which is executed first, the checksum value is set to 0 (initialized), and the process proceeds to step S1402.

In step S1402, the requested number of medals is set in the lower byte of the transmission content (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1403.

In step S1403, a process for transmitting a priority command to the medal count control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1404, the checksum value is updated using the transmission contents (low-order byte).

In step S1405, the value of the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350 is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1406.

In step S1406, the command sequence number is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) to be sent to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1407.

In step S1407, a process for transmitting a priority command to the medal count control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1408, the checksum value is updated using the transmission contents (low-order byte).

In step S1409, the value of the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350 is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1410.

In step S1410, a checksum is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1411.

In step S1411, a process for transmitting a priority command to the medal count control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 88, the medal count control unit priority command transmission process (step S1014) in the medal insertion/start lever reception process in FIG. 83 and the medal count control unit priority command transmission process (steps S1403, S1404) in the triple command transmission process in FIG. 87 will be described.
83 and 87. The details of the medal count control unit priority command transmission process (steps S1014, S1403, S1406) will be described.
14 is a flowchart of the process of step S1409.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether the transmission buffer for the medal count control unit is empty. If the transmission buffer is empty, the process proceeds to step S1502.
If the transmission buffer is not empty, step S1501 is repeated.

In step S1502, the transmission contents (2 bytes) are set in the transmission buffer for the medal count control unit, and this medal count control unit priority command transmission process is terminated.

Next, the medal awarding process (step S109) in the game control unit main process of Fig. 82 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 89. This figure is a flow chart of the medal awarding process (step S109) in Fig. 82.

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S1602, and if there is any error status, the process proceeds to step S1603.

In step S1602, the value of the payout number is set as the requested number, and in step S160
Go to 4.

In step S1603, a notification process of an error corresponding to the error status is executed.
Proceed to step S1601 again.

In step S1604, 04H is set in the upper byte of the transmission content (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1605. The value set here is used to indicate that the command being transmitted is a payout command.

In step S1605, a process for transmitting change information to the medal count control unit (FIG. 86) is executed.
Proceed to step S1606.

In step S1606, it is determined whether the response to the command sent in step S1605 is "normal". If the response is "normal", the process proceeds to step S1607.
If the response result is not "normal", the process proceeds to step S1608.

In step S1607, a payout command is sent to the first sub-control unit, and this medal awarding process is terminated.

In step S1608, if there is no error request, a command indicating that the number of game medals is in an overflow state (cannot be added by payout) is sent to the first sub-control unit,
Proceed to step S1601.

<Game control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a game control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 will be described with reference to Fig. 90. Note that Fig. 90 is a flow chart showing the flow of the game control unit timer interrupt process.

The game control unit 302 is equipped with a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (in this embodiment, once every 1.49 ms), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to start the game control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined period.

In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed.
It performs processes such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the PU 304 in a stack area.

In step S202, the count value of the WDT 314 is set to the initial setting value (32 in this embodiment).
To prevent a WDT interrupt from occurring for more than 1.8 ms (to prevent detection of processing abnormalities),
The WDT 314 is periodically (in this embodiment, the period of the game control unit timer interrupt is 1.49
The restart is performed once every ms.

In step S203, an error monitoring process is executed.
It handles various errors such as abnormal communication with the car or abnormal opening/closing of the door.
In addition, if there is any error status, an error occurrence command including information on this error status is sent to the medal count control unit 350.

In step S204, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, detection signals from the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of detection signals is monitored, and the results are stored in signal status storage areas partitioned and provided for each of the various sensors 318 in the RAM 308. The status of the optical sensors is confirmed in this process.

In step S205, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S206, a medal count control command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S207, a game control command transmission process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S208, a presentation command transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission by the main process or timer interrupt process of the game control unit 302 are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In this embodiment, the output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, with bit 15 being strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 being command types (for example, basic commands, bet commands, start lever acceptance commands, internal winning commands, reel rotation start commands accompanying the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands accompanying acceptance of the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, first to third stop commands accompanying the stopping of the reels 110 to 112, winning commands, payout number commands and payout completion commands accompanying medal payout processing, game status update commands, etc.), and bits 0 to 10 being command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command types).

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type contained in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine presentation control in response to changes in game control in the game control unit 302, and it becomes possible to determine the content of presentation control based on the information of the command data contained in the output schedule information.

In step S209, a device monitoring process is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S204 are first read out to monitor for errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc., and if an error is detected (not shown), error processing is executed. Furthermore, the various lamps 336 and various seven-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S210, a security command transmission process is executed.
A security command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 at intervals of 00 ms. This security command includes VL signal information indicating whether the VL signal is on or not, door open information indicating whether the front door 102 is open or not, information indicating the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 308, information indicating the counted number, and information indicating the number of lent medals.

In step S211, a timer update process is performed. For example, the game interval timer is decremented.
In this manner, the various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S212, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is ON or not, and if the low voltage signal is received (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S214, and if the low voltage signal is not received (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S213.

In step S213, a timer interruption end process is performed. In this timer interruption end process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set back to the original registers, and the process then returns to the game control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S214, information (return data) that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers in order to return to the state at the time of power outage when power is restored, is saved in a specified area of RAM 308, a checksum value for the specified area that includes at least the used area of RAM 308 is derived and stored in RAM 308, and the power status is set to "normal."

Next, referring to FIG. 91, the error monitoring process (
The details of the disconnection determination process, which is one of the steps in step S203, will be described below.
13 is a flowchart of a disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in the embodiment.

First, in step S2001 which is executed first, if the value of the timer for determining disconnection is not 0, the process proceeds to step S2002, and if the value of the timer for determining disconnection is 0, the process proceeds to step S2003.

In step S2002, if the strobe signal transmitted from the medal count control unit 350 is on, the process proceeds to step S2004. If the strobe signal is off, the process proceeds to step S2005.
Proceed to.

In step S2003, the disconnection determination timer is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 20 ms in this embodiment), and the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2004, the timer for determining disconnection is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 20 ms in this embodiment), and the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2005, if the value of the timer for determining disconnection is 1, the process proceeds to step S2006, and if the value of the timer for determining disconnection is not 1, the disconnection determination process is terminated.
In step S2006, it is determined whether or not there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S2007, and if there is any error status, the disconnection determination process is terminated.

In step S2007, information indicating a disconnection error with the medal count control unit 350 is set as the error status, and this disconnection determination process is terminated.

Next, details of the medal count control command reception process (step S206) in the game control unit timer interrupt process in Fig. 90 will be described with reference to Fig. 92. This figure is a flow chart of the medal count control command reception process (step S206) in Fig. 90.

First, in step S2101, which is executed first, if the strobe signal transmitted from the medal count control unit 350 is on, the process proceeds to step S2102, and if the strobe signal is off, the medal count control command reception process is terminated.

In step S2102, the RA is calculated based on the command received from the medal count control unit 350.
The information in RAM 308 is updated. These commands include six types of medal count control status commands (FIG. 78) and a response command (FIG. 80(b)), and the type of command can be identified by the upper byte. That is, the type of command is identified by referring to the upper byte of the received command, and the contents of RAM 308 are updated based on the content.

In step S2103, it is determined whether or not there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S2104, and if there is any error status, the medal count control command reception process is terminated.

In step S2104, if the received command contains an error code (an error code in the medal count control unit 350), the error code is set as the error status. If there is no error in the medal count control unit 350, an error code indicating normality is set as the error status, but in this case, there is no error status.

Next, the game control command transmission process (step S207) in the game control unit timer interrupt process in Fig. 90 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 93. This figure is a flow chart of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in Fig. 90.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 is empty. If the transmission buffer is empty, step S2202
If the transmission buffer is not empty, the process proceeds to step S2207.

In step S2202, the command offset (see FIG. 77) is repeatedly updated by incrementing by 1 within the range of 1 to 41 (41 is followed by 1). As described with reference to FIG. 77, this embodiment employs a configuration in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly transmitted in sequence from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350. The command offset is used to sequentially switch the type of command to be transmitted.

In step S2203, a command corresponding to the command offset and information targeted by this command are read out to generate transmission contents, and the transmission contents are transmitted to the medal count control unit 350.
Set the destination send buffer.

In step S2204, it is determined whether the command offset is 41 or not. Of the 41 types of commands transmitted from the game control means to the medal count control unit 350, the last command (the 41st command) is a checksum generated based on the contents of the commands transmitted up to that point. In other words, the checksum is updated for command offsets 1 to 40 (step S2205), and the checksum is updated for command offsets 41.
When this occurs, the checksum updated up to that point is sent to the medal count control unit 350 (steps S2203 and S2207), and the checksum value is initialized to generate a new checksum (step S2206). After passing through the above processes, the process proceeds to step S2207.

In step S2207, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 are output (the I/O output port is updated) to the medal count control unit 350. The information output here is received by the medal count control unit 350 when the strobe signal is set to ON in step S2209 described later.

In step S2208, it is determined whether or not the strobe signal for the medal count control unit 350 is OFF. If the strobe signal for the medal count control unit 350 is OFF, the process proceeds to step S2209, and if the strobe signal for the medal count control unit 350 is ON, the process proceeds to step S2210.

In step S2209, the strobe signal for the medal count control unit 350 is set to ON, and this game control state command transmission process is terminated.

In step S2210, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 are cleared, and the process proceeds to step S2211.

In step S2211, the strobe signal for the medal count control unit 350 is set to off, and this game control state command transmission process is terminated.

《Medal count control unit main processing》
Next, a description will be given of the medal count control unit main processing executed by the CPU 354 of the medal count control unit 350 with reference to Fig. 94. Note that Fig. 94 is a flow chart showing the flow of the medal count control unit main processing.

As described above, the medal count control unit 350 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is turned on. The CPU 354 of the medal count control unit 350 that receives this start signal is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the medal count control unit main process shown in FIG. 94 according to a control program previously stored in the ROM 356.

When the power is turned on, first, power-on processing is performed in step S301. Here, initialization and restart of the WDT are performed until the power supply voltage reaches a predetermined voltage (9 V) or more, and when the power supply voltage reaches the predetermined voltage, access to the RAM 358 is permitted and an interrupt period is set. Furthermore, settings such as communication circuits are also performed.

In step S302, a RAM abnormality determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S303. The RAM abnormality determination process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

In step S303, a preparation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S304. Details of this preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98. In step S304, a transmission process of a gaming machine information notification is executed, and the process proceeds to step S305. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99.

In step S305, a counting notification transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S306. Note that details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S306, a process for confirming receipt of the lending notification is executed, and the process proceeds to step S307. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S307, if the loan notification receipt flag is on, the process proceeds to step S308;
If the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S304 again.

In step S308, a process for transmitting a loan receipt result response is executed, and step S30 is executed again.
Proceed to step 4. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, details of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in the medal count control unit main process in Fig. 94 will be described with reference to Fig. 95. This figure is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in Fig. 94.

First, in step S3001, if the power supply status is "normal", the process proceeds to step S3002. If the power supply status is other than "normal", the process proceeds to step S3005.
Proceed to.

In step S3002, a checksum value is derived based on the data in the RAM 358;
Proceed to step S3003.

In step S3003, the checksum value derived in step S3002 is compared with the checksum value derived at the time of power outage. If these values are the same, the checksum value is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S3004. If these values are different, the checksum value is determined to be abnormal and the process proceeds to step S3005.

In step S3004, a normal RAM clear (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3008. In this embodiment, there are four types of RAM clear processes, and as shown in FIG. 96, the normal RAM clear process has the fewest targets to be cleared. In addition to an area for storing information during play, RAM 358 also has an area for storing hardware information such as a chip ID, an area for storing information regarding the status of the gaming machine such as the ratio of advantageous zones, and a buffer for temporarily storing information received from the gaming control unit 302, but the normal RAM clear process mainly clears the area for storing information during play.

In step S3005, a full RAM clear process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3006. The full RAM clear process is the process that clears the most of the RAM among the four types of RAM clear processes.
The entire area is cleared as shown in FIG.

In step S3006, information indicating "RAM defect" is stored as the RAM defect information, and the process proceeds to step S3007.

In step S3007, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S3008.

In step S3008, if the game medal count clear switch 172 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S3009, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3011.

In step S3009, the number of game medals is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S3010.

In step S3010, information indicating "detection has occurred" is set as the game medal count clear detection information, and the process proceeds to step S3011.

In step S3011, the power-on flag is set to on.

In step S3012, execution of the interrupt process is permitted.

In step S3013, this determination process is repeated until a strobe signal ON from the game control unit 302 is detected, and when the strobe signal ON is detected, the process proceeds to step S3014.

In step S3014, execution of the interrupt process is prohibited.

In step S3015, the power-on flag is set to off.

In step S3016, it is determined whether or not a game control unit RAM clear command of the game control priority commands shown in Fig. 80(a) has been received. If this command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3017, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3020.

In step S3017, if the information included in the game control unit RAM clear command indicates a "normal" clear, the process proceeds to step S3018, and if the information does not indicate a "normal" clear, the process proceeds to step S3019.

In step S3018, limited (2) RAM clear (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) processing is executed. In this processing, as shown in FIG. 96, the area except for chip information, role ratio monitor information, etc. is cleared.

In step S3019, limited (1) RAM clear (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) processing is executed. In this processing, the area except for chip information, etc. is cleared, as shown in FIG. 96.

In step S3020, if information indicating "RAM failure" is stored as the RAM failure information, the process proceeds to step S3021, and if information indicating "RAM failure" is not stored as the RAM failure information, the RAM abnormality determination process is terminated.

In step S3021, information indicating "RAM failure" (error code E8) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S3022, an error request setting process is executed. The details of this error request setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 97, the error request setting process (
The details of step S3022 will be described below with reference to FIG. 95, which is a flowchart of the error request setting process (step S3022).

First, in step S3101 which is executed first, if no error code has been set in the error request, the process proceeds to step S3102, and if an error code has already been set, the error request setting process ends.

In step S3102, the value of the error request setting value (error code) is set as the error request.

In step S3103, if the error request is "E9" shown in FIG. 76(b), the process proceeds to step S3104, and otherwise the process proceeds to step S3105.

In step S3104, the rental machine communication abnormality error setting flag is set on, and the process proceeds to step S3105.

In step S3105, if the error request is "E7" shown in FIG. 76(b), the process proceeds to step S3106, and otherwise the error request setting process ends.

In step S3106, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and this error request setting process is terminated.

Next, the details of the preparation process (step S303) in the medal count control unit main process in FIG. 94 will be described with reference to FIG. 98.
03) is a flowchart.

First, in step S3201, which is executed first, the rental machine communication anomaly counter is set to an initial value (5 in this embodiment).

In step S3202, the chip information (ID, manufacturer code,
The product code) is updated. This information is stored in the ROM of the medal control unit.

In step S3203, interrupt processing is permitted.

In step S3204, this process is repeated while the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is on. When the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to off, step S320
Go to 5.

In step S3205, the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (6 in this embodiment).
A value equivalent to 0.196 seconds is set.

In step S3206, the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (1 in this embodiment).
A value equivalent to 80.588 seconds is set.

Next, the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in the medal count control unit main process in Fig. 94 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 99. This figure is a flow chart of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in Fig. 94.

First, in step S3301, the value of the gaming machine information notification interval timer is set to 0.
This process is repeated until the timer value reaches 0, at which point the process proceeds to step S3320.

In step S3302, the gaming machine information notification interval timer is set to an initial value (300 in this embodiment).
In step S3303, a value equivalent to 90 ms is set to the count notification interval timer.

In step S3304, the value of the number of game medals is set as the number of game medals for counting determination.

In step S3305, a gaming machine information type acquisition process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S3306, preparations are made for transmission of various gaming machine information according to the gaming machine information type. Specifically, when the gaming machine information type value is 0, preparations are made for transmission of gaming machine performance information, when the gaming machine information type value is 1, preparations are made for transmission of gaming machine installation information, and when the gaming machine information type value is 2, preparations are made for transmission of hall control and fraud monitoring information.

In step S3307, if the value of the gaming machine information type is 2, the process proceeds to step S3308, and if the value of the gaming machine information type is other than 2, the process proceeds to step S3311.

In step S3308, the number of inserted medals is set to 0.

In step S3309, the number of medals paid out is set to 0.

In step S3310, the game information count value is set to 0.

In steps S3311 to S3317, various gaming machine information (message length, command type, gaming machine information serial number, gaming machine type, gaming machine information type, gaming machine information, checksum) corresponding to the gaming machine information type prepared for transmission in step S3306 is transmitted (see FIG. 75(a) and FIG. 75(b)).
b)) are transmitted in sequence. The checksum is an updated value based on the contents of the transmissions up to that point.

In step S3318, the gaming machine information serial number is updated by 1 within the range of 1 to 255. Note that the value of the gaming machine information serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, details of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in the gaming machine information notification transmission process in Fig. 99 will be described with reference to Fig. 100. This figure is a flowchart of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in Fig. 99.

First, in step S3401, which is executed first, if the value of the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S3402, and if the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3403.
Go to 4.

In step S3402, the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (6 in this embodiment).
A value equivalent to 0.196 seconds is set.

In step S3403, the gaming machine information type is set to 1, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process ends.

In step S3404, the gaming machine information type is set to 2, and the process proceeds to step S3405.

In step S3405, if the value of the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is 0,
Proceed to 3406, and if the value of the timer is not 0, the gaming machine information type acquisition process is terminated.

In step S3406, the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (1 in this embodiment).
A value equivalent to 80.588 seconds is set.

In step S3407, the gaming machine information type is set to 0, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process ends.

Next, the details of the counting notification transmission process (step S305) in the medal count control unit main process in Fig. 94 will be described with reference to Fig. 101. This figure is a flowchart of the counting notification transmission process (step S305) in Fig. 94.

First, in step S3501 which is executed first, this process is repeatedly executed until the value of the count notification interval timer reaches 0, and when the value of the timer reaches 0, the process proceeds to step S3502.

In step S3502, an initial value (a value equivalent to 170 ms in this embodiment) is set in the lending notification interval timer.

In steps S3503 to S3505, the message length, command type, and counting number are sent sequentially to the rental device 700.

In step S3506, the count value is set to 0.

In step S3507, if the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S3508, and if the VL signal is off, the process proceeds to step S3513.
This is a signal that is always transmitted in an ON state from to the medal count control unit 350.

In step S3508, if the planned number of sheets to be counted is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3509, and if the planned number of sheets to be counted is 0, the process proceeds to step S3513.

In step S3509, the input prohibition flag is set to on.

In step S3510, if the number of medals to be counted is equal to or greater than the number of medals for counting determination, the process proceeds to step S3511, and if the number of medals to be counted is less than the number of medals for counting determination, the process proceeds to step S3512.

In step S3511, the count number is set to the number of game medals for counting determination.

In step S3512, the count number is set to the value of the planned count number.

In step S3513, the counted number is sent to the rental machine 700.

In step S3514, the counted number is subtracted from the number of game medals.

In step S3515, the planned number to be counted is set to 0.

In step S3516, the input prohibition flag is set to off.

In step S3517, the value of the counted number of medals is added to the counted cumulative medal number. In step S3518, the counted cumulative medal number is transmitted to the lending machine 700.

In step S3519, a checksum is transmitted to the rental device 700. Note that the checksum value transmitted here is a value updated based on the data transmitted to the rental device 700 in this counting notification transmission process.

In step S3520, the counting serial number is updated by 1 within the range of 1 to 255. Note that the value of the counting serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, the details of the lending notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in the medal count control unit main process in Fig. 94 will be described with reference to Fig. 102. This figure is a flowchart of the lending notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in Fig. 94.

First, in step S3601 which is executed first, if the loan notification reception flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S3602, and if the flag is ON, this loan notification reception confirmation process is terminated.

In step S3602, if the value of the lending notification interval timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S3603, and if the value is not 0, the process returns to step S3601.

In step S3603, if the VL signal is ON, the process proceeds to step S3604, and if the VL signal is OFF, the lending notification reception confirmation process is terminated. This VL signal is a signal that is always ON and is transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350.

In step S3604, the value of the rental device communication abnormality counter is decremented by 1, and this rental notification reception confirmation process is terminated.

Next, the loan receipt result response transmission process (step S308) in the medal count control unit main process in Fig. 94 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 103. This figure is a flowchart of the loan receipt result response transmission process (step S308) in Fig. 94.

First, in step S3701, the rental machine communication error counter is initialized (
In this embodiment, 5) is set.

In step S3702, the rental machine communication abnormality error setting flag is set to off.

In step S3703, if the loan number receipt result is "normal", the process proceeds to step S3704, and if it is other than "normal", the process proceeds to step S3707.

In step S3704, the value of the loan serial number is set to the normal loan serial number.

In step S3705, the value of the lending serial number is set in the confirmation lending serial number. The confirmation lending serial number is a value used for comparison with the next lending serial number (step S4104 in FIG. 106).
Step S3705 is provided for this comparison.

In step S3706, the confirmation lending serial number is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 255. Note that the value of the confirmation lending serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

In steps S3707 to S3711, the message length, command type, normal lending serial number, lending number receipt result, and checksum are sequentially transmitted to the lending device 700.
The checksum is an updated value based on previous transmissions.

In step S3712, if the loan receipt result is "normal", the process proceeds to step S3712, and if it is other than "normal", the loan receipt result response transmission process is terminated.

In step S3713, a waiting process is executed until the transmissions in steps S3707 to S3711 are completed.

In step S3714, the number of loaned medals is added to the number of game medals, and the loan receipt result response transmission process is terminated.

<Medal count control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a medal count control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the medal count control unit 350 will be described with reference to Fig. 104. Note that Fig. 104 is a flow chart showing the flow of the medal count control unit timer interrupt process.

The medal count control unit 350 is equipped with a counter timer that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (once every 0.745 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to start the medal count control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined period.

In step S401, a timer interrupt start process is performed.
It performs processes such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the PU to the stack area.

In step S402, to prevent the WDT count value from exceeding the initial setting value and causing a WDT interrupt (to prevent processing abnormalities from being detected), the WDT is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 0.745 ms, which is the period of the medal count control unit timer interrupt).

In step S403, an input port state update process (port read) is performed. In this input port state update process, the input contents to the input port of the I/O are stored in the signal state storage area in the RAM 358.

In step S404, a lending notification receiving process is executed, the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S405, a process for updating the number of sheets to be counted is executed, the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S406, the game control unit executes a command receiving process, the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S407, an error monitoring process is executed, the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S408, a process for transmitting a medal count control command to the game control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S409, a display display process is executed, the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S410, a timer update process is performed to update various timers according to their respective time units.

In step S411, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is ON or not, and if the low voltage signal is received (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S413, and if the low voltage signal is not received (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S412.

In step S412, a timer interruption end process is performed. In this timer interruption end process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S401 are set to the original registers, and the like. After that, the process returns to the medal count control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S413, information (recovery data) that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored, is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 358, a checksum value for the predetermined area including at least the used area of the RAM 358 is derived and stored in the RAM 358, and the power status is set to "normal".
In step S214 of FIG. 90, the same process is executed when the power supply is interrupted in step S214 of FIG. 90. However, if the process ends before the process in the game control unit 302 ends,
It will become impossible to receive commands from the game control unit 302. In order to prevent such a problem from occurring in this embodiment, a circuit configuration is adopted in which the processing here ends after the processing on the game control unit 302 side ends.

Next, details of the lending notification receiving process (step S404) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process in Fig. 104 will be described with reference to Fig. 105. This figure is a flowchart of the lending notification receiving process (step S404) in Fig. 104.

First, in step S4001 which is executed first, the loan notification receipt flag is set to OFF.

In step S4002, if a rental notification is received from the rental device 700, step S
The process proceeds to step 4003, and if not received, this lending notification reception process is terminated.

In step S4003, the information in RAM 358 is updated based on the received lending notice. That is, the data included in the lending notice is stored in RAM 358.

In step S4004, a lending number determination process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4005, the determination result in step S4004 is set as the loan number received result.

In step S4006, the lending notification reception flag is set to ON, and the lending notification reception process ends.

Next, the details of the lending number determination process (step S4004) in the lending notification receiving process of Fig. 105 will be described with reference to Fig. 106. This figure is a flowchart of the lending number determination process (step S4004) in Fig. 105.

First, in step S4101, which is executed first, the judgment result is set to "abnormal."

In step S4102, a checksum is calculated from the received loan notification data.

In step S4103, the checksum value included in the received lending notice is
If the two are equal, it is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S4104, and if the two are different, this lending number determination process is terminated.

In step S4104, the value of the rental serial number included in the received rental notice and the
If the two are equal, the process proceeds to step S4105. If the two are different, the lending number determination process is terminated. If the previous lending notification was received normally, the lending number for confirmation here is the same as the lending number for confirmation stored in step S3705 of FIG.
, the value set in S3706 (an updated version of the lending serial number received last time) will be used.

In step S4105, if the information of the message length and command type of the received lending notification corresponds to the lending notification, it is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S4106; otherwise, this lending number determination process is terminated.

In step S4106, if the value of the number of sheets lent included in the received lending notice is 0, the process proceeds to step S4111, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4107.

In step S4107, if the value of the number of game medals is less than 15,000, step S
The process proceeds to step 4108, and if the value is equal to or greater than 15,000, the lending number determination process is terminated.

In step S4108, it is determined whether the value of the gaming machine information type in the previously sent gaming machine information notification was 2, i.e., whether the gaming machine information notification was regarding hall control/fraud monitoring information. If the value of the gaming machine information type is 2, the process proceeds to step S4109; if the value is not 2, the process terminates.

In step S4109, if the count value in the previously transmitted count notification is 0, the process proceeds to step S4110, and if the value is not 0, the lending number determination process ends.

In step S4110, if the value of the loan quantity included in the received loan notification is 50 or less, the process proceeds to step S4111, and if the value is greater than 50, the loan quantity determination process ends.

In step S4111, the judgment result is set to "normal" and this lending number judgment process ends.

Next, details of the count scheduled coin number update process (step S405) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process in Fig. 104 will be described with reference to Fig. 107. This figure is a flowchart of the count scheduled coin number update process (step S405) in Fig. 104.

First, in step S4201 which is executed first, if the power-on flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4202, and if the flag is off, the process of updating the planned count number is terminated.

In step S4202, if the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S4203, and if the VL signal is off, the process proceeds to step S4213. Note that this VL signal is a signal that is normally transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350 in an on state.

In step S4203, if the count button 171 is being operated, the process proceeds to step S4204, and if the button is not being operated, the process proceeds to step S4210.

In step S4204, if the count long press flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S4205;
If the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4205, if the value of the count long press timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4206, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4206, the count long press timer is initialized to an initial value (500 ms in this embodiment).
(a value equivalent to) is set, and the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4207, if the value of the count long press timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4208, and if the value is not 1, the process proceeds to step S4210.

In step S4208, the count long press flag is set to on.

In step S4209, the value of the planned count number is set to 50, and this planned count number update process ends.

In step S4210, if the count button 171 was operated immediately before (count button 171
If the user releases the button, the process proceeds to step S4211; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S4211, if the count long press flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S4212;
If the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4213.

In step S4212, the value of the planned count number is incremented by 1, and the planned count number update process is terminated.

In step S4213, the count long press flag is set to off.

In step S4214, the count long press timer value is set to 0.

In step S4215, the value of the planned count number is cleared (set to 0), and this planned count number update process ends.

Next, the details of the game control unit command receiving process (step S406) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process in Fig. 104 will be described with reference to Fig. 108. This figure is a flow chart of the game control unit command receiving process (step S406) in Fig. 104.

First, in step S4301, which is executed first, if a change in the strobe signal from the game control unit 302 from off to on is detected, the process proceeds to step S4302; otherwise, the game control unit command receiving process is terminated.

In step S4302, the game control command disconnection timer is set to an initial value (in this embodiment, 1
A value equivalent to 90 ms is set.

In step S4303, if the received command is a game control status command, the process proceeds to step S4304, and if the received command is not a game control status command (it is a game control priority command), the process proceeds to step S4305. In step S4304, a game control status command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 109.

In step S4305, a game control priority command receiving process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the game control state command receiving process (step S4304) in the game control unit command receiving process of FIG. 108 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
4 is a flowchart of the game control state command receiving process (step S4304) in the game control state command receiving process (step S4304).

First, in step S4401, which is executed first, if the received command is a command to transmit a checksum, the process proceeds to step S4404, and if it is any other command, the process proceeds to step S4402. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly transmitted from the game control means to the medal count control unit 350, and the last command is a command to transmit a checksum calculated from the contents of the previous 40 types of commands. In other words, for the 1st to 40th commands, the process proceeds to step S4402, and for the 41st command, the process proceeds to step S4404.

In step S4402, the contents of the command receiving buffer are updated according to the contents of the received command.

In step S4403, the checksum is updated based on the contents of the received command, and the game control status command receiving process is terminated.

In step S4404, the checksum value updated in step S4403 based on the contents of the 1st to 40th commands is compared with the checksum value included in the command received from the game control unit 302, and if the two are equal, it is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S4405; if the two are different, the game control status command reception process is terminated.

In step S4405, the checksum value updated in step S4403 is cleared.

In step S4406, the value of the gaming machine status information buffer (the value of the gaming machine status information shown in Figure 73 (a)) from the contents of the command receiving buffer is set in the RAM 358.

In step S4407, if the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is off, step S
The process proceeds to step S4408, and if the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4410.

In step S4408, the acquired chip ID is acquired based on the information in the gaming machine installation information buffer from the contents of the command receiving buffer.

In step S4409, the chip ID stored in the RAM 358 and the
If the acquired chip IDs acquired in 408 match, the process proceeds to step S4410, and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step S4414.

In step S4410, the value of the gaming machine installation information buffer (the value of the gaming machine installation information shown in FIG. 73(c)) from the contents of the command receiving buffer is set in the RAM 358.

In step S4411, the value of the role ratio monitor information buffer, which is one of the contents of the command receiving buffer, is set in RAM 358.

In step S4412, the value of the gaming machine performance information buffer among the contents of the command receiving buffer is set in the RAM 358. In steps S4411 and S4412, the value of the gaming machine performance information shown in FIG.

In step S4413, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to OFF, and this game control state command receiving process is terminated.

In step S4414, information indicating "chip ID number mismatch" (error code E7) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4415, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and this game control status command receiving process is terminated.

Next, the details of the game control priority command receiving process (step S4305) in the game control unit command receiving process in Fig. 108 will be described with reference to Fig. 110 and Fig. 111. These figures are flow charts of the game control priority command receiving process (step S4305) in Fig. 108.

First, in step S4501, which is executed first, if a triple command is received, the process proceeds to step S4502, and if a command other than a triple command is received, the process proceeds to step S45 in FIG.
14. As described above, the triple command is a command consisting of a group of three consecutively transmitted commands, and in this embodiment, the input command, the settlement command, and the payout command shown in Fig. 80(a) are each triple commands. That is, if the triple command is received among the game control priority commands, the process proceeds to step S4502, and if an error occurrence command, RAM clear command, or start lever reception command other than these commands is received, the process proceeds to step S4514 in Fig. 111.

In step S4502, if the last command of the triplet command is received, step S
In this embodiment, the last command of the triplet command is a checksum, and the value of this checksum is calculated based on the contents of the commands excluding the last command. In other words, for commands excluding the last command, the process proceeds to step S4503, where the contents are stored in the receive buffer,
When the last command is received, the process proceeds to step S4504.

In step S4504, information indicating "request again" is set in the response command.

In step S4505, a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the receive buffer updated in step S4503.

In step S4506, the checksum value calculated in step S4505 is compared with the checksum value included in the last command of the triplet command, and if the two are equal, it is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S4507; if the two are different, the game control priority command reception process is terminated.

In step S4507, if a game control command serial number update flag described later is on, the process proceeds to step S4508, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4510. In step S4508, the value of the serial number of the triplet command stored in the receiving buffer is set to the value of the game control command serial number.

In step S4509, the game control command serial number update flag is set to off.

The above steps S4507 to S4509 are provided for initializing the command sequence number for determination.

In step S4510, if the value of the serial number of the triplet command stored in the receiving buffer is equal to the value of the game control command serial number (the game control command serial number (command serial number for judgment) updated in the previous S4511), proceed to step S4511. If the two are different, proceed to step S4512.
Go to 512.

In step S4511, the game control command serial number is incremented by 1.
Go to 4514.

In step S4512, information indicating "game control command serial number abnormality" (error code E3) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4513, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and this game control priority command receiving process is terminated.

In step S4514 of FIG. 111, if the received command is a RAM clear command, the process proceeds to step S4515, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4516.

In step S4515, the RAM clear command is received. In this embodiment, nothing is executed here.

In step S4516, if the received command is an input command, the process returns to step S451.
If not, proceed to step S4518.

In step S4517, a command input reception process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4518, if the received command is a settlement command, the flow advances to step S451
If not, proceed to step S4520.

In step S4519, a settlement command receiving process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4520, if the received command is a start lever reception command, the process proceeds to step S4521, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4522.

In step S4521, a start lever reception command reception process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4522, if the received command is a payout command, step S452
If not, proceed to step S4524.

In step S4523, a payout command receiving process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4523, an error occurrence command reception process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the details of the input command receiving process (step S4517) in the game control priority command receiving process in FIG. 110 and FIG. 111 will be described with reference to FIG. 112.
4 is a flowchart of a command input reception process (step S4517) in 11.

First, in step S4601 which is executed first, information indicating a "request again" is set in the response command.

In step S4602, if the input prohibition flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S4603.
If the flag is on, this input command reception process ends.

In step S4603, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

In step S4604, if the value of the number of game medals is greater than or equal to the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command), the process proceeds to step S4605; otherwise, the input command reception process is terminated.

In step S4605, the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command) is added to the value of the number of inserted medals.

In step S4606, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command) is added to the value of the current bet amount.

In step S4607, the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command) is subtracted from the value of the number of game medals.

In step S4608, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this input command receiving process ends.

Next, the details of the settlement command receiving process (step S4519) in the game control priority command receiving process in FIG. 110 and FIG. 111 will be described with reference to FIG. 113.
11 is a flowchart of the settlement command receiving process (step S4519).

First, in step S4701 which is executed first, the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command) is subtracted from the value of the current bet amount.

In step S4702, if the value of the current bet is 0, the process proceeds to step S4703, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4706.

In step S4703, the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command) is subtracted from the value of the number of inserted medals.

In step S4704, the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command) is added to the value of the number of game medals.
In step S4705, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this settlement command receiving process ends.

In step S4706, information indicating "disagreement in settlement quantity" (error code E6) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4707, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and this settlement command receiving process is terminated.

Next, the details of the start lever reception command reception process (step S4521) in the game control priority command reception process in FIG. 110 and FIG. 111 will be described with reference to FIG. 114. The same figure shows the start lever reception command reception process (step S4521) in FIG.
) is a flowchart.

First, in step S4801 which is executed first, the payout command acquisition flag is set to ON.

In step S4802, if the game interval abnormality timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4803, and if the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4807.

In step S4803, the value of the game interval abnormality timer is set to the initial value (4.1 in this embodiment).
A value equivalent to s is set.

In step S4804, 11H (see FIG. 76(a)) is set in the type information setting value, and in the following step S4805, the value of the received command (the current bet amount in the game control unit 302)
is set as the count information setting value. The information set here is later included in the gaming machine information and transmitted to the lending machine 700.

In step S4806, the game information setting process is executed, and the start lever command reception process is terminated. The game information setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

In step S4807, information indicating "game interval abnormality" (error code E5) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4808, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and this start lever acceptance command receiving process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the game information setting process (step S4806) in the start lever reception command reception process in FIG. 114 and the game information setting process (step S4A19) in the payout command reception process in FIG. 116 will be described in detail.
16 is a flowchart of the game information setting process (steps S4806, S4A19).

First, in step S4901, which is executed first, the number of game play information items is incremented by 1.

In step S4902, if the number of pieces of game information is 1, the process proceeds to step S4903, and if the number of pieces of game information is not 1 (is 2), the process proceeds to step S4905.

In step S4903, the type information setting value (the value set in step S4804 in FIG. 114 or step S4A14 in FIG. 116) is set as type information 1.

In step S4904, the count information setting value is set as the count information 1, and this game information setting process is terminated. Note that here, if the value set in step S4804 of Fig. 114 is set as the type information 1, the value set in step S4805 is set, and if the value set in step S4A14 of Fig. 116 is set as the type information 1, the value set in step S4A16 or step S4A18 is set.

In step S4905, the type information setting value (the value set in step S4804 in FIG. 114) is set as type information 2.

In step S4906, the count information setting value (see FIG. 114) is set as count information 2.
The value set in step S4805 is set, and the game information setting process is terminated.

In addition, the type information 2 and the count information 2 are generated when the game starts quickly after the payout (rental machine 700
In other words, when the payout information (step S4A14 in FIG. 116, etc.) is set in the type information 1 and count information 1, the current bet amount information (step S4A15 in FIG. 116, etc.) is set in the type information 1 and count information 1, and the current bet amount information (step S4A16 in FIG. 11) is set in the type information 1 and count information 1.
In some cases, the type information 2 and count information 2 may be set to the type information 2 and count information 2. Note that, from the start of the game to the payout, the reels are rotated and stopped, and even if there is type information or count information during that time, it is transmitted to the lending machine 700 (it is cleared), so the payout information is not set to the type information 2 and count information 2.

Next, the details of the payout command receiving process (step S4523) in the game control priority command receiving process in FIG. 110 and FIG. 111 will be described with reference to FIG. 116.
11 is a flowchart of the payout command receiving process (step S4523).

First, in step S4A01 which is executed first, the game medal count clear detection information is cleared.

In step S4A02, if the payout command acquisition flag is on, step S4A03
If the flag is off, proceed to step S4A09.

In step S4A03, if the replay has been won, the process proceeds to step S4A04, and if the replay has not been won, the process proceeds to step S4A05.

In step S4A04, the game medal count addition value is set to 0.

In step S4A05, information indicating "abnormal number of dispensed coins" (error code E4) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4A06, if the value of the received command (the value included in the first command of the triplet command) is 15 or less, proceed to step S4A07, and if the value is greater than 15, proceed to step S4A10.

In step S4A07, the number of medals to be paid out is set to the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command).

In step S4A08, the medal number addition value is set to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the three consecutive commands).
In this case, information indicating "game sequence abnormality" (error code E2) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4A10, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and this payout command receiving process is terminated.

In step S4A11, a process for checking whether the number of game medals has overflowed is executed.
Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4A12, if the information in the response command indicates "normal", step S4
Proceed to A13, and if not, end this payout command receiving process.

In step S4A13, the payout command acquisition flag is set to off.

In step S4A14, the type information setting value is set to 21H (see FIG. 76(a)).

In step S4A15, if a replay combination is won, the process proceeds to step S4A18, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4A16.

In step S4A16, the value of the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command) is set as the count information setting value. The first command of the payout commands here includes the number of coins to be paid out by the gaming control unit 302, and this number is set as the count information setting value. The information set here is included in the gaming machine information together with the type information setting value and is sent to the lending machine 700.

In step S4A17, the current bet is set to 0.

In step S4A18, the current bet amount is set to the count information setting value. The information set here is included in the gaming machine information together with the type information setting value and is transmitted to the lending machine 700.

In step S4A19, the game information setting process of FIG. 115 is executed, and this payout command receiving process is terminated.

Next, the details of the medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in the payout command reception process in FIG. 116 will be described with reference to FIG. 117.
13 is a flowchart of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in the game.

First, in step S4B01 that is executed first, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

In step S4B02, the sum of the number of game medals and the game medal number added value is set as the addition result.

In step S4B03, if the value of the addition result is 16383 or less, step S4B04
If the value of the sum is greater than 16383, the game medal number overflow confirmation process is terminated. In step S4B04, the value of the sum is set as the game medal number.

In step S4B05, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this game medal count overflow confirmation process is terminated.

Next, the details of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in the game control priority command reception process of Figures 110 and 111 will be described with reference to Figure 118. The figure is a flow chart of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in Figure 111.

First, in step S4C01, which is executed first, the error request is cleared. When an error occurrence command is received from the game control unit 302, the error on the medal count control unit 350 side is cleared by the processing here, so that the error on the game control unit 302 is processed with priority.

In step S4C02, if the received command contains information indicating "game control disconnection" (error code E1), the process proceeds to step S4C08, and otherwise the process proceeds to step S4C03.

In step S4C03, if the received command contains information indicating "game sequence abnormality" (error code E2), the process proceeds to step S4C08, and otherwise the process proceeds to step S4C04.

In step S4C04, if the received command contains information indicating "game control command serial number abnormality" (error code E3), the process proceeds to step S4C08, and otherwise the process proceeds to step S4C05.

In step S4C05, if the received command contains information indicating a "medal count control RAM error" (error code E8), proceed to step S4C08, otherwise proceed to step S4C06.

In step S4C06, if the received command contains information indicating a "medal count control disconnection" (error code E0), proceed to step S4C08, otherwise proceed to step S4C07.

In step S4C07, the received command is sent with information indicating "game control RAM failure" (
If an error code rE) is set, proceed to step S4C08; otherwise, end this error occurrence command reception process.

In step S4C08, the game control command serial number update flag is set to ON, and the error occurrence command reception process is terminated. By setting this flag to ON, the command serial number for judgment is initialized (step S4508 in FIG. 110).

Next, details of the error monitoring process (step S407) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process in Fig. 104 will be described with reference to Fig. 119. This figure is a flowchart of the error monitoring process (step S407) in Fig. 104.

First, in step S4D01 which is executed first, if the value of the game control command disconnection timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4D02, and if the value is not 1, the process proceeds to step S4D04.

In step S4D02, information indicating "game control disconnection" (error code E1) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4D03, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and in step S4D0
Go to 4.

In step S4D04, if the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter is 1, step S4D0
Proceed to step 5, and if the value is not 1, end this error monitoring process.

In step S4D05, if the rental machine communication abnormality error setting flag is OFF, step S
Proceed to 4D06, and if the flag is on, end this error monitoring process.

In step S4D06, information indicating "rental machine communication abnormality" (error code E9) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4D07, the error request setting process of FIG. 97 is executed, and this error monitoring process ends.

Next, the details of the medal count control command transmission process (step S408) to the game control unit in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 104 will be described with reference to FIG. 120.
1 is a flowchart of the process.

First, in step S4E01, which is executed first, the VL signal information is updated.

In step S4E02, if the power-on flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S4E0.
Proceed to step 3, and if the flag is on, end the process of sending the medal count control command to the game control unit.

In step S4E03, if the value of the strobe counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S4E04, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4E09.

In step S4E04, a response command (see FIG. 11) is sent to the game control unit 302.
If the response command set in either the insert command receiving process of FIG. 2, the settlement command receiving process of FIG. 113, or the withdrawal command receiving process of FIG. 116 is not set, step S4
The process proceeds to step S4E05, and if any response command has been set, the process proceeds to step S4E07.

In step S4E05, the command offset is repeatedly updated by incrementing by 1 within the range of 1 to 6 (after 6, the next command offset is 1).
78 to 02 in order. The command offset is used to sequentially switch the type of command to be sent.

In step S4E06, the command corresponding to the command offset and the information targeted by this command are read to generate the transmission contents, and the transmission contents are set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302. When transmitting the information on the number of game medals, this value is divided into upper and lower bytes, and transmitted using two of the six types of commands, and the value used in this case is the number of game medals obtained when the first of the two commands was transmitted.

In step S4E07, the response command set in either the deposit command receiving process of FIG. 112, the settlement command receiving process of FIG. 113, or the payout command receiving process of FIG.

In step S4E08, the response command set in either the deposit command receiving process of FIG. 112, the settlement command receiving process of FIG. 113, or the withdrawal command receiving process of FIG. 116 is cleared.

In step S4E09, if the value of the strobe counter is 3 or less, step S4E1
If the value is greater than 3, the process proceeds to step S4E11.

In step S4E10, the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to on.

In step S4E11, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 are cleared.

In step S4E12, the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S4E13.

In step S4E13, the value of the strobe counter is incremented by 1.
It is updated repeatedly within the range of 1 to 7 (7 is followed by 0).

In step S4E14, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 are
2, and the process of transmitting the medal count control command to the game control unit is terminated. The information output here is received by the game control unit 302 when the strobe signal to the game control unit 302 is set to ON.

Next, the details of the display unit display process (step S409) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process in Fig. 104 will be described with reference to Fig. 121. This figure is a flowchart of the display unit display process (step S409) in Fig. 104.

First, in step S4F01, if the value of the number of game medals is different from the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F02. If the two values are the same, the process proceeds to step S4F03.
Proceed to F07.

In step S4F02, if the value of the discrete timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4F03, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4F07.

In step S4F03, if the value of the number of game medals is greater than the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F04, and if the value of the number of game medals is less than the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F05.

In step S4F04, the value of the number of game medals to be displayed is incremented by 1.

In step S4F05, the displayed number of game medals is decremented by one.

In step S4F06, the discrete timer value is set to a value equivalent to 4 ms.

In step S4F07, the display number of game medals is displayed, and this display display process is terminated.

<<Variation 1>>
Here, a modified example of the process related to medal insertion (hereinafter, modified example 1) will be described with reference to Figs. 122 to 124. Fig. 122 shows a modified example of the medal insertion process shown in Fig. 84.
23 is a modified example of the triple command transmission process of FIG. 87, and FIG. 124 is a modified example of the input command reception process of FIG.

First, in the modified example shown in Fig. 122, step S1121 is provided between step S1107 and step S1108, and step S1122 is provided between step S1109 and step S1110, in the process shown in Fig. 84. Also, steps S1112 and S1113 in Fig. 84 are deleted and step S1123 is provided. These processes will be described below.

In step S1121, the input quantity limit flag is set to on.

In step S1122, the input quantity limit flag is set to off.

In step S1123, the value of the response content is added to the value of the current bet.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 123, step S1402 is deleted from the process shown in FIG.
Step S1421 is provided. This process will be described below.

In step S1421, information on the requested number of medals and the insertion number limit flag is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350.

In the modified example shown in Fig. 124, step S4603 is deleted from the process shown in Fig. 112. In addition, step S46 is newly added to the route of the No determination in step S4604.
Steps S4608 have been deleted and step S4624 has been added. These processes will be described below.

In step S4621, the received command (the first command of the three commands)
If the flag is off, step S462 is performed.
If the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4623.

In step S4622, the received command (the first command of the three commands)
For the received command value that stores the value of the requested number of medals included in the received command value, that value is set as the number of game medals, and the process proceeds to step S4605.

In step S4623, the received command (the first command of the three commands)
The value of the requested number of sheets included in the received command value stored in is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S4624.

In step S4624, the received command value is set in the response command, and this input command receiving process ends.

<<Variation 2>>
Here, a modified example of the scheduled count number update process (hereinafter, referred to as Modification 2) will be described with reference to Fig. 125. Fig. 125 shows a modified example of the scheduled count number update process of Fig. 107.

First, in the modified example shown in Fig. 125, step S4204 is deleted from the process shown in Fig. 107. Also, step S4206 is deleted and step S4221 is provided, and further step S4209 is deleted and step S4222 is provided. These processes will be described below.

In step S4221, a value of a long press timer corresponding to the press time of count button 171 is set.

In step S4222, the number of sheets to be counted according to the pressing time of the count button 171 is set.

<<Variation 3>>
Here, a modified example of the scheduled count number update process (hereinafter, referred to as Modification 3) will be described with reference to Fig. 126. Fig. 126 shows a modified example of the scheduled count number update process of Fig. 107.

First, in the modified example shown in Fig. 126, steps S4231 and S4232 are provided before step S4207 in the process shown in Fig. 107. Also, steps S4233 and S4234 are newly provided at the end of the route where the determination in step S4207 is No, and further steps S4235 and S4236 are provided before step S4210. Also,
Step S4237 is provided after step S4215. These processes will be described below.

In step S4231, if the value of the automatic count timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4232, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4232, the automatic count timer is set to a value equivalent to 2.0 seconds, and the flow proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4233, if the value of the automatic count timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4234, and if the value is not 1, the process proceeds to step S4235.

In step S4234, the automatic counting flag is set on, and the flow proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4235, if the automatic counting flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4210;
If the flag is on, proceed to step S4236.

In step S4236, if the value of the number of game medals is 0, the process proceeds to step S4213;
If the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4237, the automatic count flag is set to OFF, and this process of updating the number of sheets to be counted is terminated.

<<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 127(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 127(b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 127(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400.
First, in step S501, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S501. In this initialization process, the input/output ports are initialized, and a storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized. In this process, an area for storing internal win information, which is information indicating the result of an internal win, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information indicating the game status, are provided in the RAM 408.

In step S503, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, step S505
Then proceed to processing.

In step S505, the timer variable is assigned the value 0.

In step S507, command processing is executed, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control unit 302. For details of this command processing, see FIG.
) will be used later.

In step S509, a performance control process is performed. Here, the performance is prepared according to the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in the RAM 408. For example,
This includes processing such as reading the performance data from ROM 406, and updating the performance data if it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S511, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if the performance data read in step S509 includes a command to the sound source IC 418, the command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S513, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if the performance data read in step S509 includes a command for the various lamps 420, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S515, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if the performance data read out in step S509 includes a shutter control command, shutter control corresponding to this command is performed.

In step S517, an information output process is performed to set up sending a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if the performance data read in step S509 includes a control command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500,
The setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S503.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 127(b). This command reception interrupt process is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the game control unit 302. In step S521 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the game control unit 302 is treated as an unprocessed command and is treated as an RA.
The command is stored in a command storage area provided in M408.

Next, using Figure 127 (c), we will explain the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment),
This timer interrupt is used as a trigger to execute timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S531, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S503 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in Figure 127 (a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S533, the device data set in step S515 is sent to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random number values for performance are updated.

Next, the details of the command processing (step S507) in the first sub-control unit main processing in Fig. 127(a) will be explained using Fig. 127(d), which is a flowchart of the command processing (step S507) in Fig. 127(a).

First, in step S541, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed command. If this condition is met, the process proceeds to step S543, and if not, this command processing ends.

In step S543, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control unit 302, is executed.

<<Processing of the second sub-control unit 500>>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 8(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 128(b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 128(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 128(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S601 in Fig. 128(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S601. In this initialization process, the input/output ports are initialized, and a storage area in the RAM 508 is initialized.

In step S603, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, step S605
Then proceed to processing.

In step S605, the timer variable is assigned the value 0.

In step S607, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S609, a performance control process is performed. Specifically, if a new command is received in step S607, a process corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process is executed to read performance data for performing image control related to the background image from ROM 506. In addition, a process is executed to read other performance data from ROM 506, and if the performance data needs to be updated, a process is executed to update the performance data.

In step S611, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S609.
For example, if the performance data read in step S609 includes an image control command,
Image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding the display image (alert image, background image) is executed. This image control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 128(d). When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S603. Next, with reference to FIG. 128(b), the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S615 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 508.

Next, using Figure 128 (c), we will explain the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment),
This timer interrupt is used as a trigger to execute timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S617, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S603 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in Figure 128 (a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S603, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S619, the random number values for the effects are updated, etc.

Next, referring to FIG. 128(d), step S in the main processing of the second sub-control unit 500
The image control process of 611 will be described below with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

In step S621, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area between display area A and display area B of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of image stored in a display area not designated as a drawing area is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 writes, to the attribute register of the VDP 516, ROM coordinates (the transfer source address in the ROM 506) based on the position information table,
After setting the VRAM coordinates (the destination address of the VRAM 518) and the like, the VDP 516 sets a command to start transferring image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518.
Image data is read from the ROM 506 to the VR based on the command set in the attribute register.
The VDP 516 then transfers the data to the AM 518. The VDP 516 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S623, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S625; if not, the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S625, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table and attribute data.
In order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the AM 518, information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, VRAM coordinates (layout coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) is transferred to the VRAM 518.
The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the command stored in the attribute register.

In step S627, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504
The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S629, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal based on the end of image drawing has been input from the VDP 516. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, step S63
If not, the process proceeds to step 1 and waits for a generation completion interrupt signal to be input.

In step S631, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<<Operation Description>>
The operation of the above-described slot machine 100 will now be described.

[Power-on operation]
In the medal count control unit 350, the contents of the RAM are backed up when the power is turned off. Then, if it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM when the power is turned on, the RAM is cleared normally (or RAM cleared, RWM cleared, RWM initialized), and the state when the power was turned off is restored (Yes is determined in step S3003 in FIG. 95). Note that the initial state is restored when the power is turned on for the first time.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM when the power is turned on, a full RAM clear (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) is executed (No judgement in step S3003 in FIG. 95). Furthermore, by storing information indicating "RAM failure" in the RAM failure information, information indicating "RAM failure" (error code E8) is set in the error request (Yes judgement in step S3006 and step S3020 in FIG. 95, step S3102 in FIG. 97). This error information is sent to the game control unit 302 (FIG. 120), and an error notification based on this information is executed (step S1002 in FIG. 92 and FIG. 83). Note that the game control unit 302 does not clear the contents of the RAM even if it receives an error from the medal count control unit 350. Furthermore, in the medal count control unit 350, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and various information is updated (initialized) when a game control unit status command is received (Yes judgment in step S3007 of FIG. 95 and step S4407 of FIG. 109).

Also, when the power is turned on, a RAM clear command may be sent from the game control unit 302 (step S101 in FIG. 82). The medal count control unit 350 that receives this RAM clear command adopts a configuration that clears the RAM in response to the RAM clear command from the game control unit 302 (determination of Yes in step S3016 in FIG. 95). In addition, in this case, the medal count control unit 350 once permits interrupt processing, and then prohibits interrupt processing when it receives a command from the game control unit 302 and performs subsequent processing, so that it is possible to reliably receive the RAM clear command and perform processing when it is received (steps S3012 to S3014 in FIG. 95). Also, by setting the power-on flag to OFF while interrupt is permitted, the counting process by operating the count button 171 is not executed (steps S3011 and S3015 in FIG. 95).

In addition, the medal count control unit 350 can initialize the medal count by operating the medal count clear switch 172 when the power is turned on (Yes judgment in step S3008 of FIG. 95). At this time, information indicating "detected" is set in the medal count clear detection information, and while this information is set, information regarding this clear is included in the gaming machine information notification and sent to the lending machine 700 (FIG. 99). The medal count clear detection information is cleared when a payout command is received from the gaming control unit 302 (step S4A01 of FIG. 116).

[Game control state command transmission (periodical transmission from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350)] In the slot machine 100, 41 types of game control state commands (see FIG. 77) are transmitted to the medal count control unit 350. Specifically, in the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the game control unit timer interrupt process of the game control unit 302, the game control state commands are set one by one in the medal count control unit transmission buffer (
93 , "Yes" is determined in step S2201. However, if the game control priority command is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 first, the game control status command is not set in the transmission buffer (step S2201 in FIG. 93 , "No" is determined).

After the game control status command or the game control priority command is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350, the contents of this transmission buffer are output and the strobe signal is set to ON (Yes in step S2208 of FIG. 93). By setting this strobe signal to ON, the medal count control unit 350 receives the command.
The strobe signal is set to OFF in the next interrupt process, and the contents of the transmission buffer are cleared (determined as No in step S2208 of FIG. 93), but the output from the I/O port is maintained as is. This makes it possible to more stably receive commands on the medal count control unit 350 side. Then, when the contents of the transmission buffer are cleared, the contents of the transmission buffer are updated in the next interrupt process to send a new command (step S2208 of FIG. 93).
(Yes is determined in 2201). That is, in the game control unit 302, one command is transmitted while two interrupt processes are executed, and the transmission state and the transmission stop state are switched for each interrupt process. Note that while the transmission state continues for 1.49 ms (however, the command output itself continues for 2.98 ms), the game control unit 302 has two reception timings (two interrupt processes of 0.745 ms each), so it is possible to prevent a command from being missed.

[Game control priority command transmission (interrupt transmission from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350)]
In the game control unit 302, a game control state command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 in the timer interrupt process, but a game control priority command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 in priority according to the game situation in the game control unit main process. More specifically, when the transmission buffer becomes empty in the game control command transmission process (FIG. 93), the game control priority command is set in the transmission buffer in the game control unit main process before the game control command transmission process in the next timer interrupt process is executed (the next game control state command is set in the transmission buffer), and this game control priority command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 in priority to the game control state command. The game control priority commands include an insertion command associated with an insertion operation of a game medal, a settlement command associated with a settlement operation of the game medals currently set to the bet number, a start lever acceptance command associated with the acceptance of a start lever operation, a payout command associated with the payout of a game medal, an error occurrence command associated with an error occurrence, and a RAM clear command associated with a RAM clear (or a RAM clear, RWM clear, or RWM initialization) (FIG. 80(a)).

Among the game control priority commands, the insert command, the settlement command, and the payout command each consist of three commands. The first command contains information on the number of target game medals, and the second command contains the communication number of the game control priority command (
The first command contains a command sequence number, and the third command contains a checksum based on the contents of the first two commands. These commands are sometimes called triple commands because they are sent consecutively without being interrupted by other commands. The upper byte values of the triple command are consecutive values.

If a response command from the medal count control unit 350 is not received, or if the response command from the medal count control unit 350 includes information indicating a "request again," the command is resent (if No is determined in step S1308 of FIG. 86, or N is determined in step S1310).
If the upper limit of the number of retransmissions is exceeded, the response from the medal count control unit 350 is set to information indicating "abnormal" (step S1302, step S1
(No judgement in 306).

In addition, if the response command from the medal count control unit 350 contains information other than "request again," this information is set as the response result from the medal control unit, and the command serial number is incremented by 1 (steps S1311 and S1312 in FIG. 86).

[Operation of the gaming control unit 302 by insert operation (transmission of insert command, etc.)]
When a medal insertion operation is performed, the number of medals required by this operation (requested number) is determined (steps S1105 to S1109 in FIG. 84). In this embodiment, two types of bet buttons, a 1-bet button and a MAX-bet button, can be used for insertion operation. When the MAX-bet button is operated, the number of medals required to set the maximum number of bets is set as the requested number (step S1107 in FIG. 84), and when the 1-bet button is operated, the requested number is set to 1 (step S1109 in FIG. 84). However, if the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets, the requested number is set to 0 by the insertion operation (determined as No in step S1106 in FIG. 84).

Next, a command consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is an input command and lower byte data indicating the requested number of sheets (the first command that constitutes the input command)
is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 (step S1110 in FIG. 84,
S1111, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 87, and FIG. 88). When the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed in this state, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer, and the command previously set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal count control unit 350 (step S22 in FIG. 93).
01 is judged as No).

After that, when the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission process of the next game control unit timer interrupt process (determination of No in step S2208 of FIG. 93), the checksum is updated.
Furthermore, the data in the upper byte is incremented by 1 to update it to a value indicating the second command, and the command consisting of the data in the lower byte indicating the command sequence number (the second command constituting the input command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 (FIG. 87
Steps S1404 to S1407 in FIG. 88). Then, in the game control command transmission process of the next game control unit timer interruption process (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93), the command in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal count control unit 350, and when the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission process of the next game control unit timer interruption process (determination of No in step S2208 in FIG. 93), the checksum is updated, and further, 1 is added to the data in the upper byte to update it to a value indicating the third command, and a command consisting of the data in the lower byte indicating the checksum (the third of the commands constituting the input command) is transmitted to the medal count control unit 350.
0 is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1408 to S1411 in FIG. 87, FIG. 88).
Then, in the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the next game control unit timer interrupt process, the command in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal count control unit 350.

The insertion command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 in the above manner, and if the response command to this command contains information indicating "normal", the requested number of medals is added to the current bet value (Yes determination in step S1112 of Figure 84).

In addition, if a replay role is won and a replay is awarded (the replay flag is on), the above-mentioned input command is not processed (No is determined in step S1104 of FIG. 84).

Furthermore, between the time when the insertion command is sent and the time when the response command is received from the medal count control unit 350, the insertion command will not be sent even if the bet button is operated (step S1112 in Figure 84 waits until the response command is received).

In addition, when the bet button is operated, regardless of whether or not a response command to the insertion command is received and the contents of the response command from the medal count control unit 350, the first sub-control unit 40
A command is sent to number 0 (step S1114 in FIG. 84). The first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the bet button.

[Operation of the gaming control unit 302 in response to a settlement operation (transmission of a settlement command, etc.)]
When the player inserts the coin, the current bet amount is added to the total.
By performing the settlement operation, the game medals set to the current bet amount can be settled.

When the settlement operation is performed, the current bet value is the number of game medals required for the settlement operation (required number)
(No in step S1101 of FIG. 84, step S1203 of FIG. 85).
.

Next, a command consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is a settlement command and lower byte data indicating the requested quantity (the first of the commands that make up the settlement command)
is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 (step S1204 in FIG. 85,
S1205, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 87, and FIG. 88). When the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed in this state, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer, and the command previously set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal count control unit 350 (step S22 in FIG. 93).
01 is judged as No).

Next, the second and third commands that make up the settlement command are sent, but the processing for these is the same as for the input command, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The settlement command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 in the above manner, and if the response command to this command contains information indicating "normal", the current bet value is set to 0 (Yes judgment in step S1206 of Figure 85).

In the above example, the value of the current bet becomes 0 after the response command is received (if a response command indicating "normal" is received, the value of the current bet is subtracted), and the value of the current bet is not subtracted before the response command is received. On the other hand, the medal count control unit 350 that received the settlement command adds the number of game medals, so the number of game medals owned by the player at this point is temporarily increased. If the response command indicating "normal" is not received, the value of the current bet is not subtracted and an error occurs (No judgment in step S1206 of FIG. 85). However, if this error is avoided by some means, the value of the current bet is not subtracted, so that the medal count increases by the amount of the medal count added by the medal count control unit 350, and game medals are acquired illegally by the settlement operation. For this reason, the value of the current bet may be set to 0 before and after the settlement command is sent, and a configuration may be adopted in which the response command to the settlement command is not waited for (response command not used). In addition, in a configuration that does not use response commands, there is a risk that errors in the communication state cannot be found, but by configuring it to use response commands for input commands, errors in the communication state can be found, so that communication quality does not decrease. In addition, a command index may be managed between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350, and an error may be generated when the number of mismatches reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 5 times). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent operations based on fraudulent information from being performed.

In addition, when the medal count control unit 350 receives a settlement command including information on the number of medals exceeding the number of medals inserted, the medal count control unit 350 may not accept the settlement and may cause an error. This configuration can prevent game medals from being acquired fraudulently.

It should be noted that the medal count control unit 350 may not accept the settlement and may cause an error when it receives a settlement command including information on the number of medals exceeding 16. This configuration can prevent game medals from being acquired fraudulently.

It should be noted that the medal count control unit 350 may not accept the settlement and may cause an error when it receives a settlement command including information on the number of medals exceeding 16,384. This configuration can prevent game medals from being acquired fraudulently.

In addition, if a replay role is won and a replay is awarded (the replay flag is on), the above-mentioned settlement command processing is not executed (No determination at step S1202 in FIG. 85).

Furthermore, when the settlement button 134 is operated, a command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 regardless of whether a settlement command is sent or the contents of the response command from the medal count control unit 350 (step S1201 in FIG. 85). The first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command can execute a performance corresponding to the operation of the settlement button 134.

[Operation of the game control unit 302 by operating the start lever (transmission of the start lever reception command, etc.)]
If the start lever is operated when the current bet value is equal to or greater than the starting number,
A command (start lever acceptance command) consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is a start lever acceptance command and lower byte data indicating the current bet value is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 (steps S1012 to S1014 in Figure 83).
Furthermore, a start lever acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 83
(Step S1014) When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this command, it can execute a performance corresponding to the operation of the start lever.

[Operation of the gaming control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of payout command, etc.)]
When the game ends and a winning combination with a payout is won, the value of this payout number is set to the number of game medals requested for payout (requested number) (step S1602 in FIG. 89).
A command consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is a payout command and lower byte data indicating the requested number of medals (the first command among the commands constituting the payout command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 (steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 89).
, Steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 87, and FIG. 88). In this state, when the game control command transmission process (Step S207 in FIG. 90, FIG. 93) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer, and the command previously set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal count control unit 350 (No in Step S2201 in FIG. 93).
(Determination of.)

Next, the second and third commands that make up the payout command are sent, but the processing is the same as for the insert command, so the explanation will be omitted. The payout command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 in the above manner, and if the response command to this command contains information indicating "normal", the first sub-control unit 4
A command is sent to number 00 (step S1607 in FIG. 89). The first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command can execute a presentation corresponding to the payout.

On the other hand, if the response command is "abnormal" and nothing is set in the error request,
The number of medals played has overflowed and payouts cannot be accepted.
A command indicating this state is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S in FIG. 89).
1608). The first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command can execute an effect corresponding to the overflow. If the overflow state is not resolved, the payout command will be repeatedly resent, and the game will be unable to proceed. In this case, the overflow state can be resolved by operating the counting button 171. If the overflow state is resolved, an effect corresponding to the payout will be executed, and the game will be able to proceed. In other words, if the game cannot proceed due to an overflow, the player can deal with it himself without having to call a store clerk.

[Operation when medal count control command is received]
When the game control unit 302 receives a command from the medal count control unit 350 (detected by switching of the strobe signal, step S2101 in FIG. 92), it identifies the type of command (game control status command (FIG. 78) or response command (FIG. 80(b)) and updates the contents of the RAM 308 according to the type of command (step S2102 in FIG. 92). Note that the updated contents are referenced for response commands to insert commands, settlement commands, and payout commands. Also, if the command received here is a command that includes an error code, this error code is set as the error status of the game control unit 302, provided that an error status has not been set in the game control unit 302 (step S210 in FIG. 92).
4).

[Medal count control command transmission (from medal count control unit 350 to game control unit 302)]
In the slot machine 100, six types of medal count control state commands (see FIG. 78) are used.
To be more specific, the medal count control command transmission process to the game control unit in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process of the medal count control unit 350 (step S4 in FIG. 104)
120), the medal count control status commands are set one by one in the transmission buffer for the game control unit (determination of Yes in step S4E04 in FIG. 120). However, if a response command has already been set in the transmission buffer for the game control unit 302, the medal count control status command is not set in the transmission buffer (determination of No in step S4E04 in FIG. 120).

The medal count control status command and the response command set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 are then output to the game control unit 302 (step S4E14 in FIG. 120). In this state, if the strobe signal is set to ON (step S4E10 in FIG. 120),
The game control unit 302 receives the command. A strobe counter is used to manage the on/off state of the strobe signal, which is incremented by one for each interrupt within the range of 0 to 7. The strobe counter is set to on when it is between 0 and 3, and to off when it is between 4 and 7 (steps S4E09 and S4E13 in FIG. 120). The transmission buffer is updated when the strobe counter is 0 (step S4E03 in FIG. 120).
In other words, in the medal count control unit 350, one command is sent for every eight interrupt processes executed, and the sending state and the sending stop state are switched every four interrupt processes.
In addition, while the transmission state continues for 2.98 ms (0.745 ms x 4 times), the game control unit 302 has two reception timings (two 1.49 ms interrupt processes), so it is possible to prevent commands from being missed.

[Operation when game control status command is received]
When the medal count control unit 350 receives a command from the game control unit 302 (detected by switching of the strobe signal, step S4301 in FIG. 108), if the command is a game control state command, it executes a game control state command reception process (step S4304 in FIG. 108, step S4305 in FIG. 108).
09).

Forty-one types of game control status commands (Fig. 77) are sent in sequence, of which the first through 40th commands are temporarily stored in a buffer and the checksum is updated (No in step S4401 in Fig. 109). Then, when the 41st command (checksum) is received, if the contents are normal, the checksum is cleared and the RAM is updated based on the information temporarily stored in the buffer (steps S4406, S4410 to S4413 in Fig. 109). However, when updating the gaming machine installation information buffer, the role ratio monitor information buffer, and the gaming machine performance information buffer, this is executed only if the chip ID stored in the RAM matches the chip ID in the gaming machine installation information buffer (Yes in step S4409 in Fig. 109). If the IDs do not match, an error code E7 is set as an error request (No in step S4409 in Fig. 109). Also, if a full RAM clear (or RAM clear, RWM clear, or RWM initialization) is executed in the medal count control unit 350, the chip ID stored in the RAM is cleared, so in this case, as an exception, the update process is executed without checking the chip ID as described above (the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is on in FIG. 95, and the determination in step S4407 of FIG. 109 is No).

[Operation when game control priority command is received]
In the medal count control unit 350, when a command is received from the game control unit 302 (detected by switching of the strobe signal, step S4301 in FIG. 108), if the command is a game control priority command, a game control priority command reception process (step S4305 in FIG. 108, step S4306 in FIG. 108) is performed.
10, FIG. 111).

First, if the game control priority command is not a triple command (RAM clear command, start lever acceptance command, error occurrence command), the processing corresponding to each command is executed (Figure 111).

On the other hand, if the game control priority command is a triple command (insertion command, settlement command, and payout command), the first and second commands are temporarily stored in a buffer (step S4503 in FIG. 110). If it is the third command, the checksum value included in this command is compared with the checksum calculated from the contents previously stored in the buffer. If there is an abnormality, information indicating a "request again" is sent as a response command (step S4504 in FIG. 110).
504-S4606).

Next, if the game control command serial number update flag is on, the game control command serial number is updated to the value of the command serial number stored in the reception buffer, and the game control command serial number update flag is set to off (Yes in step S4507 in FIG. 110). Note that the game control command serial number update flag is a flag that is set to on in order to prevent a situation in which a separate command serial number error occurs after the error is resolved (FIG. 118).

Next, it is determined whether the game control command serial number matches the command serial number stored in the receiving buffer (step S4510 in FIG. 110). Since both the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350 add 1 to the command serial number (step S13 in FIG. 86),
12, step S4511 in FIG. 110), if there is no abnormality, these values will match. If these values do not match, an error code E3 is set in the error request (
(No in step S4510 of FIG. 110).

After the above processing, the processing corresponding to each command is executed (Figure 111).

[Operation when receiving a submission command]
If the received game control priority command is an input command, input command reception processing is executed (step S4517 in FIG. 111, FIG. 112). In this processing, if the value included in the input command (hereinafter, the requested number of input medals) is within the number of game medals, the requested number of input medals is added to the number of input medals, the requested number of input medals is added to the current bet number, the requested number of input medals is subtracted from the number of game medals, and then information indicating "normal" is set in the response command (Yes is determined in step S4604 in FIG. 112). Note that if the requested number of input medals is greater than the number of game medals, information indicating "abnormal" is set in the response command (step S4603 in FIG. 112, S
(No in step S3304). The value of the number of inserted medals is a value used in the gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time the gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 99).

In addition, while the count notification transmission process is being executed, the input prohibition flag is set to ON (
Step S3509 in FIG. 101), and if this flag is on, information indicating a "request again" is set in the response command (determination of No in steps S4601 and S4602 in FIG. 112).
.

[Operation when settlement command is received]
If the received game control priority command is a settlement command, a settlement command reception process is executed (step S4519 in FIG. 111, FIG. 113). In this process, the value included in the settlement command (hereinafter, the settlement request number) is subtracted from the current bet number (step S4520 in FIG. 113).
4701). If the value of the current bet number is 0, the settlement request number is subtracted from the number of inserted medals, the settlement request number is added to the number of game medals, and then information indicating "normal" is set in the response command (Yes is determined in step S4702 of FIG. 113). The value of the inserted medal number is a value used in the gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time the gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3308 of FIG. 99). If the current bet number is not 0, an error code E6 is set as an error request (step S470 of FIG. 113).
2 is judged as No).

[Operation when start lever reception command is received]
If the received game control priority command is a start lever reception command, the payout command acquisition flag is set to ON (step S4801 in FIG. 114). If this flag is not set to ON, an error will occur in the subsequent payout command reception process, and it may be possible to discover fraud prevention. Next, if the value of the game interval abnormality timer is 0 (Yes determination in step S4802 in FIG. 114), an initial value is set to the game interval abnormality timer (step S4803 in FIG. 114), and further, a process for setting game information is executed (steps S4804 to S4806 in FIG. 114). Here, 11H is set as the type information setting value,
This value indicates the start lever acceptance. The current bet amount is set to the count information setting value. That is, in these processes, the information on the number of game medals used by the acceptance of the start lever is stored as game information. The game information is stored in the lending machine 7.
This information is used for the gaming machine information transmitted to the game machine information transmission unit 00, and the number of pieces of information is initialized each time the gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3310 in FIG. 99). If the gaming interval abnormality timer is not 0, an error code E5 is set as an error request (step S48 in FIG. 114).
82 , the game interval abnormality timer is the same as the game interval counter in the game control unit 302 (step S106 in FIG. 82 ), but this timer is also used in the medal count control unit 350 separately from the game control unit 302 to prevent fraud.

[Operation when a payout command is received]
When the received game control priority command is a payout command, the game medal count clear detection information is cleared first. This information is set by operating the game medal count clear switch 172 when the power is turned on, and is configured to be transmitted to the lending machine 700 until it is cleared when the payout command is received.

Next, if the payout command acquisition flag is not on, an error code E2 is set as an error request (determination of No in step S4A02 in FIG. 116). This flag is set on when a start lever acceptance command is received, so if this flag is off, it means that a payout command has been received even though a start lever acceptance command has not been received, and is therefore used to prevent fraud.

Next, if a replay has been won, the game medal number addition value is set to 0 (step S4A04 in FIG. 116). In cases other than a replay win, if the value included in the payout command (hereinafter, the payout number) is 15 or less, the payout medal number and game medal number addition value are set to the payout medal number, respectively (steps S4A07 and S4A08 in FIG. 116). The payout medal number value is a value used in the game machine information sent to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time the game machine information is sent (step S3309 in FIG. 99). If the payout number is greater than 15, error code E4 is set as an error request (step S4A0 in FIG. 116).
5. No determination in step S4A06).

Next, a process for checking whether the number of game medals has overflowed is executed (step S4 in FIG. 116).
A11, FIG. 117). Here, if the sum of the number of game medals and the additional value of the number of game medals is equal to or less than 16,383, which is the upper limit of the number of game medals to be paid out, this sum is set as the number of game medals, and information indicating "normal" is set in the response command (step S4B03 in FIG. 117).
On the other hand, if the total value is greater than the upper limit of the number of game medals, the number of game medals is maintained as it is, and information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command (FIG. 117).
(No in step S4B03). The determination of the number of game medals here is as follows:
As will be described later (see [Lending notification (periodically transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350)]), in actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold, the number cannot be increased by payout (response command "abnormal"), and if the number does not exceed the actual threshold, the number can be increased by payout (response command "normal"). It is sufficient that a value exists that is the actual threshold, and any process can be used for the judgment process and judgment value (16383 in this embodiment).
For example, the actual threshold value does not have to be the same as the processing decision value.

If information indicating “abnormality” is set in the response command during the game medal count overflow confirmation process, the payout command receiving process ends and this response command is sent to the game control unit 302 .

On the other hand, if the response command is set to information indicating "normal", the payout command acquisition flag is set to OFF (step S4A13 in FIG. 116). Furthermore, a process for setting game information is executed (steps S4A14 to S4A19 in FIG. 116). Here, 21H is set as the type information setting value, which indicates that a payout has been made.
The number of medals paid out (or the current number of medals bet in the case of a replay win) is set as the count information setting value. That is, in these processes, information on the number of medals obtained by the payout is stored as the gaming information. The gaming information is information used in the gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and the number of pieces of information is initialized each time the gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3310 in FIG. 99).

[Gaming Machine Information Notification (Periodic Transmission from the Medal Count Control Unit 350 to the Rental Machine 700)]
In the medal count control unit 350, a gaming machine information notification is transmitted in the medal count control unit main process (step S304 in FIG. 94, FIG. 99). This gaming machine information notification is configured to be executed at intervals of about 300 ms by a gaming machine information notification interval timer (steps S3301, S3302 in FIG. 99). In addition, a count notification interval timer for adjusting the time until the count notification executed after the transmission of this gaming machine information notification is set to 90 ms (step S3303 in FIG. 99).

Next, the current medal count is set as the medal count for counting judgment. In the slot machine 100, since the medal count may change when the counting process (transfer of the medal count from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700) is performed, the value for counting process is temporarily set as the medal count for counting judgment (step S3304 in FIG. 99).

Next, the gaming machine information type is obtained (step S3305 in FIG. 99, FIG. 100). The gaming machine information notification includes gaming machine information, and one of three types of gaming machine information is selected as the gaming machine information: gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, and hall control/fraud monitoring information (FIG. 75(b)).
Specifically, when the gaming machine information type is 0, the gaming machine performance information is selected, when it is 1, the gaming machine installation information is selected, and when it is 2, the hall control/fraud monitoring information is selected. Here, using the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer and the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer, one of 0, 1, and 2 is set to the gaming machine information type (FIG. 100). In this embodiment, the gaming machine information type is set to 1 at intervals of about 60 seconds, the gaming machine information type is set to 0 at intervals of about 180 seconds, and otherwise the gaming machine information type is set to 2. That is, in the gaming machine information notification at a period of about 300 ms, the hall control/fraud monitoring information is mainly included in the gaming machine information, but the gaming machine installation information is included in the gaming machine information at intervals of about 60 seconds, and the gaming machine performance information is included in the gaming machine information at intervals of about 180 seconds. The data to be notified of the gaming machine information (FIGS. 75(a) and (b)), including the gaming machine information corresponding to these gaming machine information types, is set in a transmission buffer for the lending machine (step S3306 in FIG. 99) and is sequentially transmitted (steps S3311 to S3315 in FIG. 99).
At the time of this transmission, the gaming machine information serial number is updated (step S3 in FIG. 99).
318).

In addition, the hall control/fraud monitoring information corresponding to the gaming machine information type 2 includes gaming information according to the number of medals inserted, the number of medals paid out, and the number of gaming information items, and after this information is set in the transmission buffer for the loaned machine, it is initialized in preparation for the next transmission (Yes judgment in step S3307 in Figure 99).

[Counting notification (periodically transmitted from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700)]
In the medal count control unit 350, a counting notification is sent in the medal count control unit main process (see FIG. 9
The count notification transmission process is configured to be executed 90 ms or more after the start of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S305 in FIG. 99).
3303, step S3501 in FIG. 101).

In the counting notification transmission process, the data to be counted (FIG. 75 (a) (c)) is set in the transmission buffer for the rental machine and transmitted sequentially (steps S3503 to S3504 in FIG. 101).
05, S3513, S3518, S3519). At the time of this transmission, the counting serial number is updated (step S3520 in FIG. 101).

This count notification includes information on the number of counted sheets. If the number of sheets to be counted is 0, the number of counted sheets is sent as 0 (determined as No in step S3508 of FIG. 101, step S3513
In this case, the number of game medals does not change (step S3514 in FIG. 101). On the other hand, if a value other than 0 is set in the planned count number, the count number is set based on this value (steps S3511 and S3512 in FIG. 101), and the number of game medals is further subtracted (
Step S3514 in FIG. 101). The setting of the count number and the subtraction of the number of game medals are
Executed in a state where the input operation is prohibited (steps S3509 and S3516 in FIG. 101).
The planned count number is set in the planned count number update process of the medal count control unit timer interrupt process (step S405 in FIG. 104, FIG. 107).

[Setting the planned number of medals to be counted (medal count control unit 350)]
In the medal count control unit 350, a process of updating the planned number of medals to be counted is executed by the medal count control unit timer interrupt process (step S405 in FIG. 104, FIG. 107). The number of medals to be counted is determined based on the planned number of medals to be counted set in this process, and a counting notification including this information is sent to the lending machine 700.

First, a case where the count button 171 has been pressed for less than 500 ms will be described. In this case, the count long press timer is set to an initial value (step S42 in FIG. 107).
06), press the count button 1 before the timer value becomes 1 (500 ms has elapsed since pressing the button).
Since the count button 171 is released, the count long press flag is not set to ON (No Yes determination is made in step S4207 in FIG. 107). When the count button 171 is released in this state, 1 is added to the planned number of coins to be counted (Yes determination is made in step S4210 in FIG. 107, step S4212).

Next, a case where the count button 171 has been pressed for 500 ms or more will be described. In this case, the initial value is set in the count long press timer (step S4206 in FIG. 107).
When the value of the timer becomes 1 (500 ms has elapsed since the button was pressed), the count long press flag is set to ON and the number of coins to be counted is set to 50 (step S42 in FIG. 107).
107, "Yes" is determined. Thereafter, while the count button 171 is being pressed with the count long press flag on, the process of setting the planned count number to 50 is repeated, and the count number based on this planned count number is set each time a count notification is transmitted. On the other hand, when the count button 171 is released with the count long press flag on, the count long press flag is set to off, the count long press timer is set to 0, and the value of the planned count number is cleared (step S42 in FIG. 107).
10: Yes, and step S4211: No).

[Lending notification (periodically transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350)]
When the medal count control unit 350 receives a loan notification from the loaning machine 700, the contents of the RAM are updated based on the contents of the loan notification (step S4003 in FIG. 105). Then, it is determined whether the checksum calculated from the loan notification matches the checksum included in the loan notification (steps S4102 and S4103 in FIG. 106). Next, it is determined whether the confirmation loan serial number of the medal count control unit 350 matches the loan serial number included in the loan notification (
Step S4104 in FIG. 106). Note that the confirmation lending serial number is the lending serial number included in the previously received lending notification plus 1 (step S3706 in FIG. 103).
If the communication is normal, these are configured to match. In addition, it is determined whether the message length and command data are normal. If an abnormality is determined, the determination result is set to "abnormal."

Following the above judgment, if the number of loaned items included in the loan notification is 0, the judgment result is "normal".
(Yes in step S4106 in FIG. 106). On the other hand, if the number of loaned sheets is not 0, the following determination is further executed (No in step S4106 in FIG. 106).

First, if the number of game medals is 15,000 or more, the judgment result is set to "abnormal" (No judgment in step S4107 in FIG. 106). In this embodiment, if the number of game medals is 15,000 or more, it is configured so that it cannot be increased by lending. Note that, in this configuration, if the number of game medals exceeds 14,999, it cannot be increased by lending, and
If the number does not exceed 9 (if the number is 14,999 or less), an increase can be made through lending.
In order to realize this operation, other processing such as restricting the increase through lending when the number of medals is 15,000 or more, and allowing the increase through lending when the number is 14,999 or less, can be adopted, and the operation will be the same as in this embodiment. Also, the operation will be the same as in this embodiment even if the number of medals is allowed to increase through lending when the number is 14,999 or less, and the increase through lending is restricted in other cases. As described above, in actual operation, when the number of medals in play exceeds the actual threshold (1499 in the above case),
9), an increase through lending is not possible, and an increase through lending is possible if the actual threshold is not exceeded. As long as there is a value that is the actual threshold, any processing can be used for the judgment process and judgment value (15,000 in this embodiment), and for example, the actual threshold does not have to be the same as the judgment value for processing.

Also, the above determination may be made based on the number of game medals when added, rather than the current number of game medals. However, this configuration can also be said to be a configuration in which there is a value that is an actual threshold value including the number of game medals to be added to the current number of game medals. In other words, in this configuration, in actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold value, the number cannot be increased by lending,
If the actual threshold is not exceeded, it can be said that the structure allows for an increase through lending.

Next, if the gaming machine information type is not 2, the judgment result is set to "abnormal" (
(No in step S4108 in FIG. 106). In this embodiment, when the gaming machine information type is set to 2, lending is accepted.

Next, if the count number is not 0, the judgment result is set to "abnormal" (see FIG. 10).
(No in step S4109 of step 6). If the count number is not 0, the number of game medals is subtracted, and if the number of loaned medals is not 0, the number of game medals is added. Therefore, in this embodiment, these processes are configured not to be mixed.

Finally, if the number of sheets lent is greater than 50, the judgment result is set to “abnormal” (No in step S4110 in FIG. 106). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of sheets lent at one time is set to 50.

If the above determination is not abnormal, the determination result is set to “normal” (FIG. 106
(Yes determination in steps S4107 to S4110).

The judgment result of the above process is set as the loan number receipt result, and the loan notification receipt flag is set to ON (steps S4005 and S4006 in FIG. 105).

In addition to the above-mentioned loan notification reception process, the medal count control unit 350 executes a loan notification reception confirmation process in the medal count control unit main process (step S306 in FIG. 94, FIG. 102).
In this loan notification reception confirmation process, it is confirmed whether the loan notification reception flag is on for 170 ms from the start of the count notification transmission process (step S3502 in FIG. 101,
The loan notification reception flag is set in the loan notification reception process of the medal count control unit timer interrupt process (step S404 in FIG. 104).
, Figure 105).

If the rental notification receipt flag is not turned on within 170 ms from the start of the counting notification transmission process even though the VL signal is on, the value of the rental device communication error counter is decremented by 1 (step S3604 in FIG. 102). The value of this rental device communication error counter is initialized when the rental device reception result response transmission is executed (step S370 in FIG. 103).
1), when the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter becomes 1, an error occurs (step S4 in FIG. 119).
D06, S4D07).

[Lending receipt result response (periodically transmitted from medal count control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]
In the medal count control unit 350, after the loan notification reception confirmation process, if the loan notification reception flag is set to ON, the medal count control unit main process executes the loan reception result response sending process (step S308 in FIG. 94, FIG. 103).

In this rental receipt result response sending process, parameters related to rental machine communication abnormalities are initialized (steps S3701 and S3702 in FIG. 103).

Next, if the loan number reception result is set to "normal", the value of the loan serial number included in the received loan notification is set to the normal loan serial number (step S3704 in FIG. 103).
After the value of the lending serial number included in the received lending notice is set as the confirmation lending serial number, the value of this confirmation lending serial number is incremented by 1 (steps S3705 and S3706 in FIG. 103). In other words, the value of the confirmation lending serial number here is the same as the value of the lending serial number scheduled to be included in the next lending notice.

Next, the data to be included in the rental receipt result response ((a) and (e) in FIG. 103) is set in the transmission buffer for the rental device and is transmitted in sequence (steps S3707 to S3701 in FIG. 103).
1). By the above process, if the loan number reception result is "normal", the loan number received this time is sent, and if the loan number reception result is "abnormal", the loan number received last time is sent. If the loan number reception result is "normal", the value of the loan number is added to the number of game medals after this transmission is completed (Yes is determined in step S3712 of FIG. 103).

[Operation for Errors (Game Control Unit 302)]
The game control unit 302 judges various errors (step S203 in FIG. 90). For example, if a strobe signal is not detected for a certain period of time when a command is sent from the medal count control unit 350, a medal count control disconnection error is set in the error status (FIG. 91). When an error status is not set in the game control unit 302, an error status is set based on the error code of the medal count control unit 350. When an error status is set, a process is executed to notify that an error has occurred (step S1002 in FIG. 83, step S1603 in FIG. 89). For this reason, errors on the game control unit 302 side are given priority over errors on the medal count control unit 350 side, and, for example,
If there is no error on the medal count control unit 350 side, an error on the medal count control unit 350 side is notified. Also, the error status is transmitted to the medal count control unit 350 by an error occurrence command (step S203 in FIG. 90).

[Operation for Errors (Medal Count Control Unit 350)]
When the medal count control unit 350 determines that an error has occurred, an error code is set in the error request (step S3021 in FIG. 95, step S4414 in FIG. 109, step S4512 in FIG. 110, step S4706 in FIG. 113, step S4807 in FIG. 114, step S4A05 in FIG. 116, step S4A09 in FIG. 116, step S4A10 in FIG. 119, step S4B11 in FIG. 119, step S4C12 in FIG. 119, step S4C13 in FIG. 119, step S4C14 in FIG. 119, step S4C15 in FIG. 119, step S4C16 in FIG. 119, step S4C17 in FIG. 119, step S4C19 in FIG. 120, step S4C18 in FIG. 121, step S4C19 in FIG. 122, step S4C19 in FIG. 123, step S4C19 in FIG. 124, step S4C19 in FIG. 125, step S4C19 in FIG. 126, step S4C19 in FIG. 127, step S4C19 in FIG. 128, step S4C19 in FIG. 129, step S4C19 in FIG. 129, step S4C19 in FIG. 130, step S4C19 in FIG. 131, step S4C19 in FIG. 132, step S4C19 in FIG. 133, step S4C19 in FIG. 134, step S4C19 in FIG. 135, step S4C19 in FIG. 136, step S4C19 in FIG. 137, step S4C19 in FIG.
97). This error code information is sent to the game control unit 302 by a medal count control status command. When an error occurrence command is received from the game control unit 302, the error request is cleared (step S4C01 in FIG. 118). This clears the error on the game control unit 302 side from the medal count control unit 350.
The error is configured to be handled with priority over errors on the other side.

[Modifications to the inserting operation]
Fig. 122 is a modified example of the medal insertion process of Fig. 84, Fig. 123 is a modified example of the triple command transmission process of Fig. 87, and Fig. 124 is a modified example of the insertion command reception process of Fig. 112. The operations of these processes will be described below.

In the medal insertion process in FIG. 84, the required number of medals is determined according to the operated bet button 130, 132 and the current bet amount, and an insertion command including this information is sent to the medal count control unit 350 (FIG. 87).
When the 1 coin bet button (bet button 130) is operated, the input number limit flag is set to ON (step S1121 in FIG. 122), and when the 1 coin bet button (bet button 130) is operated, the input number limit flag is set to OFF (step S1122 in FIG. 122). Then, an input command including the input number limit flag information is sent to the medal count control unit 350 (FIG. 123).
).

In the input command reception process in Fig. 124, if the number of game medals is equal to or greater than the requested number, the requested number is added to the number of input medals and the current bet number, the requested number is subtracted from the number of game medals, and the value of the requested number is returned to the game control unit 302 by a response command (Yes is determined in step S4604 in Fig. 124). The game control unit 302 that has received this response command adds the value returned by this response command to the current bet number (step S1123 in Fig. 122).

In the input command receiving process of FIG. 124, if the number of game medals is less than the requested number,
The input number limit flag is referenced (determination of No in step S4604 in FIG. 124). If the input number limit flag is on, no processing is performed for the requested number, and 0 is returned to the game control unit 302 as a response command (determination of No in step S4621 in FIG. 124). The game control unit 302 that receives this response command adds the value 0 returned in this response command to the current bet number (step S1123 in FIG. 122), so that the current bet number is maintained without change.

In the input command reception process of FIG. 124, if the number of game medals remaining is less than or equal to the requested number and the input number limit flag is off, the operation is the same as when the current number of game medals is set to the requested number (Yes is determined in step S4621 of FIG. 124, and the number of game medals is set as the value of the received command in S4622). That is, the value of the current number of game medals is added to the number of inserted medals and the current bet number, and the number of game medals is subtracted to 0. The value of the number of game medals before subtraction (the value set in the received command) is then sent to the game control unit 3 by a response command.
02. The game control unit 302 that has received this response command adds the value returned by this response command to the current bet amount (step S1123 in FIG. 122).

In the above modified example, when the number of game medals corresponding to the requested number in the input command is insufficient, if the input number limit flag is on, 0 is returned for the requested number, and if the input number limit flag is off, the maximum number currently available is returned for the requested number. With this configuration, when the medal count control unit 350 cannot accommodate the requested number from the game control unit 302, it selectively chooses between not accommodating the request and accommodating as much as possible, and transmits information for this distinction (input number limit flag) along with the requested number. With this configuration,
For example, in a configuration in which the degree of advantage changes depending on the current bet number, it may be possible to prevent the current bet number from unintentionally becoming an unfavorable value.

In this embodiment, when the MAX BET button 132 is operated, a value required to set the maximum number of bets is set as the required number of coins. However, for example, a fixed value such as the maximum number of bets or another value may be set as the required number of coins.

In addition, for example, in a case where the maximum bet number is set as the required number,
When the coin bet button 130 is operated and the current bet number is 1, if the MAX BET button 132 is operated to transmit an input command with the maximum bet number as the requested coin number,
The medal count control unit 350 cannot accept this requested number of medals (it exceeds the maximum bet amount).
In this case, too, the medal count control unit 350 cannot accommodate the number of medals requested by the game control unit 302. In such a case, by sending the information for distinguishing between the two together with the requested number of medals, the operation of not responding to the requested number of medals (for example, returning 0 as a response command) can be performed.
and an action of responding as much as possible (for example, returning the maximum bet amount as a response command).

Example of operation
An example of the operation of the slot machine 100 described above will now be described.

[Example of counting process operation]
FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a first example in which the count button 171 is operated.
FIG. 1 is a timing chart of the first example, and FIG. 2(b) is a diagram showing the display mode of the game medal count display device 170, which is a five-digit seven-segment display.

In the timing chart shown in Figure 129(a), time progresses from left to right, and this also applies to the timing charts shown in the following figures.

At the top of the timing chart shown in FIG. 129(a) are (i) to (
The arrows are marked with symbols corresponding to the display periods of the game medal count display device 170.

At the bottom of the timing chart shown in FIG. 129(a), the medal count control unit 350
The timing at which the counting notification is sent from the lending machine 700 to the lending machine 700 is indicated as "counting timing." This counting timing has a cycle of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). The number of counted coins (the number of gaming values sent to the lending machine 700) at this counting timing is indicated.
Below "counted number" is shown the value of "game medal number" stored in the RAM 358. Further below that, the operation mode of the count button 171 is shown.

In the first example shown in FIG. 129, when the “game medal count” is 250, the count button 17
As shown in FIG. 129(b)(i), the operation of the game medal count display device 1
The number "250" is displayed in number 70.

Even when the first counting timing arrives after the operation of the count button 171 is started, the count button 171 remains operated.
Five seconds (500 ms) pass. Even after 0.5 seconds has passed, the count button 171 is still being operated, which results in a long press, and the number of sheets to be counted is set to 50 (see FIG. 107).
107). In the following description, the operation of the count button 171 for 0.5 seconds or more is referred to as a long press, and the operation of the count button 171 for less than 0.5 seconds from the start of operation is referred to as a short press. The count number update process shown in FIG. 107 is executed at 0.7 ms intervals, and while the count button 171 continues to be operated for more than 0.5 seconds, the value of the count number continues to be overwritten to a value of 50 at 0.7 ms intervals. After 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of operation of the count button 171, when the first count timing arrives while the count button 171 continues to be operated, the count number is set based on the value of the count number (50 in this example), and a count notification of 50 is sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. The "game medal number" is reduced by 50 and becomes 200. FIG. 129
As shown in (ii) of (b), the medal count display device 170 displays a change display in which "1" is subtracted from the number "250". This change display is performed by the display display process shown in FIG. 121, and the number is displayed by subtracting "1" at approximately 4 ms intervals. If the display on the medal count display device 170 suddenly changes from "250" to "200", the player may not notice the change in the display, so here, a change display is performed that shows how the numerical value is changing (a display that is performed until the number of medals after 50 medals are subtracted is displayed, and which allows the player to recognize that the number of medals is changing). Then, after approximately 200 ms
After the time s has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 129(b)(iii), the game medal number display device 17
The number "200" is displayed in place of 0.

When the count button 171 is pressed and held down and the next counting timing arrives, the count number is again set based on the value of the number of medals to be counted (50 in this example), and the medal count control unit 350 again sends a count notification of 50 medals to the lending machine 700. The "game medal count" is reduced by 50 medals to 150 medals. As shown in (iv) of FIG. 129(b), the game medal count display device 1
129(b)(v), the number "150" is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Furthermore, when the third counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is being pressed for a long time, a counting notification of 50 medals is sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700, and the "game medal count" is reduced by 50 medals to 100 medals. After that, it is assumed that the hand is released from the counting button 171 before the fourth counting timing arrives. In other words, the long pressing operation of the counting button 171 ends. In this case, since the value of the number of medals to be counted (here, 50 medals) is cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. 107, even if the fourth counting timing arrives, a counting notification of 50 medals is not sent, and the value of the "counting medal count" becomes 0 medals. Therefore, the "game medal count" also remains at 100 medals. In addition, since the change display is performed in a time (approximately 200 ms) shorter than the counting timing of 300 ms, the player can visually check the number after 50 medals have been subtracted, and if he or she wishes to keep that number of game medals, he or she can do so by ending the operation of counting button 171.

In addition, if the count button 171 is released before the first counting timing arrives after the operation of the count button 171 is started (if the hand is released at the timing of arrow A shown in FIG. 129(a)), one is added to the value of the number of coins to be counted (step S421 shown in FIG. 107).
2) When the counting time arrives, that one medal is transmitted as a counting notification. The "number of medals played" is reduced by one medal to 249 medals, and the number "249" is displayed on the medal count display device 170.

Furthermore, if the count button 171 is operated multiple times after the first operation of the count button 171 is started and before the first counting timing arrives, that is, if the button is short-pressed multiple times before the counting timing arrives, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is incremented by 1 each time the button is short-pressed. When the counting timing arrives, the number of sheets to be counted is set based on the value of the number of sheets to be counted (in this case, it corresponds to the number of single presses), and the value of the number of short presses up to that point is transmitted as a counting notification.

On the other hand, if the count button 171 is released before the first counting timing arrives after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the operation of the count button 171 was started (if the hand is released at the timing of the arrow B shown in FIG. 129(a)), even if the value of the number of medals to be counted is set to 50, this is cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. 107, so that the counting notification of 50 medals is not sent and the value of "count" becomes 0 medals (a counting notification of 0 medals is sent). Similarly, if the count button 171 is released before the next counting timing arrives after the display of the game medal number display device 170 changes from 250 medals to 200 medals over about 200 ms (if the hand is released at the timing of the arrow C shown in FIG. 129(a)), the counting notification of 50 medals is not sent and the value of "count" becomes 0 medals (a counting notification of 0 medals is sent).

FIG. 130 is a timing chart showing a first example of a presentation when counting is being performed.

130 shows the effect image display device 157 and the speaker 272. As described above, the security command transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 at 100 ms intervals contains information indicating the number of counted coins.

When the count button 171 is pressed briefly to count one coin, the effect image display device 157 does not display a display informing that counting is being performed, and if, for example, a game background display is displayed, the display continues. Also, the count sound is not output from the speaker 272. For example, if an effect sound corresponding to the game background display is output, the output continues. If the count sound is output for a small number, it may be mixed with other effect sounds, and may give the player a sense of expectation different from the sense of expectation that the other effect sounds were intended to express, so in the first example, the count sound is not output. If the count sound is output for a large number, the output time is longer, and there is little risk of it being mixed with other effect sounds, and there is little impact on other effect sounds. Note that, even if two coins are counted as a small number, the count sound may not be output in the same way as one coin.

On the other hand, when the count button 171 is pressed and held down and 50 coins are counted, the effect image display device 1
A display is displayed on the display unit 57 notifying the user that counting is taking place, and a counting sound is output from the speaker 272. That is, as described above, the security command transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 at 100 ms intervals contains information indicating the number of coins being counted. When information indicating 50 coins is transmitted as information indicating the number of coins being counted, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs a counting sound. Also, when information indicating 50 coins is transmitted as information indicating the number of coins being counted via the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 displays a counting in progress notification.

Furthermore, if you continue to hold down the button, 50 coins will be counted every 0.3 seconds.
As shown in FIG. 130, the character display "Continuous counting" is displayed on the effect image display device 157. This character display is displayed so as to overlap with the game background display.
A counting sound (e.g., a "beep beep...") having a length of 0.3 seconds or more is output from speaker 272. When the length of the counting sound output each time is 0.3 seconds or more, it connects with the counting sound output at the timing of counting the next 50 sheets, and sounds like it is being output continuously. If the counting sound is, for example, 0.5 seconds or more long, it will overlap with the counting sound output at the timing of counting the next 50 sheets, maintaining greater continuity and allowing the counting sound to continue uninterrupted during successive counting periods. The fact that continuous counting is taking place is made known by the text display "Continuous counting in progress" and the continuous counting sound.

In addition, when the counted number exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10) that is equal to or greater than 2 and less than 50, a counting sound may be output. In this case, a counting sound different from the counting sound during the long press may be output. In this way, for example, when the short press is repeated, it is possible to make the player aware that multiple coins have been counted. Alternatively,
The number of remaining medals stored in the "game medal count" is less than 50 (for example, 10 medals remaining)
When the count button 171 is pressed and held, 10 coins are counted instead of 50 coins, so that the change in the sound effect can make the player realize that only a few coins are left. Fig. 131 is a timing chart showing an example in which a bet operation was performed before the count button 171 was operated and the number of coins bet was not 0.
In this embodiment, even if the count button 171 is operated, the current bet value does not change.
In No. 31, if the current number of bets is not 0 when the counting button 171 is operated, a settlement process (the current number of bets is set to 0 and the decrement is added to the number of medals played) is carried out before the counting process is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 131, the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated, and the start lever 1
If the count button 171 is operated before the operation of the number 35, the settlement (the number of medals bet is returned to the "number of medals to be played") is performed.

In FIG. 131, the "current bet number" is shown, and below that, the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Further below that, the value of the counted number is shown.
At the bottom, the operation mode of the count button 171 is shown.

In this example, the MAX BET button 132 is operated and the "current bet amount" is 3 coins.
In response to this betting operation, the "number of medals to be played" stored in M358 is deducted by three medals, decreasing it from 68 medals to 65 medals. Then, instead of operating the start lever 135, the count button 171 is operated. When the count button 171 is operated,
The rising edge of the signal indicating the on/off state of 1 is detected, and based on this detection of the rising edge, first the number of medals bet is returned to the "number of medals bet". As a result, the "current bet" becomes 0, and the "number of medals bet" increases by 3 to 68. In other words, the state is returned to before the bet operation, and the previous bet operation is cancelled. After this cancellation, the counting process is carried out. The counting button 171 is pressed and held, and when the counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is still pressed and held, 50 medals are counted, and the "number of medals bet" decreases by 50 to 18.
It becomes one piece.

In this example, the current bet number can be returned to the "game medal number" by operating the counting button 171 without operating the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 68, but the number of game medals will change due to further counting processing. In this configuration, if you want to change only the current bet number, you can operate the settlement button 134. For example, if you want to change to a bet of 1 coin after betting 3 coins, you can operate the settlement button 134 to temporarily return the bet of 3 coins to the "game medal number", and then operate the bet button 130 for betting 1 coin again to set the current bet number to 1 coin. Note that since the settlement processing can be performed by operating the counting button 171 without operating the settlement button 134, the settlement button 134 may not be provided.

Figure 132 is a timing chart showing an example of the counting end presentation.

As described above, information indicating the number of counted coins is sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 in a security command. The first sub-control unit 400 accumulates the number of counted coins sent in the security command until the number of counted coins sent reaches 0, and executes a count end effect when the number reaches 0 (when counting ends). The count end effect here is an effect that corresponds to the number of coins counted at one time.

FIG. 132(a) is a diagram showing an example of a counting end effect performed when the cumulative count number is less than a predetermined number (e.g., 1000 coins). During counting, the effect image display device 157 performs a counting effect (e.g., the text display "Continuous counting" and the output of a counting sound as described with reference to FIG. 130), and when counting ends, a counting end effect 1 is performed in which the text display "Counting Ended" is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Meanwhile, FIG. 132(b) is a diagram showing an example of a counting end effect performed when the cumulative count number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (e.g., 1000 coins). When counting of the predetermined number or more ends, a counting end effect 2 is performed, and in addition to the text display "Counting Ended," a warning display "Be careful not to save too much" is added to the effect image display device 157.

As described above, in this embodiment, the RAM 358 of the medal count control unit 350 can store a maximum of 16,383 medals as the "game medal count." However, in the slot machine 100, there is a possibility that the "game medal count" will be lost.
It is desirable that the player not keep storing too many "game medal counts." Therefore, it is preferable to provide a notification to increase the frequency of operation of the count button 171.
The attention-calling display described using 2(b) is an example of a notification that increases the frequency of operation of the counting button 171, and encourages the lending machine 700 to move the gaming value appropriately.
The counting effect may also be changed according to the cumulative count number. For example, if the cumulative count number is less than a predetermined number (e.g., 1000), counting effect A is performed, and if the cumulative count number exceeds the predetermined number (e.g., 1000), counting effect B is performed. Furthermore, counting effect A is an effect that gives the impression of being in an appropriate state, and counting effect B is an effect that gives the impression of being in an inappropriate state. A large cumulative count number can give the player an undesirable impression.

Here, the operation of the slot machine 100 when the settlement button 134 is operated will be described.

FIG. 133 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the settlement button 134 is operated.

In conventional slot machines, real medals are lent, the real medals are inserted to secure credits, and the bet amount is set using the credits. In such conventional slot machines, the real medals are not only bet medals but also stored medals that are the subject of the settlement process (for example, 53 medals, which is the sum of the maximum number of bets of 3 and the maximum number of stores of 50, are settled). When this settlement process is completed, a demo command is output to the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 may execute a process of displaying a demo screen on the performance image display device 157. That is, there is a certain amount of time while the settlement process, which may involve the discharge of physical medals, is being performed. A settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs a performance related to the settlement based on this settlement button command, and when the settlement is completed, the display shifts to a demo performance based on the demo command.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, which does not require actual medals, the object of settlement is the medals bet (current bet amount, maximum 3 medals), and since no physical medals are discharged, the processing time related to settlement is very short. Therefore, after the settlement button 134 is pressed, the processing time related to settlement is very short, and the demo command is output to the first sub-control unit 400 without delay. Therefore, if a performance based on the execution of the settlement process is performed, this performance is performed only for a short time before the demo performance, which may result in the performance feeling strange to the player.

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 133, a settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400, but the first sub-control unit 400 does not execute any effect based on this settlement button command (such as outputting a settlement sound).

133, when a bet operation is performed and the "current bet number" is set to 3, the settlement button 134 is operated to perform a settlement operation. By this settlement operation, the number of bets (3 coins) is added to the "number of game medals", so that the number becomes 65 to 68 coins.

FIG. 133 shows the speaker 272 and the effect image display device 157. Even if a settlement operation is performed, no settlement sound is output from the speaker 272. In addition, the game background display continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the settlement display is not displayed. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 133 immediately switches to a demo display. That is, the first sub-control unit 400 starts a demo presentation based on receiving a settlement button command (or a demo command immediately after the settlement button command). In this example, only the demo presentation is executed at the start of the demo, making the start of the demo more clear.

In addition, the specification may be such that the settlement effect is executed (for example, for 2 seconds). Even if the demo effect has started, the settlement effect continues while this settlement effect is being executed, so that both effects are executed. Although the frequency of settlement operations is expected to be lower than that of conventional slot machines, the possibility of settlement operations due to fraudulent acts (so-called cheating) is not zero, so that the fact that a settlement process has been performed is notified to those around.

Next, an example in which the number of counted sheets changes depending on the length of time that the count button 171 is operated will be described.

Fig. 134 is a diagram showing an example in which the number of counted sheets increases as the operation time of the count button 171 becomes longer. In this example, the scheduled count number update process shown in Fig. 125 is adopted instead of the scheduled count number update process shown in Fig. 107.

Fig. 134(a) is a table showing specific values of the count long press timer set in step S4221 in the flowchart of the scheduled count number update process shown in Fig. 125. In this table, the value of the count long press timer is set for each long press stage value. That is, between the long press stage value 1 and 4, when the long press stage value increases, the value of the count long press timer decreases by a predetermined time (300 ms in this case). That is, the value of the count long press timer is shortened in stages. And when the long press stage value is 4 or more, the value of the count long press timer becomes a fixed value (300 ms in this case).

Fig. 134(b) is a table showing specific values of the planned count numbers used in step S4222 in the flowchart of the planned count number update process shown in Fig. 125. In this table, the value of the planned count number is set for each long press stage value. That is, when the long press stage value increases from 1 to 4, the value of the planned count number increases.
As a result, the number of sheets to be counted increases stepwise according to the operation time of the count button 171. Even if the same value is set multiple times, the number of sheets to be counted will increase stepwise as a result. For example, if the value of the number of sheets to be counted is 10→10→20→20→20→30→30→30→30→30→30,
Even if it is set to 0, the result is that it increases stepwise. And, when the long press step value is 4 or more, the value of the number of sheets to be counted becomes a fixed value (here, 50 sheets).

FIG. 134(c) is a timing chart when counting is performed using the count long press timer shown in FIG. 134(a) and the planned number of sheets to be counted shown in FIG. 134(b).

At the bottom of the timing chart shown in Fig. 134(c), the timing at which the medal count control unit 350 sends a counting notification to the lending machine 700 is written as "counting timing". This counting timing has a cycle of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). Meanwhile, at the top of the timing chart, a timing chart is shown in which the state in which the count button 171 is operated is represented as the ON state.

From the time when the count button 171 is changed from the OFF state to the ON state, a count long press timer (a value of 1.2 seconds) with a long press step value of 1 is set (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125).
If the count button 171 is operated and kept operating until the timer value reaches "1",
The number of sheets to be counted is set to 10 (step S4222 in FIG. 125). Then, when the timer value reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the count long press timer with a long press step value of 2 (a value for 0.9 seconds) is set (step S4221 in FIG. 125).
If the count button 171 is kept operated until the 0.9 seconds set in the count long press timer has elapsed, the number of sheets set as the number to be counted, 10, will be counted every time the count timing arrives at intervals of 0.3 seconds.

When the count long press timer reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, the number of sheets to be counted is set to 20 (step S422 in FIG. 125).
2). Next, when the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is still ON, a count long press timer (value for 0.6 seconds) with a long press step value of 3 is set (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125). If the count button 171 is kept operated until the 0.6 seconds set in the count long press timer has elapsed, the number of sheets to be counted, 20, is counted every time the count timing arrives at 0.3 second intervals.

When the count long press timer value becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated again, 30 sheets are set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Furthermore, when the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the count long press timer with a long press step value of 4 (a value for 0.3 seconds) is set (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125).
21) The count button 171 is pressed until the 0.3 seconds set in the count long press timer has elapsed.
If the operated state is maintained, the number of coins to be counted, 30, which has been set as the number of coins to be counted, will be counted when the counting timing arrives.

Then, when the value of the count long press timer reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 50 sheets is set as the planned number to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125).
After that, a value of 0.3 seconds is repeatedly set in the count long press timer (step S4221 in FIG. 125), and the number of sheets to be counted is repeatedly set to 50 sheets (step S4222 in FIG. 125). As a result, if the count button 171 is kept operated, 50 sheets will be counted each time the count timing arrives.

In the example described here, the value of the count long press timer becomes shorter and the value of the number of sheets to be counted increases as the operation time of the count button 171 becomes longer.
As the operation time of 1 becomes longer, the value of the counting long press timer may become longer and the value of the number of sheets to be counted may increase, or the value of the counting long press timer may become longer and the value of the number of sheets to be counted may decrease, or the value of the counting long press timer may become shorter and the value of the number of sheets to be counted may decrease.

In addition, the value set in the count long press timer may be gradually shortened and the value of the number of medals to be counted may be gradually increased until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in RAM 358 becomes 0.

FIG. 135(a) is a timing chart showing an example of a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 134(c).

In the example shown in FIG. 134(c), after the long press step value reaches 4, the value of the count long press timer becomes constant at the shortest 0.3 seconds, and the number of sheets to be counted becomes constant at the maximum 50 sheets.
This state may be continued until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in 58 becomes 0, but if the number of game medals falls below a certain value (for example, 300 medals), end-game processing may be executed. The end-game processing here refers to processing for lengthening the value of the count long press timer and decreasing the value of the number of medals to be counted as the number of game medals decreases.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 135(a) displays the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358. At the left end of this timing chart, the value of the count long press timer is set to a value for 0.3 seconds, and the number of medals to be counted is set to 50, and
The "number of game medals" becomes 299, and the "number of game medals" falls below a certain value (300).

When the count long press timer value reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, the planned count number is set to 50 again (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Note that the number set at this timing may be less than 50 (e.g., 30). Furthermore, when the timer value reaches "0" while the count button 171 is still ON, the count long press timer value is set to a value for 0.6 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125).
become longer.

When the count long press timer reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, the number of sheets to be counted is set to 30 (step S422 in FIG. 125).
2) Furthermore, when the timer value reaches "0" while the count button 171 is still in the ON state, the value of the count long press timer is set to a value of 0.9 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125) and is lengthened again.

When the count long press timer value reaches "1" again while the count button 171 is being operated, the planned number of sheets to be counted is set to 20 (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Furthermore, when the timer value reaches "0" while the count button 171 is still in the ON state, the count long press timer value is set to a value of 1.2 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125), which becomes even longer.

Then, when the value of the count long press timer becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, the number of sheets to be counted is set to 20 again (step S4222 in FIG. 125).
). The number of sheets to be counted may be set to a number less than 20 sheets (for example, 10 sheets). Furthermore, if the count button 171 is in the ON state and the timer value becomes "0", the count long press timer value is set to a value for 1.2 seconds again (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125). Note that if the count long press timer value exceeds a value for 1.2 seconds (for example, a value for 1.5 seconds),
In the example shown in Fig. 135(a), after the "number of game medals" reaches 9, the hand is released from the count button 171, and the count button 171 goes into the OFF state. As a result, the counting ends when the "number of game medals" reaches 9.

In the end game process described above, the number of medals to be counted decreases stepwise, and the value of the count long press timer increases, reducing the chance of the "game medal count" becoming 0 unintentionally due to a delay in releasing the count button 171. If you want to set the "game medal count" to 0, you can keep operating the count button 171 until the display on the game medal count display device 170 becomes "0."

FIG. 135(b) is a timing chart showing an example of a case in which a power outage occurs when the planned counting number is set to 30 in the example shown in FIG. 134(c), and then power is restored.

In the example shown in FIG. 135(b), the count button 17 is pressed even after a power outage occurs and before power is restored.
For example, in the case of a momentary power outage, power may be restored before the user releases the counting button 171. Or, even if the user knows that power has been cut off, the user may not release the counting button 171.
Some players do not release the count button 171. However, this is only to take into consideration the case where the count button 171 is still operated between the time of power interruption and the time of power restoration, and it is not possible to know whether the count button 171 is still operated before the power is restored. If the count button 171 is still operated when power is restored, an ON signal is detected after power is restored without detecting the up edge of the signal indicating the ON/OFF state of the count button 171. In this case, if an ON signal is detected even after 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long press operation, the medal count control unit 350 sets the maximum number (50 in this example) as the number of medals to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 125). Even if the control is interrupted due to a power interruption, it is possible to reflect the fact that the count button 171 was operated for a long period of time after power is restored.

After power is restored, the number may be set to a number slightly less than the maximum number (for example, 30). Alternatively, the number of sheets to be counted at the time of power failure may be reset.

In addition, although the explanation here has been about the number of medals to be counted, the same applies to the value of the count long press timer. In other words, when the power is restored with the count button 171 still being operated, the medal count control unit 350 sets the value of the count long press timer to the shortest time (300 in this example).
The value (value for ms) is set (step S4221 shown in FIG. 125).

FIG. 136 is a timing chart showing an example in which the process of updating the number of coins to be counted shown in FIG. 126 is adopted.

The operation of the count button 171 is started at timing A, and when 0.5 seconds have passed while the count button is ON (timing B), it becomes a long press operation, and 50 sheets are counted. If 1.5 seconds have passed while the count button is ON (a cumulative total of 2.0 seconds from the start of the operation: timing C), automatic counting will be performed even if the count button 171 is released, and 50 sheets will be counted every time the count timing of 0.3 seconds arrives. This automatic counting is performed by using the "
This continues until the value of the "number of game medals" becomes 0. Therefore, the number of game medals can be quickly made 0 with a hassle-free operation.

When the automatic counting is started, the display of the game medal count display device 170 described with reference to FIG. 129(b) is not changed, and the number of displayed medals is 5.
The number of medals is decremented in units of 0. In the seven-segment display that is the gaming medal number display device 170, the change display in which one is decremented at intervals of about 4 ms may appear as if all seven segments are lit and some segments are slightly flashing due to afterimages.
If the "game medal count" continues to change until the number of game medals reaches 0, it may become difficult to understand the current displayed number. Furthermore, players who select automatic counting often want the "game medal count" to have the number of game medals reach 0, and there may be little need to change the display to show the number being subtracted by 1.

During the period when automatic counting is being performed, the player does not perform any operations, so it is preferable to notify the player that automatic counting is being performed with a lamp or the like. Furthermore, if any payout is made based on the game result during automatic counting, the payout amount is also included in the automatic counting. In other words, the number of medals paid out during automatic counting is added to the "game medal number" stored in RAM 358, and will be included in the number of medals from the next counting.

Fig. 137(a) is a timing chart showing an example in which automatic counting ends when the value of "game medal number" stored in the RAM 358 reaches a certain value. Automatic counting starts when 2.0 seconds have passed since the start of the counting button 171 operation, and 50 medals are counted every 0.3 second counting timing. In Fig. 137(a), under "counted medal number",
In this example, the player releases the count button 171 when the number of medals played is about 147, but the automatic counting continues until the number of medals played is 147.
The "game medal number" continues to decrease. Eventually, when the "game medal number" becomes less than a certain value (for example, a value counted at one counting timing, here 50), the automatic counting ends automatically, and the "game medal number" will not decrease unless the counting button 171 is operated. Here, the remaining 47 medals remain without being automatically counted. If you want to continue playing after the automatic counting, you can start playing promptly because there is a remaining number. There are also cases where you want to count all the game medals. If you want to start counting again, you operate the counting button 171 again. For example, if you press and hold the button for 0.5 seconds, the "game medal number" becomes 0. Note that although the certain value is set to 50 medals, the player may be able to set a certain value. For example, the player may be able to select from 0 medals, 20 medals, and 50 medals. After counting, you can leave a desired number of game medals. Note that a certain value may be set according to the game state. For example, in a normal game state, a certain value is set to 0, and in a special game state such as during AT play, a certain value is set to 5.
In the bonus game state, the possibility of ending the game is low, so that the player can quickly start playing by leaving a certain number of game medals. A certain value may be set according to the automatically counted number of game medals. For example, if the number of game medals counted is less than 100, the certain value is set to 0, and if the number of game medals counted is 100 or more,
A certain value is set to 20 medals. When a small number of game medals is counted, the purpose may be to exchange the counted number of game medals for prizes such as drinks, and the game may continue after the automatic counting. By leaving a certain number of game medals, the game can be started promptly. The opposite is also possible. When a large number of game medals is counted, the purpose may be to count them once by executing a notification or the like to encourage counting, and the game may be continued after the automatic counting. By leaving a certain number of game medals, the game can be started promptly.

FIG. 137(b) is a timing chart showing an example of a case where power is interrupted during automatic counting and then restored.

In the example shown in FIG. 137(b), automatic counting is started and the hand is released from the count button 171. When 50 medals are counted by automatic counting every time the counting timing of 0.3 seconds arrives, a power outage occurs. After that, power is restored, and if the count button 171 is operated again at this timing of power restoration, or if the operation of the count button 171 is started during the power outage and power is restored while the count button 171 is still operated, an ON signal indicating the ON state of the count button 171 is detected after power restoration. If this ON signal is detected at the time of power restoration, automatic counting is started even if the 2 seconds, which is the judgment time for starting automatic counting, have not elapsed. In other words, 50 medals are counted at the time the first counting timing arrives after power restoration. Therefore, even if the hand is released from the count button 171 before 2 seconds have elapsed after power restoration, automatic counting is started.

Figure 138 shows an example of a display indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

FIG. 138 shows an effect image display device 157 which is a liquid crystal display device, and a game medal count display device 170 which is a five-digit seven-segment display device.

The upper part of Fig. 138 shows the state during counting before the automatic counting starts. In other words, the number of coins to be counted is determined by the manner of operation of the count button 171 (long press or one or more short presses). In this state, the character display "COUNTING" is displayed on the effect image display device 157 where the game background display is being performed. In other words, the character display "COUNTING" is displayed so as to overlap with the game background display.

In addition, in the game medal count display device 170 shown at the top, the segment representing 97 is lit up.

On the other hand, the lower part of FIG. 138 shows a state in which automatic counting is being performed. When the medal count control unit 350 starts automatic counting, it transmits a command to the game control unit 302, including automatic counting information indicating that the counting is performed automatically in the counting medal count information of the medal count control state command. The game control unit 302 transmits a security command to the first sub-control unit 400, including the automatic counting information in addition to the information indicating the counting medal count. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the automatic counting information via the first sub-control unit 400, and causes the performance image display device 157 to display the text display "Counting automatically" and the message 157m. When automatic counting is being performed, the automatic counting state is notified. Note that when automatic counting is being performed, a notification may be made by a sound or a lamp. In FIG. 138, the text display "Counting automatically" is displayed on the performance image display device 157 in which the game background display is being performed.
Below that is an explanation of how to handle the count button 171 during automatic counting, such as "Counting will continue even if you release your hand from the button." When the automatic counting status notification is being made, a notification is made that no button operation is required. There is also an explanation that "You can play." When the automatic counting status notification is being made, a notification is made that game progress is possible. It is notified that game progress is possible, such as by operating the start lever 135 and the stop buttons 130 to 132, even during automatic counting.
During the counting process, operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 is not accepted. Since it is anticipated that there may be cases where automatic counting is to be manually ended after it has started, automatic counting may be ended by operating the count button 171 again after automatic counting has started. In other words, if the medal count control unit 350 detects a rising edge of a signal indicating the on/off state of the count button 171 during automatic counting, it ends automatic counting. When automatic counting ends, it ends the automatic counting state notification.

Figure 139 shows an example of sound output indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

The operation of the count button 171 is started at timing A, and when 0.5 seconds have passed while the button is ON (timing B), it becomes a long press operation, and 50 coins are counted. When 1.5 seconds have passed while the button is ON (a cumulative total of 2.0 seconds from the start of the operation: timing C), automatic counting continues even if the count button 171 is released. In this example, when the first counting timing arrives after 2.0 seconds has passed, a counting sound indicating that automatic counting has started is output from the speaker 272. Note that the counting sound may also be output when 2.0 seconds have passed.

The volume of the counting sound increases at a predetermined time interval. The predetermined time here is 1.2 seconds, but may be 3 seconds or 0.3 seconds. By increasing the volume as time passes, it is possible to easily recognize that the cumulative count amount is increasing. The first counting sound output first and the second counting sound output next are output continuously, the second counting sound and the third counting sound output next are also output continuously, and the third counting sound and the fourth counting sound output next are also output continuously. In addition to the volume, the rhythm, pitch, tone, etc. may be changed. That is, the counting sound may change in stages. For example, the n+1th counting sound may be a counting sound with a faster rhythm or a higher pitch than the nth counting sound. In addition, the volume may not increase at a predetermined time interval, and only the tone may change at a predetermined time interval. For example, the first counting sound may be a sound consisting of only instrument sound A, the second counting sound may be a sound consisting of multiple sounds, namely, instrument sound A plus instrument sound B, and the third counting sound may be a sound consisting of multiple sounds, namely, instrument sound A, instrument sound B, and instrument sound C. It is possible to easily recognize that the cumulative count number is increasing.

On the other hand, if the counting sound continues to be output during counting, it may cause discomfort to the player. For example, it takes nearly 50 seconds to count 5,000 coins won through playing in one go. If the counting sound continues to be output during this time, it may be unpleasant to the ear, and may also be annoyed by the player next to you. To deal with these cases, the volume of the counting sound may be made to decrease as time passes, or the counting sound may be output for a predetermined period of time and then be made silent (volume 0). It should be noted that if the volume of the counting sound is made to decrease as time passes,
After the counting sound is output for a predetermined period of time, the sound may be set to a constant volume (volume 1).

Furthermore, in the case of a slot machine with a function that allows the player to customize the machine in various ways, the player may be allowed to select the type, volume, and change of the counting sound (for example, whether to increase or decrease the volume, etc.), etc. This can also increase the interest during counting.

In addition to sound, a lamp may be made to emit light or an image may be output, and the light emission state of the lamp or the image may be changed in stages.

FIG. 140 shows the time from when the count button 171 is pressed to when the determination of the long press operation is performed.
10 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power interruption occurs before .5 seconds have elapsed.

In the example shown in FIG. 140(a), the operation of the counting button 171 is started, and a power outage occurs before the counting long press flag described with reference to FIG. 107 (or FIG. 125, FIG. 126) is set to ON, and the counting button 171 remains in an operated state until power is restored. For example, in the case of a momentary power outage, power may be restored before the player releases his/her hand from the counting button 171. Alternatively, some players may not release their hands from the counting button 171 even after they realize that power has been cut off. However, this is merely a consideration of the case where the counting button 171 remains in operation from the time the power outage occurs until power is restored, and it is not known whether the counting button 171 remains in operation until power is restored. If power is restored while the counting button 171 remains in operation, an ON signal is detected after power is restored without detecting the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171. If an ON signal is detected without detecting an up edge after power is restored, the medal count control unit 350 determines that the count button 171 has continued to be operated, and again determines whether the count button 171 remains operated until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since power was restored. If the count button 171 remains operated, the count long press flag is set to ON, and if the count button 171 continues to be operated, 50 medals are counted at the counting timing.

If the button is pressed for a long time after power is restored, a notification that the button is being pressed for a long time may be issued. The notification that the button is being pressed for a long time starts from the time when the first counting timing arrives after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since power was restored, if the button is still pressed for a long time. This is because the counting button 171 is pressed for a long time before 0.5 seconds have elapsed.
If the hand is released from the button, it does not count as a long press, and if the hand is released from the count button 171 before the first counting timing arrives after 0.5 seconds have passed, not even one coin is counted, so a long press notification starts on the condition that the long press is still continuing at the point when the first counting timing arrives after 0.5 seconds have passed.

If the count button 171 is released before 0.5 seconds have elapsed after power is restored,
One coin is counted, but this may be due to an operational error.
If the operation of the count button 171 is completed within seconds, it may be considered an erroneous operation and no coins may be counted. Note that Fig. 140(b) shows an example in which the start of operation of the count button 171 is determined by detecting only the rising edge of the signal indicating the on/off state of the count button 171.

In the example shown in Fig. 140(b), the counting button 171 remains operated during the power outage, so after power is restored, the rising edge of the signal indicating the on/off state of the counting button 171 is not detected, and no matter how long the counting button 171 is operated, a long press determination is not made and no counting is performed. On the other hand, in the example shown in Fig. 140(a), the long press determination is made based on whether 0.5 seconds have passed since the on signal of the counting button 171 was detected, so the long press determination is performed even if the rising edge is not detected.

Figure 141 is a timing chart showing a modified example of the example shown in Figure 140.

In the first modified example shown in FIG. 141(a), power is interrupted when X seconds, which is shorter than 0.5 seconds that is the determination time for a long press operation, has elapsed since the start of operation of the counting button 171, and then power is restored.

After power is restored, if an ON signal is detected without detecting a rising edge of a signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171, the X seconds that have elapsed before the power failure are subtracted from 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time for the long press operation, and the remaining time ((0.5-
If this continues for X) seconds, it is determined that the count button 171 has been operated for 0.5 seconds, and the count long press flag is set to ON.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 141(b), power is interrupted when X seconds, which is shorter than 0.5 seconds that is the determination time for a long press operation, has elapsed since the start of operation of the counting button 171, and then power is restored.

In the second modified example shown in FIG. 141(b), a standby process is provided for a certain period (a standby time of 2 seconds in this example) when power is restored (when power is turned on). That is, since the processing load increases immediately after power is turned on, the process waits until an appropriate timing for performing counting process occurs before processing related to the counting button 171 is performed. After the standby time has elapsed, the process related to the counting button 171 is performed as in FIG. 141(a). That is, if an ON signal is detected without detecting a rising edge of a signal indicating the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171, the X seconds that have elapsed before the power failure are subtracted from 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long press operation, and if the operation of the counting button 171 is continued for the remaining time ((0.5-X) seconds) after the standby time has elapsed, 0.5 seconds is subtracted.
It is assumed that the count button 171 remains operated for the entire 10 seconds, and the count long press flag is set to ON.

Figure 142 is a timing chart showing another modified example of the example shown in Figure 140.

In the third modified example shown in FIG. 142(a), power is interrupted before the 0.5 second threshold for determining whether or not the counting button 171 is pressed and held has elapsed after the counting button 171 is pressed, and then power is restored.

After power is restored (power is turned on), if the medal count control unit 350 detects an on signal without detecting a rising edge of a signal indicating the on/off state of the count button 171, it determines that the count button 171 has been operated continuously, and starts a timer dedicated to power-on. This timer measures a time (e.g., 2 seconds) longer than the normal long press operation determination time (0.5 seconds). Specifically, in step S4206 in FIG. 107, a timer is set to 50
The count long press timer, which is set to 0 ms, is set to 2000 ms as an initial value exclusively for when the power is turned on. In this way, for a long press operation immediately after powering on, the count long press flag is set to ON if the operation is long, and when the count timing arrives while the count button 171 is being operated, 50 sheets are counted.

In the fourth modified example shown in Fig. 142(b), after the operation of the counting button 171 is started, a power interruption occurs before the 0.5 seconds that is the judgment time for a long press operation has elapsed, and the power is then restored. In this example, the hand is taken off the counting button 171 during the power interruption, and the operation ends. Therefore, when the power is restored (power is turned on), the ON signal indicating the ON state of the counting button 171 is not detected.
In the fourth modified example, a timer specifically designed for power-on is started when the power is turned on.
This timer is set to a time (e.g., 3 seconds) longer than the normal long press operation determination time (0.5 seconds).
The timer setting value for power-on in this example is longer than the timer setting value for power-on in the third modified example (e.g., 2 seconds). If the operation of the counting button 171 is started while the power-on timer is timing and the operation of the counting button 171 is still continuing after 3 seconds has elapsed, the count long press flag is set to ON.
That is, while the timer is counting, at least one of the rising edge of the signal indicating the on/off state of the count button 171 and the on signal is detected, and if the on signal is still detected when three seconds have passed, the count long press flag is set to on. Then, when the count timing arrives while the count button 171 is still being operated, 50 coins will be counted.

Next, the display mode of the game medal count display device 170, which is a five-digit seven-segment display, explained using Figure 129 (b) will be explained in detail again.

FIG. 143(a) is a diagram showing an example of a change display (subtraction) in the game medal count display device 170.

As shown at the top of Fig. 143(a), the number "100" is displayed on the game medal count display device 170. When the change display starts, the game medal count display device 170 subtracts "1" from the displayed number at intervals of about 4 ms in the display display process shown in Fig. 121. Fig. 143(a) shows the change in the number of medals displayed on the display device 170, from "99" to "98" to "97" to "96" to "95".
It shows how "1" is subtracted at a time from "0" to "94".

When 50 sheets are counted by pressing and holding the count button 171, the number "1" is displayed at intervals of about 4 ms.
To display a change by ", the time required for the change display is about 4 ms x 50 = about 200 ms. Since the counting timing has a cycle of 300 ms, the display time for the subtraction change display is shorter than the cycle of the counting timing, and it is possible to display a change display that subtracts 50 sheets.

FIG. 143(b) is a diagram showing an example of a change display (addition) in the game medal count display device 170.

The number "100" is also displayed on the medal count display device 170 shown at the top of FIG. 143(b). When the change display starts, this medal count display device 170 displays a number that is incremented by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms, the same as the change display during subtraction.
In 43(b), "101" → "102" → "103" → "104" → "105" → "1
It shows "06" and "1" being added at a time.

When the lending button 707 is operated to lend out 50 coins, and 15 coins (corresponding to the maximum number of coins allowed by the rules) are paid out as a result of the game, it takes about 4 ms.
To change the display by "1" at intervals (addition/subtraction), the time required for the change display is approximately 4 ms x
Since the counting timing has a cycle of 300 ms, the display time of the change display for adding is shorter than the cycle of the counting timing, and it is possible to display a change display for adding 65 sheets.

FIG. 144 is a diagram showing another example of a change display in the game medal count display device 170.
Since there are cases where the player does not notice a change in the display content of the game medal count display device 170, this is an example of notifying the player that there has been a change in the display content.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal count display device 170 shown in FIG. 144(a). In this example, the change display is performed using all digits, making it easy to recognize that a change is in progress. As the number changes from "100" to "85", in this example, the display alternates between a display where all segments of all five digits are lit (displaying "88888") and a display where all segments of all five digits are turned off (displaying "00000"), in this example, every 8 ms. After 250 ms has elapsed in this example, the game medal count display device 170 changes to "8
The number "5" is displayed. Since the change display is performed using all digits, it is possible to check whether or not a malfunction that would cause display to be lost has occurred in any of the segments of all digits of the game medal count display device 170. If it is confirmed that no malfunction has occurred, it is possible to confirm that there is no error in the number displayed after the change display.

In this change display, all digits are used, but in order to reduce the processing load and data volume, only some of the digits may be used. For example, one digit including the rightmost digit, two digits, or three digits may be displayed. If the rightmost digit is not included when not all digits are used, it may give the impression that the rightmost digit segment is broken, so it is better to include the rightmost digit to show that there is no failure.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown in FIG. 144(b). In this example, the number "100" changes to the number "85".
The number changes from a one-digit number to a two-digit number. Therefore, a change display using three-digit segments is performed. The change display here changes the position of the lit segments for each digit, making the segments appear to rotate. This change display gives the impression that the number is changing from "100". In this example, when 250 ms has elapsed since the start of the change display, the number "85" is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

If the change display is made using two-digit segments instead of three-digit segments, it is possible to give the impression that the change ends at "85."

As described above, the two types of change displays explained using FIG. 144 are displayed in between, and the target value is reached.
The display may be changed stepwise by a predetermined number (for example, 20).
When the number of medals changes from "00" to "60" (target value), the display will be "100" → change display → "80" → change display → "60".
When a full-color seven-segment LED display is used as the display 0, the luminous color of the segments may be changed when the segments are lit during a changing display.

FIG. 145 shows that the RA is displayed not only on the game medal number display device 170 but also on the performance image display device 157.
A figure showing an example of displaying the "number of game medals" stored in M358.

The medal count control unit 350 transmits a command including information representing the "game medal count" (the number of game medals displayed as shown in FIG. 78) to the game control unit 302 as a medal count control status command. The game control unit 302 transmits a security command including information representing the "game medal count" to the first sub-control unit 400. The security command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 at 100 ms intervals. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the information representing the "game medal count" via the first sub-control unit 400, and transmits "
In this example, the "number of game medals played" is always displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the effect image display device 157.

In this example, the display of the "number of medals played" on the performance image display device 157 is performed every 100 ms.
According to the information indicating the "number of game medals" contained in the security command transmitted at intervals, the number is displayed as it is.
At 57, the number "100" is displayed in accordance with the previous security command.
The number "100" is also displayed on the leftmost game medal count display device 170. In this state, the count button 171 is pressed and held, and 50 medals are counted. The medal count control unit 350 starts the display display process shown in FIG. 121, and the game medal count display device 170 starts a change display in which "1" is subtracted at intervals of about 4 ms. In FIG. 145, the display during the change display is shown as all 7 segments being lit and some segments appearing to slightly blink due to an afterimage. The game medal count display device 170 displays a change display in which "1" is subtracted at intervals over about 200 ms, and the number "50" is displayed about 200 ms after 50 medals are counted.

On the other hand, on the first sub-control unit 400 side, when 50 medals are counted, a security command including information indicating that the "number of game medals" is 50 is received during the security command transmission period (100 ms). In the example shown in FIG. 145, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the security command about 20 ms after 50 medals are counted, and the display process is executed. The display process here changes the image displaying "100" to "50".
This is a frame replacement process in which the image display device 157 replaces the image with an image displaying "50", and is completed in a short time. As a result, the number "50" is displayed on the effect image display device 157 before the change display on the game medal count display device 170 is completed.

In the example of Fig. 145 explained above, the sub-controllers (400, 500) that receive the information on the "number of game medals" do not display any change, but the main control unit 300 that issues the information displays the change. In this way, the number "50" that is finally displayed by the game medal number display device 170 can be ascertained from the display on the performance image display device 157, and it can be recognized that the change display has been completed when "50" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170.

Figure 146 shows a modified example of the example shown in Figure 145.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 146, the display of the "game medal number" on the effect image display device 157 also changes by subtracting "1" at a time.
The change display is carried out over a longer period of time than in the case of the image display device 1.
The change display in No. 57 takes 280 ms. During this 280 ms, 50 coins are lent out by operating the lending button 707, and 1 coin is lent out as a result of playing.
This time is longer than the time required for the game medal count display device 170 to display an additive change when five medals (corresponding to the maximum number of medals that can be paid out) are paid out (approximately 4 ms x 65 = approximately 260 ms), and is less than 300 ms, which is the period of the counting timing.

Usually, the player looks at the effect image display device 157 and rarely looks at the game medal number display device 170.
It is desired that the player does not keep storing the "game medal number", and it is desired to increase the frequency of operation of the count button 171. To this end, it is necessary to have the player pay attention to the "game medal number". The reason why the "game medal number" is also displayed on the effect image display device 157 is to have the player pay attention to the "game medal number" as much as possible. However, since the effect image display device 157 displays attractive effect displays such as game background displays, even if the "game medal number" is displayed, the player tends to be distracted by the attractive effect displays. Therefore, as in this modified example, if the display of the "game medal number" on the effect image display device 157 is made to take longer than the display on the game medal number display device 170, it is expected that the player will also pay attention to the game medal number display device 170, which displays quickly. If the player looks at the game medal number display device 170, the effect display is not displayed on the game medal number display device 170, and the player can firmly recognize the "game medal number". As a result, it is now easier for players to notice that their medal count is increasing, and the number of medals counted is now easier to count.
It is expected that the frequency of operation of 71 will increase.

In addition, the change display on the performance image display device 157 includes not only changing character display, but also
By also displaying an animation showing that the number of game medals is changing, attention is more likely to be drawn to the "number of game medals played," and it is expected that the frequency of operation of the counting button 171 will increase.
By displaying the change display by the performance image display device 157 in a manner different from that by the game medal count display device 170, the change display can be made in a manner suitable for the period of the change display.
The change display by the effect image display device 157 may be displayed in the same manner as the change display by the game medal count display device 170. This allows the user to easily recognize that a change display is being performed.

Figure 147 shows another example that is completely different from the example shown in Figure 145.

In this alternative example shown in Fig. 147, no change is displayed on the game medal count display device 170, and only the change is displayed on the display of "game medal count" on the performance image display device 157. That is, in this alternative example, the display device display process shown in Fig. 121 is not executed, and when 50 medals are counted, the number "50" is immediately displayed on the game medal count display device 170. On the other hand, even if the performance image display device 157 receives a security command, it does not immediately display according to the information representing the "game medal count" contained in the security command, but displays "1".
The change display will be subtracted by one.

In this other example, just like the modified example shown in FIG. 146, it takes longer for the "game medal count" to be displayed on the performance image display device 157 than on the game medal count display device 170, so it is expected that the player will also pay attention to the game medal count display device 170, which displays quickly. By looking at the game medal count display device 170, the player will be able to clearly recognize the "game medal count." As a result, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the number of game medals is accumulating, and it is expected that the frequency of operating the count button 171 will increase. In addition,
In the medal count control unit 350, the amount of data required for displaying changes is reduced, and the processing load is also reduced.

FIG. 148(a) is a timing chart showing a case where a payout is about to be made when the payout threshold value is exceeded.

148(a) shows the value of the "game medal count" stored in the RAM 358. Below that, the number of payout medals to be added to the "game medal count" is shown.

The RAM 358 of the medal count control unit 350 can store a maximum of 16,383 "game medal count." That is, the maximum number of medals that can be stored in the RAM 358 is 16,383. The payout threshold is set to this maximum number of medals that can be stored.

When the "number of game medals" is stored up to 16,373 medals, a further 15 medals (corresponding to the maximum number of medals payable permitted by the rules) are paid out, which corresponds to the maximum number of medals that can be paid out. The number of medals to be paid out, 15 medals, is included in game control status command 1 (payout command) and transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350. When the number of medals to be paid out, 15 medals, is added, the "number of game medals" exceeds the maximum number of medals that can be stored, and exceeds the payout threshold value in step S4B03 of FIG. 117. For this reason, "abnormal" is included in the payout response command, and the medal count control unit 350
The payout response command is transmitted to the gaming control unit 302. The gaming control unit 302 detects an "abnormal"
If the number of medals is included, the first sub-control unit 400 sends a command indicating that the number of medals played is in an overflow state (cannot be added by payout) (step S1608 shown in FIG. 89). The sub-control units (400, 500) issue an over-the-limit error notification based on this command. In the example shown in FIG. 148(a), the performance image display device 157, which displays the game background display, displays a text message indicating that the payout threshold has been exceeded and prompting the user to operate the count button 171, so as to overlap with the game background display, as an over-the-limit error notification. In other words, the over-the-limit error notification is executed even during gameplay.

As an upper limit exceeding error notification, an error sound may be output from the speaker 272 or a lamp may be turned on.

Figure 148 (b) shows another example of an upper limit exceeded error notification.

The upper limit exceeding error notification may be displayed by blinking on the effect image display device 157. In the example shown in Fig. 148(b), the text display of the upper limit exceeding error notification is displayed every second so as to overlap with the game background display. Since the upper limit exceeding error notification is displayed during a game and so as to overlap with the game background display, the game background display becomes difficult to see. Therefore, in order to avoid causing a disadvantage to the player, the blinking display is performed to ensure a period during which the game background display is easily visible.

When the game control unit 302 receives a payout response command including "normal" from the medal count control unit 350, it sends a payout command to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1607 shown in FIG. 89). When the sub-control unit (400, 500) receives a payout command while an upper limit exceeding error notification is being executed, it ends the execution of the upper limit exceeding error notification. When the count button 171 is operated, the upper limit exceeding error notification may be ended regardless of the number of game medals. After the count button 171 is operated, the upper limit exceeding error notification can be ended early even if the counting process takes time.

In addition, information representing the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is included in the security command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. If the transmitted information representing the "number of game medals" is the number of medals equal to the payout threshold (16,383 medals), the sub-control unit (
An error notification of reaching the upper limit may be made on the side of the display unit 150 (400, 500). For example, a text display saying "The upper limit has been reached. Please operate the count button" may be displayed on the performance image display device 157. This error notification of reaching the upper limit ends when the transmitted information indicating the "number of game medals" becomes less than the payout threshold value (16,383 medals).
Note that the notification of the upper limit reaching error may be terminated regardless of the number of game medals if the counting button 171 is operated. After the counting button 171 is operated, the notification of the upper limit reaching error can be terminated early even if the counting process takes time.

In addition, the "number of game medals" is added when a settlement is made and when the lending machine 700
This occurs when a loan is made from the first sub-control unit 400. In this embodiment, the upper limit is not reached for settlement, but it may be determined that the upper limit has been reached in the same way as for payouts. For example, the settlement threshold is set to the maximum number of stored medals, and even if the settlement threshold is exceeded by settlement, an "abnormal" is included in the settlement response command and sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the game control unit 302. Even if the settlement response command includes an "abnormal" message, the game control unit 302 sends an error occurrence command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that an error has occurred in exceeding the upper limit of the number of game medals displayed, and the sub-control units (400, 500) issue an error notification indicating that the upper limit has been exceeded. On the other hand, the loan threshold is set to a number smaller than the maximum number of stored medals (for example, 15
If the "number of game medals" exceeds the lending threshold value due to lending, an upper limit exceeding lending error occurs and the lending is not accepted (step S37 in FIG. 103).
If the judgment in 12 is No), the "game medal count" is not added. The notification of the upper limit exceeding lending error is displayed on the information display 703 of the lending machine 700. However, the medal count control unit 350 transmits the information of the upper limit exceeding lending error to the game control unit 302, and the game control unit 302 further transmits the information to the first sub-control unit 400, so that the effect image display device 157
This makes it possible to notify the player on the slot machine 100 side using a speaker 272 or a lamp.

Figure 149 (a) is a timing chart when a payout is about to be made when the second payout threshold is exceeded.

In FIG. 149(a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is also shown, and below that, the number of medals to be paid out that is to be added to the "number of game medals" is shown.

The game control unit 302 receives a command including the game medal number display number (game medal number) as a medal number control state command from the medal number control unit 350. The game control unit 302 is set with a payout second threshold (for example, 15,000 medals) that is less than the maximum storage number of 16,383 medals (payout threshold) of the RAM 358. When the game medal number display number transmitted by the command is equal to or greater than the payout second threshold, the game control unit 302 transmits an error occurrence command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that an error of the game medal display number approaching the upper limit has occurred. The sub-control unit (400, 500) performs an upper limit approach notification based on this error occurrence command. In the example shown in FIG. 149(a), a character display prompting the operation of the count button 171 is displayed as an upper limit approach notification so as to overlap with the game background display on the performance image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed. That is, in this example as well, an upper limit approach notification is executed during the game. In FIG. 148(a),
The performance image display device 157 is shown switching from displaying the upper limit approaching notification to displaying an upper limit exceeded error notification.

As the notification of approaching the upper limit, a notification sound may be output from the speaker 272, or a lamp may be turned on. Note that the notification of approaching the upper limit is continued from when the notification of approaching the upper limit is started until the notification of an error exceeding the upper limit is started. However, in consideration of the game up to the upper limit of the number of game medals,
The upper limit approaching notification may be a notification that is implemented only for a part of a game. For example, it may be a notification that is implemented within one second after the operation of the start lever 135. On the other hand, the upper limit exceeding error notification may be a notification that is implemented during a game. For example, even if the upper limit approaching notification is started,
When it is known that the bonus period for T games, etc. is almost over, it is possible to easily prioritize the remaining AT games, etc. Furthermore, when the notification is switched from the notification about to reach the upper limit to the notification of an error of reaching the upper limit, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification has been changed.

Figure 149 (b) shows another example of an upper limit approach notification.

The notification of approaching the upper limit may also be made by flashing the image display device 157.
In the example shown in FIG. 9(b), the text display of the upper limit approaching notification is displayed every second so as to overlap with the game background display. Since the upper limit approaching notification is displayed during the game and so as to overlap with the game background display, the game background display becomes difficult to see. Therefore, in order to avoid causing a disadvantage to the player, the notification is displayed in a blinking manner to ensure a period during which the game background display is easily visible.

When the game control unit 302 receives a command including a medal display number that is less than the second payout threshold from the medal count control unit 350, the game control unit 302 transmits an error release command to the first sub-control unit 400, which indicates that the medal display number is close to being released error has been released.
On the side of (0,500), the upper limit approaching notification ends based on this error release command.

In addition, a second threshold value for dispensing may be set in the first sub-control unit 400.
In the case of the security command, if the information indicating the "number of game medals" transmitted is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold, the sub-control unit (400, 500) may perform the notification that the upper limit is approaching. This notification ends when the information indicating the "number of game medals" transmitted becomes less than the second payout threshold.

Furthermore, a second payout threshold may be set in the medal count control unit 350. In this case, the medal count control unit 350 judges whether the "game medal count" is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold, and if it is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold, transmits a notification command to the game control unit 302, and the game control unit 302 controls the sub-control unit (400, 50) based on the command information.
By doing so, the sub-control unit (400, 500) also transmits a notification command to the sub-control unit (400, 500).
When the number of medals falls below the second payout threshold, a notification end command is sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the game control unit 302 to the sub-control unit (40
The signal is transmitted via a route of 0, 500). The blinking period of the blinking display of the upper limit approaching notification should preferably be longer than the blinking period of the blinking display of the upper limit exceeding error notification. If the blinking period becomes shorter when the upper limit approaching notification is switched to the upper limit exceeding error notification, the urgency of the notification can be easily recognized. If the upper limit approaching notification is a blinking display, the upper limit exceeding error notification can be displayed at all times. This makes it easy to recognize the urgency of the notification.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example in which a notification urging a count overlaps with a highly urgent error notification.

The effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of Fig. 150(a) displays a notice of the approaching upper limit overlapping the game background display. The notice of the approaching upper limit may be displayed constantly, but is a flashing display that is displayed once every second. The front door 102 is opened while the notice of the approaching upper limit is being displayed. When the front door 102 is opened, the game control unit 302
An error occurrence command indicating that a door open error has occurred is sent to the first sub-controller 400. The sub-controllers (400, 500) issue an error notification based on this error occurrence command. Since there is a higher possibility of fraudulent activity (so-called cheating) occurring when the front door 102 is open, it is necessary to have the front door 102 closed as soon as possible. For this reason, the error notification of a door open error is a more urgent notification than a notification that prompts counting. Note that when the front door 1
Even if the number 02 is open, the operation of the count button 171 is accepted.
The effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of the image display device 157 displays an error notification of a door opening error, overlapping with the game background display.
The door open error display is called the door open error display. The door open error display is a text display saying "Door is open" and is always displayed. This door open error display is displayed on the same layer as the upper limit approaching notification display, but it may be displayed on a layer in front of the upper limit approaching notification display so as to overlap the upper limit approaching notification display. Alternatively, since the door open error display is always displayed, it may be displayed on a layer behind the upper limit approaching notification which flashes, so that the flashing upper limit approaching notification display overlaps the always displayed door open error display.

FIG. 150(b) shows that the text display "Upper limit approaching" is displayed every second in addition to the door open error display, which is always displayed. The right side of FIG. 150(b) shows how the text display "Upper limit approaching" disappears by blinking, leaving the door open error display, which is always displayed. In the state shown on the right, the door open error display, which is of high urgency, is easy to see. Also, the error notification for the door open error is announced from speaker 272, saying "
Although a voice such as "The door is open" is output, the alarm sound for the upper limit approaching is not output.

Although this is not an error with as high an urgency as a door open error, a message such as "Please stop the reels that are spinning" or "A communication error has occurred," which may indicate a loose wire, a broken wire, or a power outage in the rental machine 700, may be displayed to request improvement. Along with these messages, a notification may also be displayed to encourage counting.

FIG. 151(a) is a diagram showing an example in which the notification prompting counting continues even after transitioning to the demonstration display.

In the slot machine 100, if no bet operation is performed within a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) from when all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped if no payout has been made, or from when the payout has been completed if a payout has been made, the slot machine 100 transitions to a demonstration state (demonstration in progress). Also, if the settlement button 134 is operated, the slot machine 100 transitions to demonstration.

In the example shown in FIG. 151(a), during a game (during a bet, during the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, or during a payout), the display of text indicating that the upper limit is approaching is started, and the display transitions to a demo without the operation of the counting button 171. In the performance image display device 157, a game background display is displayed during a game, but when the demo is started, the display is switched to a demo display. The demo display is a display that introduces a story or a character. Even when the demo is started, the display of the text indicating that the upper limit is approaching is continued unless the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold. When the demo is started, the possibility that the player will leave the seat increases. By encouraging the operation of the counting button 171 even during the demo, it may be possible to prevent the player from leaving the slot machine 100 by removing only the card from the lending machine 700 and leaving the seat. The blinking display of the upper limit approaching notification may be continued to ensure the visibility of the demo display, or the blinking display of the upper limit approaching notification may be constantly displayed to ensure the visibility of the upper limit approaching notification.

FIG. 151(b) is a diagram showing an example of a notification after the count button 171 is operated during a demonstration.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 151(b), a demo display is displayed. The notification urging players to count is displayed in the largest size so as to overlap with the demo display. Here, the player is requested to operate the count button 171 with priority, so the notification urging players to count is displayed in the largest size. In addition, below that, a "
Be careful not to forget your card or have it stolen."
In this example, the "number of game medals" is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the effect image display device 157, and "15300" is displayed, which is greater than the second payout threshold. Note that there are also cases where the payout threshold "16383" is displayed. The display of the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 may be constantly displayed, may be temporarily displayed, or may be displayed in a manner similar to that shown in FIG.
It is not necessary to display it as in the example shown in 51(a).

Eventually, the count button 171 is operated, and the "number of game medals" is reduced to a number less than the second payout threshold. Then, the notification prompting the player to count disappears (is hidden), and the warning message is now displayed largest and most conspicuous. The "number of game medals" displayed in the lower right corner of the effect image display device 157 has been reduced to "14,950."

FIG. 152(a) is a diagram showing an example of notification when the "number of game medals" exceeds a certain prescribed number, such as a payout threshold or a second payout threshold, and then falls below that prescribed number.

In FIG. 152(a), the value of the "game medal count" stored in the RAM 358 is displayed as X medals. This X medals corresponds to a certain prescribed number such as a payout threshold or a second payout threshold. The performance image display device 157 displays a notification urging the player to count because the "game medal count" has exceeded the prescribed number. When this notification urging the player to count is displayed, the count button 171
The operation of the count button 1 will start, and the "number of medals" will soon become less than the specified number.
The long press of button 71 continues. In this example, even if the "game medal number" falls below the specified number, the notification prompting counting continues. In other words, the notification prompting counting continues until the "game medal number" falls below the specified number by a further specified number (for example, 100, which is 50 x 2). The arrow of the notification period in the figure indicates the period during which the notification prompting counting, such as "Please operate the count button," is being given.

If the notification is started when the specified number is reached and immediately ends when the specified number is exceeded, there is a high possibility that only a small number will be counted, so in this example, the notification is continued until the number is less than the specified number at which the notification starts. In this way, it is possible to reduce the repetition of notification and counting operations. Note that the notification to encourage counting may be always given for a fixed period of time (for example, 10 seconds) regardless of the number of game medals played. It is possible to encourage the player to count a large number.

The above-mentioned specified number may be a settlement threshold, a lending threshold, or another threshold.

In addition, if the "number of game medals" falls below the specified number due to a bet operation, the number of medals will be reduced by a maximum of three medals.
The notification prompting the player to count may be continued regardless of the value of the "number of game medals played."

FIG. 152(b) is a diagram showing an example of a notification that prompts the player to count when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold over multiple games.

When the "number of game medals" in a certain game exceeds the second payout threshold (15,000 in this example), a notification is started to prompt the player to count. The notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed. Even if the notification is started, the player does not press the count button 1.
71 and play continues. As a result, the "number of game medals" continues without falling below the second payout threshold. Here, when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold, a notification urging the player to count is made once every several games (four games in this example). Therefore, no notification urging the player to count is made for three games after a notification urging the player to count is made. During the three games without a notification urging the player to count, the effect displays such as the game background display displayed on the effect image display device 157 become easier to see, which may increase the player's interest in the game. In addition,
When the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold, the notification prompting the player to count is no longer made. Therefore, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold during the three games during which no notification prompting the player to count has been made, no notification prompting the player to count will be made until the number of game medals next exceeds the second payout threshold. On the other hand, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold during a game during which a notification prompting the player to count is being made, the notification prompting the player to count that had been made up until that point will disappear (become hidden).

Next, we will explain more about counting notifications.

153(a) is a diagram showing an example of a notification to prompt counting each time the "game medal number" increases by a predetermined number. Each diagram ((a) to (c)) shown in FIG. 153 shows the value of the "game medal number" stored in the RAM 358.

In the example shown in FIG. 153(a), a notification is given to encourage counting every time the "game medal count" increases by 1000 medals. First, when the "game medal count" exceeds 1000 medals, a notification of 10 medals is given.
A display indicating that the number of game medals has exceeded 2000 and encouraging the player to count is displayed on the performance image display device 157. These displays will continue to be displayed for a prescribed period of time, or until the next change in the "game medal count" (the same applies below). Thus, they are displayed even during game play. Next, when the "game medal count" exceeds 2000, a display indicating that the number of game medals has exceeded 2000 and encouraging the player to count is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Furthermore, when the "game medal count" exceeds 3000, a display indicating that the number of game medals has exceeded 3000 and encouraging the player to count is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Thereafter, these notifications are repeated until the number of game medals exceeds 14000. Then, when the "game medal count" reaches the second payout threshold of 15000, the display shown in FIG. 149 (
As shown in a), the display prompting the user to count continues to be displayed unless the "number of game medals" falls below 15,000.
The display prompting the player to count together with the text display "The number of game medals has reached 15,015" may be continuously displayed, or when the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold and equal to or less than the payout threshold, the actual value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 may be displayed (for example, "The number of game medals has reached 15,015" may be displayed). Since the number of game medals is displayed periodically, the player can roughly grasp the number of game medals even without looking at the game medal number display device 170. In the unlikely event that a problem occurs with the game machine and the "number of game medals" is lost, the player can easily grasp the extent of the lost number. In addition, the display prompting the player to count may be displayed according to the time that has elapsed since the start of a special game such as an AT game. For example, a display prompting the player to count is displayed when 10 minutes have elapsed since the start of a special game such as an AT game, a display prompting the player to count is displayed when 20 minutes have elapsed, and a display prompting the player to count is displayed when 30 minutes have elapsed. The display can be displayed periodically regardless of the number of game medals.

FIG. 153(b) is a diagram showing an example in which the count button 171 is operated in a state advantageous to the player.

Here, the state advantageous to the player is the AT state. During the AT state, the "number of game medals" is likely to increase due to payout. During the game in this AT state, the effect image display device 15
7 shows a display (AT game display) that suggests or indicates that the game is currently in the AT state. When the "game medal count" exceeds 1000 medals during the AT state, a display is displayed indicating that the number of medals has exceeded 1000 medals and prompting the player to count medals, as shown on the left side of Fig. 153(b) in the performance image display device 157. In this example, the count button 171 is pressed and held for a long time, and the "game medal count" decreases to a certain value (in this example, "100").

The state advantageous to the player here refers to a state in which the "number of game medals" is likely to be increased by payout. Therefore, it is not limited to the AT state, but may be a state in which a bonus (RB, BB) is in operation, or an ART state. If the player is in an advantageous state, the "number of game medals" is expected to continue to increase, and it can be said that the player is in a state in which all of the game medals may be counted (output to the lending machine 700). However, if all of the game medals are counted, the number of medals inserted for the next game (for example, three medals) will also be counted, and this may result in the lending machine 700 being unable to count the number of medals.
If the player does not start lending from 0, the next game cannot be played. Even if the player is in an advantageous state, the player may consume more "game medals" than the player pays out. Therefore, even if the player is in an advantageous state, the player is notified that it is better to leave some "game medals". The effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 153(b) is in a state in which the "game medals" have decreased to 100 due to counting in the AT state, and the effect image display device 157 is notified that it is better to leave some "game medals" such as "stop counting and proceed with the game" (counting end guidance notification). In other words, the counting end guidance notification is performed before the counting of all the game medals is completed. Instead of the counting end guidance notification shown here, a notification such as "it is better to leave some game value" or a notification such as "if you count all of them, you will not be able to play" may be used. In other words, a drawback in the case of counting all the game medals may be notified before the counting of all the game medals is completed.

In the slot machine 100 in the example of FIG. 153(b), the automatic counting described above is not performed, and the counting ends when the player releases the counting button 171. In this example, the player, seeing the notification that it is better to leave some "game medal number", releases the counting button 171,
Counting ends when 50 "game medals" remain.

FIG. 153(c) shows an example in which the count button 171 is operated in a state that is disadvantageous to the player.

The state that is disadvantageous to the player here refers to a state in which the "number of game medals" is likely to decrease if the player continues to play the game without lending out medals. For example, the normal state is given.
The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 3(c) displays a display (normal game display) that suggests or represents a normal state.

In the example shown in FIG. 153(c), when the “number of game medals” is 1000, the count button 1 is pressed.
The long press of 71 continues, and the "number of game medals" decreases beyond a certain value (in this example, "100"). If the situation is unfavorable to the player, the player is unlikely to continue playing after the counting is completed, so no notification is given to the player that it would be better to leave some of the "number of game medals" remaining.
In this example, the count button 171 is pressed and held until the "game medal number" becomes 0. When the "game medal number" becomes 0, the effect image display device 157 displays the text "Please stop counting."

FIG. 154(a) is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 153(b).
The following mainly describes the differences from the example shown in (b).

In the example shown in FIG. 154(a), when the counting operation continues in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state) and the "game medal number" decreases to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), the counting operation is temporarily invalidated even if the counting operation continues. In other words, even if the counting button 171 is continued to be pressed and held, the counting is temporarily stopped. As a result, the decrease in the "game medal number" temporarily stops. FIG. 154(a) shows the performance image display device 157 when the "game medal number" has decreased to 50, and the display screen shows a message saying "Counting has been temporarily stopped." To restart the counting that was forcibly stopped, the counting button 17
1 new operation is required.

Figure 154 (b) shows an example in which counting that was forcibly terminated is restarted.

The example shown in FIG. 154(b) is a continuation from the example shown in FIG. 154(a), where the counting operation continues in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state), and the "game medal number" decreases to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), so the counting is forcibly stopped once. In this example, the player has a reason to stop playing even in an advantageous state, and the player presses the counting button 1.
In other words, the player presses the count button 171 again. In this modified example, when the "number of game medals" falls below a predetermined value, the "50" count is not counted by pressing and holding the count button 171 for a long time.
" counting does not work, and even if you press and hold the button, it will only count "1".
Each time the counting timing (300 ms) arrives, the "number of game medals" decreases by "1." This is because, for the same reason as described above, if all game medals were counted, the number of medals inserted for the next game (for example, 3 medals) would also be counted, and the next game would not be possible unless medals were lent from the lending machine 700. Therefore, to prevent the number of game medals from becoming 0, the number is counted by only "1."

When the number of game medals reaches 0, the effect image display device 157 displays the text "Counting has ended."

If the player presses and holds the count button 171 again, counting may be started in increments of "50". In this example, since the number of game medals has been reduced to "50", it is reduced to "0" all at once, and output of the "number of game medals" to the lending machine 700 is quickly completed.

The example shown in Fig. 154(c) is an example of the modified example described using Figs. 154(a) and (b) when the player is in an unfavorable state (for example, normal state). In the modified example, if the player is in an unfavorable state, pressing and holding the count button 171 until the "game medal number" becomes 0 is effective, as in the example shown in Fig. 153(c), and when the "game medal number" becomes 0, the text display 157 displays "Please stop counting."

However, even if the player is in an unfavorable state (for example, the normal state), in order to motivate the player to continue playing, the same processing as when the player is in an advantageous state (the processing shown in Figures 154(a) and 154(b) or the processing shown in Figure 153(b)) may be performed.

[Example of operation when the VL signal from the lending device 700 is turned off]
Next, an example will be described in which the VL signal from the rental device 700 is turned off.

Figure 155 is a timing chart showing an example of when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off.

The VL signal is always ON and is sent from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350. If this VL signal is OFF, it is suspected that the lending machine 700 is not powered on, and there is a risk that lending or counting will not be possible. It is also possible that the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is disconnected.

The medal count control unit 350 transmits VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off to the game control unit 302 by a medal count control state command shown in FIG. 78 in which the upper byte is 01H. When the game control unit 302 receives VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off, the judgment result in step S1007 shown in FIG. 83 becomes No, and the game control unit 302 cannot proceed to the next process until the VL signal is turned on. Therefore, even if the start lever 135 is operated, the operation is not considered to be a valid operation, and even if the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated, the operation is not considered to be a valid operation. In other words, some of the multiple types of game progress operations are invalidated. In this embodiment, the operations performed in the first half of one game are targeted as some of the operations. Therefore, if the VL signal is turned off after the game is started by the operation in the first half (the reels start spinning), the operation in the second half (the operation of the stop button 13
7 to 139 (stop operation) are valid. Therefore, the game can be continued, although it is limited. If the operation becomes invalid when the player is waiting for the right timing to operate the stop buttons 137 to 139, the operation becomes valid and the player must wait for the right timing from the beginning, which may give a cumbersome impression, but this can be reduced. Furthermore, if the operation up to the point where the internal win is determined by lottery among the game progress operations is made valid even when counting is not possible, for example, if a result favorable to the player is obtained and a grand performance suddenly begins, the player may feel more eager to continue the game. As a result, there is a possibility that a delay may occur in the response measures when the VL signal is turned off, but this can be reduced. However, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 may be invalidated. The player can be promptly informed that the VL signal is turned off. Note that even if the VL signal is turned off, the main control unit 3
00 (slot machine 100) side, and no notification regarding this is made. Also, if it is treated as an error, an error reset operation is required, but since the fact that the VL signal is off suggests that there is an abnormality on the lending machine 700 side, no error reset operation is required for the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). Note that, as in the following example, a configuration may be adopted in which an error is notified when the VL signal is off.

FIG. 155(a) shows whether the operation (insertion) of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation (insertion/lever operation) of the start lever 135 (lever) are treated as valid or invalid. Also, below that, the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown.
Also shown below is the state of the VL signal.

As shown in FIG. 155(a), when the VL signal is in the ON state, the bet button 130,
The operation of the start lever 135 and the operation of the start lever 132 are both treated as valid operations. Also, no error notification, which will be described later, is performed.

When the VL signal is in the OFF state, the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations. In addition, an error notification is displayed on the performance image display device 157. The performance image display device 157 shown in FIG. 155(a) displays a text display such as "Communication with the lending machine not established." In addition, as an error notification, it may be possible to notify that the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 or the operation of the start lever 135 is invalid. For example, a text display such as "Bet operation/lever operation is invalid" or a text display such as "Bet operation/lever operation is invalid because communication with the lending machine is not established" may be displayed.

Next, a modified example of this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, regardless of the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358, when the VL signal is turned off, the bet button 130
In the first modification, the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 were treated as invalid operations, but in the modification described below, the response differs depending on the value of the "number of game medals". That is, in the first modification, the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations when the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value (in this example, 15,000, which is the second threshold value for payout) (see FIG. 1).
If the VL signal is turned off when the number of medals played is 980, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(a), it is treated as an invalid operation. Since a small number of "game medals" means that the player may end the game at any time, the VL signal is used to notify the player that communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established and prompt a store clerk to repair the game as soon as possible. On the other hand, if the VL signal is turned off when the "game medals number" is equal to or greater than the above-mentioned threshold, it is treated as a valid operation.

FIG. 155(b) shows a first modified example in which the "number of game medals" is 15,550 medals, which is greater than or equal to 15,000, the second threshold for payout.

When the "number of game medals" reaches the payout threshold, all of the various game progression operations are invalidated. That is, the insertion operation for the next game (operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132) is invalidated, and there is no opportunity to operate the start lever 135 or the stop buttons 137 to 139.

In the first modified example shown in Fig. 155(b), when the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold, the "number of game medals" will eventually reach the payout threshold and the player will be unable to play the next game, so the game is not stopped until that happens, allowing the player to enjoy the game. Also, continuing the game even when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold often means that the player is in an advantageous state (e.g., an AT state, etc.), and stopping the game in this state is likely to significantly reduce the player's interest in the game, which is undesirable, so the game is not stopped.

In the first modified example in Figure 155 (b), the progress of the game does not stop even if the VL signal is turned off, but even in this modified example, an error notification is displayed on the performance image display device 157 when the VL signal is turned off.

FIG. 156 shows a second modified example in which the operation differs depending on whether the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value.

The state shown in Figure 156 (a) is a state in which the number of game medals is 14,000, which is less than a certain threshold (15,000, which is the second payout threshold in this example). In the second modified example, even if the VL signal turns off in this state, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations. Therefore, the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are both valid. However, even in the second modified example, when the VL signal turns off, an error notification is displayed on the performance image display device 157.

The state shown in Fig. 156(b) is a state in which the number of game medals is 15,550, which is equal to or greater than a certain threshold (second payout threshold). In the second modified example, when the VL signal is turned off in this state, some of the multiple types of game progress operations are invalidated. That is, the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 performed in the first half of a game are invalidated. Also, an error notification is displayed on the performance image display device 157.

The second modified example shown in FIG. 156 is the opposite of the first modified example, but a small number of "game medals" may mean that the game has just started, and the aim is not to hinder the progress of the game that has just started. In addition, in the slot machine 100, even if any trouble occurs, it is not impossible that the "game medals" will disappear, so if the "game medals" disappear when the "game medals" are large, the disadvantage will be large. Therefore, when the "game medals" are equal to or greater than a certain threshold (second payout threshold), the progress of the game is stopped, and the store clerk is encouraged to repair it early. In addition, a large number of "game medals" can be interpreted as a state in which the player may perform a counting operation at any time, so the aim is to make the player realize early that communication with the rental machine 700 has not been established, and to encourage the store clerk to repair it early.

From the above explanation, the way to respond when the VL signal is turned off will change depending on the value of the "game medal number" and whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. Note that an advantageous state for the player here refers to a state in which the "game medal number" is easily increased by payout (for example, AT state, ART state, BB state, BR state, etc.), and an unfavorable state refers to a state in which the "game medal number" is easily decreased by continuing the game (for example, normal state, etc.).

When the value of the "game medal number" is less than a certain threshold in a state disadvantageous to the player, when the VL signal is turned off, at least some of the operations among the multiple types of game progress operations are invalidated as shown in FIG. 155(a). On the other hand, when the value of the "game medal number" is equal to or greater than a certain threshold in a state advantageous to the player, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the operations among the multiple types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations as shown in FIG. 155(b). Alternatively, when the value of the "game medal number" is less than a certain threshold in a state disadvantageous to the player, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the operations among the multiple types of game progress operations may be treated as valid operations as shown in FIG. 156(a). On the other hand, when the value of the "game medal number" is equal to or greater than a certain threshold in a state advantageous to the player, when the VL signal is turned off, at least some of the operations among the multiple types of game progress operations may be invalidated as shown in FIG. 156(b).

When the "number of medals played" is greater than or equal to a certain threshold value and the player is in an unfavorable state, it is not unusual for the player to end the game at any time.
In order to let the player realize early that communication with the game machine has not been established and to encourage the store staff to repair the game early, at least some of the multiple types of game progress operations are invalidated. On the other hand, if the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value and the player is in an advantageous state, it is possible that the advantageous state has just been established. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations so as not to impede the progress of the game.

Alternatively, if the "game medal count" is greater than or equal to a certain threshold value in an unfavorable state for the player, counting may not be necessary. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the multiple types of game progress operations may be treated as valid operations so as not to impede the progress of the game. On the other hand, if the "game medal count" is less than a certain threshold value in an advantageous state for the player,
In order to let the player notice the problem early before the "number of game medals" reaches or exceeds the above-mentioned threshold value, and to encourage early repair by the store staff, at least some of the multiple types of game progress operations may be disabled when the VL signal is turned off.

Figure 157 is a timing chart showing another example of when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off.

In the above description, even if the VL signal is turned off, the main control unit 300 (the slot machine 1
157(a), the error is treated as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and no error reset operation is requested to the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). However, in the example shown in FIG. 157(a), the error is treated as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and an error reset operation is also requested to the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). The VL signal is turned off, as explained above.
It is highly likely that the power of the lending machine 700 is not turned on, or that the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is disconnected.
However, by making the error an error, a store clerk can be called, and the store clerk can turn on the power of the rental machine 700.

The example shown in FIG. 157(b) is an example in which the game can proceed until the counting button 171 is operated, even if the VL signal is turned off.

In the example shown in FIG. 157(b), even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations. When the VL signal is turned off, it means that communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established, and the lending machine 700 can determine this as an abnormality and issue an error notification. If the lending machine 700 issues an error notification immediately after the VL signal is turned off, a store attendant can be called without the slot machine 100 having to immediately issue an alert. Also, since communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established, the counting button 171
Even if the count button 171 is operated, there may be cases where the count notification is not sent to the lending machine 700. Therefore, in this example, the slot machine 100 is configured to notify the player at the timing when the count button 171 is operated. In this way, the slot machine 100 can notify the player with the minimum opportunity, and excessive notifications are suppressed, allowing the player to play comfortably.

After the operation of the count button 171 is detected, the notification on the slot machine 100 side continues until the VL signal returns to ON.

[Configuration regarding the difference between dispensing and counting processing]
When the increase in the number of game medals per unit of play in a game state advantageous to the player, such as an AT state or a bonus state, is greater than the decrease in the number of game medals per unit of play due to the counting process, it becomes difficult to end the counting process in a state advantageous to the player. For example, if the increase in the number of game medals per game (net increase) is 10 medals, and it is possible to count less than 10 medals in the shortest time required for one game, 4.1 seconds, if counting is performed while the AT game is proceeding, the number of game medals will continue to increase during the AT game. Therefore, if a performance associated with counting is performed while the AT game is proceeding, the execution period of this performance will be long, and it will be difficult to perform a performance with an end scene in anticipation of the end of counting, for example. In addition, when a counting performance (FIG. 130, etc.) is performed in relation to the counting process, this counting performance will interfere with other performances, and the interest in the game will decrease. On the other hand, by designing the increase in the number of game medals per unit of play in an advantageous game state to be smaller than the decrease in the number of game medals per unit of play due to the counting process, it is possible to make such problems less likely to occur. For example, if the increase in the number of game medals per game (net increase) is 10 medals, and the shortest time required for one game is 40 minutes, the number of game medals per game is 100 minutes.
If it is possible to count more than 10 medals in one second, and counting is performed while playing the AT, the number of medals played will continue to decrease during the AT game. For example, if 50 medals can be counted every 300 ms when the count button 171 is pressed, a decrease of about 700 medals can be expected in 4.1 seconds. Therefore, if a performance associated with counting is performed while playing the AT, it is possible to estimate the end of the execution period of this performance. For example, a setting suggestion performance may be executed (or the execution probability may be increased) according to the execution time of the counting process.

The counting performance is not limited to a configuration in which the counting performance is ended in accordance with the counting process, but may be ended even if the counting process is continuing. The execution time of the counting process for transferring the number of game medals to the lending machine 700 becomes longer as the number of game medals increases. For this reason, if the counting performance is executed uniformly in accordance with the execution period of the counting process, there is a risk of problems such as the counting performance being executed for a long time, reducing the interest in the game, or the counting performance interfering with other performances. Such problems may be prevented by ending the counting performance even if the counting process is continuing. Examples of such a configuration include a configuration in which the counting performance is ended depending on the game situation or the passage of time, or the counting performance is ended when the content defined as the counting performance is executed. If the counting process ends before the end condition of these counting performances is satisfied, the counting performance may be ended or continued.

The content of the counting effect may change depending on the amount of the game medals counted. In this case, the content of the effect may be set based on the amount of the game medals in the counting process, or based on the cumulative amount of the game medals in the counting process in an advantageous state. For example, when the amount of the game medals counted exceeds a predetermined value, a setting suggestion effect may be executed (or the execution probability may increase). The player will perform the counting process after acquiring a large number of game medals, and can choose how to play the game. In addition, with regard to the counting effect according to the amount of the game medals, if the counting process and the counting effect end midway due to reasons such as unintentionally releasing the count button 171, the interest in the game may decrease.
Therefore, even if the counting performance ends midway, the counting performance may continue for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) from that point on.
If a new counting process is started within a certain period of time, the previous counting performance (the counting performance that ended midway) may be resumed from where it left off. Also, the counting performance may be continued for a certain period of time (e.g., one second) after the counting process is finished, and if a new counting process is started while this counting performance is continuing, the counting performance being executed may be continued as is. With these configurations, it is possible to prevent the counting performance from disappearing due to the end of the counting process due to an unintended operation. The above-mentioned certain period of time may be the same as the determination time for a long press of the counting button 171, for example.

Also, for example, when operating the counting button 171 while performing a game progress operation, it is difficult to further operate a button for the effect. If an effect requiring an operation of such an operating means is executed during the execution of the counting effect, there is a risk of inducing an erroneous operation. For this reason, during the execution of the counting effect, an effect requiring an operation of some operating means may not be executed (or the execution probability may be reduced). Also, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect that is significantly difficult to recognize when executed simultaneously with the counting effect is similarly restricted. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect that is restricted during the execution of the counting effect is provided. Note that the effect does not have to require the operation of the operating means, and for example, an effect accompanied by a freeze that stops the game from progressing, or an effect that takes a long time to execute and the result is not known until it is completed, may not be executed.

For example, when the counting process is started while the side lamp is on, which is an advantageous state effect, the effect by the side lamp may be changed to the counting effect, so that the advantageous state effect may be replaced by the counting effect. Also, when some effect is started during the execution of the counting effect, the counting effect may be replaced by the effect executed later.

In addition, the content of the counting presentation may change depending on the degree of progress in the game while the counting process is being executed, such as causing a character to change (for example, grow) if the game is progressed while the counting process is being executed.

In addition, when the number of game medals reaches 0 and the counting process and counting performance ends, by continuing to press the counting button 171, when new game medals are acquired and the counting process starts, the counting performance that was previously ended may be resumed from where it left off.

In addition, at least some of the game progress operations during the execution of the counting process may be restricted, such as not being able to start the next game while the counting process is being executed.

[Configuration for dispensing and settling operations during counting processing]
In the embodiment described above, by pressing and holding the count button 171, the number of game medals can be transferred to the lending machine 700 in increments of up to 50 medals. Figure 158 (a) shows the change in the number of game medals when the count button 171 is pressed and held from a state in which there are 120 game medals. Specifically, 50 of the 120 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700,
Next, 50 of the remaining 70 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, and then all of the remaining 20 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, until the number of game medals becomes 0.

In the counting process, the value of the current medal count is temporarily set as the medal count for counting judgment (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the counting process is executed based on this medal count for counting judgment (FIG. 101). At this time, if the medal count increases (by disbursement or settlement operation) after the medal count for counting judgment is set, the content is reflected in the medal count for counting judgment set next. FIG. 158(b) shows the change in the medal count when 8 medals are disbursed while 70 medals are being transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 158(a). In this example, 50 medals out of the remaining 70 medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, leaving 20 medals, and the amount of the 8 medals disbursed is added to the medal count of 28 medals, and then all of the remaining medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, and the medal count becomes 0.

In the embodiment described above, as in the example of FIG. 158(b) above, the increase in the number of game medals during the counting process (payout or settlement operation) is reflected in this continuing counting process, and the number of game medals at the time the counting process started (120 medals in FIG. 158(b))
and the number of game medals transferred by the counting process (128 medals in FIG. 158(b)) will not match, and this may result in a workload when the counting process data is checked later. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 158(c), the increase in the number of game medals during the counting process (payout or settlement operation) may not be reflected immediately, but may be reflected after the number of game medals becomes 0 or the counting process that was continued is terminated by releasing the count button 171 before the number of game medals becomes 0. For example, if the count button 171 is pressed and held for a long time, the 120 medals stored when the count button 171 was pressed and held are counted, and then the 8 medals that were added during the count button 171 being pressed and held are counted.
For example, if the count button 171 is released halfway through the long press, 60 of the 120 medals stored when the long press of the count button 171 was started will be counted, and then the 68 medals stored when the long press of the count button 171 is resumed will be counted. After resuming, since the number of game medals at the time the counting process started was 68, the 68 medals will be counted in the order of 50 medals → 18 medals.
In the flow of FIG. 158(a), 70 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, and 8 medals are paid out. However, this increase is not reflected until the game medal count becomes 0 (FIG. 1
158(a)), and after the number of game medals becomes 0, this increment is reflected, and the counting process continues until the number of game medals becomes 0. In this configuration, the number of game medals at the start of the counting process (120 medals in FIG. 158(c)) and the number of game medals transferred by the counting process until the number of game medals becomes 0 (12
0 cards) can be matched.

In Fig. 158(e), 8 medals are paid out while 70 medals are being transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of Fig. 158(a), but the 8 medals that were paid out are counted immediately after the 120 medals that were stored when the count button 171 was pressed and held are counted. With this configuration, the time required for counting can be shortened.

In addition, if the number of game medals increases multiple times while the counting process is continuing, the total value of all these may be reflected later, or, while the counting process is continuing, each time the number of game medals reaches 0, it may be reflected one by one.

In addition, when the above-mentioned configuration is adopted, the display of the game medal count display device 170 may be made to match the change in the game medal count. Also, the increase in the game medal count (payout or settlement operation) during the ongoing counting process may be reflected immediately on the display (reflected in the display of the decrease in the game medal count). However, the amount of change in the value due to the counting process in this case is the same between the actual game medal count and the displayed game medal count (a state in which a discrepancy in the amount of increase has occurred). FIG. 158(d) shows a comparison between FIG. 158(c) and FIG.
), the flow is shown when a configuration is adopted in which an increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) is immediately reflected on the display. In this configuration, there is a discrepancy between the actual number of game medals and the displayed number of game medals due to the increase, but they match when the counting process is completed. Even if the counting process is completed by releasing the count button 171 before the number of game medals reaches 0, the increase is reflected in the number of game medals at that point, so the actual number of game medals and the displayed number of game medals match.

The timing for reflecting the increase in the number of game medals while the counting process is continuing is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, the timing when the counting button 171 is released. In this case, the reflected increase can be transferred to the lending machine 700 by newly operating the counting button 171. Alternatively, it may be the timing when the number of game medals becomes 0 while the counting process is continuing, and further in this case, it may be possible to transfer the reflected increase to the lending machine 700 without newly operating the counting button 171 (the counting process continues, FIG. 158(e)).

The increase in the number of game medals is due to payouts and settlement operations,
Either one of these may be the subject of the configuration described in FIG. 158(c), or both may be the subject.

[About setting the bet reduction by bet button operation]
In the embodiment described above, if the player wishes to change the number of game medals bet from three to one, the player operates the settlement button 134 to temporarily reset the three bet to the "number of game medals"
Then, by operating the bet button 130 for betting one coin again, the current bet number can be set to one coin. In this case, the operation of the settlement button 134 and the bet button 130 is required, but the configuration may be such that this operation can be performed by operating the bet button 130 in one operation. As an example of such a configuration, when the current bet number is at the maximum value, the bet button 13
0 is operated, a settlement button process (FIG. 85) is executed and then a process for the bet button operation is executed. Also, when the bet button 130 is operated while the current bet amount is at the maximum value, a settlement command (FIG. 80) may be sent with the settlement amount being the amount of change (the difference of 2 in the above example) when the bet amount becomes the minimum value from the maximum value, and the value of the current bet amount may be set to the minimum value. This configuration settles a part of the bet amount by operating the bet button 130, and a separate insertion process or insertion command is not required. Note that these configurations correspond to examples of a configuration in which the current bet amount is set to the minimum value based on the operation of an operation means capable of setting the minimum value of the bet amount when the current bet amount is at the maximum value.

In addition, when the above-mentioned configuration is adopted, the current bet number can be changed from 0 to 1 to 2 to 3 to 1 to 2 . . . by repeatedly operating the bet button 130.
You can change the current bet setting by simply operating the buttons.

In addition, when there is a settlement sound that can be output in response to the operation of the settlement button 134 and a coin insertion sound that can be output in response to the operation of the bet button 130, the settlement sound and coin insertion sound may be output consecutively in response to the operation of the bet button 130 when the current bet amount changes from the maximum value to the minimum value.
However, there is a risk that players will become confused if two different sounds are output for one operation.
When the bet button 130 is operated when the current bet number becomes the minimum value from the maximum value, a deposit sound may be output without outputting a settlement sound. In addition, when the settlement button 134 is operated, a character or the like indicating that a settlement has been made is displayed on the screen of the effect image display device 157, and when the bet button 130 is operated when the current bet number becomes the minimum value from the maximum value, a character or the like indicating that a settlement has been made is displayed on the screen of the effect image display device 157.
The screen of No. 7 may not display any text or the like indicating that the settlement has been made. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakingly operating the settlement button 134 instead of the bet button 130.

[About the effects according to the number of medals played]
A configuration for executing different effects depending on the number of game medals will be described below with reference to Fig. 159. Fig. 159 is a diagram showing an example of effects executed depending on the number of game medals.

In the above embodiment, the information on the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 of the medal count control unit 350 is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 via the game control unit 302 (medal count control state command and security command). The following example is an example of an operation for executing different effects depending on the value of this game medal count. In this example, in the AT state, a normal effect is executed until the game medal count reaches a predetermined number (3000 in this example), and a special effect is executed when the predetermined number is reached.

First, FIG. 159(a1) shows the state at the start of the AT state (number of game medals at the start = 500), FIG. 159(a2) shows the state of the game in the AT state, FIG. 159(a3) shows the state when medals are won in the AT state, and FIG.
a4) shows the state at the end of the AT state. In the AT state, the number of medals played is displayed as the "owned" value in the upper left of the screen, and the number of medals acquired after the AT state is displayed in the "...GET" portion in the upper right of the screen.

In the flow of Figures 159 (a1) to (a4), since the number of game medals in the AT state does not exceed 3,000, the special effect is not executed and the normal effect (Figure 159 (a2)) is executed.

Next, Fig. 159 (b1) to (b3) show an example of a case where a special effect is executed when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number (3000). In this example, the state where a normal effect is executed because the number of game medals has not reached the predetermined number (Fig. 159 (b1)) changes to a state where medals are acquired and the number of game medals reaches the predetermined number (Fig. 159 (b2)).
After that, the special effect is executed (FIG. 159(b3)). In this special effect, the color of the background and the operation navigation, and the background music are different from those of the normal effect. In other words, the effect changes when many game medals are obtained, which can increase the interest of the game.

The different effects are not limited to the above-mentioned special effects, and various effects can be used. The different effects are not limited to a configuration in which different effects are used, and for example, a different effect may be inserted into a part of a basic effect being executed to create a different effect overall. For example, the number of game medals and the number of medals acquired may be displayed in different colors or sizes, such as changing the color of each digit to make it rainbow, or changing the color of each digit periodically. The state in which the effects are different is not limited to the AT state, and may be different when the player is in a favorable state.

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to switching the presentation immediately after the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, as long as the presentation executed differs depending on whether or not the number of game medals reaches the predetermined number. For example, the presentation may be switched when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number and some other condition is met (for example, a certain number of games have been played, or a switching lottery has been won), or the ending may differ depending on whether or not the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number.

Furthermore, when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, a display suggesting a set value may be executed. In the example of Fig. 159 (c1), when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, a display suggesting a set value (in this example, a family crest) is executed at the time of the ending.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to one in which a different effect or display is always executed when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, but may be one in which a different effect or display is more likely to be executed compared to when the number of game medals does not reach the predetermined number.

Also, for example, when the number of game medals reaches 3,000, the above-mentioned special effect is executed, and when the number of game medals reaches 2,000, a display suggesting a set value is executed at the ending. In this way, the value of the number of game medals that serves as a trigger for different types of effects and displays may be set separately for each.

In addition, in the above example, a configuration was described in which the number of game medals is used as the determination subject for whether or not to execute a different effect or display, but the same effect may be achieved even if, for example, the number of possessed medals stored on the card inserted into the lending machine 700 or in a higher-level server is used as the determination subject, or the total value of the number of game medals and the number of possessed medals is used as the determination subject. Also, the value used in this case is not limited to the total number of possessed medals, but may be a part of it (for example, when the number of possessed medals reaches 500).
0, 1000 of them may be used. When such a configuration is adopted, information regarding the number of medals held may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. When the credit balance is handled by a card inserted in the lending machine 700 or a higher-level server, the value of this credit balance or the value obtained by converting the credit balance into the number of game medals may be used in a configuration similar to the above-mentioned configuration using the number of medals held. In this way, information regarding the game value managed by the card inserted in the lending machine 700 or the higher-level server may be used to determine whether or not to execute a different performance or display.

Furthermore, the configuration may use multiple types of judgment targets and combine the results, for example, a different presentation may be executed when the number of game medals is 2,000 or more and the number of held medals is 5,000 or more, that is, a different presentation may be executed when either the number of game medals and the number of held medals (or either one of them) satisfy certain conditions.
It is also possible for the values of the objects to be judged not to be displayed; however, if the values to be judged are displayed as in the above example, it becomes easier to understand the relationship between the objects to be judged and the presentation, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In the above example, the number of game medals or the number of medals held is used as the determination subject for whether or not to execute a different effect or display. However, the number of medals acquired in the AT state may be used as the determination subject.
0) is reached, a special performance is executed.
160(d2) to (d4) show the case where the number of game medals reaches 3000, as in the case explained using FIG. 159(b1) to (b3). In this example, however, the possibility of executing the special effect is determined based on the number of medals won, so that FIG. 159(b1) to (b3)
Unlike in FIG. 159(c1), the special effect is not being executed at this point. After that, the number of medals won reaches a predetermined number (3000 in this case) (FIG. 160(d5)), after which the special effect is executed (FIG. 160(d6)). In this example as well, the effect changes when the number of medals won increases, which can increase the interest of the game. Also, in this example, it is shown that the same setting suggestion as in FIG. 159(c1) is displayed when the number of medals won reaches 2000.

In the above example, a configuration was described in which different effects or displays are executed when the number of game medals, the number of held medals, or the number of acquired medals reaches a predetermined number, but for example, the number of game medals is used to execute a certain part of the effect, and the number of acquired medals is used to execute another part of the effect, and so on. Also, for example, a configuration in which the effects described above can be executed in parallel, such as executing an effect using the number of held medals and an effect using the number of acquired medals in parallel, may be used. In these configurations, for example, if the counting process is not executed in a state advantageous to the player, the number of acquired medals may exceed the number of held medals, and different effects may be executed when such a situation occurs. In this case, a configuration may be used in which multiple types of judgment targets are used and the results are combined, such as executing different effects.

[Operation when multiple errors occur]
The following describes operations related to errors using Figures 161 to 163.
FIG. 162 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when an overflow of the number of game medals occurs.
FIG. 162 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a medal count control wire break error (error code E0) occurs. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a medal count upper limit exceeding error and a medal count control wire break error (error code E0) occur simultaneously.

In the above embodiment, the number of game medals stored in the slot machine 100 (RAM 358 of the medal count control unit 350) is counted by operating the count button 171.
In FIG. 161(a1) to (a3), the number of medals is 1,336 (FIG. 161(a1)), and the count button 171 is operated (FIG. 1
61(a2)), and as a result of all the game medal numbers being transmitted to the lending machine 700, the value of the game medal number display device 170 (the game medal number stored in the slot machine 100) becomes 0 (
A series of steps up to FIG. 161(a3) is shown.

In the above embodiment, the upper limit of the number of game medals is set to 16,383.
When a combination that provides a payout is won, if the sum of the payout and the number of game medals exceeds the upper limit, an overflow state will occur (the response command will be "abnormal" in Fig. 117). In this overflow state, the addition process due to the payout is not executed, and the game waits for the overflow state to be resolved, which can be considered a type of error. This overflow state can be resolved by operating the counting button 171 to move the number of game medals to the lending machine 700. Figs. 161(b1) to (b4) show the state in which the number of game medals is at the upper limit (Fig. 161(b1)), and the game progresses from a state in which a combination that provides a payout is won to an overflow state (Fig. 161(b
2)), and then the count button 171 is pressed and held (FIG. 161(b3), 50 is moved to the lending machine 700 as the number of game medals, and the value of the game medal number display device 170 is decreased by 1 each time), and the overflow state is eliminated (FIG. 161(b4)). The message "Error has been removed" in FIG. 161(b4) indicates the elimination of this overflow state, and is displayed for a few seconds and then erased. When the overflow state is eliminated, the payout amount is added to the number of game medals. In this example, the count button 171 is pressed and held, but if the count button 171 is not pressed and held, 1 is moved to the lending machine 700 as the number of game medals. In this case, the overflow state can be released by repeatedly pressing the count button 171 until the number of game medals becomes equal to or less than the upper limit value. In any case, the overflow state can be released by operating the count button 171.

In the above embodiment, the game control unit 302 is configured to be able to detect various errors that impede game progress (for example, the error in FIG. 76(b)). Since these errors require action from the store, the game is prevented from progressing and the error is notified. FIGS. 162(c1) to (c3) show a state in which no error has occurred (FIG. 162(c1)), a state in which a medal count control unit disconnection error has occurred (FIG. 162(c2)), and a state in which a medal count control unit disconnection error has occurred (FIG. 162(c3)).
162(c2)), and then the store takes action and the reset button R is operated, and the error is resolved (Fig. 162(c3)). The message "Error E0 resolved" in Fig. 162(c3) indicates that the error that occurred (in this example, a medal count control unit disconnection error) has been resolved.
The reset button R is a button for sending a reset signal to each control unit, and is provided inside the gaming machine so that the player cannot operate it.

As explained above, in the slot machine 100 of the above embodiment, there are errors related to the game control unit 302 that must be cleared by the store's operation (for example, the abnormal game sequence error and chip ID number mismatch in FIG. 76(b), hereinafter referred to as game control error, etc.), and errors related to the medal count control unit 350 that can be cleared by the player's operation (for example, overflow state, hereinafter referred to as medal count control error). Compared to game control errors, medal count control errors are errors that do not have a serious impact on game progress. For this reason, if these errors occur at the same time, it is conceivable to prioritize and clear the game control error with the higher importance. An example of the operation when such a configuration is adopted will be explained below. Note that in the following explanation, examples of medal count control unit disconnection error and overflow state will be explained, but it is also possible to consider the following as an example of the game control unit 30
Errors related to 2 and errors related to the medal count control unit 350 are not limited to these errors, and can be applied to errors that require a similar method of resolution.

FIG. 163(d1) shows a state where the number of game medals is at the upper limit, and then a combination with a payout is won, resulting in an overflow state.
The figure shows a state in which a message is displayed urging the user to operate the counting button 171 to release the overflow state. The overflow state can be released by operating the counting button 171, but here it is assumed that a medal count control unit disconnection error occurs before this operation is performed (a game control error and a medal count control error overlap). Figure 163 (d3) shows a state in which the message shown in Figure 163 (d2) has been cleared and a message indicating that a medal count control unit disconnection error has occurred is displayed. Note that in the above example, when a medal count control unit disconnection error occurs, a message indicating that an overflow state exists (Figure 16
However, for example, a message indicating that a medal count control unit disconnection error has occurred may be displayed superimposed on a message indicating that an overflow state is occurring, or a message indicating that an overflow state is occurring may be displayed in a position that does not interfere with the message indicating that a medal count control unit disconnection error has occurred. In addition, when displaying messages regarding both errors, a display different from the display when an error has occurred alone may be used.

When the game control error and the medal count control error overlap, the counting process is not executed even if the count button 171 is operated, and the overflow state is not released.
A message is displayed indicating that the operation of the count button 171 is invalid.
163(d3) shows a state in which, as a result of operating the count button 171, a message is displayed indicating that the operation of the count button 171 is invalid and urging the user to first resolve the medal count control unit disconnection error, in addition to the message shown in FIG. 163(d3). With this configuration, the medal count control unit disconnection error can be given priority for processing.

Then, the store takes action and the reset button R is operated, eliminating the error and returning to a state where an overflow has occurred (elimination of overlap between the game control error and the medal count control error). Figure 163 (d5) shows a state in which a message is displayed indicating that the medal count control unit disconnection error has been resolved. Figure 163 (d6) shows that after this message is cleared, a message similar to that shown in Figure 163 (d2) is displayed. Thereafter, by pressing the count button 1 as explained in Figure 161,
By operating 71, the counting process can be executed and the overflow state can be released.
163(d7) and (d8) show a state in which the overflow state has been eliminated by pressing and holding the count button 171, similarly to FIG. 161(b3) and (b4). In this case, the payout amount is added to the number of game medals after the overflow state is eliminated.

In order to realize the above operation, it is also possible to prevent the process corresponding to the operation of the operation means used to resolve the medal count control error (the count button 171 in the above example) from being executed while a game control error is occurring. Fig. 164 (e1) to (e3) show that the state goes from no error occurring (Fig. 164 (e1)) to a state where a medal count control unit disconnection error has occurred (Fig. 164 (e2)), and although the count button 171 (the operation means for releasing the overflow state) is operated while this error is occurring, a message indicating that the operation is invalid (the count process is not executed) is displayed (Fig. 164 (e3)).

In the above example, a configuration has been described in which the operation means for clearing the game control error and the operation means for clearing the medal count control error are different. Here, for example, the error clearing operation means for clearing the game control error and the medal count control error may be the same, such that both errors can be cleared by the reset button R. In this case, the error clearing operation means may be operable by the player, or may not be operable (for example, an operation means installed inside the gaming machine). In this configuration,
When a game control error occurs while a medal count control error is occurring, the game control error is released by operating an error release operation means (the medal count control error is not released, and the game control error is released with priority), thereby allowing the game control error with the highest importance to be resolved with priority.

[Regarding notification of counting process (1)]
In a state advantageous to the player, a performance to liven up the game may be executed, but the configuration described below provides a case where the volume of this performance is lowered (or muted) while the counting button 171 is being operated (counting process). In this configuration, the change in the volume of the performance allows the player to understand that the counting process is being executed, and allows the player to concentrate on the counting process. This change in volume corresponds to an example of a counting notification. Note that, below, this counting notification due to the change in the volume of the performance is referred to as counting notification A. Note that, although the configuration in which the volume of the performance is changed by the counting process is mainly described here, a configuration in which the performance in a state advantageous to the player is changed by the counting process (for example, a change in volume, a change in sound quality, a change in part of the display, a change in the color or lighting state of the lamp) may also be used.

In a state advantageous to the player (e.g., AT state, bonus state), the so-called demo effect is not executed, and in a state disadvantageous to the player (e.g., normal state), the demo effect is executed.
In this configuration, the presentation advantageous to the player is continuously executed. The counting notification A can also make the player aware of the execution of the counting process.

While the counting notification A has the above-mentioned effect, there is a problem that the performance of an important scene becomes difficult to understand depending on the timing of execution. Here, the state in which all reels have stopped spinning corresponds to the period between games, and the performance to be executed is less important, so the counting notification A may be configured to be executed when all reels have stopped spinning. Furthermore, since there are cases in which a performance of winning a winning combination is executed after the last stop operation on the reels is performed, the counting notification A may be configured to be executed on the condition that a predetermined period has passed since the last stop operation on the reels and all reels have stopped spinning. In addition, the counting notification A may be configured to be executed on the condition that all reels have stopped spinning after the performance resulting from the last stop operation on the reels has been executed (for example, when it is switched to a demo performance). In addition, when a configuration is adopted in which the presentation volume is reduced (or muted) as time passes since the last stop operation on the reels is performed regardless of the presence or absence of counting processing (for example, a configuration aimed at reducing power consumption), the degree of each volume reduction may be made different so that it can be distinguished from the reduction in presentation volume due to counting notification A. Furthermore, when the reduction in presentation volume due to the passage of time and the execution of counting notification A overlap, the reduction in volume due to counting notification A may be prioritized.

On the other hand, when any of the reels is spinning, the game is being played and the importance of the effects to be executed is high. Therefore, the counting notification A may not be executed when any of the reels is spinning.

In addition, depending on the operation during the game, there may be cases where the effect is executed in response to the operation. For example, when all the reels have stopped spinning as described above, the effect for the next game may be executed in response to the operation of the bet button 132 or the start lever 135.
In addition, there are cases where an effect that enhances the interest of the game is executed by operating an operation means for effect.
(e.g., return the volume to its original state).

In the above description, the counting sound is output or not depending on the number of sheets counted (for example,
FIG. 130), or the counting sound may be changed depending on the operation time of the counting button 171 (for example,
130), but when the counting notification A is executed, the counting sound corresponding to the counting process may be added. Also, for example, the counting notification A may be executed only when all reels are stopped, while the counting sound may be output at any time for the counting process, so that the counting sound is output separately from the counting notification A. Note that the counting sound added here may be added while changing the volume according to the situation, for example, by setting the volume to 50% during the reel rotation and setting the volume to 100% during the reel stop. Also, not limited to the counting sound, various effects corresponding to the counting process (for example, the output of the counting sound, the counting display related to the counting process, and a combination of these) may be combined with the counting notification A. Examples of such various effects for the counting process include the output of the counting sound in accordance with the execution of the counting process, and the counting display is allowed to be executed after the game is finished (after the third stop operation, after all reels are stopped) (output of only the counting sound during the reel rotation). As another example, a counting sound is output in conjunction with the execution of the counting process, and the counting display is allowed to be executed after a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed after the game has ended (after the third stop operation or after all reels have stopped) (only the counting sound is output while the reels are rotating).

[Regarding notification of counting process (2)]
In the above description, it is determined whether or not to output a counting sound depending on the number of counted sheets (for example, FIG. 13
0), or the counting sound may be changed depending on the operation time of the counting button 171 (for example,
0), a configuration for outputting a counting sound corresponding to the counting process has been mentioned.

When the player is in an advantageous state, a presentation to liven up the game may be executed, but the configuration described below allows the counting sound to be output while the counting button 171 is being operated (counting process), and provides for a case in which the presentation sound of the advantageous state is maintained. With this configuration, the presentation sound of the advantageous state may be maintained even during the counting process, so that interest in the game does not decrease. In addition, the counting sound can inform the player that the counting process is being executed. This counting sound corresponds to an example of a counting notification. In the following, the counting notification by this counting sound will be referred to as counting notification B.

While the counting notification B has the above-mentioned effect, there is a problem that the performance of an important scene becomes difficult to understand depending on the timing of execution. Here, the state in which all reels have stopped spinning corresponds to the period between games, and the performance to be executed is less important, so the counting notification B may be configured to be executed when all reels have stopped spinning. Furthermore, since a performance of winning a winning combination may be executed after the last stop operation on the reels is performed, the counting notification B may be configured to be executed on the condition that a predetermined period has passed since the last stop operation on the reels and all reels have stopped spinning. Furthermore, the counting notification B may be configured to be executed on the condition that all reels have stopped spinning after the performance resulting from the last stop operation on the reels has been executed (for example, when it is switched to a demo performance).

On the other hand, when any of the reels are spinning, the game is in progress and the effect to be executed is of high importance. Therefore, the counting notification B may not be executed when any of the reels are spinning.

In addition, depending on the operation during the game, there may be cases where the effect is executed in response to the operation. For example, when all the reels have stopped spinning as described above, the effect for the next game may be executed in response to the operation of the bet button 132 or the start lever 135.
In addition, there may be cases where an effect that enhances the interest of the game is executed by using the operation of the operation means for the effect as a trigger. For this reason, the counting notification B may not be executed after any operation of the operation means is performed.

In the above description, the case where the counting notification B is executed and the case where it is not executed are described, but for example, when there are a first type counting sound and a second type counting sound (for example, different melodies, different tones, different numbers of sounds, different volumes, etc.), the configuration may be such that they are replaced. That is, the case where the counting notification B is executed may be interpreted as the case where the counting sound of the first type is output, and the case where the counting notification B is not executed may be interpreted as the case where the counting sound of the second type is output. Since there are various types of sounds, for example, if the counting sound of the second type is a type of sound that does not significantly interfere with the presentation of an advantageous state, the player can understand that the counting process is being executed without losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, for example, the output of the counting sound of the first mode may be interpreted as the execution of the counting performance of the first mode, and the output of the counting sound of the second mode may be interpreted as the execution of the counting performance of the second mode. Since there are various types of performances, not limited to sounds, for example, if the counting performance of the second mode is a type that does not significantly interfere with the performance of an advantageous state, the player can be made to understand that the counting process is being executed without losing interest in the game.

[Example of counting process notification]
Hereinafter, specific examples of the configuration of the counting notification (counting notification A, counting notification B) described above will be described with reference to Figs. 165 to 167. Fig. 165 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when an output permission period for the counting sound is set for outputting the counting sound for the counting process. Fig. 166 shows
FIG. 165(a) shows the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation shown in FIG. 165(b), and FIG. 167 shows the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation shown in FIG. 165(b).

Fig. 165(a) and Fig. 165(b) are both examples of operation in a configuration in which the output of the counting sound is permitted when a predetermined time has elapsed from the third stop operation in the AT state, and the counting sound stops when a bet operation is performed. Fig. 165(a) and Fig. 165(b) show the period in which the counting sound is permitted, and the output period of the counting sound in response to the operation of the counting button 171 within this period. In the AT state, except when the counting sound is output, the AT performance sound corresponding to the AT state is continuously output.

In the example of Fig. 165(a), the timing (a1) when the AT state starts is shown, and Fig. 166(a1) shows the state at this time. In this AT state, operation navigation may be executed during a game. As an example showing the state in this case, Fig. 166(a2) shows an example in which operation navigation is displayed at the timing (a2) after the start operation.
Also, as shown in Figures 166 (a2) to (a7), in this example, the current number of game medals is displayed as the "owned" value in the upper left box, and the cumulative number of game medals acquired in the AT state is displayed in the upper right box.

Next, between the third stop operation and before the bet button operation for the next game,
Assume that the count button 171 is pressed and held.
The operation period of 1 is shown. The following is the timings (a3) to (a7) shown in FIG.
) will be explained in order.

First, timing (a3) is the timing after the third stop operation and before the operation of the count button 171. Fig. 166 (a3) shows the state in which the performance when a winning combination (here, 8 game medals are obtained) is executed at this timing (a3).

The next timing (a4) is when the count button 171 is operated after the third stop operation. At this timing (a4), the count sound is not permitted, and the count sound is not generated as shown in FIG.
As shown in (a4), the display of Fig. 166 (a3) continues, and the AT performance sound continues. Then, by operating the count button 171, the word "COUNTING" is displayed in the box at the top left of the screen, indicating that the counting process is being performed, and the counting process has started, indicating that the number of game medals is beginning to decrease.

The next timing (a5) is a timing when the counting sound is permitted while the counting button 171 is being held down. At this timing (a5), as shown in FIG. 166(a5), the display of FIG. 166(a3) continues, but the AT performance sound is not being output, and the counting sound is being output. And, as the counting button 171 is being operated, the words "Counting" continue to be displayed in the box at the top left of the screen, indicating that the number of game medals is decreasing.

The next timing (a6) is when the counting button 171 is released. At this timing (a6), the display of Fig. 166(a3) continues as shown in Fig. 166(a6). Also, since the counting button 171 has not been operated, the counting sound is not output, and the output of the AT performance sound has resumed. Note that the words "Counting" in the box in the upper left corner of the screen have been erased.

The next timing (a7) is the timing when the bet button 132 is operated. At this timing (a7), the background display of Fig. 166(a3) continues as shown in Fig. 166(a7). Also, the AT effect sound is being output.

In the above example, the operation at timing (a5) corresponds to an example of counting notification A. This operation shows a configuration of counting notification A in which the AT performance sound is no longer output during the counting process. Moreover, the operation at timings (a4) and (a5) corresponds to an example of counting notification B. This operation shows a configuration of counting notification B in which the AT performance sound is sometimes maintained during the counting process and the counting sound is sometimes output.

Next, in the example of FIG. 165(b), the timing (b1) when the AT state starts is shown, and FIG. 167(b1) shows the state at this time. In this AT state, operation navigation may be executed during play. As an example showing the state in this case, FIG. 167(b2) shows the state at this time.
167(b2)-(b8) shows an example in which the operation navigation is displayed at the timing (b2) after the first stop operation. In this example, as shown in FIG. 167(b2)-(b8), the current number of game medals is displayed as the "possession" value in the upper left box, and the total number of game medals acquired in the AT state is displayed in the upper right box.

Next, after the first stop operation is performed and immediately after the start operation of the next game, the count button 1
Assume that count button 71 is pressed and held down. Figure 165(b) shows the operation period of count button 171. The following describes the timings (b3) to (b8) shown in Figure 165(b) in order.

First, at timing (b3), the count button 171 is operated after the first stop operation. At this timing (b3), the count sound is not permitted.
167(b2) (including the AT sound effect) continues as shown in FIG. 167(b3). Then, by operating the count button 171, the word "COUNTING" is displayed in the box at the top left of the screen, indicating that the counting process is being performed, and the counting process has started, indicating that the number of game medals is beginning to decrease.

The next timing (b4) is the timing after the third stop operation and when the count button 171 continues to be pressed.
The display shows the effect that occurs when a winning combination is achieved (here, 8 game medals are won). At this timing (b4), the counting sound is not permitted, and the AT effect sound is being output. As the counting button 171 is being operated, the words "Counting" continue to be displayed in the box at the top left of the screen, indicating that the number of game medals is decreasing.

The next timing (b5) is a timing when the counting sound is permitted while the counting button 171 is being pressed and held. At this timing (b5), as shown in FIG. 167(b5), the display of FIG. 167(b4) continues, but the AT performance sound is not being output, and the counting sound is being output. Then, as the counting button 171 is being operated, the words "COUNTING" are displayed in a box in the upper left corner of the screen, indicating that the number of game medals is decreasing.

The next timing (b6) is when the bet button 132 is operated while the count button 171 is being pressed and held.
As shown in Fig. 167(b4) in Fig. 6), the display continues. In addition, the operation of the bet button 132 ends the permitted period for the counting sound, and the output of the AT performance sound is resumed. In addition, as the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in the box in the upper left corner of the screen, indicating that the number of game medals is decreasing.

The next timing (b7) is the timing after the start lever 135 is operated. At this timing (b7), the operation navigation is displayed as shown in FIG. 167 (b7).
In addition, by operating the count button 171, the words "COUNTING" are displayed in a box in the upper left corner of the screen, indicating that the number of game medals is decreasing.

The next timing (b8) is when the counting button 171 is released. At this timing (b8), the display in FIG. 167(b7) continues as shown in FIG. 167(b8). Also, since the counting button 171 has not been operated, the counting sound is not output, and the AT performance sound is output. Note that the words "Counting" in the box at the top left of the screen have been erased.

In the above example, the operation at timing (b5) corresponds to an example of counting notification A. This operation shows a configuration of counting notification A in which the AT performance sound is no longer output during the counting process. Moreover, the operation at timings (b3) to (b5) corresponds to an example of counting notification B. This operation shows a configuration of counting notification B in which the AT performance sound is sometimes maintained during the counting process and the counting sound is sometimes output.

[Display and effects based on information from the medal count control unit]
In this embodiment, the medal count control unit 350 periodically (every 5.9 ms or 8 ms in FIG. 74)
The game control unit 3
In the security command (FIG. 74) sent periodically (every 100 ms in FIG. 74) from the game control unit 302, some of this information is sent to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 can perform various displays and presentation controls based on this information. Furthermore, the player can understand this information through these displays and presentations.

In the above configuration, when the power is turned on, the medal count control unit 350 and the game control unit 3
If the time taken to establish communication with the game control unit 302 is longer than the time taken to establish communication between the game control unit 302 and the first sub-control unit 400 when the power is turned on, the game control unit 302 may not yet receive a medal count control state command from the medal count control unit 350.
2 to the first sub-control unit 400. Since the security command sent at this time does not reflect the information of the medal count control unit 350, if various displays or performance controls are performed based on the information contained in this security command, the information provided to the player will be different from the actual state.

To prevent such a situation from occurring, a security command may be sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 after communication is established between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350. For example, the game control unit 302 may send the first security command after powering on after receiving the medal count control state command.
The security command may be transmitted after a sufficient waiting time has elapsed.

Furthermore, even if the first sub-control unit 400 receives a security command, it may not execute processing based on the command until communication is established between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to ignore security commands received several times after power-on, or to ignore security commands received until a certain waiting time has elapsed.

Also, information indicating the communication state between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350 may be included in the security command, and when the game control unit 302 receives a medal count control state command (communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the game control unit 302 is established), information indicating normal communication may be included in the security command and transmitted, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to execute various displays and presentation controls on the condition that this information is included. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being given information that differs from the actual state.

Here, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the operation from when the security command is transmitted until the next security command is transmitted. For example, if there is a change in information such as the number of medals played during a security command, and this information is not updated until the next security command is received, the latest information will not be reflected in various displays and performance controls.
In the game control unit 302, various processing commands are sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in association with control of the game (Figure 74), and by including the latest information in these various processing commands and using this information to perform various displays and presentation controls, it is possible to ensure that the latest information is reflected.

<others>
In the present embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a gaming medium is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
The present invention can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arrange ball game machines, jankyu game machines, smart ball game machines, etc. that use pachinko balls as a gaming medium.

In addition, the slot machine may be a slot machine that does not use medals and only exchanges electronic data, such as one that operates on a mobile terminal (smartphone, game console) or a PC using a program that simulates operation based on the above configuration, in which case the gaming medium includes electronic data corresponding to the medals, the insertion of the gaming medium includes inputting the electronic data from a specified external device (electronic storage device), and the payout of the gaming medium includes outputting the electronic data to the specified external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention, and such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Furthermore, the actions and effects described in the embodiment of the invention are merely a list of the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiment of the present invention.

<<Configuration of the invention and correspondence between embodiments>>
Hereinafter, the configurations of the invention described above will be described with reference to corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 84 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 112 );
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112 );
The gaming control means is a means for not transmitting the input operation information to the gaming value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means during the period from when the input operation information is transmitted to the gaming value number control means until the response information is received (for example, step S1112 in FIG. 84 waits until a response command is received, see the description of [Operation of the gaming control unit 302 due to an input operation (transmission of an input command, etc.)]).
The gaming machine described above is characterized by the above.
The input operation means includes a first input operation means (e.g., a 1 coin bet button 130) and a second input operation means (e.g., a MAX bet button 130) different from the first input operation means.
2)
The game control means includes:
transmits first input operation information (e.g., an input command for requesting input of one coin) to the game value number control means as the input operation information based on an operation performed on the first input operation means;
a means for transmitting second input operation information (e.g., an input command for requesting the number of input coins to be three) different from the first input operation information as the input operation information to the game value number control means based on an operation being performed on the second input operation means;
The game value number control means
Based on the reception of the first insertion operation information, a first game value update process (for example, subtraction of the number of game medals for one requested insertion medal) is performed as the game value update process;
a means for performing a second game value update process (e.g., subtracting the number of game medals from the number of medals required to be inserted, 3 medals) different from the first game value update process as the game value update process based on reception of the second input operation information;
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means may not subtract the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the reception of the input operation information (for example, when the current bet number is the maximum bet number or the number of game medals is 0).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 of FIG. 86 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Performance means (e.g., performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 4
20) is provided with a performance control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) for controlling the performance performed by the
The game control means includes:
Based on the reception of the response information during a predetermined period of time from the transmission of the input operation information, predetermined game information is output to the performance control means (for example, step S1114 in FIG. 84 ).
This is a means for outputting the predetermined game information to the performance control means even if the response information is not received during the predetermined period from the transmission of the input operation information (for example, in FIG. 84, if a response command is not received, the response command is determined to be abnormal and step S1114 is executed).
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (see the description of [Operation of the game control unit 302 by a throw-in operation (transmission of a throw-in command, etc.)]),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 84 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 112 );
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112 );
The gaming control means is a means for not transmitting the input operation information to the gaming value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means during the period from when the input operation information is transmitted to the gaming value number control means until the response information is received (for example, step S1112 in FIG. 84 waits until a response command is received, see the description of [Operation of the gaming control unit 302 due to an input operation (transmission of an input command, etc.)]).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 84 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 112 );
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112 );
The gaming control means is a means that, if an operation is performed on the input operation means between the time when the input operation information is transmitted to the gaming value number control means and the time when the response information is received, does not transmit the input operation information to the gaming value number control means based on the operation (for example, step S1112 in Figure 84 waits until a response command is received; see the description of [Operation of the gaming control unit 302 due to an input operation (transmitting an input command, etc.)]).

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 84 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 112 );
The game value control means is an external processing device for controlling the game value (e.g., a lending machine 700,
A transmission process to a host server (host server) and a game value update process for subtracting the game value number,
A means capable of executing counting processing (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ),
The game value number control means
transmitting a first response information (for example, other than a re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not being performed when the input operation information is received;
a means for transmitting second response information (e.g., a re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is being performed when the input operation information is received (see [Operation when an input command is received]);
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the game value number control means is a means having a transmission buffer for temporarily storing the game value number in order to transmit the game value number to the external processing device;
The game value number control means
The game value number to be transmitted to the external processing device in the counting process is stored in the transmission buffer, and the game value update process is performed (for example, step S351 in FIG. 101).
3, S3514),
a means for storing the number of game values in the transmission buffer in the counting process and transmitting the second response information to the game control means when the input operation information is received during the game value update process;
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for storing a part of the game value numbers stored in the game value number storage means in the transmission buffer in one of the counting processes, and for subtracting the part of the game value numbers from the game value numbers (for example, since the maximum number of counted medals in one count is 50 (step S4209 in FIG. 107), the part of the game value numbers may become a part of the game medal number).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In the gaming machine described above, the gaming value number control means is a means for transmitting the first response information to the gaming control means when the input operation information is received during the period from the end of one counting process to the start of the next counting process (for example, since the input prohibition flag is turned off, the response command is other than a re-request);
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means capable of retransmitting the input operation information transmitted immediately before to the game value number control means when the second response information is received (for example, a judgment of No in step S1310 of FIG. 86 ),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for not performing the retransmission after the number of retransmissions reaches the upper limit (for example, a judgment of No in step S1306 in FIG. 86) and invalidating the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, the response result is abnormal, so step S1113 in FIG. 84 is not executed),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means may not subtract the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the reception of the input operation information (for example, when the current bet number is the maximum bet number or the number of game medals is 0).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on receipt of the first response information (for example, step S1312 of FIG. 86 );
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 84 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 112 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game value number control means
transmitting a first response information (for example, other than a re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not being performed when the input operation information is received;
a means for transmitting second response information (e.g., a re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is being performed when the input operation information is received (see [Operation when an input command is received]);
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 84 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 112 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game value number control means
transmitting first response information (for example, other than a re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not being performed when the input operation information is received;
a means for transmitting second response information (e.g., a re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is being performed when the input operation information is received (see [Operation when a input command is received]);
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 84 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 112 );
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112 );
The game value number control means
When the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, the game value update process is executed to subtract the number of input requests from the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, and the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, the modified examples of FIGS. 122 to 124, and step S4604 of FIG. 124 is set to Yes).
The same value as the requested number of medals is subtracted from the number of medals played, and the subtracted amount is returned in the response command.
When the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means is maintained, and the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained may be transmitted to the game control means (for example, in the modified example of FIG. 122 to FIG. 124, the judgment of No in both steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 124, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command).
The game control means includes:
When the response information including the information indicating that the requested number of inputs has been subtracted is received, an input process is performed to input the gaming value of the requested number of inputs (for example, step S1123 of FIG. 122).
),
When the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is received, the input process is not performed (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 of FIG. 122, the input requested number is not input).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
As the insert operation means, a maximum number insert operation means (for example, a MAX BET button 132)
There are
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting maximum number insertion operation information (e.g., an insertion command with the maximum bet number as the required number) which is the insertion operation information to the game value number control means based on an operation to the maximum number insertion operation means;
The game value number control means is a means for deriving the maximum number of game values that can be used in one game as the number of game value requests based on the reception of the maximum number input operation information (see [Modification for Input Operation]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The input operation information may include predetermined information (for example, information indicating that the input number limit flag is on).
When the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means and the input operation information includes the predetermined information, the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means is maintained, and the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is transmitted to the game control means (for example, the modified examples of FIGS. 122 to 124, step S4604 of FIG. 124,
If the determination is No in both cases of S4621, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and the subtraction amount is returned as 0 (maintained) in the response command.
When the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means and the input operation information does not include the predetermined information, the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means is reset to 0.
and may transmit the response information including information indicating the number of the game values before becoming 0 to the game control means (for example,
22 to 124, No judgment in step S4604 of FIG. 124, Y in S4621
es, the number of game medals is subtracted (to 0), and the number of game medals before subtraction is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command),
The game control means includes:
When the response information including information indicating the number of play values before becoming 0 is received, the means performs an input process of inputting the number of play values (for example, step S1123 of FIG. 122 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The input operation means includes a minimum number input operation means (e.g., a 1 coin bet button 130),
the game control means is a means capable of transmitting the minimum number of insertion operation information (e.g., an insertion command with a required number of coins being 1) which is the insertion operation information to the game value number control means based on an operation being performed on the minimum number of insertion operation means;
the game value number control means is means for deriving a minimum number of game values that can be used in one game as the requested number of game values to be inserted based on reception of the minimum number insertion operation information;
The minimum number of input operation information does not include the predetermined information (for example, step S1122 of FIG. 122 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 of FIG. 86 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 84 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information and performing the game value update process based on the number of input requests (e.g., step S4607 in FIG. 112), and the game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (e.g., step S4608 in FIG. 112),
The game value number control means
When the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, the game value update process is executed to subtract the number of input requests from the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, and the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, the modified examples of FIGS. 122 to 124, and step S4604 of FIG. 124 is set to Yes).
The same value as the requested number of medals is subtracted from the number of medals played, and the subtracted amount is returned in the response command.
When the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means is maintained, and the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained may be transmitted to the game control means (for example, in the modified example of FIG. 122 to FIG. 124, the judgment of No in both steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 124, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command).
The game control means includes:
When the response information including the information indicating that the requested number of inputs has been subtracted is received, an input process is performed to input the gaming value of the requested number of inputs (for example, step S1123 of FIG. 122).
),
When the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is received, the input process is not performed (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 of FIG. 122, the input requested number is not input).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 84 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 112 );
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 112 );
The game value number control means
When the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, the game value update process is executed to subtract the number of input requests from the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, and the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, the modified examples of FIGS. 122 to 124, and step S4604 of FIG. 124 is set to Yes).
The same value as the requested number of medals is subtracted from the number of medals played, and the subtracted amount is returned in the response command.
When the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means is maintained, and the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained may be transmitted to the game control means (for example, in the modified example of FIG. 122 to FIG. 124, the judgment of No in both steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 124, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command).
The game control means includes:
When the response information including the information indicating that the requested number of inputs has been subtracted is received, an input process is performed to input the gaming value of the requested number of inputs (for example, step S1123 of FIG. 122).
),
When the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is received, the input process is not performed (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 of FIG. 122, the input requested number is not input).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement operation information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means (e.g., step S1204 and step S1205 of FIG. 85 ),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving a settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, step S4704 in FIG. 113 ),
The game value control means is an external processing device for controlling the game value (e.g., a lending machine 700,
A transmission process to a host server (host server) and a game value update process for subtracting the game value number,
A means capable of executing counting processing (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ),
The counting process is performed in accordance with a communication cycle between the game value control means and the external processing device (e.g.,
300 ms) may be executed.
The gaming value number control means is a means for, when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle from the next time onward after the first counting process is executed, if the settlement operation information is received during the execution of the first counting process, making the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information the target of the second counting process (
For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process becomes the target of the counting process from the next time onward.
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first counting process and the second counting process are executed consecutively in accordance with the communication cycle;
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means may, when receiving the settlement operation information during the execution of the first counting process, sum up the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information and the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, and subject the sum to the second counting process.
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means may not add the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the receipt of the settlement operation information (for example, when the current bet number is 0),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4705 in FIG. 113 );
The game control means is a means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 of FIG. 86 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement operation information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means (e.g., step S1204 and step S1205 of FIG. 85 ),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving a settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, step S4704 in FIG. 113 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The counting process may be performed in accordance with a communication cycle (e.g., 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game media management device.
The gaming value number control means is a means for, when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle from the next time onward after the first counting process is executed, if the settlement operation information is received during the execution of the first counting process, the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information may be subject to the second counting process (
For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process becomes the target of the counting process from the next time onward.
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement operation information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means (e.g., step S1204 and step S1205 of FIG. 85 ),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving a settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, step S4704 in FIG. 113 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The counting process is performed in accordance with a communication cycle between the game value control means and the external processing device (e.g.,
300 ms) may be executed.
The gaming value number control means is a means for, when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle from the next time onward after the first counting process is executed, if the settlement operation information is received during the execution of the first counting process, making the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information the target of the second counting process (
For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 99), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process becomes the target of the counting process from the next time onward.
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example,
Steps S1604 and S1605),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 116 and FIG. 117 ),
The game value control means is an external processing device for controlling the game value (e.g., a lending machine 700,
A transmission process to a host server (host server) and a game value update process for subtracting the game value number,
A means capable of executing counting processing (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ),
The counting process is performed in accordance with a communication cycle between the game value control means and the external processing device (e.g.,
300 ms) may be executed.
The gaming value number control means is a means for, when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next or subsequent communication cycle after the first counting process is executed, if the payout information is received during the execution of the first counting process, the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example,
The number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S33 in FIG. 99).
04), the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process will be the subject of the counting process from the next time onwards),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first counting process and the second counting process are executed consecutively in accordance with the communication cycle;
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means may, when receiving the payout information during the execution of the first counting process, sum up the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information and the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, and subject the sum to the second counting process.
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Performance means (e.g., performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 4
20) is provided with a performance control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) for controlling the performance performed by the
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4B05 in FIG. 117 );
The gaming control means outputs predetermined gaming information to the presentation control means based on the reception of the response information indicating that the gaming value update process based on the reception of the payout information has been normally completed (for example, step S1607 in FIG. 89 ),
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (see Operation of the game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of a payout command, etc.)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A gaming machine including a gaming value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process for updating the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means,
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example,
Steps S1604 and S1605),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 116 and FIG. 117 ),
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The counting process may be performed in accordance with a communication cycle (e.g., 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game media management device.
The gaming value number control means is a means for, when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next or subsequent communication cycle after the first counting process is executed, if the payout information is received during the execution of the first counting process, the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example,
The number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S33 in FIG. 99).
04), the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process will be the subject of the counting process from the next time onwards),
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example,
Steps S1604 and S1605),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 116 and FIG. 117 ),
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The counting process is performed in accordance with a communication cycle between the game value control means and the external processing device (e.g.,
300 ms) may be executed.
The gaming value number control means is a means for, when a first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed and a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next or subsequent communication cycle, if the payout information is received during the execution of the first counting process, the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example,
The number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S33 in FIG. 99).
04), the number of game medals added by a payout command during the counting process will be subject to the counting process from the next time onwards.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on receipt of loan information from an external processing device (e.g., the loan machine 700, a higher-level server) and performing the game value update process based on the number of loaned game values (e.g., step S4003 in FIG. 105).
, step S3714 of FIG. 103),
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed a first value (for example, a judgment of Yes in step S4107 of FIG. 106 ),
The game value number control means is a means for maintaining the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the first value (for example, the determination of No in step S4107 of FIG. 106,
See "Rental Notification (Periodic Transmission from the Rent-out Machine 700 to the Medal Count Control Unit 350)").
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control unit 302 controls the progress of the game.
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example,
Steps S1604 and S1605),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 116 and FIG. 117 ),
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the payout number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed a second value (for example, a judgment of Yes in step S4B03 of FIG. 117 ),
The game value number control means is a means for maintaining the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the second value (for example, a judgment of No in step S4B03 of FIG. 117),
The second value is a value greater than the first value (for example, step S in FIG. 117).
4B03, step S4107 in FIG. 106),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the game value update process based on the receipt of the rental information (for example, step S3713 of FIG. 102 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means having a transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device, and the game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process of storing the response information in the transmission buffer when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed the first value, and adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means after the transmission buffer is cleared in response to the transmission of the response information to the external processing device (for example, a Yes judgment in step S3712 of FIG. 103 ),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for updating a communication number with the external processing device (e.g., judging Yes in step S3703 of FIG. 103, step S3706) when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed the first value, and transmitting the response information including the first information (e.g., the rental serial number received this time) to the external processing device,
When the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the first value, the game value number control means does not update the communication number with the external processing device (for example, the determination of No in step S3703 of FIG. 103, step S3706 is not executed).
, a means for transmitting the response information including the second information (for example, the previously received lending serial number) to the external processing device (see [Lending Receipt Result Response (Periodic Transmission from the Medal Count Control Unit 350 to the Lending Machine 700)]),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device,
The second information is a communication number received from the external processing device immediately before the latest communication number.
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on receipt of loan information from the game media management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loaned game values (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105 and step S371 in FIG. 103).
4)
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed a first value (for example, a judgment of Yes in step S4107 of FIG. 106 ),
The game value number control means is a means for maintaining the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the first value (for example, the determination of No in step S4107 of FIG. 106,
See "Rental Notification (Periodic Transmission from the Rent-out Machine 700 to the Medal Count Control Unit 350)").
The present invention also describes a game media management device that includes:
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on receipt of loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loaned game values (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105 and step S3714 in FIG. 103).
,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed a first value (for example, a judgment of Yes in step S4107 of FIG. 106 ),
The game value number control means is a means for maintaining the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the first value (for example, when the determination of No in step S4107 of FIG. 106 is made,
See "Rental Notification (Periodic Transmission from the Rent-out Machine 700 to the Medal Count Control Unit 350)").
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on receipt of loan information from an external processing device (e.g., the loan machine 700, a higher-level server) and performing the game value update process based on the number of loaned game values (e.g., step S4003 in FIG. 105).
, step S3714 of FIG. 103),
The game value control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the game value update process based on the receipt of the rental information (for example, step S3713 of FIG. 102 );
the game value control means is a means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device;
The game value number control means is a means for storing the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared in response to the transmission of the response information to the external processing device, executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, a judgment of Yes in step S3712 of FIG. 103 );
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
the game value number control means is a means having a second transmission buffer for temporarily storing the game value number in order to transmit the game value number to the external processing device;
The game value number control means is a means for storing the game value number to be transmitted to the external processing device in the counting process in the second transmission buffer and performing the game value update process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 );
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process of updating a communication number with the external processing device (e.g., judging Yes in step S4107 of FIG. 106 ) when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed a predetermined value, and transmitting the response information including the first information (e.g., the currently received rental number) to the external processing device (e.g., judging Yes in step S3703 of FIG. 103 , step S3706) and adding the rental number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (e.g., step S3714 of FIG. 103 );
When the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the predetermined value (for example, No in step S4107 in FIG. 106), the game value number control means does not update the communication number with the external processing device (for example, No in step S37 in FIG. 103).
103 is judged as No, step S3706 is not executed), transmitting the response information including second information (e.g., the previously received rental serial number) to the external processing device, and maintaining the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means (e.g., determining No in step S3712 of FIG. 103, and not executing S3714),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device,
The second information is a communication number received from the external processing device immediately before the latest communication number.
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on receipt of loan information from the game media management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loaned game values (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105 and step S371 in FIG. 103).
4)
The game value control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game media management device when performing the game value update process based on the receipt of the rental information (for example,
Step S3713),
the game value number control means is a means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the game medium management device;
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared in response to the transmission of the response information to the game medium management device,
The game value update process is a process for adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, Yes in step S3712 of FIG. 103).
(Determination of)
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on receipt of loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loaned game values (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105 and step S3714 in FIG. 103).
,
The game value control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the game value update process based on the receipt of the rental information (for example, step S3713 of FIG. 102 );
the game value control means is a means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device;
The game value number control means is a means for storing the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared in response to the transmission of the response information to the external processing device, executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, a judgment of Yes in step S3712 of FIG. 103 );
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 );
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A presentation means (e.g., a presentation image display device 157, a speaker 272, a speaker 273, a speaker 274, a speaker 275, a speaker 276, a speaker 277, a speaker 278, a speaker 279, a speaker 271, a speaker 272, a speaker 273, a speaker 274, a speaker 275, a speaker 276, a speaker 277, a speaker
7, various lamps 420) (for example, FIG. 130),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is configured to detect a power outage that occurs when the counting promotion state is set,
When the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after the power is restored, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, FIG. 135(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for not transmitting the game value number to the external processing device when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is eliminated after the counting promotion state is set (for example, determining No in step S4211 of FIG. 107, clearing the number of coins to be counted),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S351 in FIG. 101).
4)
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107) can be transmitted to the game media management device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is released,
The present invention describes a gaming media management device, characterized in that in the counting promotion state, a second value greater than the first value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) is repeatedly transmitted to the gaming media management device at a predetermined period (e.g., 300 ms) as the gaming value number.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101).
,
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 );
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 125) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 125 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 10, step S4222 in FIG. 125) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms) as the gaming value number.
The second value may be increased according to the duration of the predetermined operation state (
FIG. 134)
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The second value may increase in accordance with the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 134).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is configured to detect a power outage that occurs when the counting promotion state is set,
When the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after the power is restored, the counting promotion state is set and the degree of increase is maximized (
FIG. 135(b)
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A presentation means (e.g., a presentation image display device 157, a speaker 272, a speaker 273, a speaker 274, a speaker 275, a speaker 276, a speaker 277, a speaker 278, a speaker 279, a speaker 271, a speaker 272, a speaker 273, a speaker 274, a speaker 275, a speaker 276, a speaker 277, a speaker
7, various lamps 420) (for example, FIG. 130),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for decreasing the degree of increase of the second value when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed a predetermined value, compared with a case where the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the predetermined value (FIG. 135(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S351 in FIG. 101).
4)
The game value number control means
a means capable of transmitting a first value (e.g., 1, step S4212 in FIG. 125) as the number of game values to the game media management device when the predetermined operation state is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was placed in the predetermined operation state, and capable of setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed with the operation means remaining in the predetermined operation state (e.g., step S4208 in FIG. 125);
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is released,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 10, step S4222 in FIG. 125) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the gaming media management device at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms) as the gaming value number.
The second value may be increased according to the duration of the predetermined operation state (
FIG. 134)
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101).
,
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 125) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 125 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is released,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 10, step S4222 in FIG. 125) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms) as the gaming value number.
The second value may be increased according to the duration of the predetermined operation state (
FIG. 134)
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 );
The game value number control means
If the predetermined operation state is cancelled before a first time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (e.g., 1
, step S4212 of FIG. 126) to the external processing device;
When the first time period has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 126) that is greater than the first value can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values;
a means for setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., 2 seconds) longer than the first time has elapsed while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state (e.g., step S4234 in FIG. 126 );
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value is repeatedly transmitted as the gaming value number to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms) (for example, if the determination of Yes is made in step S4235 of FIG. 126, step S4
209 is repeated, FIG. 136),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the automatic counting state is set, a notification means (e.g., a performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) is provided to give a predetermined notification (FIG. 138
, FIG. 139),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A presentation means (e.g., a presentation image display device 157, a speaker 272, a speaker 273, a speaker 274, a speaker 275, a speaker 276, a speaker 277, a speaker 278, a speaker 279, a speaker 271, a speaker 272, a speaker 273, a speaker 274, a speaker 275, a speaker 276, a speaker 277, a speaker
7, various lamps 420) (for example, FIG. 130),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is configured to detect when a power outage occurs while the automatic counting state is set,
When the power is subsequently restored and the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, the automatic counting state can be set (for example, FIG. 137(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for not setting the automatic counting state when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is smaller than a predetermined value (see FIG. 1).
37(a)),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used in a game, and a game value number control means (e.g., medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process that updates the game value number stored in the game value number storage means,
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S351 in FIG. 101).
4)
The game value number control means
If the predetermined operation state is cancelled before a first time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (e.g., 1
, step S4212 of FIG. 126) to the game media management device,
When the first time period has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 126) that is greater than the first value can be transmitted to the game media management device as the number of game values;
a means for setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., 2 seconds) longer than the first time has elapsed while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state (e.g., step S4234 in FIG. 126 );
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value is repeatedly transmitted as the game value number to the game media management device at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms) (e.g., Yes is determined in step S4235 of FIG. 126, and step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 136).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101).
,
The game value number control means
If the predetermined operation state is cancelled before a first time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (e.g., 1
, step S4212 of FIG. 126) to the external processing device;
When the first time period has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 126) that is greater than the first value can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values;
a means for setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., 2 seconds) longer than the first time has elapsed while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state (e.g., step S4234 in FIG. 126 );
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value is repeatedly transmitted as the gaming value number to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms) (for example, if the determination of Yes is made in step S4235 of FIG. 126, step S4
209 is repeated, FIG. 136),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process by treating the predetermined operation state as a valid operation state when the operation means is in a predetermined operation state when power is restored after a power outage occurs (for example, FIG. 140(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means entered the predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms),
The game value number control means is a means for determining the game value number to be transmitted to the external processing device based on the time during which the operation means has been in the predetermined operation state after power recovery, regardless of the time during which the operation means has been in the predetermined operation state before the power failure, when a power failure occurs and the operation means has been in the predetermined operation state since power recovery thereafter (FIG. 140(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means entered the predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device as the game value number at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms), and the game value number control means is a means capable of setting the counting promotion state when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after a power outage occurs and then is restored (FIG. 140(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A presentation means (e.g., a presentation image display device 157, a speaker 272, a speaker 273, a speaker 274, a speaker 275, a speaker 276, a speaker 277, a speaker 278, a speaker 279, a speaker 271, a speaker 272, a speaker 273, a speaker 274, a speaker 275, a speaker 276, a speaker 277, a speaker
7, various lamps 420) (for example, FIG. 130),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S351 in FIG. 101).
4)
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process by treating the predetermined operation state as a valid operation state when the operation means is in a predetermined operation state when power is restored after a power outage occurs (for example, FIG. 140(a)).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101).
,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process by treating the predetermined operation state as a valid operation state when the operation means is in a predetermined operation state when power is restored after a power outage occurs (for example, FIG. 140(a)).
The present invention relates to a gaming system that includes:
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A display means (e.g., a game medal number display device 170, a performance image display device 157) capable of displaying the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means is a means capable of performing a change display in which the display value is gradually changed from a value before the update to a value after the update when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated (for example, FIG. 143 to FIG. 147 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The counting process is executed at a predetermined cycle (e.g., every 300 ms),
The display means is a means for performing the change display in a time shorter than the predetermined period (FIG. 143, FIG. 144).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
An operation means (e.g., a counting button 171) is provided,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on an operation performed on the operation means,
The game value number control means
When the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 107) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 107 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 107) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at the predetermined period,
The game value number control means is a means for not transmitting the game value number to the external processing device when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is eliminated after the counting promotion state is set (for example, determining No in step S4211 of FIG. 107, clearing the number of coins to be counted),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A display means (e.g., a game medal number display device 170, a performance image display device 157) capable of displaying the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means is a means capable of performing a change display in which the display value is gradually changed from a value before the update to a value after the update when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated (for example, FIG. 143 to FIG. 147 ).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A display means (e.g., a game medal number display device 170, a performance image display device 157) capable of displaying the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means is a means capable of performing a change display in which the display value is gradually changed from a value before the update to a value after the update when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated (for example, FIG. 143 to FIG. 147 ).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) having a game information storage means (e.g., a RAM 308) for storing game information related to the state of the game and performing control related to the progress of the game;
a game value information control means (e.g., a medal count control unit 350) that has a game value information storage means (e.g., a RAM 358) that stores game value information related to game values used in a game, and updates the game value information stored in the game value information storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, step S101 of FIG. 82 );
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 95 ),
The gaming control means is a means for not clearing the gaming information storage means when the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (for example, the gaming control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even when it receives an error from the medal count control unit 350),
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when the gaming control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means (for example, when Yes is selected in step S3016 of FIG. 95).
Determination of s),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In the gaming machine described above, an abnormality in the gaming control means is reported in priority to an abnormality in the gaming value information control means ([Operation for Error (Gaming Control Unit 302)]
reference),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The gaming value information control means is configured to interrupt the game value information by a predetermined period (e.g., 8 interrupts (0.745 ms x 8
) one command transmission) to the game control means,
The game control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the game value information control means based on the transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, see FIG. 91, [Operation for Error (Game Control Unit 302)]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The abnormality of the game control means is reported in priority to the communication abnormality (see [Operation for Errors (Game Control Unit 302)]),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming value information control means may execute a process corresponding to the abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means (for example, step S300 in FIG. 95).
7. No determination in step S4407 of FIG. 109, initialization of chip information)
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) having a game information storage means (e.g., a RAM 308) for storing game information related to the state of the game and performing control related to the progress of the game;
a game value information control means (e.g., a medal count control unit 350) that has a game value information storage means (e.g., a RAM 358) that stores game value information related to game values used in a game, and updates the game value information stored in the game value information storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, step S101 of FIG. 82 );
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 95 ),
The gaming control means is a means for not clearing the gaming information storage means when the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (for example, the gaming control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even when it receives an error from the medal count control unit 350),
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when the gaming control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means (for example, when Yes is selected in step S3016 of FIG. 95).
Determination of s),
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) having a game information storage means (e.g., a RAM 308) for storing game information related to the state of the game and performing control related to the progress of the game;
a game value information control means (e.g., a medal count control unit 350) that has a game value information storage means (e.g., a RAM 358) that stores game value information related to game values used in a game, and updates the game value information stored in the game value information storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, step S101 of FIG. 82 );
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 95 ),
The gaming control means is a means for not clearing the gaming information storage means when the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (for example, the gaming control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even when it receives an error from the medal count control unit 350),
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when the gaming control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means (for example, when Yes is selected in step S3016 of FIG. 95).
Determination of s),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) having a game information storage means (e.g., a RAM 308) for storing game information related to the state of the game and performing control related to the progress of the game;
a game value information control means (e.g., a medal count control unit 350) that has a game value information storage means (e.g., a RAM 358) that stores game value information related to game values used in a game, and updates the game value information stored in the game value information storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming control means is a means for executing a process for an abnormality when the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (see [Operation for Errors (Gaming Control Unit 302)]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
An abnormality in the game control means is reported in priority to an abnormality in the game value information control means (see [Operation for Errors (Game Control Unit 302)]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for determining whether a communication abnormality with the game value information control means exists based on a transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, FIG. 91 );
The gaming machine is characterized in that an abnormality in the gaming control means is reported with priority over the communication abnormality (see [Operation for Errors (Gaming Control Unit 302)]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming value information control means may execute a process corresponding to the abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means (for example, step S300 in FIG. 95).
7. No determination in step S4407 of FIG. 109, initialization of chip information)
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) having a game information storage means (e.g., a RAM 308) for storing game information related to the state of the game and performing control related to the progress of the game;
a game value information control means (e.g., a medal count control unit 350) that has a game value information storage means (e.g., a RAM 358) that stores game value information related to game values used in a game, and updates the game value information stored in the game value information storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming control means is a means for executing a process for an abnormality when the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (see [Operation for Errors (Gaming Control Unit 302)]).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) having a game information storage means (e.g., a RAM 308) for storing game information related to the state of the game and performing control related to the progress of the game;
a game value information control means (e.g., a medal count control unit 350) that has a game value information storage means (e.g., a RAM 358) that stores game value information related to game values used in a game, and updates the game value information stored in the game value information storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming control means is a means for executing a process for an abnormality when the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (see [Operation for Errors (Gaming Control Unit 302)]).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process to update the game value number stored in the game value number storage means by communicating bidirectionally with the game control means;
The game control means and the presentation means (e.g., presentation image display device 157,
A performance control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performances performed by the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps 420;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example,
Steps S1604 and S1605),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 116 and FIG. 117 ),
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting predetermined information to the game control means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value upon receiving the payout information (for example, the determination in step S4B03 of FIG. 117 is No, and the response command is set to “abnormal”).
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 89 ),
The presentation control means is a means for causing the presentation means to perform a predetermined presentation based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, FIG. 148, [Operation of the game control unit 302 by payout (
(See Sending a Withdrawal Command, etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means capable of making the game unable to proceed when the predetermined information is received (for example, the determination in step S1606 of FIG. 89 is No and the process is repeated [operation of the game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of a payout command, etc.)]),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A counting operation means (e.g., a counting button 171) is provided,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the counting operation means (e.g., a process of updating the game value
Steps S3513 and S3514 of 1),
the presentation control means is means for causing the presentation means to perform background display,
The predetermined effect is an effect of flashing a display prompting the user to operate the counting operation means,
The display prompting the user to operate the counting operation means is displayed in front of the background display (
For example, FIG. 148(b)
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means by communicating bidirectionally with the game control means;
The game control means and the presentation means (e.g., presentation image display device 157,
A performance control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performances performed by the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps 420;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example,
Steps S1604 and S1605),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 116 and FIG. 117 ),
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting predetermined information to the game control means if the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value when the payout information is received (for example, the determination is No in step S4B03 of FIG. 117, and the response command is set to “abnormal”).
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 89 ),
The presentation control means is a means for causing the presentation means to perform a predetermined presentation based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, FIG. 148, [Operation of the game control unit 302 by payout (
(See Sending a Withdrawal Command, etc.)
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means by communicating bidirectionally with the game control means;
The game control means and the presentation means (e.g., presentation image display device 157,
A performance control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performances performed by the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps 420;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example,
Steps S1604 and S1605),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 116 and FIG. 117 ),
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting predetermined information to the game control means if the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value when the payout information is received (for example, the determination is No in step S4B03 of FIG. 117, and the response command is set to “abnormal”).
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 89 ),
The presentation control means is a means for causing the presentation means to perform a predetermined presentation based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, FIG. 148, [Operation of the game control unit 302 by payout (
The present invention describes a gaming system characterized by the above-mentioned (see (c) sending of a payout command, etc.).

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process to update the game value number stored in the game value number storage means by bidirectionally communicating with an external processing device (e.g., a rental machine 700, a higher-level server),
The game control means and the presentation means (e.g., presentation image display device 157,
A performance control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performances performed by the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps 420;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on receipt of loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loaned game values (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105 and step S3714 in FIG. 103).
,
the game value number control means is means for transmitting predetermined information to the game control means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value upon receiving the rental information;
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information,
The presentation control means is a means for causing the presentation means to perform a predetermined presentation based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. 148, when the “number of game medals” exceeds the lending threshold due to lending, an upper limit exceeding lending error occurs).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The presentation control means is a means for causing the presentation means to perform a demo presentation when a game is not being played,
The predetermined effect is an effect that is performed even when the demo effect is being performed (for example,
FIG. 151(a)
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A counting operation means (e.g., a counting button 171) is provided,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the counting operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S351 in FIG. 101).
4)
the presentation control means is means for causing the presentation means to perform background display,
The predetermined effect is an effect of flashing a display prompting the user to operate the counting operation means,
The display prompting the user to operate the counting operation means is displayed in front of the background display (
For example, FIG. 148(b)
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes a game control unit (e.g., a game control unit 3) that controls the progress of the game.
02) and
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process to update the game value number stored in the game value number storage means by performing two-way communication with the game media management device;
The game control means and the presentation means (e.g., presentation image display device 157,
A performance control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performances performed by the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps 420;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on receipt of loan information from the game media management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loaned game values (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105 and step S371 in FIG. 103).
4)
the game value number control means is means for transmitting predetermined information to the game control means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value upon receiving the rental information;
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information,
The presentation control means is a means for causing the presentation means to perform a predetermined presentation based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. 148, when the “number of game medals” exceeds the lending threshold due to lending, an upper limit exceeding lending error occurs).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means by performing two-way communication with the external processing device;
The game control means and the presentation means (e.g., presentation image display device 157,
A performance control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performances performed by the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps 420;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on receipt of loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loaned game values (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105 and step S3714 in FIG. 103).
,
the game value number control means is means for transmitting predetermined information to the game control means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value upon receiving the rental information;
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information,
The presentation control means is a means for causing the presentation means to perform a predetermined presentation based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. 148, when the “number of game medals” exceeds the lending threshold due to lending, an upper limit exceeding lending error occurs).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with an external processing device (e.g., a rental machine 700, a host server) and progresses a game,
The main control means is a means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to game values used in a game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loans of the gaming value based on receipt of loan information from the external processing device, and performing the gaming value update process based on the number of loans (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105 and step S3714 in FIG. 103).
,
The main control means is a predetermined signal (e.g., a VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device.
a means for determining whether or not there is a communication abnormality with the external processing device based on the above-mentioned condition,
The main control means is a means capable of making it impossible to proceed with the game when it is determined that the communication abnormality has occurred (for example, a judgment of No in step S1007 of FIG. 83 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A performance control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) is provided that is in one-way communication with the main control means and controls the performance performed by the performance means (e.g., the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
The performance control means is a means for not notifying the performance means of the communication abnormality when the communication abnormality is determined (for example, not executing an error notification for a VL signal abnormality),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A performance control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) is provided that is in one-way communication with the main control means and controls the performance performed by the performance means (e.g., the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
A counting operation means (e.g., a counting button 171) is provided,
The main control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value by subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the counting operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 );
the presentation control means is means for causing the presentation means to perform background display,
the performance control means is means for causing the performance means to perform a performance of flashing a display prompting an operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the user to operate the counting operation means is displayed in front of the background display (
For example, FIG. 148(b)
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with the gaming medium management device and progresses a game,
The main control means is a means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals), and the main control means is a means for deriving the number of loans of the game value based on receipt of loan information from the game media management device, and for performing the game value update process based on the number of loans (for example,
Step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S3714 in FIG. 103),
The main control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the game media management device based on a state of a predetermined signal (e.g., a VL signal) transmitted from the game media management device,
The main control means is a means capable of making it impossible to proceed with the game when it is determined that the communication abnormality has occurred (for example, a judgment of No in step S1007 of FIG. 83 ).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with the external processing device and progresses a game,
The main control means is a means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loans of the gaming value based on receipt of loan information from the external processing device, and performing the gaming value update process based on the number of loans (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 105 and step S3714 in FIG. 103).
,
The main control means is a predetermined signal (e.g., a VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device.
a means for determining whether or not there is a communication abnormality with the external processing device based on the above-mentioned condition,
The main control means is a means capable of making it impossible to proceed with the game when it is determined that the communication abnormality has occurred (for example, a judgment of No in step S1007 of FIG. 83 ).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A counting operation means (e.g., a counting button 171);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
Performance means (e.g., performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 4
A performance control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performance performed by the performance control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400)
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation of the counting operation means;
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state (e.g., an AT state) in which an auxiliary function advantageous to a player can be activated,
the game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on an operation of the counting operation means even in the first game state;
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a counting performance (e.g., FIG. 130) in association with the counting process,
The increase in the number of game values per unit game in the first game state when the game is played according to the activated auxiliary function is smaller than the decrease in the number of game values per unit game due to the counting process (see the description of the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting process).
(See the configuration in which the increase in the number of game medals per unit of play in an advantageous game state is smaller than the decrease in the number of game medals per unit of play due to the counting process.)
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The counting effect is an effect in which an end condition different from the end of the counting process is set ([
Regarding the difference between payout and counting process, see the configuration in which the counting performance may end even while the counting process is continuing.
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a specific performance,
The performance control means is a means for not executing the specific performance during execution of the counting performance.
The present invention describes a gaming machine that is characterized by the above (see the configuration that does not execute a presentation that requires some kind of operation in the description of [Configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The specific effect is an effect that requires a player's operation.
The present invention describes a gaming machine that is characterized by the above (see the configuration that does not execute a presentation that requires some kind of operation in the description of [Configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The counting effect is an effect whose content changes depending on the amount of subtraction of the game value number by the counting process.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of the configuration relating to the difference between payout and counting processing, in which the content of the counting presentation changes depending on the number of gaming medals counted).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The performance control means, after the counting performance is ended midway due to the end of the counting process,
When a new counting process is started within a predetermined time, the counting performance immediately before is resumed from the middle of the process.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of the configuration relating to the difference between payout and counting process, in which even after a counting performance ends midway, the previous counting performance (a counting performance that ended midway) is resumed from the midway).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The performance control means is a means for continuing the counting performance for a predetermined time after the counting process is completed, and for continuing to execute the counting performance when a new counting process is started while the counting performance is continuing.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description in [Regarding the configuration relating to the difference between payout and counting process], in which the counting performance continues even after the counting process is completed, and when a new counting process is started, the ongoing counting performance is maintained as is).

In addition, a gaming media management device (e.g.,
A rental machine 700) is described.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) used to set the bet amount;
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting first information regarding settlement (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation being performed on the settlement operation means;
the game value number control means is means for deriving a settlement number of the game value based on reception of the first information, performing the game value update process based on the settlement number, and then not transmitting response information to the first information to the game control means;
The game control means is a means capable of setting the bet amount to 0 based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see configuration that does not wait for a response command to a settlement command (no response command used)).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the game control means is a means for transmitting second information regarding insertion (e.g., an insertion command) to the game value number control means based on an operation being performed on the insertion operation means;
the game value number control means is means capable of deriving a requested number of game values based on reception of the second information, performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values, and then transmitting response information to the second information to the game control means;
The game control means is a means capable of setting the bet amount based on reception of response information to the second information.
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for the insertion command, see the configuration using the response command),
is stated.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting the game value number excluding the increased game value number to the external processing device when the game value number is increased while the counting process is continuing, and then transmitting the increased game value number to the external processing device (see the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals while the counting process is continuing in the description of [Configuration for payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 7) characterized in that it is connected to the gaming machine described above.
00) is described.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting the game value number excluding the increased game value number to the external processing device when the game value number is increased while the counting process is continuing, and then transmitting the increased game value number to the external processing device (see the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals while the counting process is continuing in the description of [Configuration for payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for reflecting the increase in the game value number while the counting process is continuing after the state in which the counting process is continuing ends before the game value number becomes 0 (see the operation when the count button 171 is released before the game medal number becomes 0 in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
Equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement operation information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means (e.g., step S1204 and step S1205 of FIG. 85 ),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving a settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, step S4704 in FIG. 113 ),
The increase is based on the settlement number (see the configuration for either the payout or the settlement operation as the increase in the number of game medals in the description of [Regarding the configuration for the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example,
Steps S1604 and S1605),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 116 and FIG. 117 ),
The increase is based on the number of payouts (see the configuration for either the payout or the settlement operation as the increase in the number of game medals in the description of [Regarding the configuration for the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 7) characterized in that it is connected to the gaming machine described above.
00) is described.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game value number control means is a means for, when there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process is continuing, transmitting the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device, and then transmitting the increased number of game values to the external processing device (see the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals while the counting process is continuing in the description of [Configuration for payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
The game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting the game value number at a fixed number to the external processing device at a periodically occurring transmission timing (for example, the transmission of the number of game medals by the counting process (counting notification) is every 300 ms, FIG. 72 ),
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting the increased game value number at the next transmission timing of the transmission timing when the transmission of the game value number excluding the increased game value number is completed at the current transmission timing of the transmission timing (in FIG. 158(c)(e), the increased amount is transmitted after the transmission of 120 game medals at the time of the counting process is completed first).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for reflecting the increase in the game value number while the counting process is continuing after the state in which the counting process is continuing ends before the game value number becomes 0 (see the operation when the count button 171 is released before the game medal number becomes 0 in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
Equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement operation information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means (e.g., step S1204 and step S1205 of FIG. 85 ),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving a settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, step S4704 in FIG. 113 ),
The increase is based on the settlement number (see the configuration for either the payout or the settlement operation as the increase in the number of game medals in the description of [Regarding the configuration for the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example,
Steps S1604 and S1605),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 116 and FIG. 117 ),
The increase is based on the number of payouts (see the configuration for either the payout or the settlement operation as the increase in the number of game medals in the description of [Regarding the configuration for the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 7) characterized in that it is connected to the gaming machine described above.
00) is described.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157, a game medal number display device 170) capable of displaying the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game value number control means is a means for, when there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process is continuing, transmitting the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device, and then transmitting the increased number of game values to the external processing device (see the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals while the counting process is continuing in the description of [Configuration for payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
the display means is a means capable of executing a subtraction display for subtracting the gaming value number in accordance with the gaming value number subtracted by the counting process,
The display means is a means capable of executing the subtraction display reflecting an increase in the number of game values when the number of game values increases while the counting process is continuing (FIG. 158(d)(f)).
),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for reflecting the increase in the game value number while the counting process is continuing after the state in which the counting process is continuing ends before the game value number becomes 0 (see the operation when the count button 171 is released before the game medal number becomes 0 in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
Equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement operation information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means (e.g., step S1204 and step S1205 of FIG. 85 ),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving a settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, step S4704 in FIG. 113 ),
The increase is based on the settlement number (see the configuration for either the payout or the settlement operation as the increase in the number of game medals in the description of [Regarding the configuration for the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example,
Steps S1604 and S1605),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 116 and FIG. 117 ),
The increase is based on the number of payouts (see the configuration for either the payout or the settlement operation as the increase in the number of game medals in the description of [Regarding the configuration for the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 7) characterized in that it is connected to the gaming machine described above.
00) is described.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) used to set the bet amount;
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The input operation means includes a predetermined input operation means (e.g.,
a bet button 130),
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means,
the game control means is a means capable of setting the minimum value to the bet amount based on an operation being performed on the predetermined input operation means in a state in which a value different from the minimum value is set to the bet amount, and capable of transmitting information on a difference between the different value and the minimum value to the game value number control means as the settlement information;
The game value control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process based on the receipt of the settlement information.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description under [Regarding setting of reduction in the number of bets by operating the bet button]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting the settlement information including a value obtained by subtracting the minimum value from the maximum value to the game value number control means, based on an operation being performed on the predetermined input operation means when the bet number is set to the maximum value.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description under [Regarding setting of reduction in the number of bets by operating the bet button]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Including audio output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277);
the sound output means is means for outputting a settlement sound based on an operation being performed on the settlement operation means,
the sound output means is means for outputting a insertion sound based on an operation being performed on the insertion operation means,
The sound output means is a means for outputting the insertion sound based on an operation to the predetermined insertion operation means in a state where the bet amount is set to a maximum value.
The present invention describes a gaming machine (see the description under [Regarding setting to reduce the number of bets by operating the bet button]) that is characterized by the above.

Also,
A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 7) characterized in that it is connected to the gaming machine described above.
00) is described.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) used to set the bet amount;
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
Audio output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The input operation means includes a predetermined input operation means (e.g.,
a bet button 130),
the game control means is a means for transmitting settlement information to the game value number control means based on an operation being performed on the settlement operation means;
the game control means is a means capable of setting the minimum value to the bet amount based on an operation being performed on the predetermined input operation means in a state in which a value different from the minimum value is set to the bet amount, and capable of transmitting information on a difference between the different value and the minimum value to the game value number control means as the settlement information;
The game value control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process based on the receipt of the settlement information,
the sound output means is means for outputting a settlement sound based on an operation being performed on the settlement operation means,
The sound output means is a means for not outputting the settlement sound when an operation is performed on the predetermined insert operation means in a state where a value different from the minimum value is set to the bet amount.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description under [Regarding setting of reduction in the number of bets by operating the bet button]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the sound output means is means for outputting a insertion sound based on an operation being performed on the insertion operation means,
The sound output means is a means for outputting the insertion sound based on an operation to the predetermined insertion operation means in a state where the bet amount is set to a maximum value.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description under [Regarding setting of reduction in the number of bets by operating the bet button]).

Also,
A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 7) characterized in that it is connected to the gaming machine described above.
00) is described.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
Performance means (e.g., performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 4
A performance control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performance performed by the performance control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400)
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process for updating the game value number based on the reception of information from an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, a higher-level server) (e.g., step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S371 in FIG. 103).
4)
the game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting external information on game values managed by the external processing device to the game control means when the external information is received,
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the performance control means,
the effect control means is means for executing an effect corresponding to a determination target in a certain game state advantageous to a player,
The determination target is the sum of the number included in the external information and the number of game values.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description in "Regarding the presentation according to the number of gaming medals", in which the total value of the number of gaming medals and the number of medals held is used as the subject of judgment).

Also,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
Performance means (e.g., performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 4
A performance control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performance performed by the performance control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400)
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process for updating the game value number based on the reception of information from an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, a higher-level server) (e.g., step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S371 in FIG. 103).
4)
the game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting external information on game values managed by the external processing device to the game control means when the game value number control means receives the external information;
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the performance control means,
the effect control means is means for executing an effect corresponding to a determination target in a certain game state advantageous to a player,
The determination target is a number included in the external information.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of "Performance according to the number of game medals" in which the number of medals held is the subject of judgment).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The number included in the external information is the number of accumulated game values acquired in the game (
For example, the number of medals held is the accumulated gaming value acquired during play.
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The performance control means may execute a first performance when the determination target has not reached a predetermined number, and execute a second performance when the determination target has reached the predetermined number (see the configuration for executing different performances depending on the number of game medals in the description of [Regarding performances according to the number of game medals]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The presentation control means is a means capable of executing display of information regarding the judgment target at least in the certain game state (see the configuration for displaying the value to be judged in the description of [Presentation according to the number of game medals]),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing, in the certain game state, an effect according to the number of game values acquired in the certain game state (see the configuration in the description of [Effects According to the Number of Game Medals] in which an effect using the number of held medals and an effect using the number of acquired medals are executed in parallel).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the certain game state, the number of game values acquired in the certain game state may exceed the number included in the external information (see "Presentation According to the Number of Game Medals" in
If the counting process is not performed when the player is in an advantageous position, the number of medals acquired may exceed the number of medals held by the player." (See the description below.)
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The presentation control means is a means capable of executing a setting suggestion presentation corresponding to the determination target ([
Regarding the presentation according to the number of game medals played], see the description that "When the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, a display suggesting the set value may be executed").
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 7) characterized in that it is connected to the gaming machine described above.
00) is described.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on an operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
Performance means (e.g., performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 4
A performance control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performance performed by the performance control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400)
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process for updating the game value number based on the reception of information from an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, a higher-level server) (e.g., step S4003 in FIG. 105, step S371 in FIG. 103).
4)
The presentation control means is a means capable of displaying the number of game values in a certain game state advantageous to the player (for example, the value of “possession” in FIG. 160 ),
The effect control means is a means capable of executing, in the certain game state, an effect according to the number of game values acquired in the certain game state.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (in the description of [Regarding the presentation according to the number of game medals], the number of medals won in the AT state is the subject of judgment, see Figure 160).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The presentation control means is a means capable of executing display of the number of game values acquired in the certain game state (for example, the value of "...GET" in FIG. 160),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The presentation control means is a means for updating and displaying both the display of the number of acquisitions and the display of the number of game values when game values are acquired in the certain game state (for example,
FIG. 160(d2)(d3)
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a performance according to the number of game values in the certain game state (see the configuration capable of executing performances in parallel in the description of [Performance according to the number of game medals]),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 7) characterized in that it is connected to the gaming machine described above.
00) is described.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A first operating means (e.g., a reset button R);
A second operating means (e.g., a counting button 171);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
the first operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a first error related to the game control means,
the second operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a second error relating to the game value number control means,
When the first error occurs while the second error is occurring, the first error becomes resolvable and the second error becomes unresolvable.
A gaming machine characterized by the above (see description of [Operation when an error occurs], FIG. 163),
is stated.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first operating means is a reset button (see FIG. 162 );
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The second error is an error that can be cleared by executing the counting process (see FIG. 161).
reference),
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 161 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means
If the first error has not occurred, the game value update process is executed based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 161 ).
a means for not executing the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means when the first error occurs (see FIG. 163);
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first operating means is the same operating means as the second operating means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of the operation when an error occurs twice, in which the error release operation means for releasing the game control error and the medal count control error is the same configuration),
is stated.

Also,
A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 7) characterized in that it is connected to the gaming machine described above.
00) is described.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A first operating means (e.g., a reset button R);
A second operating means (e.g., a counting button 171);
Notification means (e.g., a performance image display device 157);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
the first operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a first error related to the game control means,
the second operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a second error relating to the game value number control means,
When the first error occurs while the second error is occurring, the first error becomes resolvable and the second error becomes an unresolvable first state;
the notification means is means capable of executing a first error notification regarding the first error in the first state;
A gaming machine characterized by the above (see description of [Operation when an error occurs], FIG. 163),
is stated.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is means capable of executing a notification to prompt the user to release the first error based on the operation of the second operating means in the first state (see FIG. 163 (d4)),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means capable of executing a second error notification (see FIG. 163 (d2)) regarding the second error.
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When executing the first error notification in the first state, the notification means
This is a means for interrupting the second error notification that was being executed (FIG. 163 (d2) (d3)
reference),
The notification means is a means for starting notification of the second error when the first state ends by releasing the first error (see FIG. 163 (d4) to (d6)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When executing the first error notification in the first state, the notification means
The second error notification is continuously executed ([Operation when an error occurs multiple times]
(See the configuration that displays messages regarding both errors in the description.)
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
the second error is an error that can be cleared by executing the counting process,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the second operation means.
The document describes a gaming machine (see Figures 161 (b2) to (b4)).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first operating means is a reset button (see FIG. 162 );
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means
If the first error has not occurred, the game value update process is executed based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 161 ).
a means for not executing the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means when the first error occurs (see FIG. 163);
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 7) characterized in that it is connected to the gaming machine described above.
00) is described.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
Audio output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means, a game value number storage means (e.g., a RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to the game value used in the game,
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state (e.g., an AT state) that is advantageous to a player,
The sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first effect sound (for example, an effect sound in an AT state) in the first gaming state,
The sound output means may reduce the volume of the first sound effect when the counting process is being executed in the first gaming state.
The present invention describes a gaming machine (see [Regarding notification of counting process (1)]) that is characterized by the above.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 111) are provided with a plurality of different patterns and are driven to rotate.
2) and
A plurality of stop buttons (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
a stop control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button that has been operated to stop the reels based on a result of an internal lottery after the plurality of reels have been rotated;
Equipped with
the sound output means is a means for reducing the volume of the first sound effect when the counting process is being executed in a state in which all of the reels are stopped in the first gaming state;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the configuration in [Regarding the notification of counting process (1)] in which counting notification A is executed when all reels are stopped).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the sound output means is means for reducing the volume of the first sound effect when the counting process is being executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since all of the stop operations for the reels being rotated have been performed in the first gaming state;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of [Regarding the notification of counting process (1)], in which counting notification A is executed on the condition that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the last stopping operation on the reels and all of the reels have stopped spinning).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The sound output means, when the counting process is being executed, outputs a second sound effect (e.g.,
A means capable of outputting a counting sound,
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The device includes a predetermined operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132),
the sound output means is means for returning the volume of the first sound effect to a previous volume when the predetermined operation means is operated in a state in which the volume of the first sound effect is reduced;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized in that (see the description of [Regarding the notification of counting process (1)], the configuration in which the currently executing counting notification A is terminated when some operation is performed on an operating means).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 111) are provided with a plurality of different patterns and are driven to rotate.
2) and
A plurality of stop buttons (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
a stop control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button that has been operated to stop the reels based on a result of an internal lottery after the plurality of reels have been rotated;
A performance means including the audio output means (for example, a performance image display device 157, a speaker 272
, 277, various lamps 420)
Equipped with
the game control means is means for setting a second game state (e.g., a normal state) that is more disadvantageous to a player than the first game state;
The presentation means is a means capable of executing a demonstration presentation,
the effecting means is means for not executing a demo effect when all of the reels are stopped in the first gaming state,
The presentation means is a means capable of executing a demo presentation when all of the reels are stopped in the second gaming state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above (in the description of [Regarding the notification of the counting process (1)], a so-called demo performance is not executed when the player is in an advantageous state, and a demo performance is executed when the player is in an unfavorable state.
(see the description below).

Also,
A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 7) characterized in that it is connected to the gaming machine described above.
00) is described.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
Audio output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 101 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state (e.g., an AT state) advantageous to a player, and the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first effect sound (e.g., an AT state effect sound) in the first game state,
the sound output means is means for outputting a second sound effect (e.g., a counting sound) when the counting process is being executed,
The sound output means may maintain a state in which a first effect sound is output when the counting process is being executed in the first gaming state.
The present invention describes a gaming machine (see [Regarding notification of counting process (2)]) that is characterized by the above.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 111) are provided with a plurality of different patterns and are driven to rotate.
2) and
A plurality of stop buttons (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
a stop control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button that has been operated to stop the reels based on a result of an internal lottery after the plurality of reels have been rotated;
Equipped with
the sound output means is means for outputting the second sound effect when the counting process is being executed in a state in which all of the reels in the first gaming state are stopped;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the configuration in [Regarding the notification of counting process (2)] in which counting notification B is executed when all reels are stopped).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 111) are provided with a plurality of different patterns and are driven to rotate.
2) and
A plurality of stop buttons (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
a stop control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button that has been operated to stop the reels based on a result of an internal lottery after the plurality of reels have been rotated;
Equipped with
the sound output means is means for not outputting the second sound effect when any of the plurality of reels is spinning in the first gaming state;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of [Regarding the notification of counting process (2)], in which counting notification B is not executed while any of the reels are spinning).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A predetermined operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
Equipped with
the sound output means is means for not outputting the second sound effect during a period from when the predetermined operation means is operated in the first gaming state until when the plurality of reels start to rotate;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized in that (see the configuration in [Regarding the notification of counting process (2)], in which counting notification B is not executed after some operation means is performed).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 111) are provided with a plurality of different patterns and are driven to rotate.
2), and a plurality of stop buttons (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
a stop control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button that has been operated to stop the reels based on a result of an internal lottery after the plurality of reels have been rotated;
Equipped with
the sound output means is means for outputting the second sound effect in a first manner when the counting process is being executed in a state in which all of the reels in the first gaming state are stopped;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the configuration in which, in the description of [Regarding the notification of counting process (2)], the case where counting notification B is executed is read as the case where a counting sound of a first type is output, and the case where counting notification B is not executed is read as the case where a counting sound of a second type is output).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 111) are provided with a plurality of different patterns and are driven to rotate.
2) and
A plurality of stop buttons (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
a stop control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button that has been operated to stop the reels based on a result of an internal lottery after the plurality of reels have been rotated;
Equipped with
the sound output means is means for outputting the second sound effect in a second manner when the counting process is being executed in a state in which any one of the plurality of reels is spinning in the first gaming state;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the configuration in which, in the description of [Regarding the notification of counting process (2)], the case where counting notification B is executed is read as the case where a counting sound of a first type is output, and the case where counting notification B is not executed is read as the case where a counting sound of a second type is output).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A predetermined operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
Equipped with
When the counting process is being executed during a period from when the predetermined operation means is operated in the first gaming state until when the plurality of reels start to rotate, the sound output means
a means for outputting the second sound effect in a second manner;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the configuration in which, in the description of [Regarding the notification of counting process (2)], the case where counting notification B is executed is read as the case where a counting sound of a first type is output, and the case where counting notification B is not executed is read as the case where a counting sound of a second type is output).

Also,
A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 7) characterized in that it is connected to the gaming machine described above.
00) is described.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
Performance means (e.g., performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 4
A performance control means (e.g., the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performance performed by the performance control means (e.g., the first sub-control unit 400)
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting information on the game value number to the game control means,
the game control means is a means for transmitting a command (e.g., a security command) including information on the game value number received from the game value number control means to the performance control means;
The presentation control means is a means for executing a first control regarding the number of game values based on receiving the command.
The document describes a gaming machine that features the above-mentioned characteristics (see [Display and presentation based on information from the medal count control unit]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When power is turned on, communication between the game control means and the performance control means may be established before communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is established,
The performance control means is a means for not executing the first control even if the command is received until communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is established.
The document describes a gaming machine that features the above-mentioned characteristics (see [Display and presentation based on information from the medal count control unit]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When power is turned on, communication between the game control means and the performance control means may be established before communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is established,
The command includes information indicating whether or not communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal,
The performance control means is a means for not executing the first control even if the command is received until the performance control means receives information indicating that communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal.
The document describes a gaming machine that features the above-mentioned characteristics (see [Display and presentation based on information from the medal count control unit]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The presentation control means is a means for executing the first control based on the fact that communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal.
The document describes a gaming machine that features the above-mentioned characteristics (see [Display and presentation based on information from the medal count control unit]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means transmits the command at a predetermined interval (for example, when a security command is
A means for transmitting the information to the performance control means at a period of 100 ms or more,
The game control means is a means for transmitting various processing commands (for example, various processing commands of FIG. 72 ) including the information of the game value number received from the game value number control means to the presentation control means in accordance with the progress of the game,
The performance control means is a means for executing the first control based on receiving the various processing commands.
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 7) characterized in that it is connected to the gaming machine described above.
00) is described.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

<Difference number counter, virtual difference number counter>
Next, referring to Figs. 168 and 169, a game machine (pinball game machine (pachinko machine),
The following describes the difference number counter and virtual difference number counter provided in a reel game machine (slot machine), a sealed game machine, or a medal-less slot machine.

The difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means)
A counter capable of counting the winning difference obtained by subtracting the amount of game value used in a game from the amount of game value awarded as a result of the game, for example, a software counter provided in a RAM or the like,
It is composed of a hardware counter etc. provided in the control unit.

For example, if the gaming machine is a slot machine, the difference number counter (first counting means) can count the value (obtained difference) obtained by subtracting the value of the number of medals inserted (the amount of game value used in the game) from the value of the number of medals paid out (the amount of game value awarded as a result of the game) in the advantageous zone (second zone).

In addition, when the gaming machine is a pachinko machine, the difference number counter (first counting means) can count the value (obtained difference number) obtained by subtracting the out (number of fired gaming balls) value (amount of gaming value used in the game) from the safe (number of paid out gaming balls) value (amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game).

On the other hand, the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is the same as the difference number counter (first counting means) in that it is a counter that can count the difference obtained by subtracting the amount of game value used in the game from the amount of game value awarded as a result of the game, but the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) have different update conditions (conditions for performing counting).

<Difference number counter, virtual difference number counter / update conditions>
FIG. 168(a) is a diagram showing an example of update conditions for the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means).

In the slot machine 100 described using Figure 1 etc., when a first operation is performed in a certain game, both the value of the first counting means and the value of the second counting means are configured to be updated.

In the example shown in FIG. 168(a), (1) when the left stop button 137 corresponding to the left reel 110 is subjected to the first stop operation (first stop left operation) in a 3-coin bet game (3-BET game), or (3) when an operation other than the push order navigation is performed in a 3-coin bet game (3-BET game), both the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are updated in that game.

In addition, (3) when an operation different from the push order navigation is performed in a 3-coin bet game (3-BET game), the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated based on the actual difference number in the game (= actual number of payouts - actual number of bets), while the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated based on the virtual difference number in the game (= specified number of payouts for winning role - actual number of bets), assuming that a stop operation was performed in accordance with the operation navigation.

In addition, in the slot machine 100, in the advantageous zone (second zone),
The state may enter a T state (first state), and in a state before entering an AT state (first state), when the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated, the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) may also be updated, and in an AT state (first state), when the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated, the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) may also be updated, and in a state after the AT state (first state) has ended, when the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated, the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) may also be updated.

According to this example, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means before, during and after a state advantageous to the player (e.g., an AT state), thereby providing a fair gaming machine.

In addition, it is preferable that the update amount when the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated is the same as the update amount when the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated.

According to this embodiment, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 100, when a second operation is performed in a certain game, the value of the first counting means is updated, and the value of the second counting means is not updated. In the example shown in FIG. 168(a), when (2) the first stop operation (operation other than the first left stop operation) is performed on the center stop button 138 or the right stop button 139 other than the left stop button 137 corresponding to the left reel 110 in a 3-coin bet game (3-BET game), (4) when a 2-coin bet game (2-BET game) is performed, or (5) when a 3-coin bet game (3-BET game) is performed in an ED state, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated in that game, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not updated.

In this example, the notification means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, a lamp, or an LED) is used to notify game states such as 3-coin bet game (3BET game), 2-coin bet game (2BET game), and ED state. For example, when a liquid crystal display device is used as the notification means, text such as "3BET game", "2BET game", and "ED state" or a display suggesting "3BET game", "2BET game", and "ED state" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. When a speaker is used as the notification means, sounds such as "3BET game", "2BET game", and "ED state" or sounds suggesting "3BET game", "2BET game", and "ED state" are output from the speaker. When a lamp or an LED is used as the notification means, a lamp or an LED corresponding to a game state such as "3BET game", "2BET game", and "ED state" is turned on.

The update conditions of the first counting means and the second counting means are not limited to this example. For example, when a first operation (a recommended operation in the first game, for example, a first stop operation of the left stop button 137) is performed in a first game (for example, a three-coin bet game in a favorable zone or a non-navigation notification game), the value of the first counting means (for example, the difference number counter) is updated, the value of the second counting means (for example, the virtual difference number counter) is updated, and a second operation (
In the first game, when a non-recommended operation (for example, a first stop operation of the middle stop button 138 or the right stop button 139) is performed, the value of the first counting means may be updated, and the value of the second counting means may not be updated.

According to this example, when a first operation is performed in a first game, the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is updated, and when a second operation is performed in a first game, the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is not updated, so that the second counting means can hold a value that does not reflect that the second operation was performed in the first game, and the value of the first operation can be grasped by the second counting means, thereby providing a fair gaming machine.

In addition, when a recommended operation in the first game is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is updated, and when a non-recommended operation in the first game is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is not updated, so that the second counting means can hold a value that does not reflect that a non-recommended operation was performed in the first game, and the value when the recommended operation was performed can be grasped by the second counting means, thereby providing a fair gaming machine.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine having an A+AT function, the value of the second counting means (e.g., virtual difference number counter) may be configured not to be updated in a two-coin bet game during a bonus win or when the reel stops on the first number other than the left.

<Difference counter, virtual difference counter/advantageous zone>
Next, the relationship between the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) and the advantageous zone will be explained. Figure 168 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) and various processes that refer to these counting means.

As explained with reference to FIG. 7 and the like, in the slot machine 100, the game state is managed by dividing it into a non-advantageous zone (first zone) and an advantageous zone (second zone). In the advantageous zone, a notification of advantageous operation modes of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop operation means) (operation navigation,
However, in the non-advantageous section, this advantageous operation mode is not notified.

Then, when the transition condition is met in the non-favorable zone (first zone) (for example, when a transition lottery for a favorable zone is executed based on an internally won hand and the player wins this lottery), the player moves to the favorable zone (
The second section is then entered.

In addition, when an ending condition is met in the advantageous zone (second zone) (for example, when the advantageous zone (second zone) continues for a predetermined number of plays (for example, 1,500 games) or when the number of coins won in the advantageous zone (second zone) exceeds a predetermined net increase in coins (for example, 2,400 coins or 3,000 coins)), the advantageous zone (second zone) ends and a transition to the non-advantageous zone (first zone) occurs.

In the slot machine 100, as shown in FIG. 168(b), in the reset determination process (second process) of the advantageous period (second period), the difference number counter (first counting means) is referenced,
When the value of this difference number counter (first counting means) reaches a first value (e.g., 65,279), it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous zone (second zone) has been met, and the advantageous zone (second zone) is transitioned to a non-advantageous zone (first zone).

On the other hand, the update condition of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is different from the update condition of the difference number counter (first counting means) and is based on the second operation (for example, (2) shown in FIG. 168(a)).
When the operations (4) and (5) are performed, the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not updated in the reset determination process (second process) of the advantageous zone (second zone).
However, since it is updated when a first operation (for example, operations (1) or (3) shown in FIG. 168(a)) is performed, the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) may be updated when the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated.

According to this example, by storing the winning difference in the second section (e.g., the advantageous section) in the first counting means and the second counting means, the end condition of the second section can be grasped by the two counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, there is a case (first case) in which the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) reaches a first value (e.g., 65,279) before the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) reaches the first value, and in this first case, the advantageous period (second period) does not end.

According to this example, the second section can be ended when the value of the second counting means, which is not updated by the second operation, reaches the first value, thereby providing a fair gaming machine that takes the second operation into account.

In addition, there is a case (second case) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) reaches a first value (e.g., 65,279) and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) reaches the first value, and in this second case, the advantageous period (second period) ends.

According to this example, since both the first counting means and the second counting means reach the first value, it is possible to know that the second interval has ended without performing the second operation.

Furthermore, the first value (in this example, 65279 in decimal) is the initial value (in this example, 62879 in decimal) plus the first absolute value (in this example, 2400 in decimal), and the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value is greater than 0.

According to this example, even if the number of winning coins exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value due to the playing state of the player, there is still room for the player to make up for lost money.

<Difference Counter, Virtual Difference Counter/ED Status>
Next, the relationship between the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) and the ED state will be described.

As described with reference to FIG. 7 and the like, in the slot machine 100, the game state is managed by dividing it into a non-advantageous zone (first zone) and an advantageous zone (second zone). When the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone (second zone) becomes a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games) or less, the game transitions to an ED state. In this ED state, an ED (ending) that suggests the end of the advantageous zone (second zone) is displayed.
The performance is carried out.

In addition, the condition for transitioning to the ED state is not limited to the remaining number of games in the advantageous zone (second zone) being a predetermined number of games (e.g., 20 games) or less, but may be, for example, the predetermined number of games being 20 games or more or less, or the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) being a predetermined number (e.g.,
2000).

In the slot machine 100, as shown in FIG. 168(b), in the ED transition process (first process) of the advantageous zone (second zone), a difference number counter (first counting means) is referenced, and when the value of this difference number counter (first counting means) reaches a certain value (e.g., 2000), it is determined that the condition for transition to the ED state has been met, and the advantageous zone (second zone) is transitioned to the ED state.

On the other hand, the update condition of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is different from the update condition of the difference number counter (first counting means) and is based on the second operation (for example, (2) shown in FIG. 168(a)).
(4) and (5) are performed, the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not updated in the ED transition judgment process (first process) in the advantageous zone (second zone).
is not referenced.

In addition, a third counting means is provided which is a counting means different from the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) and is capable of counting the acquired difference number obtained by subtracting the amount of game value used in the game from the amount of game value awarded as a result of the game, and the advantageous zone (
The third counting means may be referred to in the ED transition process (first process) of the favorable zone (second zone) and in the reset judgment process (second process) of the favorable zone (second zone) to execute each judgment.

<Difference counter, virtual difference counter/freeze effect>
Next, the relationship between the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means), and the freeze effect will be described.

As described above, the slot machine 100 has a freeze effect that stops the game from progressing (
Freeze effect) can be executed, and AT lottery process (
In addition to the first lottery means, a freeze lottery process (second lottery means) is provided that can execute a freeze lottery (second lottery) for determining whether or not to execute a freeze effect. The freeze lottery (second lottery) is a lottery with a larger game value than the AT lottery (first lottery).

The AT lottery process (first lottery means) is a first operation (for example, (1
It is possible to execute an AT lottery (first lottery) in a first game (for example, a three-coin bet game in a favorable zone or a non-navigation notification game) in which the first operation (operations (1), (2), (3)) is performed, but the AT lottery (first lottery) is not executed in a first game in which the second operation (for example, operations (2), (4), or (5) shown in FIG. 168(a)) is performed.

According to this example, the second operation will not execute the first lottery, placing the player at a disadvantage, so the player can be urged to execute the first operation and play the game.

On the other hand, the freeze lottery process (second lottery means) is configured to execute a freeze lottery (second lottery) by referring to the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) without referring to the value of the difference number counter (first counting means), as shown in Figure 168 (b).

According to this example, even if the player intentionally performs the second operation, it is not reflected in the value of the second counting means and does not affect the second lottery (freeze lottery), so a fair gaming machine can be provided. Also, since the value of the first counting means reflecting the second operation intentionally performed by the player is not referenced by the second lottery means, it does not affect the second lottery, so a fair gaming machine can be provided.

Counting Example
Next, an example of counting by the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) will be described with reference to FIG.

169 is a diagram showing an example of counting by the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) in a time series. Prior to the explanation of the example of counting, the items shown in the top row of FIG. 169 will be explained.

"Section" is information for managing the state of the game, and in this example, there is a non-advantageous section (first section) and an advantageous section (second section). "Presentation state" is information for managing the presentation state, and in this example, the presentation state of the non-advantageous section (first section) is the normal state (normal state A), and the presentation state of the advantageous section (second section) is the normal state (normal state B), chance state, AT state, and ED state.

"Display means navigation" indicates the display mode of the operation navigation on the liquid crystal display device 157, "3-1-2" indicates that the operation navigation is displayed to encourage the user to perform a stop operation (first stop operation) in the order of the middle stop button 138 → the right stop button 139 → the left stop button 137, "3-2-1" indicates that the operation navigation is displayed to encourage the user to perform a stop operation (first stop right operation) in the order of the right stop button 139 → the middle stop button 138 → the left stop button 137, and "1-2-3" indicates that the operation navigation is displayed to encourage the user to perform a stop operation (first stop right operation) in the order of the left stop button 137 → the middle stop button 138.
8 → right stop button 139 (first stop left operation).

In the following, the first stop left operation may be referred to as the "L first stop," and stop operations other than the first stop left operation, i.e., the first stop operation and the first stop right operation, may be collectively referred to as "operations other than L first stop."

The "number of bets" indicates the number of medals bet in the game (the amount of game value used in the game), and "3" indicates that a three-coin bet game (3-bet game) was played, and "2" indicates that a two-coin bet game (2-bet game) was played.
BET games) are sometimes referred to as "bet numbers other than 3."

The winning roles indicate winning roles (including misses) and chance symbols won in the game, with a "common bell" indicating minor role 4 (common bell), a "push order bell" indicating minor role 5 (push order bell), a "replay" indicating a replay role, a "2BETBB" indicating a bonus in a two-coin bet game, and a "miss" indicating that no role was won.

"Stop order" indicates the actual order of the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139,
For example, "LCR" indicates that the stop operation (first left stop operation) was performed in the order of the left stop button 137 → the middle stop button 138 → the right stop button 139, "CRL" indicates that the stop operation (first stop operation) was performed in the order of the middle stop button 138 → the right stop button 139 → the left stop button 137, and "RCL" indicates that the stop operation (first stop operation) was performed in the order of the right stop button 1
This indicates that the stop operations (first stop right operation) were performed in the order of the stop button 139 → center stop button 138 → left stop button 137. "Number of medals won" indicates the number of medals won (paid out) in the game (the amount of game value awarded as a result of the game).

The "first counting means" and the "decimal notation" to the right are the difference number counters (first counting means).
The "difference from the initial value in decimal" is the initial value (in this example, 16) of the difference number counter (first counting means).
This is a numeric value in which the difference between the number of coins (f59f in base 10, 62879 in decimal) and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is expressed in decimal.

The "second counting means" and the "decimal notation" to the right of it are values (count values) of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) expressed in hexadecimal and decimal, respectively.
"Difference from initial value in hexadecimal notation" is a numerical value expressed in decimal that is the difference between the initial value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) (in this example, f59f in hexadecimal notation, 62879 in decimal notation) and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means).

"Player credit" is a numerical value indicating the number of medals (amount of game value) electronically stored in the slot machine 100, and in this example, 50 medals are credited at the start of play.

<Counting Example / (1) Power OFF → (2) Power ON>
The state of "(2) Power ON (setting change)" shown in FIG. 169(2) is the same as "
In the "power OFF" state, the power is turned on with a setting key provided inside the main body 101 in the "on" state, and settings are changed.

In this state, the section and performance state are set to the non-advantageous section (
The first section) is set to the normal state, and the values of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are set to their initial values (
In this example, it is set to f59f in hexadecimal, or 62879 in decimal.

According to this example, the initial value of the first counting means (in this example, the difference number counter) is a value greater than 0 (in this example, 62879 in decimal), so even if the value of the first counting means falls below the initial value due to the player's playing status, the value can be counted without taking into account the negative value, thereby reducing the control burden.

In this example, the initial values of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are set to the same value, but they may be different values.
In this case, the initial value of one counter may be greater than the initial value of the other counter,
On the other hand, it may be small. For example, the initial value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is 1.
It may be 32879 in decimal notation. The initial values of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) may be 0 or a value smaller than 0.

In addition, the trigger for setting (resetting) the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) to their initial values is not limited to when the power is turned on, but may be one, several, or all of the following: when the end condition of the advantageous period (second period) is met, when the slot machine is reset, when a setting change is made, when RAM is cleared (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) is performed, or when an error occurs. In addition, the trigger for setting one counter to its initial value and the trigger for setting the other counter to its initial value may be the same or different.

<Counting example / (2) Power ON → (3) Transition to favorable zone>
The state of “(3) Transition to favorable zone” shown in FIG. 169 (3) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the non-favorable zone (first zone), and a miss (amount of payout 0) is won in the stopping order LCR.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in that game is -3 (= 0-3), and the credits are subtracted from 50 to 47 (= 50-3). However, since the difference in the number of coins counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference in the number of coins counter (second counting means) do not count (update) in the non-advantageous zone (first zone), their respective values are maintained at their initial values (in this example, f59f in hexadecimal and 62879 in decimal).

Furthermore, in this game, since the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous zone (second zone) have been met (in this example, the transition lottery has been won), from the next game, the game will transition to the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone).

<Example of counting / (3) Shift to favorable zone → (4) First stop of L>
The state of “(4) L first stop” shown in Figure 169 (4) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone) after the transition, and a miss (amount of payout 0) is won in the stop order LCR.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are subtracted from 47 to 44 (=47-3). In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 168(a)(1), when the first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous zone (second zone), both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), so that each value is updated to the initial value (in this example, f59f in hexadecimal and 628 in decimal).
79) is updated to f59c in hexadecimal and 62876 (=62879-3) in decimal.

<Counting Example / (4) L First Stop → (5) L First Stop>
The state of “(5) L first stop” shown in Figure 169 (5) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and a replay (re-play role) is won in the stop order LCR.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, but a replay (replay role) is won and the difference in the number of coins in that game is 0 (= number of coins won 3 - number of coins bet 3), so the credits are maintained at 44 and the values of both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are maintained at f59c in hexadecimal and 62876 in decimal.

<Counting Example / (5) L First Stop → (6) L First Stop>
The state of “(6) L first stop” shown in Figure 169 (6) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and a common bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stop order LCR.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 44 to 56 (=44+12). In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 168(a)(1), when the first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous zone (second zone), both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), so that the respective values are increased from f59c in hexadecimal and 62876 in decimal to 1.
It is updated to f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 (= 62879 + 12) in decimal.

<Counting example / (6) L first stop → (7) Other than L first stop>
The state of “(7) First stop other than L” shown in FIG. 169 (7) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and a miss (amount of payout 0) is won in the stopping order CRL.

In the game in this state, since the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are subtracted from 56 to 53 (=56-3). In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 168(a)(2), in the first game (in this example, a 3-coin bet game in the advantageous zone (second zone) and a non-navigation notification game), when a second operation (in this example, a first stop operation other than L) is performed, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated), so the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated from f59c in hexadecimal and 62876 in decimal to f5a8 in hexadecimal and 62888 (=62891-3) in decimal, but
The value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5ab in hexadecimal and 628 in decimal.
It will be maintained at 91.

In the subsequent game periods of "(7) First stop other than L" to "(12) First stop other than L", if a second operation (in this example, a first stop operation other than L) is performed in a first game (in this example, a 3-coin bet game in the advantageous zone (second zone)/non-navigation notification game), the value of the first counting means (in this example, the difference number counter) is updated, but the value of the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) is not updated. Therefore, a value that does not reflect that the second operation was performed in the first game can be held in the second counting means, the value at which the first operation was performed can be grasped by the second counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

Furthermore, in the subsequent game periods of "(7) First stop other than L" to "(12) First stop other than L", if a non-recommended operation in a first game (in this example, a 3-coin bet game/non-navigation notification game in the advantageous zone (second zone)) (in this example, a first stop operation other than L) is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means (in this example, the difference number counter) is updated, and the value of the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) is not updated, so that the second counting means can hold a value that does not reflect that a non-recommended operation was performed in the first game, and the value of the recommended operation performed by the second counting means can be grasped, thereby providing a fair gaming machine.

In addition, in the slot machine 100, when the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed in the first game (in this example, the three-coin bet game/non-navigation notification game in the advantageous zone (second zone)), the AT lottery (first lottery) is not executed.
During the game period from "(12) First stop other than L" to "(13) First stop other than L", the AT lottery is not executed.

According to this example, the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) will not execute the first lottery, placing the player at a disadvantage, so the player can be prompted to execute the first operation (in this example, the first stop operation of L) and play the game by executing the first operation.

<Counting example / (7) First stop except L → (8) First stop except L>
The state of “(8) First stop other than L” shown in Figure 169 (8) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone) and a miss (amount of payout 0) is won in the stopping order RCL.

In the game in this state, since the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are subtracted from 53 to 50 (=53-3). In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 168(a)(2), in the first game (in this example, a 3-coin bet game in the advantageous zone (second zone) and a non-navigation notification game), when a second operation (in this example, a first stop operation other than L) is performed, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated), so the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated from f5a8 in hexadecimal and 62888 in decimal to f5a5 in hexadecimal and 62885 (=62888-3) in decimal, but
The value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is f5ab in hexadecimal and 628 in decimal.
It will be maintained at 91.

<Counting example / (8) First stop on L → (9), (10) First stop on anything other than L>
The states of "(9) L first stop" and "(10) L first stop" shown in Figure 169 (9) and (10) are states in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and a replay (re-play role) is won with the stop order CRL and the stop order RCL.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, but a replay (re-play role) is won and the difference in the number of coins in that game is 0 (= number of coins won 3 - number of coins bet 3), so the credits are maintained at 50, the value of the difference in the number of coins counter (first counting means) is maintained at f5a5 in hexadecimal and 62885 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference in the number of coins counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Counting Example / (10) First stop except L → (11) First stop except L>
In the "(11) First stop other than L" state shown in FIG. 169 (11), in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), a three-coin bet game is played, and the common bell (payout number 15) appears in the stop order CRL.
This is the state in which the winner has won.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 50 to 62 (=50+12). In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 168(a)(2), in the first game (in this example, the three-coin bet game in the advantageous zone (second zone) and the non-navigation notification game), when the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed, the difference in the number of coins counter (first counting means)
Since the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is f5a5 in hexadecimal and 628 in decimal.
The value is updated from 85 to f5b1 in hexadecimal and 62897 (=62885+12) in decimal, but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

Furthermore, when the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed, the first role (in this example, a common bell) which results in a payout amount greater than the amount bet has a lower probability of being won than a miss under normal circumstances. Therefore, even if the second operation is continued, the virtual difference in the number of coins becomes greater than the actual difference in the number of coins, and the player will not gain an advantage, so a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, the first role is not limited to the "Common Bell" which has a payout of 15 coins regardless of the stopping order.
For example, it may be a "biased bell" in which one coin is paid out at the first stop on the left and 15 coins are paid out at the first stop on any other side of the left.

<Counting Example / (11) First stop except L → (12) First stop except L>
In the "(12) First stop other than L" state shown in FIG. 169 (12), in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), a three-coin bet game is played, and the common bell (payout number 15) appears in the stop order RCL.
This is the state in which the winner has won.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are added from 62 to 74 (=62+12). In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 168(a)(2), in the first game (in this example, the three-coin bet game in the advantageous zone (second zone) and the non-navigation notification game), when the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L) is performed, the difference in the number of coins counter (first counting means)
Since the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is f5b1 in hexadecimal and 628 in decimal.
The virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated from 97 to f5bd in hexadecimal and 62909 (=62897+12) in decimal, but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

As an example of a first stop other than L, Figs. 169(7), (9), and (11) show an example of the stop order CRL (center right left), but the stop order CLR (center left and right) may also be used, and Figs. 169(8), (10), and (12) show an example of the stop order RCL (right center left), but the stop order RLC (right left center) may also be used. Also, in the explanation using Figs. 168 and 169, an example of a left first stop operation was shown as the first operation, and a center first stop operation and a right first stop operation were shown as the second operation, but the present invention is not limited to this example, and the first operation may be a left first stop operation and a center first stop operation, and the second operation may be a right first stop operation.

<Example of counting / (12) First stop other than L → (13) Betting number other than 3>
The state of "(13) bet number other than 3" shown in FIG. 169 (13) is the advantageous zone (second zone).
In the normal state, a two-coin bet game is played, and the winning result (amount of payout: 0) is obtained in the stopping order LCR.

In the game in this state, since the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, the difference in the number of coins in the game is -2 (=0-2), and the credits are subtracted from 74 to 72 (=74-2). As described with reference to FIG. 168(a)(4), when a two-coin bet game is played in the advantageous zone (second zone), regardless of the stopping order, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated). Therefore, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated from f5bd in hexadecimal and 62909 in decimal to f5bb in hexadecimal and 62907 (=62909-2), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated from f5ab in hexadecimal and 10
It is maintained at 62891 in base.

In the subsequent game period of "(13) Bet number other than 3" to (23) 2 BETBB consumption", when a first bet number game (in this example, a 2-coin bet game) is played, the first counting means (in this example,
Since the value of the first counting means (the virtual difference number counter) is updated and the value of the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) is not updated, the second counting means can hold a value that does not reflect that the second operation has been performed in the first game, and the second counting means can grasp the value of the first operation,
To provide a fair gaming table.

In addition, in the slot machine 100, when a two-coin bet game is played in the advantageous zone (second zone), the AT lottery (first lottery) is not executed, and therefore the AT lottery is not executed in the subsequent game period from "(13) Number of bets other than 3" to "(23) Consumption of 2 BETBB".

According to this example, the first lottery is not executed in the first bet number game (in this example, a two-coin bet game), which puts the player at a disadvantage, so the player can be encouraged to play the second bet number game (in this example, a three-coin bet game) and play the first game.

<Counting Example / (13) Betting Number Other Than 3 → (14) Betting Number Other Than 3>
The state of "(14) bet number other than 3" shown in FIG. 169 (14) is the advantageous zone (second zone).
In the normal state, a two-coin bet game is played, and a loss (amount of payout: 0) occurs in the stopping order CRL.

In the game in this state, since the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, the difference in the number of coins in the game is -2 (=0-2), and the credits are subtracted from 72 to 70 (=72-2). As described with reference to FIG. 168(a)(4), when a two-coin bet game is played in the advantageous zone (second zone), regardless of the stopping order, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated). Therefore, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated from f5bb in hexadecimal and 62907 in decimal to f5b9 in hexadecimal and 62905 (=62907-2), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated from f5ab in hexadecimal and 10 in decimal.
It is maintained at 62891 in base.

<Counting Example / (14) Betting Number Other Than 3 → (15) Betting Number Other Than 3>
The state of "(15) bet number other than 3" shown in FIG. 169 (15) is the advantageous zone (second zone).
In the normal state, a two-coin bet game is played, and a loss (amount of payout 0) occurs in the stopping order RCL.

In the game in this state, since the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, the difference in the number of coins in the game is -2 (=0-2), and the credits are subtracted from 70 to 68 (=70-2). As described with reference to FIG. 168(a)(4), when a two-coin bet game is played in the advantageous zone (second zone), regardless of the stopping order, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated). Therefore, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated from f5b9 in hexadecimal and 62905 in decimal to f5b7 in hexadecimal and 62903 (=62905-2), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated from f5ab in hexadecimal and 10
It is maintained at 62891 in base.

<Counting Example / (15) Betting Number Other Than 3 → (16) Betting Number Other Than 3>
The “(16) bet number other than 3” shown in FIG. 169 (16) is a state in which a two-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and a replay (replay role) is won in the stopping order LCR.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, but a replay (re-play role) is won and the difference in the number of coins in that game is 0 (= number of coins won 2 - number of coins bet 2), so the credits are maintained at 68, the value of the difference in the number of coins counter (first counting means) is maintained at f5b7 in hexadecimal and 62903 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference in the number of coins counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Counting Example / (16) Betting Number Other Than 3 → (17) Betting Number Other Than 3>
The "(17) bet number other than 3" shown in Figure 169 (17) is a state in which a two-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone) and a replay (re-play role) is won in the stopping order CRL.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, but a replay (re-play role) is won and the difference in the number of coins in that game is 0 (= number of coins won 2 - number of coins bet 2), so the credits are maintained at 68, the value of the difference in the number of coins counter (first counting means) is maintained at f5b7 in hexadecimal and 62903 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference in the number of coins counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Counting Example / (17) Betting Number Other Than 3 → (18) Betting Number Other Than 3>
The "(18) bet number other than 3" shown in Figure 169 (18) is a state in which a two-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone) and a replay (replay role) is won in the stopping order RCL.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, but a replay (re-play role) is won and the difference in the number of coins in that game is 0 (= number of coins won 2 - number of coins bet 2), so the credits are maintained at 68, the value of the difference in the number of coins counter (first counting means) is maintained at f5b7 in hexadecimal and 62903 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference in the number of coins counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal and 62891 in decimal.

<Counting Example / (18) Betting Number Other Than 3 → (19) Betting Number Other Than 3>
The state of "(19) bet number other than 3" shown in FIG. 169 (19) is the advantageous zone (second zone).
In the normal state, a two-coin bet game is played, and the common bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stopping order LCR.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 13 (=15-2), and the credits are added from 68 to 81 (=68+13). As explained with reference to FIG. 168(a)(4), when a two-coin bet game is played in the advantageous zone (second zone), the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated) regardless of the stopping order, and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is counted (updated).
Therefore, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is f5b7, 10 in hexadecimal.
62903 in base 16, f5c4 in hexadecimal, 62916 in decimal (=62903+1
3), but the value of the virtual difference counter (second counting means) is f5a in hexadecimal.
b, maintained at 62891 in decimal.

<Counting Example / (19) Betting Number Other Than 3 → (20) Betting Number Other Than 3>
The state of "(20) bet number other than 3" shown in Figure 169 (20) is the advantageous zone (second zone).
In the normal state, a two-coin bet game is played, and the common bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stopping order CRL.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 13 (=15-2), and the credits are added from 81 to 94 (=81+13). As explained with reference to FIG. 168(a)(4), when a two-coin bet game is played in the advantageous zone (second zone), the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated) regardless of the stopping order, and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is counted (updated).
Therefore, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is f5c4, 10 in hexadecimal.
62916 in base 16, f5d1 in hexadecimal, 62929 in decimal (=62916+1
3), but the value of the virtual difference counter (second counting means) is f5a in hexadecimal.
b, maintained at 62891 in decimal.

<Counting Example / (20) Betting Number Other Than 3 → (21) Betting Number Other Than 3>
The state of "(21) bet number other than 3" shown in FIG. 169 (21) is the advantageous zone (second zone).
In the normal state, a two-coin bet game is played, and the common bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stopping order RCL.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 13 (=15-2), and the credits are added from 94 to 107 (=94+13). As explained with reference to FIG. 168(a)(4), when a game in which two coins are bet is played in the advantageous zone (second zone), the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated) regardless of the stopping order, and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated), so the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is f5d1, 1 in hexadecimal.
62929 in decimal, f5de in hexadecimal, 62942 in decimal (=62929+
13), but the value of the virtual difference counter (second counting means) is f5 in hexadecimal.
ab, is maintained at 62891 decimal.

<Counting Example / (21) Bet Number Other Than 3 → (22) 2BETBB Winning>
The state of "(22) 2 BETBB winning" shown in Figure 169 (22) is a state in which a two-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and 2 BETBB (payout amount 0) is won in the stopping order LCR.

In the game in this state, since the number of bets is 2 and the number of payouts is 0, the difference in the number of coins in the game is -2 (=0-2), and the credit is subtracted from 107 to 105 (=107-2). As described with reference to FIG. 168(a)(4), when a game in which two coins are bet is played in the advantageous zone (second zone), the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated) regardless of the stopping order, and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is counted (updated).
Therefore, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is f5de, 10 in hexadecimal.
62942 in base 16, f5dc in hexadecimal, 62940 in decimal (=62942-2
), but the value of the virtual difference counter (second counting means) is updated to f5ab in hexadecimal.
, is maintained at 62891 in decimal.

<Example of Counting / (22) 2BETBB Winning → (23) 2BETBB Consumption>
The state of “(23) 2 BET BB consumed” shown in FIG. 169 (23) is a state in which a BB game is won in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), a 2-coin bet game is played in the BB game, and a common bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stopping order LCR.

In the same game, the bet is 2 and the payout is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 13 (=15-2), and the credit is 105 to 118 (=105+13).
168(a)(4), when a two-coin bet game is played in the advantageous zone (second zone), the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated) regardless of the stopping order, and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is counted (updated).
Since the difference counter (first counting means) is not updated, the value of the difference counter (first counting means) is f5dc in hexadecimal.
, 62940 in decimal, f5e9 in hexadecimal, 62953 in decimal (=6294
0+13), but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at f5ab in hexadecimal, or 62891 in decimal.

<Example of counting / (23) 2 BETBB consumption → (24) Chance eye (AT win)>
The state of "(24) Chance Eye (AT Winning)" shown in Figure 169 (24) is a state in which, in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), a three-coin bet game is played, a chance eye (payout number 15) is won in the stopping order LCR, and the AT lottery is won.

In the game under the same condition, the bet amount is 3 and the payout amount is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are 118 to 130 (=118+12).
168(a)(1), when the first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous period (second period), both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated). Therefore, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is f5e9 in hexadecimal.
, 62953 in decimal, f5f5 in hexadecimal, 62965 in decimal (=6295
3+12), and the value of the virtual difference counter (second counting means) is updated to f5 in hexadecimal.
ab, 62891 in decimal, f5b7 in hex, 62903 in decimal (=62
It will be updated to (891+12).

<Counting Example / (24) Chance Eye (AT Winning) → (25) AT>
The state of “(25) AT” shown in FIG. 169 (25) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the AT state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and the push order bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stopping order CRL according to the operation navigation “center (1) → right (2) → left (3)”.

In the same game, the bet is 3 and the payout is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credit is 130 to 142 (=130+12).
At the same time, since the game is a three-coin bet game/navigation notification game in the advantageous zone (second zone) and not the first game (a three-coin bet game/non-navigation notification game in the advantageous zone (second zone), both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) changes from f5f5 in hexadecimal and 62965 in decimal to f601 in hexadecimal and 62977 in decimal.
(=62965+12), and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to 1.
From f5b7 in hexadecimal and 62903 in decimal, to f5c3 in hexadecimal and 629 in decimal
It will be updated to 15 (=62903+12).

<Counting Example/(26) AT>
The state of “(26) AT” shown in FIG. 169 (26) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the final game of the AT state in the advantageous zone (second zone), and the push order bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stopping order CRL following “center (1) → right (2) → left (3).”

In the game in the same state, the bet amount is 3 and the payout amount is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credit is 442 (=the previous credit 430 +
12), and since the game is a three-coin bet game/navigation notification game in the advantageous zone (second zone) and not the first game (a three-coin bet game/non-navigation notification game in the advantageous zone (second zone), the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (
The difference counter (first counting means) counts (updates) both the number of coins that have been won (the first coin counting means) and the value of the difference counter (second counting means) is
The value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to f6d7 in hexadecimal and 63191 in decimal.

<Counting Example / (26) AT → (27) Normal State>
The "(27) normal state" shown in FIG. 169 (27) is the A of the favorable zone (second zone).
In the normal state transitioned from the T state, a three-coin bet game is played, and the common bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stopping order LCR.

In the game under the same condition, the bet amount is 3 and the payout amount is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are 312 to 324 (=312+12).
, and as explained using Figure 168 (a) (1), when a first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous zone (second zone), both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated to f739 in hexadecimal and 63289 (= 63277 + 12) in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to f6e3 in hexadecimal and 63203 (= 63191 + 12) in decimal.

<Counting Example / (28) First Stop Other Than L>
The state of “(28) First stop other than L” shown in FIG. 169 (28) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and a miss (amount of payout 0) is won in the stopping order RCL.

In the game in this state, the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are subtracted to 68 (=previous credits of 71-3). In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 168(a)(2), in the first game (in this example, the three-coin bet game in the advantageous zone (second zone) and the non-navigation notification game), the second operation (
In this example, when the first stop operation other than L is performed, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated), so the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is edcf in hexadecimal and 60 in decimal.
The difference between the initial value and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to 879 in hexadecimal notation and 62 in decimal notation.
It will be maintained at 891.

In this state, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) (in this example, 6 in decimal)
The value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) (in this example, 62891 in decimal) is smaller than the initial value (in this example, 62879 in decimal) (the difference from the initial value is negative), and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) (in this example, 62891 in decimal) is larger than the initial value (in this example, 62879 in decimal) (the difference from the initial value is positive).

According to this example, the value of the first counting means (in this example, the difference number counter) and the value of the second counting means (
In this example, one of the virtual difference counters may be greater than the initial value and the other may be less than the initial value, so it may be referred to (or not referred to) in the performance, lottery, etc.
The value of the first counting means and the value of the second counting means may sometimes be inconsistent, thereby making the game more entertaining.

<Counting Example / (28) Stop other than L → (29) First stop of L>
In the state of "(29) L first stop" shown in FIG. 169 (29), in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone) after the transition, a three-coin bet game is played, and the stop order LCR is a miss (number of payouts is 0).
This is the state in which the winner has won.

In the game in this state, since the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are subtracted from 47 to 44 (=47-3). In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 168(a)(1), when a first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous zone (second zone), both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated),
The value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is edcc in hexadecimal and 60876 in decimal.
(=60879-3), and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) becomes 16.
It is updated to f5a8 in base 10 and 62888 (=62891-2) in decimal.

As described with reference to FIG. 168(b), in the slot machine 100, the freeze lottery process (second lottery means) is configured to execute the freeze lottery (second lottery) by referring to the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) without referring to the value of the difference number counter (first counting means). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to intentionally perform the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L).
Even if the player performs the second operation, it is not reflected in the value of the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) and does not affect the second lottery (in this example, the freeze lottery), so a fair gaming machine can be provided. Also, since the second lottery means does not refer to the value of the first counting means (in this example, the difference number counter) reflecting the second operation performed intentionally by the player, it does not affect the second lottery (freeze lottery), so a fair gaming machine can be provided.

<Counting Example / (30) Betting Numbers Other Than 3>
The state of "(30) bet number other than 3" shown in FIG. 169 (30) is the advantageous zone (second zone).
In the normal state, a two-coin bet game is played, and the common bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stopping order LCR.

In the game in the same state, the bet amount is 2 and the payout amount is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 13 (=15-2), and the credit is 118 (=the previous credit of 105 +
13), and as explained with reference to FIG. 168(a)(4), when a two-coin bet game is played in the advantageous zone (second zone), the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated) regardless of the stopping order, and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated). Therefore, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is f in hexadecimal.
The value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to 5e9 in hexadecimal notation and 62953 in decimal notation, and the difference from the initial value has turned positive. However, the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to 5e9 in hexadecimal notation and 62891 in decimal notation.
is maintained.

In addition, in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), a two-coin bet game is played, and the stop order L
When the common bell (payout amount 15) continues to be won in CR, the difference with the initial value of the difference number counter (first counting means) may turn positive, as in this example.

<Counting example / (30) Betting number other than 3 → (31) Chance (AT win)>
The state of "(31) Chance Eye (AT Winning)" shown in Figure 169 (31) is a state in which, in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), a three-coin bet game is played, a chance eye (payout number 15) is won in the stopping order LCR, and the AT lottery is won.

In the game under the same condition, the bet amount is 3 and the payout amount is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are 118 to 130 (=118+12).
168(a)(1), when the first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous period (second period), both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated). Therefore, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is f5e9 in hexadecimal.
, 62953 in decimal, f5f5 in hexadecimal, 62965 in decimal (=6295
3+12), and the value of the virtual difference counter (second counting means) is updated to f5 in hexadecimal.
ab, 62891 in decimal, f5b7 in hex, 62903 in decimal (=62
It will be updated to (891+12).

<Counting Example / (31) Chance Eye (AT Winning) → (32) AT>
The state of “(32) AT” shown in FIG. 169 (32) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the AT state in the advantageous zone (second zone), and the push order bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stopping order CRL according to the operation navigation “center (1) → right (2) → left (3)”.

In the same game, the bet is 3 and the payout is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credit is 130 to 142 (=130+12).
At the same time, since the game is a three-coin bet game/navigation notification game in the advantageous zone (second zone) and not the first game (a three-coin bet game/non-navigation notification game in the advantageous zone (second zone), both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) changes from f5f5 in hexadecimal and 62965 in decimal to f601 in hexadecimal and 62977 in decimal.
(=62965+12), and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to 1.
From f5b7 in hexadecimal and 62903 in decimal, to f5c3 in hexadecimal and 629 in decimal
It will be updated to 15 (=62903+12).

<Counting Example/(32)AT)→(33)AT>
The state of “(33) AT” shown in FIG. 169 (33) is a state in which, in the AT state in the advantageous zone (second zone), a three-coin bet game is played, and the push order bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stop order LCR without following the operation navigation “center (1) → right (2) → left (3)”.

In the game in this state, since the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 0, the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (= 0 - 3), and the credits are subtracted from 142 to 139 (= 142 - 3). Also, since the game is a 3-coin bet game/navigation notification game in the advantageous zone (second zone) and is not the first game (a 3-coin bet game/non-navigation notification game in the advantageous zone (second zone), as described using FIG. 168 (a) (3), even if a stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation, the difference in number counter (first counting means) is updated based on the actual difference in number of coins in the game (in this example, -3 (= actual payout number 0 - actual bet number 3)), while the virtual difference in number counter (second counting means) is counted based on the virtual difference in number of coins in the game (in this example, 12 (= the prescribed payout number for winning role 1)) as if the stop operation was performed in accordance with the operation navigation.
5- Update based on actual bets 3)).

As a specific example, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is f601 in hexadecimal, which is 62977 in decimal, to f5fe in hexadecimal, which is 62974 in decimal (=62977-3).
The value of the virtual difference counter (second counting means) is updated to f5c3, 10 in hexadecimal.
62915 in base 16, f5cf in hexadecimal, 62927 in decimal (=62915+1
2) will be updated.

<Counting Example/(34) AT>
The state of “(34) AT” shown in FIG. 169 (34) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the AT state in the advantageous zone (second zone), and the push order bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stopping order CRL according to the operation navigation “center (1) → right (2) → left (3)”.

In the game in the same state, the bet amount is 3 and the payout amount is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credit is 4043 (=the previous credit of 403
1+12), and since the game in question is a three-coin bet game/navigation notification game in the advantageous zone (second zone) and not the first game (a three-coin bet game/non-navigation notification game in the advantageous zone (second zone), both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated to fd6e in hexadecimal and 64878 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to fd3f in hexadecimal and 64831 in decimal.

<Counting Example/(34)AT→(35)AT>
The state of "(35) AT" shown in Figure 169 (35) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the AT state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and the push order bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stopping order RCL according to the operation navigation "Right (1) → Center (2) → Left (3)".

In the game in this state, the bet amount is 3 and the payout amount is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are 4043 to 4045 (=4043+
12), and since the game is a three-coin bet game/navigation notification game in the advantageous zone (second zone) and not the first game (a three-coin bet game/non-navigation notification game in the advantageous zone (second zone), the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (
The difference counter (first counting means) counts (updates) both the number of coins that have been won (the first coin counting means) and the value of the difference counter (second counting means) is
fd6e in hex, 64878 in decimal, to fd3f in hex, 64 in decimal
890 (=64878+12), and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated from fd3f in hexadecimal and 64831 in decimal to fd4b in hexadecimal and 64843 (=64831+12) in decimal.

Also, as explained using Figure 168 (b), in the slot machine 100, in the ED transition process (first process) of the advantageous zone (second zone), the difference number counter (first counting means) is referenced, and when the value of this difference number counter (first counting means) reaches a certain value (in this example, 2000 in decimal, fd6f in hexadecimal), it is determined that the condition for transition to the ED state has been met, and the advantageous zone (second zone) is transitioned to the ED state.

In this example, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated to fd3f in hexadecimal and 64890 (=64878+12) in decimal, and the difference from the initial value becomes 2011 in decimal, and since it has reached 2000, the state transitions to the ED state.

<Counting Example / (35) AT → (36) ED>
In the "(36) ED" state shown in FIG. 169 (36), a three-coin bet game is played in the ED state transitioned from the AT state in the advantageous zone (second zone), and the operation navigation "Left (1) → Center (2)" is selected.
) → Right (3)" and the push order bell (payout number 15) is won.

In the game in this state, the bet amount is 3 and the payout amount is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are 4055 to 4067 (=4055+
12), and as explained with reference to FIG. 168(a)(5), when a 3-coin bet game (3-BET game) is played in the ED state, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated). Therefore, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) changes from fd7a in hexadecimal and 64890 in decimal to fd86 in hexadecimal and 64902 in decimal (=64890+12).
The virtual difference counter (second counting means) is updated to fd4b in hexadecimal.
It is maintained at 64843 in decimal.

<Counting Example/(37)ED, (38)ED>
In the "(37) ED" and "(38) ED" states shown in FIG. 169 (37) and (38), a three-coin bet game is played in the ED state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and the operation navigation "Middle (
This is the state where the push order bell (payout number 15) is won in the stopping order CRL according to "1) → Right (2) → Left (3)".

In the game in this state, the bet amount is 3 and the payout amount is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credit is updated from 4427 to 4439. As described with reference to FIG. 168(a)(5), the game is a 3-coin bet game in the ED state (
When a 3-BET game is played, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated).
However, since the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) does not count (update), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is feee → fefa in hexadecimal and 65262 in decimal.
→The value is updated to 65274, but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at fd4b in hexadecimal and 64843 in decimal.

<Counting Example / (38)ED → (39)ED>
The state of "(39) ED" shown in Figure 169 (39) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the ED state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and the push order bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stopping order CRL according to the operation navigation "center (1) → right (2) → left (3)".

In the game in this state, the bet amount is 3 and the payout amount is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credits are 4439 to 4461 (=4439+
12), and as explained using FIG. 168(a)(5), when a 3-coin bet game (3-BET game) is played in the ED state, the difference number counter (first counting means) is counted (updated) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is not counted (updated). Therefore, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated to ff06 in hexadecimal and 65286 (=65274+12) in decimal, but the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is maintained at fd4b in hexadecimal and 64843 in decimal.

As described with reference to FIG. 168(b), in the slot machine 100, in the reset determination process (second process) of the advantageous zone (second zone), the difference number counter (first counting means) is referenced, and the value of this difference number counter (first counting means) is set to a first value (in this example, 1
When the count reaches the predetermined number (65279 in decimal), it is determined that the end condition of the favorable zone (second zone) is met, and the favorable zone (second zone) is transitioned to the non-favorable zone (first zone).

In this example, the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated to ff06 in hexadecimal and 65286 (=65274+12) in decimal, and the difference from the initial value is 2407.
Since the value of 00 has been reached, the state transitions from the ED state of the advantageous section (second section) to the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section). Note that if it is determined that the high-order byte is ff by determining whether it has become ff, the state transitions from the ED state of the advantageous section (second section) to the normal state of the non-advantageous section (first section), and in this case, the capacity of the determination process associated with the transition can be reduced.

According to this example, by storing the winning difference in the second section (in this example, the advantageous section) in the first counting means and the second counting means, the end condition of the second section can be grasped by the two counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, the first value (in this example, 65279 in decimal) is the initial value (in this example, 62879 in decimal) plus the first absolute value (in this example, 2400 in decimal), and the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value is a value greater than 0. Therefore, even if the number of coins won exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value due to the player's playing status, there is still room for the player to make up for lost money.

<Counting Example / (39) ED → (40) Unfavorable Zone>
The state of "(40) Non-favorable zone" shown in Figure 169 (40) is a state in which a favorable zone (second zone) has been transitioned to a non-favorable zone (first zone).

In this state, the zone and presentation state are set to the non-advantageous zone (first zone) and normal state, respectively, just as when the power is turned on, and the values of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are set to their initial values (in this example, f59f in hexadecimal, 62879 in decimal) as the initial settings when transitioning from the advantageous zone (second zone) to the non-advantageous zone (first zone).

<Example of counting / (40) Non-favorable zone → (41) Advantageous zone transition>
The state of "(41) Transition to favorable zone" shown in Figure 169 (41) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the non-favorable zone (first zone), and a miss (amount of payout 0) is won in the stopping order LCR.

In the game in this state, the bet amount is 3 and the payout amount is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are 4461 to 4458 (=4461-3).
However, since the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) do not count (update) in the non-advantageous zone (first zone), their respective values are maintained at their initial values (in this example, f59f in hexadecimal, 62879 in decimal).

Furthermore, in this game, since the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous zone (second zone) have been met (in this example, the transition lottery has been won), from the next game, the game will transition to the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone).

<Example of Counting / (41) Transition to Favorable Zone → (42) First L Stop>
In the state of "(42) L first stop" shown in FIG. 169 (42), in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone) after the transition, a three-coin bet game is played, and the stop order LCR is a miss (amount of payout is 0).
This is the state in which the winner has won.

In the game in this state, the bet amount is 3 and the payout amount is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credits are 4458 to 4455 (=4458-3).
168(a)(1), when the first operation (in this example, the L first stop operation) is performed in the advantageous period (second period), both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), so that each value is updated to the initial value (in this example, f59f in hexadecimal, 10
62879 in hexadecimal, f59c in hexadecimal, 62876 in decimal (=62879-
3) will be updated.

<Counting Example / (43) L First Stop>
The state of "(43) L first stop" shown in Figure 169 (43) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and the stop order LCR results in a miss (amount of payout 0).

In the game in the same state, the bet amount is 3 and the payout amount is 0, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is -3 (=0-3), and the credit is 2458 (=the previous credit 2461-
3), and as explained with reference to FIG. 168(a)(1), the favorable zone (
When the first operation is performed in the second interval, both the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are counted (updated), so that the respective values are updated from the previous values by f59c in hexadecimal and 62876 (=6287) in decimal.
9-3), and the difference between the initial value and each is a predetermined value (in this example, 2000 in decimal).
) more than

As explained using Figure 168 (b), the slot machine 100 is configured to execute a freeze lottery (second lottery) by referring to the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means), and in this example, the second lottery is executed when the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) exceeds a predetermined value (in this example, 2000 in decimal).

According to this example, even if the player intentionally performs the second operation (in this example, the first stop operation other than L), it is not reflected in the value of the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) and does not affect the second lottery (in this example, the freeze lottery), so a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, in this example, the probability of winning the freeze lottery and the degree of advantage after winning the freeze effect in the state of ``(43) First stop on L'' shown in Figure 169 (43) are configured to be higher than the probability of winning the freeze lottery and the degree of advantage after winning the freeze effect in the state of ``(28) First stop on other than L'' shown in Figure 169 (28).

That is, in this example, the value (
In this example, the second lottery in which the value related to the second counting means is a third value (in this example, -2000 in decimal) is more advantageous to the player (for example, it is easier to win the second lottery, or the game value (size of the AT) if the second lottery is won) than the second lottery (in this example, a freeze lottery) in which the difference from the initial value is a second value (in this example, 12 in decimal), and the third value is smaller than the second value.

According to this example, the worse the gaming situation of the player, excluding the intentional second operation, the more advantageous the second lottery is for the player, so that the player's motivation to play can be increased even if the player's gaming situation is poor.

In addition, since the value (in this example, the difference from the initial value) related to the second counting means (in this example, the virtual difference number counter) may become a third value (in this example, -2000 in decimal) and then a second value (in this example, 12 in decimal), a second lottery can be executed depending on the playing status of the player, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

<Counting Example/(44) AT>
The state of "(44) AT" shown in Figure 169 (44) is a state in which a three-coin bet game is played in the AT state of the advantageous zone (second zone), and the push order bell (payout amount 15) is won in the stopping order CRL according to the operation navigation "center (1) → right (2) → left (3)".

In the game in this state, the bet amount is 3 and the payout amount is 15, so the difference in the number of coins in the game is 12 (=15-3), and the credit is 6638 (=662 credits from the previous game).
The value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is updated to fe9b in hexadecimal and 65179 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to ff13 in hexadecimal and 65299 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to ff13 in hexadecimal and 65299 in decimal, and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) is updated to ff13 in hexadecimal and 65299 in decimal.

In this example, the value of the virtual difference counter (second counting means) is ff13, 10 in hexadecimal.
The virtual difference number counter (second counting means) value reaches a first value (e.g., 65279) before the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) reaches the first value (e.g., 65279) (first case), and in this first case, the advantageous period (second period) does not end, so that when the value of the second counting means, which is not updated by the second operation, reaches the first value, the second period can end, and a fair gaming machine that takes the second operation into account can be provided.

Although not shown in the figure, in slot machine 100, there are cases (second case) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) reaches a first value (e.g., 2400) and the value of the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) reaches the first value, and in this second case, the advantageous period (second period) ends, and both the first counting means and the second counting means reach the first value, so it can be determined that the second period has ended without the second operation being performed.

<Initial value of counter to reduce the load of arrival determination process>
In the examples of Figures 168 and 169, the difference number counter is updated, and when it is determined that the value has reached a predetermined value, the advantageous period is terminated. In this configuration, the load of the determination process may be reduced depending on the bit pattern when the predetermined value is reached. Therefore, by determining a predetermined value that results in such a bit pattern, and then calculating backwards from the amount of change required to reach this value to determine an initial value, the load of the advantageous period end determination process can be reduced. Such an example will be described below.

In the first example, the initial value is set to "0xf59fh (62879)" when the advantageous period ends when the difference number counter is incremented by 2401 or more (the advantageous period continues until 2400 is incremented). In this example, the specified value is "0xff00h (65280)", and the upper two digits (8 bits) of the four hexadecimal digits are "ff". The upper two digits of the four hexadecimal digits remain "ff" until 255 is further added to this value to become "0xffffh (65535)". In other words, when the upper two digits are "ff", the amount of change from the initial value is within the range of 2401 to 2656. Since the game does not update beyond this range at once, it is possible to determine whether the specified value has been reached by determining whether the upper two digits are "ff".

In the second example, the initial value is set to "0xe69fh (59039)" when the advantageous period ends when the difference number counter is incremented by 2401 or more (the advantageous period continues until 2400 is incremented). In this example, the specified value is "0xf000h (61440)", and the most significant digit (4 bits) of the four hexadecimal digits is "f". The most significant digit of the four hexadecimal digits remains "f" until 4095 is further added to this value to become "0xffffh (65535)". In other words, when the most significant digit is "f", the amount of change from the initial value is within the range of 2401 to 6496. Since the game does not update beyond this range at once, it is possible to determine whether the specified value has been reached by determining whether the most significant digit is "f".

In the third example, the initial value is set to "0x769fh (30367)" when the advantageous period ends when the difference number counter is incremented by 2401 or more (the advantageous period continues until 2400 is incremented). In this example, the specified value is "0x8000h (32768)" and the most significant bit is "1". The most significant bit remains "1" until 32767 is further incremented from this value to become "0xffffh (65535)". In other words, when the most significant bit is "1", the amount of change from the initial value is within the range of 2401 to 35168. Since updates that exceed this range at once are not made during play, it is possible to determine whether the specified value has been reached by determining whether the most significant bit is "1".

In the fourth example, the initial value is set to "0x0a60h (2656)" when the advantageous period ends when the difference number counter is subtracted by 2401 or more (the advantageous period continues until 2400 is subtracted). In this example, the specified value is "0x00ffh (255)", and the upper two digits (8 bits) of the four hexadecimal digits are "00". The upper two digits of the four hexadecimal digits remain "00" until 255 is further subtracted from this value to become "0x0000h (0)". In other words, when the upper two digits are "00", the amount of change from the initial value is within the range of 2401 to 2656. Since the game does not update beyond this range at once, it is possible to determine whether the specified value has been reached by determining whether the upper two digits are "00".

In the above example, we have described a case where all of the upper digits up to a specific digit have the same bit pattern, but for example, in the first example, the predetermined value may be "0xee00h (60928)" to determine whether the upper two digits are "ee" or the upper seven bits are "1110111". In this configuration, if the advantageous period ends when the difference number counter is incremented by 2401 or more, the initial value should be set to "0xe49f00h (58527)".

As in the four examples above, a predetermined value is determined that allows only the upper digits of the corresponding bit pattern to be the target for judgment, and then the change in the difference number counter is calculated from that value to derive the initial value. Note that the above bit patterns carry over (or carry down) when they reach a predetermined value, and the same value (0 or 1) continues from the lower digits, and the value of a specific digit is inverted. For example, in the first example, "0xff00h (65280)," the 8th digit (8th bit) from the top is 1, and all lower digits are 0, and these values are inverted. In the second example, "0xf000h (61440)," the 4th digit (4th bit) from the top is 1, and all lower digits are 0, and these values are inverted. In the third example, "0x8000h (32768)," the 1st digit (1st bit) from the top is 1, and all lower digits are 0, and these values are inverted. In the fourth example, "0x00ffh (255)," the eighth digit (eighth bit) from the top is 0, and all of the lower digits below that are 1, with these values being inverted.

In the above configuration, it is only necessary to handle the upper digits including the specific digit in the program, and the register capacity required to read this can also be reduced. In other words, it is possible to determine whether a specific value has been reached using only the upper digits including the specific digit, thereby reducing the processing burden and capacity burden.

In addition, in the above example, the above judgment process can be performed even if the difference number counter changes within a certain range after the specified value is reached. This makes it possible to perform operations such as playing a certain number of times after the specified value is reached, or executing some kind of performance.

Furthermore, in the above example, the first range of the difference number counter value in the direction of the specified value with the initial value as the boundary is narrower than the second range in the opposite direction to the specified value with the initial value as the boundary. For example, in the first example, the initial value is "0xf59fh (62879)", and the first range is 62879 to 65535, while the second range is 0 to 62879, making the first range narrower than the second range. Depending on the content of the game, the difference number counter may be updated in the opposite direction to the specified value, but even in such cases, there is room for the difference number counter to make up for the loss, which can increase the interest of the game.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1 shown in FIG.
00, pachinko machine, enclosed gaming machine, medalless slot machine) is a gaming machine equipped with a first counting means (e.g., a difference number counter) and a second counting means (e.g., a virtual difference number counter), and has a first section (e.g., a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of a stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) is not notified, and a second section (e.g., an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified, and when a transition condition is satisfied in the first section (e.g., a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is executed based on an internally won role,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, if the player wins the lottery), the game progresses to the second section, and if an ending condition is met in the second section (for example, if a predetermined net increase in number of medals (for example, 2,400 medals) is exceeded), the second section is ended and the game progresses to the first section, and the first counting means is a means for counting an acquired difference obtained by subtracting the amount of game value used in the game (for example, the number of medals inserted) from the amount of game value awarded as a result of the game (for example, the number of medals paid out), and when the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (for example, 65,279), the ending condition is met and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, the winning difference in the second section (e.g., the advantageous section) is stored in the first counting means and the second counting means, so that the end condition of the second section can be grasped by the two counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, when a first operation (e.g., an L first stop operation) is performed in a first game (e.g., a three-coin bet game or non-navigation notification game in a favorable zone (second zone)), the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is updated, and when a second operation (e.g., a other than L first stop operation) is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is not updated.

With this configuration, a value that does not reflect that the second operation has been performed in the first game can be held in the second counting means, and the value at which the first operation has been performed can be grasped by the second counting means, thereby providing a fair gaming machine.

In addition, the first operation may be a recommended operation in the first game, and the second operation may be a non-recommended operation in the first game.

With this configuration, a value that does not reflect that a non-recommended operation has been performed in the first game can be held in the second counting means, and the value when a recommended operation has been performed can be grasped by the second counting means, making it possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

The game device may also be provided with a first lottery means (e.g., AT lottery processing) capable of executing a first lottery (e.g., AT lottery), the first lottery means being a means capable of executing the first lottery in the first game in which the first operation is performed, and the first lottery means being a means not executing the first lottery in the first game in which the second operation is performed.

With this configuration, the first lottery will not be executed if the second operation is performed, placing the player at a disadvantage, so the player can be urged to perform the first operation and play the game.

Furthermore, an amount of update when the value of the second counting means is updated may be the same as an amount of update when the value of the first counting means is updated.

With this configuration, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means, making it possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

Furthermore, there may be a case where one of the value of the first counting means and the value of the second counting means is larger than the initial value and the other is smaller than the initial value.

With such a configuration, the playability can be improved by having the value of the first counting means and the value of the second counting means, which are referred to (or not referred to) in the performance, lottery, etc., be inconsistent.

Also, the initial value of the first counting means (eg, 62879) may be a value greater than zero.

With this configuration, even if the value of the first counting means falls below the initial value due to the game situation of the player, the value can be counted without taking the negative into consideration, thereby reducing the control burden.

Furthermore, the first value (e.g., 65279) may be a value obtained by adding a first absolute value (e.g., 2400) to the initial value (e.g., 62879), and the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value may be a value greater than 0.

With this configuration, even if the number of winning coins exceeds the initial value minus the first absolute value due to the player's playing state, there is still room for the player to make up for lost money.

In addition, in the second section, a first state (for example, an AT state) advantageous to the player may be entered, and in a state before the first state, when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and in the first state,
When the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and in a state after the first state has ended, when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated.

With this configuration, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means before and after a state advantageous to the player (e.g., an AT state), and during that advantageous state, thereby providing a fair gaming machine.

In addition, the first winning combination (e.g., a common bell) that results in a payout amount greater than the bet amount when the second operation is performed may have a lower probability of winning than a miss under normal conditions.

With this configuration, even if the second operation is continued, the virtual difference in number of coins becomes larger than the actual difference in number of coins, and the player does not gain an advantage, so that a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine, an enclosed gaming machine, or a medalless slot machine) is a gaming machine equipped with a first counting means capable of counting a value (for example, a difference number counter) and a second counting means capable of counting a value (for example, a virtual difference number counter), and has a first section (for example, a non-advantageous section) in which advantageous operation modes of the stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137-139) are not notified, and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which advantageous operation modes of the stop operation means are notified, and when a transition condition is met in the first section (for example, when a transition lottery to an advantageous section is executed based on an internally won role and this lottery is won), the second section is terminated and a transition to the first section is made possible, and when an end condition is met in the second section (for example, when a predetermined net increase in number of coins (for example, 2,400 coins) is exceeded), the second section is terminated and a transition to the first section is made possible, and when the first section is The counting means is a means capable of counting a value (e.g., the difference in winnings) obtained by subtracting the amount of game value used in a game (e.g., the value of the number of medals inserted) from the amount of game value awarded as a result of a game in the second section (e.g., the value of the number of medals paid out), and when the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (e.g., 65279), the end condition is met, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated; when a first operation (e.g., an L first stop operation) is performed in a first game (e.g., a three-coin bet game or a non-navigation notification game in an advantageous section (second section)), the value of the first counting means is updated, and the value of the second counting means is updated; and when a second operation (e.g., a non-L first stop operation) is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means is updated, and the value of the second counting means is not updated.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, by storing the winning difference number in the second section (e.g., advantageous section) in the first counting means and the second counting means, the end condition of the second section can be grasped by the two counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided. In addition, a value that does not reflect that the second operation has been performed in the first game can be stored in the second counting means, and the value when the first operation has been performed can be grasped by the second counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine, an enclosed gaming machine, a medalless slot machine) is a gaming machine equipped with a first counting means capable of counting a value (e.g., a difference number counter) and a second counting means capable of counting a value (e.g., a virtual difference number counter), and has a first section (e.g., a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) is not notified, and a second section (e.g., an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means is not notified. When a transition condition is satisfied in the first section (for example, a lottery for transition to a favorable section is executed based on an internally won role, and the lottery is won), the game moves to the second section, and when an end condition is satisfied in the second section (for example, when a predetermined net increase in number of medals (for example, 2,400 medals) is exceeded), the second section ends and the game moves to the first section. The first counting means calculates the amount of game value (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out) used in the game from the amount of game value awarded as a result of the game in the second section. When the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (e.g., 65279), the end condition is met, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated. When a first operation (e.g., an L first stop operation) is performed in a first game (e.g., a three-coin bet game or a non-navigation notification game in an advantageous zone (second zone)), the value of the first counting means is updated, and This is a gaming machine characterized in that the value of the second counting means is updated, and when a second operation (e.g., a first stop operation other than L) is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means is updated, and the value of the second counting means is not updated, and when an operation different from the advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means is performed in a game in which the advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means is notified (e.g., when an operation different from the push order navigation is performed, as shown in FIG. 168(a)(3)), the value of the first counting means is updated, and the value of the second counting means is updated.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, by storing the winning difference in the second section (e.g., advantageous section) in the first counting means and the second counting means, the end condition of the second section can be grasped by the two counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided. In addition, a value that does not reflect that the second operation has been performed in the first game can be stored in the second counting means, and the value of the first operation can be grasped by the second counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided. Furthermore, if an operation different from the advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means is performed in a game in which the advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means is notified, the value of the first counting means is updated, and the value of the second counting means is updated, so that the player will not be disadvantaged even if he makes an operation error.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine, an enclosed gaming machine, or a medalless slot machine) is a gaming machine equipped with a first counting means capable of counting a value (for example, a difference number counter) and a second counting means capable of counting a value (for example, a virtual difference number counter), and has a first section (for example, a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) is not notified, and a second section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means is not notified. When a transition condition is satisfied in the first section (for example, a lottery for transition to the advantageous section is executed based on an internally won role, and the lottery is won), the game progresses to the second section, and when an end condition is satisfied in the second section (for example, when a predetermined net increase in number of coins (for example, 2,400 coins) is exceeded), the second section is ended and the game progresses to the first section. The first counting means counts the amount of game value (for example, medals) awarded as a result of a game in the second section. The first counting means is a means capable of counting a value (e.g., an acquired difference) obtained by subtracting a game value amount used in a game (e.g., a value of the number of medals inserted) from a value of the number of medals paid out in a game (e.g., a value of the number of medals paid out in a game), and when the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (e.g., 65279), the end condition is established, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and when a first operation (e.g., a L first stop operation) is performed in a first game (e.g., a three-coin bet game or a non-navigation notification game in an advantageous zone (second zone)), When this is done, the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is updated, and when a second operation (e.g., a first stop operation other than L) is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is not updated, and game value may be awarded to the player (for example, as shown in Figures 169 (10) and (11), when a first stop operation other than L is performed, 15 medals (game value) may be awarded).

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, by storing the winning difference in the second section (e.g., advantageous section) in the first counting means and the second counting means, the end condition of the second section can be grasped by the two counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided. In addition, a value that does not reflect that the second operation has been performed in the first game can be stored in the second counting means, and the value of the first operation can be grasped by the second counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided. In addition, when the second operation is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means is updated, and the value of the second counting means is not updated, and a gaming value may be awarded to the player, so that a decrease in the player's motivation to play can be prevented even if the player makes an operational error.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine, an enclosed gaming machine, or a medalless slot machine) is a gaming machine equipped with a first counting means capable of counting a value (e.g., a difference number counter) and a second counting means capable of counting a value (e.g., a virtual difference number counter), and has a first section (e.g., a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137-139) is not notified, and a second section (e.g., a When a transition condition is satisfied in the first section (for example, a lottery for transition to the advantageous section is executed based on an internally won role, and the lottery is won), the game moves to the second section, and when an end condition is satisfied in the second section (for example, when a predetermined net increase in number of medals (for example, 2,400 medals) is exceeded), the second section ends and the game moves to the first section. The first counting means calculates the amount of game value (for example, the number of medals paid out) awarded as a result of a game in the second section. It is a means capable of counting a value (e.g., the difference in winnings) obtained by subtracting the amount of game value used in a technique (e.g., the value of the number of medals inserted), and when the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (e.g., 65279), the end condition is met, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and when a first operation (e.g., an L first stop operation) is performed in a first game (e.g., a three-coin bet game or a non-navigation notification game in an advantageous zone (second zone)), the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is updated, and when a second operation (e.g., a first stop operation other than L) is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is not updated, and when the first operation is performed in a game in a first state (e.g., a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game in an ED state as shown in Figures 168(a)(4) and (a)(5)), the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is not updated.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, by storing the winning difference in the second section (e.g., advantageous section) in the first counting means and the second counting means, the end condition of the second section can be grasped by the two counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided. In addition, a value that does not reflect that the second operation has been performed in the first game can be stored in the second counting means, and the value of the first operation can be grasped by the second counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided. In addition, when the first operation is performed in a game in the first state, the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is not updated, so the control load can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine, an enclosed gaming machine, a medalless slot machine) is a gaming machine equipped with a first counting means capable of counting a value (e.g., a difference number counter), a second counting means capable of counting a value (e.g., a virtual difference number counter), and an informing means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, a lamp, an LED), and has a first section (e.g., a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) is not notified, and a second section (e.g., a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means is not notified. and a second interval (e.g., an advantageous interval) capable of reporting a state of a favorable zone, and when a transition condition is satisfied in the first interval (e.g., when a transition lottery to transition to an advantageous zone is executed based on an internally won role and the lottery is won), a transition to the second interval is made, and when an end condition is satisfied in the second interval (e.g., when a predetermined net increase in number of medals (e.g., 2,400 medals) is exceeded), the second interval is ended and a transition to the first interval is made possible, and the first counting means counts the amount of game value awarded as a result of a game in the second interval (e.g., the value of the number of medals paid out). is a means capable of counting a value (e.g., an acquired difference) obtained by subtracting the amount of game value used in a game (e.g., the value of the number of medals inserted) from the amount of game value (e.g., the acquired difference), and when the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (e.g., 65279), the end condition is met, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and when a first operation (e.g., an L first stop operation) is performed in a first game (e.g., a three-coin bet game or a non-navigation notification game in an advantageous zone (second zone)), the value of the first counting means is updated, and the value of the second counting means is updated. This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the value of the counting means is updated and a second operation (e.g., a first stop operation other than L) is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is not updated, and when the first operation is performed in a game in a first state (e.g., a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game in an ED state as shown in Figures 168(a)(4) and (a)(5)), the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is not updated, and the notification means is a means capable of notifying the first state.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, by storing the winning difference number of the second section (e.g., advantageous section) in the first counting means and the second counting means, the end condition of the second section can be grasped by the two counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided. In addition, a value that does not reflect that the second operation has been performed in the first game can be stored in the second counting means, and the value of the first operation can be grasped by the second counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided. In addition, when the first operation is performed in a game in the first state, the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is not updated, and the notification means can notify the first state, so that the first notification allows the player to know that the second counting means (virtual difference number counter) is not updated internally.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine, an enclosed gaming machine, or a medalless slot machine) is a gaming machine equipped with a first counting means (e.g., a difference number counter) capable of counting a value, a second counting means (e.g., a virtual difference number counter) capable of counting a value, and a second lottery means (e.g., a freeze lottery process) capable of executing a second lottery (e.g., a freeze lottery shown in FIG. 168 (b)) by referring to the value of the second counting means, and a stop operation means (e.g., The game machine has a first section (e.g., a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not notified, and a second section (e.g., an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified. When a transition condition is satisfied in the first section (e.g., when a transition lottery to a beneficial section is executed based on an internally won role and the lottery is won), the game machine transitions to the second section. When an end condition is satisfied in the second section (e.g., when a predetermined net increase in number of coins (e.g., 2,400 coins) is exceeded), the game machine transitions to the second section. The second interval can be ended and a transition can be made to the first interval, and the first counting means is a means capable of counting a value (e.g., an acquired difference) obtained by subtracting an amount of game value used in a game (e.g., a value of the number of inserted medals) from an amount of game value awarded as a result of a game (e.g., a value of the number of medals paid out) in the second interval, and when the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (e.g., 65279), the end condition is established, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is may also be updated, and when a first operation (e.g., first stop operation of L) is performed in a first game (e.g., three-coin bet game/non-navigation notification game in an advantageous zone (second zone)), the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is updated, and when a second operation (e.g., first stop operation other than L) is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is not updated, and the second lottery is not executed.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, by storing the winning difference in the second section (e.g., advantageous section) in the first counting means and the second counting means, the end condition of the second section can be grasped by the two counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided. In addition, a value that does not reflect that the second operation has been performed in the first game can be stored in the second counting means, and the value of the first operation can be grasped by the second counting means, and a fair gaming machine can be provided. In addition, when the second operation is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means is not updated, and the second lottery is not executed, so the player will be at a disadvantage in the second operation, and therefore the player can be encouraged to perform the first operation.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine, an enclosed gaming machine, or a medalless slot machine) includes a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter), a second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter), and a second lottery (for example,
and a second lottery means (e.g., freeze lottery processing) capable of executing a freeze lottery, the gaming machine has a first section (e.g., a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of a stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) is not notified, and a second section (e.g., an advantageous section) capable of notifying an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means, and when a transition condition is satisfied in the first section (e.g., when a transition lottery to a beneficial section is executed based on an internally won role and the lottery is won), the gaming machine transitions to the second section, and when an end condition is satisfied in the second section (e.g., when a predetermined net increase in number of coins (e.g., 2,400 coins) is exceeded), the second section is ended and a transition to the first section is possible, and the first counting means counts the number of coins in the second section. In the above, the first counting means is a means capable of counting an acquired difference obtained by subtracting an amount of game value used in a game (for example, a value of the number of medals inserted) from an amount of game value awarded as a result of a game (for example, a value of the number of medals paid out), and when the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (for example, 65279), the end condition is established, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated; when a first operation (for example, an L first stop operation) is performed in a first game (for example, a three-coin bet game or a non-navigation notification game in an advantageous zone (second zone)), the value of the first counting means is updated, and when a second operation (for example, a non-L first stop operation) is performed in the first game,
a value of the first counting means is updated, a value of the second counting means is not updated, and the second lottery means is a means for executing the second lottery by referring to the value of the second counting means;
This is a gaming machine characterized by the above.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if a player intentionally performs a second operation, it is not reflected in the value of the second counting means and does not affect the second lottery, so a fair gaming machine can be provided.

The second lottery means may be means for executing the second lottery without referring to the value of the first counting means.

With this configuration, the value of the first counting means, which reflects the second operation intentionally performed by the player, is not referred to by the second lottery means, and therefore does not affect the second lottery, making it possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

Furthermore, the second lottery in which the value associated with the second counting means is a third value (in this example, -2000 in decimal) may be more advantageous to the player than the second lottery in which the value associated with the second counting means is a second value (for example, 12 in decimal), and the third value may be smaller than the second value.

With this configuration, the worse the gaming situation of the player, excluding the intentional second operation, the more advantageous the second lottery is for the player, so that the player's motivation to play can be improved even if the player's gaming situation is poor.

In addition, there may be cases where the value relating to the second counting means becomes the second value after becoming the third value.

With this configuration, the second lottery can be carried out according to the playing status of the player, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine, an enclosed gaming machine, or a medalless slot machine) is a gaming machine equipped with a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter) and a second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter), and has a first section (for example, a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 139) is not notified, and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified. When a transition condition is satisfied in the first section (for example, an advantageous section based on an internally won role), a lottery for transition to a second interval is executed, and if the lottery is won) a transition to the second interval is made, and if an end condition is met in the second interval (for example, if a predetermined net increase in number of medals (for example, 2,400 medals) is exceeded), the second interval is ended and a transition to the first interval is made possible, and the first counting means is a means for counting an acquired difference obtained by subtracting an amount of game value used in a game (for example, the value of the number of medals inserted) from an amount of game value awarded as a result of a game (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out) in the second interval, and when the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (for example, 65,279),
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the termination condition is met and the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated; when a first operation is performed in a first game, the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is updated; when a second operation is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is not updated; and there is a case (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") where the value of the second counting means reaches the first value before the value of the first counting means reaches the first value, and in the first case, the second section does not end.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, the second interval can be ended when the value of the second counting means, which is not updated by the second operation, reaches the first value, thereby providing a fair gaming machine that takes the second operation into account.

In addition, there may be a case where the value of the first counting means reaches the first value and the value of the second counting means reaches the first value (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), and in the second case, the second interval may end.

With this configuration, the first counting means and the second counting means both reach the first value, so that it is possible to know that the second interval has ended without performing the second operation.

In addition, the first operation may be a recommended operation in the first game, and the second operation may be a non-recommended operation in the first game.

With this configuration, a value that does not reflect that a non-recommended operation has been performed in the first game can be held in the second counting means, and the value when a recommended operation has been performed can be grasped by the second counting means, making it possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

The game device may also be provided with a first lottery means (e.g., AT lottery processing) capable of executing a first lottery (e.g., AT lottery), the first lottery means being a means capable of executing the first lottery in the first game in which the first operation is performed, and the first lottery means being a means not executing the first lottery in the first game in which the second operation is performed.

With this configuration, the first lottery will not be executed if the second operation is performed, placing the player at a disadvantage, so the player can be urged to perform the first operation and play the game.

Furthermore, an amount of update when the value of the second counting means is updated may be the same as an amount of update when the value of the first counting means is updated.

With this configuration, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means, making it possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

Furthermore, there may be a case where one of the value of the first counting means and the value of the second counting means is larger than the initial value and the other is smaller than the initial value.

With such a configuration, the playability can be improved by having the value of the first counting means and the value of the second counting means, which are referred to (or not referred to) in the performance, lottery, etc., be inconsistent.

Also, the initial value of the first counting means (eg, 62879) may be a value greater than zero.

With this configuration, even if the value of the first counting means falls below the initial value due to the game situation of the player, the value can be counted without taking the negative into consideration, thereby reducing the control burden.

Furthermore, the first value (e.g., 65279) may be a value obtained by adding a first absolute value (e.g., 2400) to the initial value (e.g., 62879), and the value obtained by subtracting the first absolute value from the initial value may be a value greater than 0.

With this configuration, even if the number of winning coins exceeds the initial value minus the first absolute value due to the player's playing state, there is still room for the player to make up for lost money.

In addition, in the second section, a first state (for example, an AT state) advantageous to the player may be entered, and in a state before the first state, when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and in the first state,
When the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and in a state after the first state has ended, when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated.

With this configuration, the second counting means can hold the same value as the first counting means before and after a state advantageous to the player (e.g., an AT state), and during that advantageous state, thereby providing a fair gaming machine.

In addition, the first winning combination (e.g., a common bell) that results in a payout amount greater than the bet amount when the second operation is performed may have a lower probability of winning than a miss under normal conditions.

With this configuration, even if the second operation is continued, the virtual difference in number of coins becomes larger than the actual difference in number of coins, and the player does not gain an advantage, so that a fair gaming machine can be provided.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first counting means (e.g., a main control unit 300, a first counting means);
A determination means (e.g., the main control unit 300);
A gaming machine equipped with
A first section (e.g., a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not notified, and a second section (e.g., an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be notified,
transitioning to the second section based on the establishment of a transition condition in the first section;
transitioning to the first section based on the determination by the determination means that a termination condition is satisfied in the second section;
The first counting means is a means capable of updating an acquisition difference number (e.g., a difference number counter) using a result obtained by subtracting a number of game values used in a game from a number of game values awarded as a result of a game in the second section,
the determining means determines that the termination condition is met when a change in the acquired difference number from an initial value reaches a first value (e.g., 2,400 coins);
The determination means is a means for determining whether the termination condition is satisfied using a value from the most significant digit to a specific digit of a bit pattern corresponding to the acquired difference number (for example, see the description of <Regarding the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the reaching determination process>).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can reduce the processing load and data volume compared to when all digits of the first counting means are judged.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A bit pattern corresponding to the sum of the initial value and the first value has all values of digits lower than the specific digit being the inverse of the value of the specific digit (for example, see the description in <Regarding the initial value of a counter for reducing the load of the reaching determination process>).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first counting means is a means capable of updating the winning difference even in a game after the amount of change from the initial value of the winning difference reaches the first value (for example, see the description of <Regarding the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the reaching determination process>).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can accurately count the change in the winning difference from the initial value even after it reaches the first value.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The initial value is a value greater than 0 (for example, see the description in <Regarding the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the arrival determination process>).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, counting can continue even if the value of the first counting means falls below the initial value due to the player's playing status.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first counting means being a means capable of updating the acquired difference number within a predetermined range;
the predetermined range includes a first range, which is a sum of the initial value and the first value, and a second range, which is different from the first range, with the initial value as a boundary;
The first range is narrower than the second range (for example, see the description of <Regarding the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the arrival determination process>).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, even if the player's playing situation causes the winning difference to fall into the second range, there is still room for the player to make up for it.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second counting means (e.g., a virtual difference number counter) may be provided, which may update a value when the first counting means updates the acquired difference number.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the winning difference in the second section can be stored by the first counting means and the second counting means, and the end condition of the second section can be grasped by the two counting means, providing a fair gaming machine.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is equipped with a launching device which launches balls into a specified gaming area, a winning port configured to allow the balls launched from the launching device to enter, a detection means which detects balls which have entered the winning port, a payout means which pays out the ball when the detection means detects a ball, and a variable display device which variably displays a specified pattern (identification information), and is suitable for pachinko machines and the like in which, when a gaming ball enters the winning port and wins a prize, the variable display device changes the pattern and then displays a still pattern to notify the player of the progress of the gaming status.

The gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to a sealed gaming machine. Here, a "sealed gaming machine" is a gaming machine that uses game balls sealed in the gaming machine in a circulating manner. The main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip.
The sub-controller may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. Also, while bidirectional communication is enabled between the main control unit and the first sub-controller, communication from the first sub-controller to the second sub-controller may be unidirectional.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. In addition, by applying the contents described in one of the multiple configurations described in the examples to another configuration, the range of play may be expanded.

<Performance based on the difference number counter>
Next, the effects based on the difference number counter will be explained using Figures 170 to 175.

<Example 1 of performance based on difference number counter>
FIG. 170 is a graph showing an example of the change in the difference in number of coins during a certain game period.
1 and 172 are diagrams showing examples of various presentations during a certain game period shown in FIG. 171.

<Example 1 of performance based on difference number counter/power on>
The timing shown in FIG. 170(1) is the timing when the power is turned on with the setting key provided inside the main body 101 in the ON state, and the setting is changed.

At the same timing, the section and presentation state are set to a non-advantageous section (first section) and normal state, respectively, as the initial settings when the power is turned on, and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) that counts the difference number of coins (obtained difference number) and the value of the above-mentioned virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are each set to an initial value CT1 (e.g., 0) as the initial settings when the power is turned on.

The initial values of the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) may be a value greater than 0 (a positive value) or less than 0 (a negative value). The trigger for setting (resetting) the difference number counter (first counting means) and the virtual difference number counter (second counting means) to their initial values is not limited to when the power is turned on, but may be one, more, or all of the following: when the end condition of the advantageous period (second period) is met, when the slot machine is reset, when the settings are changed, when the RAM is cleared (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization), or when an error occurs. The trigger for setting the initial value of one counter and the trigger for setting the initial value of the other counter may be the same or different.

<Example 1 of presentation based on difference number counter / game period PT1 (normal state)>
The game period PT1 in Figure 170 (1) to (2) is the normal state of the non-advantageous zone (first zone) or the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), in which the difference in the number of coins is decreasing.

In this example, during a certain game of normal play in a non-advantageous zone (first zone), the condition for transition to the advantageous zone (second zone) is met (in this example, the transition lottery is won), and the game transitions from the normal state of the non-advantageous zone (first zone) to the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone).

The game period PT1 (normal state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) decreases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins decreases from difference in number of coins CT1 (0 in this example, the first point) to difference in number of coins CT2 (for example, -1500, the second point).

In addition, the game period PT1 (normal state) in Figures 170 (1) to (2) is a state (second state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is less than the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value) during the entire game period, and hereafter this state may be referred to as the "negative area of difference number" or "negative area."

In contrast, for example, a game period such as PT8 is a state (first state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) has increased from the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value), and hereafter, this state may be referred to as the "positive area of the difference number" or "positive area."

During the game period PT1 (normal state), in addition to executing a normal effect (such as displaying a normal background) corresponding to the current game state (in this example, the normal state) using the liquid crystal display device 157, a certain effect may appear (be executed) with a predetermined probability.

The certain effects include reel effects (freeze effects) performed using reels 110 to 112, display effects (for example, tutorial displays, etc.), specific character effects in which a specific character appears, effects that increase the appearance rate of existing effects, and effects that suggest a negative zone (second state) (demo effects, etc.).

These effects may appear (be executed) with a certain probability even in the positive difference in number of coins, but in this example, the probability of the effect appearing in the negative difference in number of coins is higher than the probability of the effect appearing in the positive difference in number of coins, and the effect is configured to appear (be executed) more easily in the negative difference in number of coins (second state) than in the positive difference in number (second state).

Note that a certain effect may be more likely to appear in the negative difference number area (second state) than in the positive difference number area (first state). For example, the probability that a certain effect will appear in the positive difference number area may be 0%, and the probability that a certain effect will appear in the negative difference number area may be greater than 0%. In other words, a certain effect may only appear in the negative difference number area.

Also, the probability that a certain effect will appear in the positive difference number range may be less than 100%, and the probability that a certain effect will appear in the negative difference number range may be 100%. In other words, a certain effect may always appear in the negative difference number range.

In addition, the probability of a certain effect appearing may increase when the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone becomes small (when the advantageous zone is nearing its end). The state in which the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone is small means that the difference number counter has not reached a predetermined value, and since the difference number counter basically decreases in the normal state, it can be said that the value of the difference number counter is low. In other words, even with the above configuration, it is possible to make a certain effect appear more easily in the negative difference number area than in the positive difference number area. In addition, the probability of a certain effect appearing may increase as the number of games in which the AT state is not set increases, or the probability of a certain effect appearing may increase as the number of times an advantageous result is not obtained in the CZ (CZ pass) increases. In other words, it is sufficient to make the probability of a certain effect appearing increase in a situation in which a disadvantage is generally caused to the player, and various indicators for determining this can be used, such as the above examples (difference number counter, number of remaining games in the advantageous zone, number of games in which the AT state is not set, number of CZ passes).

FIG. 171(a) is a diagram showing an example of a tutorial display, which is one of the presentation effects.

The tutorial display is one of the effects, and in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display an image of a princess character, as well as a display suggesting the appearance of a freeze effect, which will be described later, using Figure 171 (e) (in this example, the display of the text ``If you get a freeze it'll be super hot'').

Figure 171 (b) shows an example of a specific character effect, which is one type of effect.

The specific character effect is one of the effects. In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to
The vassal's character image is displayed, along with a display (in this example, the text "Chance!") suggesting that the player will be given a beneficial benefit (for example, the appearance of a freeze effect).

In addition, the player may recognize that there is a possibility of acquiring a lot of game value in the AT state described later due to the appearance of these effects shown in Figure 171 (a) and Figure 171 (b), and thus the motivation to continue playing may increase. Specifically, from the point where the AT state start is negative (for example, the point of CT2 in Figure 170) to the point where the AT state is completed and the advantageous zone is reset (for example, the point of CT6 in Figure 170), it is expected to be acquired in one AT state.

Also, in this example, during the game period PT1 (normal state), the condition for transitioning to the AT state is met (in this example, the AT lottery is won), so a transition from the normal state to the AT state occurs.

<Example 1 of Presentation Based on Difference Number Counter / Game Period PT2 (AT State)>
The game period PT2 in Figure 170 (2) to (3) is in the AT state, and the difference in number of coins is increasing.

The game period PT2 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins increases from difference in number of coins CT2 (e.g., -1500; second point) to difference in number of coins CT3 (e.g., -697 (= -1500 + 803); first point).

In addition, in the game period PT2 (AT state) of FIG. 170 (2) to (3), all game periods are
This is a state (second state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is decreased from the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value), and is in a negative area of the difference number.

During the game period PT2 (AT state), in addition to executing AT effects etc. corresponding to the current game state (in this example, the AT state) using the liquid crystal display device 157, a certain effect may appear (be executed) with a predetermined probability.

Figure 171 (c) shows an example of an AT presentation.

The AT presentation is a presentation that suggests that the player is in the AT state. In this example, the presentation includes a display of the number of game media acquired in the AT game (in this example, the character string "255 GET"), a display of a character image of the Banchou, and a display notifying the player that the player is in the AT state (in this example, the character string "AT in progress").
This is a production that includes the display of the string "."

Also, in this example, since the conditions for terminating the AT state are met during the game period PT2 (AT state) (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been played), the AT state transitions to the normal state, and in the final game of the game period PT2 (AT state), an AT end presentation is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157.

Figure 171 (d) shows an example of an AT end presentation.

The AT end effect is an effect that suggests the end of the AT state, and in this example, it is an effect that includes the display of the total number of gaming media won in AT play (in this example, the display of the string of characters "TOTAL 803 GET") and the display of a character image of the Banchou.

<Example 1 of performance based on difference number counter / game period PT3>
The game period PT3 in Figure 170 (3) to (4) is in the normal state, where the difference in number of coins is decreasing.

The game period PT3 (normal state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) decreases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins decreases from difference in number of coins CT3 (in this example, -300; the first point) to difference in number of coins CT4 (for example, -1700; the second point).

In addition, in the game period PT3 (normal state) of FIG. 170 (3) to (4), all game periods are
This is a state (second state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is decreased from the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value), and is in a negative area of the difference number.

During the game period PT3 (normal state), in addition to executing a normal effect (display of a normal background, etc.) corresponding to the current game state (in this example, the normal state) using the liquid crystal display device 157,
A certain effect may occur (be executed) with a certain probability.

Also, in this example, during game period PT3 (normal state), the condition for transitioning to the AT state is met (in this example, the AT lottery is won), so a transition from the normal state to the AT state occurs.

<Example 1 of presentation based on difference number counter / game period PT4 (AT state)>
The game period PT4 in Figures 170 (4) to (6) is in the AT state, and the difference in number of coins is increasing.

The game period PT4 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= payout amount - bet amount) gradually increases. In this example, the difference in number of coins increases from the difference in number of coins CT4 (e.g., -1700. Second point) through the difference in number of coins CT5 (e.g., 0) to the difference in number of coins CT6 (e.g., 2400. First point).
and the end condition of the favorable zone (second zone) is met.

In addition, the game period PT4 (AT state) of FIG. 170 (4) to (6) is the first half of the same figure (4) to (6).
During the game period (5), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (0 in this example).
In the second state, the difference in number of coins is smaller than the first value (a certain value) and is in a negative region of the difference in number of coins, whereas in the second half of the game period from (5) to (6) in the same figure, the difference in number of coins counter (first counting means)
is increased from an initial value (0 in this example, a certain value) (first state),
This is the positive area of the difference in number of sheets.

During the game period PT4 (AT state), in addition to executing AT effects etc. corresponding to the current game state (in this example, the AT state) using the liquid crystal display device 157, a certain effect may appear (be executed) with a predetermined probability.

Figure 171 (e) shows an example of a freeze effect, which is one type of effect.

The freeze effect is one type of effect, and in this example, in addition to the freeze effect using reels 110 to 112, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display an image of the Banchou character and a display (in this example, the text "Break the limit!") suggesting that the player will be given a favorable advantage (in this example, the player can gain gaming value until the number of coins moves from the negative difference area (second state) to the positive difference area (first state)).

In this example, in the game period PT4 (AT state), it is determined that the game value can be acquired until the difference number (virtual difference number counter) moves from the negative area (second state) to the positive area (first state) of the difference number (virtual difference number counter).
In a certain game in a certain state, when a certain internal winning combination (in this example, a middle cherry) is internally won, a performance lottery using a random number is carried out, and when this performance lottery is won, a freeze performance (a certain performance) is executed.

In this example, the probability of an internal win for the middle cherry is 1/300, and the probability (second probability) of executing a freeze effect in the negative difference area (second state) is 1/20, so the probability of executing a freeze effect is 1/6000 (=1/300 x 1/20). Note that the probability (second probability) of executing a freeze effect in the negative difference area (second state) may be 100%.

According to this example, when a certain effect appears, it is suggested that a lot of game value can be acquired until the end condition of the advantageous zone is met (until the advantageous zone is reset), so that the player's motivation to continue playing can be improved. Also, immediately after starting playing in the morning, when a certain effect appears, the player can recognize that the setting may be left unchanged (it is possible to infer that the setting has not been changed and the player is in the second state), so that the certain effect may function as an element for determining whether to change the setting. Also, when a certain effect appears after the end of the AT, it is suggested that the player is still in the second state in which game value up to the first value can be acquired, even though the AT has ended and a certain amount of game value has been acquired, so that the player's motivation to continue playing after the end of the AT may be improved.

In addition, when a certain effect (in this example, a freeze effect) appears, it suggests the possibility of gaining a lot of game value until the transition from the second state (negative area of difference in number of coins) to the first state (positive area of difference in number of coins) occurs, thereby increasing the player's motivation to continue playing.

Furthermore, since a certain effect occurs, the player can gain game value at least until the transition from the second state to the first state, it is possible to prevent the player from losing motivation to continue playing even when the player has not gained an AT or the like and the game value is being reduced as the difference in the number of coins.

In addition, by executing a certain effect based on the value of a second counting means (virtual difference number counter) that is not updated under certain conditions (for example, as shown in FIG. 168(a) , when (4) a two-coin bet (2-BET game) is made, or when (5) a three-coin bet game (3-BET game) is made in the ED state), a certain effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, thereby providing a fair gaming machine.

In this example, the freeze effect (a certain effect) is configured to be executed based on the value of the second counting means (virtual difference number counter), but it may also be configured to be executed based on the value of the first counting means (difference number counter).

Figure 171 (f) is a diagram showing an example of one of the effects, an ending confirmation effect (completion confirmation).

The ending confirmation effect (completion confirmed) is one of the effects, and uses the liquid crystal display device 157 to display an image of the boss character, images of three panda characters, and a display (in this example, a display of three pandas appearing lined up in a V) indicating that the player will be awarded a favorable profit (in this example, the player can gain gaming value until the difference in number of coins reaches a first value (2400 in this example) from the negative area (second state) of the difference in number of coins and the end condition of the favorable zone (second zone) is met).

In this example, the ending confirmation effect is performed when the first counter reaches 2400 (see FIG. 17).
0 CT6 point), and the "140
The ending confirmation effect will continue until the "0 GET" display becomes "4100 GET" (1700 + 2400).

In this example, during the game period PT4 (AT state), it is determined that game value can be earned until the difference in number of coins reaches a first value (2,400 in this example) from the negative area (second state) of the difference in number of coins and the end condition of the advantageous zone (second zone) is met, and if the lottery for the freeze effect is won, an ending confirmation effect is executed after the freeze effect is executed.

According to this example, when a certain effect (in this example, an ending confirmation effect (completed)) appears, it is suggested that a lot of game value can be obtained until the end condition of the advantageous zone is met (until the advantageous zone is reset), which can increase the player's motivation to continue playing. Moreover, in this example, the ending confirmation effect (completed) appears after the freeze effect, which can instantly increase the player's sense of expectation.

In this example, an example of executing the ending determination effect after the execution of the freeze effect has been shown, but only the execution condition of the freeze effect is satisfied, and the execution condition of the ending determination effect (in this example, the difference number is from the negative area (second state) of the difference number to the first value (in this example, 2400)
If it is not confirmed that gaming value can be acquired until the end condition of the advantageous zone (second zone) is met (completion confirmed), only the freeze effect may be executed.

In this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 170(6), the difference in number of sheets is CT6 (
For example, 2400. Since the winning combination reaches the winning combination (first value) and the end condition of the advantageous zone (second zone) is established, at the same timing, the zone and the presentation state are set to a non-advantageous zone (first zone) and a normal state, respectively, as the initial settings when the end condition of the advantageous zone (second zone) is established, and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) that counts the difference number (acquired difference number) and the value of the above-mentioned virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are each set to an initial value CT1 (for example, 0), respectively, as the initial settings when the end condition of the advantageous zone (second zone) is established.

In addition, the condition for ending the advantageous zone (second zone) is not limited to when the difference in number of coins reaches 2,400, but may be, for example, a value greater than 2,400, which is the maximum value at which completion is confirmed in the positive area of the difference in number of coins, such as 4,000.

In addition, in this example, since the condition for terminating the AT state is met at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (6) (in this example, the condition for terminating the advantageous zone (second zone) is met), the AT end presentation is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157 in the final play of the play period PT4 (AT state).

Figure 172 (a) shows an example of an AT end presentation (ending presentation).

The AT end effect (ending effect) is an effect that suggests the end of the AT state, and in this example, the total number of game media acquired in the AT game is displayed (in this example, "TOTAL 5104
This is a performance that includes the display of the character string "GET" (the character string "GET" is displayed), the display of the character image of the Banchou, and the display of the character images of the three pandas.
The total number of coins won will be displayed as "4100 GET".

<Example 1 of presentation based on difference number counter / game period PT5 (normal state)>
The game period PT5 in Figures 170 (6) to (7) is the normal state of the non-advantageous zone (first zone) or the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), in which the difference in number of coins is decreasing.

In this example, during a certain game of normal play in a non-advantageous zone (first zone), the condition for transition to the advantageous zone (second zone) is met (in this example, the transition lottery is won), and the game transitions from the normal state of the non-advantageous zone (first zone) to the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone).

The game period PT5 (normal state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= payout amount - bet amount) decreases. In this example, the difference in number of coins decreases from the difference in number of coins CT1 (0 in this example, the first point) to the difference in number of coins CT7.
(For example, -150. Second point).

In addition, in the game period PT5 (normal state) of FIG. 170 (6) to (7), all game periods are
This is a state (second state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is decreased from the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value), and is in a negative area of the difference number.

Also, in this example, during game period PT5 (normal state), the condition for transitioning to the AT state is met (in this example, the AT lottery is won), so a transition from the normal state to the AT state occurs.

<Example 1 of Presentation Based on Difference Number Counter / Game Period PT6 (AT State)>
The game period PT7 in Figure 170 (7) to (8) is in the AT state, and the difference in number of coins is increasing.

The game period PT7 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins increases from difference in number of coins CT7 (e.g., -150; second point) to difference in number of coins CT8 (e.g., 1000; first point).

Also, in this example, during the game period PT7 (AT state), the condition for terminating the AT state is met (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been played), so the AT state transitions to the normal state.

<Example 1 of presentation based on difference number counter / game period PT7 (normal state)>
The game period PT7 in Figures 170 (8) to (9) is the normal state of the non-advantageous zone (first zone) or the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), in which the difference in number of coins is decreasing.

The game period PT7 (normal state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) decreases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins decreases from difference in number of coins CT8 (in this example, 1000; the first point) to difference in number of coins CT9 (for example, 700; the second point).

In addition, in the game period PT7 (normal state) of FIG. 170 (8) to (9), all game periods are
This is a state (first state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) has increased from the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value), and is in the positive region of the difference number.

Also, in this example, during game period PT7 (normal state), the condition for transitioning to the AT state is met (in this example, the AT lottery is won), so a transition from the normal state to the AT state occurs.

<Example 1 of presentation based on difference number counter / game period PT8 (AT state)>
The game period PT8 in Figure 170 (9) to (10) is in the AT state, and the difference in number of coins is increasing.

The game period PT8 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) gradually increases. In this example, the difference in number of coins increases from difference in number of coins CT9 (e.g., 700; second point) to difference in number of coins CT10 (e.g., 2400; first point), and the end condition of the advantageous zone (second zone) is met.

In addition, both the game period PT4 (AT state) and the game period PT8 (AT state) are game periods in which game value can be earned until the end conditions of the advantageous zone (second zone) are met, but the difference in number of coins CT4 (in this example, -1700) at the start of the game period PT4 (AT state) is in the negative area, while the difference in number of coins CT9 (in this example, 700) at the start of the game period PT8 (AT state) is in the positive area, so the increase in the difference in number of coins in the game period PT8 (AT state) (in this example, 1400 (= 2400 - 700)) is less than the increase in the difference in number of coins in the game period PT4 (AT state) (in this example, 4100 (= 2400 + 1700)).

In addition, the game period PT8 (AT state) in Figures 170 (9) to (10) is a state (first state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is increased from the initial value (0, a certain value in this example) throughout the entire game period, and is in the positive area of the difference number.

During the game period PT8 (AT state), in addition to executing AT effects etc. corresponding to the current game state (in this example, the AT state) using the liquid crystal display device 157, a certain effect may appear (be executed) with a predetermined probability.

Figure 172 (b) shows an example of a non-freeze effect, which is one type of effect.

The no-freeze effect is one of the effects. In this example, the freeze effect using the reels 110 to 112 is not executed, and the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the princess character image and to award an advantageous benefit to the player (in this example, the difference in number of coins is a first value (in this example, 24
00) and the end condition of the advantageous zone (second zone) is met), a display (in this example, the string "Hot!" is displayed indicating that gaming value can be earned.

In this example, in a certain game during the game period PT8 (AT state), when it is determined that game value can be acquired until the difference in number of coins reaches a first value (in this example, 2400) and the end condition of the advantageous zone (second zone) is met, and when a certain internal winning role (in this example, a middle cherry) is internally won, a performance lottery is held using a random number value, and if this performance lottery is won, a non-freeze performance (a certain performance) is executed.

In this example, the probability of winning the middle cherry is 1/300, and the probability of executing the no freeze effect in the positive difference area (first state) is 1/200 (first probability), so the probability of executing the no freeze effect is 1/60000 (=1/300×1/2
00). Note that the probability (first probability) of executing the no-freeze effect in the positive area (first state) of the difference number may be 0.

According to this example, even with the same internal winning role (cherry in the middle row), by making at least a portion of the appearance of the freeze effect and the non-freeze effect different, it is possible to allow the player to guess whether it is in the first state or the second state, thereby improving gameplay.

In addition, the combination of the effect (second effect) performed in the negative area (second state) of the difference in the number of coins and the effect (first effect) performed in the positive area (first state) of the difference in the number of coins is not limited to a freeze effect and a non-freeze effect, and for example, the second effect may be freeze + display effect A and the first effect may be display effect A without freezing, or the second effect may be freeze + display effect A and the first effect may be display effect B without freezing, or the second effect may be freeze + display effect A and the first effect may be no effect.

<Example 2 of performance based on difference number counter>
FIG. 173 is a graph showing an example of the change in the difference in number of coins during a certain game period.
4 and 175 are diagrams showing examples of various presentations during a certain gaming period shown in FIG. 173.

<Example 2 of performance based on difference number counter/power on>
The timing shown in Figure 173 (11) is the timing when the power is turned on and the settings are changed with the setting key inside the main body 101 in the on position, which is the same as the "power on" state described using Figure 170.

In order to avoid repetition, detailed explanation will be omitted, but at the same timing, the section and the presentation state are set to a non-advantageous section (first section) and a normal state, respectively, as initial settings when the power is turned on, and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) that counts the difference number (obtained difference number),
The values of the virtual difference number counters (second counting means) are set to an initial value CT11 (for example, 0) as initial settings when the power is turned on.

<Example 2 of presentation based on difference number counter / game period PT11 (normal state)>
The game period PT1 in Figure 173 (11) to (12) is the normal state of the non-advantageous zone (first zone) or the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), in which the difference in number of coins is decreasing.

In this example, during a certain game of normal play in a non-advantageous zone (first zone), the condition for transition to the advantageous zone (second zone) is met (in this example, the transition lottery is won), and the game transitions from the normal state of the non-advantageous zone (first zone) to the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone).

The game period PT11 (normal state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= payout number - bet number) decreases. In this example, the difference in number of coins decreases from the difference in number of coins CT11 (0 in this example, the first point) to the difference in number of coins C
It decreases to T12 (eg, -1500, second point).

In addition, the game period PT11 (normal state) of Figure 173 (11) to (12) is a state (second state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is less than the initial value (in this example, 0; a certain value) during the entire game period, and is in the negative area of the difference number.

During the game period PT11 (normal state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the current game state (
In this example, in addition to executing a normal effect (such as displaying a normal background) corresponding to the normal state, a certain effect may appear (be executed) with a predetermined probability.

FIG. 174(a) is a diagram showing an example of a tutorial display, which is one of the presentation effects.

The tutorial display is one of the effects, and in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display an image of the princess character and a display suggesting the appearance of the freeze effect described below using Figure 174 (f) (in this example, the display of the text ``If you get a freeze it'll be super hot'').

Also, in this example, during the game period PT11 (normal state), the condition for transitioning to the AT state is met (in this example, the AT lottery is won), so a transition from the normal state to the AT state occurs.

<Example 2 of Presentation Based on Difference Number Counter / Game Period PT12 (AT State)>
The game period PT12 in Figure 173 (12) to (13) is in the AT state, and the difference in number of coins is increasing.

The game period PT12 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= payout amount - bet amount) gradually increases. In this example, the difference in number of coins is the difference in number of coins CT12 (for example, -1500. Second point)
The difference in number of coins increases from CT13 (for example, -950, the first point).

In addition, the game period PT2 (AT state) of Figures 173 (12) to (13) is a state (second state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is less than the initial value (in this example, 0; a certain value) during the entire game period, and is in the negative area of the difference number.

During the game period PT12 (AT state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the current game state (
In this example, in addition to executing an AT effect corresponding to the AT state, a certain effect may appear (be executed) with a predetermined probability.

Figure 174 (b) shows an example of an AT presentation.

The AT presentation is a presentation that suggests that the player is in the AT state. In this example, the presentation includes a display of the number of game media acquired in the AT game (in this example, the character string "255 GET"), a display of a character image of the Banchou, and a display notifying the player that the player is in the AT state (in this example, the character string "AT in progress").
This is a production that includes the display of the string "."

In this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (13), the condition for ending the AT state is met (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been played), so the AT state is switched to the normal state, and in the final game of the game period PT12 (AT state), the liquid crystal display device 1
57 is used to execute the AT end performance.

Figure 174 (c) shows an example of an AT end presentation.

The AT end effect is an effect that suggests the end of the AT state, and in this example, it is an effect that includes the display of the total number of gaming media won in the AT game (in this example, the display of the string of characters "TOTAL 550 GET") and the display of a character image of the Banchou.

Furthermore, in this example, since the difference in number of coins CT13 at the time when the end condition of the AT state is met is in the negative area (-300 in this example), the end condition of the advantageous zone (second zone) is less likely to be met than when the difference in number of coins at the time when the end condition of the AT state is met is in the positive area, and therefore in this example, the end condition of the advantageous zone (second zone) is not met, the zone is maintained in the advantageous zone (second zone), and the difference in number of coins is maintained without being initialized.

<Example 2 of presentation based on difference number counter / game period PT13>
The game period PT13 in FIG. 173 (13) to (14) is in a normal state, in which the difference in number of coins is decreasing.

The game period PT13 (normal state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) decreases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins decreases from difference in number of coins CT13 (in this example, -950; first point) to difference in number of coins CT14 (for example, -1700; second point).

In addition, the game period PT13 (normal state) in Figures 173 (13) to (14) is a state (second state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is lower than the initial value (in this example, 0; a certain value) during the entire game period, and is in the negative area of the difference number.

During the game period PT13 (normal state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the current game state (
In this example, in addition to executing a normal effect (such as displaying a normal background) corresponding to the normal state, a certain effect may appear (be executed) with a predetermined probability.

Also, in this example, during game period PT13 (normal state), the condition for transitioning to the AT state is met (in this example, the AT lottery is won), so a transition from the normal state to the AT state occurs.

<Example 2 of presentation based on difference number counter / game period PT14 (AT state)>
The game period PT14 in Figure 173 (14) to (16) is in the AT state, and the difference in number of coins is increasing.

The game period PT14 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= payout amount - bet amount) gradually increases. In this example, the difference in number of coins is the difference in number of coins CT14 (for example, -1700. Second point)
The difference in number of coins increases to CT16 (e.g., 1077; first point), and the end condition of the advantageous zone (second zone) is met.

In addition, the game period PT4 (AT state) of FIG. 173 (4) to (6) is the first half of the same figure (4) to (6).
During the game period (5), the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is the initial value (0 in this example).
In the second state, the difference in number of coins is smaller than the first value (a certain value) and is in a negative region of the difference in number of coins, whereas in the second half of the game period from (5) to (6) in the same figure, the difference in number of coins counter (first counting means)
is increased from an initial value (0 in this example, a certain value) (first state),
This is the positive area of the difference in number of sheets.

During the game period PT14 (AT state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the current game state (
In this example, in addition to executing an AT effect corresponding to the AT state, a certain effect may appear (be executed) with a predetermined probability, but in this example, it does not appear.

Figure 174 (d) shows an example of an AT presentation.

The AT presentation is a presentation that suggests that the player is in the AT state. In this example, the presentation includes a display of the number of game media acquired in the AT game (in this example, the character string "255 GET"), a display of a character image of the Banchou, and a display notifying the player that the player is in the AT state (in this example, the character string "AT in progress").
This is a production that includes the display of the string "."

Also, in this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (16), the number of medals won in the AT state (= CT16 - CT14) reaches a certain number (for example, 2000) and the end condition of the advantageous zone (second zone) is met, so at the same timing, the zone and presentation state are set to a non-advantageous zone (first zone) and a normal state, respectively, as the initial settings when the end condition of the advantageous zone (second zone) is met, and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) that counts the difference number of medals (acquired difference number) and the value of the above-mentioned virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are each set to an initial value CT11 (for example, 0), respectively, as the initial settings when the end condition of the advantageous zone (second zone) is met.

In this example, the end condition of the AT state is met in the game period PT14 (AT state) (in this example, the end condition of the advantageous period (second period) is met).
In the final game of T14 (AT state), an AT end presentation is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157.

Figure 173 (e) shows an example of an AT end presentation.

The AT end effect is an effect that suggests the end of the AT state, and in this example, it is an effect that includes the display of the total number of gaming media won in AT play (in this example, the display of the string of characters "TOTAL 2777GET") and the display of a character image of the Banchou.

<Example 2 of presentation based on difference number counter / game period PT15 (normal state)>
The game period PT15 in Figures 173 (16) to (17) is the normal state of the non-advantageous zone (first zone) or the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), in which the difference in number of coins is decreasing.

In this example, during a certain game of normal play in a non-advantageous zone (first zone), the condition for transition to the advantageous zone (second zone) is met (in this example, the transition lottery is won), and the game transitions from the normal state of the non-advantageous zone (first zone) to the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone).

The game period PT15 (normal state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= payout number - bet number) decreases. In this example, the difference in number of coins decreases from the difference in number of coins CT11 (0 in this example, the first point) to the difference in number of coins C
It decreases to T17 (eg, -811, second point).

In addition, the game period PT15 (normal state) in Figures 173 (16) to (17) is a state (second state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is less than the initial value (in this example, 0; a certain value) during the entire game period, and is in the negative area of the difference number.

In addition, in this example, since the condition for transitioning to the AT state is met (in this example, the AT lottery is won) during the game period PT15 (normal state), the state transitions from the normal state to the AT state at the timing shown in Figure 173 (17).

<Example 2 of presentation based on difference number counter / game period PT16 (AT state)>
The game period PT16 in Figure 173 (17) to (19) is in the AT state, and the difference in number of coins is increasing.

The game period PT16 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) gradually increases. In this example, the difference in number of coins increases from difference in number of coins CT17 (e.g., -811; second point) to difference in number of coins CT19 (e.g., 2400; first point), and the end condition of the advantageous period (second period) is met.

In addition, the game period PT17 (AT state) of FIG. 173 (17) to (19) is the first half of the same figure (
The game period from (17) to (18) is a state (second state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is lower than the initial value (in this example, 0, a certain value) and is in the negative area of the difference number of sheets, whereas the game period from (18) to (19) in the latter half of the figure is a state (first state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is higher than the initial value (in this example, 0, a certain value) and is in the positive area of the difference number of sheets.

During the game period PT16 (AT state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the current game state (
In this example, in addition to executing an AT effect corresponding to the AT state, a certain effect may appear (be executed) with a predetermined probability.

Figure 174 (f) shows an example of a freeze effect, which is one type of effect.

The freeze effect is one type of effect, and in this example, in addition to the freeze effect using reels 110 to 112, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display an image of the Banchou character and a display (in this example, the text "Break the limit!") suggesting that the player will be given a favorable advantage (in this example, the player can gain gaming value until the number of coins moves from the negative difference area (second state) to the positive difference area (first state)).

In this example, in the game period PT4 (AT state), it is determined that the game value can be acquired until the difference in number of coins moves from a negative area (second state) to a positive area (first state). In addition, in a certain game in the game period PT16 (AT state), a certain internal winning combination (
In this example, if an internal win occurs on the middle cherry, a random number value is used to draw a performance lottery, and if this performance lottery is won, a freeze performance (a certain performance) is executed.

In this example, the probability of an internal win on the middle cherry is 1/300, and the probability (second probability) of executing a freeze effect in the negative area (second state) of the difference in number of coins is 1/20, so the probability of the freeze effect being executed is 1/6000 (= 1/300 x 1/20).

In this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (19), the difference in number of coins is CT6
(e.g., 2400; first value) and the end condition of the advantageous zone (second zone) is met, at that timing, the zone and presentation state are set to a non-advantageous zone (first zone) and a normal state, respectively, as the initial settings when the end condition of the advantageous zone (second zone) is met, and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) that counts the difference number of coins (acquired difference number) and the value of the above-mentioned virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are each set to an initial value CT1 (e.g., 0), respectively, as the initial settings when the end condition of the advantageous zone (second zone) is met.

In addition, in this example, at the timing shown in Figure 173 (19), the condition for ending the AT state is met (in this example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone (second zone) is met), so in the final game of the game period PT16 (AT state), the AT end presentation is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157.

Figure 175 (a) shows an example of an AT end presentation.

The AT end effect is an effect that suggests the end of the AT state, and in this example, it is an effect that includes a display of the total number of game media won in AT play (in this example, the display of the string of characters "TOTAL 3211 GET"), a display of an image of the Banchou character, and a display of images of three panda characters.

In addition, the AT end performance is not limited to this example, and for example, the AT as shown in FIG.
It may also be an ending performance.

The AT end presentation in this example is a presentation that includes, in addition to the AT end presentation display shown in Figure 175 (a), a display suggesting that the end conditions of the advantageous zone (second zone) have been met (in this example, a display including the string "Advantageous zone reset!").

In addition, when the end condition of the advantageous zone (second zone) is satisfied, the performance to be executed is as shown in FIG.
(e), AT end performance shown in FIG. 175 (a), (b), etc., for example, FIG.
It may also be an AT end presentation as shown in (c).

The AT end effect in this example is an effect including the display of a specific character image in addition to the display of the AT end effect shown in Fig. 174 (e). This AT end effect is one of the effects that is more likely to appear in the negative difference number area than in the positive difference number area, and may be executed when the difference number is in the negative area at the time when the end condition of the AT state is established.

In this example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone (second zone) is less likely to be met when the difference in number of coins at the time the condition for ending the AT state is met is in the negative zone than when the difference in number of coins at the time the condition for ending the AT state is met is in the positive zone, and the zone is maintained in the advantageous zone (second zone) and the difference in number of coins is maintained without being initialized. Therefore, when an AT end effect including the display of a specific character image as shown in FIG. 174 (e) is executed, the player can be given a sense of expectation that the advantageous zone may not end, thereby maintaining their desire to play.

On the other hand, when an AT end effect not including the display of a specific character image, as shown in FIG. 174 (e), is executed, it indicates the end of the advantageous period, but since there is a high possibility that the difference in number of coins is in the positive range, it is possible to prevent a decline in the player's motivation to play even if the advantageous period has ended.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1 shown in FIG.
171(e), a display effect shown in FIG. 171(a) (e.g., tutorial display, etc.), a specific character effect in which a specific character appears as shown in FIG. 171(b), an effect in which the appearance rate of an existing effect increases, an effect suggesting a second state (demo effect, etc.))) is executed (e.g., a display effect shown in FIG. 171(c), a display effect shown in FIG. 171(d), a display effect showing a specific character appearing as shown in FIG. 171(e), a display effect showing a specific character appearing as shown in FIG. 171(b), a display effect showing a specific character appearing as shown in FIG.
3 , speakers 272, 277, and various lamps shown in FIG. 2 ), the first counting means is a means capable of counting an acquired difference obtained by subtracting a value of a game value used in a game (e.g., a value of a number of medals inserted) from a value of a game value awarded as a result of a game (e.g., a value of a number of medals paid out), and when the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (e.g., 2400), it is determined that the game state is favorable to the player (hereinafter,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, after a predetermined game state (hereinafter referred to as a "predetermined game state") has ended, there are two states: one in which the value of the first counting means has increased beyond a certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), and the other in which the value of the first counting means has decreased beyond the certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"), and the certain effect is more likely to appear in the second state than in the first state.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine, an enclosed gaming machine, a medalless slot machine) includes a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter), a second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter), and a certain effect (for example, a freeze effect shown in FIG. 171(e), a display effect shown in FIG. 171(a) (for example, a tutorial display, etc.), a specific character effect in which a specific character appears as shown in FIG. 171(b), an effect in which the appearance rate of existing effects increases, an effect suggesting a second state (demo effect, etc.)).
A presentation means capable of executing the above (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 2 shown in FIG. 3)
72, 277, various lamps), the gaming machine has a first section (e.g., a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of a stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) is not notified, and a second section (e.g., an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified, and when a transition condition is satisfied in the first section (e.g., when a transition lottery to a favorable section is executed based on an internally won role and the lottery is won), the gaming machine transitions to the second section, and when an end condition is satisfied in the second section (e.g., when a predetermined net increase in number of coins (e.g., 2,400 coins) is exceeded), the second section is ended and a transition to the first section is possible,
The first counting means is a means capable of counting an acquired difference obtained by subtracting an amount of game value used in a game (for example, the value of the number of medals inserted) from an amount of game value awarded as a result of a game (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out), and the value of the first counting means is a first value (for example,
2400), the termination condition is met, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and there are a state in which the value of the first counting means is increased more than a certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "first state") and a state in which the value of the first counting means is decreased more than the certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"), and the certain presentation is more likely to appear in the second state than in the first state.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, when a certain effect appears, it is suggested that a lot of game value can be acquired until the end condition of the advantageous zone is established (until the advantageous zone is reset), so that the player's motivation to continue playing can be improved. Also, immediately after starting playing in the morning, when a certain effect appears, the player can recognize that the setting may be left unchanged (it is possible to infer that the setting has not been changed and the player is in the second state), so that the certain effect may function as an element for determining whether to change the setting. Also, when a certain effect appears after the end of the AT, it is suggested that the player is still in the second state in which game value can be acquired up to the first value, even though the AT has ended and a certain amount of game value has been acquired, so that the player's motivation to continue playing after the end of the AT may be improved.

In addition, when the certain effect is executed in the second state, the game value may be acquired until the state transitions from the second state to the first state.
In connection with the appearance of the certain effect, an effect may be one in which the game value can be acquired at least until the transition from the second state to the first state.

With this configuration, a certain effect occurs, and game value can be earned at least until the transition from the second state to the first state. This makes it possible to reduce the game value as the difference in the number of coins and not discourage the player from continuing to play even if the player remains in the second state without having acquired an AT or the like.

The predetermined game state may be a state that is started after the appearance of the certain effect, and may be a state in which the effect capable of acquiring the game value can be realized until the value of the first counting means reaches the first value and the predetermined game state ends. The certain effect may be a effect capable of acquiring the game value from the second state in relation to the appearance of the certain effect until the value of the first counting means reaches the first value and the end condition is established.

With this configuration, a certain effect occurs, and a player can obtain a lot of game value until the end condition of the advantageous zone is met (until the advantageous zone is reset), so that the player can play the AT
The game value is reduced as the difference in number of coins when the player has not acquired the above-mentioned number of coins, so that the player's motivation to continue playing is not diminished even when the player remains in the second state.

The game machine further includes an internal winning role determination means (e.g., an internal winning role lottery process) capable of determining an internal winning role, and the certain performance is a performance that may be executed when the internal winning role determination means determines a certain internal winning role (e.g., a middle cherry), and when the internal winning role determination means determines the certain internal winning role in the second state, the probability that the performance means executes the certain performance is a second probability (e.g., 1/6000), and when the internal winning role determination means determines the certain internal winning role in the first state (hereinafter, the "first case"),
The probability that the performance means executes the certain performance is a first probability (for example, 1
/60000), and the second probability may be higher than the first probability.

With this configuration, the probability of a certain effect being executed can be changed depending on whether the state is the first state or the second state, and the game value can be reduced by the difference in the number of coins if the player has not acquired the AT or the like.
Even when one is staying in the second state, there are cases where one can increase one's expectations of staying in the second state.

In the first case, the presentation means may be capable of executing a presentation that is different in at least some aspects from the certain presentation.

With this configuration, even with the same internal winning role, by varying at least a part of the manner in which the presentation is executed, it is possible to allow the player to guess whether the player is in the first state or the second state, thereby improving gameplay.

In addition, a second counting means (e.g., a virtual difference number counter) may be provided, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and the certain performance may be executed based on the value of the second counting means.

In this configuration, when a certain condition (for example, (4) a 2-coin bet (2-bet game) is performed or (5) a 3-coin bet game (3BET game) is performed in the ED state as shown in FIG. 168(a)) is satisfied,
By executing a certain performance based on the value of the second counting means which is not updated when an ET game is played, the certain performance can be executed at an appropriate timing, and a fair game machine can be provided.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine, an enclosed gaming machine, a medalless slot machine) is a gaming machine equipped with a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter) and a presentation means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, various lamps) capable of executing a certain presentation (for example, a freeze presentation shown in FIG. 171(e), a display presentation shown in FIG. 171(a) (for example, a tutorial display, etc.), a specific character presentation in which a specific character shown in FIG. 171(b) appears, a presentation in which the appearance rate of an existing presentation increases, a presentation suggesting a second state (demo presentation, etc.)), and the first counting means is a game machine that is equipped with a difference number counter (for example, a difference number counter), and a presentation means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, various lamps) capable of executing a certain presentation (for example, a freeze presentation shown in FIG. 171(e), a display presentation shown in FIG. 171(a) (for example, a tutorial display, etc.), a specific character presentation in which a specific character shown in FIG. 171(b) appears, a presentation in which the appearance rate of an existing presentation increases, a presentation suggesting a second state (demo presentation, etc.)), and the first counting means is a game machine that is equipped with a difference number counter, This gaming machine is characterized in that it is a means for counting the difference in the number of wins obtained by subtracting the value of the game value used in the game (for example, the number of medals inserted) from the value of the skill value (for example, the number of medals paid out), and when the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (for example, 2400), a game state advantageous to the player (hereinafter referred to as a "predetermined game state") ends, and there are a state in which the value of the first counting means has increased beyond a certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "first state") and a state in which the value of the first counting means has decreased beyond the certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"), and in connection with the execution of the certain presentation in the second state, the predetermined game state can be continued until the first state is reached.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine, an enclosed gaming machine, a medalless slot machine) includes a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter), a second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter), and a certain effect (for example, a freeze effect shown in FIG. 171(e), a display effect shown in FIG. 171(a) (for example, a tutorial display, etc.), a specific character effect in which a specific character appears as shown in FIG. 171(b), an effect in which the appearance rate of existing effects increases, an effect suggesting a second state (demo effect, etc.)).
A presentation means capable of executing the above (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 2 shown in FIG. 3)
72, 277, various lamps), the gaming machine has a first section (e.g., a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of a stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) is not notified, and a second section (e.g., an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified, and when a transition condition is satisfied in the first section (e.g., when a transition lottery to a favorable section is executed based on an internally won role and the lottery is won), the gaming machine transitions to the second section, and when an end condition is satisfied in the second section (e.g., when a predetermined net increase in number of coins (e.g., 2,400 coins) is exceeded), the second section is ended and a transition to the first section is possible,
The first counting means is a means capable of counting an acquired difference obtained by subtracting an amount of game value used in a game (for example, the value of the number of medals inserted) from an amount of game value awarded as a result of a game (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out), and the value of the first counting means is a first value (for example,
2400), the end condition is established, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated. There are a state in which the value of the first counting means is increased by more than a certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "first state") and a state in which the value of the first counting means is decreased by more than the certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"). In relation to the execution of the certain performance in the second state, a game state (
For example, this is a gaming machine characterized in that when the game state transitions to an advantageous gaming state (AT state), the gaming value can be acquired in the advantageous gaming state, and the first state is reached at least through the advantageous gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, when a certain effect appears, it suggests the possibility that a lot of gaming value can be gained until the first state is reached due to an advantageous gaming state, thereby increasing the player's motivation to continue playing.

In addition, when a transition to the specified game state is made in connection with the execution of the certain presentation in the second state, it may be possible to earn the game value until the value of the first counting means reaches the first value and the specified game state ends.

With this configuration, a certain effect occurs, and a player can obtain a lot of game value until the end condition of the advantageous zone is met (until the advantageous zone is reset), so that the player can play the AT
The game value is reduced as the difference in number of coins when the player has not acquired the above-mentioned number of coins, so that the player's motivation to continue playing is not diminished even when the player remains in the second state.

Also, a point where the value of the first counting means is a second value (hereinafter referred to as a “first point”).
) and a point (hereinafter referred to as the "second point") where the value of the first counting means is a third value, the second value is greater than the third value, and the probability that the performance means will execute the certain performance at the second point is higher than the probability that the performance means will execute the certain performance at the first point.

With this configuration, the appearance rate of certain effects is high when the player is losing (is addicted), and the reward is large, which can increase the player's motivation to continue playing.

Also, there is provided an internal winning role determination means (for example, an internal winning role lottery process) capable of determining an internal winning role, and the certain performance is an performance that may be executed when the internal winning role determination means determines a certain internal winning role (for example, a middle cherry), and when the internal winning role determination means determines the certain internal winning role in the second state (hereinafter referred to as the "second case").
), the probability that the performance means executes the certain performance is a second probability (for example, 1/600
0), and when the internal win role determination means determines the certain internal win role in the first state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the probability that the presentation means executes the certain presentation is a first probability (e.g., 1/60,000), and the second probability may be higher than the first probability.

With this configuration, the probability of a certain effect being executed can be changed depending on whether the state is the first state or the second state, and the game value can be reduced by the difference in the number of coins if the player has not acquired the AT or the like.
Even when one is staying in the second state, there are cases where one can increase one's expectations of staying in the second state.

In the first case, the certain performance is likely to be performed in the first mode,
In the second case, the certain performance is likely to be executed in a second manner, and the first manner and the second manner may be at least partially different from each other.

With this configuration, even with the same internal winning role, by varying at least a part of the manner in which the presentation is executed, it is possible to allow the player to guess whether the player is in the first state or the second state, thereby improving gameplay.

In addition, a second counting means (e.g., a virtual difference in number of coins counter) may be provided, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and the certain performance may be executed based on the value of the second counting means (e.g., a virtual difference in number of coins counter).

In this configuration, when a certain condition (for example, (4) a 2-coin bet (2-bet game) is performed or (5) a 3-coin bet game (3BET game) is performed in the ED state as shown in FIG. 168(a)) is satisfied,
By executing a certain performance based on the value of the second counting means which is not updated when an ET game is played, the certain performance can be executed at an appropriate timing, and a fair game machine can be provided.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine, an enclosed gaming machine, or a medalless slot machine) is a gaming machine equipped with a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter) and a presentation means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, and various lamps) capable of executing a certain presentation (for example, a freeze presentation shown in FIG. 171(e), a display presentation shown in FIG. 171(a) (for example, a tutorial display, etc.), a specific character presentation in which a specific character appears as shown in FIG. 171(b), a presentation in which the appearance rate of an existing presentation increases, a presentation suggesting a second state (demo presentation, etc.)), and the first counting means is a gaming machine equipped with a difference number counter (for example, a difference number counter), and a presentation means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, and various lamps) capable of executing a certain presentation (for example, a freeze presentation shown in FIG. 171(e), a display presentation shown in FIG. 171(a) (for example, a tutorial display, etc.), a specific character presentation in which a specific character appears as shown in FIG. 171(b), a presentation in which the appearance rate of an existing presentation increases, a presentation suggesting a second state (demo presentation, etc.)), and the first counting means is a a means for counting an acquired difference obtained by subtracting a value of a gaming value used in a game (for example, a value of the number of medals inserted) from a value of a gaming amount used in a game (for example, a value of the number of medals paid out), and when the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (for example, 2400), a gaming state advantageous to the player (hereinafter referred to as a "predetermined gaming state") ends, and there are a point (hereinafter referred to as a "first point") where the value of the first counting means is a second value and a point (hereinafter referred to as a "second point") where the value of the first counting means is a third value, the second value is greater than the third value, and the probability that the presentation means will execute the certain presentation at the second point is higher than the probability that the presentation means will execute the certain presentation at the first point.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine, an enclosed gaming machine, a medalless slot machine) includes a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter), a second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter), and a certain effect (for example, a freeze effect shown in FIG. 171(e), a display effect shown in FIG. 171(a) (for example, a tutorial display, etc.), a specific character effect in which a specific character appears as shown in FIG. 171(b), an effect in which the appearance rate of existing effects increases, an effect suggesting a second state (demo effect, etc.)).
A presentation means capable of executing the above (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 2 shown in FIG. 3)
72, 277, various lamps), the gaming machine has a first section (e.g., a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of a stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) is not notified, and a second section (e.g., an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified, and when a transition condition is satisfied in the first section (e.g., when a transition lottery to a favorable section is executed based on an internally won role and the lottery is won), the gaming machine transitions to the second section, and when an end condition is satisfied in the second section (e.g., when a predetermined net increase in number of coins (e.g., 2,400 coins) is exceeded), the second section is ended and a transition to the first section is possible,
The first counting means is a means capable of counting an acquired difference obtained by subtracting an amount of game value used in a game (for example, the value of the number of medals inserted) from an amount of game value awarded as a result of a game (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out), and the value of the first counting means is a first value (for example,
2400), the termination condition is met, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, there is a point (hereinafter referred to as the "first point") where the value of the first counting means is a second value, and a point (hereinafter referred to as the "second point") where the value of the first counting means is a third value, a value obtained by subtracting a certain value from the second value is greater than a value obtained by subtracting the certain value from the third value, and the probability that the presentation means will perform the certain presentation at the second point is higher than the probability that the presentation means will perform the certain presentation at the first point.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, the appearance rate of certain effects is high when the player is losing (is addicted), so it may be possible to maintain the desire to continue playing even if the player is addicted.

In addition, there may be a state in which the value of the first counting means is increased beyond a certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), and a state in which the value of the first counting means is decreased beyond the certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"), and the first point may be a certain point in the first state, and the second point may be a certain point in the second state.

With this configuration, a certain effect is more likely to appear when the difference in number of coins is negative, so that even if you are addicted, you can maintain your desire to continue playing.

In addition, when a transition to the specified game state is made in connection with the execution of the certain presentation, it may be possible to earn the game value until the value of the first counting means reaches the first value and the specified game state ends.

With this configuration, a certain effect occurs, and a player can obtain a lot of game value until the end condition of the advantageous zone is met (until the advantageous zone is reset), so that the player can play the AT
The game value is reduced as the difference in number of coins when the player has not acquired the above-mentioned number of coins, so that the player's motivation to continue playing is not diminished even when the player remains in the second state.

Also, there is provided an internal winning role determination means (for example, an internal winning role lottery process) capable of determining an internal winning role, and the certain performance is an performance that may be executed when the internal winning role determination means determines a certain internal winning role (for example, a middle cherry), and when the internal winning role determination means determines the certain internal winning role in the second state (hereinafter referred to as the "second case").
), the probability that the performance means executes the certain performance is a second probability (for example, 1/600
0), and when the internal win role determination means determines the certain internal win role in the first state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the probability that the presentation means executes the certain presentation is a first probability (e.g., 1/60,000), and the second probability may be higher than the first probability.

With this configuration, the probability of a certain effect being executed can be changed depending on whether the state is the first state or the second state, and the game value can be reduced by the difference in the number of coins if the player has not acquired the AT or the like.
Even when one is staying in the second state, there are cases where one can increase one's expectations of staying in the second state.

In the first case, the certain performance is likely to be performed in the first mode,
In the second case, the certain performance is likely to be executed in a second manner, and the first manner and the second manner may be at least partially different from each other.

With this configuration, even with the same internal winning role, by varying at least a part of the manner in which the presentation is executed, it is possible to allow the player to guess whether the player is in the first state or the second state, thereby improving gameplay.

In addition, a second counting means (e.g., a virtual difference in number of coins counter) may be provided, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and the certain performance may be executed based on the value of the second counting means (e.g., a virtual difference in number of coins counter).

In this configuration, when a certain condition (for example, (4) a 2-coin bet (2-bet game) is performed or (5) a 3-coin bet game (3BET game) is performed in the ED state as shown in FIG. 168(a)) is satisfied,
By executing a certain performance based on the value of the second counting means which is not updated when an ET game is played, the certain performance can be executed at an appropriate timing, and a fair game machine can be provided.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine, an enclosed gaming machine, or a medal-less slot machine) is a gaming machine equipped with a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter), and the first counting means is a means capable of counting an acquired difference number obtained by subtracting a value of a gaming value used in a game (for example, a value of the number of medals inserted) from a value of a gaming value granted as a result of a game (for example, a value of the number of medals paid out), and when the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (for example, 2400), a gaming state advantageous to a player (hereinafter referred to as a "predetermined gaming state") ends, and there are a point (hereinafter referred to as a "first point") where the value of the first counting means is a second value and a point (hereinafter referred to as a "second point") where the value of the first counting means is a third value, and the second value is greater than the third value, and the predetermined gaming state is less likely to end at the second point than at the first point.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine, an enclosed gaming machine, or a medalless slot machine) is a gaming machine equipped with a first counting means (for example, a difference number counter) and a second counting means (for example, a virtual difference number counter), and has a first section (for example, a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 139) is not notified, and a second section (for example, an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be notified. When a transition condition is satisfied in the first section (for example, an advantageous section based on an internally won role), a lottery for transition to a new interval is executed, and if the lottery is won) a transition to the second interval is made, and if an end condition is met in the second interval (for example, if a predetermined net increase in number of medals (for example, 2,400 medals) is exceeded), the second interval is ended and a transition to the first interval is made possible, the first counting means is a means for counting an acquired difference obtained by subtracting the amount of game value used in the game (for example, the number of medals inserted) from the amount of game value awarded as a result of the game (for example, the value of the number of medals paid out), and when the value of the first counting means reaches a first value (for example, 2,400), the end condition is met,
When the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and the point where the value of the first counting means is the second value (hereinafter referred to as the "first point")
and a point (hereinafter referred to as the "second point") where the value of the first counting means is a third value, and a value obtained by subtracting a certain value from the second value is greater than a value obtained by subtracting the certain value from the third value, and the termination condition is more difficult to achieve at the second point than at the first point.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, the second point, which has a grace period up to the upper limit of the difference in the number of coins, will be of greater benefit if the next AT is completed, so since the conditions for the end of the advantageous zone are less likely to be met, it may be possible to maintain the desire to continue playing after the AT ends.

In addition, the game device may be equipped with an effect means (e.g., the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. 3, and various lamps) that can execute a certain effect (e.g., a freeze effect shown in FIG. 171(e), a display effect shown in FIG. 171(a) (e.g., a tutorial display, etc.), a specific character effect in which a specific character appears as shown in FIG. 171(b), an effect in which the appearance rate of existing effects increases, an effect that suggests a second state (demo effect, etc.)), and when a transition is made to the specified game state in connection with the execution of the certain effect, the game value may be acquired until the value of the first counting means reaches the first value and the specified game state ends.

With this configuration, a certain effect occurs, and a player can obtain a lot of game value until the end condition of the advantageous zone is met (until the advantageous zone is reset), so that the player can play the AT
Even if the player does not acquire the above and the game value is reduced as the difference in number of coins, the player's motivation to continue playing can be maintained even if the player remains in the second state. In addition, the player's motivation to continue playing can be maintained by keeping the probability of a certain performance relatively high after the AT ends.

In addition, a state in which the value of the first counting means is increased from the certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "first state") and a state in which the value of the first counting means is decreased from the certain value (hereinafter referred to as the "second state").
The first point at the end of the specified gaming state may be a certain point in the first state, and the second point at the end of the specified gaming state may be a certain point in the second state.

With this configuration, at the first point at the end of the AT, the reset of the advantageous zone and the difference in number of coins is relatively likely to occur, so when it is reset, it is more likely to enter a negative area and a certain effect is more likely to occur. Therefore, when it is reset at the end of the AT, the occurrence rate of the freeze is increased and it transitions to a state where it is easier to benefit from the freeze, so it is possible to improve the desire to continue playing. On the other hand, at the second point at the end of the AT, although the occurrence rate of the freeze may be lower than at the start of the AT, the benefit of getting a freeze is greater than when it is reset, so in either case, the desire to continue playing can be maintained.

In addition, when the certain performance is executed, the value of the first counting means may always reach the first value.

The reel may also be provided with an internal winning role determination means (e.g., an internal winning role lottery process) capable of determining an internal winning role, and the certain performance may be an performance that may be executed when the internal winning role determination means determines a certain internal winning role, and at the first point, the certain performance is likely to be executed in a first manner, and at the second point, the certain performance is likely to be executed in a second manner, and the first manner and the second manner may be at least partially different.

With this configuration, it may be possible to guess whether the end condition of the advantageous zone will be met after the AT ends (whether the advantageous zone will be reset).

In addition, a second counting means (e.g., a virtual difference in number of coins counter) may be provided, and when the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated, and the certain performance may be executed based on the value of the second counting means (e.g., a virtual difference in number of coins counter).

In this configuration, when a certain condition (for example, (4) a 2-coin bet (2-bet game) is performed or (5) a 3-coin bet game (3BET game) is performed in the ED state as shown in FIG. 168(a)) is satisfied,
By executing a certain performance based on the value of the second counting means which is not updated when an ET game is played, the certain performance can be executed at an appropriate timing, and a fair game machine can be provided.

<Complete function and game value display>
Next, the complete function and game value display will be explained using Figures 176 to 182.

<Complete function>
The complete function is a function that, when the difference between the maximum value of the above-mentioned acquired difference number and the minimum value of the acquired difference number (maximum difference number; the so-called MY value, or the value of the MY counter) reaches a second value (in this example, 19,000) (when the complete function is activated), issues an alert (complete upper limit reached alert) suggesting that game play should be stopped, and stops game play.

When the complete function is activated in the AT state, the AT state ends immediately and the state transitions to the normal state. Also, when the complete function is activated during bonus play, the bonus play may end immediately and the state transitions to the normal state, or the state transitions to the normal state after the bonus play ends. When the complete function is activated, it is possible to cancel the complete function by changing the settings, but it cannot be canceled by simply turning the power off and on or performing a reset operation.

<Complete function/Complete limit reached notification>
The notification means of the slot machine 100 notifies the player when the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches a second value (in this example, 19
When the limit is reached (000), an announcement suggesting that play should be stopped (an announcement indicating that the limit has been reached) may be made.

Figure 176 (b) shows an example of a completion upper limit reaching notification.

The complete upper limit reached notification is a notification that suggests that play will be stopped, and in this example, the complete upper limit reached notification is a notification that includes a display that suggests play will be stopped (in this example, the display of the text string "Play has reached its limit. Play will be stopped") and a display that prompts the player to settle their medals (in this example, the display of the text string "Press the count button"). Note that, although this example is configured to execute the complete upper limit reached notification using the performance image display device 157, it may also be configured to execute the complete upper limit reached notification using a device managed by the main control unit 300, such as the payout number display 127.

In this example, when the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches the second value (in this example, 19,000), a completion upper limit reaching notification shown in Figure 176 (b) is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157.

<Complete function/Complete function advance notification>
The notification means of the slot machine 100 notifies the player when the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches a second value (in this example, 19
Before the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches the second value (19,000 in this example), a notification (complete function advance notification) may be given to suggest the possibility that the MY value (maximum difference number) will reach the second value (19,000 in this example).

Figure 176 (a) shows an example of advance notification of the complete function.

The complete function advance notification is performed when the MY value (maximum difference number) is the second value (in this example, 19000
), and the complete function advance notification in this example is a notification that includes a display that suggests in advance that play will be stopped (in this example, the display of the string "500 more coins to play").

In this example, the MY value (maximum difference number) is a value smaller than the second value (18500 in this example).
), a complete function advance notification shown in FIG. 176(a) is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157.

According to this example, by notifying the player in advance that the maximum difference number will reach the second value (that the upper limit of the complete function is approaching), it is possible to encourage the player to settle the account in advance.

In addition, the threshold value (second value) for starting the completion upper limit reaching notification is not limited to 19000, and may be another value.
The value is not limited to 8500, and may be any value smaller than the threshold value (second value) for executing the completion upper limit reaching notification.

Also, an example has been given in which a completion upper limit reaching notification is executed when the "MY value" reaches a second value, but a completion upper limit reaching notification may also be executed when the "gain difference", calculated by subtracting the amount of game value used in a game (for example, the number of medals inserted) from the amount of game value awarded as a result of a game (for example, the number of medals paid out), reaches a second value.

In addition, the complete upper limit reaching notification and the complete function advance notification are not limited to being executed in the positive area of the difference in number of sheets, and may be executed in the negative area of the difference in number of sheets.

<Game value display>
The slot machine 100 is equipped with a game value display means (medal display device MD) capable of displaying the winning difference (winning difference in medals) obtained by subtracting the value of the game value used in the game from the value of the game value awarded as a result of the game.

For example, when the complete function advance notification shown in FIG. 176(a) is executed, a display showing the difference in the number of medals acquired (in this example,
When the completion upper limit reaching notification shown in FIG. 176(b) is executed, the game value display means (the medal display device MD) displays the following:
A display showing the difference in the number of medals won (in this example, the number "14000") is displayed.

<Medal display device/game value display upper limit reached notification>
The notification means of the slot machine 100 notifies the player when the winning difference in the number of medals is a third value (in this example, 163
83), a notification (notification of reaching the upper limit of the game value display) is executed to prompt the user to settle the medals.

Figure 176 (d) shows an example of a notification that the game value display upper limit has been reached.

The notification that the game value display upper limit has been reached is a notification that encourages the settlement of medals, and in this example, the notification that the game value display upper limit has been reached is a notification that includes a display suggesting that the difference in the number of medals won has reached a third value (in this example, 16,383) (in this example, displaying the string ``Cannot display any more'') and a display that encourages the settlement of medals (in this example, displaying the string ``Press the counting button'').

In this example, when the difference in the number of medals won reaches a third value (in this example, 16,383), a notification that the game value display upper limit has been reached is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in Figure 176 (d).

<Medal display device/advance notification of reaching upper limit of game value display>
The notification means of the slot machine 100 notifies the player when the winning difference in the number of medals is a third value (in this example, 163
In this example, before the third value (83) is reached, a notification (advance notification of reaching the game value display upper limit) may be made suggesting the possibility that the difference in the number of medals won may reach a third value (16,383 in this example).

Figure 176 (c) shows an example of advance notification of reaching the upper limit of the game value display.

The advance notification of reaching the upper limit of the game value display is performed when the difference in the number of medals won reaches a third value (in this example, 1638
3) is a notification that suggests the possibility of reaching the upper limit of the game value display. In this example, the advance notification of reaching the upper limit of the game value display is as follows:
A display suggesting that the medal winning difference may reach a third value (in this example, 16383) (in this example, the display of the character string "You are approaching the count limit") and a display prompting the player to settle their medals (
In this example, the notification includes the text "Please press the count button."

In this example, the difference in the number of medals won is a value smaller than the third value (in this example, 15369).
When this is reached, an advance notification of reaching the game value display upper limit as shown in FIG. 176 (c) is executed using the liquid crystal display device 157.

According to this example, the player can be prompted to settle their winnings in advance by being notified in advance that the upper limit (third value) of the display of the winning difference by the game value display means will be reached (the upper limit of the display of the game value display means is approaching).

The threshold value (third value) for initiating the notification that the game value display upper limit has been reached is not limited to 16383, and may be another numerical value. The threshold value for initiating the advance notification that the game value display upper limit has been reached is not limited to 15369, and may be any numerical value smaller than the threshold value (third value) for executing the notification that the game value display upper limit has been reached.

In addition, the notification of the game value display upper limit and the advance notification of the game value display upper limit are not limited to being executed in the positive area of the difference number, but may be executed in the negative area of the difference number. In addition, the acquisition difference number is the amount of game value acquired on another gaming machine added to the gaming machine to be played (loaned).
Therefore, when the MY value is added (loaned) to the gaming machine on which the game is being played, the difference in the number of medals won may reach a third value (16,383 in this example) before the MY value (maximum winning difference) reaches the second value (19,000 in this example).

In addition, the notification of the completion upper limit and the notification of the game value display upper limit are not limited to this example.
For example, the MY value (maximum acquisition difference number) reaches a second value (19000 in this example) and
When the medal winning difference reaches the third value (in this example, 16,383), the process shown in FIG.
Alternatively, the notification of reaching the upper limit of both functions shown in (d) may be executed.

In this example, the notification of reaching the upper limit of both functions is a display suggesting the execution of the game stop (in this example, the display of the character string "It is the end. The game will be stopped") and a display suggesting that the medal acquisition difference has reached a third value (in this example, the display of the character string "No more can be displayed").
The notification includes a display prompting the player to settle their medals (in this example, the text "Please press the counting button" is displayed).

<Example 1 of the complete function and game value display>
Next, a specific example 1 of the complete function and game value display will be explained using Figures 177 to 180.

FIG. 177 is a graph showing an example of the change in the difference in number of coins during a certain game period.
8 to 180 are figures showing examples of various presentations and notifications during a certain game period shown in FIG. 177.

<Example 1 of the complete function and game value display/power on>
The timing shown in FIG. 177(1) is the timing when the power is turned on with the setting key provided inside the main body 101 in the ON state, and the setting is changed.

At the same timing, the section and presentation state are set to a non-advantageous section (first section) and normal state, respectively, as the initial settings when the power is turned on, and the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) that counts the difference number of coins (obtained difference number) and the value of the above-mentioned virtual difference number counter (second counting means) are each set to an initial value CT21 (e.g., 0) as the initial settings when the power is turned on.

<Example 1 of the complete function and game value display / game section PT21 (normal state)>
The game period PT21 in Figure 177 (1) to (2) is the normal state of the non-advantageous zone (first zone) or the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), in which the difference in number of coins is decreasing.

In this example, during a certain game of normal play in a non-advantageous zone (first zone), the condition for transition to the advantageous zone (second zone) is met (in this example, the transition lottery is won), and the game transitions from the normal state of the non-advantageous zone (first zone) to the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone).

The game period PT21 (normal state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= payout number - bet number) decreases. In this example, the difference in number of coins decreases from the difference in number of coins CT21 (0 in this example, the first point) to the difference in number of coins C
It decreases to T22 (eg, -1500, second point).

In addition, the game period PT21 (normal state) in Figures 177 (1) to (2) is a state (second state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is lower than the initial value (in this example, 0; a certain value) during the entire game period, and is in the negative area of the difference number.

During the game period PT21 (normal state), as shown in FIG. 178(a), the liquid crystal display device 15
7 is used to execute a normal presentation (such as displaying a normal background) corresponding to the current game state (in this example, the normal state), and the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display a display showing the difference in the number of medals won (in this example, the numbers "00050", which corresponds to 50 medals loaned).

<Specific example 1 of the complete function and game value display / game section PT22 (AT state)>
The game period PT22 in Figure 177 (2) to (3) is in the AT state, and the difference in number of coins is increasing.

The game period PT22 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins increases from difference in number of coins CT22 (e.g., 31; second point) to difference in number of coins CT23 (e.g., 7033; first point).

In addition, in the game period PT22 (AT state) of FIG. 177 (2) to (3), the difference in number of coins is CT22.
The game period from (in this example, -1500) to CT21 (in this example, 0) is
The value of the difference number counter (first counting means) is in a state (second state) where it is decreased from the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value) and is in a negative area of the difference number, whereas the difference number is C
The playing period from T21 (0 in this example) to CT23 (7033 in this example) is a state (first state) in which the value of the difference number counter (first counting means) has increased from the initial value (0 in this example, a certain value), and is in the positive area of the difference number.

During play period PT22 (AT state), in the first play of play period PT22 (AT state), in addition to a freeze effect using reels 110 to 112, as shown in FIG. 178(b), the liquid crystal display device 157 displays an image of the Banchou character and a display (in this example, the text string "Break the limit!") indicating that the player will be granted a favorable advantage (in this example, the player will be able to gain game value until the number of coins moves from the negative difference area (second state) to the positive difference area (first state)).

In addition, in the game period PT22 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT22 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (0 in this example), and the counting of the MY value (maximum difference number) is started, and a display showing the current MY value (maximum difference number) (in this example, "0000GET" indicating that the MY value (maximum difference number) is 0) is displayed as shown in FIG. 178(c).
" and a character string), and the game value display means (the medal display device MD
) to display a display showing the current difference in the number of medals won (in this example, the numbers "00031" are displayed, indicating that the difference in the number of medals won is 31).

In addition, in the game period PT22 (AT state), when the end condition of the AT state is met (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been played), the AT state transitions to the normal state, and in the final game of the game period PT22 (AT state), as shown in FIG. 178(d),
The liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the current MY value (maximum difference) (in this example, the number and character string "7002GET" is displayed, indicating that the MY value (maximum difference) is 7002), and the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current difference in the number of medals acquired (in this example, "07" is displayed, indicating that the difference in the number of medals acquired is 7033).
The number "033" will be displayed.

<Example 1 of the complete function and game value display / game section PT23 (normal state)>
The game period PT23 in Figure 177 (3) to (4) is the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), in which the difference in number of coins is decreasing.

The game period PT23 (normal state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) decreases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins decreases from difference in number of coins CT23 (e.g., 7033; first point) to difference in number of coins CT24 (e.g., 6832; second point).

During the game period PT23 (normal state), although not shown in the figure, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute a normal presentation (such as displaying a normal background) corresponding to the current game state (in this example, the normal state), and the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display a display showing the difference in the number of medals acquired.

<Example 1 of the complete function and game value display / game section PT24 (AT state)>
The game period PT24 in Figure 177 (4) to (5) is in the AT state, and the difference in number of coins is increasing.

The game period PT24 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins increases from difference in number of coins CT24 (e.g., 6832; second point) to difference in number of coins CT25 (e.g., 8882; first point).

During game period PT24 (AT state), in the first game of game period PT22 (AT state), as shown in FIG. 178 (e), AT effects etc. corresponding to the current game state (in this example, the AT state) are executed using the liquid crystal display device 157.

In addition, in the game period PT22 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT22 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (0 in this example), and the counting of the MY value (maximum difference number) is started, and a display showing the current MY value (maximum difference number) (in this example, "0000GET" indicating that the MY value (maximum difference number) is 0) is displayed as shown in FIG. 178(e).
" and a character string), and the game value display means (the medal display device MD
) to display the current medal winning difference (in this example, the medal winning difference is 683
The number "06832" will be displayed, indicating that there are two copies.

In addition, in the game period PT24 (AT state), when the end condition of the AT state is met (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been played), the AT state transitions to the normal state, and in the final game of the game period PT24 (AT state), as shown in FIG. 178(f),
The liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the current MY value (maximum difference) (in this example, the number and character string "2050GET" is displayed, indicating that the MY value (maximum difference) is 2050), and the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current difference in the number of medals acquired (in this example, "08" is displayed, indicating that the difference in the number of medals acquired is 8882).
The number "882" will be displayed.

<Example 1 of the complete function and game value display / game section PT25 (normal state)>
The game period PT25 in Figure 177 (5) to (6) is the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), in which the difference in number of coins is decreasing.

The game period PT25 (normal state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) decreases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins decreases from difference in number of coins CT25 (e.g., 8,882; first point) to difference in number of coins CT26 (e.g., 7,365; second point).

During the game period PT25 (normal state), although not shown in the figure, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute normal presentations (such as displaying a normal background) corresponding to the current game state (in this example, the normal state), and the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display a display showing the difference in the number of medals acquired.

<Example 1 of the complete function and game value display / game section PT26 (AT state)>
The game period PT26 in Figure 177 (6) to (7) is in the AT state, and the difference in number of coins is increasing.

The game period PT26 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins increases from difference in number of coins CT26 (e.g., 7,365; second point) to difference in number of coins CT27 (e.g., 15,706; first point).

During play period PT26 (AT state), in the first play of play period PT26 (AT state), in addition to a freeze effect using reels 110 to 112, as shown in FIG. 179(a), the liquid crystal display device 157 displays an image of the Banchou character and a display (in this example, the text string "Break the limit!") indicating that the player will be granted a favorable advantage (in this example, the player will be able to gain game value until the number of coins moves from the negative difference area (second state) to the positive difference area (first state)).

In addition, in the game period PT26 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT26 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (0 in this example), and the counting of the MY value (maximum difference number) is started, and a display showing the current MY value (maximum difference number) (in this example, "0000GET" indicating that the MY value (maximum difference number) is 0) is displayed as shown in FIG. 179(b).
" and a character string), and the game value display means (the medal display device MD
) to display the current medal winning difference (in this example, the medal winning difference is 736
The number "07365" will be displayed, indicating that there are 5 tickets.

In addition, in the game period PT26 (AT state), when the end condition of the AT state is met (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been played), the AT state transitions to the normal state, and in the final game of the game period PT26 (AT state), as shown in FIG. 179(c),
The liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the current MY value (maximum difference) (in this example, the number and character string "8341 GET" is displayed, indicating that the MY value (maximum difference) is 8341), and the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current difference in the number of medals acquired (in this example, "1" is displayed, indicating that the difference in the number of medals acquired is 15,706).
The number "5706" will be displayed.

<Example 1 of the complete function and game value display / game section PT27 (normal state)>
The game period PT27 in Figure 177 (7) to (8) is the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), in which the difference in number of coins is decreasing.

The game period PT27 (normal state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) decreases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins decreases from difference in number of coins CT27 (e.g., 15,706; first point) to difference in number of coins CT28 (e.g., 15,128; second point).

During game period PT27 (normal state), although not shown in the figure, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute normal presentations (such as displaying a normal background) corresponding to the current game state (in this example, the normal state), and the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display a display showing the difference in the number of medals acquired.

<Example 1 of the complete function and game value display / game section PT28 (AT state)>
The game period PT28 in Figure 177 (8) to (9) is in the AT state, and the difference in number of coins is increasing.

The game period PT28 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= payout amount - bet amount) gradually increases. In this example, the difference in number of coins is the difference in number of coins CT28 (for example, 15128. Second point)
The difference in number of coins increases from CT30 (for example, 19,000, the first point).

During the game period PT28 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT28 (AT state), as shown in FIG. 179 (d), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute AT effects etc. corresponding to the current game state (in this example, the AT state).

In addition, in the game period PT28 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT28 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (0 in this example), and the counting of the MY value (maximum difference number) is started, and a display showing the current MY value (maximum difference number) (in this example, "0000GET" indicating that the MY value (maximum difference number) is 0) is displayed as shown in FIG. 179(d).
" and a character string), and the game value display means (the medal display device MD
) to display the current medal winning difference (in this example, the medal winning difference is 151
The number "15128" indicating that there are 28 pieces will be displayed.

In this example, in the game period PT28 (AT state), in the game prior to the timing shown in FIG. 177(9), the winning difference in the number of medals is a third value (in this example, 16383).
Since the value reaches a certain value (in this example, 16369) smaller than
Using this, advance notification of reaching the game value display upper limit is executed as shown in FIG. 179 (e).

The advance notification of reaching the upper limit of the game value display is performed when the difference in the number of medals won reaches a third value (in this example, 1638
3) is a notification that suggests the possibility of reaching the upper limit of the game value display.
A display suggesting that the medal winning difference may reach a third value (in this example, 16383) (in this example, the display of the character string "You are approaching the count limit") and a display prompting the player to settle their medals (
In this example, the notification includes the display of the character string "Please press the count button."

According to this example, the player can be prompted to settle their winnings in advance by being notified in advance that the upper limit (third value) of the display of the winning difference by the game value display means will be reached (the upper limit of the display of the game value display means is approaching).

Next, in this example, during play at the timing shown in Figure 177 (9) during play period PT28 (AT state), the difference in the number of medals won reaches a third value (in this example, 16,383), and therefore, using the liquid crystal display device 157, a notification that the play value display upper limit has been reached is executed, as shown in Figure 179 (f).

The notification that the game value display upper limit has been reached is a notification that encourages the settlement of medals, and in this example, the notification that the game value display upper limit has been reached is a notification that includes a display suggesting that the difference in the number of medals won has reached a third value (in this example, 16,383) (in this example, displaying the string ``Cannot display any more'') and a display that encourages the settlement of medals (in this example, displaying the string ``Press the counting button'').

Next, in this example, during play period PT28 (AT state) after the timing shown in Figure 177 (9), the settlement button 134 (counting button) is pressed and the medals are settled, and as a result, as shown in Figure 179 (f), the game value display means (medal display device MD) displays a display indicating the current difference in the number of medals won (in this example, the number "10,000" is displayed, indicating that the difference in the number of medals won is 10,000).

Next, in this example, in the game period PT28 (AT state), in the game prior to the timing shown in FIG. 177 (10), the MY value (maximum difference number) becomes the second value (in this example, 190
Since the count value reaches a certain value (18,500 in this example) smaller than the count value (00), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute a complete function advance notification as shown in FIG. 180(b).

The complete function advance notification is performed when the MY value (maximum difference number) is the second value (in this example, 19000
), and the complete function advance notification in this example is a notification that includes a display that suggests in advance that play will be stopped (in this example, the display of the string "500 more coins to play").

According to this example, by notifying the player in advance that the maximum difference number will reach the second value (that the upper limit of the complete function is approaching), it is possible to encourage the player to settle the account in advance.

Next, in this example, during play period PT28 (AT state) at the timing shown in Figure 177 (10), the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches a second value (in this example, 19,000), and so the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute the complete function advance notification shown in Figure 180 (c).

The complete upper limit reaching notification is a notification that suggests that play will be stopped, and in this example, the complete upper limit reaching notification is a notification that includes a display that suggests play will be stopped (in this example, the display of the string "Play has reached its limit. Play will be stopped") and a display that prompts the player to settle their medals (in this example, the display of the string "Press the counting button").

<Example 2 of the complete function and game value display>
Next, a specific example 1 of the complete function and game value display will be explained using Figure 177 and Figures 181 to 182.

181 to 182 are diagrams showing modified examples of various presentations and notifications during a certain game period shown in FIG. 177.

177 to 179, an example was shown in which a complete upper limit reached notification was executed after a game value display upper limit reached notification was executed, but in Specific Example 2, the difference is that a game value display upper limit reached notification is executed after a complete upper limit reached notification is executed. Note that the various effects and notifications during the game periods PT21 to PT25 are the same in Specific Examples 1 and 2, so their explanations are omitted.

<Specific example 2 of the complete function and game value display / game section PT26 (AT state)>
The game period PT26 in Figure 177 (6) to (7) is in the AT state, and the difference in number of coins is increasing.

The game period PT26 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) gradually increases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins increases from difference in number of coins CT26 (e.g., 7,365; second point) to difference in number of coins CT27 (e.g., 15,706; first point).

During play period PT26 (AT state), in the first play of play period PT26 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference) is set to the initial value (0 in this example), counting of the MY value (maximum difference) begins, and as shown in FIG. 181(a), a display is made indicating the current MY value (maximum difference) (in this example, the number and string "0000GET" is displayed indicating that the MY value (maximum difference) is 0), and a display is made using the play value display means (medal display device MD) indicating the current difference in the number of medals acquired (in this example, the number "07365" is displayed indicating that the difference in the number of medals acquired is 7365).

Next, in this example, in a game after the timing shown in FIG. 177(6) during the game period PT26 (AT state), the settlement button 134 (count button) is pressed, and the medals are settled (in this example, 5,000 medals are settled).
As shown in (c) to (c), a game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display a display showing the difference in the number of medals won before settlement (in this example, the number "10165" is displayed, indicating that the difference in the number of medals won is 10,165), and then a display showing the difference in the number of medals won after settlement (in this example, the number "05165" is displayed, indicating that the difference in the number of medals won is 05,165).

In addition, in the game period PT26 (AT state), when the end condition of the AT state is met (in this example, a predetermined number of AT games have been played), the AT state transitions to the normal state, and in the final game of the game period PT26 (AT state), as shown in FIG. 181(d),
The liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the current MY value (maximum difference) (in this example, the number and character string "8341 GET" is displayed, indicating that the MY value (maximum difference) is 8341), and the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display the current difference in the number of medals acquired (in this example, "10706 medals acquired difference" is displayed, indicating that the difference in the number of medals acquired is 10706).
The number "0706" will be displayed.

<Specific example 3 of the complete function and game value display / game section PT27 (normal state)>
The game period PT27 in Figure 177 (7) to (8) is the normal state of the advantageous zone (second zone), in which the difference in number of coins is decreasing.

The game period PT27 (normal state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= number of coins paid out - number of coins bet) decreases, and in this example, the difference in number of coins decreases from difference in number of coins CT27 (e.g., 10,706; first point) to difference in number of coins CT28 (e.g., 10,128; second point).

During game period PT27 (normal state), although not shown in the figure, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute normal presentations (such as displaying a normal background) corresponding to the current game state (in this example, the normal state), and the game value display means (medal display device MD) is used to display a display showing the difference in the number of medals acquired.

<Specific example 2 of the complete function and game value display / game section PT28 (AT state)>
The game period PT28 in Figures 177 (8) to (19) is in the AT state, and the difference in number of coins is increasing.

The game period PT28 (AT state) is a game state in which the difference in number of coins (= payout amount - bet amount) gradually increases. In this example, the difference in number of coins is the difference in number of coins CT28 (for example, 10128. Second point)
The difference in number of coins increases from CT30 (for example, 14,000, the first point).

During the game period PT28 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT28 (AT state), as shown in FIG. 181 (e), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute AT effects etc. corresponding to the current game state (in this example, the AT state).

In addition, in the game period PT28 (AT state), in the first game of the game period PT28 (AT state), the MY value (maximum difference number) is set to the initial value (0 in this example), and the counting of the MY value (maximum difference number) is started, and a display showing the current MY value (maximum difference number) (in this example, "0000GET" indicating that the MY value (maximum difference number) is 0) is displayed as shown in FIG. 181(e).
" and a character string), and the game value display means (the medal display device MD
) to display the current medal winning difference (in this example, the medal winning difference is 101
The number "10128" indicating that there are 28 pieces will be displayed.

Next, in this example, in the game period PT28 (AT state), in the game prior to the timing shown in FIG. 177 (10), the MY value (maximum difference number) becomes the second value (in this example, 190
Since the count value reaches a certain value (18,500 in this example) smaller than the count value (00), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute a complete function advance notification as shown in FIG. 181( f ).

The complete function advance notification is performed when the MY value (maximum difference number) is the second value (in this example, 19000
), and the complete function advance notification in this example is a notification that includes a display that suggests in advance that play will be stopped (in this example, the display of the string "500 more coins to play").

According to this example, by notifying the player in advance that the maximum difference number will reach the second value (that the upper limit of the complete function is approaching), it is possible to encourage the player to settle the account in advance.

Next, in this example, during play period PT28 (AT state) at the timing shown in Figure 177 (10), the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches a second value (in this example, 19,000), and so the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to execute the complete function advance notification shown in Figure 182 (a).

The complete upper limit reached notification is a notification suggesting that gameplay will be stopped, and in this example, the complete upper limit reached notification is a notification that includes a display suggesting that gameplay will be stopped (in this example, the display of the string "You have reached your limit. Gameplay will be stopped"), a display prompting the player to settle medals (in this example, the display of the string "Press the counting button"), and a display showing the current MY value (maximum difference) (in this example, the display of the number and string "3872 GET", indicating that the MY value (maximum difference) is 3872).

According to this example, a notification suggesting that game play should be stopped may be issued before the upper limit (third value) of the display of the winning difference by the game value display means is reached, so that the game can be progressed without causing the player any inconvenience when the upper limit (third value) of the display of the winning difference by the game value display means is reached, thereby sustaining the player's motivation to play.

In addition, after the upper limit value (third value) of the display of the winning difference by the game value display means is reached,
When the maximum difference number reaches the second value (when the upper limit of the complete function is reached), the player will be prompted to settle twice, but when the maximum difference number reaches the second value first (when the upper limit of the complete function is reached), the player will only be prompted to settle once, which may allow the player to enjoy the game without feeling annoyed.

Also, when the player has completed the settlement of at least a part of the winning difference (in this example, FIG. 177
In a certain game during the game period shown in (6), a second value (in this example, 19000)
When the value obtained by subtracting the acquired difference number from the third value (in this example, 16,383) is greater than the value obtained by subtracting the maximum difference number from the third value, the maximum difference number may reach the second value before the acquired difference number reaches the third value. Therefore, by the player diligently settling (counting) the gaming value,
Since the number of game values up to the upper limit (third value) of the display of the difference in the acquired number by the game value display means can be made greater than the number of game values up to the second value (upper limit of the complete function), it may be possible to complete settlement (counting) in one go when a large amount of game value is acquired.

The manner of the completion upper limit reaching notification is not limited to this example. For example,
), even if the MY value (maximum difference number) reaches the second value, the current MY
It is not necessary to display a display showing the value (maximum difference number).

Also, in this example, during the game period PT28 (AT state), the difference in the number of medals won has not reached a certain value (in this example, 15,369) that is smaller than the third value (in this example, 16,383), so unlike the above specific example 1, no advance notification of the game value display upper limit being reached or notification of the game value display upper limit being reached is executed.

<Example of the movement of the movable body in response to notification of reaching the completion upper limit and advance notification of the complete function>
Next, an example of the operation of the movable body accompanying the completion upper limit reaching notification and the completion function advance notification will be described with reference to Figures 183 to 185. In the following description, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations already described in other embodiments, and the description will be omitted. In addition, for configurations that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and reference numerals of this example will take precedence.

Figure 176 and other figures explain a configuration in which a completion upper limit reaching notification and a completion function advance notification are given in relation to the operation of the complete function. Here, in a configuration in which a movable body that can move in front of the performance image display device 157 is provided, the above notifications may be difficult to recognize depending on the position of this movable body. Figure 183 (a) shows an example in which, when these notifications are not being executed, the contents of the performance image display device 157 become difficult to see due to the execution of a performance in which the movable body, the shutter 163, is in a closed state.

In view of the above problems, when these notifications are being executed, the movable body may be arranged in a position that does not block the display area of the performance image display device 157 so that the notification contents are not obscured. In this example, detection pieces 1631a and 1631b are provided for the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b that constitute the shutter 163, respectively, and sensors 1632a and 1632b are further provided to detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b. Then, by moving the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b to a position where the sensors 1632a and 1632b detect them, the shutter 163 is opened and does not block the display area of the performance image display device 157. The position where the sensors 1632a and 1632b detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b is the initial position of the shutter 163. FIG. 183(b) shows that the shutter 163 is in an open state (initial position) while the complete function advance notification is being executed. Also, FIG. 183(c) shows that the shutter 163 is in an open state (initial position) while the complete upper limit reached notification is being executed.

In this example, the shutter 163 is configured such that the position where the sensors 1632a and 1632b detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b is the initial position, and the position information from there is derived based on the drive information. In this configuration, if the shutter 163 is moved by an external force, a deviation occurs between the position information grasped by the control unit and the actual position, so a configuration may be adopted in which a position correction operation is performed to return the shutter 163 to the initial position. For example, when the sensors 1632a and 1632b detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b (open state), the shutter 163 is moved once to a position where the sensors 1632a and 1632b do not detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b, and then moved again from there to the initial position (hereinafter, position correction 1). In addition, when the sensors 1632a and 1632b are not detecting the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b, the shutter 163 is moved to a position where the sensors 1632a and 1632b detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b (hereinafter, position correction 2). Position correction 1 may be performed again after position correction 2. Completion of this series of operations makes it possible to determine that there is no abnormality in the drive system and sensor of the shutter 163, and to correct the position information while moving the shutter 163 to the initial position. The timing for performing position correction is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, when the front door 102 is opened or closed, when the power is turned on, or when the position of the shutter 163 in the initial position shifts and the sensors 1632a and 1632b no longer detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b, as described below.

Here, if a completion upper limit reaching notification or a completion function advance notification is being executed when performing the above position correction 1, the above notification may be difficult to recognize depending on the position of the shutter 163. Therefore, when performing position correction 1, the shutter 163 may be operated within a range of positions that do not block the display area of the performance image display device 157 as much as possible.

In Fig. 184(a) to (c), an example of performing position correction 1 during execution of a complete function advance notification is shown. First, in Fig. 184(a), the shutter 163 is in an open state (initial position) during execution of a complete function advance notification, and the front door 102 is opened from there. At this time, since the position of the shutter 163 may shift due to vibration, position correction is performed when the front door 102 is closed. In Fig. 184(b), a state is shown when position correction 1 is performed because the shutter 163 is in the initial position. In this figure, it is shown that the shutter 163 is in a position where the sensors 1632a and 1632b do not detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b, and that the shutter 163 has moved so as not to block the display area of the performance image display device 157 as much as possible. Then, in Fig. 184(c), it is shown that position correction 1 is completed and the shutter 163 has moved to the initial position. Note that the same operation occurs even if the completion upper limit reaching notification is performed instead of the complete function advance notification.

In Fig. 185 (a) to (c), an example of performing position correction 1 during the execution of the complete upper limit reaching notification is shown. First, in Fig. 185 (a), the shutter 163 is in an open state (initial position) during the execution of the complete upper limit reaching notification, and then a power outage occurs (the setting key is in the OFF state). Before the power is turned on, the position of the shutter 163 may shift due to maintenance work or the like, so position correction is performed when the power is turned on. In Fig. 185 (b), a state is shown when position correction 1 is performed because the shutter 163 is in the initial position. In this figure, the shutter 163 is shown to be in a position where the sensors 1632a and 1632b do not detect the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b, and the shutter 163 is shown to be moving so as not to block the display area of the performance image display device 157 as much as possible. Then, in Fig. 185 (c), position correction 1 is shown to be completed and the shutter 163 is shown to be moving to the initial position. As in the above example, even if a power outage occurs while the complete upper limit reaching notification is being executed, the complete function is not released. However, in the case of a complete function advance notification, when a power outage occurs, the MY counter is cleared, and the complete function advance notification is not executed. In this case, position correction 1 is executed on the normal screen, but since the complete function advance notification is not executed, for example, position correction 1 may be executed to temporarily close the shutter 163.

The examples in Figures 184 and 185 are examples of when position correction 1 is performed, and when position correction 2 is performed (when the sensors 1632a and 1632b are not detecting the detection pieces 1631a and 1631b), the shutter 163 moves to the initial position. The position correction during the execution of these complete upper limit reaching notifications or complete function advance notifications is smaller than the maximum movement of the shutter 163 during normal play. Also, the examples in Figures 184 and 185 are examples of when position correction 1 is performed during the execution of complete upper limit reaching notifications or complete function advance notifications, and position correction 1 when these notifications are not being executed is not limited to the above operations, and may, for example, be an operation in which the shutter 163 is once closed and then opened.

When the above-mentioned performance image display device 157, shutter 163, etc. are used to execute various notifications during play, the above-mentioned complete function advance notification and various notifications may be executed in an overlapping manner. In this case, the operation of the various notifications may be restricted so that the shutter 163 does not operate while stopped at the initial position during execution of the complete function advance notification, or the operation of the various notifications may be made different from normal during execution of the complete function advance notification. In addition, after restricting the operation of the various notifications so that the shutter 163 does not operate while stopped at the initial position during execution of the complete function advance notification, if the value of the MY counter moves away from the upper limit and becomes a value that does not satisfy the execution condition of the complete function advance notification, the restriction on the shutter 163 may be released and various notifications may be executed.

<Processing of the main control unit regarding the complete function>
Next, an example of the process of the main control unit related to the complete function will be described with reference to Figures 186 to 188. In the following description, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations already described in other embodiments, and the description will be omitted. In addition, for configurations that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and reference numerals of this example will take precedence.

First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 186. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit main processing.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is applied. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that receives this start signal is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 186 according to the control program previously stored in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, the main control unit initial setting process is performed. In this main control unit initial setting process, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt prohibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and operation permission and initial values are set in the WDT 314. Details of this process will be described later using FIG. 187.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, a check is made to see if medals have been inserted (by hand or by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132), and if medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insertion command indicating this. If a replay was won in the previous game, a process is performed to insert the same number of medals as the number inserted in the previous game, eliminating the need for the player to insert medals. In addition, a check is made to see if the start lever 135 has been operated after the specified number of medals (2 or 3) have been used, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the number of medals inserted and the valid winning lines are confirmed, and the game begins.

In step S105, various lottery processes are executed, including the internal winning lottery process.

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning role lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In step S109, on the condition that the play interval timer (which is subtracted in the timer update process described below) is 0, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate, and an initial value is set to the play interval timer. When the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate, preparations are made to send a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotation speed and the optical sensors provided on each reel detect and grasp the pattern positions of each reel, the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. The play interval counter ensures the minimum time required for one play (4.1 seconds in this embodiment), reducing the risk of gambling.

In step S111, a reel stop control process is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reel 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137 to 139 is stopped. Specifically, each time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referenced, and the reel 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation is stopped according to the number of reel-in frames set in the stop table. In addition, for the first stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. In addition, for each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S113, a winning determination process is performed. Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed on an activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to send a winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, if a winning combination that entails a payout has been achieved, the number of medals corresponding to that winning combination is awarded (paid out), and the number of medals awarded is displayed using the payout number display 127.

In step S117, a state update process is executed to update various states in the slot machine 100.

In step S119, the complete function activation process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 188.

After that, the process returns to step S103 and the above-mentioned processing is repeated to progress the game.

Next, the details of the main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in the main control unit main process in FIG. 186 will be described with reference to FIG. 187. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in FIG. 186.

First, in step S1001, which is executed first, startup initial settings are performed. In this initial setting, processes such as setting the stack initial value (provisional setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting the interrupt mask, initial setting the I/O 310, and initial setting the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are performed.

In step S1003, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is ON, that is, whether the voltage monitoring circuit 330 outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). If the low voltage signal is ON (if the CPU 304 detects a power interruption), this step S1003 is executed repeatedly, and if the low voltage signal is OFF (if the CPU 304 does not detect a power interruption), the process proceeds to step S1005. Note that even if the predetermined value (9V) has not yet been reached immediately after the power is turned on, step S1003 is executed repeatedly until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value.

In step S1005, it is determined whether the setting key switch 281, which is inside the slot machine 100 and cannot be operated by the player, is on. If the setting key switch 281 is on (the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch and turned 90 degrees to the right), the process proceeds to step S1013; if not, the process proceeds to step S1006.

In step S1006, it is determined whether the complete function is active. If the complete function is active, the process proceeds to step S1011; if not, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether the reset switch 291 (RAM clear switch) is on. If this switch is on, the process proceeds to step S1009; if not, the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1009, RAM 308 is initialized (RAM cleared), and this main control unit initial setting process is terminated. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process to notify the user that initialization has been performed (for example, displaying or outputting a sound indicating that RAM has been cleared or reset) based on receiving a command indicating that this process has been performed.

In step S1011, a RAM (or RWM, RAM) data write-back process is executed. In this process, it is first determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the data stored in RAM 308. The data determined here is data that was saved to RAM 308 when the power to slot machine 100 was turned off or due to a momentary interruption (a voltage drop below the operating voltage). In other words, in step S1011, it is determined whether or not the data has been securely saved to RAM 308. Specifically, it is determined whether the power flag is normal (on) and whether the calculation result using the checksum is normal, and if both determinations are normal, it is determined that there is no abnormality in the restored data in RAM 308.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the recovery data in the RAM 308, a process is executed to restore the state of the register to the state immediately before the power cut process is executed. In this RAM data write-back process, for example, the data stored in the RAM 308 is written back to the register of the CPU 304, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of the power cut is read, and the stack pointer is reset (main setting). In addition, the values of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of the power cut are read, and each register is reset, and then interrupt permission is set. After that, the CPU 304 executes the control program based on the stack pointer and register after resetting, and the slot machine 100 is restored to the state at the time of the power cut. Furthermore, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This power recovery command is a command that indicates that the state at the time of the power cut has been restored. This power recovery command contains information such as the RT at the time of power outage, game status, and presentation status, and is sent by the main control unit timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the recovery data of RAM 308, preparations are made to clear all memory areas of RAM 308 except for the used stack area, and then the system transitions to an infinite loop state (RAM error processing). From this state, it is necessary to turn the power back on with the RAM clear (or RAM clear, RWM clear, RWM initialization) switch or setting key switch turned on. In other words, this embodiment is configured so that the progress of the game is stopped if an error occurs in RAM 308.

In step S1005, if the setting key switch 281 is on, the process proceeds to step S1013, where a setting change process is executed according to the state of the setting key switch 281, and the main control unit initial setting process is terminated. Note that the complete function activation flag is set to off by the RAM clear process (or RAM clear process, RWM clear process, RWM initialization process) executed in this process.

Next, the details of the complete function activation process (step S119) in the main control unit main process in FIG. 186 will be described with reference to FIG. 188. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the complete function activation process (step S119) in FIG. 186.

First, in step S1701, which is executed first, the complete function activation flag is referenced. This complete function activation flag is set to ON when the difference between the maximum and minimum acquired difference numbers (maximum difference number, the so-called MY value) reaches a predetermined value (19,000 in this example). Note that, for example, if a big bonus (a reel device) is installed, the complete function activation flag may not be referenced while the big bonus is in operation, or may be set to ON when the predetermined value is reached and the big bonus is not in operation.

In step S1703, it is determined whether the complete function activation flag is on. If the complete function activation flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1705. If the flag is off, the complete function activation process ends.

In step S1705, a notification of the operation of the complete function is executed. Specifically, a process (including sending a command to the first sub-control unit 400) is executed to issue a notification indicating that play has stopped (a game stop state) using various notification means (e.g., the game information display 126, the payout number display 127, the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps 420).

In step S1707, a process is executed to send a security command including information on the complete function activation flag to the first sub-control unit 400 every 100 ms, and then the process transitions to an infinite loop state.

After step S1707, no new processing is executed, and the game cannot proceed. Meanwhile, the main control unit 300 executes the main control unit timer interrupt process at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment), which transmits the security command set in step S1707, as well as error detection process (e.g., disconnection detection), error notification process, error release switch acceptance process, and error release process. If the security command contains information indicating that the complete function activation flag is on, a complete upper limit reaching notification is executed. Also, if an error is detected, a notification about the error is executed. In this case, the performance image display device 157 may notify the error in an area that does not interfere with the complete upper limit reaching notification, or may execute the complete upper limit reaching notification overlapping the error notification.

The following explains the operation when the complete function is activated, based on the flowchart explained above.

The complete function is a function that sets the time when the above-mentioned winning difference number is the smallest as a reference, and when the winning difference number based on this reference reaches a predetermined value (19,000 in this example), the slot machine 100 is put into a game-stop state. In this embodiment, this function is activated by setting the complete function activation flag to on when this condition is met. Specifically, if the complete function activation flag is set to on at the end of the game, a notification suggesting a game-stop state is executed in the complete function activation process (step S119 in FIG. 186) and the game is stopped (Yes is determined in step S1703 in FIG. 187, and then an infinite loop is entered). Note that while this complete function is activated, processing based on the operation of the count button 171, the lending button 707, and the medal count clear switch 172 inside the game machine can be executed, but processing based on other operation means can also be executed (for example, display of various information (such as a two-dimensional code according to the game progress) by the menu operation button). Also, various processes based on certain operations may not be executed while the complete function is in operation, such as not executing processes to determine whether or not a setting key switch operation for setting confirmation, a bet operation, a lever operation, a settlement operation, or various performance settings (such as setting the volume with a volume adjustment switch) has been performed. In other words, while the complete function is in operation, there may be processes that can be executed by operations, and there may also be processes that are not executed even if an operation is performed.

When the complete function is not in operation (including when a complete function advance notification is in progress), the RAM can be cleared (or the RAM can be cleared, the RWM can be cleared, or the RWM can be initialized) by turning the power back on while holding down the reset switch 291 (step S1009 in FIG. 187). For example, the front door 102 can be opened and the setting key turned on to switch to the setting value confirmation mode. However, once the complete function operation flag is set to on, the MY value is cleared when the power is turned back on while holding down the reset switch 291, but the complete function operation flag is not cleared. When this complete function operation flag is on, even if the power is turned back on while holding down the reset switch 291, the operation is stopped again, and the state in which the complete function is in operation is not resolved (Yes is determined in step S1006 in FIG. 187). Furthermore, while the complete function is in operation, even if the power to the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 is turned on again, the complete upper limit reaching notification is executed as long as a security command including information that the complete function activation flag is set to on is sent from the main control unit 300. On the other hand, when a setting change operation is performed (power is turned on with the setting key switch 218 turned on), the setting change process (transition to setting change mode) is executed, the complete function activation flag is set to off, and the stalled state is released.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1 shown in FIG.
00, pachinko machines, sealed gaming machines, medal-less slot machines) may be equipped with a counting means (e.g.,
a difference number counter), an informing means (e.g., the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. 3, various lamps), and a game value display means (e.g., a medal display device MD shown in FIG. 181) capable of displaying the amount of game value (e.g., game medals, game balls, virtual credits, virtual medals), wherein the counting means is a means capable of counting an acquired difference number obtained by subtracting the amount of the game value used in a game (e.g., the value of the number of medals inserted) from the amount of the game value awarded as a result of a game, and when the value of the counting means reaches a first value (e.g., 2400), a game state advantageous to the player (hereinafter referred to as a "predetermined game state") ends, and the informing means notifies the player when the difference between the maximum value of the acquired difference number and the minimum value of the acquired difference number (hereinafter referred to as a "maximum difference number", e.g., the MY value) reaches a second value (e.g., 190
176(b)) indicating that play should be stopped when the maximum difference number of the game is reached (for example, a completion upper limit reaching notification as shown in FIG. 176(b)), the game value display means is a means capable of displaying the acquired difference number up to a third value (for example, 16,383), and there is a case (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") where the maximum difference number of the game is reached before the acquired difference number reaches the third value.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine, an enclosed gaming machine, a medalless slot machine) includes a counting means (for example, a difference number counter) and an informing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 272 shown in FIG. 3,
277, various lamps) and a game value display means (for example, a medal display device MD shown in FIG. 181) capable of displaying the amount of game value (for example, game medals, game balls, virtual credits, virtual medals), and a stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137-1
39) and a second section (e.g., advantageous section) capable of informing of an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means, and when a transition condition is satisfied in the first section (e.g., when a transition lottery to a beneficial section is executed based on an internally won role and the lottery is won), the second section is transitioned to, and when an end condition is satisfied in the second section (e.g., when a predetermined net increase in number of coins (e.g., 2,400 coins) is exceeded), the second section is terminated and a transition to the first section is possible, and the counting means calculates a value based on the amount of the game value awarded as a result of a game. The game value display means is a means for counting an acquired difference obtained by subtracting the amount of the game value used in the game (for example, the value of the number of medals inserted) from the acquired difference, and when the value of the counting means reaches a first value (for example, 2400), the termination condition is established, and when the difference between the maximum value of the acquired difference and the minimum value of the acquired difference (hereinafter referred to as the "maximum difference"; for example, the MY value) reaches a second value (for example, 19000), the notification means may execute a notification suggesting the execution of a game stop (for example, a completion upper limit reaching notification as shown in FIG. 176(b)).
3), and there is a case (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") where the maximum difference number reaches the second value before the acquired difference number reaches the third value.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, the upper limit value (
Since a notification suggesting that game play should be stopped may be given before the upper limit (third value) of the display of the winning difference by the game value display means is reached, the game can be progressed without causing the player annoyance when the upper limit (third value) of the display of the winning difference by the game value display means is reached, and the player's motivation to play can be maintained.

In addition, when the value of the counting means reaches the first value, the value of the counting means is set to an initial value (e.g., 0) in connection with the end of the specified game state, and when the maximum difference number reaches the second value, the game is stopped and the notification means executes a notification (e.g., a complete function advance notification shown in FIG. 176(a)) prompting the player to settle the game value (e.g., payout using a settlement button, returning credits to one's own card, chips, etc.), and when the acquired difference number reaches the third value, the notification means may execute a notification (e.g., a game value display upper limit reaching notification shown in FIG. 176(d)) prompting the player to settle the game value.

If the maximum difference number reaches the second value (the upper limit of the complete function has been reached) after the upper limit (third value) of the display of the acquired difference number by the game value display means has been reached, the player will be prompted to settle twice, but if the maximum difference number reaches the second value first (the upper limit of the complete function has been reached), the player will only be prompted to settle once, which may allow the player to enjoy the game without feeling annoyed.

In addition, the first case may occur when, at the time when the player has completed settling at least a portion of the acquired difference, the value obtained by subtracting the acquired difference from the third value is greater than the value obtained by subtracting the maximum difference from the second value.

With this configuration, if the player frequently settles (counts) the game value, the number of game values up to the upper limit (third value) of the display of the acquired difference by the game value display means can be made greater than the number of game values up to the second value (the upper limit of the complete function), so that if a large amount of game value is acquired, it may be possible to complete the settlement (counting) in one go.

In addition, the notification means may execute a notification (for example, a complete function advance notification shown in FIG. 176 (a)) suggesting the possibility that the maximum difference number will reach the second value before the maximum difference number reaches the second value.

With this configuration, the player can be notified in advance that the maximum difference number will reach the second value (that the upper limit of the complete function is approaching), thereby urging the player to settle their account in advance.

In addition, the notification means may execute a notification suggesting the possibility that the acquisition difference will reach the third value before the acquisition difference reaches the third value (for example, an advance notification of reaching the game value display upper limit as shown in FIG. 176 (c)).

With this configuration, by notifying the player in advance that the upper limit (third value) of the display of the winning difference by the game value display means will be reached (the upper limit of the display of the game value display means is approaching),
The player can be encouraged to settle the bill in advance.

Also, in the above explanation,
A counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300) for updating a count value (e.g., a MY value) relating to a game value from an initial value;
Notification means (for example, the game information display 126, the payout number display 127, the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
A movable body (e.g., a shutter 163),
A gaming machine equipped with
The game is stopped when the count value reaches a first value (e.g., 19,000) (e.g., Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188).
The notification means is a means for executing a first notification (e.g., a notification that a complete upper limit has been reached) that notifies the game stop state based on the count value reaching the first value (e.g., step S1705 in FIG. 188),
The movable body may be moved to an initial position based on the count value reaching the first value (for example, FIG. 183(c)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this type of gaming machine, the movement of the movable body may allow the player to know that play has stopped.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the game stop state, the movable body may execute a predetermined operation including an operation of moving in a direction away from the initial position (for example, FIG. 184, FIG. 185).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, even if the movable body moves due to external factors such as vibrations applied to the gaming machine, the movable body can be moved to its initial position, allowing the player to understand that play is stopped.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A detection means for detecting the detection piece of the movable body is provided,
The predetermined operation is an operation in which the detection piece moves in a direction away from the detection means and then moves in a direction toward the detection means (for example, FIGS. 184 and 185).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, even if the movable body moves due to external factors such as vibrations applied to the gaming machine, the movable body can be moved to its initial position, allowing the player to understand that play has stopped.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102) is provided,
The movable body is provided on the door body (for example, FIG. 184).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, even if the movable body moves due to vibrations caused when the door is opened and closed, the movable body can be moved to its initial position, allowing the player to understand that play is stopped.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means includes a display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157),
the display means is means capable of executing the first notification by using a display,
When the predetermined operation is performed from the initial position, the movable body does not overlap with a display area of the first notification on the display means (e.g., FIG. 184 and FIG. 185 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the movable body and the first alarm do not overlap, so the player can be sure that play has stopped.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the power is cut off during the game stop state and then restored, the game stop state is maintained,
When power is restored, the predetermined operation is executed (for example, FIG. 185).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows players to be sure that gaming has stopped even when the power is turned on.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing a second notification (e.g., a complete function advance notification) that notifies in advance that the game will be stopped based on the fact that the count value has reached a second value (e.g., 18,500) that is closer to the initial value than the first value,
The movable body may move to the initial position based on the count value reaching the second value (for example, FIG. 183(b)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, the movement of the moving body allows the player to know that the game is about to stop.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means capable of executing a third notification (e.g., various notifications) during operation of the movable body,
The notification means is a means capable of executing the third notification while the second notification is being executed and the movable body is located at the initial position (for example, see the description that "the complete function advance notification and various notifications may be executed in an overlapping manner").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, the player can be made aware that the game is approaching a stop state through a third notification that does not involve the movement of a moving body.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the count value reaches the second value and then a third value closer to the initial value than the second value, and the third notification is being executed, the movable body moves from the initial position to a position corresponding to the third notification (for example, see the description that "when the value reaches a value that does not satisfy the execution condition of the complete function advance notification, the restriction on the shutter 163 may be released and various notifications may be executed").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, the player can know that the game stop state is approaching through the movement of the movable body and the third notification.

Also, in the above explanation,
A counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300) for updating a count value (e.g., a MY value) relating to a game value from an initial value;
Notification means (for example, the game information display 126, the payout number display 127, the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
A first operating means (e.g., a reset button);
A gaming machine equipped with
The non-game stop state is changed to the game stop state based on the fact that the count value has reached a first value (e.g., 19000) (e.g., Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188),
The notification means is a means for executing a first notification (e.g., a notification that a complete upper limit has been reached) that notifies the game stop state based on the count value reaching the first value (e.g., step S1705 in FIG. 188),
When the power is turned off in the non-playing state and the power is turned on in a state in which the first operating means is operated, a first process (for example, step S1009 in FIG. 187) is executed,
When the power is turned off in the game stop state and the power is turned on in a state in which the first operating means is operated, the first process is not executed (for example, Yes in step S1006 of FIG. 187, step S1009 is not executed),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows the player to know that gaming has stopped by not executing the first process.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first operating means is a RAM clear switch,
The first process is a RAM clear process.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine does not clear the RAM, which prevents the game suspension state from being released by anyone other than the administrator.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the power is turned off in the non-playing state and the power is turned on while the first operating means is being operated, the notification means executes a second notification (for example, a display or a voice output of "Reset has been performed");
When the power is cut off in the game stop state and the power is turned on in a state where the first operating means is operated, the second notification is not executed (for example, Yes in step S1006 of FIG. 187, step S1009 is not executed).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, the second notification is not executed, allowing the player to understand that gaming has stopped.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a second operating means (e.g., a setting key switch) that cannot be operated by a player;
When the power is turned off in the non-playing state and the power is turned on in a state in which the second operating means is operated, a second process (for example, step S1013 in FIG. 187) is executed,
When the power is turned off in the game stop state and the power is turned on in a state in which the second operation means is operated, the second process is executed.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine accepts the second operation by an arcade attendant even when play is stopped, improving the maintainability of the gaming machine.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing a third notification (e.g., a complete function advance notification) that notifies in advance that the game will be stopped based on the fact that the count value has reached a second value (e.g., 18,500) that is closer to the initial value than the first value,
When the power is cut off during the execution of the third notification and the power is turned on while the first operating means is being operated, the first process is executed (for example, No in step S1006 of FIG. 187, Yes in step S1007, and step S1009 is executed).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine accepts operation of the first operating means during the third notification, improving the maintainability of the gaming machine.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Equipped with a movable body (e.g., a shutter 163),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300) for updating a count value (e.g., a MY value) relating to a game value from an initial value;
Notification means (for example, the game information display 126, the payout number display 127, the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
A first operating means (e.g., a setting key, a volume control switch);
A gaming machine equipped with
The non-game stop state is changed to the game stop state based on the fact that the count value has reached a first value (e.g., 19000) (e.g., Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188),
The notification means is a means for executing a first notification (e.g., a notification that a complete upper limit has been reached) that notifies the game stop state based on the count value reaching the first value (e.g., step S1705 in FIG. 188),
When the first operation means is operated in the non-game stop state, a first process (for example, display of a setting value by operating a setting key switch (setting value confirmation mode), various performance settings, etc.) is executed,
When the first operating means is operated in the game stop state, the first process is not executed (for example, see the description that "various processes based on some operations may not be executed while the complete function is operating").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, the first process is not executed, allowing the player to be sure that gaming has stopped.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A display means (e.g., a setting value display device) is provided,
The first process is a process of executing a first display on the display means.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, the first display is not executed, allowing the player to know with certainty that gaming has stopped.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation means (e.g., a count button 171, a lending button 707, a menu operation button) that can be operated by a player is provided,
When the second operation means is operated in the non-game stop state, a second process (e.g., a counting process, etc.) is executed,
When the second operation means is operated in the game stop state, the second process (for example, see the description "during the operation of the complete function, there may be a process that can be executed by the operation") is executed.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine will accept a second operation from the player even when play has stopped, so it may be possible to deal with the situation without calling a store attendant.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second display means (e.g., a medal count display device 170, a performance image display device 157) is provided,
The second display means is a means for executing a second display (for example, a display by operating the counting button 171 or the lending button 707) when the second operation means is operated in the game stop state.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, during the first notification, the second display can be executed while the first notification is being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing a second notification (e.g., a complete function advance notification) that notifies in advance that the game will be stopped based on the fact that the count value has reached a second value (e.g., 18,500) that is closer to the initial value than the first value,
When the first operating means is operated during the execution of the second notification, the first process is executed.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine accepts operation of the first operating means during the second notification, improving the maintainability of the gaming machine.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Equipped with a movable body (e.g., a shutter 163),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A main control means (e.g., a main control unit 300);
A sub-control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that controls a notification means (e.g., a performance image display device 157);
A counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300) for updating a count value (e.g., a MY value) relating to a game value from an initial value;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game is stopped based on the fact that the count value has reached a first value (e.g., 19000) (e.g., Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188),
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a first command (e.g., a security command) including information indicating whether or not the game is stopped to the sub-control means,
The sub-control means is a means for causing the notification means to execute a first notification (for example, a complete upper limit reaching notification) for notifying the game stop state based on the information of the received first command.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

On this gaming machine, the first notification is issued to let the player know that play has stopped.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the game stop state, the first notification is executed even if only the sub-control means is turned off and power is restored (for example, see the description "Even if the power of the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 is turned on again, the completion upper limit reaching notification is executed").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, even if the secondary control means is cut off, the first notification is issued after power is restored, allowing the player to know that gaming has stopped.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first notification is executed based on the information of the first command regardless of the value of the count value (for example, when the complete function is activated, even if the MY value is cleared by turning the power off and on again, the complete function activation flag remains on, and the complete upper limit reached notification is executed again).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, even if the value of the counting means is cleared, the first notification is issued, allowing the player to know that gaming has stopped.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The main control means is a means capable of executing error-related processing (e.g., error detection processing) even in the game stop state,
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can handle errors even when play is stopped.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing a second notification (e.g., a complete function advance notification) that notifies in advance that the game will be stopped based on the fact that the count value has reached a second value (e.g., 18,500) that is closer to the initial value than the first value.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Equipped with a movable body (e.g., a shutter 163),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

<Operation when the harness connection status changes>
Next, an example of operation when the connection state of the harness changes will be described with reference to Figures 189 to 195. In the following description, the configurations already described in other embodiments (e.g., Figures 66 to 167) will not be described. In addition, for configurations that contradict the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and symbols in this example will take precedence.

Various boards are placed inside a gaming machine, but because space is limited, multiple boards and each operation unit are appropriately connected by harnesses. Figure 189 shows an example of the connections of boards inside a gaming machine. For example, main control board 300B, which is provided with main control unit 300, is connected to relay board RB1 by harness HB1, and this relay board RB1 is further connected to lever unit 135U (equipped with start lever 135), stop button unit 136U (equipped with stop buttons 137-139), bet button unit 132U (equipped with bet buttons 130, 132, and settlement button 134) by harnesses HA1-HA5.

Using such harnesses allows for efficient placement of boards and components in a limited space, but it also creates another problem: poor connections in the harness. Checking for such poor connections requires a considerable amount of work.

In light of this, by having some kind of action occur depending on the connection status of the harness, the presence or absence of this action can make it easier to check the connection status. Below, these examples of action are explained using the drawings. Note that each example of action can be used in combination as long as there is no contradiction.

[Example of operation when the harness is properly connected]
Fig. 190(a) is a diagram showing the flow of operations when the harness is connected normally. In this figure, the operations are performed in the following order: bet operation, lever operation, left stop operation, center stop operation, and right stop operation. In Fig. 190(a), the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor also detects the closed state.

First, when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start playing is placed. This stage is before the game starts by lever operation (reels are stopped), the normal background is displayed on the performance image display device 157, normal background music is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in their normal light-emitting state. In addition, the lever monitor LED provided on the main control board 300B is in the first state (lighted or unlit, a state different from the second state described below). This lever monitor LED is in the second state when the start lever 135 is pressed down, and is provided to check the state of the start lever 135. The lever monitor LED is not limited to being provided on the main control board 300B, and may be provided on the relay board RB1.

Next, when the start lever 135 is operated and changes from a non-pressed state to a pressed state, a signal of this change is received and the game begins (the reels start spinning). At this time, the effect image display device 157 starts a first display (for example, an operation instruction display (push order navigation, aim for XX), a small win suggestion display, a preview display, etc.), the speakers 272, 277 start outputting a first sound (effect corresponding to the first display), and the various lamps 420 go into a first light emission state (effect corresponding to the first display). In addition, the lever monitor LED goes into a second state (lit or unlit, a state different from the first state).

Next, when a left stop operation is performed as the first stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission state. In addition, the lever monitor LED is in the first state.

Next, when a middle stop operation is performed as a second stop operation, the corresponding reel is stopped. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission state. In addition, the lever monitor LED is in the first state.

Finally, when the right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, all the reels come to a stop. At this time, the effect image display device 157 displays a second display (stop result display (stopped minor winnings display, XX coins got display, XX bonus display, updated display (number of credits, number of games, number of ATs remaining)), etc.), a second sound (effect corresponding to the second display) is output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 are in a second light emission state (effect corresponding to the second display). Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first state.

[Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to Fig. 190(b). The gaming machine in this example is configured such that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In Figure 190(b), after the bet operation, the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged, and then the left stop operation, center stop operation, and right stop operation are performed in that order. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with those explained in Figure 190(a) will be omitted. In this Figure 190(b), the front door 102 is in an open state to check the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in Figure 189 is installed in a position that can be seen inside the gaming machine with the door in this open state.

First, when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start playing is placed. This stage is before the game starts by operating the lever (reels are stopped), and the normal background is displayed on the performance image display device 157, normal background music is output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 are in their normal light emission state. Also, the lever monitor LED is in its first state.

Next, when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected while the start lever 135 is not pressed, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 changes from a not pressed state to a pressed state, which starts the game (the reels start spinning). At this time, the first display begins on the performance image display device 157, the first sound begins to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 enter a first light emission state. Additionally, the lever monitor LED enters a second state.

Next, when the left stop operation is performed as the first stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop state. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode. In addition, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode because it is in the same state as when the start lever 135 is pressed down due to the lever unit harness HA1 being unplugged.

Next, when a middle stop operation is performed as a second stop operation, the corresponding reel is stopped. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode. In addition, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode because it is in the same state as when the start lever 135 is pressed down due to the lever unit harness HA1 being unplugged.

Finally, when the right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, all the reels come to a stop. At this time, the second display is displayed on the performance image display device 157, a second sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in a second light emission state. In addition, the lever monitor LED remains in the second state because the lever unit harness HA1 has been unplugged, which is the same state as when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In the above example, if a fault such as a poor connection occurs in the lever unit harness HA1, game play may begin even if the start lever 135 is not operated, which may make it easier to notice the fault. Also, the state of the lever monitor LED may change to the second mode even if the start lever 135 is not operated, which may make it easier to notice the fault.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the above-mentioned start lever 135, and can also be applied to other devices, such as when the harness HC2 connected to the chance button unit 190U in FIG. 189 is unplugged while the chance button 190 is not being operated, a process corresponding to pressing the chance button 190 is executed. In this case, the description of the lever monitor LED can be interpreted as a monitor for monitoring this other device.

In the above configuration, the action taken when the harness connected to the operation unit becomes disconnected is the start of reel rotation. However, for example, the action taken when the harness connected to the operation unit becomes disconnected may be an action executed during play. Furthermore, if the action taken when the harness connected to the operation unit becomes disconnected is an action that can be seen inside the gaming machine with the door open, the burden of maintenance work may be reduced. Furthermore, such an action may be executed by a process different from error processing. In this case, operation check can be performed without using error processing.

[Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (2)]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to Fig. 190(c). The gaming machine in this example is configured so that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that when the start lever 135 is pressed down. Furthermore, the main control unit 300 is configured not to accept a stop operation while it is receiving a signal indicating that the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In Figure 190(c), after the bet operation, the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged, and then the left stop operation, center stop operation, and right stop operation are performed in that order. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with those explained in Figure 190(a) will be omitted. In this Figure 190(c), the front door 102 is in the open state to check the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in Figure 189 is installed in a position that can be seen inside the gaming machine with the door in the open state.

First, when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start playing is placed. This stage is before the game starts by operating the lever (reels are stopped), and the normal background is displayed on the performance image display device 157, normal background music is output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 are in their normal light emission state. Also, the lever monitor LED is in its first state.

Next, when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected while the start lever 135 is not pressed, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 changes from a not pressed state to a pressed state, which starts the game (the reels start spinning). At this time, the first display begins on the performance image display device 157, the first sound begins to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 enter a first light emission state. Additionally, the lever monitor LED enters a second state.

Next, the stop operations are performed in the order of left stop operation, center stop operation, and right stop operation, but as long as a signal is received that the start lever 135 is being pressed due to the lever unit harness HA1 being unplugged, the stop operation is not accepted and the corresponding reel remains in a spinning state. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode. In addition, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode because the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged and is in the same state as when the start lever 135 is pressed.

In the above example, if a fault such as a poor connection occurs in the lever unit harness HA1, the fault may be easily noticed because play may start even if the start lever 135 is not operated, or the player may be unable to stop play thereafter. In addition, the state of the lever monitor LED may also change to the second mode even if the start lever 135 is not operated, making the fault easily noticeable.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the above-mentioned start lever 135, and can also be applied to other devices, such as when the harness HC2 connected to the chance button unit 190U in FIG. 189 is unplugged while the chance button 190 is not being operated, a process corresponding to pressing the chance button 190 is executed. In this case, the description of the lever monitor LED can be interpreted as a monitor for monitoring this other device.

In the above configuration, the action taken when the harness connected to the operation unit becomes disconnected is the start of reel rotation. However, for example, the action taken when the harness connected to the operation unit becomes disconnected may be an action executed during play. Furthermore, if the action taken when the harness connected to the operation unit becomes disconnected is an action that can be seen inside the gaming machine with the door open, the burden of maintenance work may be reduced. Furthermore, such an action may be executed by a process different from error processing. In this case, operation check can be performed without using error processing.

[Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (3)]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to Fig. 191(a). The gaming machine in this example is configured such that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In Figure 191(a), the start lever 135 is pressed, a bet is placed in that state, and then the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with those explained in Figure 190(a) will be omitted. In Figure 191(a), the front door 102 is in the open state to check the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in Figure 189 is installed in a position that can be seen inside the gaming machine with the door in the open state.

First, when the lever is pressed, the number of bets required to start playing has not yet been made, so the game has not yet started (reels are stopped), the performance image display device 157 displays the normal background, normal background music is output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 are in their normal light-emitting state. In addition, the lever monitor LED is in the second state because the start lever 135 is pressed.

Next, when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start playing is placed. At this time, the start lever 135 remains pressed, so the main control unit 300 does not receive a signal indicating that the start lever 135 has changed from a non-pressed state to a pressed state. Therefore, the state before playing begins (reels stopped state) continues. Also, the lever monitor LED remains in the second state because the start lever 135 is pressed.

Next, when the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged, the main control unit 300 continues to receive the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed down. Therefore, the main control unit 300 does not receive a signal indicating that the start lever 135 has changed from a non-pressed state to a pressed state. Therefore, the state before the start of play (reels stopped state) continues. Also, the lever monitor LED remains in the second state because the start lever 135 is pressed down.

[Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (4)]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to Fig. 191(b). The gaming machine in this example is configured such that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In Figure 191(b), after placing a bet, the left stop button is pressed, the lever is pressed again, and then the left stop button is released, and finally the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with those explained in Figure 190(a) will be omitted. In Figure 191(b), the front door 102 is in the open state to check the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in Figure 189 is installed in a position that can be seen inside the gaming machine when the door is in the open state.

First, when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start playing is placed. This stage is before the game starts by operating the lever (reels are stopped), and the normal background is displayed on the performance image display device 157, normal background music is output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 are in their normal light emission state. Also, the lever monitor LED is in its first state.

Next, the left stop button is pressed, but since the game has not yet started, the game continues in the pre-start state (reels stopped).

Then, the start lever 135 is operated, changing from a non-pressed state to a pressed state, and the main control unit 300 receives a signal of this change. However, in this example, because a signal that the left stop button is pressed (operated) is also received, the game does not start (the reels start spinning) and the state before the game starts (the reels are stopped) continues. Note that the lever monitor LED is in the second state because the start lever 135 is pressed.

Then, the left stop button is released. At this time, the number of bets required to start playing has been placed, but the start lever 135 remains pressed, so the main control unit 300 does not receive a signal indicating that the start lever 135 has changed from a released state to a pressed state. Therefore, the state before playing begins (reels stopped state) continues. Also, the lever monitor LED remains in the second state because the start lever 135 is pressed.

Next, when the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged, the main control unit 300 continues to receive the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed down. Therefore, the main control unit 300 does not receive a signal indicating that the start lever 135 has changed from a non-pressed state to a pressed state. Therefore, the state before the start of play (reels stopped state) continues. Also, the lever monitor LED remains in the second state because the start lever 135 is pressed down.

[Example of operation when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected (1)]
An example of the operation when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to Fig. 192(a). The gaming machine in this example is configured so that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

Figure 192(a) explains the operation before and after the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is unplugged. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with the contents explained in Figure 190(a) will be omitted. Note that in Figure 192(a), the front door 102 is in an open state to check the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in Figure 189 is installed in a position that can be seen inside the gaming machine with the door in this open state.

First, before the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is unplugged, the number of bets required to start playing has been placed, and the game has not yet started by operating the lever (the reels are stopped), the performance image display device 157 displays the normal background, normal background music is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in the normal light emission mode. Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Next, when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is unplugged, the main control unit 300 detects this connection abnormality. At this time, the performance image display device 157 starts a third display (error display (board connection error display)), the speakers 272 and 277 start outputting a third sound (performance corresponding to the third display), and the various lamps 420 go into a third light emission state (performance corresponding to the third display). In addition, the lever monitor LED goes into the second state, the same as when the harness HA1 of the lever unit 135U is unplugged.

In the above example, the operation when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected is described. However, for example, when the harness HD1 connecting the sub-control board 400B and the relay board RB4 is disconnected, the performance image display device 157 may start a third display (error display (board connection error display)), the speakers 272 and 277 may start outputting a third sound (performance corresponding to the third display), and the various lamps 420 may be in a third light emission state (performance corresponding to the third display). Also, for example, if a monitor LED is provided for monitoring the operation of the chance button 190 or menu button, the same state as when the harness HC1 or harness HC2 is disconnected may be displayed.

[Example of operation when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected (2)]
An example of the operation when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to Fig. 192(b). The gaming machine in this example is configured so that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In Figure 192(b), after a bet operation, the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged, and then the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is unplugged. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with the contents explained in Figure 190(a) will be omitted. Note that in Figure 192(a), the front door 102 is in the open state to check the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in Figure 189 is installed in a position that can be seen inside the gaming machine when the door is in the open state.

First, when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start playing is placed. This stage is before the game starts by operating the lever (reels are stopped), and the normal background is displayed on the performance image display device 157, normal background music is output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 are in their normal light emission state. Also, the lever monitor LED is in its first state.

Next, when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected while the start lever 135 is not pressed, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 changes from a not pressed state to a pressed state, which starts the game (the reels start spinning). At this time, the first display begins on the performance image display device 157, the first sound begins to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 enter a first light emission state. Additionally, the lever monitor LED enters a second state.

Next, when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300 and the relay board RB1 is unplugged, the main control unit 300 detects this connection abnormality. At this time, the performance image display device 157 starts a third display (error display (board connection error display)), the speakers 272 and 277 start outputting a third sound (performance corresponding to the third display), and the various lamps 420 go into a third light emission state (performance corresponding to the third display). In addition, the lever monitor LED goes into the second state, the same as when the harness HA1 of the lever unit 135U is unplugged.

In the above example, the operation when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected is described. However, for example, when the harness HD1 connecting the sub-control board 400B and the relay board RB4 is disconnected, the performance image display device 157 may start a third display (error display (board connection error display)), the speakers 272 and 277 may start outputting a third sound (performance corresponding to the third display), and the various lamps 420 may be in a third light emission state (performance corresponding to the third display). Also, for example, if a monitor LED is provided for monitoring the operation of the chance button 190 or menu button, the same state as when the harness HC1 or harness HC2 is disconnected may be displayed.

[Example of behavior when multiple harnesses are disconnected]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1, the stop button unit harness HA2, and the bet button unit harness HA3 are each disconnected will be described below with reference to Fig. 193(a). The gaming machine in this example is configured so that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In FIG. 193(a), the following operations are performed in the order of a menu display (a screen for customizing the performance settings): unplugging the bet button unit harness HA3, pressing the bet button 132, connecting the bet button unit harness HA3, unplugging the lever unit harness HA1, unplugging the stop button unit harness HA2, pressing all stop buttons 137 to 139, connecting the stop button unit harness HA2, unplugging the stop button unit harness HA2, connecting the stop button unit harness HA2, unplugging the stop button unit harness HA2, and connecting the stop button unit harness HA2. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with those described in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 193(a), the front door 102 is in an open state to check the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor also detects the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided in a position that can be seen inside the gaming machine with the door open.

First, the initial state is when the effect settings are being customized (before the game starts), the effect image display device 157 is displaying a menu, the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting menu background music, and the various lamps 420 are in a menu illumination mode.

Then, the bet button unit harness HA3 is disconnected, but this does not cause any change in state. Furthermore, if the bet button unit harness HA3 is connected while the bet button 132 is kept pressed, operation of the bet button 132 becomes effective, and the number of bets required to start playing is placed. Operation of the bet button 132 also cancels the menu display, etc., the normal background is displayed on the performance image display device 157, normal background music is output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 go into their normal illumination mode.

Next, when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected while the start lever 135 is not pressed, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 changes from a not pressed state to a pressed state, thereby starting the game (the reels start spinning). At this time, the first display begins on the performance image display device 157, the first sound begins to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 enter a first light emission mode.

Next, the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected, but this does not cause any change in state. Next, the stop button unit harness HA2 is connected while all stop buttons 137-139 are kept pressed. In this case, one of the pressed stop buttons 137-139 that can perform a valid stop operation (at this stage, all stop buttons 137-139) is accepted according to priority. In this example, the priority order is left, middle, right, and operation of the left stop button 137 is valid as the first stop operation, and the corresponding reel is stopped. Note that the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to emit a first light. Note that, here, multiple stop buttons 137-139 are pressed when connecting the stop button unit harness HA2. If only one stop button capable of performing a valid stop operation is pressed, the operation of that stop button is accepted, but if none of the stop buttons are pressed, no operation is performed.

Next, with all the stop buttons 137-139 still pressed, the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected and then reconnected. In this case as well, the operation of the middle stop button 138, which is one of the pressed stop buttons 137-139 that can be used to perform a valid stop operation (at this stage, the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139), is accepted, and the corresponding reel comes to a stop. Note that the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to emit the first light.

Next, with all stop buttons 137-139 still pressed, the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected and then reconnected. In this case as well, the operation of the right stop button 139, which is one of the pressed stop buttons 137-139 that can be used to perform a valid stop operation (only the right stop button 139 at this stage), is accepted, and the corresponding reel is stopped. With all reels now stopped, a second display is displayed on the performance image display device 157, a second sound is output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 are in a second light emission state.

Note that if the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected and then reconnected while all stop buttons 137-139 are pressed, and there is an out-of-step reel, the stop button corresponding to that reel will not be treated as capable of valid stop operation. Figure 193(b) shows an example of operation when the left reel 110 is out of step when the stop button unit harness HA2 disconnected in Figure 193(a) is first connected. In this case, of the stop buttons 137-139, the ones capable of valid stop operation are the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139, and it shows that operation of one of these, the middle stop button 138, is accepted and the corresponding reel is placed in a stopped state.

In the above example, for example, when replacing the stop button unit 136U, by connecting the stop button unit harness HA2 while holding down the stop button, it is possible to check whether the replaced stop button unit 136U is operating normally based on the presence or absence of the corresponding action.

In the above configuration, the action taken when the harness is connected is to stop the reels from spinning during play. However, this action is not limited to actions that are performed during play, and various actions can be applied. In particular, if this action is visible inside the gaming machine with the door open, it may be possible to reduce the burden of maintenance work. Furthermore, such actions may be performed by a process different from error processing. In this case, the operation can be checked without using error processing.

Furthermore, we will explain examples of operations related to the above operations.

In this example, a harness bundling the signal lines for the MAX BET button, start lever, settlement button, and 1 BET button is connected to a relay board, which is then connected to the main board. The signal lines are arranged in the following order, starting from terminal number 1: MAX BET sensor signal line, power line, ground line, 1 BET sensor signal line, power line, ground line, settlement button signal line, ground line, power line, start lever sensor signal line, ground line.

In this case, when the harness is in a non-betting state and disconnected, if the MAX BET button and 1 BET button are operated and the harness changes from a non-connected state to a connected state, the operation of the MAX BET button becomes effective and a process for setting the bet number to 3 is executed, resulting in a 3 bet state, and if the harness then changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the same process as when the lever is operated is executed, the reels spin, and the monitor LED becomes the same as when the lever is operated.

In addition, when the harness is in a non-betting state and disconnected, if the harness changes from a non-connected state to a connected state when the MAX BET button and the settlement button are operated, the operation of the MAX BET button is enabled first, and the process of setting a bet of 3 is executed, resulting in a bet of 3, and then the settlement button is enabled, and the gaming value of the set bet of 3 is returned to the player, resulting in a non-betting state. Note that if the harness changes from a connected state to a non-connected state before the settlement button operation becomes enabled, the same process as when the lever is operated is executed, the reels spin, and the monitor LED turns into the same state as when the lever is operated.

In addition, when the harness is in a non-betting state and disconnected, if the harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the 1 bet button and the settlement button are operated, the operation of the 1 bet button becomes effective first and a process for setting a bet of 1 is executed, after which the operation of the settlement button becomes effective and the gaming value of the set bet of 1 is returned to the player, and the non-betting state is resumed.

In addition, when the harness is in a non-betting state and disconnected, if the harness changes from a non-connected state to a connected state while the MAX BET button, 1 BET button, and settlement button are operated, the operation of the MAX BET button becomes effective first, the process of setting the bet of 3 is executed, and the state becomes a 3-bet state, after which the operation of the settlement button becomes effective, and the gaming value of the set bet of 3 is returned to the player, and the state becomes a non-betting state, and the operation of the 1 BET button does not become effective.

In addition, when connecting a single harness bundling the signal lines of the MAX BET button, settlement button, and 1 BET button to the relay board, the harness may be arranged in the following order from terminal number 1: MAX BET sensor signal line, power line, ground line, start lever sensor signal line, power line, ground line, settlement button signal line, ground line, power line, 1 BET sensor signal line, ground line, or as a modified example, from terminal number 1: settlement button signal line, ground line, power line, LED signal line, MAX BET sensor signal line, ground line, 1 BET sensor signal line, ground line.

In addition, when connecting a single harness bundling the signal lines of the MAX BET button and 1 BET button to the relay board, the harness may be arranged in the following order from terminal number 1 to a ground line, a MAX BET sensor signal line, a power line, a 1 BET sensor signal line, and a ground line.

Also, while an example has been given in which the MAX BET button has a higher priority than the 1 BET button, the 1 BET button may have a higher priority than the MAX BET button. In this case, when the harness is in a non-betting state and disconnected, if the MAX BET button and the 1 BET button are operated and the harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state, the operation of the 1 BET button becomes effective and a process for setting the number of bets to 1 is executed, resulting in a 1 BET state. If the harness then changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the reels do not spin, but the monitor LEDs become the same as when the lever is operated, and the same process as when the lever is operated is not executed, and the harness is restarted again. When the harness goes from a disconnected state to a connected state, the operation of the 1 bet button becomes effective, a process to set a bet of 1 is executed, and the state becomes 2 bets; when the harness then goes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the reels do not spin, but the monitor LEDs become the same as when the lever is operated; when the harness goes from a disconnected state to a connected state again, the operation of the 1 bet button becomes effective, a process to set a bet of 1 is executed, and the state becomes 3 bets; when the harness then goes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the same process as when the lever is operated is executed, the reels spin, and the monitor LEDs become the same as when the lever is operated.

[Example of behavior when the menu button harness is disconnected]
Below, using Figure 194 (a), an example of the operation when the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected and reconnected will be described.

In FIG. 194(a), the following operations are performed in the order of menu display (screen for customizing performance settings), unplugging the menu button unit harness HC1, pressing the entire menu button, connecting the menu button unit harness HC1, unplugging the menu button unit harness HC1, connecting the menu button unit harness HC1, unplugging the menu button unit harness HC1, and connecting the menu button unit harness HC1. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with those explained in FIG. 190(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 194(a), the front door 102 is in an open state to check the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor also detects the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 189 is provided in a position that can be seen inside the gaming machine with the door in the open state.

First, the initial state is when the effect settings are being customized (before the game starts), the effect image display device 157 is displaying a menu, the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting menu background music, and the various lamps 420 are in a menu illumination mode.

Next, the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected, but this does not cause any change in state. Furthermore, the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected while all the menu buttons (here, the up, down, left, right and OK buttons) are pressed. In this case, one of the pressed menu buttons is accepted according to priority. In this example, the operation of the left direction button, which has the highest priority, is valid. This operation causes the performance image display device 157 to display a fourth display in which the cursor on the menu screen moves to the left, a fourth sound (performance corresponding to the fourth display) is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 to have a fourth light emission mode (performance corresponding to the fourth display). Note that here, multiple menu buttons are pressed when the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected, but if one menu button is pressed, the operation of that button is accepted, and if none of the menu buttons are pressed, no operation is executed.

Next, with all menu buttons still pressed, the menu button unit harness HC1 is unplugged and then reconnected. In this case, one of the pressed menu buttons is accepted according to priority. In this example, the operation of the left button, which has the highest priority, is valid. This operation causes the performance image display device 157 to display a fifth display in which the cursor on the menu screen moves further to the left, a fifth sound (performance corresponding to the fifth display) is output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 go into a fifth light emission mode (performance corresponding to the fifth display).

In the above example, each time the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected and reconnected while all the menu buttons are pressed, the operation of the left direction button, which has the highest priority, becomes effective, and the cursor on the menu screen moves to the left. The movement of the cursor by this operation can be circular, such as when the cursor moves to the end and then reappears from the end in the opposite direction, or non-circular, in which the cursor moves to the end and does not move any further. The right edge of FIG. 194(a) shows that the fourth display and the related performance are executed again due to the circular movement of the cursor by the above operation. In contrast, FIG. 194(b) shows an example in which the cursor moves non-circularly by the above operation. In this example, only the state of the right edge is different from FIG. 194(a), and it shows that the fifth display and the related performance are maintained because the cursor no longer moves due to the above operation.

Furthermore, we will explain examples of operations related to the above.

For example, suppose that the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected while the left and right buttons are operated when the normal background is displayed and the menu button unit harness HC1 is not connected. In this case, the left button has a higher priority than the right button, so only the operation of the left button is valid. If the left button corresponds to the operation of lowering the volume by one step and the right button corresponds to the operation of raising the volume by one step, the process of lowering the volume by one step is executed as a result, and the volume display is lowered by one step. If the menu button unit harness HC1 is repeatedly connected and disconnected in this state (when both the left and right buttons are operated), the volume will be lowered by one step each time it is connected. Then, when the volume reaches the minimum, the volume is maintained at the same level and the volume display is also displayed in the same way. Note that in the above example, the case where the left button corresponds to the operation of lowering the volume by one step was described, but if the left button corresponds to the operation of raising the volume by one step, the volume will be raised by one step each time the menu button unit harness HC1 is repeatedly connected and disconnected, and eventually it will reach the maximum volume. Also, in the above example, a case was described where a process corresponding to the left directional button, which has a higher priority, is executed, but the priority is not particularly limited, and the right directional button may have a higher priority, or the up and down directional buttons may have a higher (or lower) priority.

For example, when the operation history screen (displayed by operating the OK button in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode) is displayed, operating the right direction button switches to the next page, and operating the left direction button switches to the previous page. Also, operating the left direction button when the first page is displayed displays the last page, and operating the right direction button when the last page is displayed returns to the first page. In this configuration, when the operation history screen is displayed and the menu button unit harness HC1 is not connected, the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected while operating the left and right direction buttons. In this case, since the left direction button has a higher priority than the right direction button, only the operation of the left direction button is valid, and as a result, the displayed page switches to the previous page. In this case, if the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected when the first page is displayed, the last page will be displayed. In the above example, the left button corresponds to the operation of switching to the previous page, but if it corresponds to the operation of switching to the next page, the pages will switch in order by repeatedly connecting and disconnecting the menu button unit harness HC1, and will eventually return to the first page from the last page. In the above example, the process corresponding to the left button, which has a high priority, is executed, but the priority is not particularly limited, and the right button may have a higher priority, or the up and down buttons may have a higher (or lower) priority.

Here, we will explain the wiring example and priority relationship of the menu button unit. Figure 194-1 shows an example of wiring of the menu button unit.

Figure 194-1 shows an example of wiring from the menu button unit harness HC1 to the menu button unit 900U. This figure shows five switches SW1 to SW5 and an LED element SW3L on the menu button unit 900U. The first switch SW1 is assigned to the left button, the second switch SW2 to the up button, the third switch SW3 to the confirm button, the fourth switch SW4 to the down button, and the fifth switch SW5 to the right button. The LED element SW3L is also designed to emit light when the third switch SW3 is energized.

In this wiring example, the priority of operations is determined in the order of the wiring numbers. In this example, the order from highest priority is the left button, the up button, the confirm button, the down button, and the right button. For example, the left button (first switch SW1) has a wiring number of 2, and the up button (second switch SW2) has a wiring number of 3, so if the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected while these buttons are operated, processing according to the operation of the left button will be executed.

In addition, in this wiring example, the ground wire runs around the outside to prevent noise. Also, the high-potential wire (for example, 12V wire number 5) is on the innermost side. This is just one example, and for example, the signal wire corresponding to the button operation may be arranged inside the power wire and ground wire (one set of three wires), and if there is a corresponding light-emitting element, the wire for that may be included within this enclosure, or may be arranged outside the enclosure.

In the above example, when replacing the menu button unit 900U, for example, by connecting the menu button unit harness HC1 while holding down the menu button, it is possible to check whether the replaced menu button unit 900U is operating normally based on the presence or absence of the corresponding action.

In the above configuration, the operation when the harness is connected is described as an operation on the menu screen, but this operation is not limited to an operation on the menu screen and may be an operation during play, and various operations can be applied. In particular, if this operation is visible inside the gaming machine with the door open, the burden of maintenance work may be reduced. Furthermore, such an operation may be executed by a process different from the error processing. In this case, the operation can be checked without using error processing.

[Example of behavior when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected]
Below, using Figure 195 (a), we will explain an example of the operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected and reconnected.

In this embodiment, power is supplied to the sub-control board 400B from the power supply PS via the main control board 300B and the harness HE1. When the harness HE1 is disconnected, power is no longer supplied to the sub-control board 400B. At this time, power stored in an electrolytic capacitor provided on the sub-control board 400B is supplied, and the sub-control board 400B is maintained in operation during that time. When this power supply stops, the sub-control board 400B is in a power-off state. FIG. 195(a) shows the changes from when the harness HE1 is disconnected to when the sub-control board 400B is in a power-off state during the period from timing T1 to T2. Note that the main control board 300B is provided with a monitor LED for checking the state of the power supply, but since the power supply to the main control board 300B is maintained regardless of the connection state of the harness HE1, this monitor LED remains lit.

After the sub-control board 400B is disconnected as described above, when the harness HE1 is reconnected, power is supplied from the power supply PS via the harness HE1. At this time, the electrolytic capacitor of the sub-control board 400B stores electricity again, so the power consumption increases temporarily by that amount. In addition, the voltage on the main control board 300B side temporarily drops, but if it falls below the operating voltage of the main control board 300B, a reset process is executed on the main control board 300B (same as turning the power off and on again). When this reset process is executed, the main control board 300B transitions to a setting confirmation mode in which the current setting value can be confirmed. In addition, if the setting key provided inside the game machine is in the ON state when the reset process is executed, the main control board 300B transitions to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. In FIG. 195(a), these changes are shown after timing T2. Note that the power supply to the main control board 300B is maintained regardless of the connection status of the harness HE1, so the monitor LED remains lit.

Here, assume that the period from when the harness HE1 becomes disconnected until when it becomes connected again is short, and while the power stored in the electrolytic capacitor provided on the sub-control board 400B is being supplied, the harness HE1 becomes connected again. In this case, the sub-control board 400B does not enter a power cut state (it continues to operate without restarting). Also, if the power consumed while the harness HE1 is disconnected is small, the amount of charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor when the harness HE1 becomes connected again may be small, and the voltage drop in the main control board 300B may not fall below the operating voltage and the operation may continue (the reset process may not be executed). In FIG. 195(b), an example is shown in which the harness HE1 becomes connected again at timing T4 while the power stored in the electrolytic capacitor provided on the sub-control board 400B is being supplied after the harness becomes disconnected at timing T3, and both the main control board 300B and the sub-control board 400B continue to operate. In this example, the electrolytic capacitor of the sub-control board 400B stores electricity again, which temporarily increases power consumption and temporarily reduces the voltage on the main control board 300B side, but the amount of change is smaller than in the example of Figure 195(a). Also, unlike the example of Figure 195(a), it is shown that the main control board 300B has not been reset after timing T4.

In the above configuration, the main control board 300B can be reset by disconnecting the harness HE1, waiting a while, and then reconnecting it. On the other hand, if you do not want to reset the main control board 300B, you can prevent it from being reset by disconnecting the harness HE1 and immediately reconnecting it.

[Technical idea corresponding to the embodiment related to the harness]
The technical ideas described in the description of Figures 189 to 195 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not operated, the first process may be executed (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness of the first operating unit is disconnected during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or during replacement, cleaning, or maintenance of the first operating unit at the gaming parlor, the first process is executed, making it possible to confirm that the first operating unit is operating normally. Also, by executing the first process, it is possible to know that the first harness has been disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the first operating unit can be checked based on whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the first control unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When a certain condition (e.g., a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state in a state in which the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is executed;
When the certain condition is not satisfied and the first operating part is not operated and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the first process is not executed (see [Operation example (1) when the lever unit harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can also check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness becomes disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) is provided,
When the second operating portion is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is also possible to check whether the second operating section has been operated when the first harness is disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a second board (e.g., a relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a harness HB1);
Notification means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The notification means may execute a connection error notification (e.g., a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (see [Operation example (1) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the connection status of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by a notification from the notification means.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A third operation unit (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) is provided which is connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating part is not being operated, the first process may be executed (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating part is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the first process is not executed (see [Operation Example (3) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (4) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness of the first operating unit is disconnected during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when the first operating unit is replaced at an amusement parlor, the first process is executed, making it possible to confirm that the first operating unit is operating normally. Also, by executing the first process, it is possible to know that the first harness has been disconnected. Also, when the first operating unit is in an operating state, the first notification is not executed even if the first harness is disconnected, so it may be possible to notice that the first operating unit is being operated due to contact with some member.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the first operating unit can be checked based on whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the first control unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When a certain condition (e.g., a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state in a state in which the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is executed;
When the certain condition is not satisfied and the first operating part is not operated and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the first process is not executed (see [Operation example (1) when the lever unit harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can also check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness becomes disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) is provided,
When the second operating portion is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is also possible to check whether the second operating section has been operated when the first harness is disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a second board (e.g., a relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a harness HB1);
Notification means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The notification means may execute a connection error notification (e.g., a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (see [Operation example (1) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the connection status of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by a notification from the notification means.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A third operation unit (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) is provided which is connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
A light emitting means (e.g., a lever monitor LED);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not operated, the first process may be executed (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
the light emitting means has a different light emitting state when the first operation unit is operated and when the first operation unit is not operated,
When the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not being operated, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operating unit is operated (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness of the first operating unit is disconnected during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when the first operating unit is replaced at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed, making it possible to confirm that the first operating unit is operating normally. Also, by executing the first process, it is possible to know that the first harness has been disconnected. Also, the operation of the light emitting means can be confirmed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the first operating unit can be checked based on whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the first control unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When a certain condition (e.g., a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state in a state in which the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is executed;
When the certain condition is not satisfied and the first operating part is not operated and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the first process is not executed (see [Operation example (1) when the lever unit harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can also check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness becomes disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) is provided,
When the second operating portion is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is also possible to check whether the second operating section has been operated when the first harness is disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a second board (e.g., a relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a harness HB1);
Notification means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The notification means may execute a connection error notification (e.g., a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (see [Operation example (1) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the connection status of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by a notification from the notification means.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A third operation unit (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) is provided which is connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
A movable body (e.g., reels 110 to 112),
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not being operated, the first process may be executed.
The first process is a process of operating the movable body (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness of the first operating unit is disconnected during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when the first operating unit is replaced at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed, making it possible to confirm that the first operating unit is operating normally. Also, by executing the first process, it is possible to know that the first harness has been disconnected. Also, the operation of the movable body can be checked.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the first operating unit can be checked based on whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the first control unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When a certain condition (e.g., a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state in a state in which the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is executed;
When the certain condition is not satisfied and the first operating part is not operated and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the first process is not executed (see [Operation example (1) when the lever unit harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can also check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness becomes disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) is provided,
When the second operating portion is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is also possible to check whether the second operating section has been operated when the first harness is disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a second board (e.g., a relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a harness HB1);
Notification means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The notification means may execute a connection error notification (e.g., a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (see [Operation example (1) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the connection status of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by a notification from the notification means.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A third operation unit (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) is provided which is connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not being operated, the first process may be executed (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]), and the manner in which the first process is executed can be confirmed inside the gaming machine with the door open,
The first harness is provided at a position that can be confirmed inside the gaming machine when the door is open (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness of the first operating unit is disconnected during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when the first operating unit is replaced at an amusement parlor, the first process is executed, making it possible to confirm that the first operating unit is operating normally. Also, by executing the first process, it is possible to know that the first harness has been disconnected. Also, it becomes easier for an operator to operate the first harness with the door open and to confirm the operation due to the first process.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the first operating unit can be checked based on whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the first control unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When a certain condition (e.g., a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state in a state in which the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is executed;
When the certain condition is not satisfied and the first operating part is not operated and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the first process is not executed (see [Operation example (1) when the lever unit harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can also check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness becomes disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) is provided,
When the second operating portion is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is also possible to check whether the second operating section has been operated when the first harness is disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a second board (e.g., a relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a harness HB1);
Notification means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The notification means may execute a connection error notification (e.g., a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (see [Operation example (1) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the connection status of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by a notification from the notification means.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A third operation unit (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) is provided which is connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B, a sub-control board 400B),
a first operation unit (e.g., a stop button unit 136U, a menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a stop button unit harness HA2, a menu button unit harness HC1);
A gaming machine equipped with
The first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (e.g., a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, a left direction button and an up direction button),
A first process (e.g., stopping the left reel 110, moving the cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (e.g., stopping the center reel 111, moving the cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are being operated, only the first process out of the first process and the second process may be executed (see [Example of Operation When Multiple Harnesses are Disconnected] and [Example of Operation When Menu Button Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness of the first operation unit is connected during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when the first operation unit is replaced at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed, thereby making it possible to confirm that the first operation unit is operating normally. In addition, if the second process is executed without executing the first process, a break in the wiring of the first operation unit may be noticed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are unplugged] and [Example of operation when the menu button harness is unplugged]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the first operating unit can be confirmed by checking whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] and [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the first operating unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second operation unit is not operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] and [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is not operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] and [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first operation unit has a third operation part (e.g., a right stop button 139, a right direction button),
A third process (e.g., stopping the right reel 112, moving the cursor to the right) may be executed by operating the third operation unit.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the third operation unit is being operated, the third process may be executed.
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the second operation unit and the third operation unit are being operated, only the second process out of the second process and the third process may be executed (see [Example of Operation When Multiple Harnesses are Disconnected] and [Example of Operation When Menu Button Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When replacing the first operation unit in this gaming machine, it may be possible to confirm that the first operation unit is functioning normally by executing the second process.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
when a certain condition (e.g., a reel is spinning) is satisfied and the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operating unit and the second operating unit are being operated, only the first processing of the first processing and the second processing is executed;
When a certain condition is not satisfied and the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operating unit and the second operating unit are being operated, the first process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can also check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness is connected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When a predetermined operation part (e.g., a start lever 135) different from the operation part belonging to the first operation unit is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is also possible to check whether a specific operating part has been operated when the first harness is connected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a second board (e.g., a relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a harness HB1);
Notification means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The notification means may execute a connection error notification (e.g., a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (see [Operation example (1) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the connection status of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by a notification from the notification means.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., a lever unit 135U) having an operation portion and connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness is provided.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a first operation unit (e.g., a menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a menu button unit harness HC1);
A gaming machine equipped with
the first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (e.g., a left button and an up button);
A first process (e.g., moving a cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (e.g., moving a cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are being operated, there is a case where only the first process of the first process and the second process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]),
In a situation where the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state after the first case and then goes back to the first case, the output result of the first process in the previous first case may differ from the output result of the first process in the subsequent first case (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected], FIG. 194(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness of the first operation unit is connected during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when the first operation unit is replaced at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed, making it possible to confirm that the first operation unit is operating normally. Also, if the second process is executed without executing the first process, a break in the wiring of the first operation unit may be noticed. Also, the operation of the first operation unit can be confirmed by checking whether the output result of the first process is different.

The gaming machine according to this example is a gaming machine equipped with a first board and a first operation unit connected to the first board via a first harness, the first operation unit having at least a first operation section and a second operation section, a first process may be executed by operating the first operation section, a second process may be executed by operating the second operation section, the first process may be executed when the first harness changes from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operation section is being operated, the second process may be executed when the first harness changes from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation section is being operated, the first process may be executed when the first harness changes from a non-connected state to a connected state while at least the first operation section and the second operation section are being operated, only the first process of the first process and the second process may be executed when the first harness changes from a non-connected state to a connected state while at least the first operation section and the second operation section are being operated, the volume may change in a first direction when the first operation section is operated, and the volume may change in a second direction when the second operation section is operated.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the first operating unit can be confirmed by checking whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] and [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the first operating unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second operation unit is not being operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is not being operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first operation unit has a third operation part (e.g., a right direction button);
A third process (e.g., moving a cursor right) may be executed by operating the third operation unit,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the third operation unit is being operated, the third process may be executed.
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the second operation unit and the third operation unit are being operated, only the second process out of the second process and the third process may be executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When replacing the first operation unit in this gaming machine, it may be possible to confirm that the first operation unit is functioning normally by executing the second process.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a first operation unit (e.g., a menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a menu button unit harness HC1);
A gaming machine equipped with
the first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (e.g., a left button and an up button);
A first process (e.g., moving a cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (e.g., moving a cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operating unit and the second operating unit are being operated (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), only the first process out of the first process and the second process may be executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
In a situation where the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state after the first case and returns to the first case, the first process may be executed in the first case, but the first process may not be executed in the second case (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected], FIG. 194(b)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness of the first operation unit is connected during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when the first operation unit is replaced at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed, making it possible to confirm that the first operation unit is operating normally. Also, if the second process is executed without the first process being executed, it may be possible to notice a break in the wiring of the first operation unit. Also, the operation of the first operation unit can be confirmed by the behavior when the first process is executed and when it is not executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the first operating unit can be confirmed by checking whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] and [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the first operating unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second operation unit is not being operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is not being operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first operation unit has a third operation part (e.g., a right direction button);
A third process (e.g., moving a cursor right) may be executed by operating the third operation unit,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the third operation unit is being operated, the third process may be executed.
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the second operation unit and the third operation unit are being operated, only the second process out of the second process and the third process may be executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When replacing the first operation unit in this gaming machine, it may be possible to confirm that the first operation unit is functioning normally by executing the second process.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first reel and a second reel (e.g., a left reel 110 and a center reel 111) that are driven to rotate,
a first stop button (e.g., left stop button 137) for stopping the rotation of the first reel;
a second stop button (e.g., middle stop button 138) for stopping the spinning of the second reel;
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a stop button unit (e.g., a stop button unit 136U) having the first stop button and the second stop button and connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a stop button unit harness HA2);
A gaming machine equipped with
A first process (for example, stopping the left reel 110, changing the navigation effect) may be executed by operating the first stop button.
A second process (for example, stopping the center reel 111, changing the navigation effect) may be executed by operating the second stop button.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first stop button is operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second stop button is operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, there is a case where only the first process out of the first process and the second process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]),
After the first case, when the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, only the second process out of the first process and the second process may be executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When inspecting before shipment at the factory or replacing the stop button unit at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed when the first harness of the stop button unit is connected, thereby making it possible to confirm that the stop button unit is operating normally. Furthermore, if the second process is executed without executing the first process, a break in the wiring of the stop button unit may be noticed. Furthermore, the operation of the stop button unit can be confirmed by stopping the reels.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are unplugged]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the stop button unit can be checked by checking whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the stop button unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first stop button is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second stop button is not operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first stop button is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second stop button is not operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
when a certain condition (for example, a reel is spinning) is satisfied and the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, only the first process out of the first process and the second process is executed;
When a certain condition is not satisfied and both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the first process is not executed when the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can also check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness is connected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When a predetermined operation unit (e.g., a start lever 135) other than the operation unit belonging to the stop button unit is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is also possible to check whether a specific operating part has been operated when the first harness is connected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a second board (e.g., a relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a harness HB1);
Notification means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The notification means may execute a connection error notification (e.g., a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (see [Operation example (1) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the connection status of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by a notification from the notification means.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., a lever unit 135U) having an operation portion and connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness is provided.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first reel and a second reel (e.g., a left reel 110 and a center reel 111) that are driven to rotate,
a first stop button (e.g., left stop button 137) for stopping the rotation of the first reel;
a second stop button (e.g., middle stop button 138) for stopping the spinning of the second reel;
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a stop button unit (e.g., a stop button unit 136U) having the first stop button and the second stop button and connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a stop button unit harness HA2);
A gaming machine equipped with
A first process (for example, stopping the left reel 110, changing the navigation effect) may be executed by operating the first stop button.
A second process (for example, stopping the center reel 111, changing the navigation effect) may be executed by operating the second stop button.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first stop button is operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second stop button is operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first reel is not out of step and while both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, only the first process out of the first process and the second process may be executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first reel is out of step and both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, only the second process out of the first process and the second process may be executed (see FIG. 193(b) [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When a pre-shipment inspection is performed at a factory or when the stop button unit is replaced at an amusement parlor, the first process is executed when the first harness of the stop button unit is connected, thereby making it possible to confirm that the stop button unit is operating normally. Furthermore, if the second process is executed without executing the first process, a break in the wiring of the stop button unit may be noticed. Furthermore, by stopping the reels, it is possible to check the operation of the stop button unit and the condition of the reels.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are unplugged]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the stop button unit can be checked by checking whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the stop button unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first stop button is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second stop button is not operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first stop button is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second stop button is not operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
when a certain condition (for example, a reel is spinning) is satisfied and the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, only the first process out of the first process and the second process is executed;
When a certain condition is not satisfied and both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the first process is not executed if the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can also check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness is connected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When a predetermined operation unit (e.g., a start lever 135) other than the operation unit belonging to the stop button unit is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is also possible to check whether a specific operating part has been operated when the first harness is connected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a second board (e.g., a relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a harness HB1);
Notification means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The notification means may execute a connection error notification (e.g., a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (see [Operation example (1) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the connection status of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by a notification from the notification means.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., a lever unit 135U) having an operation portion and connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness is provided.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first control board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
A second control board (e.g., a sub-control board 400B),
A gaming machine equipped with
the first control board is electrically connected to the second control board via a first harness (e.g., harness HE1);
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the first control board maintains an activated state,
If the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state after the first case (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the first control board may be reset (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness goes from a disconnected state to a connected state during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or part replacement at an amusement arcade, the first control board is reset, allowing the first control board to operate normally.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first control board includes a light emitting means (e.g., a monitor LED),
Even in the first case, the light emitting means continues to emit light (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm that the first control board is in an activated state.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Even if the second case occurs while the light emitting means continues to emit light, the light emitting means continues to emit light (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm that the first control board is in a powered state even while being reset.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
If the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state before a first time period (e.g., the time period when the amount of charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor falls below the amount that can maintain the operating voltage of the main control board 300B) has elapsed since the first case occurred, the first control board is not reset (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first control board can be reset depending on the situation.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first control board (e.g., a main control board 300B) having a predetermined operation means (e.g., a setting key) and controlling the progress of a game;
A second control board (e.g., a sub-control board 400B),
A gaming machine equipped with
the first control board is electrically connected to the second control board via a first harness (e.g., harness HE1);
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the first control board maintains an activated state,
If the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state after the first case (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the first control board may be reset (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected]).
If the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the specified operating means is operated after the first case, the first control board may transition to a state based on the operation of the specified operating means (e.g., a setting confirmation mode or a setting change mode) (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness goes from a disconnected state to a connected state during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or part replacement at the gaming parlor, the first control board is reset, allowing the first control board to operate normally. In addition, the gaming machine can be transitioned to a state based on the operation of a specified operating means while remaining in a powered state.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first control board includes a light emitting means (e.g., a monitor LED);
Even in the first case, the light emitting means continues to emit light (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm that the first control board is in an activated state.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Even if the second case occurs while the light emitting means continues to emit light, the light emitting means continues to emit light (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm that the first control board is in a powered state even while being reset.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
If the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state before a first time period (e.g., the time period when the amount of charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor falls below the amount that can maintain the operating voltage of the main control board 300B) has elapsed since the first case occurred, the first control board is not reset (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first control board can be reset depending on the situation.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
A second operation unit (e.g., a bet button 132) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a bet button unit harness HA3);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not operated, the first process may be executed (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
A second process (e.g., a process for setting a bet amount) can be executed based on an operation of the second operation unit,
When the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second operating unit is not operated, the second process is not executed ([Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected], see FIGS. 193(a) and 193(b) ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine makes it easier for game store staff to recognize the behavior of the two operating parts, and may also enable game store staff to notice if the harness is connected incorrectly.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed in a state in which the second process is executed.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, even if a malfunction occurs in the first harness after a malfunction occurs in the second harness, the first process is not executed, so the player is not disadvantaged.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Equipped with a light emitting means (e.g., a lever monitor LED),
the light emitting means is means for emitting light in different manners depending on whether the first operating unit is operated or not operated when the first harness is in a connected state,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not being operated, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operation unit is operated while the first harness is in the connected state (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating part is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the first process is not executed (see [Operation Example (3) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (4) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operation part is operated while the first harness is in the connected state (see [Operation Example (3) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (4) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, a malfunction of the harness or the first operating unit may be inferred based on the illumination state of the illumination means and whether or not the first process is being executed.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
An operation unit (e.g., a stop button unit 136U, a bet button unit 132U) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a stop button unit harness HA2, a bet button unit harness HA3),
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
The operation unit has a second operation part and a third operation part (e.g., a left stop button 137 and a middle stop button 138, or bet buttons 130, 132),
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not being operated, the first process may be executed (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
A second process (e.g., stopping the reels in response to a stop button, setting a bet amount) can be executed based on an operation of the second operation unit,
A third process (e.g., stopping the reels in response to a stop button, setting a bet amount) can be executed based on an operation of the third operation unit,
When the second harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second operating unit is not operated, the second process is not executed ([Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected], see FIGS. 193(a) and 193(b) ).
When the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the third operating unit is not operated, the third process is not executed ([Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected], see FIGS. 193(a) and 193(b) ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine makes it easier for game store staff to recognize the behavior of the two operating parts, and may also enable game store staff to notice if the harness is connected incorrectly.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In a state where the first process (e.g., starting the rotation of the reels) has been executed, the second process (e.g., stopping the rotation of the reels in response to a stop button) may be executed.
In a state where the first process (e.g., starting the rotation of the reels) has been executed, the third process (e.g., stopping the rotation of the reels in response to a stop button) may be executed.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, even if a malfunction occurs in the second harness after a malfunction occurs in the first harness, the second process and the third process are not executed, so the player is not disadvantaged.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Equipped with a light emitting means (e.g., a lever monitor LED),
the light emitting means is means for emitting light in different manners depending on whether the first operating unit is operated or not operated when the first harness is in a connected state,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not being operated, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operation unit is operated while the first harness is in the connected state (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating part is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the first process is not executed (see [Operation Example (3) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (4) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operation part is operated while the first harness is in the connected state (see [Operation Example (3) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (4) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, a malfunction of the harness or the first operating unit may be inferred based on the illumination state of the illumination means and whether or not the first process is being executed.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
A second operation unit (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a stop button unit harness HA2);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating part is not being operated, the first process may be executed (see [Operation example (2) when the lever unit harness is disconnected], hereinafter referred to as the “first case”).
A second process (e.g., stopping the rotation of the reels in response to a stop button) can be executed based on an operation of the second operation unit,
When the second operating unit is operated in the first case, the second process is not executed (for example, [Operation example (2) when the lever unit harness is disconnected], see FIG. 190(c) ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

At this gaming machine, the gaming store staff may be able to notice the disconnected state of the first harness through the player.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The second process may be executed in a state where the first process is executed.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, even if a malfunction occurs in the second harness after a malfunction occurs in the first harness, the second process is not executed, so the player is not disadvantaged.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Equipped with a light emitting means (e.g., a lever monitor LED),
the light emitting means is means for emitting light in different manners depending on whether the first operating unit is operated or not operated when the first harness is in a connected state,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not being operated, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operation unit is operated while the first harness is in the connected state (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating part is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the first process is not executed (see [Operation Example (3) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (4) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operation part is operated while the first harness is in the connected state (see [Operation Example (3) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (4) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, a malfunction of the harness or the first operating unit may be inferred based on the illumination state of the illumination means and whether or not the first process is being executed.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
A second operation unit (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a stop button unit harness HA2);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating part is not being operated, the first process may be executed (see [Operation example (1) when the lever unit harness is disconnected], hereinafter referred to as the “first case”).
A second process (e.g., stopping the rotation of the reels in response to a stop button) can be executed based on an operation of the second operation unit,
When the second operating unit is operated in the first case, the second process may be executed (for example, [Operation example (1) when the lever unit harness is disconnected], see FIG. 190(b) ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine allows game staff to check the operation of multiple control parts in stages.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Equipped with a light emitting means (e.g., a lever monitor LED),
the light emitting means is means for emitting light in different manners depending on whether the first operating unit is operated or not operated when the first harness is in a connected state,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not being operated, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operation unit is operated while the first harness is in the connected state (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating part is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the first process is not executed (see [Operation Example (3) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (4) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operation part is operated while the first harness is in the connected state (see [Operation Example (3) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (4) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, a malfunction of the harness or the first operating unit may be inferred based on the illumination state of the illumination means and whether or not the first process is being executed.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
A second operation unit (e.g., a bet button 132) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a bet button unit harness HA3);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not being operated, the first process may be executed (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
A second process (e.g., a process for setting a bet amount) can be executed based on an operation of the second operation unit,
When the second operation unit is operated in a state in which the first operation unit is operated, the second process is executed and the first process is not executed (for example, see FIG. 191(a) ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows game staff to check the operation of multiple control parts in stages.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed in a state in which the second process is executed.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, even if a malfunction occurs in the first harness after a malfunction occurs in the second harness, the first process is not executed, so the player is not disadvantaged.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Equipped with a light emitting means (e.g., a lever monitor LED),
the light emitting means is means for emitting light in different manners depending on whether the first operating unit is operated or not operated when the first harness is in a connected state,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not being operated, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operation unit is operated while the first harness is in the connected state (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating part is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the first process is not executed (see [Operation Example (3) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (4) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operation part is operated while the first harness is in the connected state (see [Operation Example (3) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (4) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, a malfunction of the harness or the first operating unit may be inferred based on the illumination state of the illumination means and whether or not the first process is being executed.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B, a sub-control board 400B),
a first operation unit (e.g., a stop button unit 136U, a menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a stop button unit harness HA2, a menu button unit harness HC1);
A gaming machine equipped with
The first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (e.g., a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, a left direction button and an up direction button),
A first process (e.g., stopping the left reel 110, moving the cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (e.g., stopping the center reel 111, moving the cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are being operated, there is a case where only the first process of the first process and the second process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are unplugged] and [Example of operation when menu button harness is unplugged]).
The first harness has a first wiring (for example, wiring number 2 in FIG. 194-1) connected to the first operating unit,
The first harness has a second wiring (for example, wiring number 3 in FIG. 194-1) connected to the second operating unit,
The first wiring has a terminal number smaller than that of the second wiring.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, if the first process is not executed, it is easy for gaming store staff to identify wiring problems.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In a situation where, after the first case, the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state without any operation other than that of the first operation unit and the second operation unit, and then the first case occurs again, the output result of the first process in the previous first case may differ from the output result of the first process in the later first case (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is unplugged], FIG. 194(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, the output results from the first process are different, making it easier for gaming staff to check the operation.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B, a sub-control board 400B),
a first operation unit (e.g., a stop button unit 136U, a menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a stop button unit harness HA2, a menu button unit harness HC1);
A gaming machine equipped with
The first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (e.g., a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, a left direction button and an up direction button),
A first process (e.g., stopping the left reel 110, moving the cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (e.g., stopping the center reel 111, moving the cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operating unit and the second operating unit are being operated, there is a case where only the first process of the first process and the second process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are unplugged] and [Example of operation when menu button harness is unplugged]).
The first harness has a first wiring (for example, wiring number 2 in FIG. 194-1) connected to the first operating unit,
The first harness has a second wiring (for example, wiring number 3 in FIG. 194-1) connected to the second operating unit,
The first wiring is disposed inside wirings at both ends of the first harness,
The second wiring is disposed inside the wirings at both ends of the first harness.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, if the first process is not executed, the gaming store staff can easily identify wiring problems, and can accurately check operation by inserting the wiring of the harness side connector and the wiring of the board side connector in a parallel state.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In a situation where, after the first case, the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state without any operation other than that of the first operation unit and the second operation unit, and then the first case occurs again, the output result of the first process in the previous first case may differ from the output result of the first process in the later first case (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is unplugged], FIG. 194(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, the output results from the first process are different, making it easier for gaming staff to check the operation.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B, a sub-control board 400B),
a first operation unit (e.g., a stop button unit 136U, a menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a stop button unit harness HA2, a menu button unit harness HC1);
A gaming machine equipped with
The first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (e.g., a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, a left direction button and an up direction button),
A first process (e.g., stopping the left reel 110, moving the cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (e.g., stopping the center reel 111, moving the cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operating unit and the second operating unit are being operated, there is a case where only the first process of the first process and the second process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are unplugged] and [Example of operation when menu button harness is unplugged]).
The first harness has a first wiring (for example, wiring number 2 in FIG. 194-1) connected to the first operating unit,
The first wiring is disposed inside the power supply line and the ground line of the first harness (for example, a modified example in which a signal line is disposed inside the power supply line and the ground line),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, if the first process is not executed, the gaming store staff can easily identify wiring problems, and can accurately check operation by inserting the wiring of the harness side connector and the wiring of the board side connector in a parallel state.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In a situation where, after the first case, the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state without any operation other than that between the first operation unit and the second operation unit, and then the first case occurs again, the output result by the first process in the previous first case may differ from the output result by the first process in the later first case (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is unplugged], FIG. 194(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, the output results from the first process are different, making it easier for gaming staff to check the operation.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B, a sub-control board 400B),
a first operation unit (e.g., a menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a menu button unit harness HC1);
A gaming machine equipped with
the first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (e.g., a left button and an up button);
A first process (e.g., moving a cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (e.g., moving a cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are being operated, there is a case where only the first process of the first process and the second process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are unplugged] and [Example of operation when menu button harness is unplugged]).
the first operation unit is a first direction button,
the second operation unit is a second directional button;
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is easy for gaming staff to confirm that the process is being performed by operating the first directional button.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In a situation where, after the first case, the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state without any operation other than that between the first operation unit and the second operation unit, and then the first case occurs again, the output result by the first process in the previous first case may differ from the output result by the first process in the later first case (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is unplugged], FIG. 194(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, the output results from the first process are different, making it easier for gaming staff to check the operation.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B, a sub-control board 400B),
a first operation unit (e.g., a menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a menu button unit harness HC1);
A gaming machine equipped with
the first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (e.g., a left direction button and a right direction button);
A first process (e.g., moving a cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (e.g., moving a cursor right) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operating unit and the second operating unit are being operated, there is a case where only the first process of the first process and the second process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are unplugged] and [Example of operation when menu button harness is unplugged]).
the first operation unit is a first direction button,
the second operation unit is a second directional button,
When the second process is executed after the first process is executed, the state before the first process is executed may be restored.
When the first process is executed after the second process is executed, the state before the second process is executed may be restored.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is easy for gaming staff to confirm that the process is being performed by operating the first directional button.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In a situation where, after the first case, the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state without any operation other than that between the first operation unit and the second operation unit, and then the first case occurs again, the output result by the first process in the previous first case may differ from the output result by the first process in the later first case (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is unplugged], FIG. 194(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, the output results from the first process are different, making it easier for gaming staff to check the operation.

<Configuration for cooling inside the gaming machine>
Next, an example of a configuration for discharging heat inside the gaming machine to the outside and cooling it will be described using Figures 196 to 201. In the following description, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations already described in other embodiments (e.g., Figures 17 to 32), and the description will be omitted. In addition, for configurations that contradict the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and reference numerals in this example will take precedence.

Figure 196 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open.

In this figure, a cooling fan 950 is provided at the top of the front door 102. In addition, a plurality of through holes (hereinafter referred to as upper through hole 242H1 and lower through hole 242H2, respectively) are formed at the top and bottom of the rear panel. The cooling fan 950 is used to cool the VDP 534 of the second sub-controller 500 provided in the front door 102, and is also used to cool the main controller 300 provided inside the main body 101. The upper through hole 242H1 and the lower through hole 242H2 serve as an intake and exhaust port when the cooling fan 950 is in operation.

The heat dissipation configuration of the cooling fan 950 will be described below with reference to Figures 197 and 198. Figure 197 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the side, and Figure 198 is an enlarged schematic cross-sectional view of the sub-board case 500a and the main board case 300a. In these figures, the arrows indicate the air flow when the cooling fan 950 is operating.

To explain this air flow in order, first air flows from the outside to the inside of the slot machine 100 through the lower through-hole 242H2. The air then passes beside the hopper unit 180, etc., reaches the front door 102, and rises from there toward the cooling fan 950 above. At this point, it passes beside the relay board RB1 along the way, and then flows into the inside of the sub-board case 500a, which is located above the reel unit 109.

The sub-substrate case 500a houses the boards 400B, 500B of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, and these boards are fixed to the sub-substrate case 500a with screws 500b. A heat sink 950c is attached to the second sub-control board 500B to improve the cooling efficiency of the VDP 534. The cooling fan 950 is fixed to the sub-substrate case 500a with screws 950b. This cooling fan 950 is located in a position that does not face the VDP 534.

Air intakes 500H2 are formed at the top and bottom of the sub-board case 500a, and an exhaust port 500H1 is formed facing the main board case 300a. Air flowing in from the lower through-hole 242H2 flows into the inside of the sub-board case 500a through the air intake 500H2, and is exhausted from the exhaust port 500H1 toward the main board case 300a by the operation of the cooling fan 950. This operation cools the sub-control boards 400B, 500B (including the VDP 534) inside the sub-board case 500a.

The air exhausted from the sub-board case 500a by the cooling fan 950 then hits the main board case 300a, which houses the board 300B of the main control unit 300, and flows along its surface before being exhausted through the upper through-hole 242H1. In other words, the operation of the cooling fan 950 cools the main control board 300B inside the main board case 300a.

The above air flow cools the various devices inside the slot machine 100, such as the relay board RB1, the first sub-control board 400B, the second sub-control board 500B, and the main control board 300B. In the above example, the configuration using the first sub-control board 400B, the second sub-control board 500B, and the main control board 300B was described, but the above boards are not limited, and various boards that require cooling can be used. In addition, in the first board case (main controller No. 300B in the above example) on the side directly exposed to the wind from the cooling fan 950, dust attached to this first board case can be blown away to improve the visibility of the first board inside the first board case. In addition, since cooling of the first board can be performed without providing it in the first board case, it may be possible to simplify the configuration of the first board case and improve visibility.

If the airflow of the cooling fan 950 is small and air is not discharged to the outside of the slot machine 100 through the upper through-hole 242H1 as shown in FIG. 199, air will convect inside and the cooling effect will be poor. For this reason, the airflow of the cooling fan 950 must be at least large enough to allow air to be discharged to the outside of the slot machine 100 through the upper through-hole 242H1 as shown in FIG. 200. This creates the air flow described above and cools the inside.

The cooling fan 950 described above is provided on the front door 102. For example, when the front door 102 is opened for maintenance, air from the cooling fan 950 is blown toward the worker SM as shown in FIG. 201, allowing the worker SM to perform maintenance work comfortably.

[Technical idea corresponding to the embodiment regarding cooling inside the gaming machine]
The technical ideas described in the description of Figures 196 to 201 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
A second board (e.g., a second sub-control board 500B),
A cooling fan (e.g., cooling fan 950) for cooling the second substrate;
A gaming machine equipped with
The blowing direction of the cooling fan may be directed toward the first substrate (see, for example, FIG. 197 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, dust adhering to the periphery of the first board can be blown away to improve the visibility of the first board, and the first board can be cooled without providing a first board case, simplifying the structure around the first board and improving visibility.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first board is provided on the main body side of the gaming machine,
The second board and the cooling fan are provided on the door body side of the gaming machine,
When the door body is closed, the airflow direction of the cooling fan faces the first board,
When the door body is opened to a certain position, the airflow direction of the cooling fan is not directed toward the first board (see, for example, FIGS. 197 and 201 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the door of this gaming machine is open, the fan's wind is directed toward the worker who opened the door, rather than toward the first board, allowing maintenance work to be performed comfortably.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the second board having a processor (e.g., a VDP534) that controls the operation of the second board;
The cooling fan is provided at a position different from the position facing the processor (see FIG. 198 for example).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows for improved visibility around the processor.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A reel unit (e.g., reel unit 109),
The gaming machine has a first opening (e.g., an upper through-hole 242H1) formed above the reel unit, and a second opening (e.g., a lower through-hole 242H2) formed below the reel unit,
When the cooling fan operates with the door body closed, the air taken into the inside of the game machine from the second opening passes through the cooling fan and is exhausted from the first opening (see, for example, FIG. 197).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, air is drawn in from the second opening, passes around the reel unit, heads toward the first board, and is then discharged from the first opening, so dust around the first board and heat inside the main unit can be discharged to the outside of the main unit without convection inside the main unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A reel unit (e.g., reel unit 109),
The cooling fan is located above the reel unit when the door is closed (see, for example, FIG. 197).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine is able to expel heat generated by the operation of the reel unit outside the machine.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is equipped with a launching device which launches balls into a specified gaming area, a winning port configured to allow the balls launched from the launching device to enter, a detection means which detects balls which have entered the winning port, a payout means which pays out the ball when the detection means detects a ball, and a variable display device which variably displays a specified pattern (identification information), and is suitable for pachinko machines and the like in which, when a gaming ball enters the winning port and wins a prize, the variable display device changes the pattern and then displays a still pattern to notify the player of the progress of the gaming status.

The gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to a sealed gaming machine. Here, a "sealed gaming machine" is a gaming machine that uses game balls sealed in the gaming machine in a circulating manner. The main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip.
The sub-controller may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. Also, while bidirectional communication is enabled between the main control unit and the first sub-controller, communication from the first sub-controller to the second sub-controller may be unidirectional.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. In addition, by applying the contents described in one of the multiple configurations described in the examples to another configuration, the range of play may be expanded.

Next, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as a slot machine 100 or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to Figures 202 to 260. Note that the reference numerals shown in Figures 202 to 260 are used in principle only in the description using Figures 202 to 260, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in Figures 202 to 260 take precedence in the description using Figures 202 to 260.
<Overall composition>
202 is a perspective view of the exterior of a slot machine 100 according to one embodiment. In the slot machine 100, a game is started by inserting a medal, and medals are paid out depending on the result of the game.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 202 comprises a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed relative to the main body 101. Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of patterns arranged on their outer periphery (not shown in FIG. 202) are housed inside the center of the main body 101 and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are rotated by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member at equal intervals in an appropriate number, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110-112. When viewed by a player, the symbols on the reels 110-112 are displayed vertically in roughly threes through the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110-112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each reel 110-112 functions as a display means for variably displaying combinations of multiple types of symbols. Note that, in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices can also be used as such display means. Also, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is provided on the back of each of the reels 110-112 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be illuminated evenly. Inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each of the reels 110-112, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110-112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the winning lines that are valid. The winning lines that are valid are determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are five winning lines. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid. When two medals are bet, three lines are valid, which are the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line. When three medals are bet, five lines are valid, which are the lower right winning line and the upper right winning line. Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the five lines of the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the lower right winning line, and the upper right winning line may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, the valid winning lines may be called valid lines.

Figure 203 shows the relationship between the nine display areas 1 to 9 of the symbol display window 113 and the five winning lines mentioned above. In this embodiment, there are five winning lines: the upper horizontal winning line (horizontal winning line L2) made up of display areas 1, 4, and 7; the middle horizontal winning line (horizontal winning line L1) made up of display areas 2, 5, and 8; the lower horizontal winning line (horizontal winning line L3) made up of display areas 3, 6, and 9; the upward-right winning line (diagonal winning line L4) made up of display areas 3, 5, and 7; and the downward-right winning line (diagonal winning line L5) made up of display areas 1, 5, and 9.

The notification lamp 123 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery described below, or that a bonus game is in progress. The medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp that notifies the player that a medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay, which is one of the winning combinations, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

The medal insertion buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) that are electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, each time the medal insertion button 130 is pressed, one medal is inserted up to a maximum of three medals, when the medal insertion button 131 is pressed, two medals are inserted, and when the medal insertion button 132 is pressed, three medals are inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 132 is also referred to as the MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamps 129 light up the number of lamps corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 121 lights up to indicate that the game can be started.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot through which a player inserts medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (inserted) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the term "inserting" includes both. The number of medals stored in the slot machine 100 is an indicator for displaying the number of medals stored electronically. The game information indicator 126 is an indicator for displaying various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical form. The number of medals paid out is an indicator for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning some winning combination. In this embodiment, the number of medals stored in the slot machine 100, the game information indicator 126, and the number of medals paid out are configured as seven-segment (SEG) indicators.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. In other words, when the desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or when the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation of the start lever 135 is called the operation to start the game.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137-139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110-112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each of the reels 110-112. Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137-139 will be referred to as a stop operation, with the first stop operation being the first stop operation, the next stop operation being the second stop operation, and the last stop operation being the third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the first stop operation will be referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation being the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation being the third stop reel. Light-emitting bodies 137a-139a are provided inside each of the stop buttons 137-139, and when the stop buttons 137-139 can be operated, the light-emitting bodies 137a-139a are lit to notify the player. That is, the light emitters 137a-139a notify that the stop operation can be accepted for each of the stop buttons 137-139, in other words, that the rotation of each reel can be stopped. Each of the light emitters 137a-139a is, for example, an LED, and can operate in multiple light emission modes (for example, blinking, turning off, emitting light in a first color, emitting light in a second color, emitting light with continuously changing colors, etc.).

The medal return button 133 is a button that can be pressed to remove medals if they become clogged. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key to unlock the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is an outlet for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136 is a title panel 162 that displays the model name and allows various certificate stamps to be attached. Below the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker installed inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 installed on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for livening up the game. The performance device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and the sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the performance device 160. This performance device 160 is equipped with a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and left shutters 163b that can be opened and closed horizontally, and a performance image display device 157 (not shown, liquid crystal display device) arranged on the back side of this shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the performance image display device 157, the display screen of the performance image display device 157 (not shown) appears on the front (player side) of the slot machine 100.

It should be noted that the display device does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be configured to display various performance images and various game information, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. The display screen is rectangular and configured so that the player can view the entire screen. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. Also, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen look irregular. In this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but it may be a curved surface.
<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figure 204. Note that this figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is broadly composed of a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the main presentation in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.
<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control program data, lottery data used during internal lottery of winning combinations, and reel stop positions, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 314b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to the interrupt request. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 314b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time for interruption is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz = 1.504 ms.

The basic circuit 302 is provided with a random number generating circuit 316, which is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value within the range of 0 to 65535, and a start-up signal output circuit 332, which outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When a start-up signal is input from this start-up signal output circuit 332, the CPU 304 starts game control (starts the main processing of the main control unit, which will be described later).

The basic circuit 302 is also provided with a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 monitors the status of various sensors 318 (medal insertion button 130 sensor, medal insertion button 131 sensor, medal insertion button 132 sensor, medal acceptance sensor for medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 141, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, reel 110 index sensor, reel 111 index sensor, reel 112 index sensor, etc.) at each interrupt time.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 receives this signal, latches the value at that timing, and stores it in a register that stores random numbers to be used in the lottery.

Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion port 141, and detect whether a medal has passed through. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect the start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, and stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The medal insertion button 130 sensor, medal insertion button 131 sensor, and medal insertion button 132 sensor are provided on each of the medal insertion buttons 130-132, and detect the insertion operation when medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals electronically stored are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact sensor or a contact sensor.

The index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the center reel 111, and the index sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110-112, and go to L level every time a light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes by. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero, and becomes able to calculate the stopping position of the reel.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided on the reels 110-112, a drive circuit 324 that drives a solenoid provided on the medal selector 170 that selects inserted medals, a drive circuit 326 that drives a motor provided on the medal payout device 180, and a drive circuit 328 that drives various lamps 338 (winning line indicator lamp 120, notification lamp 123, medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, number of stored medals indicator 125, game information indicator 126, payout number indicator 127).

In addition, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., game status) of the slot machine 100 to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334.

In addition, the main control unit 300 is equipped with an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400, enabling communication with the first sub-control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and while the main control unit 300 can send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, the first sub-control unit 400 cannot send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.
<Sub-control section>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands sent by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control commands. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also includes a ROM 406 that stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, and data for controlling the backlight lighting pattern and various displays.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sound source IC 418, which is connected to the speakers 272, 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272, 277 in response to commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by the amplifier and output from the speakers 272, 277.

The first sub-controller 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, to which various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) are connected via an input/output interface.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the performance image display device 157, the shutter 163, and the like. Note that the second sub-control unit 500 may be configured with multiple control units, such as a control unit that controls the performance image display device 157 and a control unit that controls the shutter 163.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 has a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. In addition, the second sub-control unit 500 has a ROM 506 in which control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-controller 500 is also provided with a drive circuit 530 that drives the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 530 is connected to the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 530 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 504.

The second sub-control unit 500 is also provided with a sensor circuit 532, which is connected to a shutter sensor 538 via an input interface. The CPU 504 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 538 at each interrupt time.

The second sub-control unit 500 is also provided with a VDP 534 (video display processor), which is connected to a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the performance image display device 157.
<Pattern arrangement>
The symbol arrangement on each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to Figure 205(a). Note that Figure 205(a) shows the symbol arrangement on each of the reels (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) in a two-dimensional layout.

Each reel 110-112 has multiple types of symbols (8 types in this embodiment) arranged on a predetermined number of frames (21 frames with the symbol number counter numbers from 0 to 20 in this embodiment. The symbol interval counter and symbol number counter will be described in detail later). The numbers 0 to 20 shown on the left of the figure indicate the arrangement position of the symbols on each reel 110-112. For example, in this embodiment, a BB symbol is arranged on the number 0 frame of the left reel 110, a replay symbol is arranged on the number 1 frame of the center reel 111, and a bell symbol is arranged on the number 2 frame of the right reel 112.

When a symbol combination displayed on a winning line becomes a symbol combination of a predetermined winning combination, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. In this embodiment, winning combinations include not only small combinations for which a predetermined number of medals are paid out, but also operating combinations, that is, big bonuses, which are combinations for which a game is switched to a bonus game, and replays, which are combinations for which a game can be played again without inserting new medals. In other words, in this embodiment, "winning" also includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a medal payout (does not involve the payment of medals) is displayed on a winning line, and includes, for example, winning a big bonus or replay. Winning combinations will be described in detail below. <Types of winning combinations>
FIG. 205(b) is a diagram showing the types of winning roles (including activated roles), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning role, and the activation or payout of each winning role.

Among the winning roles in this embodiment, the Big Bonus (BB) is a role that transitions to a bonus game, and the replay (Replay, Replay 2, Replay 3) is a role that allows replay without inserting new medals, and may be called "operating roles" to be distinguished from the winning roles, but the "winning roles" in this embodiment include the Big Bonus and replay, which are operating roles. Also, in this embodiment, "winning" includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating role that does not involve a medal payout (does not involve the payment of medals) is displayed on an active line, and includes, for example, winning the Big Bonus and winning the replay.

The winning combinations in this embodiment include a big bonus (BB), small combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replays (replay, replay 2, replay 3). The types of winning combinations are not limited to these and can be any combination. For example, a regular bonus may be provided in addition to a big bonus. Alternatively, neither a big bonus nor a regular bonus may be provided, and AT (assist time) or ART (assist replay time) may be used.

"Big Bonus (BB)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "BB") is a special role (operating role) that, when won, starts the special game Big Bonus Game (BB Game). The corresponding symbol combination for BB is "7-7-7". Also, for BB, a flag is carried over. That is, when an internal win is won for BB, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a specified area of RAM 308 of main control unit 300), but even if BB is not won in that game, the state in which the flag indicating the internal win is set (BB internal win state) is maintained until it is won, and BB remains an internal win even in the next game and thereafter, and the symbol combination "7-7-7" corresponding to BB is lined up, and it is in a state in which BB can be won.

"Small prizes (bell, watermelon, cherry)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "bell", "watermelon" and "cherry") are winning prizes in which a specified number of medals are paid out upon winning, and the corresponding symbol combinations are "bell-bell-bell" for bell, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" for watermelon, and "cherry-ANY-ANY" for cherry. The corresponding payout numbers are as shown in Figure 205(b). In the case of "cherry-ANY-ANY", the symbol on the left reel 110 needs to be "cherry", and the symbols on the center reel 111 and right reel 112 can be any symbol.

"Replay" is a winning combination (operating combination) that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals (game media), and no medals are paid out.

The corresponding symbol combinations are "Replay-Replay-Replay (normal replay)" for replay role 1 (Replay), "Replay-Replay-Bell (high probability replay replay)" for replay role 2 (Replay 2), and "Replay-Bell-Replay (high probability replay breakthrough replay)" for replay role 3 (Replay 3). If Replay 2 is won in the normal game state, the internal winning probability of the replay (replay role) will transition to a high probability state (high replay probability state), but if Replay 3 is won in the high replay probability state, the game will return to the normal game state.
<Reel rotation device>
Next, the reel rotation device 10 that rotates the reels 110 to 112 of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 206 to 208. Fig. 206 is an external perspective view showing the reel rotation device 10 of the slot machine 100, which is generally composed of reel drive units 20 to 40 and a case member 12 that houses them. The reel drive units 20 to 40 are all made of the same components structurally, except that the arrangement of the patterns (see Fig. 205(a)) printed on the reel band 610 (see Fig. 207) is different. Each of the reel drive units 20 to 40 (below, the reel drive unit 20 will be described because they have the same configuration) is individually housed in the case member 12 in a detachable manner.

Figure 207 is an exploded perspective view of the reel drive unit 20. Figure 208(a) is a simplified side view showing the reel drive unit 20 assembled, and Figure 208(b) is a simplified front view thereof. Note that for the sake of convenience, some components are omitted from Figures 208(a) and (b). The reel drive unit 20 has, as a configuration for displaying moving patterns, a reel 110, a drive device 604 that drives the reel 110 to rotate, a rotation detection device 606 that detects the rotational position of the reel 110, and a reel illumination device 608 that illuminates the patterns on each reel 110 from inside the reel 110.

The reel 110 is composed of a thin-walled cylindrical reel band 610, a first reel frame 612 attached to the left side of the reel band 610 and supporting the left side of the reel band 610, and a second reel frame 614 attached to the right side of the reel band 610 and supporting the right side of the reel band 610.

The first reel frame 612 is composed of an annular frame portion 612A, six support portions 612B that extend from the frame portion 612A toward the center of the frame portion 612A, and a cylindrical attachment portion 612C that protrudes from the tip ends of the six support portions 612B toward the drive unit 604.

A plate-shaped light-shielding piece 612D is formed on one of the six support parts 612B so as to protrude toward the rotation detection device 606, and is configured so that this light-shielding piece 612D passes between the light-emitting part and the light-receiving part of the index sensor 606A (described later). In addition, four engagement recesses are formed at four locations in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical mounting part 612C, at approximately equal intervals (approximately 90 degree intervals in this example). These four engagement recesses are respectively fitted into four engagement protrusions of the movable body gear 620, thereby engaging and fixing the first reel frame 612 to the movable body gear 620.

The second reel frame 614 is made of a circular ring-shaped member of approximately the same diameter as the frame portion 612A of the first reel frame 612, and is disposed on the opposite side of the first reel frame 612 across the reel band 610.

The driving device 604 is composed of a driving motor 616, a driving gear 618 attached to the motor shaft 616A of the driving motor 616, a movable gear 620 meshing with the driving gear 618, and a base 622 that rotatably supports the movable gear 620 via a support member 623 and a washer 621. The driving motor 616 and base 622 are fixed to a plate-shaped metal frame 626 by a number of mounting screws 624.

In this embodiment, the drive motor 616 is configured as a 1-2 phase excitation stepping motor 700 (details will be described later). The movable gear 620 is configured as a gear with a larger diameter than the drive gear 618, and the movable gear 620 and the drive gear 618 form a gear set. As described above, the movable gear 620 is engaged with the mounting portion 612C of the first reel frame 612, and then fixed to the first reel frame 612 using the mounting screw 624 and washer 621, and is rotatably supported by the base 622, so that it can rotate together with the first reel frame 612.

The rotation detection device 606 is composed of an optical index sensor 606A consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section, and a mounting base 606B on which the index sensor 606A is attached. The light-shielding piece 612D provided on the first reel frame 612 passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of the index sensor 606A (see FIG. 208(b)). The mounting base 606B is fixed to the metal frame 626 by a mounting screw 624. The slot machine 100 determines the rotational position of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 based on the detection result of the rotation detection device 606, and stops the reels 110 to 112 so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line 114. That is, the main control unit 300 resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero by detecting the light-shielding piece 612D of the rotating reel 110 by the index sensor 606A, and becomes able to control the stop position of the reel.

The reel illumination device 608 is composed of an illumination board 608B having one cold cathode tube disposed in the center, an illumination case 608C including a light guide plate for guiding light emitted from the cold cathode tube in a predetermined direction with the illumination board 608B attached, and a back cover 608A covering the back surface of the illumination board 608B. With the illumination board 608B and back cover 608A attached, the illumination case 608C is fixed to a metal frame 626 by mounting screws 624.
<Stepping motor>
FIG. 209 is an exploded perspective view of the stepping motor 700. As shown in FIG. 209, the stepping motor 700 is composed of a motor shaft 710, a case member 720 supporting the motor shaft 710, a first bearing 722 and a second bearing 724 arranged in the case member 720 and supporting the motor shaft 710, a stator 730 arranged inside the case member 720 and consisting of a fixed electromagnet, and a rotor 740 rotatably attached to the motor shaft 710. The stepping motor 700 of this embodiment is a PM (Permanent Magnet) type stepping motor, and is configured so that the motor rotates once in 96 steps of a 1-2 phase excitation type. In this embodiment, the gear ratio of the reel and the motor is 1:5.25, so that the reel rotates once in 504 steps (=5.25×96).

The motor shaft 710 is a shaft to which the drive gear 618 shown in Figures 207 and 208 is attached and which outputs power. Hereinafter, the end of the motor shaft 710 to which the drive gear 618 is attached will be referred to as the output end 710A, and the opposite end will be referred to as the rear end 710B.

The case member 720 is a hollow cylinder with a bottom, consisting of a substantially cylindrical base portion 720A with one end open, and a lid portion 720B arranged to cover the opening of the base portion 720A. The case member 720 accommodates the stator 730 and rotor 740 inside, and supports the motor shaft 710, which passes from the bottom of the base portion 720A to the lid portion 720B, via a first bearing 722 and a second bearing 724. The base portion 720A is also provided with a fixing member 720C having a hole through which a mounting screw 624 is inserted to fix and support the base portion 720A to the metal frame 626 shown in FIG. 207.

The first bearing 722 is a roughly cylindrical sliding bearing that is disposed approximately in the center of the cover portion 720B of the case member 720 and rotatably supports the motor shaft 710 near the output end 710A.

The second bearing 724 is a generally cylindrical sliding bearing that is disposed approximately in the center of the bottom of the base portion 720A of the case member 720 and rotatably supports the motor shaft 710 near the rear end 710B.

The stator 730 is disposed so as to surround the rotor 740, and the drive coil is wound in two stages (A phase, B phase). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 209, the magnetic pole teeth form a triangle (the upper side is called A phase and B phase, and the lower side is called A-phase and B-phase. The A phase and B phase have a phase relationship of 90 degrees electrical angle, and the A phase and the B phase and the B phase have a phase relationship of 180 degrees electrical angle), and each magnetic pole (A phase, A phase, B phase, B phase) has 12 teeth per circumference. FIG. 210 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the magnetic poles of the stator 730. As shown in FIG. 210, the magnetic poles are arranged circumferentially in the order of A phase, B phase, A-phase, B-phase in a clockwise direction.

In this embodiment, the rotor 740 is made of a permanent magnet and has 24 magnetic poles.

Here, we will explain the operating principle of the stepping motor 700. The stepping motor 700 is configured to pass a current through the coil wound around the stator 730, magnetize each phase of the stator 730 in sequence based on an excitation pattern described below, and attract the rotor 740 with a magnetic force, thereby rotating the rotor 740.

In the 1-2 phase excitation type, the four phases of the stator 730 described above are excited in the following order, for example: A phase (1-phase excitation) → A phase and B phase (hereinafter referred to as AB phase; 2-phase excitation) → B phase (1-phase excitation) → A-phase and B phase (hereinafter referred to as A-B phase; 2-phase excitation) → A-phase (1-phase excitation) → A-phase and B-phase (hereinafter referred to as A-B-phase; 2-phase excitation) → B-phase (1-phase excitation) → A phase and B-phase (hereinafter referred to as AB-phase; 2-phase excitation) → A phase (1-phase excitation) → ... to rotate the rotor 740 in a fixed direction.

More specifically, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 excites a specific phase by outputting an on-level pulse signal (e.g., a high-level signal) to the phase to be excited of the stator 730 of the stepping motor 700 via the drive circuit 322 shown in FIG. 204, and at the same time outputting an off-level pulse signal (e.g., a low-level signal) to the phase not to be excited. This causes the rotor 740 of the stepping motor 700 to rotate by a specific angle (one step). For example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 excites only the A phase by outputting an on-level pulse signal to the A phase of the stator 730 of the stepping motor 700, and at the same time outputting an off-level pulse signal to the B phase, the A-phase, and the B-phase, thereby rotating the rotor by one pulse (one step), and thereafter, by switching the excitation in the above-mentioned order, the rotor is rotated by a specific pulse. In the following, a rotation of eight pulses (eight steps) from A phase → AB phase → B phase → A-B phase → A-phase → A-B-phase → B-phase → AB-phase (or A phase → AB-phase → B-phase → A-B-phase → A-phase → A-B phase → B-phase → AB phase) will be referred to as one cycle.

In this embodiment, as described above, the number of pulses required to rotate the reel once (360 degrees) is set to 504 pulses (504 pulses/8 pulses = 63 cycles). Therefore, the rotation angle of the rotor 740 per pulse is approximately 0.71428 degrees (= 360/504).

In addition, the number of steps (number of pulses) required to rotate the reel once (360 degrees) is 504 steps, and since there are 21 symbols arranged on one reel as explained using Figure 205 (a), the number of steps for one frame is 504/21 = 24 steps.
<Excitation table>
The drive signal output from the CPU 304 to the drive circuit 322 is stored as an excitation table in the ROM 306. The CPU 304 outputs a specified drive signal by referring to this excitation table. FIG. 211 is a table showing the contents of the excitation table in this embodiment. The data of each excitation table (which is also called rotation control data because it is data for controlling the rotation of the reels) is configured to represent the exciting phase and excitation force by combining six bits of data (specifically, A-I0, A-I1, A-Phase, B-I0, B-I1, B-Phase). Specifically, the combination of A-I0 and A-I1 indicates the magnitude of the current (excitation force) for exciting the A-phase or A-phase coil, and when A-I0 is 0 and A-I1 is 0, it is 0%, when A-I0 is 1 and A-I1 is 0, it is 20%, when A-I0 is 0 and A-I1 is 1, it is 60%, and when A-I0 is 1 and A-I1 is 1, it is 100%. When A-Phase is 1, it indicates excitation of A-phase, and when it is 0, it indicates excitation of A-phase. Similarly, the combination of B-I0 and B-I1 indicates the magnitude of the current (excitation force) for exciting the B-phase or B-phase coil; when B-I0 is 0 and B-I1 is 0, it is 0%; when B-I0 is 1 and B-I1 is 0, it is 20%; when B-I0 is 0 and B-I1 is 1, it is 60%; and when B-I0 is 1 and B-I1 is 1, it is 100%. When B-Phase is 1, it indicates excitation of B-phase, and when it is 0, it indicates excitation of B-phase.

For example, in the excitation table "55H" with table number "B0", A-I0 is 1, A-I1 is 0, A-Phase is 1, B-I0 is 1, B-I1 is 0, and B-Phase is 1, so it indicates that A and B phases are excited at 20%. Also, in the excitation table "26H" with table number "C2", A-I0 is 0, A-I1 is 1, A-Phase is 1, B-I0 is 0, B-I1 is 0, and B-Phase is 0, so it indicates that A phase is excited at 60% (B-phase is 0%, so there is no excitation). Therefore, when the table number is switched from "C0" to "C1" to "C2" to "C3" to "C4" to "C5" to "C6" to "C7", each phase is excited to 60% in the order of AB phase → A phase → AB-phase → B-phase → A-B-phase → A-phase → A-B phase → B phase, and the rotor 740 can be rotated by an angle of one cycle. In this manner, in this embodiment, the reel is controlled to rotate by outputting the data (rotation control data) of the excitation table composed of 6 bits as a drive signal to the drive circuit 322. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 211, an excitation force of 0% is also expressed as no excitation, an excitation force of 20% is also expressed as weak excitation, an excitation force of 60% is also expressed as medium excitation, and an excitation force of 100% is also expressed as strong excitation.
<Rotation control table>
212 is a table showing the contents of the spin control table of this embodiment. The spin control table is stored in the ROM 306, and stores the contents of spin control for each reel control status (specifically, it is composed of a general-purpose offset counter value, an excitation table, and a retention parameter). The reel control status is information about the control state of the reel that is stored independently for each of the reels 110 to 112, and stores any one of the following information: "stop control state (stop control under)", which is information indicating that each of the reels 110 to 112 is in a stopped state; "acceleration state (acceleration control under)", which is information indicating that each of the reels 110 to 112 is in an accelerating state; "constant speed state (constant speed control under)", which is information indicating that each of the reels 110 to 112 is in a constant speed state; "retraction state (retraction control under)", which is information indicating that each of the reels 110 to 112 is in a retracted state; "brake state (brake control under)", which is information indicating that each of the reels 110 to 112 is in a braked state; or "reel performance control under" which is information indicating that each of the reels 110 to 112 is in a reel performance (details will be described later). In this embodiment, the constant speed state is further classified into two states with different excitation forces, namely, a "constant speed 1 state (constant speed 1 control)" which is set immediately after the acceleration state, and a "constant speed 2 state (constant speed 2 control)" which is set immediately after the constant speed 1 state (constant speed 1 control). The constant speed 1 state is provided to stably rotate the reels 110 to 112 and to save power, and the constant speed 2 state is provided to further weaken the excitation force and suppress heat generation of the reels 110 to 112. The slot machine 100 of this embodiment changes the reel control status from stop control → acceleration control → constant speed 1 control → constant speed 2 control → pull-in control → brake control → stop control, and controls the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 by selecting an excitation table (spin control data) corresponding to each reel status.

For example, when the reel control status is "Acceleration Control", as shown in FIG. 212, first, the rotation control data of the excitation table "77H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "0" is held for a "12" time, then the rotation control data of the excitation table "07H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "1" is held for a "12" time, then the rotation control data of the excitation table "37H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "2" is held for a "3" time, then the rotation control data of the excitation table "30H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "3" is held for a "3" time, and so on. In this manner, the rotation control data is set sequentially from the top row of the table to the bottom row. Then, the holding times of the rotation control data that are set sequentially are gradually reduced, thereby accelerating the reels 110 to 112.

The general-purpose offset counter value is a number (originating at 0) that indicates the order in which each rotation control data is executed in each reel control status, and is a cyclic value that returns to 0 after 7. The retention time (retention parameter) indicates the time for which the set rotation control data is retained, with one retention time indicating one interrupt time (for example, 1.49 ms). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 212, during "acceleration control" in this embodiment, 1-2 phase 100% excitation (strong excitation) is performed, and it is configured to take 89.4 ms (= 1.49 x 60) time.

In addition, when the reel control status is "Constant speed 1 control", as shown in FIG. 212, first, the rotation control data of the excitation table "77H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "0" is held for a "1" time, then the rotation control data of the excitation table "07H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "1" is held for a "1" time, then the rotation control data of the excitation table "37H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "2" is held for a "1" time, and so on. The rotation control data listed in the table is set in sequence from the top row to the bottom row, and 16 times are repeated as one set. In other words, the rotation control data that is set in sequence is switched at one holding time and 16 sets are executed, so that the reel is rotated at a stable constant speed. As a result, "Constant speed 1 control" in this embodiment is configured to require 190.72 ms (= 1.49 x 8 x 16 sets) at 1-2 phase 100% excitation (strong excitation). During the constant speed 1 control described above, a control pattern, such as one set of rotation control data, is always repeated a predetermined number of times.

In addition, when the reel control status is "Constant Speed 2 Control", as shown in FIG. 212, first, the rotation control data of the excitation table "66H" corresponding to the universal offset counter value "0" is held for a "1" time, then the rotation control data of the excitation table "06H" corresponding to the universal offset counter value "1" is held for a "1" time, then the rotation control data of the excitation table "26H" corresponding to the universal offset counter value "2" is held for a "1" time, and so on. In other words, the reel is rotated at a constant speed by switching the rotation control data that is set sequentially at one holding time. As a result, in the "Constant Speed 2 Control" of this embodiment, the state of 1-2 phase 60% excitation (medium excitation) is continued until a stop operation is performed in the stop possible state, which will be described in detail later. The constant speed 2 control described above repeats a control pattern, such as rotation control data with a general-purpose offset counter value of "0" to "7", an indefinite number of times, and ends the constant speed 2 control even in the middle of the control pattern when a stop operation is performed in a stoppable state.

In addition, when the reel control status is "pulling in control", the rotation control data used in "constant speed 2 control" continues to be set in sequence. For example, when "constant speed 2 control" is performed, if the rotation control data of the excitation table "42H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "5" is set to a "1" hold time and then the rotation control data of the excitation table "62H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "6" is set to a "1" hold time, then the rotation control data of the excitation table "64H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "7" is set to a "1" hold time, and then the number of steps corresponding to the number of pull-in frames (number of pull-in frames x 24), the rotation control data of each excitation table corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value 0 to 7 is set to a "1" hold time in sequence (to stop at AB phase in this embodiment).

In the following explanation, the process is divided into the second constant speed control process (Fig. 222) and the retraction control process (Fig. 225), but "constant speed 2 control in progress" and "retraction control in progress" are combined to represent the "second constant speed control" shown in Fig. 212.

In addition, when the reel control status is "Brake Controlled", as shown in FIG. 212, 1-2 phase 100% excitation (strong excitation) is performed for 74.5 ms, which applies a brake to the rotating reel and stops the reel.

Furthermore, when the reel control status is "reel stop control in progress", the stopped state is maintained by continuing 1-2 phase 20% excitation (weak excitation) as shown in FIG.
<Operation>
Next, the operation of the slot machine 100 equipped with the above-mentioned stepping motor 700 will be described.
<Main processing of main control unit>
First, the main processing of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 213. Note that Fig. 213 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit 300.

The basic control of the game is performed primarily by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and unless a power outage or other problem is detected, the CPU 304 repeatedly executes the main control unit main process shown in the figure.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, various initial settings are performed. In these initial settings, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 shown in FIG. 204, interrupt prohibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and operation permission and initial values are set to the WDT 314.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, whether or not a medal has been inserted is checked, and the winning line indicator lamp 120 shown in FIG. 202 is turned on in response to the insertion of a medal. In addition, preparations are made to send a medal insertion command to the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 204, indicating that a medal has been inserted. If a player wins in a replay in the previous game, a process is performed to insert the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game, so that the player does not need to insert medals. In addition, a check is made to see if the start lever 135 has been operated, and if it is determined that a start operation has been performed, the number of medals inserted is determined, the valid winning line is determined, and the random numbers (first random number value and second random number value) generated by the random number generating circuit 316 are obtained. In addition, in this step S102, preparations are made to send a start lever acceptance command to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, an internal lottery process for winning combinations is performed. Details of this internal lottery process for winning combinations will be described later.

In step S104, a reel stop preparation process is performed. In the reel stop preparation process, reel stop data is selected for each of the reels 110 to 112 based on the results of the winning combination internal lottery process in step S103, etc.

In step S105, a reel spin start process is executed based on the start operation, which starts the rotation of all reels 110 to 112. The details of this reel spin start process will be described later.

Steps S106 and S107 are performed for each reel, and are repeated three times for the three reels 110 to 112. A stop button acceptance flag is prepared for each reel in the RAM 308. Stop buttons 137 to 139 are provided in one-to-one correspondence for each reel, and the stop button acceptance flag also corresponds to the stop buttons 137 to 139 in one-to-one correspondence. This stop button acceptance flag is set to either acceptable or not acceptable. In step S106, since the reel rotation start process (step S105) has started, this stop button acceptance flag is set to acceptable. The stop button acceptance flag is set to not acceptable when the corresponding stop button is operated in the stop button acceptance process in the reel rotation control process executed in the main control unit timer interrupt process described later. In step S107, it is determined whether the stop button acceptance flag set to acceptable in step S106 has returned to not acceptable. This step S107 is repeatedly executed until the stop button acceptance flag returns to not acceptable. That is, in step S107, the system waits for the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 to be accepted. When the determination in step S107 for all three reels 110 to 112 becomes Yes, all three reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In the next step S108, a winning determination is made for the symbols that have stopped due to the operation of the stop buttons 137-139. Here, if a winning symbol combination that corresponds to an internally won winning symbol or a winning symbol for which a flag is being carried over is lined up (displayed) on an activated winning line, it is determined that the winning symbol has been won. For example, if "replay-replay-replay" is lined up on an activated winning line, it is determined that a replay has been won. Also, in this step S108, preparations are made to send a display determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, a medal payout process is performed. In this medal payout process, if any winning combination that entails a payout is achieved, the number of medals corresponding to that winning combination is paid out.

In step S110, a game state control process is performed. In this game state control process, control is performed to transition the game state; for example, in the case of a BB (big bonus) win, preparations are made so that a BB (big bonus) game can be started from the next time, and in the case of the final game, preparations are made so that normal game can be started from the next time. Also, in this step S110, preparations are made to send a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control unit 400.

This completes one game. After this, the process returns to step S102 and the above-mentioned processing is repeated to progress the game. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting and transmission process (step S209 shown in FIG. 216) of the main control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.
<Internal lottery process for winning roles>
FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the internal lottery process for determining a winning combination in step S103 shown in FIG.

In step S1031, an internal lottery for the winning combination shown in FIG. 205(b) is performed using the first random number value obtained in step S102 and the winning combination lottery table stored in ROM 306. If any winning combination is internally won as a result of this internal lottery, the flag for that winning combination is internally turned on.

Next, in step S1032, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a reel effect can be executed. A reel effect is an effect in which a spinning reel appears to have stopped, and in a reel effect, strictly speaking, the reel is not stopped but swings. In this embodiment, the reel effects include a first reel effect that does not require any operation by the player, and a second reel effect that requires the player to operate the stop buttons 137 to 139. The first reel effect is a so-called reel action, and the second reel effect is a so-called pseudo game. The lottery here uses the second random number value obtained in step S102 and a reel effect execution lottery table stored in ROM 306 to derive one of the lottery results of executing the first reel effect, executing the second reel effect, and not executing the reel effect.

In step S1033, it is determined whether or not the first reel effect (reel action) has been won, and if it has been won, the reel effect information prepared in RAM 308 is set to have a first reel effect (step S1034), and the process proceeds to step S1035. On the other hand, if it has not been won, the process proceeds directly to step S1035.

In step S1035, it is determined whether or not the second reel effect (simulated game) has been won, and if it has been won, the reel effect information prepared in RAM 308 is set to include the second reel effect (step S1036), and the process proceeds to step S1037. On the other hand, if it has not been won, the process proceeds directly to step S1037.

In step S1037, preparations are made to send an internal lottery result command indicating the results of the internal lotteries for each winning role and reel effect to the first sub-control unit 400, and the winning role internal lottery process is then terminated.
<Reel spin start process>
FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the reel spin start processing of step S105 shown in FIG.

In step S1050, the game time monitoring timer value is obtained. The game time monitoring timer is a timer stored in a specific memory area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and is set for the purpose of limiting the time required for one game to be equal to or greater than a predetermined time (for example, the minimum game time of 4.1 seconds), limiting the number of game media gained or lost per unit time, and limiting the gambling nature of the game. The game time monitoring timer is set to a predetermined timer value (for example, a timer value equivalent to 4.1 seconds) in step S1052 described below, and is decremented each time the timer interrupt process (described below) of the main control unit 300 is executed.

In step S1051, it is determined whether the acquired game time monitoring timer value has exceeded 4.1 seconds. In other words, if the game time monitoring timer value is 0, then 4.1 seconds or more have passed, but if the game time monitoring timer value is greater than 0, then 4.1 seconds have not passed. If the game time monitoring timer value is 4.1 seconds or more, the current game may be started, and the process proceeds to step S1052. On the other hand, if the game time monitoring timer value has not exceeded 4.1 seconds, the process returns to step S1050 and the process is repeated. During the process, the timer value of the game time monitoring timer is decremented for each timer interrupt of the main control unit 300, and when the game time monitoring timer reaches 0, the process proceeds to step S1052.

In step S1052, the game time monitoring timer value is reset. Specifically, a timer value equivalent to 4.1 seconds is stored in a specific area of RAM 308. In this embodiment, the time when the game time monitoring timer value is set is the start timing of one game. The end timing of one game is the time when the game time monitoring timer value is set next. In other words, one game is from when the game time monitoring timer value is set to when the next game time monitoring timer value is set. In addition, since the game time monitoring timer value is set each time each reel 110 to 112 starts rotating, one game can also be the period from when each reel 110 to 112 starts rotating to when each reel 110 to 112 starts rotating next time. In addition, the end timing of one game may be when the game time monitoring timer value becomes 0 and the game state control process of S110 in FIG. 213 ends. Also, the start timing of one game may be the time when a valid start lever is accepted, and the end timing of one game may be the time when a valid bet button operation can be accepted, and the period from when a bet button operation can be accepted to when a valid start lever is accepted may be the preparation period for the start of the next game.

In step S1053, the reel spin start command to be sent to the first sub-controller 400 is set and prepared for transmission. The reel spin start command is a command that indicates the start of spinning of reels 110 to 112.

In step S1054, the status of the left reel 110 is set to "start spinning."

In step S1055, the status of center reel 111 is set to "start spinning."

In step S1056, the status of the right reel 112 is set to "start spinning."

In step S1057, it is determined whether the reel effect information set in step S1034 or step S1036 shown in FIG. 214 has the first reel effect or the second reel effect. If it has, the reel control status is set to "reel effect control in progress" (step S1058), and the reel spin start process is terminated. If it has not, the reel control status is set to "acceleration state (acceleration control in progress)" (step S1058), and the reel spin start process is terminated. As described above, the reel control status is information on the control state of the reels that is stored independently for each of the reels 110 to 112 in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and any one of the following information is stored: "stop control state (stop control in progress)", "acceleration state (acceleration control in progress)", "constant speed 1 state (constant speed 1 control in progress)", "constant speed 2 state (constant speed 2 control in progress)", "retraction state (retraction control in progress)", "brake state (brake control in progress)", or "reel effect control in progress". Also, in step S1059, an acceleration start request flag is set to ON. The acceleration start request flag is flag information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and is referred to in the acceleration control process described later.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 216. Note that Fig. 216 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 1.5 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to execute the main control unit timer interrupt process at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. This timer interrupt start process includes processes such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to a stack area.

In step S202, the WDT is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 1.49 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that a processing abnormality is not detected).

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update processing, detection signals from the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input ports of the I/O 310 shown in FIG. 204 to monitor the presence or absence of detection signals, and the presence or absence of detection signals is stored in signal status storage areas partitioned for each of the various sensors 318 in the RAM 308.

In step S204, various game processes are performed. Specifically, an interrupt status is acquired (various interrupt statuses are acquired based on signals from various sensors 318 shown in FIG. 204), and processing is performed according to this status. For example, if the interrupt status is during medal insertion processing, medal insertion acceptance processing is performed, and if the interrupt status is during payout processing, medal payout processing is performed.

In step S205, a timer update process is performed. Various timers are updated according to their respective time units. In this embodiment, specifically, the game time monitoring timer described above is updated by subtracting the timer.

In step S206, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring processing, first, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S1003 are read out to monitor for errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc., and error processing is performed if an error is detected. Furthermore, depending on the current game state, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 338, and various seven-segment (SEG) displays are set.

In step S207, a stop button display control process is performed. Details of the stop button display control process will be described later.

In step S208, if the status of each reel stored in RAM 308 is "start spinning", a reel spin control process (described in detail below) is performed. In this reel spin control process, the spin of the reels is controlled, and the reel stop data to be actually used for the reel stop control is determined from the multiple reel stop data candidates selected in step S106 of the main control unit main process according to the stop order and stop status of the reels 110 to 112, and then the spin of the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop buttons 137 to 139 is stopped based on the determined reel stop data.

In step S209, a command setting and sending process is performed, and various commands are sent to the first sub-control unit 400. In this embodiment, the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, with bit 15 being strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 being command types (in this embodiment, basic commands, start lever acceptance commands, internal lottery commands, rotation start commands associated with starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112, stop button acceptance commands associated with accepting the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, stop position information commands associated with the stopping process of the reels 110 to 112, payout number commands and payout end commands associated with the medal payout process, etc.), and bits 0 to 10 being command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

The first sub-control unit 400 can determine the presentation control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300 based on the command type contained in the received output schedule information, and can determine the content of the presentation control based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S210, an external signal output process is performed. In this external signal output process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to an information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 shown in FIG. 204.

In step S211, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is ON or not. If the low voltage signal is ON (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S213, and if the low voltage signal is OFF (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S212.

In step S212, various processes (timer interrupt end process) are performed to end the timer interrupt process. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set back to the original registers. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 213.

On the other hand, in step S213, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage when power is restored are saved as recovery data in a specified area of RAM 308, power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and then the process returns to the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 213.
<Stop button display control process>
Next, the stop button display control process will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 217. Note that Fig. 217 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the stop button display control process in step S207 shown in Fig. 216.

In step S2071, it is determined whether any one of the stop button reception flags corresponding to each of the three reels 110 to 112 is set to "acceptable". As described above, the stop button reception flag is set to "acceptable" for each reel (each stop button) in step S106 in the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 213. If all stop button reception flags are set to "prohibited", this stop button display control processing ends, and if one or more stop button reception flags are set to "acceptable", this time it is determined whether all reels 110 to 112 have transitioned to the constant speed 2 state by referring to the reel control status of each reel (step S2702). In this step S2702, if the reel control status of each reel is any of "constant speed 2 state", "retracted state", and "brake state", the determination result is Yes, and the process proceeds to step S2703. On the other hand, if the reel control status of even one reel is "accelerated state" or "constant speed 1 state", this stop button display control processing ends.

In step S2703, it is determined whether or not a light-blocking piece has been detected by the index sensor for all reels 110-112. An index sensor detection memory area is provided in RAM 308 for each reel in which detection information indicating whether or not the index sensor has detected a light-blocking piece is stored, and in step S2703, the index sensor detection memory area for all reels is referenced to make a determination. If undetected detection information is stored for even one reel, this stop button display control process ends. On the other hand, if detection information indicating detection has been stored for all reels 110-112, the process proceeds to step S2704.

The RAM 308 is also provided with a light emission mode storage area for storing the light emission modes of the light emitters 137a to 139a provided inside the respective stop buttons 137 to 139. That is, a light emission mode storage area is provided for each reel (stop button). The initial light emission mode of the light emitters 137a to 139a is, for example, a non-light emission mode (light-off mode) or a light emission mode of a first color. Hereinafter, the initial light emission mode is referred to as a first light emission mode. The light emission mode storage area initially stores the first light emission mode as the light emission mode information. In the situation that has progressed to step S2704, all the reels 110 to 112 are not stopped (at least one reel is rotating), all the reels 110 to 112 have been shifted to the constant speed 2 state, and a light-shielding piece has been detected. In this state, the light emission mode of the light emitters provided inside the stop buttons for the reels that continue to rotate in the constant speed 2 state is changed from the first light emission mode to the second light emission mode. The second light-emitting mode may be, for example, a blinking mode or a second color light-emitting mode. In addition, when the first light-emitting mode is the first color light-emitting mode, it may be a non-light-emitting mode (light-off mode). Furthermore, when the second light-emitting mode is the second color light-emitting mode, the first light-emitting mode may be a blinking mode. In this way, the first light-emitting mode and the second light-emitting mode may be different from each other, including a light-off mode and a blinking mode. The second light-emitting mode is a mode that notifies that the operation of the stop button of the second light-emitting mode is in a state in which the operation of the stop button corresponding to the second light-emitting mode is in a state in which the stop button can be operated. In step S2704, the light-emitting body information in the light-emitting mode storage area of the reel whose stop button reception flag is set to reception is updated to the second light-emitting mode, and the stop button display control process is terminated. By executing this step S2704, for example, if all of the reels 110-112 are not stopped, all of the reels 110-112 have transitioned to the constant speed 2 state, and a light-blocking piece has been detected, the light emission modes of the light-emitting bodies 137a-139a provided inside all of the stop buttons 137-139 change to the second light emission mode in unison. Also, if some of the reels are stopped and the remaining reels have transitioned to the constant speed 2 state and a light-blocking piece has been detected, only the light emission mode of the light-emitting bodies provided inside the stop buttons of the remaining reels (the reels that are spinning) changes to the second light emission mode.
<Reel rotation control process>
Next, the reel spin control process will be described in detail with reference to Figure 218. Note that Figure 218 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the reel spin control process in step S208 shown in Figure 216.

Steps S208a to S208c are performed for each reel, and since they are performed for the three reels 110 to 112, step S208a is repeated at least three times. In this step S208a, it is determined whether the stop button reception flag is set to reception possible. In other words, it is determined whether the target reel is spinning. If the stop button reception flag is set to reception prohibited, step S208a is executed for the remaining reels, or if step S208a has been executed for all reels, it proceeds to step S208d. On the other hand, if the stop button reception flag is set to reception possible, it is determined whether the light-shielding piece of the target reel is detected by the index sensor (step S208b). In this determination, it is determined whether a detection signal has been received from the index sensor, and if it has not been received, step S208a is executed for the remaining reels, or if step S208a has been executed for all reels, it proceeds to step S208d. On the other hand, if the signal has been received, the index sensor detection storage area of the target reel is updated to the already detected detection information (step S208c), and the process proceeds to step S208d. In this manner, in this embodiment, whenever the reel rotation control process is executed, if the stop button reception flag is set to reception, it is determined whether or not the light-shielding piece of the target reel has been detected by the index sensor, and the light-shielding piece of the target reel can be detected even if the reel control status is in the "accelerating state" or the "constant speed 1 state". However, if the light-shielding piece is to be detected only in a "certain state" (for example, the "constant speed 1 state" or the "constant speed 2 state"), the reel control status is referenced between steps S208a and S208b to determine whether or not the state is "certain", and if the answer is Yes, step S208b is executed, and if the answer is No, step S208a is executed for the remaining reels, or if step S208a has been executed for all reels, the process proceeds to step S208d.

In step S208d, the stop button acceptance process is executed. This stop button acceptance process will be described later.

Steps S208f to S208k are performed for each reel, that is, for the three reels 110 to 112. In step S208f, reel control information is obtained. Here, reel control information means all information related to the rotation control of the reels 110 to 112, and is stored in a specified area of the RAM 308. In this embodiment, the reel control information includes values such as the reel control status described above, the general-purpose offset counter, the reel control status transition counter described below, and the retention counter.

In step S208g, a reel control determination process (described in detail below) is performed based on the acquired reel control information.

In step S208h, it is determined whether the reel drive signal switching request flag is ON. The reel drive signal switching request flag is flag information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and indicates whether the currently set rotation control data is to be switched. If the reel drive signal switching request flag is ON, the currently set rotation control data is switched, and if the reel drive signal switching request flag is OFF, the currently set rotation control data is not switched. The reel drive signal switching request flag is set in the acceleration control process. If the reel drive signal switching request flag is ON, proceed to step S208i, and if the reel drive signal switching request flag is OFF, proceed to step S208k.

In step S208i, rotation control data is obtained based on the reel control status and the general-purpose offset counter value contained in the obtained reel control information. Specifically, the corresponding excitation table (spin control data) is obtained from the table shown in FIG. 212 based on the reel control status and the general-purpose offset counter value. For example, if the reel control status is "acceleration control in progress" and the general-purpose offset counter value is "0", the rotation control data of the excitation table "77H" is obtained.

In step S208j, the rotation control data obtained in step S208i is set.

In step S208k, since the contents of the reel control information have been changed in accordance with the above-mentioned processing, the reel control information is updated.
<Reel control determination process>
Fig. 219 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the reel control determination process in step S208g shown in Fig. 218. The reel control determination process is a process for sequentially switching the reel rotation control according to the above-mentioned reel control status. Specifically, the processes are executed in the following order: acceleration control process, reel performance control process, first constant speed control process, second constant speed control process, retraction control process, and brake control process.

In step S301, the reel control status is obtained.

In step S302, it is determined whether the acquired reel control status is "stop control in progress", and if the acquired reel control status is "stop control in progress", the reel control determination process ends. On the other hand, if the acquired reel control status is not "stop control in progress", the process proceeds to S303.

In step S303, it is determined whether the acquired reel control state is "reel performance control in progress". When the reel control state is "reel performance control in progress", the process proceeds to step S304, where reel performance control processing is performed. As described above, there are two types of reel performance: the first reel performance (so-called reel action) that does not require player operation, and the reel performance (so-called pseudo game) that requires the player to operate the left, center, and right stop buttons 137 to 139. In the control of the first reel performance, at least one of the control processes of the acceleration control, first constant speed control, second constant speed control, and brake control of this game may be used, or each control process dedicated to the first reel performance control may be prepared. In addition, in the first reel performance, the reel may be accelerated and then decelerated (brake control is executed) before maintaining the constant speed state. In controlling the second reel performance, at least one of the control processes of the acceleration control, first constant speed control, second constant speed control, brake control, and retraction control of this game may be used, or each control process may be prepared specifically for reel performance control. In addition, retraction control based on the number of slipping frames of five or more, which is not possible in this game, may be performed. After the reel performance ends, a random delay process is performed to delay the timing at which each reel starts to spin so that multiple reels do not start spinning at the same time, and then the reel control status is set to under acceleration control. On the other hand, if the reel control state is not "under reel performance control", proceed to step S305.

In step S305, it is determined whether the acquired reel control state is "acceleration control in progress." If the reel control state is "acceleration control in progress," the process proceeds to step S306, where acceleration control processing (control processing for accelerating the rotation of the reels; details will be described later) is performed. On the other hand, if the reel control state is not "acceleration control in progress," the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S307, it is determined whether the acquired reel control state is "constant speed 1 control in progress." If the reel control state is "constant speed 1 control in progress," the process proceeds to step S308, where a first constant speed control process (control process for maintaining the rotation of the reel at a constant speed; details will be described later) is performed. On the other hand, if the reel control state is not "constant speed 1 control in progress," the process proceeds to step S309.

In step S309, it is determined whether the acquired reel control state is "constant speed 2 control in progress." If the reel control state is "constant speed 2 control in progress," the process proceeds to step S310, where a second constant speed control process (control process for maintaining the rotation of the reel at a constant speed; details will be described later) is performed. On the other hand, if the reel control state is not "constant speed 2 control in progress," the process proceeds to step S311.

In step S311, it is determined whether the acquired reel control state is "brake control in progress." If the reel control state is "brake control in progress," the process proceeds to step S312, where brake control processing (control processing for stopping the rotation of the reel; details will be described later) is performed. On the other hand, if the reel control state is not "brake control in progress," the process proceeds to step S313.

In step S313, since the reel control state is "retraction control in progress", retraction control processing (processing for controlling the reel to retract to a stop position; details will be described later) is performed.
<Acceleration control process>
FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the acceleration control process in step S306 shown in FIG.

In step S306a, it is determined whether or not there is an acceleration start request based on the acceleration start request flag. Since the acceleration start request flag is set to ON in step S1059 of the reel spin start processing shown in FIG. 215, step S306a of the first timer interrupt processing is determined as YES. Since the acceleration start request flag is set to OFF in step S306d described below, step S306a of the second and subsequent timer interrupt processing is determined as NO. If there is an acceleration start request, proceed to step S306b, and if there is no acceleration start request, proceed to step S306f.

In step S306b, the reel control status transition counter is set to an initial value of 0. Here, the reel control status transition counter is a counter that measures the number of repeated sets (number of cycles) of 8-step rotation control data in one cycle, and in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 212, the acceleration control process ends when the data is repeated three times.

In step S306c, the general-purpose offset counter is set to its initial value of 0.

In step S306d, the reel drive signal switching request flag is set to ON. Also, the acceleration start request flag is set to OFF.

In step S306e, the value of the symbol interval counter (described in detail below) is set to a dummy value of 0. The symbol interval counter value set in step S306e is used in the second constant speed control process described below. After step S306e is completed, the process proceeds to step S306q.

In step S306f, the value of the hold counter is decremented by 1. The value of the hold counter is set in step S306q, which will be described later, and is decremented by 1 each time a timer interrupt process is executed. Note that the initial value set in the hold counter in step S306q is the value of the hold parameter corresponding to the set generic offset counter value. For example, as shown in FIG. 212, when the generic offset counter value is 0, 12 is set as the initial value in the hold counter.

In step S306g, the reel drive signal switching request flag is set to OFF.

In step S306h, it is determined whether the subtracted value of the hold counter is 0. If the value of the hold counter is 0, it is time to switch the rotation control data, so the process proceeds to step S306i. If the value of the hold counter is not 0, it is not time to switch the rotation control data, so the acceleration control process ends.

In step S306i, since it is time to switch the rotation control data, the reel drive signal switching request flag is set to ON.

In step S306j, the general-purpose offset counter value is incremented by 1 to set the next rotation control data.

In step S306k, it is determined whether the incremented generic offset counter value is 8. If the generic offset counter value is 8, the rotation control of the set (cycle) has ended, so the process proceeds to step S306l. If the generic offset counter value is not 8, the rotation control of the set (cycle) has not ended, so the process proceeds to step S306q.

In step S306l, the general-purpose offset counter value is set to the initial value of 0 in order to move on to rotation control for the next set (cycle).

In step S306m, the reel control status transition counter is incremented by 1.

In step S306n, it is determined whether the incremented value of the reel control status transition counter is 3. If the value of the reel control status transition counter is 3, the process proceeds to step S306o, and if the value of the reel control status transition counter is not 3, the process proceeds to step S306q.

In step S306o, since all rotation controls set during acceleration control have been performed, the reel control status is set to "Constant speed 1 control in progress."

In step S306p, the reel control status transition counter is set to an initial value of 0. After step S306p is completed, the acceleration control process ends.

In step S306q, the spin control table shown in Fig. 212 is referenced, and when the reel control status is "acceleration control in progress", a retained parameter value corresponding to the set reel control status transition counter value and general-purpose offset counter value is obtained, and the obtained retained parameter value is set as the initial value of the retained counter. For example, as shown in Fig. 212, when the reel control status transition counter value is 0 and the general-purpose offset counter value is 0, 12 is set as the initial value of the retained counter, and when the reel control status transition counter value is 1 and the general-purpose offset counter value is 7, 1 is set as the initial value of the retained counter. After the processing of step S306q is completed, the acceleration control processing is completed.
<First constant speed control process>
FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing in detail the first constant speed control process of step S308 shown in FIG.

In step S308a, 1 is added to the value of the general-purpose offset counter. That is, in the first constant speed control process, as shown in FIG. 212, the rotation control data is switched every interrupt time, so the value of the general-purpose offset counter is incremented for each timer interrupt process. Note that since the reel drive signal switching request flag is set to ON in step S1309 of the acceleration control process, no switching process is performed, so the reel drive signal switching request flag remains ON during the first constant speed control process and the second constant speed control process described below. Therefore, in the reel rotation control process in FIG. 218, the rotation control data corresponding to the incremented general-purpose offset counter value is set for each timer interrupt process (see step S208j in FIG. 218).

In step S308b, it is determined whether the incremented general-purpose offset counter value is 8. If the general-purpose offset counter value is 8, the process proceeds to step S308c to move on to rotation control of the next set (cycle); if the general-purpose offset counter value is not 8, the rotation control of the set (cycle) has not ended, and the first constant speed control process ends.

In step S308c, the general-purpose offset counter is set to its initial value of 0 in order to move on to rotation control for the next set (cycle).

In step S308d, the reel control status transition counter is incremented by 1.

In step S308e, it is determined whether the incremented value of the reel control status transition counter is 16. If the value of the reel control status transition counter is 16, 16 sets of spin control have been completed (see FIG. 212), so the process proceeds to step S308f. If the value of the reel control status transition counter is not 16, the first constant speed control process is completed.

In step S308f, since all of the rotation controls set during the constant speed 1 control have been performed, the reel control status is set to "constant speed 2 control in progress."
<Second constant speed control process>
Fig. 222 is a flow chart showing in detail the second constant speed control process of step S310 shown in Fig. 219. The second constant speed control process mainly performs a process of tracking the symbol positions of the reels. In order for the main control unit 300 to grasp the symbol positions of the reels, the symbol positions are monitored using two counters, a "symbol number counter" and a "symbol interval counter". Here, the "symbol number counter" and the "symbol interval counter" will be explained.

Figure 205 is also a diagram showing the relationship between the symbol number counter and the symbol interval counter. The symbol number counter is a counter provided in the RAM 308 to store and hold the symbol located in the middle of the symbol display window 113, which is the reference position. For example, for the left reel 110, the BB symbol at the top of the symbol row of the left reel 110 is the reference position, and counting begins when the index sensor 606A passes the light-shielding piece 612D. Each symbol and the count value are associated in advance, and the main control unit 300 can identify the symbol displayed in the symbol display window 113 from the symbol number counter value when the reel stops and determine whether it has won. The symbol interval counter is also a counter provided in the RAM 308, and counts the number of drive pulses per symbol (timer interrupt processing count). The main control unit 300 sets the number of drive pulses per symbol (24 in this case) in the symbol interval counter, subtracts it each time a drive pulse is output, and increments the symbol number counter by 1 when the symbol interval counter value becomes 0.

In step S310a, 1 is added to the value of the general-purpose offset counter. That is, in the second constant speed control process, as shown in FIG. 212, the rotation control data is switched every interrupt time, so the value of the general-purpose offset counter is incremented for each timer interrupt process. Also, since the reel drive signal switching request flag remains ON, in the reel rotation control process of FIG. 218, the rotation control data corresponding to the incremented general-purpose offset counter value is set for each timer interrupt process (see step S208l of FIG. 218).

In step S310b, it is determined whether the incremented general-purpose offset counter value is 8. If the general-purpose offset counter value is 8, the process proceeds to step S310c to move on to rotation control of the next set (cycle); if the general-purpose offset counter value is not 8, the process proceeds to step S310d since rotation control of the set (cycle) has not ended.

In step S310c, the general-purpose offset counter is set to its initial value of 0 in order to move on to rotation control for the next set (cycle).

In step S310d, the value of the symbol interval counter is decremented by 1. That is, the value of the symbol interval counter is decremented every interrupt time.

In step S310e, it is determined whether the decremented value of the symbol interval counter is 0. If the symbol interval counter value is 0, the process proceeds to step S310f, and if the symbol interval counter value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S310h.

In step S310f, if the value of the symbol interval counter is 0, the next symbol will be displayed, so the symbol interval counter value is set to the initial value of 24.

In step S310g, the value of the pattern number counter is decremented by 1 to update to the next pattern.

In step S310h, index sensor detection information is obtained from the index sensor detection memory area of RAM 308. As described above, this detection information is updated during the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 (step S208c). Note that on each of the three reels, the light-shielding piece is provided at a position where the symbol number counter value is 0 and the symbol interval counter value is 0, and when the light-shielding piece passes between the light-emitting and light-receiving parts of the index sensor, it is deemed that detection has occurred.

In step S310i, if the acquired index sensor detection information has already been detected, the process proceeds to step S310j, and if it has not yet been detected, the process proceeds to step S310n.

In step S310j, since the reel symbol positions have been searched for, stop button enable information is set in a specified area of RAM 308. That is, since the light blocking piece provided at the position where the symbol number counter value is 0 and the symbol interval counter value is 0 has been detected in a constant speed state, the reel stop position can be controlled and the reel enters a stoppable state. Once the stop button enable information is set (the reel enters a stoppable state), operation of the stop button becomes acceptable. Note that if a stop button for which stop button enable information is not set is operated, the operation itself is accepted, but is invalidated and the reel corresponding to that stop button does not stop. Alternatively, the operation itself may not be accepted.

In this embodiment, the stop button validity information is set in the second constant speed control process, but steps S310h to S310j may be executed in the first constant speed control process so that the stop button validity information is set in the first constant speed control process.

In step S310k, the value of the symbol interval counter is set to the initial value of 24.

In step S310l, the value of the pattern number counter is set to the initial value of 0.

In step S310m, the step-out detection counter in RAM 308 is set to an initial value of 0. After step S310m is completed, the second constant speed control process is completed.

In step S310n, a step-out detection process is performed based on the value of the step-out detection counter. In the step-out detection process, the step-out detection counter is incremented by 1 for each interrupt and when it reaches a specific value (for example, the value of the number of pulses required to rotate the reel once (360 degrees), here 504), it is determined that a step-out (so-called step-out) has occurred, and all reels that are not being operated are restarted from the acceleration control, but it may also be configured to restart only the reel that has stepped out from the acceleration control. In this embodiment, since the step-out detection process is performed only in the second constant speed control process, if a step-out occurs during the first constant speed control process or the acceleration control process before the second constant speed control process, the step-out detection process is not performed, and the main control unit 300 cannot detect the step-out, but the step-out detection process may also be performed during that period. In addition to the step-out, a process to detect other abnormal states (for example, resonance, misstep, motor stop) may also be performed. After the process of step S310n is completed, the second constant speed control process is completed.
<Stop button reception process>
Fig. 223 is a flow chart showing in detail the stop button reception process of step S208d shown in Fig. 218. The stop button reception process is executed when the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is acceptable, that is, after the stop button validity information is set in step S310j of the second constant speed control process shown in Fig. 222. The stop button reception process is a process for determining the stop position of the corresponding reel based on the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

In step S208d1, stop acceptance information is obtained. Here, the stop acceptance information may be stop button validity information or part of the reel control information, and refers to all information necessary to determine stop acceptance.

In step S208d2, the reels that can be stopped are determined from the acquired stop acceptance information, and the stoppable reel information is set in a predetermined area of RAM 308 (for example, when it is determined that the left reel 110 is a stoppable reel, the left reel 110 is set).

In step S208d3, it is determined whether or not the stop button corresponding to the reel represented by the set stoppable reel information has been operated. In other words, it is determined whether or not the operation of the stop button corresponding to the stoppable reel has been accepted. If the stop button has been operated (accepted), the process proceeds to step S208d4, and if the stop button has not been operated (accepted), the process proceeds to step S208d8.

In step S208d4, data regarding the reel to be stopped (stop target reel data) is obtained.

In step S208d5, the retraction counter setting process (described in detail below) is performed.

In step S208d6, the status of the reel that was stopped is updated to "stopped" as a result of the operation of the stop button corresponding to the stoppable reel.

In step S208d7, the stop button reception flag, which was previously set to "acceptable," is set to "not accepting."

In step S208d8, the light emission mode information stored in the light emission mode storage area prepared for each reel in RAM 308 is updated. That is, the light emission mode of the light emitter built into the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped is updated from the second light emission mode (e.g., blue light emission mode) to the first light emission mode (e.g., red light emission mode). When step S208d8 ends, the stop button reception process ends.
<Retraction counter setting process>
FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing in detail the pull-in counter setting process of step S208d5 shown in FIG. 223.

In step S8d51, the value of the pattern number counter is obtained and the position where the stop operation was performed is detected.

In step S8d52, the number of pull-in frames is obtained from the selected reel stop control data based on the position where the reel was stopped. That is, the reel stop control data is selected based on the result of the winning combination internal lottery process (internal lottery result) shown in FIG. 214. The reel stop control data specifies the number of pull-in frames that corresponds to the symbol position number at the symbol position (middle row reference) when the reel was stopped.

In step S8d53, the remaining interrupt number is obtained by referring to the excitation table. Specifically, in this embodiment, the motor is stopped at a position corresponding to phases AB, so the number of steps from the excitation phase next to the excitation phase indicated by the previously set rotation control data (the last rotation control data set during constant speed 2 control) to the excitation phase immediately before phase AB is obtained as the remaining interrupt number. For example, if a stop operation is performed during control using excitation table 22H during constant speed 2 control, the remaining interrupt number is 3 steps.

In step S8d54, a retraction counter value is calculated from the obtained number of retraction frames and the remaining number of interrupts, and the calculated retraction counter value is set in the retraction counter. Specifically, the value up to a predetermined advance position (e.g., a position corresponding to the AB phase one cycle before the AB phase corresponding to the stopped holding position) before the stop holding position (e.g., a position corresponding to a predetermined AB phase) where the rotor 740 is scheduled to be stopped and held becomes the number of steps according to the number of retraction frames, and the value obtained by adding the remaining number of interrupts to this value is set in the retraction counter.

In step S8d55, the reel control status is set to "retraction control in progress".
<Retraction control process>
Fig. 225 is a flow chart showing the pull-in control process of step S313 shown in Fig. 219 in detail. Here, the pull-in control process refers to a process of sliding the reel a predetermined number of frames (0 to 4 frames in this embodiment) from the symbol position operated by the stop buttons 137 to 139 when stopping the reel in order to realize stop control according to the result of the internal lottery. As a result, for a winning combination that has been internally won in the internal lottery or a winning combination that is a so-called flag carryover, the corresponding symbol combination is allowed to be displayed in a line, while in other cases, the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination is not displayed in a line.

In step S3131, 1 is added to the value of the general-purpose offset counter. That is, in the pull-in control process, the rotation control data is switched every interrupt time, so the value of the general-purpose offset counter is updated for each timer interrupt process. Also, since the reel drive signal switching request flag remains ON, in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218, the rotation control data corresponding to the incremented general-purpose offset counter value is set for each timer interrupt process (see step S208j in FIG. 218).

In step S3132, it is determined whether the incremented universal offset counter value is 8. If the universal offset counter value is 8, the remaining rotation control of the set (cycle) has ended, so proceed to step S3133; if the universal offset counter value is not 8, the remaining rotation control of the set (cycle) has not ended, so proceed to step S3134.

In step S3133, the general-purpose offset counter is set to its initial value of 0.

In step S3134, the value of the pull-in counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the pull-in counter is decremented by 1.

In step S3135, it is determined whether the updated retraction counter value is 0. If the retraction counter value is 0, the process proceeds to step S3136, and if the retraction counter value is not 0, the retraction control process is terminated.

In step S3136, the reel control status is set to "brake control in progress" because the reel reel counter value becomes 0 and the stop position has been reached.

In step S3137, the value of the hold counter is set to an initial value of 50. Here, this set hold counter value of 50 is the hold time of the spin control data when the reel control status is "under brake control" and the general-purpose offset counter value is 0 (see FIG. 212). After the process of step S3137 is completed, the retraction control process is terminated.
<Brake control process>
FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing in detail the brake control process of step S312 shown in FIG.

In step S3121, 1 is subtracted from the value of the hold counter. The hold counter value is initially set in step S3137 shown in FIG. 225, and is subtracted by 1 each time a timer interrupt process occurs.

In step S3122, it is determined whether the subtracted value of the hold counter is 0. If the value of the hold counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S3123, and if the value of the hold counter is not 0, the brake control process is terminated.

In step S3123, since the rotation control in the brake control has ended, the reel control status is set to "reel stop control in progress". When the reel control status is "reel stop control in progress", weak excitation (20% excitation) is continued at the stop holding position (for example, a predetermined AB phase) (see FIG. 212). After the processing of step S3123 is completed, the brake control processing is terminated.
<Processing of first sub-control unit 400>
The processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using Figure 227. Note that Figure (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure (b) is a flowchart of the command input processing of the first sub-control unit 400, Figure (c) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400, and Figure (d) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400.

When the power is turned on, the first thing that is done is an initialization process in step S2001. This initialization process includes initial settings for the input/output ports and initialization of the memory area in RAM 408.

In step S2002, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S2003.

In step S2003, the timer variable is assigned the value 0.

In step S2004, the first sub-control unit command input process (described in detail below) is performed. In the first sub-control unit command input process, it is determined whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S2005, a performance update process is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step S2004, the performance data is read from ROM 406 based on the results of each event process (e.g., performance setting process, game state control process, etc.) corresponding to this command, and if the performance data needs to be updated, the performance data of each performance device (speaker, lamp, liquid crystal image display device, shutter, etc.) is updated.

In step S2006, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control processing, if the performance data read in step S2005 contains a command to the sound source IC 418, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S2007, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control processing, if the performance data read in step S2005 includes commands for the various lamps 420, these commands are output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S2008, information output processing is performed. In the information output processing, if the performance data read in step S2005 contains a control command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S2002. As a result, the set control command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 command input processing will be explained using Figure 227 (b). This first sub-control unit 400 command input processing is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit 400 command input processing of step S2004 in Figure 227 (a).

In step S2101, it is determined whether there are any unprocessed commands in the command storage area of RAM 408. If there are any unprocessed commands, the process proceeds to step S2102, and if there are no unprocessed commands, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the command input process.

In step S2102, a jump is made to processing corresponding to the unprocessed command. For example, if the unprocessed command is a medal insertion command, a medal insertion processing is made; if the unprocessed command is a start lever acceptance command, a start lever acceptance processing is made; if the unprocessed command is an internal lottery command, an internal lottery processing is made; if the stop button acceptance command, a stop button acceptance processing is made; if the display determination command, a display determination processing is made; if the game status command, a game status control processing is made.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 227(c). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S2201 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 408.

Next, using FIG. 227(d), we will explain the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period in response to this timer interrupt.

In step S2301, the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S2002 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 227(a) is incremented by 1 and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S2002, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S2302, the random number values for the effects are updated.

Next, we will explain a specific example of when each reel 110-112 starts spinning from a stopped state.

First, we will explain the conventional example using Figure 228.

Figure 228 is a timing chart showing the changes in the state of the three reels, the changes in the detection state of the light-shielding pieces on each reel in the index sensor, the changes in the operation acceptance state of the stop buttons corresponding to each reel, and the changes in the light emission state of the light-emitting elements built into each stop button in a conventional system.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 228 shows, from top to bottom, the start lever operation, the left reel, the center reel, and the right reel. At the top of the timing chart, symbols indicating the timings (a) to (f) are marked, and below them are the arrows (a), (b), and (c). The arrow (a) represents the period during which the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212 is being executed. Before the period indicated by the arrow (a), each of the reels 110 to 112 was in a stopped state after spinning. The arrow (b) represents the period during which the first constant speed control shown in FIG. 212 is being executed, and the arrow (c) represents the period during which the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212 is being executed.

At the timing (a), the start lever is turned on, and the left, center, and right reels start to rotate simultaneously. As indicated by the arrow (a), all reels enter a period during which acceleration control is being performed. At the timing (b), acceleration control ends, and as indicated by the arrow (b), all reels enter a period during which first constant speed control is being performed. At the timing (c), first constant speed control ends, and as indicated by the arrow (c), all reels enter a period during which second constant speed control is being performed. In this example, no light-shielding pieces are detected on any of the reels during either the period during which acceleration control is being performed or the period during which first constant speed control is being performed, and during the period during which second constant speed control is being performed, the light-shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing (d), the light-shielding piece of the center reel is detected at the timing (e), and the light-shielding piece of the right reel is detected at the timing (f). The timing at which the light-blocking pieces on each reel are detected varies, and the detection timing differs depending on where the reel stopped before it began to spin.

Conventionally, when all the light-shielding pieces are detected during the period in which the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212 is being executed, the stop buttons all become operable at the same time. Until then, the stop buttons would not accept any operation even if they were operated, but from timing (f) onwards, any stop button will be operable. The timing chart shown in FIG. 228 indicates whether the left stop button can be operated or not, the middle stop button can be operated or not, and the right stop button can be operated or not. Note that even if the operation of the stop buttons is accepted, the operation may be treated as invalid or valid in terms of control. In short, in terms of the stopping of the reels, whether the operation of the stop buttons can be operated or not represents the state in which the reels can be stopped or not.

Further below, the light emission state of the light emitter (hereinafter referred to as the "stop button LED") built into each stop button is shown. The first light emission state of each stop button LED is, for example, a red light emission state, and the second light emission state is, for example, a blue light emission state. All stop button LEDs change to the second light emission state after timing (f). That is, in a state where the stop button cannot be operated (state where the reels cannot be stopped), all stop button LEDs are in the first light emission state, and when the state where the stop button can be operated (state where the reels can be stopped) is entered, all stop button LEDs change to the second light emission state. In the conventional example shown in FIG. 218, the stop button LED notifies the player that the stop button cannot be operated (state where the reels cannot be stopped) with the first light emission state, and notifies the player that the stop button can be operated (state where the reels can be stopped) with the second light emission state.

Figure 229 is a timing chart showing the state changes of each reel 110-112, the changes in the detection state of each light-blocking piece, the changes in the operation acceptance state of each stop button 137-139, and the changes in the light emission mode of each stop button LED 137a-139a in this embodiment. Below, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in Figure 228 will be omitted, and the differences from the timing chart shown in Figure 228 will be mainly explained.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 229, when a light-shielding piece is detected on any of the three reels 110 to 112, the stop buttons 137 to 139 corresponding to the reel on which the light-shielding piece is detected transition to an operation-accepting state. That is, after starting rotation, each reel can transition from a reel-stop-unavailable state to a reel-stop-able state. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 229, the light-shielding piece 612D on the left reel 110 is detected first (detected at timing (d)), so that the left stop button 137 transitions to an operation-accepting state first (at timing (d)), then the light-shielding piece on the center reel 111 is detected (detected at timing (e)), so that the center stop button 138 transitions to an operation-accepting state at timing (e), and finally the light-shielding piece on the right reel 112 is detected (detected at timing (f)), so that the right stop button 139 transitions to an operation-accepting state at timing (f). However, as in the past, none of the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change from the first light emitting state to the second light emitting state until all the light blocking pieces are detected (timing (f)). That is, each reel can transition from a reel unstoppable state to a reel stoppable state, but the three stop button LEDs change to the second light emitting state together when the last reel transitions to a reel stoppable state. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the stop button LED is in the first light emitting state, the corresponding stop button may be in an operation-accepting state. The arrow (e) in FIG. 229 indicates a period during which only some of the three stop buttons are in an operation-accepting state. On the other hand, the arrow (o) indicates a period during which all three stop buttons 137 to 139 are in an operation-accepting state.

According to the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, by accepting a stop operation from the reel where the light-blocking piece has been detected and the reel's stopping position can be controlled, the operation of the stop button can be accepted more quickly than before. This allows the player to play at a good pace without feeling stressed. In addition, the immediate response to the player's operation can enhance the realism of the game.

Figure 230 is a timing chart showing when a step-out occurs on the spinning right reel in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. Below, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in Figure 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in Figure 229.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 230, a step-out occurs on the right reel 112 before any light-shielding piece is detected on any of the reels. That is, while the second constant speed control is being executed on all of the reels 110 to 112, a step-out occurs only on the right reel 112 (timing (g)). After a step-out occurs on the right reel 112, the light-shielding piece 612D on the left reel 110 is detected (timing (d)) before the step-out is detected (timing (a')) by the step-out detection process (step S310n) shown in FIG. 222, and the left stop button 137 becomes ready to accept operation (the left reel 110 becomes ready to stop). In addition, the light-shielding piece on the center reel 111 is also detected (timing (e)) before the step-out is detected, and the center stop button 138 also becomes ready to accept operation before the step-out is detected (the center reel 111 also becomes ready to stop). Even if some of the stop buttons are in an operation-accepting state (period of the arrow (e)), they are not operated, and eventually, at the timing (a'), the step-out of the right reel 112 is detected. At the time when the step-out of the right reel 112 is detected, both the left reel 110 and the center reel 111 continue to rotate at a constant speed, but when the step-out of the right reel 112 is detected, the acceleration control is restarted for all three reels. In other words, not only the right reel 112 that has stepped out, but also the remaining two reels (110, 111) that were rotating at a constant speed are accelerated again. The step-out and re-acceleration change the positional relationship of the light-shielding pieces on each reel, and during the execution of the second constant speed control after the re-acceleration, the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected first (timing (d')), then the light-shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected (timing (e')), and finally the light-shielding piece of the center reel 111 is detected (timing (f')). Therefore, after re-acceleration, the order in which the stop buttons become operable (the order in which the reels become stoppable) is different from before re-acceleration. Note that the stop button LEDs 137a-139a remain in the first light emission state before re-acceleration, but after re-acceleration, they change to the second light emission state at timing (f').

Figure 231 is a timing chart for when a step-out occurs in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment and the stop button is operated before re-acceleration. Below, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in Figure 230 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in Figure 230. At the bottom of Figure 231, the left stop button operation, the middle stop button operation, and the right stop button operation are shown.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 231, after a step-out occurs on the right reel 112 (timing (g)), the light-shielding piece 612D on the left reel 110 is detected (timing (d)), and the left stop button 137 becomes operable. At timing (h) before the step-out that occurred on the right reel 112 is detected, the left stop button 137 is operated, and the left reel 110 is braked and stopped. Note that the timing chart in FIG. 231 shows the state of the left reel 110, ignoring the reel retraction control (the same applies to the subsequent timing charts). Note that before the step-out that occurred on the right reel 112 is detected, the light-shielding piece on the center reel 111 is also detected (timing (e)), but the center stop button 138 is not operated and the center reel 111 continues to rotate at a constant speed.

Eventually, at timing (a'), a step-out of the right reel 112 is detected. At timing (a'), the left reel 110 is stopped, the center reel 111 is spinning at a constant speed, and the right reel 112 is in a step-out state. When a step-out of the right reel 112 is detected, acceleration control is restarted for all reels except the stopped reel, i.e., only the reels that are spinning. As a result, the right reel 112 and center reel 111 that have stepped out accelerate again, while the left reel 110, which stopped earlier, remains stopped.

The left reel 110 remains stopped even when the re-accelerated right reel 112 and center reel 111 begin to rotate at a constant speed, so the light-shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is never detected, and the left stop button 137 never becomes ready to accept operation.

The light-blocking piece of the re-accelerated right reel 112 is detected at time (d'), and the light-blocking piece of the re-accelerated center reel 111 is detected at time (f'). When the light-blocking pieces of all reels that were spinning except for the stopped reel are detected, the stop button LEDs corresponding to the reels that were spinning change from the first light-emitting mode to the second light-emitting mode. In the example shown in FIG. 231, when the light-blocking piece of the center reel 111 is detected at time (f'), the right stop button LED 139a and the center stop button LED 138a change to the second light-emitting mode. Note that the left stop button LED 137a remains in the first light-emitting mode.

Figure 232 is a timing chart for when a power outage occurs and is restored while the second constant speed control is being executed in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. Below, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in Figure 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in Figure 229.

During the execution of the second constant speed control, the light blocking piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected first (timing (d)), then the light blocking piece of the center reel 111 is detected (timing (e)), and finally the light blocking piece of the right reel 112 is detected (timing (f)). During the period indicated by the arrow (o), all three reels 110 to 112 are in a state in which they can be stopped. However, none of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated, and the three reels 110 to 112 continue to rotate at a constant speed, when a power outage occurs. All three reels 110 to 112, which had been rotating by inertia until power was restored, come to a stop. Eventually, power is restored at timing (a'), and all three reels 110 to 112 start acceleration control, and after passing through the first constant speed control, the second constant speed control is being executed. When the power failure causes each reel to stop, the relative positions of the light blocking pieces on each reel change, and during execution of the second constant speed control after power is restored, the light blocking piece on the center reel 111 is detected first (timing (d')), then the light blocking piece on the right reel 112 is detected (timing (e')), and finally the light blocking piece 612D on the left reel 110 is detected (timing (f')). Therefore, after power is restored, the order in which the stop buttons become operable (the order in which the reels become stoppable) is different from before the power failure.

The example in Figure 232 described above is one in which enough time has passed between the power outage and the power being restored that the reels have stopped. However, if power is interrupted while the second constant speed control is being executed and power is restored immediately, in other words, if the reels' rotation speed is reduced but power is restored before they stop, then step-outs of each of the reels 110 to 112 will be detected in the step-out detection process (step S310n) shown in Figure 222 after power is restored, and each of the reels 110 to 112 will be re-accelerated due to the step-out detection, just like the right reel 112 described in the example shown in Figure 230.

The example of power outage and restoration described using Figure 232 may occur after the end of the examples shown in the timing charts from Figure 229 onwards, before the start of those examples, or during those examples.

Figure 233 is a timing chart for when a stop button operation is accepted before the stop button LED changes to the second light emission state in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. Below, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in Figure 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in Figure 229. Figure 233 also shows the left stop button operation, middle stop button operation, and right stop button operation at the bottom.

During the execution of the second constant speed control, the light-shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing of (d), and the left stop button 137 is in an operation-accepting state. The left stop button LED 137a remains in the first light-emitting state. At the timing of (h) before the light-shielding pieces of all the reels are detected, the left reel 110 is brake-controlled and stopped. At the timing of (e), the light-shielding piece of the center reel 111 is detected. At the timing of (f), the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected, and the light-shielding pieces of all the reels are detected. Even at the timing of (f), the center reel 111 continues to rotate at a constant speed. In other words, the center stop button 138 is not operated even though it is in an operation-accepting state at the timing of (e). At this timing of (f), the center stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a change to the second light-emitting state, but the left stop button LED 137a remains in the first light-emitting state. In this way, the stop button LED of the reel that stopped before changing to the second light emission mode remains in the first light emission mode. Note that if the center stop button 138 is operated between timing (e) and timing (f), the center stop button LED 138a will remain in the first light emission mode even at timing (f), and only the right stop button LED 139a will change to the second light emission mode.

Figure 234 is a timing chart for when the slot machine 100 of this embodiment stops the reels with the shortest number of frames after detecting a light-shielding piece. Below, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in Figure 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in Figure 229. Figure 234 also shows the left stop button 137, center stop button 138, and right stop button 139 at the bottom.

As the values of the retention parameters in FIG. 212 indicate, 60 interrupts are required for acceleration control, and 128 interrupts are required for first constant speed control. Also, in this example, even if a light-blocking piece is detected, the stop button cannot transition to an operation-accepting state unless the state transitions to the second constant speed control. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 234, the light-blocking piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing when the first constant speed control is started (timing (b)). Note that the light-blocking piece 612D of the left reel 110 may be detected during acceleration control (the period indicated by the arrow (a)). However, it is also possible to not detect the light-blocking piece during acceleration control, and to detect the light-blocking piece only during the constant speed state (during first constant speed control or second constant speed control).

Figure 235 shows the state of the left reel at each timing. Figure 235 shows figures 235(b), (b'), (c'), (c''-1), and (c''-2), and in each figure, the left reel 110 is shown on the left, the right reel 112 is shown on the right, and the center reel 111 is shown in the center.

In FIG. 235(b), the left reel 110, center reel 111, and right reel 112 are all spinning, but only the left reel 110 is shown with the symbols visible (the same applies to FIG. 235(b') and FIG. 235(c')). FIG. 235(b) shows the left reel 110 at the timing of FIG. 234(b). That is, when the first constant speed control is started (when the light blocking piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected), the BB symbol, whose symbol number counter value is 0 as shown in FIG. 205, is located in the middle of the symbol display window 113 on the left reel 110.

24 drive pulses are required to move one symbol, and on the left reel 110, the symbols with symbol number counter values of 20 (cherry symbol), 19 (BB symbol), 18 (replay symbol), and 17 (bell symbol) pass through the middle of the symbol display window 113 in order. When the symbol with symbol number counter value of 17 (bell symbol) has passed through the middle of the symbol display window 113 (timing (b') shown in Figure 234), 120 drive pulses (24 drive pulses x 5 symbols) are output from timing (b). Figure 235 (b') shows the left reel 110 at timing (b'), and the watermelon symbol with symbol number counter value of 16 is located in the middle of the symbol display window 113.

Furthermore, when the eight drive pulses are output, the control switches to the second constant speed control. In the time chart shown in FIG. 234, the timing at which the eight drive pulses are output is shown as timing (c). At timing (c), the second constant speed control is started, and the left stop button 137 transitions to an operation-accepting state. That is, in this example, even if a light-blocking piece is detected first, the stop button will not transition to an operation-accepting state unless the control transitions to the second constant speed control. However, although the condition for transitioning the stop button to an operation-accepting state is the same, that a light-blocking piece is detected, the stop button may transition to an operation-accepting state if the control state is the first constant speed control.

In addition, in the time chart shown in FIG. 234, the timing when the second constant speed control is started and the first drive pulse is output is shown as timing (c'). At this timing (c'), the left stop button 137 is operated, and the left reel 110 is brake-controlled and stopped.

Figure 235 (c') shows the left reel 110 at the timing of (c'), and in the middle row of the symbol display window 113, a bar symbol, which is the symbol with a symbol number counter value of 15, is positioned for 9/24 frames. The bar symbol is a so-called DDT symbol, and if the stop button is operated with the aim of stopping this bar symbol in the middle row, no small wins will be missed. The bar symbol may also be referred to as a specific symbol or a certain symbol.

Figure 235 (c''-1) and (c''-2) show the stopped symbol patterns of the left reel 110 when it is stopped at the timing of (c'). If the watermelon minor symbol shown in Figure 205 (b) is an internal winner, the bar symbol stops in the middle row of the symbol display window 113, and the watermelon symbol stops in the lower row, as shown in Figure 235 (c''-1). On the other hand, if the cherry minor symbol shown in Figure 205 (b) is an internal winner, the bar symbol does not stop in the middle row of the symbol display window 113, but is pulled in, and the cherry symbol slides two frames and stops in the upper row, as shown in Figure 235 (c''-2).

Figure 236 is a timing chart when a reel-related effect is performed by the effect device in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. Below, any explanation that overlaps with the explanation of the timing chart shown in Figure 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in Figure 229. At the bottom of Figure 236, the effect device is shown. This effect device is, for example, an effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device).

The first effect in the effect device starts when the start lever 135 is operated. Alternatively, it starts when all the reels 110 to 112 start spinning. Or it starts when acceleration control of all the reels 110 to 112 starts. As described below, the reels may be subjected to a random delay process that delays the timing at which they start spinning for each reel, so it is not necessarily the case that all the reels 110 to 112 start spinning or are under acceleration control at the same time. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 236, the operation timing of the start lever 135, the spin start timing of all the reels 110 to 112, and the start timing of the acceleration control for all the reels 110 to 112 are the same, which is the timing of (a). The first effect in the effect device starts from the timing of (a).

Figure 237 shows an example of the first effect in the effect device.

In each diagram of FIG. 237, at the top is shown an effect image display device 157, which is an example of an effect device, and below that are shown a left reel 110, a center reel 111, and a right reel 112. Furthermore, below each reel are shown stop buttons 137-139 corresponding to each reel. Each stop button 137-139 has a built-in stop button LED 137a-139a.

Figure 237 (A) shown on the left is a diagram showing an example in which a small win suggestion effect is executed as the first effect in the effect image display device 157. On the other hand, Figure 237 (B) shown on the right is a diagram showing an example in which a navigation effect is executed as the first effect in the effect image display device 157.

First, the small win suggestion effect will be explained. In (a1) of Figure 237 (A), the effect image display device 157 and the like are shown at the timing (a) shown in Figure 236 (the start timing of the first effect). A watermelon symbol is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in (a1), suggesting that the watermelon small win shown in Figure 205 (b) has been internally won. Also, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (a1) have started spinning. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are emitting light in the first light emission mode over the respective stop buttons 137 to 139.

In (d1) in FIG. 237(A), the effect image display device 157 and the like are shown at the timing (d) shown in FIG. 236 (the timing when the light blocking piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected and the left stop button 137 is ready to accept operation). The effect image display device 157 shown in (d1) also continues the small win suggestion effect, and displays a watermelon symbol. Also, all three reels 110-112 shown in (d1) continue to rotate under the second constant speed control. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a-139a are emitting light in the first light emission mode through each stop button 137-139. In other words, it is shown that the stop button LED 137a built into the left stop button 137 that is ready to accept operation is also emitting light in the first light emission mode, just like the other stop button LEDs 138a and 139a.

In (f1) of Figure 237(A), the effect image display device 157 and the like are shown at the timing of (f) shown in Figure 236 (the timing when the light-blocking piece on the right reel 112 is detected, and the light-blocking pieces on all reels are detected). The effect image display device 157 shown in (f1) also continues the small win suggestion effect, and displays a watermelon symbol. Also, all three reels 110-112 shown in (f1) continue to rotate under the second constant speed control. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a-139a have changed to the second light-emitting mode and are emitting light through the respective stop buttons 137-139.

In addition, in the small win suggestion performance, the watermelon symbol may be displayed continuously, or the watermelon symbol may be displayed and hidden repeatedly.

Next, the navigation effect will be described. The navigation effect is an effect that indicates the order of the stop button stop operation to win a certain winning combination. In (a2) of FIG. 237(B), the effect image display device 157 and the like at the timing (a) shown in FIG. 236 (start timing of the first effect) are shown. In the effect image display device 157 shown in (a2), numbers indicating the order of the stop operation are displayed at locations located directly above each of the reels 110 to 112. That is, 3 is displayed above the left reel 110, 2 is displayed above the center reel 111, and 1 is displayed above the right reel 112. In addition, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (a2) have started spinning. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are emitting light in the first light emission mode over each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

In (d2) in FIG. 237(B), the effect image display device 157 and the like are shown at the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 236 (the timing when the light blocking piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected and the left stop button 137 is ready to accept operation). The effect image display device 157 shown in (d2) also continues the navigation effect, and a number indicating the order of the stop operation is displayed. In addition, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (d2) continue to rotate under the second constant speed control. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are emitting light in the first light emission mode through each stop button 137 to 139. In other words, it is shown that the stop button LED 137a built into the left stop button 137 that is ready to accept operation is also emitting light in the first light emission mode, just like the other stop button LEDs 138a and 139a.

(f2) in Figure 237(B) shows the effect image display device 157 etc. at the timing (f) shown in Figure 236 (the timing when the light blocking piece on the right reel 112 is detected, and the light blocking pieces on all reels are detected). The navigation effect continues on the effect image display device 157 shown in (f2), and numbers indicating the order of the stop operation are displayed. Also, all three reels 110-112 shown in (f2) continue to rotate under the second constant speed control. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a-139a have changed to the second light emitting state and are emitting light through each stop button 137-139.

In the navigation effect in Figure 237 (B) described above, the order of stop operations is displayed differently from the order in which the light-shielding pieces on the reels are detected. However, there are cases in which the order in which the light-shielding pieces on the reels are detected and the order of stop operations instructed in the navigation effect happen to match.

In addition, the numbers indicating the order of the stop operations may be displayed continuously in the navigation display, or the numbers may be displayed and hidden repeatedly.

Figure 238 is a timing chart for the slot machine 100 of this embodiment when slide push operations are performed on the three stop buttons 137 to 139, but only some of the operations are accepted. Below, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in Figure 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in Figure 229. At the bottom of Figure 238, the left stop button operation, middle stop button operation, and right stop button operation are shown.

The operation of the slide push is to operate multiple stop buttons 137 to 139 in a short time. In the example in FIG. 238, the light-shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected during the execution of the second constant speed control (timing (d)), and after the left stop button 137 becomes in an operation-acceptable state, the slide push operation is performed on the three stop buttons 137 to 139 from the timing (h1). That is, the left stop button 137 is operated first, and then the center stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 are operated (in order) in succession, tracing them in a short time. At the time the slide push is performed, neither the light-shielding piece of the center reel 111 nor the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 has been detected, and the center stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 remain in an operation-acceptable state. For this reason, only the operation of the left stop button 137 in the slide push operation is accepted, and the operations of the remaining center stop button 138 and right stop button 139 are not accepted. Therefore, the left reel 110 is stopped by the brake control, but the center reel 111 and the right reel 112 continue to rotate at a constant speed. Eventually, the light-shielding piece of the center reel 111 is detected (timing (e)), and finally, the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is also detected (timing (f)). However, the operation of the center stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 in the slide push operation remains invalid, and in order to stop the center reel 111 and the right reel 112, the operation of the center stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 is required again. As described above, the arrow (e) represents a period in which only some of the three stop buttons are in an operation-accepting state. Also, at timing (f), the center stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a change to the second light-emitting state, but the left stop button LED 137a, which has already stopped the reel, remains in the first light-emitting state.

When the middle stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a are emitting light in the second light emission mode (the period indicated by the arrow (e)), a slide push operation is performed on the two stop buttons, the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139. That is, the middle stop button 138 is operated at the timing of (h2), and the right stop button 139 is operated at the timing of (h3). Brake control is executed on both the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112, causing them to stop.

After the brake control is executed and each of the three reels 110-112 stops, the start lever 135 is operated again and each of the three reels 110-112 starts to rotate (timing (a')). That is, the next game is started. In this next game, the first constant speed control is executed and then the second constant speed control is started (timing (c')). While the second constant speed control is being executed, the light blocking piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected (timing (d')), and the left stop button 137 becomes ready to accept operation. Next, the light blocking piece of the center reel 111 is also detected (timing (e')), and the center stop button 138 also becomes ready to accept operation. Finally, the light blocking piece of the right reel 112 is also detected (timing (f')), and the right stop button 139 also becomes ready to accept operation. Furthermore, when the light-shielding pieces of all three reels 110-112 are detected without any of the stop buttons 137-139 being operated, the stop button LEDs 137a-139a built into each stop button change to a second light-emitting state. The first stop button LED 137a remained in the first light-emitting state in the previous game, but changes to the second light-emitting state in the current game.

Figure 239 is a timing chart for when all slide push operations performed on the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are accepted in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. Below, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in Figure 238 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in Figure 238.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 239, the slide push operation is performed after all the light-shielding pieces of the three reels 110-112 have been detected. Therefore, the slide push operation is started when all three stop buttons 137-139 are in an operation-receiving state and all three stop button LEDs 137a-139a are emitting light in the second light-emitting state (the period indicated by the arrow (o)). Here too, the left stop button 137 is pressed in order, and the buttons are pressed in succession in a short period of time, and depending on the operation timing of each stop button 137-139 (the timing of (h), (h'), (h'')), brake control is performed on the corresponding reel, the corresponding reel stops, and the built-in stop button LED returns to the first light-emitting state. The execution periods of the brake control on each reel may overlap.

Figure 240 is a timing chart for when a pseudo game is played and then a real game is played in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. Below, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in Figure 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in Figure 229. Figure 240 also shows the left stop button operation, middle stop button operation, and right stop button operation at the bottom.

The pseudo game is a type of reel presentation (the second reel presentation described above), and is a presentation in which, like the main game, the reel corresponding to the operated stop button appears to have stopped when the stop button is operated. In the main game, after the reel has completely stopped, medals are awarded according to the derived stopping pattern, but in the pseudo game, medals are not awarded according to the derived stopping pattern.

In the pseudo game, the reels 110-112 start to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and acceleration control, first constant speed control, and second constant speed control are executed. The light-shielding pieces of the reels 110-112 are detected in the order of the light-shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110, the light-shielding piece of the center reel 111, and the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112, and the stop buttons 137-139 corresponding to the reels in which the light-shielding pieces are detected become ready to accept operation. Only when the light-shielding pieces of all the reels 110-112 are detected do the three stop button lamps 137a-139a change to the second light-emitting mode. Therefore, even when the pseudo game starts, it is no different from the actual game, and the player cannot distinguish between the pseudo game and the actual game. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 240, after the three stop button lamps 137a to 139a change to the second light emission state, a slide push is performed from the left stop button 137, and at the operation timing (timing of (h), (h'), (h'')) of each stop button 137 to 139, the corresponding reel starts brake control, and the built-in stop button LED returns to the first light emission state. In pseudo play, stop control is not executed, and instead, vibration control that slightly vibrates the reel is executed. Vibration control is executed for about several seconds so that the patterns can be clearly seen by the player. In pseudo play, it is also possible to pull in more than the maximum number of patterns that can be pulled in. For example, if the BB internal winning state is reached, the BB pattern alignment ("7-7-7") is displayed with vibration (shaking display). Also, if the minor winning state is reached, the bar pattern alignment is displayed with vibration. The player realizes that the game up to that point was a pseudo game by the vibration display.

After the vibration display is performed for a few seconds, the pseudo game ends and the main game begins. The main game begins without operating the start lever 135. In the pseudo game, when the BB pattern alignment ("7-7-7") is displayed by vibration, if the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate at the same time, the reels 110 to 112 will rotate while maintaining the positional relationship in which the BB patterns are lined up side by side. In such a positional relationship, the BB patterns of all the reels 110 to 112 appear in the pattern display window 113 at the same time, so that it is easy for experienced players who are good at aiming for the patterns to aim for the BB patterns. For this reason, it is no longer possible to ensure fairness in the game between experienced players and beginners who are not good at aiming for the patterns. In addition, because it becomes easy to aim for the patterns, the interest of the game decreases for players who are looking forward to stopping the game while aiming for the patterns. Therefore, random delay control is performed to randomly delay the start of rotation of the reels between the reels, and the positional relationship in which the BB symbols are arranged side by side is broken. The game is started at the timing of (i), but none of the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. First, after n1 interrupts (n1≧0) from the start of the game (after the first time has elapsed), the right reel 112 starts rotating. Next, after n2 interrupts (n2>n1) from the start of the game (after the second time has elapsed), the center reel 111 starts rotating. Finally, after n3 interrupts (n3>n2) from the start of the game (after the third time has elapsed), the left reel 110 starts rotating. When each of the reels 110 to 112 starts rotating, acceleration control is executed for 60 interrupts, but the execution periods are shifted. The arrow (a) shown in this game represents the period from when the acceleration control of the first right reel 112 is started to when the acceleration control of the last left reel 110 is ended. Next, when the acceleration control is ended for each reel, the first constant speed control is started. The arrow (b) shown in this game represents the period from when the first constant speed control of the first right reel 112 is started to when the first constant speed control of the last left reel 110 is ended. Next, when the first constant speed control is ended for each reel, the second constant speed control is started. In this game, the period during which the second constant speed control is performed for each reel 110 to 112 is represented by the arrow (c). Before the last left reel 110 ends the first constant speed control, the first right reel 112 starts the second constant speed control. Due to the pseudo game and the random delay process, the relative positions of the light blocking pieces on each reel change, and during the execution of the second constant speed control in this game, the light blocking piece on the right reel 112 is detected first (timing (f')), then the light blocking piece on the center reel 111 is detected (timing (e')), and finally the light blocking piece 612D on the left reel 110 is detected (timing (d')). Therefore, the order in which the stop button becomes ready to accept operation (the order in which the reels become ready to stop) is different between this game and the pseudo game. Note that in this game, the three stop button lamps 137a to 139a change to the second light emission mode only after the light blocking pieces on all reels 110 to 112 are detected (timing (d')).

Figure 241 is a timing chart for when reel action is performed and then the main game is played in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. Below, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in Figure 240 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in Figure 240.

Reel action is a type of reel presentation (the first reel presentation described above), and unlike this game, it is a presentation that makes it look like the reels have stopped without the operation of the stop button. Note that, like the pseudo game, no medals are awarded in reel action.

In the reel action, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and acceleration control, first constant speed control, and second constant speed control are executed. The light-shielding pieces of the reels 110 to 112 are detected in the order of the light-shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110, the light-shielding piece of the center reel 111, and the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112. However, even if the light-shielding pieces are detected, the stop buttons 137 to 139 do not enter an operation-accepting state and remain in an operation-disabled state. Even if the light-shielding pieces of all the reels 110 to 112 are detected, the three stop button lamps 137a to 139a remain in the first light-emitting state. Eventually, without the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, each of the reels 110 to 112 starts brake control on its own. In this reel action, the stop control is not executed, and instead, vibration control is performed to slightly vibrate the reels. The vibration control is performed for a few seconds to ensure that the symbols are clearly visible to the player. For example, if the BB internal win state is reached, the BB symbol alignment ("7-7-7") is displayed with a vibration (shaking display). Also, if a minor win is reached internally, the bar symbol alignment is displayed with a vibration.

After the vibration display is performed for a few seconds, the reel action ends and the main game begins. This game is the same as the main game described in FIG. 240, and random delay control is performed, followed by acceleration control, first constant speed control, and second constant speed control. The reel action and random delay processing change the positional relationship of the light blocking pieces on each reel, and during the execution of the second constant speed control in this game, the light blocking piece on the right reel 112 is detected first (timing (f')), then the light blocking piece on the center reel 111 is detected (timing (e')), and finally the light blocking piece 612D on the left reel 110 is detected (timing (d')). Therefore, the order in which the light blocking pieces are detected on the reels may differ between this game and the reel action. However, since there is no need to operate the stop button in the reel action, the impact of this order being different on the player is small.

Next, simultaneous pressing will be explained. Simultaneous pressing here refers to operating all stop buttons 137-139 simultaneously or nearly simultaneously. For example, if the time required from operating the first stop button to operating the last stop button is within a predetermined time (e.g., 100 ms), it is determined to be "simultaneous pressing." The above-mentioned predetermined time is set taking into consideration the average time required to operate all stop buttons 137-139 in succession, and can be changed as desired within a time range that is determined to be a relatively quick stop operation.

When pressing the buttons simultaneously, in order for a specific symbol combination to win, the symbols on each reel that make up the specific symbol combination must be close to each other, within a maximum range of four symbols, in order for the combination to win.

Figure 242 shows the relative positional relationship of the symbols that make up a specific symbol combination, based on the symbol display window 113.

Figure 242 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a case where, in a BB internal winning state, a replay is internally won and a "replay-replay-replay" symbol combination is displayed on the winning line L1. In Figure 242 (a), the replay symbols displayed on the winning line L1 are a replay symbol with a symbol number counter value of 2 on the left reel 110, a replay symbol with a symbol number counter value of 1 on the center reel 111, and a replay symbol with a symbol number counter value of 14 on the right reel 112. In this stopped symbol state, the BB symbol is located two frames from the replay symbol on the left reel 110, is also located two frames from the replay symbol on the center reel 111, and is located one frame from the replay symbol on the right reel 112. Therefore, the replay symbol alignment state shown in FIG. 242(a) is a state in which symbols (here, BB symbols) that make up a specific symbol combination are close to each other on each reel, and hereinafter, this state is referred to as the preparatory symbol state. It is possible to end a game in the preparatory symbol state, and in the next game, by pressing the buttons simultaneously, it is possible to easily make a specific symbol combination win. In other words, the preparatory symbol state refers to a state in which the symbols on each reel that make up a specific symbol combination are within a certain range. In FIG. 242(a), if simultaneous pressing is performed in the next game, it is possible to stop and display the BB symbol alignment on the winning line L1 or any of the other winning lines L2 to L5 shown in FIG. 203.

Figure 242(b) is a diagram showing an example in which, in the BB internal winning state, an internal win occurs on the bell, and the symbol combination "bell-bell-bell" is displayed stopped on the winning line L1. In Figure 242(b), the bell symbols displayed stopped on the winning line L1 are a bell symbol with a symbol number counter value of 1 on the left reel 110, a bell symbol with a symbol number counter value of 19 on the center reel 111, and a bell symbol with a symbol number counter value of 15 on the right reel 112. In this stopped symbol state, the BB symbol on the left reel 110 is located two and four frames from the BB symbol on the center reel 111, and the BB symbol on the right reel 112 is located three frames from the BB symbol on the center reel 111. Therefore, the bell pattern line-up state shown in FIG. 242(b) is also a preparatory state, and it is possible to end the game in this preparatory state, and in the next game, by pressing the buttons simultaneously, to stop the BB pattern line-up.

In this example, the configuration that goes into the ready state is a replay pattern configuration with a specific value on the pattern number counter and a bell pattern configuration with a specific value on the pattern number counter, but it could also be a watermelon pattern configuration with a specific value on the pattern number counter, a cherry pattern configuration with a specific value on the pattern number counter, or a losing pattern configuration with a specific value on the pattern number counter.

Furthermore, the symbol combination that constitutes the preparation state does not need to be displayed in the symbol display window 113, and it is sufficient that the relative positional relationship of the symbols (BB symbols) that constitute a specific symbol combination is in the relative positional relationship shown in Figure 242 (a) or (b).

When the preparation state is reached during a BB internal winning state, the preparation state may be notified by the performance image display device 157 or speakers 272, 277, etc.

Figure 243 is a timing chart for the slot machine 100 of this embodiment when three stop buttons 137-139 are pressed simultaneously but only some of the operations are accepted. Below, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in Figure 229 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in Figure 229. At the bottom of Figure 243, the left stop button operation, middle stop button operation, and right stop button operation are shown.

In the example of FIG. 243, the light blocking piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected during execution of the second constant speed control (timing (d)), and the left stop button 137 becomes operable. Then, from timing (h), the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed simultaneously. At the time the simultaneous pressing is performed, neither the light blocking piece of the center reel 111 nor the light blocking piece of the right reel 112 has been detected, and the center stop button 138 nor the right stop button 139 remains in an operable state. For this reason, only the operation of the left stop button 137 in the simultaneous pressing operation is accepted, and the remaining operations of the center stop button 138 and right stop button 139 are not accepted. Therefore, the left reel 110 stops at timing (h), but the center reel 111 and right reel 112 continue to rotate at a constant speed. Eventually, the light blocking piece on the center reel 111 is detected (at timing (e)), and finally, the light blocking piece on the right reel 112 is also detected (at timing (f)). However, the operation of the center stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 when pressed simultaneously remains disabled, and in order to stop the center reel 111 and the right reel 112, it is necessary to operate the center stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 again. At timing (f), the center stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a change to the second light emission mode, but the left stop button LED 137a, which has already stopped the reels, remains in the first light emission mode.

Figure 244 is a timing chart for when all three stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed simultaneously in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. Below, explanations that overlap with those of the timing chart shown in Figure 243 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in Figure 243.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 244, the simultaneous pressing operation is performed after all the light-shielding pieces of the three reels 110 to 112 have been detected. Therefore, the simultaneous pressing operation is performed (timing (h)) when all three stop buttons 137 to 139 are in an operation-accepting state and all three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are emitting light in the second light-emitting mode (period represented by the arrow (o)). In response to the simultaneous pressing operation, brake control is performed on each of the three reels 110 to 112, and the three reels 110 to 112 stop simultaneously. In other words, at least a portion of the period during which brake control is performed for each reel 110 to 112 overlaps with each other. Note that there may be cases where all of the periods overlap with each other. Also, the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a built into each of the three stop buttons 137 to 139 return to the first light-emitting mode at the same time. Note that they stop at the same time. Strictly speaking, it appears as if they stopped at the same time. is, and they return at the same time. However, when you look at it, it looks like it has returned at the same time.

Figure 245 is a timing chart for when simultaneous presses are made during simulated play in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. Below, explanations that overlap with the explanation of the timing chart shown in Figure 240 will be omitted, and the explanation will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in Figure 240.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 245, after the three stop button lamps 137a to 139a change to the second light emission mode, the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed simultaneously, and the three reels 110 to 112 appear to be simultaneously timed and stopped. In other words, the vibration display starts almost simultaneously. For example, if there is a BB internal winning state, the BB pattern alignment ("7-7-7") is displayed with a vibration (shaking display). In other words, here, the simultaneous pressing operation creates a pseudo game (simultaneous reel display) in which the three spinning reels 110 to 112 appear to have stopped simultaneously as an effect.

After the vibration display is performed for a few seconds, the pseudo game ends and the actual game begins. In this game, random delay control is performed, and acceleration control, first constant speed control, and second constant speed control are executed. In this game, even if the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed simultaneously, the random delay process makes it extremely unlikely that the BB pattern alignment ("7-7-7") can be stopped and displayed. During the execution of the second constant speed control in this game, the light-shielding piece on the right reel 112 is detected first (timing (f')), then the light-shielding piece on the center reel 111 is detected (timing (e')), and finally the light-shielding piece 612D on the left reel 110 is detected (timing (d')). The order in which the light-shielding pieces are detected on the reels is different between the pseudo game and the actual game.

In addition, while this embodiment is related to playing on a slot machine 100, the present invention is not limited to slot machines and can also be applied to other gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

In the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be able to execute, with respect to rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, an acceleration control for transitioning from a stopped state to a constant speed state (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212), a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state (e.g., the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control), and a brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212);
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
For each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel], a transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state is possible [for example, a transition to a state in which the left stop button 137 can be accepted at timing (d), a transition to a state in which the middle stop button 138 can be accepted at timing (e), and a transition to a state in which the right stop button 139 can be accepted at timing (f) as shown in FIG. 229],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the stop operation is accepted from the prepared reels, so that the operation of the stop operation means can be accepted more quickly than before. This allows the player to play at a good tempo without feeling stressed. Also, the immediate response to the player's operation can enhance the realism of the game. These effects are also common to the gaming machines described below, and may be referred to as the first common effect below.

The non-stoppable state may refer to a state in which the operation of the stop operation means provided in correspondence with the reels is not accepted, or may refer to a state in which the operation is accepted but is not treated as a valid operation (the same applies below). On the other hand, the stoppable state refers to a state in which the operation of the stop operation means provided in correspondence with the reels is accepted and is treated as a valid operation (the same applies below).

In addition, when the stopping position of the reel becomes controllable, the spinning reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (the same applies below).

The reel control means may be a means capable of transitioning the reel's stopping position to a controllable state while the constant speed control is being executed, or a means capable of transitioning the reel's stopping position to a controllable state while the acceleration control is being executed (the same applies below).

Furthermore, in the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
notification means (e.g., a left stop button LED 137a, a middle stop button LED 138a, a right stop button LED 139a) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that can execute notification (e.g., notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) that the corresponding rotating reel is in the stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be able to execute, with respect to rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, an acceleration control for transitioning from a stopped state to a constant speed state (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212), a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state (e.g., the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control), and a brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212);
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
Each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels (for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel) can transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, transition to a state in which the left stop button 137 can be accepted at timing (d), transition to a state in which the middle stop button 138 can be accepted at timing (e), and transition to a state in which the right stop button 139 can be accepted at timing (f) as shown in FIG. 229),
The notification means does not execute the notification unless all of the reels are shifted from the non-stoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, step S2703 shown in FIG. 217 );
The notification means executes the notification for all of the reels that are rotating when all of the reels transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, when the index sensor detects the light-shielding pieces of all the reels at the timing (f) shown in FIG. 229, each of the stop button LEDs 137a, 138a, 139a starts to light up all at once).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
One of the reels is a second reel [e.g., a center reel 111],
In a first case (e.g., the case of the example shown in FIG. 229), the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel transitions (e.g., the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 229),
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

In some cases, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel [for example, timing (d') shown in FIG. 232] (the same applies below).

The stop operation means may be a means including a first stop operation means [e.g., left stop button 137] and a second stop operation means [e.g., center stop button 138], the first stop operation means [e.g., left stop button 137] being a means for stopping the first reel [e.g., left reel 110] when the first reel is in a stoppable state, and the second stop operation means [e.g., center stop button 138] being a means for stopping the second reel [e.g., center reel 111] when the second reel is in a stoppable state (the same applies below).

Also,
"The first case refers to a case where the reel control means transitions the stop position of the first reel to a controllable state before transitioning the stop position of the second reel to a controllable state [for example, the timing (d) shown in FIG. 229],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel [e.g., the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [e.g., an arrangement of "left" symbols as shown in FIG. 205(a)] are arranged along the rotation direction,
The second reel (e.g., the middle reel 111) is also a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols (e.g., an arrangement of the “middle” symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)) are arranged along the rotation direction.
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means a state in which the reel control means receives a first detection signal (for example, a detection signal of a light-shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from an index sensor) for identifying the position of the stopped display of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means a state in which the reel control means receives a second detection signal (e.g., a detection signal of a light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from an index sensor) for identifying the position of the stopped display of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"When the reel control means receives the first detection signal while executing the constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (U) in FIG. 229], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"After the first case, if a power interruption and restoration (for example, a power interruption and restoration as shown in FIG. 232) occurs while the brake control of the first reel (for example, the left reel 110) has not been started and the brake control of the second reel (for example, the center reel 111) has not been started, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel (for example, the timing of FIG. 232(d')).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"A first reel with multiple designs,
A second reel having a plurality of different patterns;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
A second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the first reel that is rotating;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the second reel that is rotating;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
a reel control means configured to execute, with respect to rotation control executed on each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, an acceleration control for transitioning to a constant speed state, a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and a stop control for transitioning to a stopped state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted by any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
a stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of the determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A gaming machine equipped with
In a first case, a timing at which the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is earlier than a timing at which the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the stop operation can be accepted from the prepared reels, allowing the stop button to be operated more quickly than before.

Also,
"The first case is a case where the output of the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is earlier than the output of the detection signal of the second symbol position detection means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the stop operation can begin from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

Also,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and a detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the reel stopping operation can be accepted sooner than before.

Also,
"When power is restored after the first case in a state in which the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the second stop operation means may start accepting the stop operation earlier than the first stop operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted differs before and after a power outage is restored, adding variety to the game.

In the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be able to execute, with respect to rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, an acceleration control for transitioning from a stopped state to a constant speed state (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212), a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state (e.g., the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control), and a brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212);
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
Each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels (for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel) can transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, transition to a state in which the left stop button 137 can be accepted at timing (d), transition to a state in which the middle stop button 138 can be accepted at timing (e), and transition to a state in which the right stop button 139 can be accepted at timing (f) as shown in FIG. 229),
When the constant speed control is being executed on one of the plurality of reels [e.g., the left reel 110], even if another reel of the plurality of reels [e.g., the right reel 112] other than the one reel enters a first abnormal state [e.g., the timing of (g) shown in FIG. 230], the one reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [e.g., the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 230].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

In addition to the first common effect described above, this gaming machine allows the player to continue playing with the remaining reels even if some of the reels experience the first abnormal state. This may also allow the player to concentrate on playing the game without wasting the spins of the reels that did not experience the first abnormal state.

If the reel's stopping position is uncontrollable, the one reel will not transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state.

Also,
"A first abnormal state detection means (e.g., a main control unit 300 that executes a step-out detection process shown in FIG. 222) for detecting that the reel has entered the first abnormal state,
When the constant speed control is being executed for one of the plurality of reels, even if another reel among the plurality of reels becomes in the first abnormal state [for example, at the timing of (g) shown in FIG. 230], the one reel can be transitioned from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, at the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 230] until the first abnormal state detection means detects the first abnormal state of the other reel [for example, until the timing of (a') shown in FIG. 230],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
One of the reels is a second reel [e.g., a center reel 111],
In a first case (e.g., the case of the example shown in FIG. 229), the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel transitions (e.g., the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 229),
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first case refers to a case where the reel control means transitions the stop position of the first reel to a controllable state before transitioning the stop position of the second reel to a controllable state [for example, the timing (d) shown in FIG. 229],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel [e.g., the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [e.g., an arrangement of "left" symbols as shown in FIG. 205(a)] are provided along the rotation direction,
The second reel (e.g., the middle reel 111) is also a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols (e.g., an arrangement of the “middle” symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)) are arranged along the rotation direction.
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means a state in which the reel control means receives a first detection signal (for example, a detection signal of a light-shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from an index sensor) for identifying the position of the stopped display of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means a state in which the reel control means receives a second detection signal (e.g., a detection signal of a light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from an index sensor) for identifying the position of the stopped display of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"When the reel control means receives the first detection signal while executing the constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (U) in FIG. 229], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"After the first case, if a power interruption and restoration (for example, a power interruption and restoration as shown in FIG. 232) occurs while the brake control of the first reel (for example, the left reel 110) has not been started and the brake control of the second reel (for example, the center reel 111) has not been started, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel (for example, the timing of FIG. 232(d')).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel has multiple designs,
A second reel having a plurality of different patterns;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
A second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the first reel that is rotating;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the second reel that is rotating;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
a reel control means configured to execute, with respect to rotation control executed on each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, an acceleration control for transitioning to a constant speed state, a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and a stop control for transitioning to a stopped state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted by any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
a stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of the determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A gaming machine equipped with
In a first case, a timing at which the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is earlier than a timing at which the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation,
even if the second reel rotation drive means steps out during a period in which the reel control means executes the constant speed control on the second reel, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the stop operation can be accepted from the prepared reels, allowing the player to operate the stop button faster than before, and also allowing the player to play on only some of the multiple reels.

Also,
"The first case is a case where the output of the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is earlier than the output of the detection signal of the second symbol position detection means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the stop operation can begin from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

Also,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and a detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the reel stopping operation can be accepted sooner than before.

Also,
"When a power outage occurs after the first case in a state where the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the second stop operation means may start accepting the stop operation earlier than the first stop operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted differs before and after a power outage is restored, adding variety to the game.

In the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be capable of executing at least an acceleration control (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212) that increases the rotation speed of the reel from a stopped state to a constant speed state, a second constant speed control (e.g., the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212) that maintains the constant speed state, and a brake control (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212) that transitions from the constant speed state to the stopped state, for each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels;
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
Each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels (for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel) can transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, transition to a state in which the left stop button 137 can be accepted at timing (c), transition to a state in which the middle stop button 138 can be accepted at timing (e), and transition to a state in which the right stop button 139 can be accepted at timing (f) as shown in FIG. 234),
The reel control means may transition to a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled before the second constant speed control is started (for example, at the timing of (b) shown in FIG. 234 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, there is no need to wait until the second constant speed control starts before the reel stop position can be controlled, and the operation of the stop operation means can be accepted at an earlier timing. This further enhances the first common effect.

The reel control means may be a means capable of transitioning the reel's stopping position to a controllable state while the second constant speed control is being executed, or may be a means capable of transitioning the reel's stopping position to a controllable state while the acceleration control is being executed.

The second constant speed control may be a control that is repeatedly executed to maintain the constant speed state.

Also,
"When the rotation speed of the reel reaches a constant speed in the constant speed state, the reel control means executes a first constant speed control [for example, the first constant speed control shown in FIG. 212] after terminating the acceleration control, and then executes the second constant speed control,
The second constant speed control is a control that is repeatedly executed.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The first constant speed control may be a control that uses a current value (strong excitation) higher than the current value (e.g., medium excitation) used in the second constant speed control (the same applies below).

The first constant speed control always transitions to the second constant speed control after the first control pattern [for example, the control pattern in which the general-purpose offset counter value is from 0 to 7 in the first constant speed control shown in FIG. 212] is repeatedly executed a first number of times [for example, 16 times], but the second constant speed control transitions to the brake control after the second control pattern [for example, the control pattern in which the general-purpose offset counter value is from 0 to 7 in the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212] is repeatedly executed an indefinite number of times [for example, until the light blocking piece is detected and the stop button is operated].

The reel control means may be a means capable of transitioning the reel stopping position to a controllable state while the first constant speed control is being executed [for example, at timing (b) shown in FIG. 234].

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
One of the reels is a second reel [e.g., a center reel 111],
In a first case (e.g., the case of the example shown in FIG. 229), the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel transitions (e.g., the timing of (c) shown in FIG. 234),
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first case refers to a case where the reel control means transitions the stop position of the first reel to a controllable state before transitioning the stop position of the second reel to a controllable state [for example, the timing of (c) shown in FIG. 234],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel [e.g., the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [e.g., an arrangement of "left" symbols as shown in FIG. 205(a)] are arranged along the rotation direction,
The second reel (e.g., the middle reel 111) is also a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols (e.g., an arrangement of the “middle” symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)) are arranged along the rotation direction.
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means a state in which the reel control means receives a first detection signal (for example, a detection signal of a light-shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from an index sensor) for identifying the position of the stopped display of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means a state in which the reel control means receives a second detection signal (e.g., a detection signal of a light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from an index sensor) for identifying the position of the stopped display of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"When the reel control means receives the first detection signal while executing the second constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (U) in FIG. 234], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"After the first case, if a power interruption and restoration (for example, a power interruption and restoration as shown in FIG. 232) occurs while the brake control of the first reel (for example, the left reel 110) has not been started and the brake control of the second reel (for example, the center reel 111) has not been started, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel (for example, the timing of FIG. 232(d')).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel has multiple designs,
A second reel having a plurality of different patterns;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
A second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the first reel that is rotating;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the second reel that is rotating;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
a reel control means configured to be capable of executing, with respect to rotation control executed on each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, an acceleration control for transitioning to a constant speed state, a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and a stop control for transitioning to a stopped state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted by any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
a stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of the determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A gaming machine equipped with
In a first case, a timing at which the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is earlier than a timing at which the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation,
When a detection signal from the first symbol position detection means is output during a predetermined time period from when the acceleration control for the first reel is started to when the predetermined time period has elapsed, the acceptance of the stop operation by the first stop operation means may be started after the predetermined time period has elapsed.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine makes it possible to detect the reel index before the constant speed flag is turned on, and can start accepting reel stop operations sooner than if reel index detection were performed after the constant speed flag is turned on.

Also,
"The first case is a case where the output of the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is earlier than the output of the detection signal of the second symbol position detection means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the stop operation can begin from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

Also,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and a detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the reel stopping operation can be accepted sooner than before.

Also,
"When a power outage occurs after the first case in a state where the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the second stop operation means may start accepting the stop operation earlier than the first stop operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted changes before and after a power outage, adding variety to the game.

Also,
"The reel control means is capable of executing a first constant speed control and a second constant speed control as the constant speed control,
the reel control means executes the first constant speed control on the first reel during at least a portion of a period until the predetermined time has elapsed, and executes the second constant speed control on the first reel after the predetermined time has elapsed;
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, reel index detection is enabled during the first constant speed control.

In the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be able to execute, with respect to rotation control executed for each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels, an acceleration control for transitioning from a stopped state to a constant speed state (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212), a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state (e.g., the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control), and a brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212);
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
Each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels (for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel) can transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, transition to a state in which the left stop button 137 can be accepted at timing (d), transition to a state in which the middle stop button 138 can be accepted at timing (e), and transition to a state in which the right stop button 139 can be accepted at timing (f) as shown in FIG. 229),
When a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels are operated in succession [for example, when a slide push is performed], there are cases where the reels corresponding to all of the operated stop operation means are in the stoppable state [for example, the example shown in FIG. 239], and there are also cases where only the reels corresponding to some of the operated stop operation means [for example, the left stop button 137] are in the stoppable state [for example, the example shown in FIG. 238].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the first common effect can be achieved even when a slide push operation is performed.

It may also be the case that multiple stop operation means corresponding to each of the multiple reels constituting the multiple reels are operated consecutively, and in this case, "the multiple reels constituting the multiple reels" may be two of the three reels, or three of the three reels.

In addition, when multiple stop operation means corresponding to each of the multiple reels constituting the multiple reels are operated in succession, the brake control may be performed on all of the reels corresponding to all of the operated stop operation means, or the brake control may be performed on only some of the reels corresponding to all of the operated stop operation means.

In addition, when multiple stop operation means corresponding to each of the multiple reels constituting the multiple reels are operated in succession, even if the brake control is being executed for the reel corresponding to the first operated stop operation means, the brake control may also be executed for the reel corresponding to the next operated stop operation means.

In addition, when multiple stop operation means corresponding to each of the multiple reels constituting the multiple reels are operated in succession, even if the brake control is being executed for the reel corresponding to the first operated stop operation means, the next operated stop operation means may be in the non-stop state.

In addition, when multiple stop operation means corresponding to each of the multiple reels constituting the multiple reels are operated in succession, even if the brake control is being executed for the reel corresponding to the first operated stop operation means, the next operated stop operation means may also be in the stoppable state.

Also,
"The above-mentioned 'when multiple stop operation means are operated in succession' refers to a case where multiple stop operation means are operated in succession by tracing them.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
One of the reels is a second reel [e.g., a center reel 111],
In a first case (e.g., the case of the example shown in FIG. 229), the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel transitions (e.g., the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 229),
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first case refers to a case where the reel control means transitions the stop position of the first reel to a controllable state before transitioning the stop position of the second reel to a controllable state [for example, the timing (d) shown in FIG. 229],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel [e.g., the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [e.g., an arrangement of "left" symbols as shown in FIG. 205(a)] are arranged along the rotation direction,
The second reel (e.g., the middle reel 111) is also a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols (e.g., an arrangement of the “middle” symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)) are arranged along the rotation direction.
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means a state in which the reel control means receives a first detection signal (for example, a detection signal of a light-shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from an index sensor) for identifying the position of the stopped display of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means a state in which the reel control means receives a second detection signal (e.g., a detection signal of a light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from an index sensor) for identifying the position of the stopped display of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"When the reel control means receives the first detection signal while executing the constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (U) in FIG. 229], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"After the first case, if a power interruption and restoration (for example, a power interruption and restoration as shown in FIG. 232) occurs while the brake control of the first reel (for example, the left reel 110) has not been started and the brake control of the second reel (for example, the center reel 111) has not been started, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel (for example, the timing of FIG. 232(d')).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel has multiple designs,
A second reel having a plurality of different patterns;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
A second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the first reel that is rotating;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the second reel that is rotating;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
a reel control means configured to execute, with respect to rotation control executed on each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, an acceleration control for transitioning to a constant speed state, a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and a stop control for transitioning to a stopped state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted by any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
a stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of the determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A gaming machine equipped with
In a first case, a timing at which the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is earlier than a timing at which the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation,
When an operation to the first stop operation means and an operation to the second stop operation means are performed during a first period in the first case, the operation to the second stop operation means is invalidated,
When an operation to the first stop operation means and an operation to the second stop operation means are performed during a second period following the first period in the first case, the operation to the second stop operation means becomes valid.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine allows players who are engrossed in playing to calm down by creating a situation where some buttons do not stop even if multiple buttons are operated (slide push) in a short period of time.

Also,
"The first case is a case where the output of the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is earlier than the output of the detection signal of the second symbol position detection means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the stop operation can begin from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

Also,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and a detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the reel stopping operation can be accepted sooner than before.

Also,
"When a power outage occurs after the first case in a state where the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the second stop operation means may start accepting the stop operation earlier than the first stop operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted differs before and after a power outage is restored, adding variety to the game.

In the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be capable of executing at least the following rotation controls for each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels: an acceleration control (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212) that increases the rotation speed of the reel from a stopped state to a constant speed state, a second constant speed control (e.g., the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212) that is repeatedly executed to maintain the constant speed state, and a brake control (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212) that transitions from the constant speed state to the stopped state;
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
Each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels (for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel) can transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, transition to a state in which the left stop button 137 can be accepted at timing (d), transition to a state in which the middle stop button 138 can be accepted at timing (e), and transition to a state in which the right stop button 139 can be accepted at timing (f) as shown in FIG. 229),
the reel control means, when the rotation speed of the reel reaches a constant speed in the constant speed state, executes a first constant speed control (e.g., the first constant speed control shown in FIG. 212) after terminating the acceleration control, and then executes the second constant speed control;
One of the reels (hereinafter referred to as the "first reel") [for example, the left reel 110] has a plurality of types of symbols [for example, an arrangement of "left" symbols as shown in FIG. 205(a)] arranged along the rotation direction,
One of the plurality of types of symbols is a first symbol [for example, a watermelon symbol shown in FIG. 235(c''-1) or a cherry symbol shown in FIG. 235(c''-2)],
The first symbol is a symbol that is advantageous to the player when it is stopped and displayed [for example, a symbol that will win a small prize],
The reel cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the first constant speed control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means may transition to a state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled (hereinafter referred to as the "first state") during execution of the first constant speed control (for example, the timing of (b) shown in FIG. 234 ),
When the first state is entered during the execution of the first constant speed control [for example, at the timing of (b) shown in FIG. 234], when the second constant speed control is started and the stop operation means is operated [for example, at the timing of (c') shown in FIG. 234], there are cases where the first symbol is stopped and displayed [for example, FIG. 235 (c''-1) or FIG. 235 (c''-2)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, even reels equipped with so-called DDT symbols can achieve the first common effect described above, and furthermore, if you are an expert who can judge the changes in reel speed, you will be able to win at the earliest possible timing.

For example, if the first state is entered when the first constant speed control is started, the first pattern may be displayed in a stopped state if the stop operation means is operated to coincide with the start of the second constant speed control.

Also,
"The first reel [e.g., the left reel 110] has a first detection piece [e.g., a light-shielding piece 612D],
The first detection piece is detectable during execution of the first constant speed control (for example, at the timing (b) shown in FIG. 234 ),
The reel control means transitions to the first state when the first detection piece is detected.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"Among the plurality of reels, a reel different from the first reel [e.g., the left reel 110] is a second reel [e.g., the center reel 111],
In a third case (e.g., the case of the example shown in FIG. 234), the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel transitions (e.g., the timing of (c) shown in FIG. 234),
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The third case is a case where the reel control means transitions the stop position of the first reel to a controllable state before transitioning the stop position of the second reel to a controllable state [for example, the timing of (c) shown in FIG. 234],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel [e.g., the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [e.g., an arrangement of "left" symbols as shown in FIG. 205(a)] are arranged along the rotation direction,
The second reel (e.g., the middle reel 111) is also a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols (e.g., an arrangement of the “middle” symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)) are arranged along the rotation direction.
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means a state in which the reel control means receives a first detection signal (for example, a detection signal of a light-shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from an index sensor) for identifying the position of the stopped display of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means a state in which the reel control means receives a second detection signal (e.g., a detection signal of a light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from an index sensor) for identifying the position of the stopped display of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"When the reel control means receives the first detection signal while executing the second constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (U) in FIG. 234], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"After the third case, if a power interruption and restoration (for example, a power interruption and restoration as shown in FIG. 232) occurs while the brake control of the first reel (for example, the left reel 110) has not been started and the brake control of the second reel (for example, the center reel 111) has not been started, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel (for example, the timing of FIG. 232(d')).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The above-mentioned 'when the first state is transitioned to during the execution of the first constant speed control, the second constant speed control is started and the stop operation means is operated' means that the stop operation means is operated at the time when the first symbol can be first stopped and displayed after the first reel starts to rotate.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel has multiple designs,
A second reel having a plurality of different patterns;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
A second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the first reel that is rotating;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the second reel that is rotating;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
a reel control means configured to be capable of executing, with respect to rotation control executed on each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, an acceleration control for transitioning to a constant speed state, a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and a stop control for transitioning to a stopped state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted by any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
a stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of the determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A gaming machine equipped with
In a first case, a timing at which the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is earlier than a timing at which the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation,
a first detection piece provided on the first reel;
a second detection piece provided on the second reel;
Equipped with
the first pattern position detection means outputs the detection signal when the first detection piece is detected;
the second pattern position detection means outputs the detection signal when the second detection piece is detected;
One of the plurality of types of symbols is a first symbol,
the position of the first symbol is at least a position away from the position of the first detection piece toward the rear side in the rotation direction of the reel that has rotated until a predetermined time has elapsed since the reel control means started the constant speed control;
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine allows you to press the first symbol as quickly as possible after operation is accepted.

Also,
"The first case is a case where the output of the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is earlier than the output of the detection signal of the second symbol position detection means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the stop operation can begin from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

Also,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and a detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the reel stopping operation can be accepted sooner than before.

Also,
"When a power outage occurs after the first case in a state where the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the second stop operation means may start accepting the stop operation earlier than the first stop operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted differs before and after a power outage is restored, adding variety to the game.

In the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be able to execute, with respect to rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, an acceleration control for transitioning from a stopped state to a constant speed state (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212), a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state (e.g., the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control), and a brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212);
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
After the brake control is executed and the reels are stopped, each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels that have started to rotate (for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel) can transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, transition to a state in which the left stop button 137 can be accepted at timing (d'), transition to a state in which the middle stop button 138 can be accepted at timing (e'), and transition to a state in which the right stop button 139 can be accepted at timing (f') as shown in FIG. 238),
The reel control means is a means capable of executing a reel effect (for example, a reel action (first reel effect) or a simulated game (second reel effect)),
the reel control means is means for executing a random delay control for randomly delaying the start of rotation of each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels after the reel effect is executed;
For each reel that has been subjected to the random delay control and started to rotate, the reel can be shifted from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, at timing (f'), timing (e'), and timing (d') shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241 );
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

This gaming machine can achieve the first common effect described above, even if it is equipped with random delay control. Furthermore, the reel situation changes with the random delay control, adding excitement to the game.

The reel effect may be such that the spinning reels appear to stop.

Also,
"The reel effect is a pseudo-game effect that makes it appear as if the reels have stopped in response to the operation of the stop operation means [for example, the timing of (h), (h'), and (h'') in FIG. 240].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
One of the reels is a second reel [e.g., a center reel 111],
In a first case among the cases in which the plurality of reels start to rotate after being stopped by the execution of the brake control (for example, the case of the example shown in FIG. 229 or the case of the example shown in FIG. 238), the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel (for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 229 or the timing of (d') shown in FIG. 238),
In a second case (e.g., in the case of the example shown in FIG. 240 or the example shown in FIG. 241) among the cases in which the random delay control is performed and the plurality of reels start spinning after the reel performance is executed, the second reel transitions from the non-stoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel transitions (e.g., at the timing of (e') shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241),
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first case refers to a case where the reel control means transitions the stop position of the first reel to a controllable state before transitioning the stop position of the second reel to a controllable state (for example, timing (d) shown in FIG. 229 or timing (d') shown in FIG. 238),
The second case refers to a case where the reel control means transitions the stop position of the second reel to a controllable state before transitioning the stop position of the first reel to a controllable state (for example, timing (e') shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241 );
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel [e.g., the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols [e.g., an arrangement of "left" symbols as shown in FIG. 205(a)] are arranged along the rotation direction,
The second reel (e.g., the middle reel 111) is also a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols (e.g., an arrangement of the “middle” symbols shown in FIG. 205(a)) are arranged along the rotation direction.
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means a state in which the reel control means receives a first detection signal (for example, a detection signal of a light-shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from an index sensor) for identifying the position of the stopped display of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means a state in which the reel control means receives a second detection signal (e.g., a detection signal of a light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from an index sensor) for identifying the position of the stopped display of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"When the reel control means receives the first detection signal while executing the constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (U) in FIG. 229], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"After the first case, if a power interruption and restoration (for example, a power interruption and restoration as shown in FIG. 232) occurs while the brake control of the first reel (for example, the left reel 110) has not been started and the brake control of the second reel (for example, the center reel 111) has not been started, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel (for example, the timing of FIG. 232(d')).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel has multiple designs,
A second reel having a plurality of different patterns;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
A second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the first reel that is rotating;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the second reel that is rotating;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
a reel control means configured to execute, with respect to rotation control executed on each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, an acceleration control for transitioning to a constant speed state, a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and a stop control for transitioning to a stopped state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted by any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
a stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of the determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A gaming machine equipped with
In a first case, a timing at which the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation is earlier than a timing at which the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation,
the reel control means is means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the start of rotation of each of the plurality of reels,
When the random delay control is executed after a first game in which the first case occurs, in a second game following the first game, a timing at which the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation may be earlier than a timing at which the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the start times of acceptance of each stop operation means for the first game and the second game can be made different, adding variety to the game.

Also,
"The first case is a case where the output of the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is earlier than the output of the detection signal of the second symbol position detection means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the stop operation can begin from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

Also,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and a detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the reel stopping operation can be accepted sooner than before.

Also,
"When a power outage occurs after the first case in a state where the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the second stop operation means may start accepting the stop operation earlier than the first stop operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted differs before and after a power outage is restored, adding variety to the game.

In the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
notification means (e.g., a left stop button LED 137a, a middle stop button LED 138a, a right stop button LED 139a) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that can execute notification (e.g., notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) that the corresponding rotating reel is in the stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be able to execute, with respect to rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, an acceleration control for transitioning from a stopped state to a constant speed state (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212), a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state (e.g., the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control), and a brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212);
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
A reel among the plurality of reels for which the notification is started by the notification means [for example, the left reel 110 or the center reel 111] may transition from an unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, at the timing of (d) or (e) shown in FIG. 238] before the notification is started [for example, at the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 238].
He explained:

With this gaming machine, the reels may stop if the stop operation means is operated without waiting for the notification from the notification means, and the player's operation takes priority, which may increase the sense of realism of the game. In addition, the game progresses at a good tempo without the player feeling stressed. These effects are also common to the gaming machines described below, and may be referred to as the second common effects below.

The certain reel may necessarily transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the notification begins (the same applies below).

The notification means may also be one that starts notifying that each reel is in the stoppable state when all of the reels have transitioned to the stoppable state, or one that starts notifying that each reel is in the stoppable state when the stop positions of all of the reels have transitioned to a controllable state (the same applies below).

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
The notification means is a means including a first notification means (e.g., a left stop button LED 137a),
the first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification (for example, a notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state,
In a fourth case [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 238 ], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, at the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 238 ],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Note that one of the reels is the third reel [e.g., the middle reel 111], the notification means includes a third notification means [e.g., the middle stop button LED 138a], and the third notification means is capable of issuing a third notification [e.g., notification by a second light-emitting pattern (blue light-emitting pattern)] indicating that the third reel is in the stoppable state, and in some cases, the third reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [e.g., at the timing of (e) shown in FIG. 238] before the third notification means starts the third notification (the same applies below).

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [e.g., the right reel 112],
The notification means includes a second notification means (e.g., a right stop button LED 139a),
the second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification (for example, a notification by a second light-emitting mode (a blue light-emitting mode)) indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state,
In the fourth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, at the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 238 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

In the fourth case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state at the same time that the second notification is initiated by the second notification means.

Also,
"The second reel is the reel that has transitioned to a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 238].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 238], the second notification by the second notification means is also started.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The timing at which the first notification is initiated by the first notification means and the timing at which the second notification is initiated by the second notification means may be simultaneous (the same applies below).

Also,
"After the fourth case, if a power interruption and restoration (for example, the power interruption and restoration shown in FIG. 232) occurs while the brake control of the second reel (for example, the right reel 112) has not been started, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means (for example, the timing of FIG. 232(e')).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

In addition, among the multiple reels, a reel [e.g., right reel 112] other than the certain reel [e.g., left reel 110 or center reel 111] for which the notification is started by the notification means may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state at the start of the notification (the same applies below). In other words, among the multiple reels, a reel other than the certain reel for which the notification is started by the notification means may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state at the same time that the notification is started (the same applies below).

Furthermore, the other reel may be the last reel among the plurality of reels to transition to a state in which the reel's stopping position can be controlled (the same applies below).

Furthermore, the notification for the one reel may also start at the same time that the notification for the other reel starts (this also applies below). In other words, the notification start timing for the one reel in the notification means and the notification start timing for the other reel in the notification means may be the same timing (this also applies below).

Also,
"The first reel has multiple designs,
A second reel having a plurality of different patterns;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
A second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the first reel that is rotating;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the second reel that is rotating;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a reel control means configured to execute, with respect to rotation control executed on each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, an acceleration control for transitioning to a constant speed state, a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and a stop control for transitioning to a stopped state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted by any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
a stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of the determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying a first indication indicating that the first stop operation means is capable of accepting an operation;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying the first indication indicating that the second stop operation means is capable of accepting an operation;
A gaming machine equipped with
In a second case, a start time of acceptance of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than a start time of displaying the first display by the first operation acceptance display means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine can stop faster than conventional gaming machines, shortening the time between waits.

Also,
"In the second case, the start time of the acceptance of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the start time of the display of the first display by the second operation acceptance display means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the player feels that the operation of the first stop operation means begins earlier than the second stop operation means.

Also,
"The display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the player feels that the operation of the first stop operation means begins earlier than the second stop operation means.

Also,
"When a power outage occurs after the second case, the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the operating means that can be operated faster than the first display differs before and after the power is restored, adding variety to the game.

In the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
notification means (e.g., a left stop button LED 137a, a middle stop button LED 138a, a right stop button LED 139a) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that can execute notification (e.g., notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) that the corresponding rotating reel is in the stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be able to execute, with respect to rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, an acceleration control for transitioning from a stopped state to a constant speed state (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212), a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state (e.g., the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control), and a brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212);
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
Among the plurality of reels, a certain reel (e.g., the left reel 110 or the center reel 111) for which the notification is started by the notification means may transition from an unstoppable state to the stoppable state (e.g., at timing (d) or (e) shown in FIG. 238) before the notification is started (e.g., at timing (f) shown in FIG. 238),
When the brake control of the certain reel is started (timing (h1) shown in FIG. 238) before the notification for the certain reel (hereinafter referred to as "certain notification") is executed, the certain notification is not executed at the time when the notification for a reel other than the certain reel [for example, the right reel 112] is executed (timing (f) to (h3) shown in FIG. 238).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

In addition to the second common effect, this gaming machine does not issue the notification about the reel that corresponds to the stop operation means that was operated early on, so as to avoid misleading the player.

In addition, the brake control of a certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] is started before the notification [for example, the notification by the second light emission mode (blue light emission mode) of the left stop button LED 137a or the middle stop button LED 138a] is executed, and the notification is not executed until the constant speed control of the certain reel is started [for example, the timing of (f') in FIG. 238].

In other words, the brake control of the certain reel is started before the notification means issues a notification that the certain reel that has transitioned to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state [for example, at the timing of (h1) shown in FIG. 238], and the notification is not executed until the constant speed control of the certain reel is started [for example, at the timing of (f') in FIG. 238].

In addition, if the brake control of a certain reel is started before the notification means issues a notification that the certain reel that has transitioned to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state, the notification is not executed until the constant speed control of all of the reels including the certain reel is started. Alternatively, if the brake control of a certain reel is started before the notification means issues a notification that the certain reel that has transitioned to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state, the notification is not executed until the stop positions of all of the reels including the certain reel are transitioned to a controllable state. Alternatively, if the brake control of a certain reel is started before the notification means issues a notification that the certain reel that has transitioned to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state, the notification is not executed until all of the reels including the certain reel transition from the non-stoppable state to the stoppable state.

In addition, if the brake control of a certain reel that has transitioned to the stoppable state is started before the notification means issues a notification that the certain reel is in the stoppable state, the notification will not be issued until the brake control of all reels other than the certain reel among the multiple reels is completed.

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
The notification means is a means including a first notification means (e.g., a left stop button LED 137a),
the first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification (for example, a notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state,
In a fourth case [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 238], in a certain game [for example, a game in which the reel starts spinning from the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 238], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 238],
In the certain game, when the brake control of the first reel is started before the first notification is started by the first notification means (for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 238), the first notification by the first notification means is not executed in the certain game.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [e.g., the right reel 112],
The notification means includes a second notification means (e.g., a right stop button LED 139a),
the second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification (for example, a notification by a second light-emitting mode (a blue light-emitting mode)) indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state,
In the fourth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, at the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 238 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The second reel is the reel that has transitioned to a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 238].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 238], the second notification by the second notification means is also started.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"After the fourth case, if a power interruption and restoration (for example, the power interruption and restoration shown in FIG. 232) occurs while the brake control of the second reel (for example, the right reel 112) has not been started, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means (for example, the timing of FIG. 232(e')).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel has multiple designs,
A second reel having a plurality of different patterns;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
A second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the first reel that is rotating;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the second reel that is rotating;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a reel control means configured to execute, with respect to rotation control executed on each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, an acceleration control for transitioning to a constant speed state, a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and a stop control for transitioning to a stopped state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted by any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
a stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of the determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying a first indication indicating that the first stop operation means is capable of accepting an operation;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying the first indication indicating that the second stop operation means is capable of accepting an operation;
A gaming machine equipped with
In a second case, a start time of acceptance of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than a start time of displaying the first display by the first operation acceptance display means;
In the second case, if the first stop operation means is operated before the display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means, the first display by the first operation reception display means is not displayed in the game in the second case.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine will not mislead players.

Also,
"In the second case, the start time of the acceptance of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the start time of the display of the first display by the second operation acceptance display means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the player feels that the operation of the first stop operation means begins earlier than the second stop operation means.

Also,
"The display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the player feels that the operation of the first stop operation means begins earlier than the second stop operation means.

Also,
"When a power outage occurs after the second case, the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the operating means that can be operated faster than the first display differs before and after the power is restored, adding variety to the game.

In the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
notification means (e.g., a left stop button LED 137a, a middle stop button LED 138a, a right stop button LED 139a) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that can execute notification (e.g., notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) that the corresponding rotating reel is in the stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be able to execute, with respect to rotation control executed for each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels, an acceleration control for transitioning from a stopped state to a constant speed state (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212), a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state (e.g., the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control), and a brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212);
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
Among the plurality of reels, a certain reel (e.g., the left reel 110 or the center reel 111) for which the notification is started by the notification means may transition from an unstoppable state to the stoppable state (e.g., at timing (d) or (e) shown in FIG. 238) before the notification is started (e.g., at timing (f) shown in FIG. 238),
Before the notification [e.g., notification by the second light-emitting mode (blue light-emitting mode)] for a reel [e.g., the right reel 112] among the plurality of reels is started [e.g., the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 238 ], the other reel may be in the unstoppable state, and while the notification [e.g., notification by the second light-emitting mode (blue light-emitting mode)] is being executed [e.g., during the period started at the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 238 ], the other reel is in the stoppable state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

In other words, before the notification that a reel other than the certain reel among the multiple reels [for example, the right reel 112] is in the stoppable state [for example, notification by the second light-emitting mode (blue light-emitting mode)] is started by the notification means [for example, the right stop button LED 139a] [for example, at the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 238], the other reel may be in the unstoppable state, and while the notification that the other reel is in the stoppable state [for example, notification by the second light-emitting mode (blue light-emitting mode)] is being executed by the notification means [for example, the right stop button LED 139a] [for example, during the period started at the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 238], the other reel is in the stoppable state.

In addition, before the notification means starts to notify that the other reel is in the stoppable state, the other reel may always be in the non-stoppable state.

This gaming machine achieves the second common effect described above, but also allows beginners to wait for the notification before operating the stop operation means, allowing them to play calmly and with the notification, they can play with peace of mind.

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
One of the reels is a second reel [e.g., a center reel 111],
The notification means includes a first notification means (e.g., a left stop button LED 137a) and a second notification means (e.g., a middle stop button LED 137b),
the first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification (for example, a notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state,
the second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification (for example, a notification by a second light-emitting mode (a blue light-emitting mode)) indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state,
In a fourth case, the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first notification is started by the first notification means,
In the fourth case, before the second notification is started, the second reel is in the non-stop state, and after the second notification is started, the second reel is in the stoppable state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"In the fourth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, at the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 238].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The second reel is the reel that has transitioned to a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 238].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 238], the second notification by the second notification means is also started.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"After the fourth case, if a power interruption and restoration (for example, the power interruption and restoration shown in FIG. 232) occurs while the brake control of the second reel (for example, the right reel 112) has not been started, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means (for example, the timing of FIG. 232(e')).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"A first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
A second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the first reel that is rotating;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the second reel that is rotating;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a reel control means configured to execute, with respect to rotation control executed on each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, an acceleration control for transitioning to a constant speed state, a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and a stop control for transitioning to a stopped state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted by any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
a stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of the determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying a first indication indicating that the first stop operation means is capable of accepting an operation;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying the first indication indicating that the second stop operation means is capable of accepting an operation;
A gaming machine equipped with
In a second case, a start time of acceptance of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than a start time of display of the first display by the first operation acceptance display means,
When an operation is performed on the second stop operation means during a third period in the second case, the operation on the second stop operation means is invalidated,
When an operation is performed on the second stop operation means during a fourth period after the third period in the second case, the operation on the second stop operation means becomes valid,
the third period is a period during which the second operation reception display means is not displaying the first display,
the fourth period is a period during which the second operation reception display means displays the first display,
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the display of the second operation reception display means may indicate a period during which only the first stop operation means is accepted, and a period during which both are accepted.

Also,
"In the second case, the start time of the acceptance of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the start time of the display of the first display by the second operation acceptance display means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the player feels that the operation of the first stop operation means begins earlier than the second stop operation means.

Also,
"The display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the player feels that the operation of the first stop operation means begins earlier than the second stop operation means.

Also,
"When a power outage occurs after the second case, the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the operating means that can be operated faster than the first display differs before and after the power is restored, adding variety to the game.

In the above description,
"Multiple reels and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
notification means (e.g., a left stop button LED 137a, a middle stop button LED 138a, a right stop button LED 139a) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that can execute notification (e.g., notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) that the corresponding rotating reel is in the stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be able to execute, with respect to rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, an acceleration control for transitioning from a stopped state to a constant speed state (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212), a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state (e.g., the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control), and a brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212);
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control unit 300 which executes the winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 214 ) for determining an internal winning combination;
A presentation means (e.g., a presentation image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device)) capable of executing a suggestion presentation (e.g., a small role suggestion presentation shown in FIG. 237(A)) that suggests the determined internal winning role;
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
Among the plurality of reels, a certain reel (e.g., the left reel 110 or the center reel 111) for which the notification is started by the notification means may transition from an unstoppable state to the stoppable state (e.g., at timing (d) or (e) shown in FIG. 236) before the notification is started (e.g., at timing (f) shown in FIG. 236),
The performance means is a means for starting the execution of the suggestion performance [for example, the small win suggestion performance shown in (a1) in FIG. 237(A)] before the certain reel transitions from the non-stop state to the stoppable state [for example, the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 236].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

This gaming machine more effectively achieves the second common effect. That is, the suggestive effects allow the player to know when a throw-away game is about to begin, and when a throw-away game is about to begin, the player can stop the game quickly with a quick timing stop operation. The suggestive effects also allow the player to know when a small win is about to be collected, and when playing a small win game, the player can be careful not to make any mistakes when operating the stop operation means.

The presentation means may be a means for starting the execution of the suggestive presentation at the same time that the acceleration control of the certain reel is started, or may be a means for starting the execution of the suggestive presentation when the certain reel starts to rotate.

The presentation means may also be a means for always starting the execution of the suggestion presentation before the certain reel transitions from the non-stoppable state to the stoppable state.

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
The notification means is a means including a first notification means (e.g., a left stop button LED 137a),
the first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification (for example, a notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state,
In a fifth case (for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 236), the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first notification is started by the first notification means (for example, at the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 236),
The effect means is a means for starting the execution of the suggestion effect before the first reel transitions from the non-stoppable state to the stoppable state in the fifth case (for example, at the timing (a) shown in FIG. 236).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [e.g., the right reel 112],
The notification means includes a second notification means (e.g., a right stop button LED 139a),
the second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification (for example, a notification by a second light-emitting mode (a blue light-emitting mode)) indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state,
In the fifth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, at the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 236 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The second reel is the reel that has transitioned to a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 236].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 236], the second notification by the second notification means is also started.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"After the fifth case, if a power interruption and restoration (e.g., the power interruption and restoration shown in FIG. 232) occurs while the brake control of the second reel (e.g., the right reel 112) has not been started, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means (e.g., the timing of FIG. 232(e')).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel has multiple designs,
A second reel having a plurality of different patterns;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
A second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the first reel that is rotating;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the second reel that is rotating;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a reel control means configured to execute, with respect to rotation control executed on each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, an acceleration control for transitioning to a constant speed state, a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and a stop control for transitioning to a stopped state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted by any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
a stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of the determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying a first indication indicating that the first stop operation means is capable of accepting an operation;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying the first indication indicating that the second stop operation means is capable of accepting an operation;
A gaming machine equipped with
In a second case, a start time of acceptance of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than a start time of display of the first display by the first operation acceptance display means,
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination;
A presentation means capable of executing a suggestive presentation suggesting the determined internal winning combination;
Equipped with
The performance means may execute the suggestion performance in the second case,
In the second case, the execution start time of the suggestion effect by the effecting means is earlier than the start time of the acceptance of the stop operation by the first stop operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine allows you to quickly complete the discard game while preventing erroneous operation in the small win recovery game.

Also,
"In the second case, the start time of the acceptance of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the start time of the display of the first display by the second operation acceptance display means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the player feels that the operation of the first stop operation means begins earlier than the second stop operation means.

Also,
"The display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the player feels that the operation of the first stop operation means begins earlier than the second stop operation means.

Also,
"When a power outage occurs after the second case, the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the operating means that can be operated faster than the first display differs before and after the power is restored, adding variety to the game.

In the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
notification means (e.g., a left stop button LED 137a, a middle stop button LED 138a, a right stop button LED 139a) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that can execute notification (e.g., notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) that the corresponding rotating reel is in the stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be able to execute, with respect to rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, an acceleration control for transitioning from a stopped state to a constant speed state (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212), a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state (e.g., the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control), and a brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212);
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control unit 300 which executes the winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 214 ) for determining an internal winning combination;
A presentation means (e.g., a presentation image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device)) capable of executing an instruction presentation (e.g., a navigation presentation shown in FIG. 237(B)) capable of stopping the plurality of reels in a stopping mode corresponding to the determined internal winning combination;
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
Among the plurality of reels, a certain reel (e.g., the left reel 110 or the center reel 111) for which the notification is started by the notification means may transition from an unstoppable state to the stoppable state (e.g., at timing (d) or (e) shown in FIG. 236) before the notification is started (e.g., at timing (f) shown in FIG. 236),
The performance means is a means for starting the execution of a performance including an operation instruction of the stop operation means corresponding to the certain reel among the stop operation means [for example, a navigation performance shown in (a2) in FIG. 237(B)] as the execution of the instruction performance before the certain reel transitions from the non-stoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 236].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

In addition to the second common effect, this gaming machine has another effect. That is, not only can the player perform a quick stop operation while following the instructions, but even if the player accidentally operates a certain stop operation means, if the reel corresponding to that stop operation means is in the unstoppable state, the player does not lose the chance to win.

The presentation means may be a means for always starting the execution of a presentation including an operation instruction of the stop operation means corresponding to the certain reel, as the execution of the instruction presentation, before the certain reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state.

Also,
"The order in which each reel constituting the plurality of reels transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the order of left reel → center reel → right reel in the example shown in FIG. 236] may differ from the order in which each stop operation means provided for each reel constituting the plurality of reels is operated as instructed by the instruction performance [for example, the order of right reel → center reel → left reel in the navigation performance shown in FIG. 237(B)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

It is also possible that the order in which each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state coincides with the order in which the stop operation means provided for each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is operated as instructed by the instruction performance.

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
The notification means is a means including a first notification means (e.g., a left stop button LED 137a),
the first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification (for example, a notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state,
In a fifth case (for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 236), the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first notification is started by the first notification means (for example, at the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 236),
The presentation means is a means for starting, in the fifth case, the execution of a presentation including an operation instruction of the stop operation means corresponding to the certain reel among the stop operation means [for example, the navigation presentation shown in (a2) in FIG. 237(B)] as the execution of the instruction presentation, before the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 236].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [e.g., the right reel 112],
The notification means includes a second notification means (e.g., a right stop button LED 139a),
the second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification (for example, a notification by a second light-emitting mode (a blue light-emitting mode)) indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state,
In the fifth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, at the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 236 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The second reel is the reel that has transitioned to a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 236].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 236], the second notification by the second notification means is also started.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"After the fifth case, if a power interruption and restoration (e.g., the power interruption and restoration shown in FIG. 232) occurs while the brake control of the second reel (e.g., the right reel 112) has not been started, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means (e.g., the timing of FIG. 232(e')).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel has multiple designs,
A second reel having a plurality of different patterns;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
A second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the first reel that is rotating;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the second reel that is rotating;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a reel control means configured to execute, with respect to rotation control executed on each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, an acceleration control for transitioning to a constant speed state, a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and a stop control for transitioning to a stopped state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted by any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
a stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of the determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying a first indication indicating that the first stop operation means is capable of accepting an operation;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying the first indication indicating that the second stop operation means is capable of accepting an operation;
A gaming machine equipped with
In a second case, a start time of acceptance of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than a start time of display of the first display by the first operation acceptance display means,
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination;
a presentation means for executing a presentation for stopping the reels in a stop pattern corresponding to the determined internal winning combination;
Equipped with
The performance means may execute the instruction performance in the second case,
The instruction performance in the second case may include an instruction to operate the first stop operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This machine allows you to play the navigation game quickly.

Also,
"In the second case, the start time of the acceptance of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the start time of the display of the first display by the second operation acceptance display means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the player feels that the operation of the first stop operation means begins earlier than the second stop operation means.

Also,
"The display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the player feels that the operation of the first stop operation means begins earlier than the second stop operation means.

Also,
"When a power outage occurs after the second case, the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the operating means that can be operated faster than the first display differs before and after the power is restored, adding variety to the game.

In the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
notification means (e.g., a left stop button LED 137a, a middle stop button LED 138a, a right stop button LED 139a) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that can execute notification (e.g., notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) that the corresponding rotating reel is in the stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be able to execute, with respect to rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, an acceleration control for transitioning from a stopped state to a constant speed state (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212), a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state (e.g., the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control), and a brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212);
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
Among the plurality of reels, a certain reel (e.g., the left reel 110 or the center reel 111) for which the notification is started by the notification means may transition from an unstoppable state to the stoppable state (e.g., at timing (d) or (e) shown in FIG. 240) before the notification is started (e.g., at timing (f) shown in FIG. 240),
The reel control means is a means capable of executing a reel effect (for example, a reel action (first reel effect) or a simulated game (second reel effect)),
The reel control means is a means capable of executing a random delay control for randomly delaying the start of rotation of each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels after the execution of the reel effect (for example, executed between timing (i) and timing (f') shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241 );
Among the reels that have been subjected to the random delay control and started to rotate, a reel other than the certain reel [for example, the right reel 112] may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the notification for the other reel is started [for example, the timing of (f') shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

In other words, the random delay control is performed on each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels on which the reel effect is executed, and among the plurality of reels that have started to rotate, a reel other than the certain reel on which the notification is started by the notification means [for example, the right reel 112] may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the notification is started [for example, at the timing of (f') shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241].

With this gaming machine, even if it is equipped with random delay control, it can achieve the second common effect described above, and furthermore, the reel situation changes with the random delay control, adding excitement to the game.

The reel effect may be such that the spinning reels appear to stop.

Also,
"The reel effect is a pseudo game [for example, the pseudo game shown in FIG. 240] that appears to stop in response to the operation of the stop operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a second reel [e.g., the right reel 112],
The notification means includes a first notification means (e.g., the left stop button LED 137a) and a second notification means,
the first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification (for example, a notification by a second light emission mode (a blue light emission mode)) indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state,
the second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification (for example, a notification by a second light-emitting mode (a blue light-emitting mode)) indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state,
In a sixth case (e.g., the case of the example shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241), the first reel (e.g., the left reel 110) transitions from the non-stoppable state to the stoppable state (e.g., the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241) before the first notification is started by the first notification means, and then the reel effect (e.g., a pseudo effect or a reel action) is executed,
In the sixth case, the random delay control is performed following the reel presentation [for example, between timing (i) and timing (f') shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241], and the second reel [for example, the right reel 112] that has started to rotate transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification begins [for example, at timing (f') shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"After the random delay control in the sixth case is performed, the first notification is started by the first notification means, and the first reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, at the timing (d') shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

In addition, the first reel that has started spinning after the random delay control in the sixth case may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state at the same time that the second notification is started by the second notification means.

Also,
"The first reel is the reel that has transitioned to a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled at the latest timing among the multiple reels [for example, the timing (d') shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, at the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 240, or at the timing of (d') shown in FIG. 240 or FIG. 241], the second notification by the second notification means is also started.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"After the sixth case, if a power interruption and restoration (e.g., the power interruption and restoration shown in FIG. 232) occurs while the brake control of the second reel (e.g., the right reel 112) has not been started, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means (e.g., the timing of FIG. 232(e')).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel has multiple designs,
A second reel having a plurality of different patterns;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
A second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the first reel that is rotating;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the second reel that is rotating;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a reel control means configured to execute, with respect to rotation control executed on each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, an acceleration control for transitioning to a constant speed state, a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and a stop control for transitioning to a stopped state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted by any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
a stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of the determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying a first indication indicating that the first stop operation means is capable of accepting an operation;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying the first indication indicating that the second stop operation means is capable of accepting an operation;
A gaming machine equipped with
In a second case, a start time of acceptance of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than a start time of displaying the first display by the first operation acceptance display means;
the reel control means is means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the start of rotation of each of the plurality of reels,
When the random delay control is executed after the third game in which the second case occurs, in a fourth game following the third game, a timing at which the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation may be earlier than a timing at which the second operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the start times of acceptance of each stop operation means for the third game and the fourth game can be made different, adding variety to the game.

Also,
"In the second case, the start time of the acceptance of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the start time of the display of the first display by the second operation acceptance display means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the player feels that the operation of the first stop operation means begins earlier than the second stop operation means.

Also,
"The display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the player feels that the operation of the first stop operation means begins earlier than the second stop operation means.

Also,
"When a power outage occurs after the second case, the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second operation acceptance display means starts displaying the first display.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the operating means that can be operated faster than the first display differs before and after the power is restored, adding variety to the game.

In the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be able to execute, with respect to rotation control executed for each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels, an acceleration control for transitioning from a stopped state to a constant speed state (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212), a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state (e.g., the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control), and a brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212);
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
Each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels (for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel) can transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, transition to a state in which the left stop button 137 can be accepted at timing (d), transition to a state in which the middle stop button 138 can be accepted at timing (e), and transition to a state in which the right stop button 139 can be accepted at timing (f) as shown in FIGS. 243 and 244),
In a first period (e.g., the period indicated by the arrow (e) in FIG. 243), when a simultaneous stop operation of the stop operation means is performed with the aim of stopping the multiple reels simultaneously (e.g., at the timing of (h) in FIG. 243), only some of the multiple reels (e.g., only the left reel 110) will be stopped, whereas in a second period (e.g., the period indicated by the arrow (o) in FIG. 244), when the simultaneous stop operation is performed (e.g., at the timing of (h) in FIG. 244), all of the multiple reels may be stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine can handle the quick operation of pressing buttons simultaneously, but there are also cases where some of the reels do not stop, allowing players who are engrossed in the game to calm down.

In addition, during the second period, when the simultaneous stopping operation is performed, all of the multiple reels may be stopped without fail (the same applies below).

The second period may be a period that follows the first period (the same applies below).

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
One of the reels is a second reel [e.g., a center reel 111],
In the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, at least a portion of the period during which the brake control is performed on the first reel may overlap with at least a portion of the period during which the brake control is performed on the second reel.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

In addition, during the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, at least a portion of the period during which the brake control is performed on the first reel and at least a portion of the period during which the brake control is performed on the second reel may necessarily overlap (the same applies below).

The stop operation means may be a means including a first stop operation means [e.g., left stop button 137] and a second stop operation means [e.g., center stop button 138], the first stop operation means being a means for stopping the first reel [e.g., left reel 110] when the first reel is operated in a stoppable state, and the second stop operation means being a means for stopping the second reel [e.g., center reel 111] when the second reel is operated in a stoppable state (the same applies below).

Also,
In the seventh case (for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 243), the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel transitions (for example, at the timing of FIG. 243(d)),
The first period (for example, the period indicated by the arrow (E) in FIG. 243) is a part of the period in the seventh case,
In the first period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, only the first reel (e.g., the left reel 110) of the first reel and the second reel is stopped,
In the eighth case [for example, the case of the example shown in FIG. 244], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, the timing of FIG. 244(d)],
The second period (for example, the period indicated by the arrow (E) in FIG. 244) is a part of the period in the eighth case,
In the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, both the first reel (e.g., the left reel 110) and the second reel (e.g., the center reel 111) are stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"When a power interruption and restoration (for example, a power interruption and restoration as shown in FIG. 232) occurs while the brake control of the first reel (for example, the left reel 110) has not been started and the brake control of the second reel (for example, the center reel 111) has not been started, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel (for example, the timing of FIG. 232(e')).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel has multiple designs,
A second reel having a plurality of different patterns;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
A second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the first reel that is rotating;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the second reel that is rotating;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
a reel control means configured to execute, with respect to rotation control executed on each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, an acceleration control for transitioning to a constant speed state, a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and a stop control for transitioning to a stopped state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted by any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
a stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of the determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The stop operation receiving means is configured to be able to receive simultaneous stop operations by the plurality of stop operation means,
In a third case, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation,
In the third case, if an operation to the first stop operation means and a simultaneous stop operation to the second stop operation means are performed during the fifth period, the operation to the second stop operation means is invalidated,
In the third case, when an operation to the first stop operation means and a simultaneous stop operation to the second stop operation means are performed during a sixth period after the fifth period, the operation to the second stop operation means becomes valid.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine allows players who are engrossed in playing to calm down by creating a situation where some machines do not stop even when the simultaneous stopping operation is performed.

Also,
"When the simultaneous stop operation is performed during the sixth period, at least a part of the period during which the stop control is performed on the first reel and at least a part of the period during which the stop control is performed on the second reel overlap with each other.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"When a power outage occurs after the third case in a state in which the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the second stop operation means may start accepting the stop operation earlier than the first stop operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted changes before and after a power outage, adding variety to the game.

In the above description,
"A plurality of reels (e.g., two or more of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112, or all of these reels) and
stop operation means (e.g., a left stop button 137, a center stop button 138, a right stop button 139) that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels and that stop the corresponding reel that is spinning when operated in a stoppable state;
a reel control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) configured to be able to execute, with respect to rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, an acceleration control for transitioning from a stopped state to a constant speed state (e.g., the acceleration control shown in FIG. 212), a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state (e.g., the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 212, or a combination of the first constant speed control and the second constant speed control), and a brake control for transitioning from the constant speed state to the stopped state (e.g., the brake control shown in FIG. 212);
Equipped with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped even if the stop operation means is operated when the acceleration control is being executed (for example, the stop button validity information is set only in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. 222 );
The reel control means is a means capable of executing the brake control after transitioning to the stoppable state (for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)),
Each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels (for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 218 is executed for each reel) can transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (for example, transition to a state in which the left stop button 137 can be accepted at timing (d), transition to a state in which the middle stop button 138 can be accepted at timing (e), and transition to a state in which the right stop button 139 can be accepted at timing (f) as shown in FIGS. 243 and 245),
In a first period (e.g., the period indicated by the arrow (e) in FIG. 243), when a simultaneous stop operation of the stop operation means is performed with the aim of stopping the multiple reels simultaneously (e.g., at the timing of (h) in FIG. 243), only some of the multiple reels (e.g., only the left reel 110) will be stopped, whereas in a second period (e.g., the period indicated by the arrow (o) in FIG. 245), when the simultaneous stop operation is performed (e.g., at the timing of (h) in FIG. 245), all of the multiple reels may be stopped.
The reel control means is a means capable of executing a reel effect (for example, a simultaneous reel effect),
The reel control means is a means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the start of rotation of each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels (for example, executed between timing (i) and timing (f') shown in FIG. 245 );
When a certain reel among the plurality of reels [e.g., the left reel 110] first transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [e.g., the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 245], the reel presentation is executed [e.g., the timing of (h) shown in FIG. 245], and the plurality of reels start to rotate as a result of the random delay control being performed [e.g., between the timing of (i) and the timing of (f') shown in FIG. 245], a reel among the plurality of reels other than the certain reel [e.g., the right reel 112] may first transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [e.g., the timing of (f') shown in FIG. 245],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

This gaming machine also responds to the quick operation of pressing buttons simultaneously, and some reels may not stop, allowing players who are engrossed in the game to calm down. In addition, random delay control is inserted to change the state of the reels, adding excitement to the game.

The reel effect may be a simultaneous reel effect that makes it appear as if the multiple rotating reels have stopped simultaneously (for example, at timing (h) shown in FIG. 245).

Also,
"The above-mentioned unstoppable state means a state in which the reel's stopping position cannot be controlled,
The stoppable state is a state in which the stopping position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state (for example, when a light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, the rotational position information of the reel is reset to zero, and the stopping position of the reel can be calculated).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"One of the reels constituting the plurality of reels is a first reel [e.g., the left reel 110],
One of the reels is a second reel [e.g., a center reel 111],
In the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, at least a portion of the period during which the brake control is performed on the first reel may overlap with at least a portion of the period during which the brake control is performed on the second reel.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
In the seventh case (for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 243), the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel transitions (for example, at the timing of FIG. 243(d)),
In the seventh case, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, only the first reel (e.g., the left reel 110) of the first reel and the second reel is stopped (e.g., at the timing of (h) shown in FIG. 243 ),
In the eighth case [for example, the case of the example shown in FIG. 244], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, the timing of FIG. 244(d)],
In the eighth case, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, both the first reel (e.g., the left reel 110) and the second reel (e.g., the center reel 111) are stopped (e.g., at the timing of (h) shown in FIG. 243).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"When a power outage occurs and power is restored while the brake control of the first reel (e.g., the left reel 110) has not been started and the brake control of the second reel (e.g., the center reel 111) has not been started, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel does (e.g., the timing of FIG. 232(e')).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first reel has multiple designs,
A second reel having a plurality of different patterns;
a first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
A second reel rotation drive means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the first reel that is rotating;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the second reel that is rotating;
a first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
a second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying a display position of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
a reel control means configured to be capable of executing, with respect to rotation control executed on each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, an acceleration control for transitioning to a constant speed state, a constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and a stop control for transitioning to a stopped state;
a stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation can be accepted by any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means;
a stop operation control means for controlling any one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of the determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The stop operation receiving means is configured to be able to receive simultaneous stop operations by the plurality of stop operation means,
In a third case, the first stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation earlier than the second stop operation means starts accepting the stop operation,
In the third case, if an operation to the first stop operation means and a simultaneous stop operation to the second stop operation means are performed during the fifth period, the operation to the second stop operation means is invalidated,
In the third case, when an operation to the first stop operation means and a simultaneous stop operation to the second stop operation means are performed during a sixth period after the fifth period, the operation to the second stop operation means becomes valid,
the reel control means is means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the start of rotation of each of the plurality of reels,
When the random delay control is executed after the fifth game in which the third case occurs, in a sixth game following the fifth game, the second stop operation means may start to receive the stop operation earlier than the first stop operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the start times of acceptance of each stop operation means for the fifth game and the sixth game are set to be different, adding variety to the games.

Also,
"When the simultaneous stop operation is performed during the sixth period, at least a part of the period during which the stop control is performed on the first reel and at least a part of the period during which the stop control is performed on the second reel overlap with each other.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"When a power outage occurs after the third case in a state in which the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the second stop operation means may start accepting the stop operation earlier than the first stop operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the order in which operations are accepted changes before and after a power outage, adding variety to the game.

The above-described identification prefixes such as "first...", "second...", "third...", etc. may be replaced as appropriate. For example, "the seventh case" may become "the first case".

Figure 246 is a timing chart in which notification timing by the notification means etc. has been added to the timing chart shown in Figure 239.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 246, the slide push operations performed on the three stop buttons 137-139 in order are also accepted. In this timing chart shown in FIG. 246, the period from when the start lever 135 is turned on (from when each of the three reels 110-112 starts spinning) to when the stop button is operated (timing (h')), which is the second stop operation, is shown as the first period. Strictly speaking, the first period is the period until the second stop operation is accepted. Also, in this timing chart, when the start lever 135 is turned on, the pseudo game does not start, and the real game has started.

The notification means is shown at the bottom of the timing chart in FIG. 246. For example, the notification means corresponds to the effect image display device 157 or the speakers 272, 277, etc. When the start lever 135 is turned on, the notification means starts a first notification. The first notification may be a notification by a small role suggestion effect shown in FIG. 237(A) or a notification predicting a transition to a certain game state (for example, an AT state). Alternatively, it may be a notification by a push order navigation effect shown in FIG. 237(B) (operation instruction notification) or a notification such as "Aim for XX" (for example, "Aim for 7 by pushing in order") (role suggestion notification). The first notification may be executed continuously for a period until all three reels 110 to 112 are stopped, or may be executed at a certain timing within the period. The stopped state referred to here means a state in which the reels are stopped. In each of the examples in Figures 246 to 260, a push order navigation notification (operation instruction notification) is executed as the first notification, and the player may operate each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in accordance with the operation instruction notification, or a role suggestion notification may be executed, or both the operation instruction notification and the role suggestion notification may be executed.

When all three reels 110-112 are stopped, a second notification is initiated. The second notification may be a result notification. For example, it may be a notification of a stopped minor win, a notification of the number of game values (game media) acquired (notification of getting XX pieces), a notification of a game state to which a transition is determined to occur next (a bonus transition notification or an AT transition notification), or a notification of information updated as a result of the end of the game (number of credits, number of games, number of remaining ATs, etc.). This second notification may be executed continuously for the period until the end of the game, or may be executed at a certain timing within that period.

Figure 247 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where retraction control is performed as a result of performing a slide push operation on the three stop buttons 137 to 139 in the same order as in the case of the timing chart shown in Figure 246. In the example of Figure 247, the operation to stop the pushes in order is performed in accordance with the operation instruction notification (first notification). Note that this example is the same even if the operation to stop the pushes in order is performed without following the operation instruction notification, or if the operation to stop the pushes in order is performed at the player's discretion without receiving an operation instruction notification.

The following explanation is given in comparison with the timing chart shown in Figure 246.

When a slide push operation is performed, the player is not consciously performing the stopping operation while pressing the buttons, so no control to assist the player, such as reel retraction control, is performed. However, in this embodiment, reel retraction control is performed. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are cases where the player wants to aim for a number that is one or several frames off the stopped number of the left reel 110 on the center reel 111, or a number that is one or several frames off the stopped number of the center reel 111 on the right reel 112, and in these cases, reel retraction control is performed to assist the player.

In the first stop operation of the left reel 110 (timing (h)), no reel-in control is performed, and brake control is immediately executed in response to the stop operation, stopping the left reel 110. Hereinafter, the stopping of the reel without reel-in control and with brake control immediately executed in response to the stop operation may be referred to as a "bita-dome."

Next, a stop operation is performed on the middle reel 111 (timing (h')). This stop operation corresponds to the second stop operation, and the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. 246 and the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. 247 are the same period length. In the second stop operation in FIG. 247, retraction control is performed. Retraction control is performed within a range of 4 frames. In this example, retraction of 4 frames is performed, and while retraction is being performed, brake control of the middle reel 111 is not started and the stop of the middle reel 111 is delayed.

Following the center reel 11, the right reel 112 is stopped (at timing (h'')). This stopping operation of the right reel 112 corresponds to the third stopping operation (final stopping operation) and is the stopping operation before the center reel 111 stops. With the third stopping operation, the right reel 112 stops with a perfect stop. As a result, even if the stopping operation of the center reel 111 is performed at an earlier timing (at timing (h')), the right reel 112 stops before the center reel 111 stops.

Eventually, brake control is executed for the center reel 111, which has been slid by four frames by the retraction control, and the center reel 111 stops later than the right reel 112 (timing (β)). At this timing (β), all three reels 110 to 112 come to a stop, and the second notification starts. The content of the second notification is the same as the content of the second notification in FIG. 246. That is, in the example of FIG. 247, the reels stop in the left, right, and center order, but the content of the second notification (for example, the notification of the watermelon, which is the winning combination, and the number of coins obtained, such as "9 coins obtained") is the same as in the case of the left, center, and right stop order in FIG. 246. In other words, the reels stop in different orders in the examples of FIG. 246 and FIG. 247, but the game value given to the player is the same. However, the notification start timing of the second notification is different. In other words, the notification start timing of the second notification is the timing when all three reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and in FIG. 246, since no reel-in control was performed, this is timing (h''); however, in FIG. 247, since reel-in control was performed on the center reel 111, this is timing (β), which is later than timing (h'').

In this example, the center reel 111 is controlled to retract for 4 frames, and the right reel 112 is stopped exactly, but even if the right reel 112 is controlled to retract for 3 frames or less, the right reel 112 may stop before the center reel 111. Also, if the center reel 111 is controlled to retract for 1 to 3 frames, the right reel 112 may stop before the center reel 111 even if the right reel 112 is controlled to retract for fewer frames than the center reel 111 or if the right reel 112 is stopped exactly.

In addition, in this example, the right reel 112 comes to a stopped state during retraction control of the middle reel 111, but the middle reel 111 and right reel 112 may also come to a stopped state during retraction control of the left reel 110. Also, the middle reel 111 and left reel 110 may come to a stopped state during retraction control of the right reel 112 by a reverse push operation, and the left reel 110 may come to a stopped state during retraction control of the middle reel 111 by a reverse push operation.

Furthermore, when the push order navigation notifies the player of the operation order of middle, right, left, the player may operate in the order of middle, right, left according to the notification, and the right reel 112 and left reel 110 may come to a stopped state during the reel-in control of the middle reel 111. In other words, even if the reel stop order is performed according to the push order navigation, and the reel stop order is right, left, middle, which is different from the order of the push order navigation, the game value (e.g., game media equal to the number of coins paid out when the push order bell is won) that is awarded when the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation is awarded. On the other hand, even if the reel stop order is performed ignoring the push order navigation, the reel stop order may be middle, right, left, which is the same order as the push order navigation, but in this case, no prize is won (e.g., the bells are not lined up), and the above-mentioned game value is not awarded.

In addition, in this example, the stopping order between the second and third stop reels is the reverse of the stopping operation, but the stopping order between the first and second stop reels may be the reverse of the stopping operation, and the stopping order between the first and third stop reels may be the reverse of the stopping operation.

Next, a gaming machine equipped with an automatic reel stop function will be described. The automatic reel stop function is a function in which the reel starts to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and the reel automatically stops rotating after a predetermined second period (e.g., 40 seconds) has elapsed since the start lever 135 was operated and the reel shifted to the second constant speed control. For example, if none of the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated, the left reel 110 stops first after the second period has elapsed, and then the center reel 111 and the right reel 112 stop in that order after each predetermined period (e.g., 0.2 seconds). If only the right stop button 139 of the three stop buttons 137 to 139 is not operated before the second period has elapsed, the right reel 112 automatically stops after the second period has elapsed. A gaming machine equipped with an automatic stop function does not execute a pseudo game. However, even a gaming machine equipped with an automatic stop function may be allowed to execute a pseudo game.

Note that while one of the stop buttons is being pressed and held (continuously operated), the reels corresponding to the other stop buttons will not be stopped even if the other stop buttons are operated. Even if multiple stop buttons are operated simultaneously, only the reel corresponding to the stop button whose operation was detected first will be stopped, and the remaining reels will continue to spin. Furthermore, even if a stop button is operated while any of the operation means of the start lever 135, the settlement button 134, or the coin insertion buttons 130 to 132 is being operated, the reel corresponding to that stop button will not be stopped. The second period may pass not because the stop button is not operated, but because the reel corresponding to that stop button is not stopped even when it is operated in this way.

The second period is counted by the main control unit 300, but if an abnormality occurs during this count, such as the reel stepping out (losing synchronism) (for example, the reel being stopped intentionally by hand) or a power outage while the reel is rotating, the second period may be counted again from the point at which the abnormality is recovered (the point at which constant speed control is restored or power is restored), or the count may continue from the count value at the point at which the abnormality occurred.

Figure 248 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a reverse push slide push operation is performed before the light-shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected. In the example of Figure 248, the reverse push stop operation is performed in accordance with the operation instruction notification (first notification). Note that this example is the same even if the reverse push stop operation is performed without following the operation instruction notification, or if the reverse push stop operation is performed at the player's discretion without an operation instruction notification.

In this example, the light-shielding piece of the center reel 111 is detected first (timing (e)), then the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected (timing (f)). Then, before the light-shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected, a reverse slide push operation is performed. That is, the right stop button 139 is operated at timing (h''), the center stop button 138 is operated at timing (h'), and finally the left stop button 137 is operated at timing (h1). The valid operations in this reverse slide push operation are the first operation of the right stop button 139 and the next operation of the center stop button 138, and the operation of the left stop button 137 of the left reel 110 where no light-shielding piece is detected is invalid (not accepted). Both the right reel 112 and the center reel 111 are stopped with a perfect stop. Note that the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. 246 and the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. 248 are the same period length.

After the center reel 111 stops, the light-blocking piece on the left reel 110 is detected at time (d), and of the three stop button LEDs 137a-139a, only the left stop button LED 137a switches to the second light-emitting state, and the left stop button 137 transitions to a state where it can be operated. The player who should have operated the left stop button 137 sees the left reel 110, which is still spinning, as well as the left stop button LED 137a, which has changed to the second light-emitting state, and operates the left stop button 137 again (time (h2)). The left reel 110 stops in a perfect stop in response to this second operation.

In the example shown in Figure 248, explained above, the order in which the stop buttons are operated matches the order in which the reels stop.

However, in Figure 248, four-frame retraction control is performed on the right reel 112, and the gray lines show how the stopping of the right reel 112 is delayed. In this case, the right stop button 139 is operated before the center stop button 138, but the center reel 111 stops before the right reel 112, and the order in which the stop buttons are operated does not match the order in which the reels stop.

Figure 249 is a timing chart showing an example in which only the right reel 112 of the three reels 110 to 112 automatically stops. In this example of Figure 249, the operation to stop the push-forward reels is performed in accordance with the operation instruction notification (first notification). Note that this example is the same even if the operation to stop the push-forward reels is performed without following the operation instruction notification, or if the operation to stop the push-forward reels is performed at the player's discretion without receiving an operation instruction notification.

Figure 249 shows a predetermined second period (e.g., 40 seconds). As described above, the start lever 135 is operated to start the reel rotation, and when this second period has elapsed since the transition to the second constant speed control, the reel automatically stops rotating.

In the example shown in FIG. 249, a slide push operation is performed by pressing the left stop button 137 and the middle stop button 138 in order before the second period has elapsed. As for the right stop button 139, either no operation is performed (e.g., the slide push operation is stopped), or the second period has elapsed before the right stop button 139 is operated, and the operation is not accepted (e.g., the right stop button 139 is also operated by the slide push operation, but is not accepted).

When the center stop button 138 is operated at the timing of (h'), as in the example shown in FIG. 248, the center reel 111 is retracted by four frames, the brake control of the center reel 111 is not started, and the stop of the center reel 111 is delayed. After the operation of the center stop button 111 is finished, the above-mentioned predetermined second period elapses while the finger is sliding to the right stop button 112 (timing of (α)). As a result, the right reel 112 is braked and stopped before the right stop button 112 is operated. In addition, the right stop button 112 becomes unacceptable, and the right stop button LED 139a returns to the first light-emitting state. Eventually, the brake control of the center reel 111, which has been slid by four frames by the retraction control, is executed, and the center reel 111 stops later than the right reel 112 (timing of (β)). At this timing of (β), all three reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and the second notification begins. The content of the second notification in FIG. 249 is the same as the content of the second notification in FIG. 246, and although the reel stopping order is different between the example of FIG. 246 and the example of FIG. 249, the game value given to the player is the same. That is, in the example of FIG. 249, the reel stopping order is left, right, and center, but the content of the second notification (for example, the notification of the watermelon which is the winning combination, the number of coins obtained being 9, etc.) is the same as in the case of the left, center, and right stopping order in FIG. 246. However, the notification start timing of the second notification is different. In FIG. 246, the timing is (h'') because the reel-in control was not performed, but in FIG. 249, the reel-in control was performed on the center reel 111, so the timing is (β) which is later than the timing (α) at which the right reel 112 automatically stopped.

In the example shown in FIG. 249, the left stop button 137 and the middle stop button 138 are operated, but even if only the left stop button 137 is operated, or if neither the left stop button 137 nor the middle stop button 138 is operated, the spinning reels will automatically stop after the second period has elapsed. The order of automatic transition to a stopped state is given priority to reels located further to the left. However, in this embodiment, retraction control is permitted even when the reels are automatically stopped, and retraction control may be executed.

Here, the number of steps (number of pulses) required to rotate the reel once (360 degrees) is 504 steps, and since 21 frames of symbols are arranged on one reel, the number of steps for one frame is 504/21 = 24 steps. Also, one retention time for holding one rotation control data is one interrupt time (e.g., 1.49 ms), and when the reel is in a constant speed state (constant speed 2 state), the time to move one frame is 24 steps x 1.49 ms = 35.76 ms. As described above, since the center reel 111 and the right reel 112 are stopped in that order every time a predetermined period (e.g., 0.2 seconds) has elapsed, it is designed so that the stopping order of the reels is not reversed even if a retraction control of up to 4 frames is performed during automatic stop control. However, the above-mentioned predetermined time may be shortened or one interruption time may be lengthened so that the stopping order of the reels is reversed by the retraction control during automatic stop control. Because the reels stop automatically, no operation by the player is required, and the unique reel action can increase the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, the pull-in control achieves a small win, and even if the reels stop in the wrong order, the result is advantageous to the player, so the player will not feel distrustful.

Next, we will explain some examples of the illumination patterns of the stop button LEDs, such as the left stop button LED 137a, the middle stop button LED 138b, and the right stop button LED 139a, and the order in which the reels stop.

As described above, for example, if all reels 110-112 are not stopped, all reels 110-112 have transitioned to the constant speed 2 state, and a light-blocking piece has been detected, the light emission mode of the three stop button LEDs 137a-139a changes in unison from the first light emission mode to the second light emission mode. Also, if some reels are stopped and the remaining reels have transitioned to the constant speed 2 state and a light-blocking piece has been detected, only the stop button LEDs of the remaining reels (the reels that are spinning) change to the second light emission mode.

Figure 250 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where retraction control is performed as a result of a slide push operation for sequential push being performed before the detection of the light-blocking piece on the right reel 112 is delayed and the three stop button LEDs 137a-139a change to the second light-emitting state. In the example of Figure 250, the operation to stop the sequential push is also performed in accordance with the operation instruction notification (first notification). Note that this example is the same even if the operation to stop the sequential push is performed without following the operation instruction notification, or if the operation to stop the sequential push is performed at the player's discretion without receiving an operation instruction notification.

The following will focus on the differences from the example shown in Figure 248.

When the start lever 135 is operated at timing (a) and each of the reels 110 to 112 begins to rotate, all of the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are lit in the first light emission mode.

At timing (c), each reel 110-112 transitions to constant speed 2 state.

At the timing (d), the light-blocking piece on the left reel 110 is detected and the left stop button 137 transitions to a state in which it is ready to accept operation, and at the timing (e), the light-blocking piece on the center reel 111 is detected and the center stop button 138 transitions to a state in which it is ready to accept operation. Then, the forward slide push operation is started before the light-blocking piece on the right reel 112 is detected. At the timing (h), the left stop button 137 is operated. The left reel 110 is controlled to retract for four frames, brake control of the left reel 110 is not started, and the stop of the left reel 110 is delayed. Then, at the timing (h'), the center stop button 138 is operated and the center reel 111 stops with a perfect stop. At the end of the forward slide push operation, the right stop button 139 is operated (at the timing (h'')). At this timing (h''), the light-blocking piece on the right reel 112 has not been detected, so operation of the right stop button 139 is not accepted and the right reel 112 continues to spin. Eventually, the left reel 110, which was being controlled to retract, stops. After that, at timing (f'), the light-blocking piece on the right reel 112 is detected and, of the three stop button LEDs 137a-139a, only the right stop button LED 139a enters the second light-emitting state and the right stop button 139 transitions to a state where it can accept operation.

Figure 251 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where detection of the light-blocking piece of the center reel 111 is delayed, and a sequential slide push operation is performed before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light-emitting state, resulting in retraction control being performed.

The following will focus on the differences from the example shown in Figure 250.

At the timing of (d), the light-shielding piece on the left reel 110 is detected and the left stop button 137 transitions to a state in which it is ready to accept operation, and at the timing of (f), the light-shielding piece on the right reel 112 is detected and the right stop button 139 transitions to a state in which it is ready to accept operation. Then, the forward slide push operation is started before the light-shielding piece on the center reel 111 is detected. At the timing of (h), the left stop button 137 is operated. The left reel 110 is controlled to retract by four frames, the brake control of the left reel 110 is not started, and the stop of the left reel 110 is delayed. Then, at the timing of (h'), the center stop button 138 is operated. At this timing of (h'), the light-shielding piece on the center reel 111 is not detected, the operation of the center stop button 138 is not accepted, and the center reel 111 continues to rotate. At the end of the forward slide push operation, the right stop button 139 is operated (timing (h'')), and the right reel 112 stops precisely. Eventually, the left reel 110, which was being controlled to retract, stops. After that, at timing (e'), the light-blocking piece on the center reel 111 is detected, and of the three stop button LEDs 137a-139a, only the center stop button LED 138a switches to the second light-emitting state, and the center stop button 138 transitions to a state where it can accept operations.

Figure 252 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where detection of the light-blocking piece of the left reel 110 is delayed, and a sequential slide push operation is performed before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light-emitting state, resulting in retraction control being performed.

The following will focus on the differences from the example shown in Figure 250.

In this example, the light-shielding piece on the right reel 112 is detected first (timing (f)), the right stop button 139 transitions to a state where it is ready to accept operation, the light-shielding piece on the center reel 111 is detected next (timing (e)), and the center stop button 138 transitions to a state where it is ready to accept operation. Then, a forward slide push operation is started before the light-shielding piece on the left reel 110 is detected. At timing (h), the left stop button 137 is operated, but at this timing (h), the light-shielding piece on the left reel 110 has not been detected, so the operation of the left stop button 137 is not accepted and the left reel 110 continues to rotate. Then, at timing (h'), the center stop button 138 is operated. The center reel 111 is controlled to retract by four frames, the brake control for the center reel 111 is not started, and the stop of the center reel 111 is delayed. At the end of the forward slide push operation, the right stop button 139 is operated (at the timing of (h'')), and the right reel 112 stops precisely. In other words, after starting to spin, the right reel 112 transitions to a stopped state before the middle reel 111 transitions to a stopped state, even if the middle stop button 138 is operated before the right stop button 139 is operated, before the middle stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a change to the second light emission mode.

Eventually, the middle reel 111, which was being retracted, comes to a stop (timing (β)). After that, at timing (d'), the light-blocking piece on the left reel 110 is detected, and of the three stop button LEDs 137a-139a, only the left stop button LED 137a enters the second light-emitting state, and the left top button 137 transitions to a state in which it can accept operation. In FIG. 252, the period from when the reels 110-112 start to rotate until the stop button LEDs change to the second light-emitting state is shown as the fourth period. The right reel 112 and middle reel 111 come to a stop within this fourth period.

Next, as explained using FIG. 249, the gaming machine equipped with the automatic reel stop function did not execute a pseudo game, but this time, we will explain a gaming machine that executes a pseudo game but does not have the automatic reel stop function for the main game. In this gaming machine, after the start lever 135 is operated to start the rotation of the reels 110 to 112, if the stop button for any reel has not been operated even after a predetermined time has passed (for example, a predetermined time has passed since the transition to the second constant speed control), the performance image display device 157 and speakers 272, 277 will notify the player that the reel is spinning and urge the player to stop the reel. If the player leaves his/her seat, a staff member at the gaming establishment will operate the stop button.

Figure 253 is a timing chart showing the sequential slide push operations performed in a pseudo game and in the actual game that is started following the pseudo game.

In the pseudo game, by operating the start lever 135, each of the reels 110 to 112 starts to rotate (timing (a)), and after passing through acceleration control, constant speed control starts (timing (b)). The constant speed control is divided into a first constant speed control and a second constant speed control. After the transition to the second constant speed control, the light blocking piece of the left reel 110 is detected at timing (d), and the left stop button 13
At timing (e), the light blocking piece of the center reel 111 is detected, and the center stop button 138 transitions to the operation acceptable state. In this example, finally, the light blocking piece of the right reel 112 is detected (timing (f)), the right stop button 139 transitions to the operation acceptable state, and all three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting state.

In the pseudo game, the first notification is an operation instruction notification (such as "left, center, right") or a role suggestion notification (such as "aim for 7"). In this example, the operation instruction notification (first notification) is followed by a slide push operation in order, and at the operation timing (timing (h), (h'), (h'')) of each stop button 137 to 139, the corresponding reel starts brake control, and the built-in stop button LED returns to the first light emission mode. In the pseudo game, the stop control is not executed, and instead, vibration control is executed to slightly vibrate the reel. The vibration control makes the reel vibrate very slightly rather than completely stopped, but it makes it look like it has stopped, resulting in a pseudo-stop state. This pseudo-stop state is also a type of stop state. In the pseudo-stop, the vibration amplitude may be increased to more clearly distinguish it from the real stop (fixed stop) in the real game.

The first period is from the time when the start lever 135 is turned on (a) to the time when the center reel 111 is stopped (h'), and the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. 246 and the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. 253 are the same length.

When all three reels 110-112 are stopped (pseudo stopped), a second notification is initiated. For example, if "7-7-7" is pseudo stopped in response to the first notification, the second notification may be a result notification such as "Big bonus obtained." If seven symbols are lined up in the pseudo game, a transition to an AT state may occur when the actual game begins, in which case the second notification may be a notification such as "Enter AT state."

Eventually, the pseudo game ends, and the main game starts from the timing of (i). The main game may start automatically when a predetermined time has passed without the operation of the start lever 135, or may start by operating the start lever 135. However, even when the main game starts, the reels do not start spinning immediately, but random delay control is performed as described with reference to FIG. 240, and each reel starts spinning at a different timing. In the example of the control, the left reel 110 starts spinning the slowest, and the left reel 110 switches from acceleration control to first constant speed control at the timing of (B). Then, all three reels 110 to 112 switch from first constant speed control to second constant speed control at the timing of (C). After the main game thus transitions to the second constant speed control, the light-shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing of (D), the left stop button 137 transitions to an operation-accepting state, and the light-shielding piece of the center reel 111 is detected at the timing of (E), and the center stop button 138 transitions to an operation-accepting state. Finally, the light-blocking piece on the right reel 112 is detected (timing (F)), the right stop button 139 transitions to an operation-receiving state, and all three stop button LEDs 137a-139a change to the second light-emitting state.

In this game, the slide push operation is performed in order, and when each stop button 137-139 is operated (at the timing of (H), (H'), (H'')), the corresponding reel starts brake control, stops perfectly, and the built-in stop button LED returns to the first light emission mode.

When the game starts (timing (i)), the notification means switches from the second notification to the first notification, and when all three reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the second notification begins.

Figure 254 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where retraction control is performed as a result of performing a forward slide push operation in a pseudo game. In the example of Figure 254, an operation instruction notification (first notification) is executed in a pseudo game, and the forward push operation is performed in accordance with the operation instruction notification. Note that this example is the same even if the forward push operation is performed without following the operation instruction notification, or if the forward push operation is performed at the player's discretion without an operation instruction notification.

The following will focus on the differences from the timing chart shown in Figure 253.

When performing a forward slide push operation, the left stop button 137 is operated first (timing (h)), and the left reel 110 is instantly braked in response to the operation of the left stop button 137, and is brought to a pseudo-stop by vibration control.

Next, the center stop button 138 is operated (at timing (h')), the center reel 111 is retracted by four frames, brake control of the center reel 111 is not started, and the pseudo stop of the center reel 111 is delayed.

Finally, the right stop button 139 is operated (timing (h'')). The right stop button 139 is operated just before the center reel 111 stops. In response to the operation of the right stop button 139, braking control is immediately performed on the right reel 112, and the right reel 112 is brought to a pseudo-stop by vibration control.

Eventually, brake control is executed for the center reel 111, which has been slid by four frames by the retraction control, and the center reel 111 pseudo-stops later than the right reel 112 (timing (β)). At this timing (β), all three reels 110 to 112 are in a pseudo-stop state (stopped state), and the second notification starts. The content of the second notification is the same as the content of the second notification in FIG. 253. That is, in the example of FIG. 254, the order of the pseudo-stop of the reels was left, right, and center, but the content of the second notification (for example, the result notification such as "big bonus acquired") is the same as the case of the pseudo-stop order of left, center, and right in FIG. 253. In other words, the order of the pseudo-stop of the reels is different in the example of FIG. 253 and the example of FIG. 254, but the game value given to the player is the same. However, the notification start timing of the second notification is different. In other words, the notification start timing of the second notification is the timing when all three reels 110 to 112 are stopped (pseudo stopped), and in FIG. 253, since no reel-in control was performed, this is timing (h''); however, in FIG. 254, since reel-in control was performed on the center reel 111, this is timing (β), which is later than timing (h'').

In this example, retraction control for 4 frames was performed on the center reel 111, and retraction control was not performed on the right reel 112. However, even if retraction control of 3 frames or less was performed on the right reel 112, the right reel 112 may come to a pseudo-stop before the center reel 111. Also, when retraction control for 1 to 3 frames was performed on the center reel 111, the right reel 112 may come to a pseudo-stop before the center reel 111 if retraction control for a number of frames less than the number of retracted frames of the center reel 111 was performed on the right reel 112, or if retraction control was not performed on the right reel 112.

In this example, the right reel 112 pseudo-stops during the retraction control of the center reel 111, but the center reel 111 and the right reel 112 may also pseudo-stop during the retraction control of the left reel 110. The center reel 111 and the left reel 110 may also pseudo-stop during the retraction control of the right reel 112 by a reverse push operation, and the left reel 110 may also pseudo-stop during the retraction control of the center reel 111 by a reverse push operation. Furthermore, push order navigation may also be performed in pseudo play, and when the push order navigation notifies the operation order of center, right, left, the operation is performed in the order of center, right, left according to the notification, and the right reel 112 and the left reel 110 may also pseudo-stop during the retraction control of the center reel 111.

In addition, in this example, the order of pseudo stops between the second and third stop reels is the reverse of the stop operation, but the order of pseudo stops between the first and second stop reels may be the reverse of the stop operation, and the order of pseudo stops between the first and third stop reels may be the reverse of the stop operation.

In addition, instead of the slide push operation, multiple stop buttons may be pressed simultaneously. Even if they are pressed simultaneously, there is generally a difference in the detection timing. For example, even if the left stop button 137 and the right stop button 139 are pressed simultaneously, the operation of one stop button is detected first, and the operation of the other stop button is an operation performed while one stop button is being operated, and is not detected, or even if detected, is not accepted. In either case, the reel corresponding to the other stop button continues to spin without a pseudo-stop. The same is true when another stop button is operated while a certain stop button is being operated (long press state). However, the operation of the other stop button or the operation of the other stop button may be detected, and the corresponding reel may be pseudo-stopped. The above explanation is not limited to pseudo play, but is also true for this game.

The explanation using FIG. 254 was about reel control within the maximum number of reel frames, but in pseudo play, it is also possible to perform reel action that appears to be reel control exceeding the maximum number of reel frames. For example, 20 frames may be reeled in, or even if the stop button is operated, the reel may continue to spin one or more revolutions and then pseudo stop (the same applies to the following explanations).

Furthermore, in the pseudo game, the reel action may be such that the maximum number of retracted frames is different for each reel, or the number of retracted frames for each reel may be set to a predetermined number (the same applies in the following explanations). Also, in the actual game, the upper limit number of retracted frames may be different for each reel within the maximum number of retracted frames (within the range of 1 to 4 frames), or the number of retracted frames for each reel may be set to a predetermined number (the same applies in the following explanations).

As described above, a gaming machine capable of executing a pseudo game does not have an automatic reel stop function for the actual game, but has an automatic pseudo stop function that automatically pseudo-stops the reel in the pseudo game to ensure a transition to the actual game. The automatic reel stop function is a function that automatically executes reel stop control when a predetermined second period (e.g., 40 seconds) has elapsed since transitioning to the second constant speed control, whereas the automatic pseudo reel stop function is a function that automatically executes reel vibration control when a predetermined third period has elapsed since transitioning to the second constant speed control. The third period may be the same length as the second period, or may be a period shorter than the second period. Alternatively, it may be a period longer than the second period. Since the pseudo-stopped state is also a type of stopped state, the automatic reel stop function and the automatic pseudo reel stop function are the same in that they are functions that automatically transition the reel to a stopped state.

Figure 255 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a reverse push slide push operation is performed in a pseudo game before the light-shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected. In the example of Figure 255, an operation instruction notification (first notification) is also executed in the pseudo game, and the reverse push stop operation is performed in accordance with the operation instruction notification. Note that this example is the same even if the reverse push operation is performed without following the operation instruction notification, or if the reverse push operation is performed at the player's discretion without an operation instruction notification.

In this example, in the pseudo game, the light shield of the center reel 111 is detected first (timing (e)), and then the light shield of the right reel 112 is detected (timing (f)). Then, before the light shield of the left reel 110 is detected, a reverse slide push operation is performed. That is, the right stop button 139 is operated at timing (h''), the center stop button 138 is operated at timing (h'), and finally the left stop button 137 is operated at timing (h1). The valid operations in this reverse slide push operation are the first operation of the right stop button 139 and the next operation of the center stop button 138, and the operation of the left stop button 137 of the left reel 110 where no light shield is detected is invalid (not accepted). Both the right reel 112 and the center reel 111 are immediately brake controlled in response to the stop operation, and are pseudo-stopped. Note that the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. 253 and the first period in the timing chart shown in FIG. 255 are the same period length.

After the center reel 111 stops, the light-blocking piece on the left reel 110 is detected at time (d), and of the three stop button LEDs 137a-139a, only the left stop button LED 137a changes to the second light-emitting state, and the left stop button 137 transitions to a state where it can be operated. The player who should have operated the left stop button 137 then sees the left reel 110, which is still spinning, as well as the left stop button LED 137a, which has changed to the second light-emitting state, and operates the left stop button 137 again (time (h2)). In response to this second operation, brake control is immediately executed on the left reel 110, bringing it to a pseudo-stop.

In the example shown in Figure 255, explained above, the order in which the stop buttons are operated matches the order in which the reels stop.

However, in Figure 255, four-frame retraction control is performed on the right reel 112, and the delayed stopping of the right reel 112 is shown by the gray line. In this case, the right stop button 139 is operated before the center stop button 138, but the center reel 111 comes to a pseudo-stop before the right reel 112, and the order in which the stop buttons are operated does not match the order in which the reels come to a pseudo-stop.

Figure 256 is a timing chart showing an example in which only the right reel 112 of the three reels 110 to 112 automatically performs a pseudo stop.

Figure 256 shows a predetermined third period (e.g., 25 seconds). As described above, when the start lever 135 is operated to start the reel rotation and the second constant speed control is entered, the reel automatically comes to a pseudo-stop after the third period has elapsed.

In the example shown in FIG. 256, before the third period has elapsed, a slide push operation is performed on the left stop button 137 and the middle stop button 138 by pressing them in order in accordance with the operation instruction notification. For the right stop button 139, either no operation is performed (for example, the slide push operation is stopped), or the third period has elapsed before the right stop button 139 is operated, and the operation is not accepted (for example, the right stop button 139 is also operated through the slide push operation, but is not accepted). Note that this example is the same even if the push operation is performed in order without following the operation instruction notification, or if the push operation is performed at the player's discretion without being notified of the operation instruction notification.

When the center stop button 138 is operated at the timing of (h'), as in the example shown in FIG. 254, the center reel 111 is pulled in by four frames, the brake control of the center reel 111 is not started, and the pseudo stop of the center reel 111 is delayed. After the operation of the center stop button 111 is finished, the above-mentioned predetermined third period elapses while the finger is sliding to the right stop button 112 (timing of (α)). As a result, the right reel 112 is braked and pseudo-stopped before the right stop button 112 is operated. In addition, the right stop button 112 becomes unacceptable, and the right stop button LED 139a returns to the first light-emitting state. Eventually, the brake control of the center reel 111, which has been slid by four frames by the pull-in control, is executed, and the center reel 111 pseudo-stops later than the right reel 112 (timing of (β)). At this timing (β), all three reels 110 to 112 are stopped (pseudo-stopped), and the second notification is started. The content of the second notification in FIG. 256 is the same as the content of the second notification in FIG. 253, and although the order of pseudo-stop of the reels is different between the example of FIG. 253 and the example of FIG. 256, the game value given to the player is the same. That is, the reels are stopped in the order of left, right, and center in the example of FIG. 256, but the content of the second notification (for example, "big bonus obtained") is the same as the case of the pseudo-stop order of left, center, and right in FIG. 253. However, the notification start timing of the second notification is different. In FIG. 253, the timing is (h'') because the reel-in control was not performed, but in FIG. 256, the timing is (β), which is later than the timing (α) at which the automatic pseudo-stop of the right reel 112 was performed because the reel-in control was performed on the center reel 111.

In the example shown in FIG. 256, the left stop button 137 and the middle stop button 138 are operated, but even if only the left stop button 137 is operated, or if neither the left stop button 137 nor the middle stop button 138 is operated, the spinning reels will automatically come to a pseudo-stop after the third period has elapsed. The order of automatic pseudo-stops is given priority to the reels located further to the left. However, in this embodiment, even when an automatic pseudo-stop of the reels has been performed, retraction control is permitted, and retraction control may be executed.

As with the automatic stop described above, the next reel is pseudo-stopped every time a specified period (e.g., 0.2 seconds) has elapsed, so the system is designed so that the order in which the reels pseudo-stop is performed is not reversed even if retraction control is performed for up to four frames during automatic pseudo-stop control. However, the specified period may be shortened or the interruption time may be lengthened, so that the order in which the reels pseudo-stop due to retraction control is reversed during automatic pseudo-stop control.

In addition, instead of controlling the reels spinning at the time the third period has elapsed in the same way as when the stop buttons are operated at intervals of a predetermined period (e.g., 0.2 seconds) from the left, the reels may be controlled in the same way as when all the stop buttons corresponding to the reels spinning at the time the third period has elapsed are operated simultaneously. In this case, a specific pseudo-stop mode may be achieved by retraction control, or pseudo-stops may be performed at intervals without retraction control. In addition, if the reels spinning at the time the third period has elapsed are not in constant speed control (e.g., they have stepped out), they may be pseudo-stopped after acceleration control → constant speed control, or even if they are not in constant speed control, braking control may be performed to immediately pseudo-stop them.

Next, we will explain some examples of the illumination patterns of the stop button LEDs, such as the left stop button LED 137a, the middle stop button LED 138b, and the right stop button LED 139a, and the order in which the reels stop.

In the pseudo game, as in the main game, when the conditions are met, the light emission mode of the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a changes from the first light emission mode to the second light emission mode.

Figure 257 is a timing chart showing an example of a case in which detection of the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is delayed in a pseudo game, and a forward slide push operation is performed before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emission mode, resulting in reel-in control. In the example of Figure 257, an operation instruction notification (first notification) is also executed in the pseudo game, and the forward push operation is performed in accordance with the operation instruction notification. Note that this example is the same even if the forward push operation is performed without following the operation instruction notification, or if the forward push operation is performed at the player's discretion without an operation instruction notification.

The following will focus on the differences from the example shown in Figure 254.

When the start lever 135 is operated at timing (a) and each of the reels 110 to 112 begins to rotate, all of the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are lit in the first light emission mode.

At timing (c), each reel 110-112 transitions to constant speed 2 state.

At the timing of (d), the light-shielding piece of the left reel 110 is detected and the left stop button 137 transitions to an operation-receiving state, and at the timing of (e), the light-shielding piece of the center reel 111 is detected and the center stop button 138 transitions to an operation-receiving state. Then, the forward slide push operation is started before the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected. At the timing of (h), the left stop button 137 is operated, the left reel 110 is pulled in by four frames, the brake control of the left reel 110 is not started, and the pseudo stop of the left reel 110 is delayed. Then, at the timing of (h'), the center stop button 138 is operated, and the brake control is immediately executed on the center reel 111 in response to the operation of the center stop button 138, and the center reel 111 is pseudo-stopped by vibration control. At the end of the forward slide push operation, the right stop button 139 is operated (at the timing of (h''1)). At this timing (h''1), the light-blocking piece on the right reel 112 has not been detected, so operation of the right stop button 139 is not accepted and the right reel 112 continues to spin. Eventually, the left reel 110, which was being controlled to retract, stops. After that, at timing (f'), the light-blocking piece on the right reel 112 is detected and, of the three stop button LEDs 137a-139a, only the right stop button LED 139a enters the second light-emitting state and the right stop button 139 transitions to a state where it can accept operation.

Because the right reel 112 continues to spin and the right stop button LED 139a is lit in the second light emission mode, the player operates the right stop button 139 again at the timing of (h''2). In response to this second operation, brake control is immediately performed on the right reel 112, and the right reel 112 comes to a pseudo-stop through vibration control. As the right reel 112 comes to a pseudo-stop, a second notification is initiated, and then the main game begins at the timing of (i).

Figure 258 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where detection of the light-shielding piece of the center reel 111 is delayed in a pseudo game, and a sequential slide push operation is performed before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emission mode, resulting in retraction control being performed.

The following will focus on the differences from the example shown in Figure 257.

At the timing of (d), the light-shielding piece on the left reel 110 is detected and the left stop button 137 transitions to a state where it can accept operation, and at the timing of (f), the light-shielding piece on the right reel 112 is detected and the right stop button 139 transitions to a state where it can accept operation. Then, the forward slide push operation is started before the light-shielding piece on the center reel 111 is detected. At the timing of (h), the left stop button 137 is operated, the left reel 110 is controlled to retract by four frames, the brake control of the left reel 110 is not started, and the pseudo stop of the left reel 110 is delayed. Then, at the timing of (h'1), the center stop button 138 is operated. At this timing of (h'1), the light-shielding piece on the center reel 111 is not detected, the operation of the center stop button 138 is not accepted, and the center reel 111 continues to rotate. At the end of the forward slide push operation, the right stop button 139 is operated (timing (h'')), and the right reel 112 is instantly braked in response to the operation of the right stop button 139, and is pseudo-stopped by vibration control. Eventually, the left reel 110, which was being retracted, stops. After that, at timing (e'), the light-blocking piece of the center reel 111 is detected, and of the three stop button LEDs 137a-139a, only the center stop button LED 138a enters the second light-emitting state, and the center stop button 138 transitions to a state where it can accept operation.

Because the middle reel 111 continues to spin and the middle stop button LED 138a is lit in the second light emission mode, the player operates the middle stop button 138 again at the timing of (h'2). In response to this second operation, brake control is immediately performed on the middle reel 111, and the middle reel 111 comes to a pseudo-stop through vibration control. As the middle reel 111 comes to a pseudo-stop, a second notification is initiated, and then the main game begins at the timing of (i).

Figure 259 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where detection of the light-shielding piece on the left reel 110 is delayed in a pseudo game, and a sequential slide push operation is performed before the three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a change to the second light emission mode, resulting in retraction control being performed.

The following will focus on the differences from the example shown in Figure 257.

In this example, the light-shielding piece on the right reel 112 is detected first (timing (f)), the right stop button 139 transitions to an operation-receiving state, the light-shielding piece on the center reel 111 is detected next (timing (e)), and the center stop button 138 transitions to an operation-receiving state. Then, a forward slide push operation is started before the light-shielding piece on the left reel 110 is detected. At timing (h1), the left stop button 137 is operated, but at this timing (h1), the light-shielding piece on the left reel 110 has not been detected, so the operation of the left stop button 137 is not accepted and the left reel 110 continues to rotate. Then, at timing (h'), the center stop button 138 is operated. The center reel 111 is controlled to retract by four frames, the brake control of the center reel 111 is not started, and the pseudo stop of the center reel 111 is delayed. At the end of the forward slide push operation, the right stop button 139 is operated (timing (h'')). In response to the operation of the right stop button 139, brake control is immediately performed on the right reel 112, and the right reel 112 comes to a pseudo-stop by vibration control. In other words, after starting to spin, the right reel 112 comes to a pseudo-stop before the center reel 111 comes to a pseudo-stop, even if the center stop button 138 is operated before the right stop button 139 is operated, before the center stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a change to the second light emission mode.

Eventually, the middle reel 111, which has been subjected to retraction control, comes to a pseudo-stop (timing (β)). After that, at timing (d'), the light-blocking piece on the left reel 110 is detected, and of the three stop button LEDs 137a-139a, only the left stop button LED 137a enters the second light-emitting state, and the left top button 137 transitions to a state in which it can accept operation. In Figure 259, just like Figure 252, the period from when the reels 110-112 start to rotate until the stop button LED changes to the second light-emitting state is shown as the fourth period. The right reel 112 and middle reel 111 come to a stop within this fourth period.

Because the left reel 110 continues to spin and the left stop button LED 137a is lit in the second light emission mode, the player operates the left stop button 138 again at timing (h2). In response to this second operation, brake control is immediately performed on the left reel 110, and the left reel 110 is brought to a pseudo-stop by vibration control. As the left reel 110 comes to a pseudo-stop, a second notification is initiated, and then the main game begins at timing (i).

Figure 260 is a timing chart showing an example in which the left stop button 137 and the center stop button 138 are pressed simultaneously just before the lapse of a predetermined third period in a simulated game.

In this example, when the stop buttons are pressed simultaneously, the operation of the stop button detected second or later is also treated as valid. That is, at the timing of (h), the left stop button 137 and the center stop button 138 are pressed simultaneously, and the operation of the left stop button 137 is detected first. As a result, the left reel 110 is immediately braked and pseudo-stopped by vibration control. Next, the operation of the center stop button 138 is detected, but the center reel 111 is retracted by four frames, and the brake control of the center reel 111 is not started, and the pseudo-stop of the center reel 111 is delayed. Note that even if the operation of the center stop button 138 is detected first and then the operation of the left stop button 137 is detected, the center reel 111 is retracted and the left reel 110 is pseudo-stopped immediately. Alternatively, the left reel 110 may be retracted and the center reel 111 may be pseudo-stopped immediately, or both the left reel 110 and the center reel 111 may be retracted.

Immediately after the simultaneous presses, a predetermined third period passes (timing (α)), and the right stop button 139 is not operated. However, the automatic pseudo-stop function activates for the right reel 112, which automatically pseudo-stops it. In the end, even if the right reel 112 automatically pseudo-stops, the middle reel 111 is in the middle of reel-in control, and the pseudo-stop of the middle reel 111 occurs at the latest timing (timing (β)). In this example, even if the simultaneous presses are performed before the automatic pseudo-stop, there will be a reel that goes into a pseudo-stop state before the automatic pseudo-stop (the left reel 110, which pseudo-stops at timing (h)), and a reel that goes into a pseudo-stop state after the automatic pseudo-stop (the middle reel 111, which pseudo-stops at timing (β)).

In the examples shown in Figures 253 to 260, games in which pseudo games are executed (pseudo games + main games) are shown, and in each of the pseudo games, the order in which the stop buttons are operated does not match the order in which the pseudo reels stop, but there are also cases in which the order in which the stop buttons are operated does not match the order in which the reels stop in the main games executed following the pseudo games, or only in the main games.

In addition, gaming machines capable of executing pseudo games are not equipped with an automatic reel stop function for the actual game, but may be equipped with such a function. In this case, if a stop operation is performed just before the second period elapses in the actual game that is executed following the pseudo game, the reel that was stopped just before the second period elapses may stop later than the reel that automatically stops.

According to the above description,
"A plurality of rotatable reels (e.g., a left reel 110, a center reel 111, and a right reel 112) and
a first stop button (e.g., middle stop button 138) operated by the player;
a second stop button operated by the player [e.g., right stop button 139];
Equipped with
the plurality of reels include a first reel (e.g., a center reel 111) that can be shifted from a spinning state to a stopped state (e.g., a real stop (fixed stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game) by operating the first stop button;
The plurality of reels also includes a second reel (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be shifted from a spinning state to a stopped state (e.g., a real stop (fixed stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game) by operating the second stop button,
When the second stop button is operated before the first stop button is operated after starting to spin [for example, the timing of FIG. 248(h''), the timing of FIG. 255(h'')], the second reel may transition to a stopped state before the first reel transitions to a stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 248(h'), the timing of FIG. 255(h')] [for example, the timing of FIG. 248(h''), the timing of FIG. 255(h'')],
Even if the first stop button is operated before the second stop button is operated after starting to spin [for example, the timing of FIG. 247(h'), the timing of FIG. 249(h'), the timing of FIG. 254(h'), the timing of FIG. 256(h')], the second reel may transition to a stopped state before the first reel transitions to a stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 247(β), the timing of FIG. 249(β), the timing of FIG. 254(β), the timing of FIG. 256(β)] [for example, the timing of FIG. 247(h''), the timing of FIG. 249(α), the timing of FIG. 254(h''), the timing of FIG. 256(α)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

With this gaming machine, a reel (the second reel) different from the reel corresponding to the stop operation (the first reel) moves to a stopped state first, which can give the player a sense of discomfort and increase the player's interest in the game.

The stopped state may be a state in which the reels appear to be stopped (a pseudo-stopped state in a pseudo game), or a state in which the actual game is started by a pseudo start from the pseudo game and the reels are stopped in the actual game (a pseudo-stop may also be called a real stop or a confirmed stop) (the same applies below).

According to the above description,
"A plurality of rotatable reels (e.g., a left reel 110, a center reel 111, and a right reel 112) and
Stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) are provided in a one-to-one relationship with each of the reels, and each of the stop operation means is operated by a player;
An operation instruction means (e.g., a performance image display device 157, a speaker 272, 277) capable of executing an operation instruction notification (e.g., a first notification (notification by push order navigation performance)) that indicates the operation order of the stop operation means;
Equipped with
The stop operation means includes a first stop button [e.g., a middle stop button 138] and a second stop button [e.g., a right stop button 139],
the plurality of reels include a first reel (e.g., a center reel 111) that can be shifted from a spinning state to a stopped state (e.g., a real stop (fixed stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game) by operating the first stop button;
The plurality of reels also includes a second reel (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be shifted from a spinning state to a stopped state (e.g., a real stop (fixed stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game) by operating the second stop button,
When the second stop button is operated before the first stop button is operated in accordance with the operation instruction notification after starting rotation [e.g., the timing of FIG. 248(h''), the timing of FIG. 255(h'')], the second reel may transition to a stopped state before the first reel transitions to a stopped state [e.g., the timing of FIG. 248(h'), the timing of FIG. 255(h')] [e.g., the timing of FIG. 248(h''), the timing of FIG. 255(h'')],
Even if the first stop button is operated before the second stop button is operated in accordance with the operation instruction notification after starting rotation [e.g., the timing of FIG. 247(h'), the timing of FIG. 249(h'), the timing of FIG. 254(h'), the timing of FIG. 256(h')], the second reel may transition to a stopped state before the first reel transitions to a stopped state [e.g., the timing of FIG. 247(β), the timing of FIG. 249(β), the timing of FIG. 254(β), the timing of FIG. 256(β)] [e.g., the timing of FIG. 247(h''), the timing of FIG. 249(α), the timing of FIG. 254(h''), the timing of FIG. 256(α)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

With this gaming machine, even if a player performs a stop operation in accordance with the operation instruction notification, a reel (the second reel) different from the reel corresponding to the stop operation (the first reel) may stop first, giving the player a sense of discomfort and increasing the player's interest in the game.

According to the above description,
"A plurality of rotatable reels (e.g., a left reel 110, a center reel 111, and a right reel 112) and
a first stop button (e.g., middle stop button 138) operated by the player;
a second stop button operated by the player [e.g., right stop button 139];
Equipped with
the plurality of reels include a first reel (e.g., a center reel 111) that can be shifted from a spinning state to a stopped state (e.g., a real stop (fixed stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game) by operating the first stop button;
The plurality of reels also includes a second reel (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be shifted from a spinning state to a stopped state (e.g., a real stop (fixed stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game) by operating the second stop button,
In a certain game, when the first stop button is operated before the second stop button is operated, there are cases where the second reel transitions to a stopped state before the first reel transitions to a stopped state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") [for example, the timing of FIG. 247(h"), the timing of FIG. 249(α), the timing of FIG. 254(h"), and the timing of FIG. 256(α)], and there are also cases where the first reel transitions to a stopped state before the second reel transitions to a stopped state (hereinafter referred to as the "second case") [for example, the timing of FIG. 246(h'), and the timing of FIG. 253(h')].
The game value granted to the player in the first case [e.g., the number of game media paid out] is the same as the game value granted to the player in the second case [e.g., the number of game media paid out].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

With this gaming machine, in addition to the second case where the reel corresponding to the stop operation (the first reel) transitions to a stopped state before the different reel (the second reel), there is also the first case where the different reel (the second reel) transitions to a stopped state before the reel corresponding to the stop operation (the first reel), and in the first case, it can give the player a sense of discomfort, which can increase the player's interest in the game. On the other hand, in both the first and second cases, the game value given to the player remains the same, so the player is not disadvantaged.

The gaming value is, for example, a profit granted to a player. The gaming value being the same may mean that the amount of gaming media granted to a player is the same, or the number of additional games granted to a player that maintains an advantageous gaming state (for example, an AT state) is the same.

Also,
"The apparatus includes an operation instruction means capable of issuing an operation instruction notification instructing an operation order of the first stop button and the second stop button,
a stop order of the first reel and the second reel when the first stop button and the second stop button are operated in accordance with a first operation order instructed by the operation instructing means may be the same as the first operation order or may be different from the first operation order;
Even if the first stop button and the second stop button are operated in a second operation sequence different from the first operation sequence instructed by the operation instructing means, the stop sequence of the first reel and the second reel may be the same as the first operation sequence,
In a game in which the first operation sequence is instructed by the operation instructing means, a first game value is awarded when the first stop button and the second stop button are operated in accordance with the first operation sequence;
In a game in which the first operation sequence is instructed by the instructing means, even if the stop sequence of the first reel and the second reel becomes the same as the first operation sequence as a result of operating the first stop button and the second stop button in the second operation sequence, the first game value is not awarded.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
may be also possible.

According to the above description,
"A plurality of rotatable reels (e.g., a left reel 110, a center reel 111, and a right reel 112) and
a first stop button (e.g., middle stop button 138) operated by the player;
a second stop button operated by the player [e.g., right stop button 139];
A game result notification means (e.g., a performance image display device 157) capable of executing a game result notification (e.g., a stop small role notification, etc.);
Equipped with
the plurality of reels include a first reel (e.g., a center reel 111) that can be shifted from a spinning state to a stopped state (e.g., a real stop (fixed stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game) by operating the first stop button;
The plurality of reels also includes a second reel (e.g., the right reel 112) that can be shifted from a spinning state to a stopped state (e.g., a real stop (fixed stop) state in a real game or a pseudo stop state in a pseudo game) by operating the second stop button,
In a certain game, when the first stop button is operated before the second stop button is operated, there are cases where the second reel transitions to a stopped state before the first reel transitions to a stopped state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") [for example, the timing of FIG. 247(h"), the timing of FIG. 249(α), the timing of FIG. 254(h"), and the timing of FIG. 256(α)], and there are also cases where the first reel transitions to a stopped state before the second reel transitions to a stopped state (hereinafter referred to as the "second case") [for example, the timing of FIG. 246(h'), and the timing of FIG. 253(h')].
The timing at which the game result notifying means starts the execution of the result notification may be later in the first case than in the second case [for example, later by the amount of delay in the timing at which the retraction control stops].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

According to this gaming machine, in addition to the second case in which the reel corresponding to the stop operation (the first reel) transitions to a stopped state before the different reel (the second reel), there is also the first case in which the different reel (the second reel) transitions to a stopped state before the reel corresponding to the stop operation (the first reel), and in the first case, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity, which may increase the player's interest in the game. Also, since the timing of starting the execution of the result notification is later in the game in which the first case occurs than in the game in which the second case occurs, it is easier for the player to understand that the first case has occurred, which may give the player a sense of incongruity and further increase the player's interest in the game.

The result notification may be a notification of a stopped small win, a notification of the number of game values (game media) obtained, a notification of a favorable game state to which a transition has been decided (a bonus transition notification or an AT transition notification), or a notification of information updated as a result of the end of the game (number of credits, number of games, number of remaining ATs, etc.).

For example, when the second stop operation is performed by the first stop button and then the third stop operation is performed by the second stop button, if the first reel is controlled to retract by four frames and the second reel is controlled to retract by one frame, the first reel will be stopped before the second reel is stopped (the second case). On the other hand, in the same manner, even if the second stop operation is performed by the first stop button and then the third stop operation is performed by the second stop button, if the first reel is controlled to retract by four frames and the second reel is not controlled to retract, the second reel will be stopped before the first reel is stopped (the first case). The timing of starting the execution of the result notification may be later in the game in the first case than in the game in the second case, but it varies depending on the operation interval of the first stop button and the second stop button. In other words, even in the second case, if the operation interval is large (if the third stop operation using the second stop button is performed after a certain time has elapsed), the timing at which the result notification begins will be later in the game in the second case than in the game in the first case.

Also,
"Even if the first reel is in a stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light-shielding piece of the middle reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 222)] and the first stop button is operated and then the second stop button is operated [for example, the timing of FIG. 247(h''), the timing of FIG. 254(h'')], the second reel may transition to a stopped state before the first reel transitions to a stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 247(h'), the timing of FIG. 254(β)], [for example, the timing of FIG. 247(h''), the timing of FIG. 254(h'')],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the reel corresponding to the later operation (the second reel) stops first, making it easier for the player to recognize that the order in which they were operated differs from the order in which they stopped, giving the player a greater sense of incongruity and potentially increasing the player's interest in the game.

If the first stop button is operated before detecting a detection piece (e.g., a light-blocking piece) on the first reel, then operating the second stop button thereafter will cause the second reel to transition to a stopped state before the first reel transitions to a stopped state.

Also,
"The second reel may transition to a stopped state before the first reel transitions to a stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 249(β) or FIG. 256(β)] even if the second stop button is not operated after the first stop button is operated [for example, the timing of FIG. 249(h') or FIG. 256(h')] [for example, the timing of FIG. 249(α) or FIG. 256(α)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the unoperated reel that is different from the reel that corresponds to the operation stops first, which can give the player a more strange feeling and increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition,
"A control means capable of executing retraction control of the first reel,
the second reel is in a spinning state, and if the second stop button is not operated before a predetermined period (e.g., a second period (40 seconds) or a third period (25 seconds)) has elapsed, the second reel automatically transitions from the spinning state to a stopped state upon the elapse of the predetermined period;
When the first stop button is operated immediately before the lapse of the predetermined period to perform retraction control of the first reel by a certain number of frames equal to or greater than one, the second reel, which automatically transitions from a spinning state to a stopped state as the predetermined period passes, may transition to a stopped state before the first reel [for example, the timing of FIG. 249(α) or FIG. 256(α)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
may be also possible.

In this case, the second stop button is not operated.

In addition, on gaming machines where automatic reel stopping is performed in the main game, a pseudo game in which a pseudo stop that makes it look like the reels have stopped is not started. However, a pseudo game may be started. In addition, on gaming machines where a pseudo game can be performed, automatic reel stopping can be performed in the pseudo game, but automatic reel stopping is not performed in the main game. However, automatic reel stopping may also be performed in the main game.

Also,
"The reel is provided with a notification means capable of notifying the player that the reel is in a stoppable state,
the plurality of reels are capable of transitioning from an unstoppable state to a stoppable state (e.g., a state in which a light-shielding piece of the reel is detected when the reel is rotating at a constant speed),
the notification means includes a first notification means (e.g., a middle stop button LED 138 a) capable of performing a first notification (e.g., lighting in a second light-emitting manner) that the first reel in a spinning state is in a stoppable state,
The notification means also includes a second notification means (e.g., a right stop button LED 139 a) capable of performing a second notification (e.g., lighting in a second light-emitting manner) that the second reel in a spinning state is in a stoppable state,
The first notification means does not execute the first notification unless all of the plurality of reels are shifted to the stoppable state,
The second notification means does not execute the second notification unless all of the plurality of reels are shifted to the stoppable state,
The second reel may transition to a stopped state before the first reel transitions to a stopped state if, after starting to spin, the second stop button is operated before the first stop button is operated before the first notification and the second notification are executed (for example, the timing of FIG. 248(h'') and the timing of FIG. 255(h'')),
After starting to spin, the second reel may transition to a stopped state before the first reel transitions to a stopped state even if the first stop button is operated prior to the operation of the second stop button before the first notification and the second notification are executed [for example, the timing of FIG. 252(h''), the timing of FIG. 259(h'')],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, a reel different from the reel corresponding to the operation received before the notification from the notification means stops first, which can give the player a more strange feeling and increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, after the first reel starts spinning, even if the second stop button is operated before the first stop button is operated before the first notification and the second notification are executed, the first reel may transition to a stopped state before the second reel transitions to a stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 248(α), the timing of FIG. 255(α)].

Also,
"In the period from when the reels start spinning to when the notification means starts executing the notification [for example, the fourth period shown in FIG. 249], the first stop button may be operated before the second stop button is operated, and the second reel may transition to a stopped state before the first reel transitions to a stopped state within the period [for example, the timing of FIG. 252(h''), the timing of FIG. 259(h'')],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, a different reel stops before the notification from the notification means, which can give the player a more strange feeling and increase the player's interest in the game.

Also,
"After the second reel transitions to a stopped state within the period, the first reel may also transition to a stopped state within the period [for example, the timing of FIG. 252 (β) or the timing of FIG. 259 (β)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, a reel different from the one corresponding to the operation received before the notification from the notification means stops first, and then the reel corresponding to the operation stops, which can give the player a more strange feeling and may increase the player's interest in the game.

Also,
"The gaming machine is capable of executing a game in which a pseudo game is played,
The pseudo game is a reel effect in which a pseudo stop is executed to make it look like the reel has stopped before the actual game in which the reel stops.
In a game in which a pseudo game is executed [for example, a pseudo game or a main game], if the second stop button is operated before the first stop button is operated after starting rotation [for example, at the timing of FIG. 255(h'')], the second reel may transition to a stopped state before the first reel transitions to a stopped state [for example, at the timing of FIG. 255(h')] [for example, at the timing of FIG. 255(h'')],
In a game in which a pseudo game is executed [for example, a pseudo game or a main game], even if the first stop button is operated before the second stop button is operated after starting rotation of the second reel, the second reel may transition to a stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 256 (β)] before the first reel transitions to a stopped state [for example, the timing of FIG. 256 (α)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine can give players a more strange feeling even when playing a simulated game, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition,
"The second reel may transition to a pseudo-stop state before the first reel transitions to a pseudo-stop state if the second stop button is operated before the first stop button is operated after the second reel starts spinning during a period before the start of the real game in which the pseudo game is executed (the so-called pseudo game period),
the second reel may transition to a pseudo-stopped stopped state before the first reel transitions to a pseudo-stopped stopped state even if the first stop button is operated before the second stop button is operated during the period after the second reel starts to spin,
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
may be also possible.

or,
"The second reel may transition to a fixed stop state before the first reel transitions to a fixed stop state if the second stop button is operated before the first stop button is operated during the period of the real game in the game in which the pseudo game is executed (the period after the pseudo stop has ended), after starting to rotate,
the second reel may transition to a fixed stop state before the first reel transitions to a fixed stop state even if the first stop button is operated before the second stop button is operated during the period after starting rotation,
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
may be also possible.

The actions and effects described in the above embodiments are merely a list of the most preferable actions and effects, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments.

Note that even if a constituent element is included only in the description of an embodiment, example, modification, various examples, appendices, etc. described above, that constituent element may be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. In other words, unless there is a factor preventing the application, even if a constituent element included only in the description of an embodiment, example, modification, various examples, appendices, etc. is applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc., it will still be valid as a single cohesive technical idea.

<Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100>
Next, an example of a lock mechanism for the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figures 261 to 264. In the following description, the same reference numerals will be used to designate components already described in other embodiments (e.g., Figures 17 to 32), and the description will be omitted. In addition, for components that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and reference numerals of this example will take precedence.

Figure 261 is a side view showing a slot machine 100 with the front door 102 in a closed state. The slot machine 100 is provided with a locking mechanism 1401 inside for locking the front door 102 in a closed state to the main body 101, and this locking mechanism 1401 is shown by a dotted line in Figure 261. This locking mechanism 1401 is composed of a locking body 1401A provided on the front door 102 side and a latching shaft 1401B provided on the main body 101 side. When the front door 102 is closed, the latching portion 1402 (described later) of the locking body 1401A is fixed in a latched state to the latching shaft 1401B, and the front door 102 in a closed state is locked to the main body 101 as shown in Figure 261. Note that the lock body 1401A moves on a circular orbit in response to the opening and closing of the front door 102, but when the lock body 1401A and the engaged shaft 1401B are close to each other, this movement can be considered to be along the front-to-rear direction of the slot machine 100. For this reason, in the following, unless otherwise specified, the movement direction of the lock body 1401A will be described as the front-to-rear direction of the slot machine 100. Note that in the following, the state in which the engaging portion 1402 of the lock body 1401A is engaged with the engaged shaft 1401B will be referred to as the locked state, and the state in which the engaging portion 1402 of the lock body 1401A is not engaged with the engaged shaft 1401B will be referred to as the unlocked state.

Figure 262(a) is a diagram showing the lock body 1401A from the side of the slot machine 100 when the lock mechanism 1401 is in an unlocked state, Figure 262(b) is a diagram showing the lock body 1401A of Figure 262(a) from the rear side of the slot machine 100, and Figure 262(c) is a diagram showing the lock body 1401A from the side of the slot machine 100 when the lock mechanism 1401 is in a locked state. Also, Figures 263(a) to (d) are diagrams showing the operation of the lock body 1401A and the locked shaft 1401B.

The lock body 1401A has a locking portion 1402 and a storage portion 1404. The storage portion 1404 has a space formed therein to store the locking portion 1402, and further has an opening formed on the rear side through which a part of the locking portion 1402 can be exposed. FIG. 262(a) shows a state in which a part of the locking portion 1402 stored in the storage portion 1404 is exposed from the rear side of the storage portion 1404. This locking portion 1402 has a recess 1402DP formed therein, and is rotatable around the rotation axis 1403. Furthermore, the locking portion 1402 is biased by a spring member (not shown) in a direction protruding from the opening of the storage portion 1404 to the rear side (clockwise in FIG. 262(a)). In the unlocked state (Figures 262(a) and 262(b)), a part of the locking portion 1402 protrudes from the rear side of the storage portion 1404 and abuts against the lower end portion 1404BB of the opening of the storage portion 1404, and is stopped in that position.

The receiving section 1404 has an entrance path 1404ER formed along the movement direction (front-rear direction), and the front door 102 moves to receive the locked shaft 1401B along the entrance path 1404ER (Fig. 263 (a) to (d)). In the entrance path 1404ER, a part of the surface of the locking section 1402 (hereinafter, the receiving surface 1402RS) is located toward the opening of the entrance path 1404ER, and the receiving surface 1402RS is pushed by the locked shaft 1401B that enters along the entrance path 1404ER, and the locking section 1402 rotates in a direction to be received in the receiving section 1404 (counterclockwise in Fig. 262 (a)). Then, when the front door 102 moves to a position where it is in a closed state, the locking section 1402 is fixed by a latch mechanism (not shown) (Fig. 262 (c), Fig. 263 (d)). At this time, the locking portion 1402 is locked to the locked shaft 1401B. More specifically, the rotation changes the orientation of the locking portion 1402, making the locked shaft 1401B unable to move in the front-rear direction inside the recess 1402DP, and the front door 102 is locked. Note that by inserting a door key into the door key hole 140 and rotating it, the locking portion 1402 is released from the latch mechanism, and the front door 102 can be opened.

The main body 101 is also provided with a door sensor 1406 for detecting the closed state of the front door 102. This door sensor 1406 is pressed by the lock main body 1401A when the front door 102 is closed, and when the front door 102 is completely closed (Fig. 263 (d)), a signal is output indicating that the front door 102 is closed. Note that the member that presses the door sensor 1406 does not have to be the lock main body 1401A, but may be another part of the front door 102. Alternatively, the door sensor 1406 may be provided on the front door 102, and the main body 101 may press the door sensor 1406.

When performing maintenance on the slot machine 100, the front door 102 must be left open. However, if the front door 102 closes naturally and enters a locked state while the user is not looking, the front door 102 must be opened again, resulting in a decrease in the efficiency of the maintenance work. If a stopper is used to prevent the front door 102 from entering a locked state, the work becomes more complicated as more tools must be carried around. To address this issue, the locking mechanism 1401 of this embodiment is designed to maintain the unlocked state by utilizing a setting key used in the maintenance work. The specific configuration will be described below.

264(a) is a side view showing the state where the setting key SK is inserted into the lock body 1401A, 264(b) is a side view showing the setting key SK in 264(a) in solid lines, and 264(c) is a view of the lock body 1401A in 264(a) seen from the rear side. In the lock body 1401A of this embodiment, a slit 1401SL into which the setting key SK can be inserted is formed between the storage section 1404 and the engagement section 1402 (see FIG. 262(b)). 264(a) to 264(c) show the state where the setting key SK is inserted into this slit 1401SL. Note that the inserted setting key SK is configured to be supported by the lower end 1404BB of the opening of the storage section 1404 and the rotating shaft 1403 so that it does not fall into the inside of the storage section 1404.

In FIG. 262(b), there are two gaps between the storage portion 1404 and the locking portion 1402, but there is only one gap (slit 1401SL) through which the setting key SK can be inserted, and the other gap is configured such that the setting key SK cannot be inserted.

In this embodiment, the width of the slit 1401SL into which the setting key can be inserted is slightly larger than the thickness of the setting key SK, and the setting key SK is not clamped within the slit 1401SL. However, the width of the slit 1401SL may be narrower so that when the setting key SK is inserted, the slit 1401SL is pushed open, and the reaction force clamps the setting key SK. In this case, it is possible to prevent the setting key SK from falling out of the lock body 1401A and being lost.

When the setting key SK is inserted as shown in FIG. 264(a), even if the front door 102 is moved, the locked shaft 1401B comes into contact with the setting key SK as shown in FIG. 264(d), and the locked shaft 1401B cannot enter along the entry path 1404ER. In this state, the front door 102 does not enter a locked state, and can remain unlocked.

Here, by differentiating the position where the engaged shaft 1401B contacts the setting key SK (diagonally lower left in FIG. 264(d), and to the right of the visual engaging portion 1402 in FIG. 264(c)) from the position where it contacts the receiving surface 1402RS (directly to the side (left) in FIG. 263(b), and to the left of the visual setting key SK in FIG. 264(c), durability can be improved without the same position of the engaged shaft 1401B wearing out. Note that the difference in the above positions may be different in the front-to-back direction of the slot machine 100 or in the up-to-down direction, and is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment.

When the setting key SK is inserted as shown in FIG. 264(a), a signal detecting the closed state is not output (the closed state is not detected). This configuration may be such that the door sensor 1406 does not come into contact with the lock body 1401A (the detection piece does not move) and therefore does not detect the closed state, or the door sensor 1406 may come into contact with the lock body 1401A but the detection piece does not move to a position where it detects the closed state.

In FIG. 264(a), a portion of the setting key SK protrudes from the storage section 1404, but the configuration is not limited to this and the setting key SK may be stored in the storage section 1404. By having a portion of the setting key SK protrude from the storage section 1404, the setting key SK can be easily removed when work is completed.

When the door key is operated in the state shown in FIG. 264(a), the locking portion 1402 is in the unlocked state and therefore maintains its current position, and the setting key SK also maintains its current position (the state shown in FIG. 264(a)). Therefore, even if an operator forgets that the setting key SK is inserted and operates the door key, it is possible to prevent the setting key SK from falling or being lost. Note that, in order to maintain the state shown in FIG. 264(a) when the door key is operated, the door key may be operated clockwise or counterclockwise. In addition, although the present embodiment has been described as a case in which the position or position of the locking portion 1402 does not change, the setting key SK may be configured to maintain its inserted state even if its position or position changes.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured so that it is possible to visually confirm whether the locking portion 1402 is in a locked state or an unlocked state in the state shown in FIG. 264(d). In this embodiment, it is configured so that it is possible to determine whether the locking portion 1402 is in an unlocked state by visually confirming the locking portion 1402 protruding outside the storage portion 1404. However, even if the locking portion 1402 is configured so that it is visible in a locked state, it is possible to visually confirm whether the locking portion 1402 is in a locked state or an unlocked state. In other words, it is sufficient that the locking portion 1402 is visible in either a locked state or an unlocked state. Also, it is possible to confirm that the setting key SK is in an unlocked state when it is in a state shown in FIG. 264(d). Also, the position and direction of the visual confirmation are not particularly limited, and it may be possible to confirm from the boundary between the front door 102 and the main body 101 (the side of the slot machine 100) or from above the slot machine 100. Also, it may be possible to visually confirm from a position where the reel unit and the main control board can be confirmed in the state shown in FIG. 264(d).

In this embodiment, the configuration using the setting key SK has been described, but it may also be configured to use, for example, a game medal or a 500 yen coin. Figure 264 (e) shows an example of a game medal MD inserted into the lock body 1401A. The metal piece for maintaining the unlocked state is not limited to the above, but by using one that is used during maintenance work, the trouble of preparing a separate stopper can be eliminated.

In the above embodiment, the lock body 1401A is provided on the front door 102 side, and the engaged shaft 1401B is provided on the main body 101 side. However, the engaged shaft 1401B may be provided on the front door 102 side, and the lock body 1401A may be provided on the main body 101 side. In addition, although the present embodiment describes a configuration in which one lock mechanism 1401 is provided, a configuration in which multiple such lock mechanisms are provided may also be used. In this case, there may be a lock mechanism located near the front and a lock mechanism located near the rear along the front-to-rear direction of the slot machine 100.

[Technical Concepts Corresponding to the Embodiments of the Lock Mechanism of the Front Door 102 of the Slot Machine 100]
Below, the technical ideas described in the description of Figures 261 to 264 will be described with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
It is possible to put the device into a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 264(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the housing portion,
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 264(d)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to keep the door open, improving the ease with which store staff can clean, maintain, and inspect the machine. It also prevents deterioration of the locking parts over time.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece protrudes more toward the engaged portion than the engaging portion (for example, FIG. 264(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the door body can be kept open without the locking part coming into contact with the locked part.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, a part of the metal piece protrudes from the housing portion (for example, FIG. 264(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine makes it easy to remove certain metal pieces after work is completed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The slit-shaped space has an opening whose lower end (for example, a lower end 1404BB in FIG. 262(b)) is formed by the storage portion,
The locking portion is rotatable around a shaft portion (e.g., a rotation shaft 1403),
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece is supported by the lower end of the opening and the shaft portion (for example, FIG. 04(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can prevent metal pieces from getting stuck deep inside the housing.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the certain metal piece is inserted into the slit-shaped space, the thickness of the certain metal piece causes the slit-shaped space to be expanded and reach the predetermined state (for example, see the description that "when the setting key SK is inserted, the slit 1401SL is expanded, and the setting key SK may be clamped by the reaction force").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine has a metal piece that is clamped to prevent it from falling or getting lost during operation.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A door sensor (e.g., door sensor 1406) that detects the open/closed state of the door body;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
It is possible to put the device into a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 264(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the housing portion,
In the predetermined state, even if the door body is to be closed, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 264(d)).
In the predetermined state, the door sensor does not detect a closed state of the door body.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to keep the door open, improving the ease with which store staff can clean, maintain, and inspect the machine. It also prevents deterioration of the locking parts and door sensors over time.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece protrudes more toward the engaged portion than the engaging portion (for example, FIG. 264(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the door body can be kept open without the locking part coming into contact with the locked part.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, a part of the metal piece protrudes from the housing portion (for example, FIG. 264(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine makes it easy to remove certain metal pieces after work is completed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The slit-shaped space has an opening whose lower end (for example, a lower end 1404BB in FIG. 262(b)) is formed by the storage portion,
The locking portion is rotatable around a shaft portion (e.g., a rotation shaft 1403),
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece is supported by the lower end of the opening and the shaft portion (for example, FIG. 04(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can prevent metal pieces from getting stuck deep inside the housing.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
When the certain metal piece is inserted into the slit-shaped space, the thickness of the certain metal piece causes the slit-shaped space to be expanded and reach the predetermined state (for example, see the description that "when the setting key SK is inserted, the slit 1401SL is expanded, and the setting key SK may be clamped by the reaction force").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine has a metal piece that is clamped to prevent it from falling or getting lost during operation.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
It is possible to put the device into a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 264(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the housing portion,
In the predetermined state, even if the door body is to be closed, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 264(d)).
The portion of the locked portion that the locking portion comes into contact with is different from the portion of the locked portion that the certain metal piece comes into contact with (for example, FIG. 264(d) ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to keep the door open, improving the ease with which store staff can clean, maintain, and inspect the machine. It also prevents deterioration of the locking and locked parts over time.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece protrudes more toward the engaged portion than the engaging portion (for example, FIG. 264(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the door body can be kept open without the locking part coming into contact with the locked part.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, a part of the metal piece protrudes from the housing portion (for example, FIG. 264(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine makes it easy to remove certain metal pieces after work is completed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The slit-shaped space has an opening whose lower end (for example, a lower end 1404BB in FIG. 262(b)) is formed by the storage portion,
The locking portion is rotatable around a shaft portion (e.g., a rotation shaft 1403),
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece is supported by the lower end of the opening and the shaft portion (for example, FIG. 04(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can prevent metal pieces from getting stuck deep inside the housing.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the certain metal piece is inserted into the slit-shaped space, the thickness of the certain metal piece causes the slit-shaped space to be expanded and reach the predetermined state (for example, see the description that "when the setting key SK is inserted, the slit 1401SL is expanded, and the setting key SK may be clamped by the reaction force").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine has a metal piece that is clamped to prevent it from falling or getting lost during operation.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
The door lock mechanism can be changed from a locked state to an unlocked state by releasing the engagement between the engaging portion and the engaged portion by operating a door key,
It is possible to put the device into a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 264(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the housing portion,
In the predetermined state, even if the door body is to be closed, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 264(d)).
In the predetermined state, the predetermined state is maintained even if the door key is operated (for example, the state of FIG. 264(a) is maintained even if the door key is operated),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to keep the door open, improving the ease of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff. It also prevents deterioration of the locking parts over time. Furthermore, even if an employee forgets that a certain metal piece has been inserted and operates the door key, it prevents the certain metal piece from falling out or becoming lost.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece protrudes more toward the engaged portion than the engaging portion (for example, FIG. 264(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the door body can be kept open without the locking part coming into contact with the locked part.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, a part of the metal piece protrudes from the housing portion (for example, FIG. 264(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine makes it easy to remove certain metal pieces after work is completed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The slit-shaped space has an opening whose lower end (for example, a lower end 1404BB in FIG. 262(b)) is formed by the storage portion,
The locking portion is rotatable around a shaft portion (e.g., a rotation shaft 1403),
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece is supported by the lower end of the opening and the shaft portion (for example, FIG. 04(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can prevent metal pieces from getting stuck deep inside the housing.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the certain metal piece is inserted into the slit-shaped space, the thickness of the certain metal piece causes the slit-shaped space to be expanded and reach the predetermined state (for example, see the description that "when the setting key SK is inserted, the slit 1401SL is expanded, and the setting key SK may be clamped by the reaction force").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine has a metal piece that is clamped to prevent it from falling or getting lost during operation.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
It is possible to put the device into a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 264(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the housing portion,
In the predetermined state, even if the door body is to be closed, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 264(d)).
In the predetermined state, it is possible to visually confirm from the outside that the locking portion is in the unlocked state.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to keep the door open, improving the ease with which store staff can clean, maintain, and inspect the machine. It also prevents deterioration of the locking parts over time. Furthermore, workers can determine the state of the door lock mechanism from the state of the locking parts.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece protrudes more toward the engaged portion than the engaging portion (for example, FIG. 264(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the door body can be kept open without the locking part coming into contact with the locked part.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, a part of the metal piece protrudes from the housing portion (for example, FIG. 264(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine makes it easy to remove certain metal pieces after work is completed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The slit-shaped space has an opening whose lower end (for example, a lower end 1404BB in FIG. 262(b)) is formed by the storage portion,
The locking portion is rotatable around a shaft portion (e.g., a rotation shaft 1403),
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece is supported by the lower end of the opening and the shaft portion (for example, FIG. 04(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can prevent metal pieces from getting stuck deep inside the housing.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the certain metal piece is inserted into the slit-shaped space, the thickness of the certain metal piece causes the slit-shaped space to be expanded and reach the predetermined state (for example, see the description that "when the setting key SK is inserted, the slit 1401SL is expanded, and the setting key SK may be clamped by the reaction force").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine has a metal piece that is clamped to prevent it from falling or getting lost during operation.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

<Regarding the board of the slot machine 100 and the stickers attached thereto>
Next, an example of the board of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figures 265 to 268. In the following description, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations already described in other embodiments (e.g., Figures 17 to 32), and the description will be omitted. In addition, for configurations that contradict the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and reference numerals of this example will take precedence.

Various stickers are affixed to the board of the slot machine 100, including stickers that certify that the machine has passed inspection. In some cases, stickers that have already been affixed are removed and new stickers are affixed. If stickers are affixed in the wrong position or at an angle, it may be easy to commit fraud. In addition, there is a risk that the pattern on the board may be damaged when the sticker is peeled off. Below, a configuration for dealing with these problems is described.

Figures 265(a)-(d) and 266(a)-(b) are diagrams showing an example of the positional relationship between the wiring pattern on the board and the sticker attached to the board.

First, in the example of FIG. 265(a), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by two wires L1 and L2. A sticker ST is affixed to the space SA partitioned by the two wires L1 and L2. Note that the board-mounted components CM1 and CM2, including this example, are not limited and may be, for example, an IC, a resistor, a capacitor, a FET, a diode, an LED, a switch, a connector, etc. Also, including this example, the wires L1 and L2 may be a signal line, a power line, a ground line, etc. Also, in this example, the sticker ST has a two-dimensional code attached, but the content displayed on the sticker is not limited.

In the above example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the top, bottom, left and right sides of the sticker ST. Using this guide makes it easier to determine the placement of the sticker ST, and using the space SA without a pattern makes it less likely that the pattern on the board will be damaged. In other words, this improves maintainability when removing and re-attaching the sticker during maintenance or inspection.

In the example of Figure 265(b), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by two wires L1 and L2, as in Figure 265(a), and a sticker ST is affixed to the space SA defined by the two wires L1 and L2. In this example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the top and bottom edges of the sticker ST. Note that this example differs from Figure 265(a) in that the wiring pattern does not serve as a guide for the left and right edges of the sticker ST, but in this example, as in Figure 265(a), by utilizing this guide and space SA, it is possible to improve maintainability when removing and re-affixing the sticker during maintenance or inspection.

In the example of Figure 265(c), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by a wire L1, but this wire L1 is a single line, which is different from Figure 265(a). A sticker ST is affixed to a space SA partitioned by the single wire L1. In this example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the top, bottom, left, and right sides of the sticker ST. Using this guide makes it easy to determine the affixing position of the sticker ST, and using a space SA without a pattern makes it less likely that the pattern on the board will be damaged. In other words, it is easier to maintain when the sticker is removed and re-affixed during maintenance or inspection.

In the example of Figure 265(d), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by a single wiring L1, as in Figure 265(c), and a sticker ST is affixed to a space SA defined by the single wiring L1. In this example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the top, bottom, and right sides of the sticker ST. Note that this example differs from Figure 265(c) in that the wiring pattern does not serve as a guide for the left side of the sticker ST, but in this example, as in Figure 265(c), by utilizing this guide and space SA, it is possible to improve maintainability when removing and re-affixing the sticker during maintenance or inspection.

In the example of Figure 266(a), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by a single wire L1, as in Figure 265(c), and a sticker ST is affixed to a space SA defined by the single wire L1. In this example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the top and left and right sides of the sticker ST. Note that this example differs from Figure 265(c) in that the wiring pattern does not serve as a guide for the bottom side of the sticker ST, but in this example, as in Figure 265(c), by utilizing this guide and space SA, it is possible to improve maintainability when removing and re-affixing the sticker during maintenance or inspection.

In the example of Figure 266(b), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by a single wiring L1, as in Figure 265(c), and a sticker ST is affixed to a space SA defined by the single wiring L1. In this example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the upper and left sides of the sticker ST. Note that this example differs from Figure 265(c) in that the wiring pattern does not serve as a guide for the right and bottom sides of the sticker ST, but in this example, as in Figure 265(c), by utilizing this guide and space SA, it is possible to improve maintainability when removing and re-affixing the sticker during maintenance or inspection.

In the above examples, maintainability can be improved by providing the wiring pattern with straight line sections that act as guides for at least two of the top, bottom, left and right sides of the sticker. In the above Figures 265(a)-(d) and 266(a)-(b), the first and second straight lines in the wiring pattern are shown to be approximately parallel to the third and fourth straight lines of the sticker ST, respectively. In particular, in the case of a sticker with a two-dimensional code attached, as in this embodiment, the presence of a pattern for detecting the position of the two-dimensional code can enhance the guiding effect.

In addition, in the above example, the seal ST is affixed to a space SA that does not have a wiring pattern, but if at least a portion of the seal ST is affixed to an area that does not have a wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be prevented from being damaged by peeling the seal ST from this area.

In addition, in a configuration in which the wiring pattern serves as a guide, a silk screen print indicating the position for attaching a sticker may be provided separately. Figure 267(a) shows an example in which the configuration of Figure 265(c) is provided with silk screen prints SP indicating the positions for attaching a sticker at four corners. Figure 267(b) shows an example in which the configuration of Figure 265(c) is provided with silk screen prints SP indicating the positions for attaching a sticker at two corners, the upper right and lower left.

In addition, the slot machine 100 is provided with various boards, and a configuration may be adopted in which the guide for the sticker differs depending on the board, for example, a board having a sticker attached using a wiring pattern as a guide and a board having a sticker attached using silk printing as a guide. In this configuration, the type of board can be distinguished by the difference in the sticker guide.

In addition, to prevent fraud, rules may be set for the orientation of the sticker relative to the direction of the board. In this configuration, fraud may be identified if the sticker orientation violates the rules. For example, the orientation of the sticker relative to the reference direction of the board (the depth direction for boards arranged horizontally, and the upward direction for boards arranged vertically) may be different for the first board and the second board. Figure 268(a) shows an example in which sticker ST1 (facing upward) affixed to board A and sticker ST2 (facing right) affixed to board B differ from the reference direction.

A similar configuration may also be adopted for the substrate and the case covering the substrate. For example, the orientation of the sticker with respect to the reference direction of the substrate (the depth direction for a substrate arranged horizontally, and the upward direction for a substrate arranged vertically) may be different between the substrate and the case covering the substrate. Figure 268(b) shows an example in which sticker ST1 (facing upward) affixed to substrate A and sticker ST3 (facing downward) affixed to the case of substrate A differ with respect to the reference direction.

[Technical Concepts Corresponding to the Embodiments of the Board of the Slot Machine 100 and the Affixed Stickers]
Below, the technical ideas described in the explanation of Figures 265 to 268 will be described with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
a first substrate provided with wiring having at least a first straight line and a second straight line;
A substantially rectangular seal (for example, seal ST) having at least the third straight line and the fourth straight line in its outer shape;
A gaming machine equipped with
the seal is attached to the first substrate such that the third straight line is substantially parallel to the first straight line;
the seal is attached to the first substrate such that the fourth straight line is substantially parallel to the second straight line;
We have described gaming machines (for example, Figs. 265(a)-(d), 266(a)-(b)) that are characterized by the above.

This gaming machine makes it easy to apply stickers using the wiring on the circuit board as a guide, which improves maintainability when removing and reapplying stickers during maintenance and inspection.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is perpendicular to the direction of the second straight line (e.g., FIGS. 265(a)(c)-(d), 266(a)-(b)),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to align the corners of the stickers.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is parallel to the direction of the second straight line (e.g., FIGS. 265(a) to (d), FIG. 266(b));
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easy to align the opposing sides of the stickers.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
At least a portion of the seal is attached to an area (e.g., a space SA) of the first substrate where no wiring is present.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine prevents the wiring from being damaged when removing the sticker.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The sticker has a two-dimensional code displayed thereon (for example, Fig. 265(a)-(d), Fig. 266(a)-(b)),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine has a two-dimensional code position detection pattern, which enhances the guide effect and improves maintainability.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first substrate provided with wiring having at least a first straight line and a second straight line;
a first seal having a substantially rectangular shape having at least a third straight line and a fourth straight line in its outer shape;
a second substrate having some printed indicia (e.g., a silk screen seal position guide);
A second seal; and
A gaming machine equipped with
the first seal is attached to the first substrate such that the third straight line is substantially parallel to the first straight line;
the first seal is attached to the first substrate such that the fourth straight line is substantially parallel to the second straight line;
The second seal is attached to the second substrate along the certain printed indication.
The present invention has described a gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, see the description that "a configuration in which the sticker guides are different depending on the board").

In this gaming machine, stickers can be easily affixed using the wiring on the board as a guide, which improves maintainability when removing and re-affixing stickers during maintenance and inspection. In addition, the first board and the second board can be distinguished from each other by the difference in how the first and second stickers are affixed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is perpendicular to the direction of the second straight line (e.g., FIGS. 265(a)(c)-(d), 266(a)-(b)),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to align the corners of the stickers.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is parallel to the direction of the second straight line (e.g., FIGS. 265(a) to (d), FIG. 266(b));
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easy to align the opposing sides of the stickers.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
At least a portion of the first seal is attached to an area (e.g., a space SA) of the first substrate where there is no wiring.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine prevents the wiring from being damaged when removing the sticker.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first seal and the second seal have a two-dimensional code displayed thereon (for example, FIGS. 265(a)-(d), 266(a)-(b)),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine has a two-dimensional code position detection pattern, which enhances the guide effect and improves maintainability.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first substrate provided with wiring having at least a first straight line and a second straight line;
a first seal having a substantially rectangular shape having at least a third straight line and a fourth straight line in its outer shape;
A second substrate;
A second seal; and
A gaming machine equipped with
the first seal is attached to the first substrate such that the third straight line is substantially parallel to the first straight line;
the first seal is attached to the first substrate such that the fourth straight line is substantially parallel to the second straight line;
the second seal is attached to the second substrate,
an orientation of the first seal with respect to a reference direction of the first substrate is different from an orientation of the second seal with respect to a reference direction of the second substrate;
The reference direction is the upward direction in a vertically installed board, and is the depth direction of the game table in a horizontally installed board.
We have described a gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, the configuration of FIG. 268(a) compared to the sticker ST of FIGS. 265(a)-(d) and 266(a)-(b)).

In this gaming machine, stickers can be easily attached using the wiring on the circuit board as a guide, which improves maintainability when removing and reattaching stickers during maintenance and inspection. Also, it may be possible to identify fraud by the orientation of the first and second stickers.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is perpendicular to the direction of the second straight line (e.g., FIGS. 265(a)(c)-(d), 266(a)-(b)),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to align the corners of the stickers.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is parallel to the direction of the second straight line (e.g., FIGS. 265(a) to (d), FIG. 266(b));
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easy to align the opposing sides of the stickers.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
At least a portion of the first seal is attached to an area (e.g., a space SA) of the first substrate where there is no wiring.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine prevents the wiring from being damaged when removing the sticker.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first seal and the second seal have a two-dimensional code displayed thereon (for example, FIGS. 265(a)-(d), 266(a)-(b)),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine has a two-dimensional code position detection pattern, which enhances the guide effect and improves maintainability.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a first substrate case that houses the first substrate and has a third seal (e.g., seal ST3) attached thereto;
a second substrate case that houses the second substrate and has a fourth seal attached thereto;
an orientation of the first seal with respect to a reference direction of the first substrate is different from an orientation of the third seal with respect to a reference direction of the first substrate;
an orientation of the second seal with respect to a reference direction of the second substrate is different from an orientation of the fourth seal with respect to a reference direction of the second substrate;
We have described a gaming machine (e.g., Figure 268 (b)) that is characterized by the above.

With this gaming machine, it may be possible to spot cheating by the orientation of each sticker.

<About the power supply module>
Next, an example of a power supply module provided inside the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figs. 269 to 270. In the following description, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations already described in other embodiments (e.g. Figs. 17 to 32), and the description will be omitted. In addition, for configurations that contradict the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and reference numerals of this example will take precedence.

Figure 269 is a diagram showing an example of a power supply module PM. In this power supply module PM, a power supply board PW is attached to a board base CA2, and a cover CA1 covering this power supply board PW is further attached to the board base CA2 and fixed to the slot machine 100 with a member not shown. The cover CA1 is composed of an upper surface TP, a lower surface BT, a front surface FR, a rear surface BK, and a right surface RT which form a space to accommodate the power supply board PW. Each of these surfaces has multiple ventilation holes AH formed over almost the entire surface. The board base CA2 is provided with corner members CR1 to CR4, which are configured to press the cover CA1 from the outside when the cover CA1 is attached to the board base CA2.

Figure 270(a) is a view of the bottom surface BT from below. In this figure, it is shown that the corner member CR1 of the substrate base CA2 is on the front left side, and the corner member CR2 is on the rear left side. Also, Figure 270(b) shows a cross-sectional view of line A-A in Figure 270(a), and Figure 270(c) shows a cross-sectional view of line B-B in Figure 270(a). In Figures 270(b) and 270(c), it is shown that the corner members CR1 and CR2 are located further below the bottom surface BT, thereby creating a space between the bottom surface BT and the installation surface SP below it. The existence of this space allows for smooth ventilation through the ventilation opening AH. Furthermore, the smooth ventilation allows for greater freedom in the shape and arrangement of the ventilation opening AH.

The thickness of the corner members CR1 and CR2 on the underside of the underside BT is smaller than the thickness of the setting key, and is configured so that the setting key cannot enter the space created under the underside of the underside BT. This allows for smooth intake and exhaust from the ventilation opening AH, and makes it difficult to tamper with the power supply module PM. Note that the thickness of the setting key is only one standard, and it is also possible to use the thickness of a gaming medal or a 500 yen coin as a standard, for example, and configure it so that a gaming medal or a 500 yen coin cannot enter the space created under the underside BT.

The top surface TP, front surface FR, and rear surface BK of the power module PM are configured with any two of the corner members CR1 to CR4 overlapping on the outside, similar to the bottom surface BT described in Figure 270 (a). This makes it difficult for the ventilation opening AH to become blocked even if other devices come close to these surfaces, allowing for smooth intake and exhaust.

[Technical Concepts Corresponding to the Embodiments of the Power Supply Module]
Below, the technical ideas described in the explanation of Figures 269 to 270 will be described with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
A game table including a power supply device (e.g., a power supply module PM) having a case formed by combining a first member (e.g., a cover CA1) and a second member (e.g., a base CA2),
The lower surface of the case is formed by a first surface (e.g., a lower surface BT) of the first member, and a second surface (e.g., corner members CR1, CR2) of the second member is overlapped on a part of the lower surface of the case on the outer periphery side.
A plurality of ventilation holes (e.g., ventilation hole AH) are formed on the first surface.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine prevents the second surface from coming into contact with other components, thereby preventing the vents on the first surface from becoming blocked, allowing the power supply unit to be cooled.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The second surface is formed of a plate-like member having a thickness thinner than a certain metal piece,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can prevent metal pieces from entering the gap under the first surface.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Any of the plurality of ventilation holes is located between the plurality of second surfaces on the lower surface of the case (for example, FIG. 270(a) and FIG. 270(c)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows for greater freedom in the placement of the vents on the first surface.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Any one of the top, front, and back surfaces of the case is a third surface of the first member (e.g., a top surface TP, a front surface FR, a rear surface BK) on which a plurality of ventilation holes are formed, and further, a fourth surface of the second member (e.g., corner members CR1 to CR4) is overlapped on the outer periphery of the third surface of the first member.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can prevent the ventilation holes from being blocked on surfaces other than the bottom.

<Regarding the Board and Board Case of the Slot Machine 100>
Next, an example of the board and board case of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 271. In the following description, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations already described in other embodiments (e.g., FIG. 17 to FIG. 32), and the description will be omitted. In addition, for configurations that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and reference numerals of this example will take precedence.

Figure 271(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the configuration of a board and a board case. This figure 271(a) shows a board CB and a board case CA that covers the board CB. The board CB is provided with components such as capacitors and ICs that constitute the circuit on the board, and Figure 271(a) shows circuit components CE1, CE2, and CE3 as examples of such components. The board case CA is made of a transparent material and has a shape with a different height to match the height of the board CB (the height of the circuit components CE1, CE2, and CE3). Note that the area NA of the board CB is an area only of lands where no circuit components are mounted (hereinafter, unmounted land area NA). And, the area ID of the board case CA that corresponds to this unmounted land area NA is an area to which text information related to the board CB is added (hereinafter, text information area ID).

When a board case CA as shown in FIG. 271(a) is provided, the effectiveness of preventing tampering with the board CB can be improved, but once tampering has occurred, there is a problem in that the board CB becomes difficult to see, making it difficult to notice the tampering. The board case CA described above uses a transparent material, making such problems less likely to occur.

Here, the substrate case CA may be provided with a structure (e.g., a rivet) for engaging with the substrate CB, a structure (e.g., a rivet) for engaging a cover member to prevent access to the connector on the substrate CB after the cable is removed from the substrate CB to the substrate case CA, and a structure (e.g., a character display or a sticker) for displaying information about the substrate CB and information about the functions of the substrate case CA. When such structures are provided, the visibility of the substrate CB in that area may be reduced, and there is a risk of tampering. Here, if there is an unmounted land area NA on the substrate CB that is not likely to be the target of tampering, the above structure can be provided in the area corresponding to the unmounted land area NA to make it difficult to tamper. FIG. 271(a) shows that the character information area ID corresponding to the unmounted land area NA is used in the structure for displaying information about the substrate CB. As an example of the character information area ID, characters may be printed, or characters that can be recognized may be formed by the unevenness of the substrate case CA. The text information area ID is a transparent area, although the visibility is reduced due to the presence of text, and the presence or absence of unauthorized components can be confirmed by visually checking the unmounted land area NA. If silk screen printing is applied to the unmounted land area NA, this printing can also be made visible to prevent unauthorized use.

Figure 271 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a configuration in which a crimp CL is provided in the non-mounted land area NA. Since no components are provided in the non-mounted land area NA, the height of the board case CA is not required. The character information area ID in Figure 271 (a) is not a configuration that requires a particular height, so it is the same height as the surrounding area. In contrast, the crimp CL in Figure 271 (b) requires a certain amount of height. However, since no components are provided in the non-mounted land area NA and there is a margin of height, the height of the board case CA can be suppressed and made compact. Figure 271 (b) shows that the height of the crimp CL is secured, while the height of the part where the crimp CL is provided is lower than the height of the part where the circuit component CE1 is provided. Note that the crimp CL is made of a transparent material, although its structure reduces its visibility, and the presence or absence of unauthorized components can be confirmed by visually checking the non-mounted land area NA. Note that if silk screen printing is applied to the non-mounted land area NA, this printing can also be made visible to prevent unauthorized use.

[Technical Concepts Corresponding to the Embodiments of the Board and Board Case of the Slot Machine 100]
Below, the technical ideas described in the description of Figure 271 will be described with reference to the corresponding configuration.

In the above explanation,
A first substrate (e.g., substrate CB);
A first substrate case (e.g., a substrate case CA) that accommodates the first substrate and has transparency;
A gaming machine equipped with
The first substrate has an unmounted land on which no component is mounted (e.g., an unmounted land area NA),
The first board case has a first function in a first area covering the non-component-mounted land (e.g., a character information area ID, a crimp CL),
The first function is a function of displaying information about the first board or a function of enabling a predetermined operation in the first board case.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the space above the vacant land can be used to configure the first function.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first substrate case has an area that is higher than the first area with respect to the first substrate (for example, in FIGS. 271(a) and 271(b), the area where the circuit component CE1 is provided is higher than the area corresponding to the unmounted land area NA).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first circuit board case can be made compact.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The vacant land can be visually confirmed from the first area.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine allows you to check whether any unauthorized parts have been installed on unimplemented lands.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A silk screen display corresponding to the vacant land can be visually recognized from the first area.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine allows you to check whether any unauthorized parts have been installed on unimplemented lands.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first function is a function of displaying information about the first substrate,
Information about the first substrate is formed in the first area (e.g., a text information area ID),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, the space above the vacant land can be used for displays.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first function is a function of displaying information about the first substrate,
A sticker carrying information about the first substrate is attached to the first region.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the space above the lands on which no components are mounted can be used for stickers.
In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first function is a function that enables a predetermined operation in the first board case (e.g., a locking operation of a member);
A rivet (e.g., a rivet CL) that enables the predetermined operation by releasing is provided in the first region;
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the space above the lands where no components are mounted can be used for crimping.

<Caution notices for reels>
Next, an example of the operation during reel rotation will be described with reference to Figures 272 to 281. In the following description, the same reference numerals will be used for configurations already described in other embodiments (e.g., Figures 17 to 32), and the description will be omitted. In addition, for configurations that contradict the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and reference numerals of this example will take precedence.

[Example of normal game action]
Fig. 272 is a diagram showing the flow of operations in a normal game. In this diagram, operations are performed in the following order: bet operation, lever operation, left stop operation, center stop operation, and right stop operation. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor also detects the closed state.

First, when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start playing is placed. This stage is before the game is started by lever operation (reels are stopped), and the normal background is displayed on the performance image display device 157 (display means), normal background music is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in the normal light emission mode. In addition, the lever monitor LED provided on the board of the main control unit 300 is in the first mode (lighting or turning off, a mode different from the second mode described below). This lever monitor LED is in the second mode when the start lever 135 is pressed down, and is provided to check the state of the start lever 135. Note that the lever monitor LED is not limited to being provided on the board of the main control unit 300, and may be provided, for example, on the relay board between the lever and the main control unit.

Next, when the start lever 135 is operated and changes from a non-pressed state to a pressed state, a signal of this change is received and the game begins (the reels start spinning). At this time, the effect image display device 157 starts a first display (for example, an operation instruction display (push order navigation, aim for XX), a small win suggestion display, a preview display, etc.), the speakers 272, 277 start outputting a first sound (effect corresponding to the first display), and the various lamps 420 go into a first light emission state (effect corresponding to the first display). In addition, the lever monitor LED goes into a second state (lit or unlit, a state different from the first state).

Next, when a left stop operation is performed as a first stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop state, and a first stop sound corresponding to the first stop operation is output from the speakers 272, 277. Note that the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission state. Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first state.

Next, when a middle stop operation is performed as a second stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop state, and a second stop sound corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speakers 272, 277. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission state. In addition, the lever monitor LED is in the first state.

Finally, when a right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, all reels come to a stop state, and a third stop sound corresponding to the third stop operation is output from the speakers 272, 277. At this time, the effect image display device 157 displays a second display (stop result display (stopped minor winnings display, XX coins obtained display, XX bonus display, updated display (number of credits, number of games, number of ATs remaining)), etc.), and the speakers 272, 277 output a second sound (effect corresponding to the second display), and the various lamps 420 are in a second light emission state (effect corresponding to the second display). Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first state. Then, as the game ends, the state becomes one in which the number of bets required to start the game has not been made (non-betting state).

[Example of operation according to the passage of time from lever operation]
An example of the operation according to the time lapse from the lever operation will be described below with reference to Fig. 273. In Fig. 273, as in Fig. 272, the operations are assumed to be performed in the order of bet operation, lever operation, left stop operation, center stop operation, and right stop operation. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state of detecting the closed state. Note that the explanation of the parts that overlap with the contents explained in Fig. 272 will be omitted.

First, the betting operation and the operation in response to the operation of the start lever 135 are the same as those in FIG. 272.

Next, suppose that time t1 (e.g., 1 minute) has passed since the start lever was operated without any stop operation. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, but in addition to this display, messages such as "More than time t1 has passed", "Reel is spinning", and "Please stop the reels" (hereinafter, "attention display regarding the reels") are displayed. In addition, the various lamps 420 continue to emit the first light, but the output of the first sound from the speakers 272 and 277 stops. The monitor LED for the lever is in the first mode. In this state, suppose that time t2 (e.g., 5 minutes) has passed since the start lever was operated without any further stop operation. At this time, the message "More than time t1 has passed" on the performance image display device 157 changes to "More than time t2 has passed".

Next, when a left stop operation is performed as the first stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop, but unlike the example in FIG. 272, the first stop sound corresponding to the first stop operation is not output from the speakers 272, 277. Note that the first display and messages "Time t2 or more has elapsed", "Reel spinning", and "Please stop the reel" continue on the performance image display device 157, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode. Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Next, when a middle stop operation is performed as a second stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop, but unlike the example in FIG. 272, the second stop sound corresponding to the second stop operation is not output from the speakers 272, 277. Note that the first display and messages "Time t2 or more has elapsed", "Reel spinning", and "Please stop the reel" continue on the performance image display device 157, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode. Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Finally, when the right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, the messages "Time t2 or more has elapsed", "Reels are spinning", and "Please stop the reels" are cleared, and the game returns to the same state as when the third stop operation in FIG. 272 is performed.

In the above operation, an example was described in which three types of messages were displayed as a warning display regarding the reels, but at least one of these may be displayed without being limited to the above configuration. This warning display regarding the reels may be displayed while overlapping a portion of the first display (e.g., the operation navigation). Also, in the above operation, an example was described in which the warning display regarding the reels is displayed until the third stop operation is performed, but it may be hidden when any of the stop operations are performed.

In addition, in the above operation, an example was described in which the output of the first sound was stopped in conjunction with the warning display regarding the reels, but the volume of the first sound may also be reduced or silenced.

The above configuration allows the player to understand that the reels are still spinning.

[Example of operation when an abnormality occurs in the reel (1)]
An example of the operation when an abnormality occurs in the reels after the lever operation will be described below with reference to FIG. 274. In FIG. 274, it is assumed that the bet operation, the lever operation, and the left stop operation have been performed. Note that the front door 102 is in the closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor is also in the state of detecting the closed state. Note that the explanation of the parts that overlap with the contents explained in FIG. 272 and FIG. 273 will be omitted.

First, the operation in response to the bet operation and the operation of the start lever 135 is the same as in Figures 272 and 273. Furthermore, the lamp provided inside each stop button changes from a first light indication (e.g., red light) to a second light indication (e.g., blue light). This first light indication indicates that the operation of the stop button is not accepted, and the second light indication indicates that the operation of the stop button is accepted.

Next, assume that a time t1 (e.g., one minute) has elapsed since the start lever was operated without a stop operation being performed. The operation at this time is the same as that shown in FIG. 273. Note that the lamps provided inside each stop button continue to display the second light.

Now, let us assume that an abnormality occurs in the reel unit (here, the harness connecting to the main control unit 300 is broken). In this example, all of the reels stop due to the abnormality, and furthermore, the lamps inside each stop button change from the second light-emitting display to the first light-emitting display. At this time, the performance image display device 157 does not execute a display corresponding to the reel abnormality, and continues to display the first display and the messages "Time t1 or more has elapsed", "Reel spinning", and "Please stop the reels". In addition, the various lamps 420 continue to emit light in the first state, and the lever monitor LED is in the first state.

When an abnormality occurs in the reel, the reel sensor cannot detect it properly, so the main control unit 300 determines that there is some kind of abnormality, and the operation of the stop button is not validly accepted. In Figure 274, it is shown that although the left stop operation is performed when an abnormality occurs in the reel, the corresponding action is not executed.

In the above operation, an example was described in which the reel-related warning display continues when the harness connecting the main control unit 300 and the reel unit is disconnected, but the same operation as in the case of a disconnection may also be performed if the harness comes loose or if an abnormality in the reel rotation (including loss of synchronism) occurs.

[Example of operation when an abnormality occurs in the reel (2)]
An example of the operation when an abnormality occurs in the reels after the lever operation will be described below with reference to FIG. 275. In FIG. 275, it is assumed that the bet operation and the lever operation have been performed. Note that the front door 102 is in the closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor is also in the state of detecting the closed state. Note that the explanation of the parts that overlap with the contents explained in FIG. 272 and FIG. 273 will be omitted.

First, the operation in response to the bet operation and the operation of the start lever 135 is the same as in Figures 272 and 273. Furthermore, the lamp provided inside each stop button changes from a first light indication (e.g., red light) to a second light indication (e.g., blue light). This first light indication indicates that the operation of the stop button is not accepted, and the second light indication indicates that the operation of the stop button is accepted.

Now, let us assume that an abnormality occurs in the reel unit (here, the harness connecting to the main control unit 300 is broken). When an abnormality occurs in the reel, the reel sensor cannot detect it normally, so the main control unit 300 determines that there is some kind of abnormality, and the operation of the stop button is not validly accepted. In this example, the abnormality causes all the reels to stop, and furthermore, the lamps provided inside each stop button are shown changing from the second light-emitting display to the first light-emitting display. At this time, the performance image display device 157 does not execute a display corresponding to the reel abnormality, and the first display continues to be displayed. In addition, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light-emitting state. In addition, the lever monitor LED is in the first state.

Next, assume that a time t1 (for example, one minute) has passed since the start lever was operated. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, but in addition to this display, messages such as "Time t1 or more has passed", "Reel spinning", and "Please stop the reels" (attention display regarding the reels) are displayed. Also, the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode, but the output of the first sound from the speakers 272 and 277 stops. The lever monitor LED is in the first mode. Note that the lamps provided inside each stop button continue to be in the first light emission mode.

In the above operation, an example was described in which the reel-related warning display is executed even if the harness connecting the main control unit 300 and the reel unit is disconnected, but the same operation as in the case of a disconnection may also be performed if the harness comes loose or if there is an abnormality in the reel rotation (including loss of synchronism).

[Example of operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit (1)]
An example of the operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit after the lever operation will be described below with reference to Fig. 276. In Fig. 276, it is assumed that the bet operation, the lever operation, and the left stop operation have been performed. Note that the front door 102 is in the closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor is also in the state of detecting the closed state. Note that the explanation of the parts that overlap with the contents explained in Figs. 272 and 273 will be omitted.

First, the operation in response to the bet operation and the operation of the start lever 135 is the same as in Figures 272 and 273. Furthermore, the lamp provided inside each stop button changes from a first light indication (e.g., red light) to a second light indication (e.g., blue light). This first light indication indicates that the operation of the stop button is not accepted, and the second light indication indicates that the operation of the stop button is accepted.

Next, assume that a time t1 (e.g., one minute) has elapsed since the start lever was operated without a stop operation being performed. The operation at this time is the same as that shown in FIG. 273. Note that the lamps provided inside each stop button continue to display the second light.

Now, suppose that an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit (here, the harness connecting to the main control unit 300 is disconnected), and the operation of the stop button cannot be effectively accepted. In this example, it is shown that the abnormality causes the display by the lamps provided inside each stop button to not be displayed (not displayed, for example, turned off). At this time, the performance image display device 157 does not display the information corresponding to the abnormality in the stop button unit, and continues to display the first display and the messages "Time t1 or more has elapsed", "Reel spinning", and "Please stop the reels". In addition, the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode, and the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Figure 276 shows that even though the left stop operation is performed when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit, the corresponding action is not executed.

In the above operation, an example was described in which the reel-related warning display continues if the harness connecting the main control unit 300 and the stop button unit is disconnected, but the same operation may also be performed if the harness becomes unplugged.

[Example of operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit (2)]
An example of the operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit after the lever operation will be described below with reference to Fig. 277. In Fig. 277, it is assumed that the bet operation and the lever operation have been performed. Note that the front door 102 is in the closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor is also in the state of detecting the closed state. Note that the explanation of the parts that overlap with the contents explained in Figs. 272 and 273 will be omitted.

First, the operation in response to the bet operation and the operation of the start lever 135 is the same as in Figures 272 and 273. Furthermore, the lamp provided inside each stop button changes from a first light indication (e.g., red light) to a second light indication (e.g., blue light). This first light indication indicates that the operation of the stop button is not accepted, and the second light indication indicates that the operation of the stop button is accepted.

Now, suppose that an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit (here, the harness connecting to the main control unit 300 is disconnected), and the operation of the stop button cannot be effectively accepted. In this example, it is shown that the abnormality causes the display by the lamps provided inside each stop button to not be displayed (not displayed, for example, turned off). At this time, the performance image display device 157 does not display a message corresponding to the abnormality in the stop button unit, and the first display continues to be displayed. In addition, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode. In addition, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Next, assume that a time t1 (for example, one minute) has passed since the start lever was operated. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, but in addition to this display, messages such as "Time t1 or more has passed", "Reel spinning", and "Please stop the reels" (attention display regarding the reels) are displayed. Also, the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode, but the output of the first sound from the speakers 272, 277 stops. The lever monitor LED is in the first mode. Note that the lamps provided inside each stop button continue to be in the non-display state.

In the above operation, an example was described in which the reel-related warning display is executed even if the harness connecting the main control unit 300 and the stop button unit is disconnected, but the same operation as in the case of a disconnection may also be performed if the harness becomes unplugged.

[Example of operation when reel effects are executed]
An example of the operation when a reel effect is executed will be described below with reference to FIG. 278. In FIG. 278, after a bet operation and a lever operation, a reel effect is executed, and further operations up to a left stop operation, a center stop operation, and a right stop operation are performed. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state where it detects the closed state. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with the contents explained in FIG. 272 and FIG. 273 will be omitted.

First, the operations performed in response to bet operations are the same as those shown in Figures 272 and 273.

Next, when the start lever 135 is operated, the same operation as in Figures 272 and 273 occurs, and the reels start to spin. However, unlike Figures 272 and 273, the reel spinning at this time is due to a reel effect, not due to the start of the game.

Then, all the reels that were spinning come to a pseudo-stop, and the reel effect ends. At this time, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode. Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

When the reel performance ends, the reels start to spin. Now, let us say that time t1 (for example, one minute) has passed since the end of this reel performance without any stopping operation. At this time, the performance image display device 157 continues to display the first display, but in addition to this display, messages such as "Time t1 or more has passed", "Reel spinning", and "Please stop the reels" (attention display regarding the reels) are displayed. Also, the various lamps 420 continue to emit the first light, but the output of the first sound from the speakers 272 and 277 stops. The monitor LED for the lever is in the first mode. Note that when time t2 (for example, five minutes) has passed since the end of the reel performance, the message "Time t1 or more has passed" on the performance image display device 157 changes to "Time t2 or more has passed" as in FIG. 273.

Next, when a left stop operation is performed as the first stop operation, and then a center stop operation is performed as the second stop operation, the corresponding reel will be stopped as in FIG. 273. Then, the reel-related warning message will continue to be displayed, and the status of the various lamps 420 and the lever monitor LED will continue. Then, when a right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, the reel-related warning message will be cleared, and the state will be the same as when the third stop operation in FIG. 272 was performed.

Figure 273 describes an example in which a warning message regarding the reels is displayed based on the time elapsed from the lever operation (or the start of play), but Figure 278 differs in that a warning message regarding the reels is displayed based on the time elapsed from the end of the reel presentation (or the start of play). As in the above example, if the reel presentation ends at time t3 (e.g., 15 seconds) after the lever operation, the warning message regarding the reels will be displayed at time t1 + t3 after the lever operation.

[Example of operation when a pseudo game is executed (1)]
An example of the operation when a pseudo game is executed will be described below with reference to FIG. 279. In FIG. 279, after a bet operation and a lever operation, a pseudo game is executed, and further operations up to a left stop operation, a center stop operation, and a right stop operation are performed. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state of detecting the closed state. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with the contents explained in FIG. 272 and FIG. 273 will be omitted.

First, the operations performed in response to bet operations are the same as those shown in Figures 272 and 273.

Next, when the start lever 135 is operated, the same operation as in Figures 272 and 273 occurs, and the reels start to spin. However, unlike Figures 272 and 273, the rotation of the reels at this time is due to the start of a pseudo game, not the start of a game.

In a simulated game, the reels can be stopped by the player's stopping operation, but in this case, the player does not perform the stopping operation, and all the reels that were spinning come to a pseudo-stop as time t3 has passed, ending the simulated game. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode. Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

When the pseudo game ends, the reels start to spin. Now, let us say that time t1 (for example, one minute) has passed since the end of this pseudo game without any stopping operation. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, but in addition to this display, messages such as "Time t1 or more has passed", "Reel spinning", and "Please stop the reels" (attention display regarding the reels) are displayed. Also, the various lamps 420 continue to emit the first light, but the output of the first sound from the speakers 272 and 277 stops. The monitor LED for the lever is in the first mode. Note that when time t2 (for example, five minutes) has passed since the end of the pseudo game, the message "Time t1 or more has passed" on the performance image display device 157 changes to "Time t2 or more has passed" as in FIG. 273.

Next, when a left stop operation is performed as the first stop operation, and then a center stop operation is performed as the second stop operation, the corresponding reel will be stopped as in FIG. 273. Then, the reel-related warning message will continue to be displayed, and the status of the various lamps 420 and the lever monitor LED will continue. Then, when a right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, the reel-related warning message will be cleared, and the state will be the same as when the third stop operation in FIG. 272 was performed.

Figure 273 describes an example in which a warning message regarding the reels is displayed based on the time elapsed from the lever operation (or the start of play), but Figure 279 differs in that a warning message regarding the reels is displayed based on the time elapsed from the end of the simulated game (or the start of play). As in the above example, if the simulated game ends at time t3 (e.g., 15 seconds) from the lever operation, the warning message regarding the reels will be displayed at time t1 + t3 from the lever operation.

[Example of operation when a pseudo game is executed (2)]
An example of the operation when a pseudo game is executed will be described below with reference to FIG. 280. In FIG. 280, after a bet operation and a lever operation, a pseudo game is executed, and further operations up to a left stop operation, a center stop operation, and a right stop operation are performed. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state of detecting the closed state. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with the contents explained in FIG. 272 and FIG. 273 will be omitted.

First, the operations performed in response to bet operations are the same as those shown in Figures 272 and 273.

Next, when the start lever 135 is operated, the same operation as in Figures 272 and 273 occurs, and the reels start to spin. However, unlike Figures 272 and 273, the rotation of the reels at this time is due to the start of a pseudo game, not the start of a game.

In the simulated game, when time t3 has elapsed, all the reels that were spinning come to a pseudo-stop and the simulated game ends. However, in this example, it is assumed that the player has stopped all the reels before time t3 has elapsed (when time t4 has elapsed), and the simulated game ends. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light-emitting state. Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first state.

When the pseudo game ends, the reels start to spin. Now, let us say that time t1 (for example, one minute) has passed since the end of this pseudo game without any stopping operation. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, but in addition to this display, messages such as "Time t1 or more has passed", "Reel spinning", and "Please stop the reels" (attention display regarding the reels) are displayed. Also, the various lamps 420 continue to emit the first light, but the output of the first sound from the speakers 272 and 277 stops. The monitor LED for the lever is in the first mode. Note that when time t2 (for example, five minutes) has passed since the end of the pseudo game, the message "Time t1 or more has passed" on the performance image display device 157 changes to "Time t2 or more has passed" as in FIG. 273.

Next, when a left stop operation is performed as the first stop operation, and then a center stop operation is performed as the second stop operation, the corresponding reel will be stopped as in FIG. 273. Then, the reel-related warning message will continue to be displayed, and the status of the various lamps 420 and the lever monitor LED will continue. Then, when a right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, the reel-related warning message will be cleared, and the state will be the same as when the third stop operation in FIG. 272 was performed.

Figure 273 describes an example in which a warning message regarding the reels is displayed based on the time elapsed from the lever operation (or the start of play), but Figure 280 differs in that a warning message regarding the reels is displayed based on the time elapsed from the end of the simulated game (or the start of play). As in the above example, if the simulated game ends at time t4 (e.g., 5 seconds) after the lever operation, the warning message regarding the reels will be displayed at time t1 + t4 after the lever operation.

[Example of operation when power is restored during gameplay]
An example of the operation when a power outage occurs during a game will be described below with reference to FIG. 281. In FIG. 281, a power outage occurs after a bet operation and a lever operation, and then the power is restored. Note that the front door 102 is closed throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor also detects the closed state. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with those explained in FIG. 272 and FIG. 273 will be omitted.

First, the betting operation and the operation in response to the operation of the start lever 135 are the same as those shown in Figures 272 and 273.

Next, suppose that a power outage occurs when time t5 (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the start lever was operated without a stop operation being performed. In the state immediately before this power outage, the performance image display device 157 continues to display the first display, the various lamps 420 continue to emit the first light, and the speakers 272 and 277 continue to output the first sound. The lever monitor LED is in the first state.

After the power is restored, each control unit of the slot machine 100 executes a recovery process to return to the state before the power failure. This recovery process is executed by each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500, but the recovery process of the main control unit 300 is completed first, and the reels start spinning again. In addition, until the recovery process of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is completed, the performance image display device 157 displays a display indicating that the recovery process is in progress, the speakers 272 and 277 output the sound when the power is turned on, and the various lamps 420 are in the light-emitting state when the power is turned on. The monitor LED for the lever is in the first state. Then, when the recovery process of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is completed after a time t6 (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the power was restored, the performance image display device 157 executes a demo display instead of the first display. In addition, the sound when the power is turned on that was output by the speakers 272 and 277 ends, and the various lamps 420 are turned off. In addition, because the performance image display device 157 executes a demo display, so-called operation navigation is not displayed. However, this operation navigation may be performed using the illumination state of the stop button, or may be displayed on a 7-segment display or the like.

In addition, with regard to the first display, the display according to the operation of the game progress, and the corresponding effects that would be executed if there was no power interruption, parts of these displays and effects may be executed sequentially in response to the operation of the game progress after power is restored. For example, when an operation navigation suggesting a certain operation condition is not displayed (a demo display is being executed), and an operation according to this operation condition is performed, part of the first display may be executed, or various lamps 420 may be operated without outputting a sound corresponding to a stop operation. Note that by executing the first display and the corresponding effects at the timing of the start of a new game, it is possible to return to the normal state from this game.

Next, let us assume that time t1 (e.g., 1 minute) has passed since the start lever was operated without any stop operation, excluding the time due to power failure. At this time, the demo display continues on the performance image display device 157, but messages such as "Time t1 or more has passed", "Reel is spinning", and "Please stop the reel" (attention display regarding the reel) are displayed to cover part of this display. In addition, the speakers 272 and 277 continue to be in a state where no sound is output, and the various lamps 420 continue to be turned off. Note that the lever monitor LED is in the first mode. In this state, let us assume that time t2 (e.g., 5 minutes, excluding the time due to power failure) has passed since the start lever was operated without any further stop operation. At this time, the message "Time t1 or more has passed" on the performance image display device 157 changes to "Time t2 or more has passed".

In the above example, the warning display for the reel is displayed while the demo display is on, but if the timing after the above time t1 has elapsed is during the recovery display, the warning display for the reel may be displayed as in the demo display, or the warning display for the reel may be displayed after the recovery display has ended. Also, if the warning display for the reel was displayed before the power outage, the warning display for the reel may be displayed while the recovery display is on after power is restored, or the warning display for the reel may be displayed after the recovery display has ended. Also, in the above example, the time due to the power outage was excluded even if the time due to the power outage exceeded the time t1, but an RTC (real-time clock) may be installed to include the time due to the power outage.

In the above example, the passage of time t1 is determined based on the timing when the start lever is operated, but the passage of time t1 may be determined based on the timing when power is restored and the warning display regarding the reels may be executed. In this case, there may be a delay from the passage of time t1 due to the recovery process.

[Technical idea corresponding to the embodiment of the warning display regarding the reel]
Below, the technical ideas described in the explanation of Figures 272 to 281 will be described with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
Notification means (e.g., a performance image display device 157);
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) that are rotated;
A stop button (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) that accepts a stop operation to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means is a means capable of executing a predetermined notification (e.g., a warning display regarding the reel) regarding the reel being rotated when a predetermined time has elapsed while the reel is being rotated (e.g., see FIG. 273 ),
The predetermined notification may be executed even if the reel stops without the stop operation before the predetermined time has elapsed while the reel is rotating (for example, see FIG. 275).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When this gaming machine issues a specific notification while the reels are stopped, this is not normal behavior, so gaming facility staff may be able to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine through the player.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
During the execution of the predetermined notification, even if the reel stops without the stop operation, the predetermined notification may continue to be executed (for example, see FIG. 274).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When this gaming machine issues a specific notification while the reels are stopped, this is not normal behavior, so gaming facility staff may be able to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine through the player.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for not executing a notification corresponding to the stop of the reel when the predetermined notification is executed in a state in which the reel is stopped without the stop operation (for example, see FIGS. 274 and 275).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine may be able to make the player aware of abnormalities while drawing attention to specific alerts.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The predetermined notification is a reel-related attention notification (for example, see FIG. 273 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can notify the player or a visiting store attendant that the reels are spinning too much and prompt them to stop them.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The plurality of reels are capable of executing reel effects,
The notification means is a means that may not execute the predetermined notification while the reel performance is being executed (for example, see FIGS. 278 to 280 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can ensure that the reel performance is not interrupted by specified notifications.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing the predetermined notification based on the fact that the predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the reel performance and while the reel is spinning (for example, see FIGS. 278 to 280 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can notify the player or a visiting store attendant that the reels are spinning too much and prompt them to stop them.

Also, in the above explanation,
Notification means (e.g., a performance image display device 157);
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) that are rotated;
A stop button (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) that accepts a stop operation to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means is a means capable of executing a predetermined notification (e.g., a warning display regarding the reel) regarding the reel being rotated when a predetermined time has elapsed while the reel is being rotated (e.g., see FIG. 273 ),
There is a case where the predetermined notification is executed in a state where the stop operation is invalid (for example, see FIG. 277 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this type of gaming machine, if the stop operation is disabled and a specified notification is issued, the player is unable to respond, so gaming facility staff may be able to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine through the player.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The predetermined notification may be executed even if the reel stops without the stop operation before the predetermined time has elapsed while the reel is rotating (see FIG. 275 for example).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When this gaming machine issues a specific notification while the reels are stopped, this is not normal behavior, so gaming facility staff may be able to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine through the player.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
During the execution of the predetermined notification, even if the reel stops without the stop operation, the predetermined notification may continue to be executed (for example, see FIG. 274).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When this gaming machine issues a specific notification while the reels are stopped, this is not normal behavior, so gaming facility staff may be able to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine through the player.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for not executing a notification corresponding to the fact that the stop operation is in an invalid state when the predetermined notification is being executed in a state in which the stop operation is invalid (for example, see FIGS. 276 and 277 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine may be able to make the player aware of abnormalities while drawing attention to specific alerts.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The predetermined notification is a reel-related attention notification (for example, see FIG. 273 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can notify the player or a visiting store attendant that the reels are spinning too much and prompt them to stop them.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The plurality of reels are capable of executing reel effects,
The notification means is a means that may not execute the predetermined notification while the reel performance is being executed (for example, see FIGS. 278 to 280 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can ensure that the reel performance is not interrupted by specified notifications.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing the predetermined notification based on the fact that the predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the reel performance and while the reel is spinning (for example, see FIGS. 278 to 280 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can notify the player or a visiting store attendant that the reels are spinning too much and prompt them to stop them.

Also, in the above explanation,
Notification means (e.g., a performance image display device 157);
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) that are rotated;
A stop button (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) that accepts a stop operation to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means is a means capable of executing a predetermined notification (e.g., a warning display regarding the reel) regarding the reel being rotated when a predetermined time has elapsed while the reel is being rotated (e.g., see FIG. 273 ),
If the power is cut off before the predetermined time has elapsed while the multiple reels are rotating, the predetermined notification may be executed at a time different from the time when the predetermined time has elapsed after the power is restored (for example, see FIG. 281).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can issue a specified notification after power is restored.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The predetermined notification may be executed even if the reel stops without the stop operation before the predetermined time has elapsed while the reel is rotating (for example, see FIG. 275).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When this gaming machine issues a specific notification while the reels are stopped, this is not normal behavior, so gaming facility staff may be able to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine through the player.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
During the execution of the predetermined notification, even if the reel stops without the stop operation, the predetermined notification may continue to be executed (for example, see FIG. 274).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When this gaming machine issues a specific notification while the reels are stopped, this is not normal behavior, so gaming facility staff may be able to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine through the player.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The predetermined notification may be executed before the predetermined time has elapsed since the power was restored (for example, in FIG. 281, the time t1 is determined as the sum of the elapsed time t5 before the power failure and the elapsed time t6 after the power was restored, so that the warning display regarding the reel is displayed before the time t1 has elapsed after the power was restored).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The predetermined notification may be executed after the predetermined time has elapsed since the power was restored (for example, in the modified example of FIG. 281, regardless of the elapsed time t5 before the power failure, a warning display regarding the reel is displayed after a time t1 has elapsed after the power is restored, and a delay occurs for the recovery process).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The predetermined notification is a reel-related attention notification (for example, see FIG. 273 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can notify the player or a visiting store attendant that the reels are spinning too much and prompt them to stop them.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The plurality of reels are capable of executing reel effects,
The notification means is a means that may not execute the predetermined notification while the reel performance is being executed (for example, see FIGS. 278 to 280 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can ensure that the reel performance is not interrupted by specified notifications.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing the predetermined notification based on the fact that the predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the reel performance and while the reel is spinning (for example, see FIGS. 278 to 280 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can notify the player or a visiting store attendant that the reels are spinning too much and prompt them to stop them.

<Operation when an abnormality occurs in the connection between boards>
Next, an example of the operation when an abnormality occurs in the connection between the boards of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figs. 282 and 283. In the following description, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations already described in other embodiments (e.g. Figs. 17 to 32), and the description will be omitted. In addition, for configurations that contradict the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and reference numerals of this example will take precedence.

The above-mentioned FIG. 189 shows an example of boards arranged inside the slot machine 100 and the harnesses that connect them. For example, the main control board 300B on which the main control unit 300 is provided is connected to the relay board RB1 by the upstream harness HB1, and this relay board RB1 is further connected to the lever unit 135U (equipped with the start lever 135), the stop button unit 136U (equipped with the stop buttons 137-139), the bet button unit 132U (equipped with the bet buttons 130, 132, and the settlement button 134), the selector unit, and the door sensor by the downstream harnesses HA1-HA5.

The relay board RB1 is equipped with an IC for determining the status of each device connected by the downstream harnesses HA1 to HA5, and the status of each device determined by this IC is transmitted to the main control board 300B.

Figure 282 shows an example of the flow of operations when an abnormality occurs while no game is being played.

Figure 282 shows that the various harnesses are normally connected, the various operating means are not operated, and the reels are stopped, indicating that no game is being played (demo display in progress). Furthermore, the performance image display device 157 (display means) is executing a demo display, normal background music is being output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in their normal light emission mode. In addition, the door sensor monitor LED provided on the board of the main control unit 300 is in the first mode (lighting or turning off, a mode different from the second mode described below). This door sensor monitor LED goes into the second mode when the door sensor detects an open state, and is provided to check the state of the front door 102. Note that the door sensor monitor LED is not limited to being provided on the board of the main control unit 300, and may be provided, for example, on the relay board between the door sensor and the main control unit.

Now, suppose that the downstream harness HA5 connecting the door sensor and the relay board RB1 is broken. FIG. 282 shows that the door sensor and the relay board RB1 are not connected (disconnected). The relay board RB1 cannot grasp the state of the door sensor due to the disconnection of the downstream harness HA5. In this case, in this embodiment, the same information as when the door sensor detects an open state is sent to the main control unit 300. In FIG. 282, the door sensor detects a closed state, but the performance image display device 157 (display means) is executing a door open error display, a door open error sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and various lamps 420 are in a door open error light emission mode. In addition, the door sensor monitor LED provided on the board of the main control unit 300 is in the second mode. In this configuration, even though the front door 102 is closed, an alarm is issued to indicate that the front door 102 is open, allowing the driver to know that some abnormality has occurred in the mechanism of the front door 102, and may allow the driver to notice an abnormality in the downstream harness HA5.

Figure 283 shows an example of the flow of operations when an abnormality occurs while no game is being played.

Figure 283 shows that no game is being played (demo display in progress), just like Figure 282.

Now, suppose that the upstream harness HB1 connecting the relay board RB1 and the main control board 300B is disconnected. Figure 283 shows that the relay board RB1 and the main control board 300B are not connected (disconnected). The relay board RB1 knows the status of each device connected by the downstream harnesses HA1 to HA5, but since the upstream harness HB1 is disconnected, it cannot transmit the status of each device to the main control board 300B. In this case, in this embodiment, no new information is transmitted from the relay board RB1, so no operation is performed and no error notification is executed. Figure 283 shows that no change occurs even if the relay board RB1 and the main control board 300B are not connected (disconnected). Note that Figure 283 shows an example during demo display, but if the upstream harness HB1 is disconnected during a period other than when the power is turned on (for example, in a betting state or during play (reels are spinning)), no operation is performed as described above.

If the power is turned on while the upstream harness HB1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 will detect this disconnection state through processing at power-on and will notify of a board connection error. In FIG. 283, when the power is turned off while the upstream harness HB1 is disconnected and then turned on again, a board connection error display is executed on the performance image display device 157 (display means), a board connection error sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in a board connection error light-emitting state.

In the above configuration, if the upstream harness HB1 is disconnected, various operations cannot be accepted, so it is possible to know that some kind of abnormality has occurred. Then, when the power is turned back on, it may be possible to identify the location of the abnormality by checking whether a board connection error is reported.

[Technical idea corresponding to the embodiment when an abnormality occurs in the connection between the boards]
The technical ideas described in the description of Figures 282 to 283 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
Notification means (e.g., a performance image display device 157);
A door sensor;
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
A second substrate (e.g., a relay substrate RB1),
A gaming machine equipped with
the first board is electrically connected to the second board by a first harness (e.g., an upstream harness HB1);
The second board is electrically connected to the door sensor by a second harness (e.g., a downstream harness HA5),
the notification means is means capable of executing a predetermined notification (e.g., a door open error) when the detection state of the door sensor changes from a closed detection state to an open detection state,
The notification means is a means capable of executing the predetermined notification even when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (for example, see FIG. 282 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

At this gaming machine, an arcade attendant may be able to notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the detection state of the door sensor is the closed detection state and the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the predetermined notification is executed (for example, see FIG. 282).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this type of gaming machine, the door is closed, which may allow the gaming store staff to notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the same signal as that when the detection state of the door sensor changes from the closed detection state to the open detection state is output from the second board to the first board (for example, see the description, "In this case, in this embodiment, the same information as that when the door sensor detects the open state is transmitted to the main control unit 300.").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

At this gaming machine, an arcade attendant may be able to notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a monitor LED (e.g., a monitor LED for a door sensor) that becomes a predetermined state (e.g., the second state in FIG. 282 ) when the detection state of the door sensor changes from the closed detection state to the open detection state;
The monitor LED is an LED that is in the predetermined state when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (for example, see FIG. 282 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing the predetermined notification regardless of the connection state of the first harness (for example, the connection state of the upstream harness HB1 is unrelated to the door error notification),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it may be possible to notice whether there is an abnormality in the first harness or the second harness.

Also, in the above explanation,
Notification means (e.g., a performance image display device 157);
A door sensor;
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
A second substrate (e.g., a relay substrate RB1),
A gaming machine equipped with
the first board is electrically connected to the second board by a first harness (e.g., an upstream harness HB1);
The second board is electrically connected to the door sensor by a second harness (e.g., a downstream harness HA5),
the notification means is means capable of executing a predetermined notification (e.g., a door open error) when the detection state of the door sensor changes from a closed detection state to an open detection state,
The notification means is a means capable of executing the predetermined notification even when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (for example, see FIG. 282 ),
The notification means is a means capable of executing a notification (e.g., a board connection error) different from the predetermined notification when the first harness is in a disconnected state upon power-on (see, for example, FIG. 283 ),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

At this gaming machine, the gaming store staff may notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness. Also, the gaming store staff may notice that there is an abnormality in the first harness.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the detection state of the door sensor is the closed detection state and the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the predetermined notification is executed (for example, see FIG. 282).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this type of gaming machine, the door is closed, which may allow the gaming store staff to notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the same signal as that when the detection state of the door sensor changes from the closed detection state to the open detection state is output from the second board to the first board (for example, see the description, "In this case, in this embodiment, the same information as that when the door sensor detects the open state is transmitted to the main control unit 300.").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

At this gaming machine, an arcade attendant may be able to notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a monitor LED (e.g., a monitor LED for a door sensor) that becomes a predetermined state (e.g., the second state in FIG. 282 ) when the detection state of the door sensor changes from the closed detection state to the open detection state;
The monitor LED is an LED that is in the predetermined state when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (for example, see FIG. 282 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing the predetermined notification regardless of the connection state of the first harness (for example, the connection state of the upstream harness HB1 is unrelated to the door error notification),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it may be possible to notice whether there is an abnormality in the first harness or the second harness.

<Configurations with unused screw holes>
Next, an example of the configuration of the board of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figures 284 and 285. In the following description, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations already described in other embodiments (e.g., Figures 17 to 32), and the description will be omitted. In addition, for configurations that contradict the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and reference numerals of this example will take precedence.

Figure 284 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control board 500B, which corresponds to the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100. This control board 500B is configured by overlapping a second board CB2 on a portion of a first board CB1. Figure 285 is a diagram showing the first board CB1. In Figure 285, the area where the second board CB2 overlaps is shown by a dotted line.

The control board 500B is provided with components CM1 to CM14 that make up the board. Of these, components CM1 to CM13 are provided on the first board CB1, and component CM14 is provided on the second board CB2. Note that component CM1 is a CPU, component CM13 is a VDP, components CM12 and CM14 are ROM, components CM8 and CM11 are ICs, components CM2 and CM9 are resistors, components CM7 and CM10 are capacitors, and components CM3 to CM6 are LEDs. Of these, components CM5 to CM9 are provided in positions that are hidden from view by the second board CB2.

In addition to the above-mentioned components CM to CM13, the first board CB1 is provided with connectors CN1 and CN2, one of which, connector CN2, is used to connect to the second board CB2. The second board CB2 has screw holes SH1 to SH4 formed at its four corners, two of which are fixed to the first board CB1 with screws and spacers. Figure 284 shows that the second board CB2, which is connected to the first board CB1 with the connector CN2, is screwed in place at two screw holes SH1 and SH2. Note that a spacer is used to ensure a distance between the first board CB1 and the second board CB2.

Of the screw holes SH1 to SH4 formed in the second board CB2, two screw holes SH3 and SH4 are unused screw holes that are not used to fasten the first board CB1, and a part of the first board CB1 can be seen from these screw holes. In Figures 284 and 285, the range VA that can be seen from the screw hole SH3 is shown by a dotted line. For the components CM1, CM2, CM4 to CM6 in this range VA, it can be confirmed from the screw hole SH3 whether there is any tampering. In particular, it is possible to confirm the components CM5 and CM6 below the second board CB2, even though they are difficult to see due to the second board CB2. Note that this is not limited to components, and the markings on the board can also be confirmed in the same way.

In the slot machine 100, the board may be housed in a case to prevent fraud. Although such a case is made of a material that allows the inside to be seen (for example, a transparent material), it may be difficult to see due to stickers or notes on the case. For example, in Figures 284 and 285, if a sticker on the case covers the area NA, the state of this area NA becomes difficult to see. If unused screw holes are provided as described above, an area that is difficult to see for some reason can be seen from a different angle, and it is possible to check whether there is any fraud. In the example of Figure 285, the parts CM1, CM2, and CM4 in area NA can be confirmed from screw hole SH3.

The first board CB1 also has unused screw holes SH5 and SH6. The presence of these unused screw holes makes it difficult to notice that the unused screw holes SH3 and SH4 on the second board CB2 are being used to verify components. In other words, it makes it difficult for a would-be tamperer to be wary of the unused screw holes SH3 and SH4 on the second board CB2.

[Technical idea corresponding to the embodiment in which there are unused screw holes]
Below, the technical ideas described in the description of Figures 284 to 285 will be described with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
A first substrate (e.g., a first substrate CB1);
A second substrate (e.g., a second substrate CB2) disposed in a position covering a portion of the first substrate;
A gaming machine equipped with
The second substrate has a plurality of screw holes (e.g., screw holes SH1 to SH4),
the second substrate is fixed to the first substrate using a first screw hole (e.g., screw holes SH1, SH2) among the plurality of screw holes,
A second screw hole (e.g., screw holes SH3 and SH4) of the plurality of screw holes is in an unused state.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the gaming store staff can check the components and displays of the first board located below the second board through the second screw hole.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Among the components or indications arranged on the first board, a part of those located under the second board (e.g., components CM5 and CM6) is visible through the second screw hole.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the components and displays underneath the second board can be seen through the second screw hole.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Among the components or indications arranged on the first board, some of those that are not located under the second board (e.g., components CM1, CM2, CM4) are visible through the second screw hole.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, it may be possible to check components or displays that are not under the second board through the second screw hole.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first substrate and the second substrate are disposed within a transparent case;
The case has an area where the inside can be seen and an area where the inside cannot be seen (for example, an area covered with a seal),
Among the components or indications arranged on the first board, some of those that are not located under the second board and are located directly under the invisible area (e.g., components CM1, CM2, and CM4 in the area NA) are visible from the visible area through the second screw hole.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, areas that are not visible due to the case may be visible through the second screw hole.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first substrate has an unused screw hole at a position not covered by the second substrate;
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it less likely that players will feel wary of the second screw hole.

[Technical ideas corresponding to other embodiments]
In the above explanation,
A counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300) for updating a count value (e.g., a MY value) relating to a game value from an initial value;
Notification means (for example, the game information display 126, the payout number display 127, the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
A reset switch and
A gaming machine equipped with
The non-game stop state is changed to the game stop state based on the fact that the count value has reached a first value (e.g., 19000) (e.g., Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188),
The notification means is a means for executing a first notification (e.g., a notification that a complete upper limit has been reached) that notifies the game stop state based on the count value reaching the first value (e.g., step S1705 in FIG. 188),
When the power is turned off in the non-playing state and the power is turned on with the reset switch operated, the RWM clear process (for example, step S1009 in FIG. 187) is executed.
When the power is turned off in the game stop state and the power is turned on with the reset switch operated, the RWM clear process is not executed (for example, Yes in step S1006 of FIG. 187, step S1009 is not executed),
The notification means is capable of executing a second notification (for example, see step S1009 in FIG. 187) for notifying the RWM clear,
The notification means does not execute the second notification while executing the first notification (for example, in the game stop state, even if the power is turned on by operating the reset switch, the RWM clear process is not executed, and the first notification is executed instead of the second notification).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, the first notification that play has stopped is not interrupted by the second notification.

Also, in the above explanation,
A counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300) for updating a count value (e.g., a MY value) relating to a game value from an initial value;
Notification means (for example, the game information display 126, the payout number display 127, the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
A reset switch and
A medal count clear switch that cannot be operated by a player;
A gaming machine equipped with
The non-game stop state is changed to the game stop state based on the fact that the count value has reached a first value (e.g., 19000) (e.g., Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188),
The notification means is a means for executing a first notification (e.g., a notification that a complete upper limit has been reached) that notifies the game stop state based on the count value reaching the first value (e.g., step S1705 in FIG. 188),
When the power is turned off in the non-playing state and the power is turned on with the reset switch operated, the RWM clear process (for example, step S1009 in FIG. 187) is executed.
When the power is turned off in the game stop state and the power is turned on with the reset switch operated, the RWM clear process is not executed (for example, Yes in step S1006 of FIG. 187, step S1009 is not executed),
When the power is turned off in the game stop state and the power is turned on with the medal count clear switch operated, medal count clear processing is executed.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows the medal count clearing process to be performed using the medal count clear switch even when play is stopped, improving maintenance for gaming store staff.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300) for updating a count value relating to a game value (e.g., an MY value) from an initial value;
Notification means (for example, the game information display 126, the payout number display 127, the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
A reset switch and
A second counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300);
A determination means (e.g., the main control unit 300);
A gaming machine equipped with
The non-game stop state is changed to the game stop state based on the fact that the count value has reached a first value (e.g., 19000) (e.g., Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188),
The notification means is a means for executing a first notification (e.g., a notification that a complete upper limit has been reached) that notifies the game stop state based on the count value reaching the first value (e.g., step S1705 in FIG. 188),
When the power is turned off in the non-playing state and the power is turned on with the reset switch operated, the RWM clear process (for example, step S1009 in FIG. 187) is executed.
When the power is turned off in the game stop state and the power is turned on with the reset switch operated, the RWM clear process is not executed (for example, Yes in step S1006 of FIG. 187, step S1009 is not executed),
A first section (e.g., a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not notified, and a second section (e.g., an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be notified,
transitioning to the second section based on the establishment of a transition condition in the first section;
transitioning to the first section based on the determination by the determination means that a termination condition is satisfied in the second section;
The second counting means is a means capable of updating an acquisition difference number (e.g., a difference number counter) using a result obtained by subtracting a number of game values used in a game from a number of game values awarded as a result of a game in the second section,
the determining means determines that the termination condition is met when a change in the acquired difference number from an initial value reaches a first value (e.g., 2,400 coins);
the second counting means being a means capable of updating the acquired difference number within a predetermined range;
the predetermined range includes a first range, which is a sum of the initial value and the first value, and a second range, which is different from the first range, with the initial value as a boundary;
The first range is narrower than the second range (for example, see the description of <Regarding the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the arrival determination process>).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows the player to know that play has stopped because the RWM clear process is not executed. Also, even if the player's playing situation causes the winning difference to fall into the second range, there is still room for the player to make up for it.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The determination means is a means for determining whether the termination condition is satisfied using a value from the most significant digit to a specific digit of a bit pattern corresponding to the acquired difference number (for example, see the description of <Regarding the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the reaching determination process>).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can reduce the processing load and data volume compared to when all digits of the second counting means are judged.

Also, in the above explanation,
A counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300) for updating a count value (e.g., a MY value) relating to a game value from an initial value;
Notification means (for example, the game information display 126, the payout number display 127, the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
A reset switch and
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
A light emitting means (e.g., a lever monitor LED);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
The non-game stop state is changed to the game stop state based on the fact that the count value has reached a first value (e.g., 19000) (e.g., Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188),
The notification means is a means for executing a first notification (e.g., a notification that a complete upper limit has been reached) that notifies the game stop state based on the count value reaching the first value (e.g., step S1705 in FIG. 188),
When the power is turned off in the non-playing state and the power is turned on with the reset switch operated, the RWM clear process (for example, step S1009 in FIG. 187) is executed.
When the power is turned off in the game stop state and the power is turned on with the reset switch operated, the RWM clear process is not executed (for example, Yes in step S1006 of FIG. 187, step S1009 is not executed),
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not being operated, the first process may be executed (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
the light emitting means is means for emitting light in different manners depending on whether the first operating unit is operated or not operated when the first harness is in a connected state,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not being operated, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operating unit is operated while the first harness is in the connected state (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the RWM clear process is not executed, so that the player can know that gaming has stopped. Also, during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when replacing the first operating unit at the gaming facility, it may be possible to know that there is a problem with the first harness.

Also, in the above explanation,
A counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300) for updating a count value (e.g., a MY value) relating to a game value from an initial value;
Notification means (for example, the game information display 126, the payout number display 127, the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
A reset switch and
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B, a sub-control board 400B),
a first operation unit (e.g., a stop button unit 136U, a menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a stop button unit harness HA2, a menu button unit harness HC1);
A gaming machine equipped with
The non-game stop state is changed to the game stop state based on the fact that the count value has reached a first value (e.g., 19000) (e.g., Yes in step S1703 of FIG. 188),
The notification means is a means for executing a first notification (e.g., a notification that a complete upper limit has been reached) that notifies the game stop state based on the count value reaching the first value (e.g., step S1705 in FIG. 188),
When the power is turned off in the non-playing state and the power is turned on with the reset switch operated, the RWM clear process (for example, step S1009 in FIG. 187) is executed.
When the power is turned off in the game stop state and the power is turned on with the reset switch operated, the RWM clear process is not executed (for example, Yes in step S1006 of FIG. 187, step S1009 is not executed),
The first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (e.g., a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, a left direction button and an up direction button),
A first process (e.g., stopping the left reel 110, moving the cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operating unit,
A second process (e.g., stopping the center reel 111, moving the cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are being operated, only the first process out of the first process and the second process may be executed (see [Example of Operation When Multiple Harnesses are Disconnected] and [Example of Operation When Menu Button Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the RWM clear process is not executed, which allows the player to know that gaming has stopped. Also, during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when replacing the first operation unit at the gaming parlor, a malfunction in the first harness may cause the first process to be executed, which may allow the player to confirm that the first operation unit is operating normally. Also, if the second process is executed without the first process being executed, a malfunction in the wiring of the first operation unit may be noticed.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first counting means (e.g., a main control unit 300, a first counting means);
A second counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300, a second counting means);
A game machine including a determination means (e.g., a main control unit 300),
A first section (e.g., a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not notified, and a second section (e.g., an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be notified,
transitioning to the second section based on the establishment of a transition condition in the first section;
transitioning to the first section based on the determination by the determination means that a termination condition is satisfied in the second section;
The first counting means is a means capable of updating an acquisition difference number (e.g., a difference number counter) using a result obtained by subtracting a number of game values used in a game from a number of game values awarded as a result of a game in the second section,
the determining means determines that the termination condition is met when a change in the acquired difference number from an initial value reaches a first value (e.g., 2,400 coins);
the first counting means being a means capable of updating the acquired difference number within a predetermined range;
the predetermined range includes a first range, which is a sum of the initial value and the first value, and a second range, which is different from the first range, with the initial value as a boundary;
The first range is narrower than the second range (for example, see the description of <Regarding the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the arrival determination process>),
When the value of the first counting means is updated, the value of the second counting means may also be updated (for example, FIG. 168(a)(1), FIG. 169(4) to (6)),
When a first operation (for example, a first stop left operation) is performed in a first game, the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is updated (for example, FIG. 168(a)(1), FIG. 169(4) to (6)),
When a second operation (for example, a first stop is performed other than a left operation) is performed in the first game, the value of the first counting means is updated and the value of the second counting means is not updated (for example, FIG. 168(a)(2), FIG. 169(7) to (12)),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, even if the winning difference falls within the second range due to the player's playing situation, there is still room for the player to make up for it. Also, since the second counting means does not reflect the second operation, it is possible to grasp the value when the first operation is performed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The determination means is a means for determining whether the termination condition is satisfied using a value from the most significant digit to a specific digit of a bit pattern corresponding to the acquired difference number (for example, see the description of <Regarding the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the reaching determination process>).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can reduce the processing load and data volume compared to when all digits of the second counting means are judged.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300);
A determination means (e.g., the main control unit 300);
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
A light emitting means (e.g., a lever monitor LED);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
A first section (e.g., a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not notified, and a second section (e.g., an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be notified,
transitioning to the second section based on the establishment of a transition condition in the first section;
transitioning to the first section based on the determination by the determination means that a termination condition is satisfied in the second section;
The first counting means is a means capable of updating an acquisition difference number (e.g., a difference number counter) using a result obtained by subtracting a number of game values used in a game from a number of game values awarded as a result of a game in the second section,
the determining means determines that the termination condition is met when a change in the acquired difference number from an initial value reaches a first value (e.g., 2,400 coins);
the first counting means being a means capable of updating the acquired difference number within a predetermined range;
the predetermined range includes a first range, which is a sum of the initial value and the first value, and a second range, which is different from the first range, with the initial value as a boundary;
The first range is narrower than the second range (for example, see the description of <Regarding the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the arrival determination process>),
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not operated, the first process may be executed (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
the light emitting means is means for emitting light in different manners depending on whether the first operating unit is operated or not operated when the first harness is in a connected state,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not being operated, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operating unit is operated while the first harness is in the connected state (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, even if the winning difference falls within the second range due to the player's playing situation, there is still room for the player to make up for it. Also, during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when replacing the first operating unit at the gaming facility, it may be possible to detect a malfunction of the first harness.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The determination means is a means for determining whether the termination condition is satisfied using a value from the most significant digit to a specific digit of a bit pattern corresponding to the acquired difference number (for example, see the description of <Regarding the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the reaching determination process>).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can reduce the processing load and data volume compared to when all digits of the second counting means are judged.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300);
A determination means (e.g., the main control unit 300);
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B, a sub-control board 400B),
A first operation unit (e.g., a stop button unit 136U, a menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a stop button unit harness HA2, a menu button unit harness HC1),
A first section (e.g., a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not notified, and a second section (e.g., an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be notified,
transitioning to the second section based on the establishment of a transition condition in the first section;
transitioning to the first section based on the determination by the determination means that a termination condition is satisfied in the second section;
The first counting means is a means capable of updating an acquisition difference number (e.g., a difference number counter) using a result obtained by subtracting a number of game values used in a game from a number of game values awarded as a result of a game in the second section,
the determining means determines that the termination condition is met when a change in the acquired difference number from an initial value reaches a first value (e.g., 2,400 coins);
the first counting means being a means capable of updating the acquired difference number within a predetermined range;
the predetermined range includes a first range, which is a sum of the initial value and the first value, and a second range, which is different from the first range, with the initial value as a boundary;
The first range is narrower than the second range (for example, see the description of <Regarding the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the arrival determination process>).
The first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (e.g., a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, a left direction button and an up direction button),
A first process (e.g., stopping the left reel 110, moving the cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operating unit,
A second process (e.g., stopping the center reel 111, moving the cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are being operated, only the first process out of the first process and the second process may be executed (see [Example of Operation When Multiple Harnesses are Disconnected] and [Example of Operation When Menu Button Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, even if the winning difference falls into the second range due to the player's playing situation, there is still room for the player to make up for it. Furthermore, during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when the first operation unit is replaced at the gaming parlor, a malfunction in the first harness may cause the first process to be executed, which may allow confirmation that the first operation unit is functioning normally. Furthermore, if the second process is executed without the first process being executed, a malfunction in the wiring of the first operation unit may be noticed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The determination means is a means for determining whether the termination condition is satisfied using a value from the most significant digit to a specific digit of a bit pattern corresponding to the acquired difference number (for example, see the description of <Regarding the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the reaching determination process>).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can reduce the processing load and data volume compared to when all digits of the second counting means are judged.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300);
A determination means (e.g., the main control unit 300);
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B, a sub-control board 400B),
A first operation unit (e.g., a stop button unit 136U, a menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a stop button unit harness HA2, a menu button unit harness HC1),
A first section (e.g., a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not notified, and a second section (e.g., an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be notified,
transitioning to the second section based on the establishment of a transition condition in the first section;
transitioning to the first section based on the determination by the determination means that a termination condition is satisfied in the second section;
The first counting means is a means capable of updating an acquisition difference number (e.g., a difference number counter) using a result obtained by subtracting a number of game values used in a game from a number of game values awarded as a result of a game in the second section,
the determining means determines that the termination condition is met when a change in the acquired difference number from an initial value reaches a first value (e.g., 2,400 coins);
the first counting means being a means capable of updating the acquired difference number within a predetermined range;
the predetermined range includes a first range, which is a sum of the initial value and the first value, and a second range, which is different from the first range, with the initial value as a boundary;
The first range is narrower than the second range (for example, see the description of <Regarding the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the arrival determination process>),
The first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (e.g., a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, a left direction button and an up direction button),
A first process (e.g., stopping the left reel 110, moving the cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operating unit,
A second process (e.g., stopping the center reel 111, moving the cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are being operated, only the first process out of the first process and the second process may be executed (see [Example of Operation When Multiple Harnesses are Disconnected] and [Example of Operation When Menu Button Harness is Disconnected]).
the first operation unit is a first direction button,
the second operation unit is a second directional button;
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, even if the winning difference falls into the second range due to the player's playing situation, there is still room for the player to make up for it. Furthermore, during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when the first operation unit is replaced at the gaming parlor, a malfunction in the first harness may cause the first process to be executed, which may allow confirmation that the first operation unit is functioning normally. Furthermore, if the second process is executed without the first process being executed, a malfunction in the wiring of the first operation unit may be noticed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The determination means is a means for determining whether the termination condition is satisfied using a value from the most significant digit to a specific digit of a bit pattern corresponding to the acquired difference number (for example, see the description of <Regarding the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the reaching determination process>).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can reduce the processing load and data volume compared to when all digits of the second counting means are judged.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300);
A determination means (e.g., the main control unit 300);
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B, a sub-control board 400B),
A first operation unit (e.g., a menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a menu button unit harness HC1),
A first section (e.g., a non-advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not notified, and a second section (e.g., an advantageous section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be notified,
transitioning to the second section based on the establishment of a transition condition in the first section;
transitioning to the first section based on the determination by the determination means that a termination condition is satisfied in the second section;
The first counting means is a means capable of updating an acquisition difference number (e.g., a difference number counter) using a result obtained by subtracting a number of game values used in a game from a number of game values awarded as a result of a game in the second section,
the determining means determines that the termination condition is met when a change in the acquired difference number from an initial value reaches a first value (e.g., 2,400 coins);
the first counting means being a means capable of updating the acquired difference number within a predetermined range;
the predetermined range includes a first range, which is a sum of the initial value and the first value, and a second range, which is different from the first range, with the initial value as a boundary;
The first range is narrower than the second range (for example, see the description of <Regarding the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the arrival determination process>).
the first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (e.g., a left direction button and a right direction button);
A first process (e.g., moving a cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (e.g., moving a cursor right) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are being operated, only the first process out of the first process and the second process may be executed (see [Example of Operation When Multiple Harnesses are Disconnected] and [Example of Operation When Menu Button Harness is Disconnected]).
the first operation unit is a first direction button,
the second operation unit is a second directional button,
When the second process is executed after the first process is executed, the state before the first process is executed may be restored.
When the first process is executed after the second process is executed, the state before the second process is executed may be restored.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, even if the winning difference falls into the second range due to the player's playing situation, there is still room for the player to make up for it. Furthermore, during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when the first operation unit is replaced at the gaming parlor, a malfunction in the first harness may cause the first process to be executed, which may allow confirmation that the first operation unit is functioning normally. Furthermore, if the second process is executed without the first process being executed, a malfunction in the wiring of the first operation unit may be noticed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The determination means is a means for determining whether the termination condition is satisfied using a value from the most significant digit to a specific digit of a bit pattern corresponding to the acquired difference number (for example, see the description of <Regarding the initial value of the counter for reducing the load of the reaching determination process>).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can reduce the processing load and data volume compared to when all digits of the second counting means are judged.

The gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines (pachinko machines), reel gaming machines (slot machines), enclosed gaming machines, or medal-less slot machines.

100 slot machine 110-112 reel 113 pattern display window 130-132 bet button 135 start lever 137-139 stop button 157 liquid crystal display device

Claims (1)

A first substrate;
a first operation unit connected to the first board via a first harness;
A gaming machine equipped with
the first operation unit has at least a first operation part , a second operation part , and a third operation part ;
A first process may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
A third process may be executed by operating the third operation unit,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the third operation unit is being operated, the third process may be executed,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while at least the first operating unit and the second operating unit are being operated, only the first process out of the first process and the second process may be executed,
The sound volume may be changed in a first direction when the first operation unit is operated,
When the second operation unit is operated, the volume may change in a second direction,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while at least the first operating unit and the third operating unit are being operated, only the first process out of the first process and the third process may be executed,
After a certain display indicating a minimum volume or a maximum volume is displayed, if the first harness changes from a non-connected state to a connected state while at least the first operating unit and the second operating unit are being operated, the certain display may be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images